Egg Farm Tender Document (Vol 1)

Tender Documents
Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities

on Lot 02008x Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
For ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd
CONTENTS PAGE
VOLUME 1 of 2
Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers CT/1 – CT/6
Form of Tender FT/1 – FT/3
Appendices
Appendix FT/A - List of major plant to be used for the FT/A/1

Works
Appendix FT/B - Schedule of Daywork Rates FT/B/1 – FT/B/7
Appendix FT/C - Schedule of Breakdown of Contractor’s FT/C/1
Rates
Appendix FT/D - Site Staff for the Works FT/D/1
Appendix FT/E - Specimen Form of Performance Bond FT/E/1 – FT/E/3
Appendix FT/F - Deed of Warranty And Indemnity by The FT/F/1 – FT/F/3
Contractor
Appendix FT/G - Deed of Joint Warranty And Indemnity FT/G/1 – FT/G/3
Appendix FT/H - Written Undertaking on Employment of FT/H/1
Foreign Workers
Appendix FT/I - Statement Of Compliance FT/I/1
Appendix FT/J - Novation Agreement (Specimen) FT/J/1 – FT/J/3
Articles and Conditions of Building Contract

(Lump Sum Contact - SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition) Published by SIA)
Appendix to the Conditions of Contract Page 44 - Page 47
Amendments to Conditions of Building Contract Page 48 - Page 53
Specifications
Structural Specifications Refer to
Architectural General Specification Sectional Pages
Architectural Particular Specification
Green Mark Score Sheets 86 Pages
BIM Execution Plan 31 Pages
Layer Egg Farm -Main Contract

(2216\MC\B\TD) i of iii
Tender Documents

CONTENTS PAGE
VOLUME 1 of 2 (CONT’D)
List of Drawings 1 Page
Reference Documents
Soil Investigation Report 502 Pages
Preambles for All Trades P/1 – P/26
Schedule of Rates To be advised
Schedule of Prices Pages
Section 1 – Preliminaries S1/1 – S1/58
Section 2 – P.C. & Provisional Sums S2/1 – S2/8
Section 3 - Earthworks S3/1-S3/4
Section 4 – Main Building Works

Section 4.1 to 4.13 92 Pages
Section 5 – External Road Works S5/1-S5/7
Section 6 – External Road Extension S6/1-S1/4
Final Summary FS/1-FS/2
VOLUME 2 of 2
Mechanical & Electrical Installations Refer to Sectional

Pages
Layer Egg Farm -Main Contract

(2216\MC\B\TD) ii of iii
Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers
Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with
Ancillary Facilities on Lot 02008x Mk 12
At
Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
For
ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd
Tender Documents
(Main Contract)
(Volume 1 )
Employer : ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd
Project Architect : OGP Konsult Pte Ltd
Structural Engineer : OGP Konsult Pte Ltd
M&E Engineer : ELEAD Associates Pte Ltd
Quantity Surveyor : Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte Ltd

Tender For Main Contract
For Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities
Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers
1. Upon the payment of a tender deposit as stated in the email/letter of invitation to

tender, Northcroft Lim Consultants will email the complete set of tender documents
and tender drawings comprising: -
(a) This Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers
(b) Form of Tender with Appendices
(c) Appendix and Amendments to Articles and Conditions of Building Contract

(Lump Sum Contract) (Without Quantities) –First Edition, November 2016
published by the Singapore Institute of Architects (SIA)
(d) Reference Documents
(e) Specifications
(f) Schedule of Rates
(g) Preambles for All Trades
(h) Schedule of Prices
(i) Final Summary
(j) One Set of Tender Drawings
2. Tenderer is required to make a payment for tender deposit as stated in the letter of
invitation to tender or email for the invitation to tender. The tender deposit will be
refunded in full to all unsuccessful tenderer who have submitted a bona fide tender
and returned the documents and drawings complete, in good condition and with all
drawings unmarked.
3. The tender deposit of the successful tenderer will not be refunded. The amount will be
used to defray the cost of drawings and printing charges of the Employer and/or
Consultants.
4. The Tender Documents shall be submitted at two (2) locations and shall be
properly and fully completed, signed and sealed in an envelope marked at the top
left-hand corner:
Private and Confidential

FOR ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd
The Tender submission shall be submitted as per following requirements:
1a) three (3) thumb drives of completed tender submissions (i.e., PRICE &
QUALITY document);
Layer Egg Farm-Main Contract Tender

(2216\MC\B\TD) CT/1
Condition of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers (Cont’d)
1b) One (1) original, two (2) duplicate hard copies of the Form Of Tender A and B,
and Final Summaries For Tender A and B; properly and fully completed and
signed
1c) two (2) thumb drives of “Quality Documents WITHOUT PRICE” including the
Technical data; and clearly label “Quality Documents Without Price
Address to:-
ELLIPSIZ LTD on behalf of

54 SERANGOON NORTH AVENUE 4
#05-02 CYBERHUB NORTH
SINGAPORE (555854)
Attn: Mr Joseph Kang
and to be submitted not later than the date/time stated in the letter of invitation to
tender.
5. The Tender submission shall be submitted as per following requirements at 2nd

location:
2) one (1) hardcopy (i.e., PRICE & QUALITY document), properly and fully
completed and signed
Address to :-
Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte Ltd
7 Maxwell Road, MND Complex
Annexe B, #05-01A
Singapore 069111
Attn : Ms. Jasmine Quek
and to be submitted not later than the date/time stated in the letter of invitation to
tender.
6. The Tenderer must submit a tender based on the completion time as stipulated by
the Employer in the Form of Tender under Basic Tender ‘A’ as specified. The
Tenderer may in addition, submit Alternative Tender ‘B’ based on Tenderer’s own
set time for completion. The proposed period of completion shall not be more than
the Base Tender A’s period.
7. The Form of Tender and Appendices, Schedule of Prices, Final Summary, Schedule of
Rates, Technical datas must be filled in and completed, wherever applicable.
8. Any non-compliance with the requirements of the Tender Documents must be

expressly stated in the Statement of Compliance (Appendix FT/G). Unless
expressly stated, the Tenderer will be deemed to have agreed to all the terms and
conditions of the Tender Requirements.
9. The Tenderer shall examine and read the Tender Documents to satisfy himself that
there are no discrepancies in or divergences in any of the Tender Documents. In the
event that the Tenderer has found any discrepancy or divergence, Tenderer shall
immediately request clarification from the Architect at least FIVE (5) days before
the Closing Date and Time and any bid submitted by the Tenderer shall be deemed
on the basis of such clarification. Failure by the Tenderer to raise any discrepancies
or divergences before tender submission shall result in the Tenderer being deemed
to have waived the right to rely on such discrepancy and/or divergence in its favour.

(2216\MC\B\TD) CT/2
Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers (Cont'd)
10. The Tenderer must submit with the tender a preliminary programme for the
completion of the whole of the Works for Basic Tender ‘A’ and a separate
programme for Alternative Tender ‘B’.
11. The Tenderers are required to submit following “Quality documents” in the same
sequence and same numberings as listed below, with clear page breaks for each of
items:-
1) Completed projects no less than S$30 million for past 3 years (i.e. Oct
2019 – Oct 2022)
2) Quality Assurance (ISO9000, ISO14000)
3) Occupational Health and Safety Management System
4) WSHC bizSAFE certification
5) Safety Demerit Points (MOM) at the point of tender submission
6) Safety Management Plan
7) Site Utilization Plan
8) Construction Programme
9) Earth Control Measures
10) Quality Assurance and Quality Control Management Plan
11) Workplace, Safety & Health and Risk Management Plan
12) Site Team Organization Chart – to submit the CV of the P.M with
minimum 10 years of relevant local experience and other site staffs, all
have minimum relevant local experience of at least 5 years.
12. Time is of the essence of the Works.
13. The tenders shall be valid for a period of ninety (90) days from the final date for
submission of tenders.
14. The Tenderer shall bear all expenses incurred by them in the preparation of their
tenders.
15. The Tenderer shall include in the tender price for all samples that may be requested
or directed by the Architect.
16. The Tenderer shall submit manufacturer’s catalogues, samples and relevant data
together with the tender.
17. The Employer is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender and/or alternative
tender and no reason will be given for rejecting any tender.
18. The unit of currency for this tender is Singapore Dollars.

(2216\MC\B\TD) CT/3
19. Confidentiality
19.1 The Tenderer shall maintain in strict confidence the following information
(collectively, “Confidential Information”):
- all information provided in the Tender Documents together with any

specifications, samples, plans, designs, drawings, business and other
information disclosed in relation to the Tender by Employer and/or its
Affiliates for the purpose of the tender exercise;
- all information relating to the processes of examination, clarification,

evaluation and comparison of tenders and the award of a contract,
acquired by the Tenderer and/or its Affiliates in the course of participating
in the tender exercise.
19.2 Pursuant to the clause above, the Tenderer shall not without the prior
written consent of Employer:
- Use any portion of such Confidential Information for any purpose other
than to prepare its Tender Proposal or its response to queries from
Employer; and/or
- Disclose any portion of such Confidential Information to any person or
entity other than its officers or employees, agents or contractors who
reasonably needs to have access to the Confidential Information to allow
the Tenderer to prepare its Tender Proposal.
19.3 The Tenderer shall procure that all recipients of any part of the Confidential
Information that the Tenderer discloses pursuant to Clause 19.2, shall not
disclose the Confidential Information to any other party whatsoever.
19.4 Employer may require the Tenderer to return any materials, documents or
information provided by Employer in relation to the Tender, or to certify the
destruction of such materials, documents or information, and the Tenderer
shall comply with such requests.
19.5 The obligations of the Tenderer with respect to Confidential Information shall
survive the termination of this Agreement and shall remain in effect
perpetually, except to the extent that:
- such Confidential Information becomes generally available to the public

other than as a result of an unauthorised disclosure by the Tenderer or
persons to whom the Tenderer has made the information available; or
- such Confidential Information has been released by Employer providing

the Confidential Information to another person or entity without
restriction; or
- the Tenderer is able to prove that prior to receipt from Employer, it had
received such Confidential Information from a third party lawfully
possessing and lawfully entitled to disclose such information; or
- such Confidential Information is required to be released by law, pursuant

to a court order or an administrative proceeding, or by another
appropriate regulatory body.
19.6 The Tenderer hereby acknowledges and agrees that a breach of its obligations
under this Clause 19 will give rise to irreparable injury to Employer which
cannot be adequately compensated for by damages. Employer is therefore
entitled, in addition to all other remedies available to it, to injunctive and
other equitable relief without necessity to post a bond to prevent a breach of
and/or to secure the enforcement of this Clause 19.

(2216\MC\B\TD) CT/4
20. Goods and Services Tax (GST)
The Tender Sum including all rates and prices submitted by the Tenderer in his
tender shall be exclusive of any Goods and Services Tax (hereinafter referred to as
“GST”) which may become payable under the Goods and Services Tax Act.
Any GST which may become payable on taxable goods and services supplied under
the Contract shall be separately paid by the Employer to the Tenderer as and when
such tax becomes payable.
For the purpose of this clause unless the Tenderer has separately declared in the
Form of Tender that he is a non-taxable person within the meaning stipulated in the
Goods and Services Tax Act, the Tenderer shall be deemed to be a taxable person
under the said Act.
If the Tenderer has declared himself to be a non-taxable person under the Goods
and Services Tax Act in his Tender, any subsequent GST which may become payable
as a result of the Tenderer becoming taxable under the said Act, due to any reason
whatsoever, shall be fully borne by the Tenderer and not separately paid by the
Employer to the Tenderer.
21. All queries from the Tenderer shall be in writing or shall be emailed in editable soft
copy and PDF copy; not later than 5 days before the tender closing to the office of:-
1) OGP Konsult Pte Ltd

71 Bukit Batok Cres,
Singapore 658071
Email: teeteck@ogpkonsult.com
Attention: Mr. Cheng Tee Teck
2) Elead Associates Pte Ltd

85 Playfair Rd,
#03-02 Tong Yuan Industrial Building,
Singapore 368000
Email: sean@eleadmec.com.sg / kaythi@eleadmec.com

Attention: Mr. Sean Ying / Ms. Kaythi
3) Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte Ltd

7 Maxwell Road, MND Complex
Annexe B #05-01A
Singapore 069111
Email: 2216ise@northcroft.sg
Attention: Ms. Jasmine Quek\Ms. Yan Shi Min
4) ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd

65 CHULIA STREET#21
#08 OCBC Centre,
Singapore 049513
Email: alvin.s@isefoods-holdings.sg /
yz.fung@isefoods-holdings.sg/
st.chong@isefoods-holdings.sg
Attn: Mr. Alvin Sung / Mr. Fung Yuan Zhi/ Mr. Chong Soon Teck

(2216\MC\B\TD) CT/5
Form of Tender
FORM OF TENDER
Tender Documents
For

on Lot 02008x Mk 12
At
Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
For
To :

65 Chulia Street#21,
#08 OCBC Centre,
Singapore 049513
Gentlemen,
1. Having examined the Tender Drawings and read the Tender Documents for the
above-named Works, and having familiarised ourselves with the Site, we hereby
offer to construct, complete and maintain the whole of the said Works in conformity
with the said Tender Drawings and Tender Documents as follows:-
Basic Tender ‘A’
For Completion within the Employer's stipulated time, viz.,
The whole of the Works to be completed within a period of Eighteen (18) months
from the Commencement Date, and,
in the sum of Singapore Dollars
(S$.............................) excluding Goods and Services Tax (GST).
Alternative Tender ‘B’
For Completion within our own set time, viz.,
The whole of the Works to be completed within a period of ……………………. ( )

months from the Commencement Date, and,
in the sum of Singapore Dollars
(S$.............................) excluding Goods and Services Tax (GST).
[Note: Alternative Tender B’s proposed period must be less than Basic
Tender A period”]
Egg Farm- Main Contract
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/1
Form of Tender (Cont'd)
2. We understand that parts of the Works are covered by Prime Cost (PC) Sums in
the Schedule of Prices and if our tender is accepted we undertake (subject to the
rights of objection under Clause 29 of the Conditions of Contract) to execute Sub-
Contract Agreements with the Nominated Sub-Contractors.
In the event that a Sub-Contractor is engaged by the Employer prior to the award
of this contract to carry out works which are the subject of a PC Sum in the
Schedule of Prices, we undertake (subject to the rights of objection under Clause
29 of the Conditions of Contract) to execute a Novation Agreement with the
Employer and the Designated Sub-Contractor in terms exactly similar to the
specimen attached hereto as Appendix FT/J and thereafter to execute a Sub-
Contract Agreement with the said Designed Sub-Contractor.
3. We agree that should any discrepancy occur between the amount written in words
and in figures entered upon the Form of Tender, the amount written in words will
be used.
If there is any discrepancy between the tender sum inserted in the Form of Tender
and the sum stated in the other parts of the document, the sum stated in the Form
of Tender shall be taken as correct.
4. We understand that time is the essence of the Works.
5. The tender sums are firm prices and shall not be subject to any adjustment for any
reasons whatsoever save only in the event of variation instructions issued by the
Superintending Officer pursuant to the Conditions of Contract.
6. We undertake to commence the Works within Seven (7) days from the date of the
Letter of Acceptance and to complete the whole of the Works within the period
stated in this Form of Tender.
7. We agree to abide by these Tenders for a period of ninety (90) days from the final
date fixed for submission of Tenders and they shall remain binding upon us and
may be accepted at any time before the end of that period.
8. We confirm that all specified materials and requirements are included in the
tender.
9. We agree to the Liquidated Damages for the late completion of the Works at the rate
of S$12,000.00 per calendar day for period during which the Works remain
incomplete.
10. We understand that storage space on site is limited. We have allowed in our
Tender for all reasonable additional expense incurred in storing and protecting
undelivered Goods off site and insuring them against loss and damage however
caused from the time the Goods are stored until delivery to site.
11. If our Tender is accepted, we will provide within fourteen (14) days from the day
of the Letter of Acceptance a Performance Bond in the form of a Banker’s
Guarantee under the terms exactly as the specimen appended hereto from a Bank
(to be approved by the Employer) in a sum equal to ten (10) per cent of the
accepted Tender Sum for the due performance of the Contract. The expense of
providing the said Bond shall be borne by us.
12. We understand that you are at liberty to accept any of the Tenders submitted by
us and you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Tender that you may
receive.
13. We agree that you reserve the right to accept this tender in whole or parts and we
shall not claim for any loss of profit or interest or any other cost against you for
omission or acceptance of such works.
14. Unless and until a formal Agreement is prepared and executed, this Tender
together with your written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding Contract
between us.
15. *Declaration of a Taxable/Non-Taxable Person under the Goods and Services Tax Act
We declare that we are a Taxable/Non-Taxable Person within the meaning stipulated

in the Goods and Services Tax Act.
(* Tenderer is to delete whichever is not applicable.)
Dated this .................................... day of ................................................. 20............
Signature : ..................................................
(Name in Block Letters)
in the capacity of
duly authorised to sign tenders for and on behalf of

(Name of Company)
(Address)
(Signature of Witness) (Name in Block Letters)
(Address)
Appendices
APPENDIX FT/A
LIST OF MAJOR PLANT TO BE USED FOR THE WORKS
Description No. Make Capacity Owned, At what stage of

Hired, or Contract is
H.P. available
The Contractor's obligation is not limited to the provision of the Plant listed above. Should the
Architect consider it necessary for the Contractor to provide additional plant to expedite the Works,
the Contractor shall do so at no extra cost to the Employer.
Dated this ............................................ day of ............................................

20........................
Signature ............................................ in the capacity of.......................................................
................................................................ duly authorised to sign tenders for and on behalf of
.............................................................................................................................................
...
.............................................................................................................................................
...
(In Block Capital)
..................................... Address:.......................................................
Signature of Witness
....................................................................
....................................................................
..........................................................
....................................................................
Name of Witness
Egg Farm- Main Contract FT/A/1

G:\Projects\22\2216\B\TD
APPENDIX FT/B
SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES
Where work cannot properly be measured and valued the Contractor shall be allowed daywork
rates as inserted in Tables I, II and III of this Schedule.
All daywork rates shall deem to include design and Consultants' Fees.
Section One - Labour
The rates inserted by the Contractor in Table I are to include inter alia all of the following:-
(a) The amount of wages actually paid to the employee when carrying out dayworks.
(b) Central Provident Fund contribution and/or Government levy on foreign workers, payroll
tax and contribution to Skills Development Fund as applicable.
(c) Annual and Public Holidays.
(d) Travelling time, fare and transport expenses.
(e) Non-productive time and other expenses.
(f) Incentive and bonus payments.
(g) Any other disbursements arising from employment of labour.
(h) Overheads and profit as defined in Section Four below.
Overtime is defined as any time worked on Sundays or Public Holidays or any time worked
outside the following normal working hours:-
Monday to Friday : 8.00 am to 5.00 pm
Saturday : 8.00 am to 12.00 pm
The Rates of payment for working overtime will be calculated on the following basis:-
Monday to Friday : 5.00 pm to 10.00 pm ) 1½ times the rates

Saturday : 12.00 pm to 10.00 pm) inserted in Table I
Monday to Saturday : 10.00 pm to 9.00 am ) Twice the rates

Sunday & Public Holiday : All hour ) inserted in Table I
Egg Farm – Main Contract FT/B/1

APPENDIX FT/B
SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES (Cont'd)
Section Two - Materials
The rates inserted by the Contractor in Table II are to include inter alia all of the following:-
(a) The cost of materials used for dayworks.
(b) Customs and excise duties, taxes, etc. on materials.
(c) Transportation costs to site and within the site.
(d) All other costs and expenses relating to the materials used.
(e) Overheads and profits as defined in Section Four below.
Section Three - Plant
The rates inserted by the Contractor in Table III are to include inter alia all of the following:-
(a) Use of Contractor's own or hired mechanically operated plant for the time engaged on
daywork.
(b) Fuel, grease and lubricating oil.
(c) Maintenance.
(d) Consumable and spare parts.
(e) Insurance and road taxes where applicable.
(f) Overheads and profit as defined in Section Four below.
Rates for plant are to exclude labour rates in respect of drivers and operatives (which are
provided in Table I).
Payment for mechanically operated plant will be made only for such time as the plant is engaged
upon daywork operations and shall exclude mobilisation time, standing time and demobilisation
time.
Section Four - Overheads and Profit
Overheads and profit are to be included in the rates inserted by the Contractor in respect of
labour, materials and plant in Table I, II and III respectively.
The terms "overheads" is deemed to include inter alia all of the following costs and charges:-
(a) Head office charges.
(b) Site supervision and site staff.

APPENDIX FT/B
Section Four - Overheads and Profit (Cont'd)
(c) Compliance with all Government and Statutory rules and regulations.
(d) Overtime other than those provided for in Section One.
(e) Time lost due to inclement weather.
(f) Watching and lighting.
(g) Water, artificial lighting and power.
(h) Safety, health and welfare facilities.
(i) Insurances.
(j) Use, repair and maintenance of small tools, non-mechanically operated plant, erected
scaffolding, staging and trestles.
(k) Storage facilities and the like that may be in general use on the site.
(l) All other facilities, liabilities and obligations whatsoever.

APPENDIX FT/B
TABLE I - LABOUR
Description Rate per hour

S$
Labourer - Male
Labourer - Female
Concretor
Steel bender
Bricklayer/Mason
Drainlayer
Roofer
Carpenter
Joiner
Steelworker
Welder
Plasterer
Tiler
Plumber
Electrician
Glazier
Painter
Driver
Mechanic
Plant Operator - Mechanical Plant under 100 B.H.P.
Plant Operator - Mechanical Plant 100 B.H.P. and over
Any classification not included in this page may be inserted by

the Contractor:- (to be submitted on separate sheet)

APPENDIX FT/B
TABLE II - MATERIALS
Description Unit Rate

S$
Cement 50 kg bag
Cement tonne
Sand for concrete m3
Sand for plaster m3
20mm aggregate m3
25mm ditto m3
38mm ditto m3
Mild Steel bar reinforcement
6mm diameter kg
9 or 10mm diameter kg
13mm diameter kg
16mm diameter kg
High tensile steel bar reinforcement
9 or 10mm diameter kg
13mm diameter kg
16mm diameter kg
20mm ditto kg
22mm ditto kg
25mm ditto kg
28mm ditto kg
32mm ditto kg
Bricks - ordinary first quality 1,000 No.
Clinker facing bricks 1,000 No.
Sawn hardwood for temporary works m3

APPENDIX FT/B
TABLE III - PLANT
The Contractor is to enter the size or capacity of plant he proposes to have on site, where not
stated.
Description Capacity Rate per hour

S$
Compressors - Portable (Incl. tools and hose) ..... m³/s
- Ditto ..... m³/s
Compressors - Mobile (incl. tools and hose) ..... m³/s
Crane - Mobile ..... Tonnes
- Ditto ..... Tonnes
Generating Sets ..... K.V.A.
Excavators - (including face shovels, ..... m³

skimmers, draglines or
backacters)
- (Ditto) ..... m³
Rollers - Vibrating approximately ..... H.P.

4,500 kg deadweight
- Three wheel, 10-12 tonne weight ..... H.P.
Dumpers (or Dump Trucks) ..... m³
Lorries - Van or similar utility ..... kg
Lorries - Ordinary flat top ..... Tonnes
Lorries - Tippers - heavy haulage ..... Tonnes
Lorries - Ordinary - heavy haulage ..... Tonnes
Mixers - Concrete, open drum ..... Litres
- Ditto ..... Litres
Mixers - with weigh batchers ..... Litres

APPENDIX FT/B
TABLE III - PLANT (Cont'd)
Description Capacity Rate per hour

S$
Pumps - Portable (Incl. foot valves, ..... mm

suction hose, up to 20 metres of
delivery hose and all fittings)
- diesel or petrol driven ..... mm
- ditto ..... mm
- air driven ..... mm
- electrically driven ..... mm
- ditto ..... mm
Welding and Cutting Set

(Oxy-acetylene inclusive of oxygen and acetylene)
Ditto - electric arc
(Any items not included above)
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
......................................................
.......................................... .....................................................
Signature and Company Stamp Signature of Witness
.......................................... .....................................................
Name of Signatory in Block Letter Name of Witness in Block Letter
Address: .............................. Address: .........................................
.......................................... .....................................................
.......................................... .....................................................
Date: .................................. Date: .............................................

APPENDIX FT/C
SCHEDULE OF BREAK-DOWN OF CONTRACTOR'S RATES
Notwithstanding any contrary provisions stipulated in the Conditions of Contract, the Tenderer
shall comply and submit his pricing details in accordance with this Schedule of Breakdown of
Rates. Such breakdown of rates shall be used as a basis for valuation of variations.
Every rate shall include for the provision of all materials delivered to site including cutting and
waste, unloading, storage, packing, carriage and cartage, hoisting, all labour for fabricating,
setting, fitting and fixing in position, protecting, use of tools, plant and machinery where
applicable, supervision, establishment charges, profit and any other expense and everything else
necessary for the due and proper completion of each item.
The total rate or price as inserted by the Tenderer below shall be the same as the rate or price
for the same item as priced in the Schedule of Rates.
For the avoidance of doubt, where there is a change of materials or specifications or addition of
any new items, the level of overhead and profit of any such change will be based on the
average percentage of similar work items in the same category as shown in this Schedule of
Breakdown of Rates.
Item Unit Material Wastage Labour Plant & Overhead Total Rate
Cost Machinery and Profit
(if any)
S$ S$ S$ S$ S$ S$
........................................................ .........................................................
Signature and Company Stamp Signature of Witness
........................................................ ..........................................................
Name of Signatory in Block Letter Name of Witness in Block Letter
Address: .......................................... Address: ............................................
........................................................ ..........................................................
........................................................ ..........................................................
Date: ............................................... Date: .................................................
Egg Farm- Main Contract FT/C/1

(Project\22\2216\B\TD)
APPENDIX FT/D
SITE STAFF FOR THE WORKS
Schedule of Technical Site Staff Deployed for the Works
Category Number Name & Qualification Similar Proven

Experience
Project Manager
Structural Engineer
M & E Engineer
Architectural Coordinator
BIM Manager
BIM Coordinator
Safety Officer
Foremen
Contractor's obligation is not limited to the provision of the site staff listed above.
For further details refer to Section No. 1 – Site Management Staff.
.......................................................... .............................................
Signature of Contractor Signature of Witness
Address: .......................................... Address: ................................
........................................................ .............................................
......................................................... .............................................
Date: ............................................... Date: .....................................
Egg Farm- Main Contract FT/D/1

APPENDIX FT/E
SPECIMEN FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND
To :
(Name of Employer)
WHEREAS by a Contract ("the Contract") in writing made the ..................... day of

.............. 20........... between yourselves as Employer and (name and registered address of
Contractor) hereinafter called the "Contractor") the Contractor has agreed to carry out,
complete and maintain the (description of the Works) ("the Works") for the
consideration therein mentioned.
AND WHEREAS We (name of Guarantee) of (registered address of Guarantee) have

been requested by the Contractor and have agreed to issue this Guarantee in the terms
hereinafter appearing.
NOW THIS DEED WITNESSETH :-
1. In consideration of you awarding the Contractor the Contract, we hereby irrevocably

and unconditionally undertake, covenant and firmly bind ourselves to pay to you on
demand any sum or sums which from time to time may be demanded by you up to a
maximum aggregate of Singapore Dollars
(S$ ) ("the Guaranteed Sum")
2. Should you notify us in writing, at any time prior to the expiry of this Guarantee, by
notice purporting to be signed for and on your behalf that you require payment to be
made of the whole or any part of the Guaranteed Sum, we irrevocably and
unconditionally agree to pay the same to you immediately on demand without
further reference to the Contractor and notwithstanding any dispute or difference
which may have arisen under the Contract or any instruction which may be given to
us by the Contractor not to pay the same.
(Project\22\2216\B\TD) FT/E/1
APPENDIX FT/E
3. We hereby confirm and agree that we shall be under no duty or responsibility to

inquire into:
a) the reason or circumstances of any demand hereunder,
or
b) the respective rights, obligations and/or liabilities of yourselves and the

Contractor under the Contract,
or
c) the authenticity of your notice or the authority or entitlement of persons

signing such notice,
but that we shall be entitled to and shall rely upon any written demand by you
hereunder.
4. Any payment to be made by us hereunder shall be made without any set-off,

deduction or counterclaim whatsoever.
5. We agree that our liability hereunder shall not be discharged, affected or impaired in
any way by reason of any modification, amendment or variation in or to any of the
conditions or provisions of the Contract or the Contract Works (including, if
necessary the remedying by others of work not in accordance with this Contract) or
by reason of any breach or breaches of the Contract by the Contractor, whether the
same are made with or without our knowledge or consent. We further agree that no
invalidity in the Contract nor its avoidance, suspension or termination shall
discharge, affect or impair our liability hereunder and that no waiver, compromise,
indulgence or forbearance, whether as to time, payment, performance or any other
matter afforded by you to the Contractor under the Contract, shall discharge, affect
or impair our liability hereunder.
6. We confirm that our liability hereunder shall be a continuing liability and that this
Guarantee shall remain in full force and effect (for the duration of the Contract
Period inclusive of the Maintenance period specified in the Contract) until …………………
(the “Expiry Date”) and shall be automatically renewed for successive periods of one
year unless we have given three months notice sent to you by registered mail prior
to the Expiry Date of the current Guarantee or renewed Guarantee of our intention
not to renew whereupon the current Guarantee or renewed Guarantee shall
automatically expire on the last day of the current Guarantee year or renewed
Guarantee year (the “Termination Date”).
7. This Guarantee shall expire as to any undrawn portion of the Guaranteed Sum at the
close of banking business on the Expiry Date. Notification of demand for payment
may be presented to us at any time prior to expiry. "Undrawn portion" shall mean
the Guaranteed Sum less the aggregate amount which shall have been the subject
of notification by you of your demand for payment as hereinbefore provided.
APPENDIX FT/E
8. Notwithstanding the foregoing, claims presented by the Employer within (3) three
months after the expiry of this Guarantee shall be valid and binding upon us.
9. This Guarantee shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of
Singapore and we hereby agree to submit to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the
Courts of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF on the day and year first above written
Signed, Sealed and Delivered )

for and on behalf of )
(Name of Guarantor) )
)
)
.............................................................. *)
)
who is duly authorised to execute this )
..............................................................
Guarantee on behalf of ) Signature
(Name of Guarantor) )
)
)
)
.............................................................. )
)
in the presence of )
)
)
.............................................................. )
..............................................................
) Signature
* Where this Guarantee is executed on behalf of the Guarantor by an Attorney the

relevant Power of Attorney (and the Articles) must be attached with the Guarantee.
APPENDIX FT/F
DEED OF WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY BY THE CONTRACTOR
THIS DEED OF WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY is given on the ................ day of

...........................................(20........) by
................................................................................ having its registered office at
........................................................................................
................................................................................................ (hereinafter called "the
Contractor" which term shall include its assigns and successors in title) to ............................
............................................................................... (hereinafter called "the Employer" which
term shall include its assigns and successors in title).
WHEREAS:-
1. By an agreement made between the Employer and the Contractor dated the day of
.............................. 20 ....... (hereinafter called "the Contract") the Employer has engaged
the Contractor to construct, complete and maintain
................................................................................................ (hereinafter called "the
Works").
2. The Contractor has agreed to warrant and indemnify the Employer, in the manner
hereinafter appearing, against any defects in the workmanship, quality of materials,
watertightness or failure in the Works.
THE CONTRACTOR HEREBY AGREES with the Employer as follows:-
1. In the event of any failure or defects (as shall be determined by the Employer) in the
workmanship, quality of materials, installation, watertightness or deterioration appearing in
the Works, the Contractor shall forthwith upon notice from the Employer and within such
time as the Employer may direct, effect remedial works to the defective area or areas and
shall make good to the absolute satisfaction of the Employer all damages to surface finishes
including but not limited to plaster, painting, panelling, tiling and other similar works,
mechanical, electrical or other installations or other property arising directly or indirectly out
of the said failure or defects.
2. In the event that remedial works undertaken by the Contractor prove ineffective as
determined by the Employer whose decision shall be final and conclusive, or are not to the
satisfaction of the Employer, the Contractor shall effect such additional works in such a
manner and within such time as the Employer may direct and shall carry out all tests as
directed by the Employer until all the defects have been remedied to the absolute
satisfaction of the Employer.
Egg Farm- Main Contract FT/F/1

(Project\22\2216\MC\B\TD)
APPENDIX FT/F
DEED OF WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY BY THE CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
3. Should the Contractor fail to perform its obligations under Clauses 1 and 2 above within the
time directed by the Employer or in the absence of such direction, within a reasonable
period, the Employer shall be entitled to remedy the said defects and the Contractor shall
forthwith on demand reimburse the Employer all costs and expenses incurred by the
Employer for making good the said defects including reimbursements by the Contractor of all
consequential damages and all legal costs on a Solicitor and Client basis incurred by the
Employer in enforcing this Clause.
4. All costs and expenses arising out of the performance of the obligations under this Warranty
and Indemnity shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
5. The giving of time or the neglect or forbearance of the Employer in requiring or enforcing its
rights under this Warranty and Indemnity or other indulgence to the Contractor shall not in
any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor and the rights of the Employer
under this Warranty and Indemnity.
6. This Warranty and Indemnity shall be freely assignable by the Employer to any party
(hereinafter called "the Assignee") and after such assignment, the Contractor shall perform
all its obligations under this Warranty and Indemnity as if the Assignee had been the party to
whom this Warranty and Indemnity was given instead of the Employer.
7. Any notice or demand required to be made shall be sufficiently given if served by hand or
sent by registered post to the aforesaid address of the Contractor or such address specified
by it and shall be deemed to be received at the time when it would have been delivered in
the ordinary course of post.

APPENDIX FT/F
DEED OF WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY BY THE CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
IT IS HEREBY EXPRESSLY AGREED hereto that this Warranty and Indemnity shall be
valid for the period of ................ (..........) years from the date of completion of the Works
and will expire on .................................................................... (date).
This Warranty and Indemnity shall have full force and effect notwithstanding any limitation
or termination of the Contractor's liability and/or responsibility under the Contract.
This Warranty and Indemnity is in addition to and without prejudice to any other rights and
remedies which the Employer may have against the Contractor or any other person whether
in contract, tort or otherwise.
This Warranty and Indemnity shall be construed in accordance with the laws of of the
Republic Singapore and the Contractor hereby submits to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of
the courts of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF
the day and year first above written
SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED )

)
)
)
by (Name of Signatory) )
)
)
)
)
for and on behalf of )
(Name of Contractor) )
)
)
)
in the presence of:- )
(Name of Witness) )
)
)
)

APPENDIX FT/G
DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY
THIS DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY is given on the .............. day of
..................... 20........... by …........................................................ having its registered
office at
……...................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called "the Contractor" which term shall include its assigns and successors in
title) of the first part, and .......................................................…………………………….. having
its registered office at ……………………..
........................................................................…….. (hereinafter called "the Sub-
Contractor" which term shall include its assigns and successors in title) of the second part in
favour of ………………....................................................................................……..
(hereinafter called "the Employer" which term shall include its assigns and successors in
title).
Whereas
(1) By an agreement dated the ...................... day of ............................ 20 ...........

and made between the Employer and the Contractor (hereinafter called "the
Contract"), the Employer engaged the Contractor to construct, complete and
maintain the
......................................................................................................
.................................... (hereinafter called "the Works").
(2) By an agreement dated the ................. day of ............................. 20 .......... and

made between the Contractor and the Sub-Contractor (hereinafter called "the Sub-
Contract"), the Sub-Contractor agreed, inter alia, to execute such part of the Works,
namely the .......................................................…………………………………………..
………………………………………. (hereinafter called "the Sub-Contract Works") and to
supply and install such materials as specified therein for the Contractor.
(3) The Contractor and the Sub-Contractor have agreed to warrant in favour of and
indemnify the Employer, in the manner hereinafter appearing, against
......................…..............….............................................................................
……………... in the Sub-Contract Works (which forms part of the Works).
NOW THIS DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY WITNESS that the
Contractor and the Sub-Contractor hereby undertake jointly and severally as follows
:-
1. In the event of any failure or defects (as shall be determined by the

Employer) in the workmanship, quality of materials, installation,
watertightness or deterioration appearing in the Sub-Contract Works, the
Contractor and/or the Sub-Contractor shall forthwith upon notice from the
Employer and within such time as the Employer may direct, effect remedial
works to the defective area or areas and shall make good to the absolute
satisfaction of the Employer all damages to surface finishes including but not
limited to plaster, painting, panelling, tiling and other similar works,
mechanical, electrical or other installations or other property arising directly
or indirectly out of the said failure or defects.
Egg Farm- Main Contract FT/G/1

APPENDIX FT/G
DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY (Cont'd)
2. In the event that remedial works undertaken by the Contractor and/or Sub-
Contractor prove ineffective as determined by the Employer whose decision
shall be final and conclusive, or are not to the satisfaction of the Employer,
the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor shall effect such additional works in
such a manner and within such time as the Employer may direct and shall
carry out all tests as directed by the Employer until all the defects have been
remedied to the absolute satisfaction of the Employer.
3. Should the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor fail to perform its obligations

under Clauses 1 and 2 above within the time directed by the Employer or in
the absence of such direction, within a reasonable period, the Employer shall
be entitled to remedy the said defects and the Contractor and/or Sub-
Contractor shall forthwith on demand reimburse the Employer all costs and
expenses incurred by the Employer for making good the said defects
including reimbursements by the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor of all
consequential damages and all legal costs on a Solicitor and Client basis
incurred by the Employer in enforcing this Clause.
4. All costs and expenses arising out of the performance of the obligations
under this Joint Warranty and Indemnity shall be borne solely by the
Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor.
5. The giving of time or the neglect or forbearance of the Employer in requiring

or enforcing its rights under this Joint Warranty and Indemnity or other
indulgence to the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor shall not in any way
prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor
and the rights of the Employer under this Joint Warranty and Indemnity.
6. This Joint Warranty and Indemnity may be assigned by the Employer to any
party (hereinafter called "the Assignee") and after such assignment, the
Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor shall perform all its obligations under this
Joint Warranty and Indemnity as if the Assignee had been the party to
whom this Joint Warranty and Indemnity was given instead of the Employer.
7. Any notice or demand required to be made shall be sufficiently given if

served by hand or sent by registered post to the aforesaid address of the
Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor or such address specified by it and shall
be deemed to be received at the time when it would have been delivered in
the ordinary course of post.

APPENDIX FT/G
DEED OF JOINT WARRANTY AND INDEMNITY (Cont'd)
IT IS HEREBY EXPRESSLY AGREED hereto that this Joint Warranty and Indemnity
shall be valid for the period of ............................... (......) years from the date of
completion of the Works as stated in the Completion Certificate and will expire on
...................................... (date).
This Joint Warranty and Indemnity shall have full force and effect notwithstanding
any limitation or termination of the Contractor's and/or Sub-Contractor's liability
and/or responsibility under the Contract and/or Sub-Contract.
This Joint Warranty and Indemnity is in addition to and without prejudice to any
other rights and remedies which the Employer may have against the Contractor
and/or Sub-Contractor or any other person whether in contract, tort or otherwise,
the said rights and remedies of which shall not be limited by the duration of the
Deed.
This Joint Warranty and Indemnity shall be construed in accordance with the laws of
Singapore and the Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor hereby submits to the non-
exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of Singapore.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF on the day and year first above written
Signed, Sealed and Delivered Signed, Sealed and Delivered

for and on behalf of for and on behalf of
(Name of Contractor) (Name of Sub-Contractor)
by by
............................................................ ......................................................
. Name & Signature of Director
Name & Signature of Director
............................................................ ......................................................
. Name & Signature
Name & Signature of Director/Company Secretary
of Director/Company Secretary
who are duly authorised to execute this Deed of Joint Warranty and Indemnity .

APPENDIX FT/H
WRITTEN UNDERTAKING ON EMPLOYMENT OF

FOREIGN WORKERS / ILLEGAL WORKERS
Employer
Dear Sirs
Project title
The Employment Of Foreign Manpower Act (Cap. 91a) / Immigration Act (Cap.133)
Written Undertaking
We, ................................................................., hereby declare and undertake that we have not

and shall not employ any Foreign Worker or any person in contravention of the current Employment
of Foreign Manpower Act (Cap.91A) and/or the Immigration Act (Cap. 133)
We hereby declare and confirm that we have complied and shall continue to comply with the
provisions of the Employment of Foreign Manpower Act. (Cap.91A) and/or the Immigration Act
(Cap.133).
In the course of performing our contractual obligation as Contractor, we shall exercise due
diligence in ensuring that neither the Company, our contractors or sub-contractors have in their
employed person/persons in contravention to the Employment of Foreign Manpower Act (Cap.
91A) nor are they harbouring or employing any person who had acted in contravention of the
provisions of the Immigration Act (Cap. 133).
Yours faithfully
...................................................
CONTRACTOR
cc
Egg Farm - Main Contract FT/H/1

APPENDIX FT/I
STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
Please indicate clearly below your compliance in the format given below and tick the appropriate
box. For non or partial compliance, please indicate which clause you are not in agreement with
and provide your explanatory notes in the ‘remarks’ column.
The statement of compliance shall be in the following format:
Clause Heading Compliance* Explanatory Notes / Remarks

(Please provide alternatives or reasons ONLY if
“U/C” or “A/O” are used)
*Only the following symbols shall be used to indicate due compliance or otherwise:
C - Able to fully comply
U/C - Unable to fully comply
A/O - Alternative offered (in addition to base offer)
(Note: If you are fully compliance to the tender requirements and terms and conditions, please
state “Fully Compliance to Tender Requirements” and a blank Form return is not acceptable.)
.......................................................... ..............................................
Address: .......................................... Address: .................................
........................................................ ..............................................
......................................................... ..............................................
Date: ............................................... Date: .....................................
Egg Farm- Main Contract FT/I/1

Appendix FT/J
Novation Agreement
(Specimen)
THIS AGREEMENT is made the .......................... day of Two Thousand and

......................... (20.........) between ...........................................................
........................ having its registered office at ...............................................................
....................................................... (hereinafter called "the Employer") of the first part,
...................................................................................... having its registered office at
....…………………………….........................................................
................................................... (hereinafter called "the Main Contractor") of the second
part and .......………………………………...............................................................................
having its registered office at ..................……………........................……………………………………….
............................................................ (hereinafter called "the Sub-Contractor") of the
third part.
WHEREAS :
1. The Employer has entered into an agreement with the Sub-Contractor for the
___________________________________________________________________
(hereinafter called "the Sub-Contract"). Under the terms of the Sub-Contract, the
Sub-Contractor has agreed inter alia that upon the award of the Main Contract (as
referred to in Recital 2 hereunder):
(a) the Main Contractor shall assume the rights, interests and obligations of the
Employer under the Sub-Contract.
(b) the Sub-Contractor shall execute this Agreement releasing and discharging
the Employer from the further performance of the Sub-Contract.
2. The Employer has entered into an agreement with the Main Contractor to
__________________________________________________________________,
(hereinafter called "the Main Contract"). Under the terms of the Main Contract, the
Main Contractor has agreed inter alia to execute this Agreement undertaking to
perform and observe the Sub-Contract and be bound by the terms thereof in all
respects as if the Main Contractor had been a party to the Sub-Contract.
3. The Employer desires to be released and discharged from the further performance of
the Sub-Contract.
4. This Agreement is supplemental to the Sub-Contract and the Main Contract.
(Project\22\2216\MC\B\TD) FT/J/1
Appendix FT/J
Novation Agreement
(Specimen)
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED that in consideration of the premises and in pursuance of the
Main Contract and the Sub-Contract:
1. The Main Contractor hereby undertakes to perform and observe the Sub-Contract as
from the date hereof and to be bound by the terms thereof in all respects as if the
Main Contractor had been a party to the Sub-Contract in place of the Employer.
2. The Sub-Contractor hereby releases and discharges the Employer from the further
performance of the Sub-Contract as from the date hereof and all claims and
demands whatsoever in respect thereof and agrees to accept the liability of the Main
Contractor to perform and observe the Sub-Contract in lieu of the liability of the
Employer and agrees to be bound by the terms of the Sub-Contract in every way as
if the Main Contractor had been named in the Sub-Contract as a party thereto in
place of the Employer.
Appendix FT/J
Novation Agreement
(Specimen)
AS WITNESS our hands the day and year first above written
SIGNED
by (Name of Signatory)
.................................................................
for and on behalf of the Employer
in the presence of:
.................................................................
SIGNED
.................................................................
for and on behalf of the Main Contractor
in the presence of:
.................................................................
SIGNED
.................................................................
for and on behalf of the Sub-Contractor
in the presence of:
.................................................................
Appendix to the Conditions of Contract
SIA Building Contract 2016 Without Quantities, 1' Edition
APPENDIX
Clause
TYPE OF CONTRACT Articles 2, 8

(Lump Sum) and Lump Sum
clause 13(1)
CONSULTANTS Article 5(1)
1. Architect- means Superintending officer -OGP Konsult

Pte Ltd
2 Structural Engineer - OGP Konsult Pte Ltd
.3 M&E Consultants - ELEAD Associates Pte Ltd
4. Quantity Surveyor- Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte

Ltd
FEES AND CHARGES 7(3) Nil
LIST OF ADDITIONAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9(1) Other letters and

documents as stated in
the Letter of Acceptance
© Copyright by SIA 68
Clause
AREA OR EXTENT OF SITE 10(1) As Shown on Drawings
10(1) Subject to LTA’s

SPECIAL ACCESS TO BE AFFORDED BY THE comments
EMPLOYER*
RESTRICTIONS ON POSSESSION* 10(1) Not Applicable

DATE OF COMMENCEMENT 10(2) TBA
CONSTRUCTION PERIOD 10(2) 18 months
DATE OF COMPLETION 10(2) and TBA
22(1)
LIMIT ON AMOUNT INSURED (THIRD PARTY) 19(1) $ Minimum limit of
indemnity S$3 million
for any one accident
and unlimited for the
period insured
FURTHER RISKS TO BE INSURED (IF ANY) 20(1) Not Applicable

PERCENTAGE FOR PROFESSIONAL FEES 20(1) 1.5 %
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR THE WORKS 24(2) $ At the rate of
(if none stated, the Employer's right is reserved to claim for S$12,000.00 per
damages.) calendar day.
PHASED OR STAGE COMPLETION 25

Identification of Phases or Stages Not Applicable
Dates of Commencement Not Applicable

of Phases or Stages
Dates of Completion Not Applicable

of Phases or Stages
Liquidated Damages Not Applicable

of Phases or Stages
MAINTENANCE PERIOD 27(1) Eighteen (18) calendar

(If none stated, 6 months from Completion Certificate.) months
* If necessary by reference to Contract Drawings or numbered clause of Contract Specifications or other Contract Document
Clause
PERIOD FOR ALLOWANCE FOR DEFECTS 27(3) As per Contract
(If none stated, 84 days from the date of issue of the Schedule of
Defects.)
DATE AND PERIOD FOR ISSUING INTERIM 31(1)

CERTIFICATES
(If none stated, not later than the 7th calendar days of each calendar
month and a monthly period except in the case of milestone payment
under Articles 2(3)(c)) Calendar Monthly
MILESTONE PAYMENTS 31(3) Not Applicable

(If Milestone Payment desired under Article 2(3)(c); if none stated,
payment will be on usual valuation basis.)
(a) completion of foundation

$ or % of Contract Sum
(b) completion of reinforced concrete framework

(c) completion of partition walls of the Building

(d) completion of roofing of the Building

(e) completion of door sub-frames/door frames and

window frames shall be in position, and that the
electrical wiring (without fittings), the internal
plastering and the plumbing of the Building
(f) completion of car park, roads and drains serving the

Housing Estate
PERIOD FOR HONOURING CERTIFICATES 31(1) Thirty Five (35) days

(If none stated, within 14 days of receipt of certificate or copy of from the date of receipt
certificate.) of tax invoice
RETENTION PERCENTAGES FOR PERIODIC 31(5) and

VALUATION 31(6)
(If payments to differ from 90% for work and 80% for unfixed
materials.)
LIMIT OF RETENTION 31(6) 5% of Awarded Contract

(If none stated, 5% of the Contract Sum) Sum
FLUCTUATIONS 41 Yes / No*

*Delete as appropriate.
Clause
SPECIFIED MATERIALS AND CONTRACTED PRICES 41(1)
Materials Contracted Prices

1. $ Not Applicable
2. $
3. $
BASE DATED 41(2) Not Applicable
PUBLIC SOURCE FOR PUBLISHED MATERIALS PRICES 41(3) Not Applicable

(If not stated, the public source for published prices of materials
shall be the Building and Construction Authority of Singapore.)
PERMITTING INSURANCE EXCESS 42 Yes / No*
*Delete as appropriate.
Amendments to Articles and Conditions of Building Contract
Amendments to SIA Building Contract 2016
Without Quantities (1st Edition)
Published by Singapore Institute of Architects
The Articles of Agreement and Conditions of Contract have been amended and
agreed between the parties as follows:
ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT
2. TYPE OF CONTRACT
Delete second sub-clause 2(3)(b).
3. ARCHITECT
The term “Architect” shall mean Superintending Officer.
8. PRICES TO BE INCLUSIVE
Sub-clause 8(1)(a)
Insert the words “or to be inferred from” after “in” in the first line.
9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Sub-clause 9(1)(e)
Insert the words “by the Contractor” after “priced” in the first line.
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
5A. PERFORMANCE BOND
Insert new clause 5A as follows:
“Without prejudice to any express requirement in the Contract Documents

to do so earlier, the Contractor shall, not later than the stipulated date for
the commencement of work, submit to the Employer a performance bond
in an amount equal to 10% of the Contract Sum, either in cash or by way
of a banker's guarantee from an approved bank in the form set out in the
Contract Documents. The submission of a conforming performance bond
shall be a condition precedent to the issuance by the Architect of any
Certificate certifying payment to the Contractor for work carried out under
the Contract.
The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for the duration
of the Works inclusive of the Maintenance Period as stipulated in the
Contract or until the issuing of the Maintenance Certificate by the
Architect, whichever is the later.”
EggFarm- Main Contract 72

G:\PROJECTS\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02B AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).DOCX
12. VARIATIONS AND VALUATION OF ADDITIONAL PAYMENTS
12(1)(a) Power to Order and Subsequent Sanction
Delete the words “original scope of work” from the second line and replace
with “Works.”.
12(4) Valuation of Variations
Insert the words “to works both within and outside the boundary of the site”
after “Variations” in the first line.
Sub-clause 12(4)(e)(iv)
Delete the words "plus 15%” from the third line and replace with “plus
10%”.
12(5)(a) Payment for Variations
Insert the word “original” before “Contract” in the second line.
14. DISCREPANCY OR DIVERGENCE
Delete the whole sub-clause and replace with the following :
Notwithstanding any other provisions to the contrary in any of the

Contract, in the event the Contractor becomes aware of any discrepancy
and divergence in or between the Contract Documents, he shall
immediately give notice in writing to the Architect of the same. The
Architect shall, upon resolving such discrepancy and divergence, promptly
notify the Contractor of his decision. For avoidance of doubt, the most
stringent requirement in the Contract Documents shall take precedence
and/or as decided by the Architect. The Architect shall notify the
Contractor accordingly by way of directions and the Contractor shall
comply with the Architect’s decisions at the Contractor’s own cost and
expense. Such decision shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations under this Contract. The Contractor shall have no claim against
the Employer, whether for extensions of time and additional payment
arising out of or in connection therewith. In addition, the Contractor shall
indemnify the Employer any costs or expenses incurred by the Employer
arising out of or in connection with the Contractor’s failure to discern
and/or notify the Architect of such discrepancy and divergence.
73
61 Robinson Road
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\02b AMND A&C SIA 2016 (ISE).docx
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (Cont’d)
19. INSURANCE AGAINST INJURY TO PERSONS AND PROPERTY AND

WORK INJURY COMPENSATION
19(2)(a) Damage to Property when Contractor not Negligent
Delete sub-clause 19(2)(a) and replace with new sub-clause 19(2)(a) as

follows:
“The Contractor shall maintain in the joint names of the Employer and the
Contractor insurances for such amounts of indemnity as may be specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents in respect of any damage, expense,
liability, loss, claim or proceedings which the Employer may incur or
sustain due to injury or damage of any kind to property real or personal
(including property of the Employer but not the Works themselves) arising
out of or in the course of or by reason of the carrying out of the Works and
caused by collapse, subsidence, vibration, weakening or removal of
support or lowering of ground water excepting damage :
(i) caused by the negligence, omission, breach of contract or default of

the Contractor, his servants or agents, or of any sub-contractor
direct or indirect, his servants or agents.”
(ii) attributable to errors or omissions in the designing of the Works;
(iii) which can reasonably be foreseen to be inevitable having regard to

the nature of the work to be executed or the manner of its
execution;
(iv) arising from a nuclear risk or a war risk”
20. INSURANCE OF WORKS
20(1) Risks to be Insured
Sub-clause 20(1)(b)
Delete the words "full value, plus the percentage of the value of works
required to bring the works to the state prior to the occurrence of the
insured incident and the amount named in the Appendix to cover
professional fees" from third line and replace with "full reinstatement value
thereof (plus Goods and Services Tax and the respective percentages named
in the Appendix hereto to cover professional fees)".
Sub-clause 20(1)(c)
Delete sub-clause 20(1)(c) and replace with new sub-clause 20(1)(c) as

follows:-
“The Contractor shall keep such work, materials or goods so insured until
completion of the whole of the Works under Clause 22(2) of these
Conditions, notwithstanding any Phased or Stage Completion or Partial
Occupation by the Employer.”
74
61 Robinson Road
23. EXTENSION OF TIME
23(2) Grounds
Delete sub-clauses 23(2)(b), 23(2)(l) and 23(2)(m).
25. PHASE OR STAGE COMPLETION: SEVERABILITY
25(2) Separate and Distinct Contract
Delete sub-clause 25(2)(e).
26. PARTIAL OCCUPATION AND PARTIAL RE-ENTRY
26(4) Certification
Sub-clause 26(4)(d)(iii)
Delete “and 20(1)” from the first line.
27 MAINTENANCE
27(1)(a) Maintenance Period
Sub-clause 27(1)(a)
Delete sub-clause 27(1)(a) and replace with new sub-clause 27(1)(a) as

follows:-
“The Maintenance Period for the whole of the Works stated in the Appendix
hereto shall commence upon the issue of the Completion Certificate under
Clause 22(2) or 25 of these Conditions in respect of the last Phase of the
Works to be completed.”
Sub-clause 27(1)(b)(i)
Insert “various” before “Completion Certificate” in the second line.
75
61 Robinson Road
31. PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR AND INTERIM CERTIFICATES
31(2) Interim Valuation
Sub-clause 31(2)(b)(i)
Delete the words “7 days” from second line and replace with “21 days”.
31(3) Milestones Payments
Delete whole of this clause.
31(7) First Release of Retention Monies
Sub-clause 31(7)(a)
Insert the words “for the last phase of the Works” after “Certificate” in the
third line.
40. STATUTORY ADJUDICATION UNDER SOP ACT
40(2) Payment Claim
Delete the words “within and inclusive of the 25th to 28th calendar day of
each calendar month” from second line and replace with “on the last day of
each calendar month following the month in which the contract is made”.
40(3) Payment Response
Insert the words “The Architect’s Interim Certificate is deemed to be the

Employer’s payment response as specified in the Section 11 of the SOP
Act.” after “the Contractor.” in the third line.
76
61 Robinson Road
41. OPTIONAL CLAUSE FOR FLUCTUATIONS
42. OPTIONAL CLAUSE PERMITTING INSURANCE EXCESS
43. CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT 2001
Insert new clause 43 as follows:
“This Contract does not create or purport to create any right under the
Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 2001 or any subsequent
amendment thereto, which is enforceable by any person or party who or
which is not a party to this Contract. Any person or party who or which is
not a party to this Contract shall have no right under such Act or
subsequent amendment thereto, to enforce or enjoy the benefit of any of
the terms and conditions herein."
44. PUBLICITY
“The Contractor shall not publicise (for example by making press

statements or by issuing press releases) or release any information in
relation to or about this Contract except with the Employer's prior written
consent.”
45. RELATIONSHIP
“Nothing in this Contract creates a joint venture, relationship of

partnership or agency between the parties. Accordingly, except as
expressly authorised under this Contract, neither party has authority to
pledge the credit of or make any representation or give any authority to
contract on behalf of another party. No Contractor staff shall be construed
as being an employee of the Employer by virtue only of this Contract or
the performance of the Contractor's obligations under this Contract.”
77
61 Robinson Road
ONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (Cont’d)
46. NO ENTITLEMENT TO INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS
“The Contractor shall not, in any case whatsoever, be entitled to claim for
any indirect or consequential losses, including but not limited to loss of
profit, interest on capital employed and financing charges, from the
Employer.”
47. EMPLOYER’S RIGHT OF SET-OFF
Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, the Employer shall be

entitled to deduct or set-off any sum, payment or claim or any part thereof
which is due or payable from the Employer to the Contactor under this
Contract against any sum, payment or claim or any part thereof which is
due or payable from the Contractor to:
.1 the Employer under this Agreement;
.2 the Employer and/or the Employer’s related companies and/or

subsidiaries under any other agreement or contract made
between the Contractor and the Employer and/or such related
companies and/or subsidiaries of the Employer.
The Employer’s right under this clause is without prejudice to any

other rights and/or remedies which the Employer has or may have
against the Contractor under this Agreement or at law.
78
61 Robinson Road
List of Architectural General and Particular Specification
Architectural General Specification Architectural Particular Specification

Reference Description Reference Description
G1-10 General Requirements G1-10 General Requirements
A1-20 Window A1-20 Window
A1-40 Metal Cladding A1-40 Metal Cladding
A1-8-3 External Painting and A1-8-3 External Painting and Coating
Coating
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
Roofs
A3-30 Softscapes A3-30 Softscapes
A3-40 External Metalwork A3-40 External Metalwork
A4-10 Internal Plastering and A4-10 Internal Plastering and Render
Render
A4-20 Internal Painting and A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
Coating
A4-30 Floor Screeds and A4-30 Nil
Hardeners
A4-40 Internal Tiling A4-40 Internal Tiling
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
A6-10 Internal Doors A6-10 Internal Doors
A5-10 Metal Roof A5-10 Metal Roof
A6-20 External Doors A6-20 Nil
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors A6-30 Nil
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
A12-20 Signages A12-20 Signages
List of Structural Specification
Structural Specification
S/No. Description Reference
1 Demolition and site clearance C1-10
2 Condition Survey and Monitoring C1-20
3 General Earthworks_Excavation and Filling C2-20
4 Sheetpiling C2-30
5 Instrucmentation and Monitoring C2-50
6 Concrete Construction Generally C3-10
7 Reinforcement C3-20
8 Formwork and Falsework C3-30
10 Designed Joints C3-40
11 Water-Resistance to Concrete C3-50
12 Precast Concrete Works C3-60
13 Concrete Repair C3-80
14 Driven Piling C4-20
15 Pile Testing C4-30
16 Structural Steelwork C5-10
17 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork C5-20
18 Building Sewers Construction C6-10
19 Building Drain Construction C6-20
20 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways C7-10
21 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways C7-20
22 Road Ancillaries C7-30
Structural Specifications
NPQS C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
National Productivity and Quality Specifications (NPQS)
C1-10 Demolition and Site Clearance
Version 1.0
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Related Sections
1.3 Standards and Regulations
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.5 Definition
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Contractor’s Design
2.2 Falsework
2.3 Ground Movements and Vibrations
2.4 Noise Nuisance
2.5 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
3. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

3.1 Falsework
3.2 Backfill Material
3.3 Scaffolds and Access Equipment
3.4 Prohibited Equipment
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Survey
4.2 Demolition Methods
4.3 Precautions Against Uncontrolled Collapse
4.4 Safety Measures
4.5 Temporary Structures
4.6 Excavation
4.7 Adjoining Properties
4.8 Partly Demolished Structures
4.10 Removal of Asbestos Material
4.11 Precautions against Vibrations and Concussion
4.12 Site Drainage
4.13 Unknown Hazards
4.14 Open Basements
4.15 Filling of Basements
4.16 Reinstatement and Making Good to Disturbed Areas
4.17 Completion
4.18 Preparation for Cultivation with Turfing
4.19 Other Particular Requirement
5. VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS

5.1 Work Submissions
5.2 As-built Survey
Version 1.0
1. GENERAL
Read with the General Requirements section, and all other contract documents.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section C1/10 of
NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses
noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with those in C1/10 with the same
clause title.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for works involving the demolition of existing buildings
and other structures and general site clearance.
1.1.1 Particulars of project

The scope of demolition works are generally shown in the drawings. Refer to PSD for particular
requirements of the project if any.
Read in conjunction with the drawings. Take note of particular project requirements as
follows:
1. Demolition of existing abandoned underground RC holding tank, including plugging the
pipeline to existing manhole.
2. Demolition of any existing structures or drains within the site boundary.

Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following work sections:
C1-20 Condition Survey and Monitoring
C2-20 General Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)
C2-50 Instrumentation and Monitoring
1.3.1 Standards
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, ensure all of the Works comply with the relevant
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted.
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become obsolete,
refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant clauses.
SS 557:2.10 Code of Practice for Demolition
BS 6187 Code of Practice for Demolition
BS 5228: Part 1 Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites – Code of
practice for basic information and procedures for noise and vibration
control
BS 5395: Part 1 Stairs, ladders and walkways - Code of practice for the design
construction and maintenance of straight stairs and winders
Version 1.0
BS 5607 Code of practice for safe use of explosives in the construction industry
BS EN 12811-1 Code of practice for access and working scaffolds and special 2003
scaffold structures in steel
BS 5974 Temporary installed suspended scaffolds and access equipment (partially
superseded by BS EN 1808)
SS 580:2012 Formwork Code of practice
BS EN 1808 Safety requirements on suspended access equipment - design
calculations, stability criteria, construction - tests
1.3.2 Statutory Regulations and Guidelines

Unless otherwise specified, the works shall comply with the relevant sections of the
following statutory requirements:
a. Factories Act (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction - BOWEC)
Regulations, MOM
b. Guidelines on Handling Asbestos Materials, MOM
c. Code of Practice for Handling of Asbestos Materials, MOM
d. Factories (Asbestos) Regulations, MOM
e. Factories (Asbestos) (Amendment) Regulations, MOM
f. Factories (Medical Examinations) Regulations, MOM
g. Building Control Regulations (BCR)
h. Environmental Pollution Control (Air Impurities) Regulations (NEA)
i. Environment Public Health Act (NEA)
j. Code of Practice for Railway Protection (LTA)
k. Guide to Carrying Out Restricted Activities within Railway Protection and Safety Zones
(LTA)
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Contractor’s Submissions & Proposals

Propose sequence and method of demolition in a form of method statement.
Do not vary methods on site from the agreed method statement without prior acceptance.
Notify the SO any proposed variations to the method statement within 14 days unless
otherwise agreed.
Propose as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control ground movement
and vibration do not perform satisfactorily.
1.4.2 Engineering Design and Calculations

1.4.2.1 General
Engage a PE (Civil) and other qualified and experienced personnel to prepare all drawings
and calculations for the following works:
a. Temporary support structures
b. Temporary hoarding
Version 1.0
c. Scaffolding and staging
1.4.2.2 Professional Engineer

The responsibilities of the PE include:
a. Planning of sequence of installation and dismantling
b. Assessment of the structural integrity of existing property and abutting property
c. Design of temporary ERSS for deep excavation
d. Design to control ground water and provision of temporary drainage
f. Submit calculations to BCA for approval as a QP and to the other authorities for record.
g. Supervise the demolition work in accordance with the Building Control Regulations.
1.4.2.3 Temporary Hoarding

Design the temporary hoarding to withstand all imposed loads due to wind, crowds and impact,
where applicable, and to provide protection to pedestrians.
1.4.2.4 Scaffolding and Staging

Provide Professional Engineer’s endorsement when the scaffolding and staging works
exceeds the following criteria:
a. the deck is more than 3m above ground.
b. the deck carries an intensity of loading higher than 1.5 KN/m2.
c. the staging is more than 3 tiers.
1.4.3 Supervision
1.4.3.1 Demolition
Engage a full-time competent supervisor with appropriate demolition experience to supervise
the work strictly in accordance with the directions of the engaged Professional Engineer.
A competent supervisor shall have sufficient professional or technical training, knowledge
and actual experience to enable them to:
a. carry out their assigned duties at the level of responsibility allocated to them
b. understand fully any potential hazards related to the work under consideration.
c. detect any technical defects or omissions in that work, recognize any implications for
health and safety caused by those defects or omissions.
d. be able to specify a remedial action to mitigate those implications.
1.4.3.2 Scaffolding and Staging

Engage a registered scaffold erector to supervise the erection of all scaffolding and staging in
compliance with the Factories Act Chapter 104.
1.4.4 Qualifications
Provide evidence of past experience for all personnel to the SO for acceptance prior to
commencement of the Works.
1.4.5 Verification of Information
Version 1.0
Obtain from the SO and verify available information relevant to the following:
a. existing site surveys
b. existing services
c. existing building on the site
d. site investigation
Carry out additional investigation or request from the authorities to ensure that adequate
information is available to carry out the works.
Allow for conditions peculiar to the site and all other matters affecting the proposed Work and
allow as necessary for the types of materials to be excavated.
1.4.5.1 Existing Site Surveys

Engage a Registered Surveyor to carry out or, if given, to verify the survey prior to
1.4.5.2 Existing Services

Comply with all the statutory requirements in respect of the existing services at and around the
vicinity of the Site.
Terminate or divert all relevant existing services as required by the authorities prior to
Obtain information on the existing services including services to private properties. Verify actual
sizes and locations of all services and mark on site prior to commencement of the Work.
Conduct under ground services detection by means of electro-magnetic detector or by means
of hand-dug inspection pit. Propose suitable method to the SO for acceptance.
Mark type and depth of under ground services with signboards and overhead services with
headroom markers. Inform the authorities any services encountered on site.
1.4.6 Condition Survey
Prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a condition survey to adjacent
buildings in accordance with the requirements of section C1-20 “Condition Survey and
Monitoring”. Submit all records to the SO and adjacent property owners where directed.
Keep a copy of the survey report on site ready for inspection.
1.4.7 Instrumentation and Monitoring

Provide instrumentation to monitor the ground movement, vibration and condition of adjacent
properties. Refer to Section C2-50, Clause 3.1, and the drawings for the schedule of
instrumentation required. If necessary or as required by the authorities, propose and provide
additional instrumentation and monitoring for records.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may be carrying out
instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of installation and readings.
For general requirements of the instrumentation and monitoring works refer to Section
C2-50.
1.4.8 Upholding of Adjoining Properties
Version 1.0
Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads, footpaths etc.,
where applicable, together with the mains and services from the time of taking possession of the
site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and keep clear of mud
and debris.
1.4.8.1 Weatherproofing of Adjoining Buildings

Allow for the weatherproofing of any surfaces of the adjoining buildings that are exposed
by the demolition as required.
1.4.9 Site Safety
1.4.9.1 General
Do not permit any person to do anything not in accordance with the generally accepted
principles of safe and sound practice.
Ensure a safe environment on the Site at all times. Maintain all safety provisions
properly and do not remove any specific equipment etc without the written acceptance
of the SO.
Ensure that all personnel take necessary and sufficient safety precautions
1.4.9.2 Legislation Compliance

Site safety shall comply with the Factories Act and its subsidiary legislations including the
Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction - BOWEC Regulation.
Obtain a Certificate of Registration under Part III of the Act prior to the commencement of the
Works.
1.4.9.3 Site Safety Supervisor

Employ a site safety supervisor with a recognized and approved certification in
construction safety on full-time basis throughout the duration of site works.
The responsibilities of the site safety supervisor include:
a. to supervise safety and promote safety conduct
b. to inspect and rectify any unsafe place of work
c. to correct any unsafe practice
d. to ensure that the provisions of the Factory Act and its subsidiary legislations are complied
with.
1.4.10 Temporary Access Roads
Submit the proposed alignments and levels of temporary access roads to the SO for
acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.
Maintain all necessary temporary access roads with drainage ditches over their full length.
Divert and reinstate the permanent drainage system.
1.4.11 Temporary Access Stairways and Walkways
Version 1.0
Provide temporary access stairways and walkways in compliance with BS 5395: Part 1,
particularly with respect to minimum headroom and clearance, both vertically and perpendicular
to the plane of the stairs.
1.4.12 Temporary Works

Erect all temporary structures in strict compliance with the Professional Engineer's design.
1.4.13 Temporary Hoarding
1.4.13.1 General
Erect protective hoarding, safety netting/catch platform or other structures to ensure public
safety prior to starting demolition works.
Provide, erect and maintain a continuous hoarding around the entire contract boundary
prior to commencement of the works.
Erect the hoarding at not less than 300mm away from any permanent structure such as
footway, drain, pipeline, etc. unless otherwise agreed.
1.4.13.2 Type of Hoarding
The types of hoardings to be erected depend on the building locality and the demolition zone. In
general, the categories of hoarding shall be as follows: Category A: Protective hoarding for use
where footway is needed; Category B: Protective hoarding for use where footway is not needed;
Category C: Protective hoarding erected on carriageway; Category D: Scaffold hoarding shall
be minimum 6.8metres high where the distance between the building edge and the hoarding is
less than 1½ times the height of the building;
Category E: Metal hoarding shall be minimum 2metres high where the distance between the
building edge and the hoarding is more than 1½ times the height of the building.
Refer to PSD for the category of hoarding required for the project. The category of hoarding
required for this project is Category A.
1.4.13.3 Access Locations

Provide metal gates/doors with minimum and maximum height as specified in the PSD, for
the main and side entries located at approved positions. There shall be a maximum of two
entry points for the entire site unless otherwise agreed.
Provide metal gates/doors with minimum and maximum height of 2.1m and 5m respectively.
1.4.13.4 Hoarding Decoration and Signage

Maintain the hoarding and gates at all times to ensure no deterioration of the structure
and fading of the paint works throughout the duration of the Contract.
Display "DANGER”, “KEEP-OUT" and "NO TRESPASSING" signs in the four official languages
at conspicuous locations on the exterior side of the hoarding.
Paint such signs in red and white background with gloss finishing enamel paint.
1.4.13.5 Project Signboard

Where required, incorporate project signboard according to architectural drawings as part of the
Version 1.0
hoarding.
1.4.14 Site Inspection

Visit and inspect the site to understand the conditions and characters of the Works and to
ascertain the exact position and full extent of the Works.
1.4.15 Demolished Material

Take possession of all demolished material. Hand over those identified in the PSD. Hand
over the following list of demolished material to the SO:
a. Nil
Dispose all debris at NEA approved tips. Take special care to prevent debris from site being
carried or blown onto surrounding areas. Clean vehicle wheels before the vehicle leaves site.
1.4.16 Rubbish
Take all reasonable steps to minimise waste production on site
Dispose rubbish and unwanted non-hazardous materials at NEA approved tips and keep the
site clean and tidy. Remove all rubbish, dirt and residues from voids and cavities before filling
or closing in.
Sort and dispose of recyclable material at an NEA approved Material Recycling Facility where
applicable. Retain waste transfer documentation on site.
1.4.17 Burning on Site

Do not permit burning of materials.
1.4.18 Reinstatement and Making Good
1.4.18.1 General
Avoid damage to existing structures, pavements and properties. Reinstate and make good any
damage caused by or as a result of the Works. Reinstatement and making good shall also
include all affected fixtures, fittings and finishes.
1.4.18.2 Consents
If it is found necessary to break up existing pavement, road, footpath, etc for purposes
as required in the Contract, notify the SO accordingly prior to commencement of
Works.
If work is to be carried out on public roads, obtain permission from LTA.
1.4.19 Security
Adequately safeguard the site, products, materials, plants and any existing buildings affected
by the Works from theft.
1.4.20 Pest Control
Version 1.0
Engage a pest control operator who is registered with the BCA under the Work Head for Pest
Control to provide comprehensive pest control and surveillance work on the site.
Submit the name of the pest control operator and proof of BCA registration to the SO for
acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.
Pest control and surveillance programme shall comply with the requirements of the NEA as the
following:
a. Submit a detailed pest control and surveillance programme to the Environmental Health
Office, NEA prior to commencement of the work.
b. Maintain a site register containing an up-to-date record of pest control and surveillance
that have been carried out. Make site register available for inspection by the SO.
c. Take all necessary measures to prevent the site (including vacant flats where relevant)
from becoming conducive to the breeding or harbouring of vectors.
d. Carry out site checks at least once a week to detect and remove breeding and harbouring
grounds.
1.4.21 Pollution Control
1.4.21.1 General
Take all reasonable precautions to prevent pollution of the site and the general environment
including streams and waterways. If pollution occurs, inform the appropriate authorities and
the SO immediately and provide them with all relevant information.
1.4.21.2 Air Pollution Control

Take all necessary measures to abate the discharge of smoke, fumes or obnoxious gases
from any construction equipment.
Stop using construction equipment discharging excessive smoke, fumes or obnoxious
gases and replace it with the accepted equipment.
Comply with the relevant provisions of the Environmental Pollution Control (Air Impurities)
Regulations and/or any requirement of other relevant authorities.
1.4.21.3 Dust Control

Take all necessary measures to control the dust such as periodically spraying demolition works
with water.
For buildings exceeding 6 storeys, erect fine netting adequately supported to a minimum
height of 6m above the hoarding for further dust control.
1.4.22 Fire Prevention
Take all necessary precautions to prevent personal injury, death and damage to the Works or
other properties from fire. Comply with FSSB’s requirement for Fire Prevention on Construction
Sites.
1.4.23 As Build Site Survey
Carry out a complete topographical survey of the site upon completion of the works indicating
levels of ground and remaining structures and services, and other ground features remaining
on site.
Version 1.0
1.4.24 Quality Control Plan
Submit and work to a quality control plan as agreed with the SO. Refer to the General
Requirements section, clause 1.4.10 for guidance.
1.5 Definition
a. Temporary Works All construction works that are not part of the Permanent
Works but are required in order to complete the Permanent
Works
2.1 Contractor’s Design
2.1.1 Temporary Works

Design temporary works in accordance with BS EN 12811-1:2003 and in accordance with the
relevant statutory requirements. The design shall include foundations or other appropriate
supports.
2.1.2 Hoarding Design

Design hoarding in accordance with the relevant statutory requirements.
Ensure that the hoarding erected is able to resist the design imposed loading.
2.2 Falsework
2.2.1 Foundations
Foundations for false work shall be suitable to sustain the calculated maximum loads without
failure or unacceptable settlement.
2.2.2 Duration of Use

Falsework shall remain in place until the elements of the permanent construction are capable of
self-support.
2.2.3 Protection from Impact

Protect falsework from accidental impact such as passing vehicles, plant and cranes. Where a
residual risk of impact is identified design the system accordingly.

Generally comply with the requirements of BS 5228 Part 1.
The vibration generated by the works in MRT structures not to exceed a peak particle
velocity of 15mm/s.
Unless otherwise directed, refer to Section C2-50, Clause 4.2.2 for general restrictions on
ground movements and vibration limits for adjacent structures where relevant.
Version 1.0
2.4 Noise Nuisance

Take all necessary actions to ensure compliance with the Environment Public Health Act, under
Section 46 or the latest noise control regulations imposed by the NEA or any relevant
authorities.
The noise level at the nearest occupied building outside the Site shall not exceed the following
maximum permissible noise level, or shall have met the noise control guidelines introduced by
NEA whichever is the more stringent:
Type of occupied buildings Applicable Period Maximum allowable equivalent

continuous noise level measured over
a period of 5 minutes in dB
(a) Hospital, school, home for 7am to 7 pm 75
the aged, sick etc 7pm to 7 am 55
(b) Buildings other than those 7am to 7 pm 90
in (a) above
7pm to 7 am 70
Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
Comply with all the provisions under the latest Land Transport Authority (LTA) Code of Practice
for Railway Protection and the Guide to Carrying Out Restricted Activities within Railway
Protection and Safety Zones for the Works and other activities within the railway protection zone
and railway safety zone.
3.1 Falsework
Comply with the requirements of BS 5975 and SS 580:2012.
3.2 Backfill Material

Comply with the requirements of Section C2-20 ‘General Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)’,
Clause 3.1, unless otherwise agreed.
3.3 Scaffolds and Access Equipment

Comply with the requirements of BS EN 12811-1 2003 and BS 5974.
3.4 Prohibited Equipment
Do not use the prohibited equipment and methods as scheduled in the PSD. Do not use the
prohibited equipment and methods as scheduled below:
a. NA
Version 1.0
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Survey
Prior to the commencement of the Works, verify all available information. Carry out a detailed
visual survey and examination of the physical condition and structural stability of the building(s)
to be demolished and other surrounding buildings.
Take photographs where necessary.
Carry out a further survey and examination of the structures on completion of the Works.
4.2 Demolition Methods

Identify appropriate method for demolition by completing risk assessments for the Works. Adopt
specific precautionary safety measures appropriate to the proposed method.
Establish and maintain safe working spaces and exclusion zones as appropriate. Ensure all
personnel are familiar with and trained in the use of the particular plant and machinery that
will be used.
Follow the requirements of the method statement for the Works.
4.3 Precautions Against Uncontrolled Collapse

Ensure that the removal of certain parts of the building or structure during demolition will not
affect the structural integrity of other parts.
If at any time, it appears that the other parts have become unsafe or the structural integrity of
the building is compromised, propose all necessary remedial actions to provide adequate
support to the building to prevent uncontrolled collapse.
Pre-determine where temporary support will be needed. If the structure abuts other buildings,
provide such lateral support to prevent collapse.
Provide adequate shoring before the existing lateral support is disturbed.
4.4 Safety Measures
4.4.1 Sequence
Demolish buildings and other structures in the reverse order to that of their construction. The
order of demolition for buildings should be progressive level-by- level, having regard to the
type of construction.
4.4.2 Debris
4.4.2.1 Restrictions on Free Falling of Debris

Allow demolition debris to fall freely to the ground internally or externally only where the
horizontal distance from the point of fall to a public access or adjoining property is more than
6m or half the height from which the debris is dropped, whichever is greater. In any case,
ensure the erection of protective hoarding, safety netting/catch platform or other structures to
protect public safety prior to starting demolition works.
Version 1.0
In cases when demolished material is allowed to fall freely externally, provide a covered
hoarding with catch fan. In other cases, use chutes or skips.
Prior to demolition of walls, sections of the floors should be removed by hand demolition
to facilitate the free fall of debris.
4.4.2.2 Debris Accumulation

Do not allow debris to accumulate above an average height of 2m from ground level. Prevent
debris from overloading scaffold platforms.
4.4.2.3 Use of Look-out

When material is being dropped, post a look-out man to ensure safety generally.
4.4.3 Scaffolding Defects

Correct immediately any defects found during an inspection.
If this is not possible take it out of use immediately by removing all persons from it and
placing a barrier and warning sign at each access point.
4.5 Temporary Structures

Keep all such structures away from proposed roads, driveways, car parks and services lines.
Maintain all such structures in a clean, hygienic and safe condition. Remove all such structures
on completion of the Works.
4.6 Excavation
Refer to Section C2-20 ‘General Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)’, Clause 4.2.
4.7 Adjoining Properties

When demolishing structure(s) against adjoining property leave adequate temporary
support and protection at each stage. Maintain and alter temporary supports and protection as
necessary as work progresses.
Ensure the works do no cause damage to adjoining properties and do not leave
unnecessary or unstable projections. Do not disturb foundations of adjoining properties.
Report to the SO any defects exposed or becoming apparent in adjoining properties. Promptly
repair any damage caused to adjoining properties by the Works. Make good to ensure safety,
stability, weather protection and security.
4.8 Partly Demolished Structures

Cut away and strip out with care to reduce the amount of making good to a minimum. Prevent
debris from overloading any part of the structures to be retained.
Version 1.0
Leave partly demolished structures in a stable condition with adequate temporary supports
at each stage to prevent risk of uncontrolled collapse.
Prevent access of unauthorised persons to partly demolished structure(s).
4.9.1 Restrictions on Plant

No jib, lifting appliance or any other moving and stationery parts of the mechanical equipment
shall encroach within 6m on plan from the edge of the nearest Mass Rapid Transit above-
ground structures unless the equipment is restricted to work beneath the structure.
Engage a Professional Engineer to certify that the foundation of the mechanical equipment
is structurally sound and adequate prior to its installation.
Install an auto cut-off system for tower cranes to prevent the top of boom to swing closer than
6m from edge of viaduct structure. The jibs of the cranes shall be pointed away from Mass
Rapid Transit structures. The temporary access shall be stable for machinery to move on.
4.9.2 Equipment Checks

Carry out regular checks to ensure that all mechanised equipment are in good working
condition at all times.
4.9.3 Equipment Operators

Employ only experienced, trained and competent operators for mobile cranes, tower cranes
and other mechanical equipment.
4.9.4 Height Restriction

Install a temporary height restriction gantry with signboard 6m away from the edge of both sides
of the viaduct structure for any access passing underneath the Mass Rapid Transit structures.
4.10 Removal of Asbestos Material
4.10.1 Location of Asbestos

If known to exist, asbestos materials are identified at locations as described in the PSD.
Asbestos materials are identified at locations as described below:
a. Nil
Undertake an independent survey to ascertain the presence, location, extent and nature of
asbestos materials in the buildings.
Report immediately to the SO any suspected asbestos materials discovered during demolition.
Avoid disturbing such materials.
Agree with the SO safe methods for removal.
Version 1.0
4.10.2 Regulations
Undertake all asbestos removal work in strict accordance to the “Guidelines on Handling
Asbestos Materials” and “Code of Practice for Handling of Asbestos Materials” issued by
the Occupational Health Department (OHD), Ministry of Manpower (MOM).
In general, notify the Chief Inspector of Factories at least 28 days prior to
commencement of the work in accordance to the Factories Act (Asbestos)
Regulations, and Factories (Asbestos) (Amendment) Regulations.
Submit X-ray examination report of the workers prior to commencement of the work to the
OHD, MOM.
4.10.3 Preparation of Area

Prior to the physical removal of the asbestos materials, carry out preparation of the asbestos
work area by removing all movable objects to prevent contamination. Cover all immovable
objects with polyethylene sheeting.
Demarcate the asbestos work area to prevent unauthorised access including warning signs.
Remove the asbestos materials with minimal breakage and supplement by vacuuming using
High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter and/or wet method using water spray.
4.10.4 Safety Precautions

Ensure all workers to use respirators, goggles and protective clothing.
Collect all debris, used respirators, goggles and protective clothing into sealed and labeled
impermeable containers. Consult The Pollution Control Department, NEA on the disposal of
asbestos materials.
4.11 Precautions against Vibrations and Concussion

Take special care for demolition of structures to ensure that no undue vibration or concussion
is caused which could result in damage to other adjacent structures, underground services or
drains by falling debris.
4.12 Site Drainage

Prevent ponding on site from rainwater or other causes by pumping, creation of bunds,
use of temporary drainage or other means prior to backfilling/levelling.
4.13 Unknown Hazards

Inform the SO any unrecorded tanks, chemicals etc discovered during demolition work.
Agree with the SO methods for safe removal, filling etc.
4.14 Open Basements

Not applicable.
4.15 Filling of Basements

Not applicable.
Version 1.0
4.16 Reinstatement and Making Good to Disturbed Areas
4.16.1 Services
Temporarily disconnect and/or divert all affected services prior to the commencement of Works
and reinstate immediately upon Substantial Completion of the Works.
Reinstate and make good the affected Works and services in such a manner that upon
substantial completion they shall be in as good order and condition as they were at the
commencement of the contract.
4.16.2 Backfilling / Leveling / Compaction

Refer to Section C2-20 ‘General Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)’, Clause 4.7.
4.17 Completion
Clean all rubbish, debris and surplus materials and leave the whole site clean and tidy.
Complete to the required final condition of the site as described in the PSD.
Complete to the required final condition of the site as described below:

a. NA
4.18 Preparation for Cultivation with Turfing

Clean all loose stones, gravels, tree stumps and building debris in the areas indicated for turfing
on the drawings. Loosen the top 100mm deep layer and grade to fall as indicated. For specific
requirements on turfing refer to architectural specifications.
4.19 Other Particular Requirement
Comply with other project specific requirements or restrictions for the works as described in the
PSD if any.
Comply with other project specific requirements or restrictions for the works as described below:
a. No noisy works during school examination period
b. Refer to NIA report
5 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS
5.1 Work Submissions

Refer to PSD for the list and timing for required submissions for the works. Comply with the details
of the applicable submissions as outline below.
Refer to schedule below for the list and timing for required submissions for the works:
(Tick when applicable)
Applicable Timing for

(Tick) submission
Version 1.0
Design Submission
Method Statements
Site Management
Site Layout Plan
Survey Report
Scaffolding/ falsework Inspection
Proposals for Monitoring MRT Structures for Vibration
Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety
Zone
5.1.1 Design Submission

Submit the design, calculation and detailed drawings of temporary works, temporary hoarding,
scaffolding and staging to the SO for acceptance at least 14 days before commencement of the
relevant work. Include additional information as set out in the PSD if any.
Include additional information as set out below:
a. ERSS system.
5.1.2 Method Statements

Submit method statements covering the following and describing how and when the following
tasks is carried out within 14 days from commencement of the relevant work.
a. sequence, method and schedule of demolition
b. sequence, method and schedule of excavation/backfilling
c. services detection
d. existing site surveys
e. temporary access roads
f. temporary works
g. temporary supports of buildings/services to be retained
h. temporary hoardings
i. scaffolding and staging
j. plant and equipment
k. debris disposal
l. rubbish disposal
m. asbestos material removal
n. reinstatement and making good
o. noise nuisance control
p. vibration control
q. pest control
r. pollution control
s. dust control
t. fire prevention
w. safety measures
Version 1.0

Submit to the SO for acceptance the following details soon as practical from commencement
the contract:
a. site organisation structure

b. names and qualifications of Contractor’s staff
c. names and qualifications of site safety supervisors
d. names and qualifications of pest control operators
e. names and qualifications of scaffolding inspectors
f. quality control plan
g. additional requirement as noted in the PSD Additional requirement for the Site management
submission are:
a. Nil
5.1.4 Site Layout Plan
Submit a site layout plan to the SO indicating proposed locations of all temporary structures for
acceptance before their erection.
Notwithstanding such acceptance, relocate any such structures when required to do so by the
SO.
5.1.5 Survey Report

Submit a survey report to the SO covering at least the following information:
a. form, condition and demolition methods of the structure(s)
b. form, location and removal methods of any toxic or hazardous materials
c. type and location of adjoining properties which may be adversely affected by noise,
vibration, dust or removal of structure
d. identification and location of services above and below ground
e. type and location of any features of historical, archaeological or geological importance
f. any potentially dangerous site conditions
g. any constituent materials have deteriorated in strength to an extent that could result in
instability due to a particular demolition process
5.1.6 Scaffolding/ falsework Inspection

Submit scaffolding inspection record to the SO including date of inspection, name of inspector
and any defects/modifications/rectifications carried out.
5.1.7 Proposals for Monitoring MRT Structures for Vibration

Not applicable.
5.1.8 Works within Railway Protection Zone and Railway Safety Zone
Not applicable.
Prepare and submit the quality control plan for SO’s acceptance prior to starting work.
Version 1.0
As-built Survey
After the completion of the demolition works, engage a registered Surveyor to carry out a site
survey of the site and immediate surround.
Submit copies of the survey plan as directed by the SO showing at least information such as:
a. level of ground and structures
b. existing structures known, both above and below ground
c. existing services
d. demarcation of property boundaries
e. reserved zones as required by the authorities
f. street furniture, drainage systems, etc
g. existing trees in accordance to NParks requirements
h. additional information as scheduled in the PSD
Additional information as scheduled below:
a. Nil
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.

1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related Sections 3
1.3 Standards and Regulations 3
1.4 Trade Preambles 3
1.5 Definitions 4
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 The Survey 6
2.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring 6
3. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 7

3.1 Instrumentation 7
3.2 Camera 7
4. WORKMANSHIP 8
4.1 Working Method 8
4.2 Photographic Record 8
4.3 Installation of Instrumentation 8
4.4 Crack Survey 8
4.5 Level Survey 8
4.6 Reflector Targets 9
4.7 Plumb Survey 9
4.8 Record of Defects 9
4.9 Reading of Crackmeters and Tiltmeters 9
4.10 Readings of Vibration Sensors 9
4.11 Monitoring Records 9
4.12 Reinstatement 9
5. VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS 10

5.1 Submissions 10
5.2 Survey Records 11
5.3 Monitoring Records 11
5.4 Post-completion Survey Records 12
2
Version1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements for the condition survey and monitoring of
buildings, services and other structures within the area of influence of other
construction works. The survey may be carried out prior to and / or after the execution
of the other construction works.
It applies generally to buildings and structures that could be affected by works such
as:
a. Demolition
b. Piling
c. Earthworks
The requirements for instrumentation for monitoring are given in section C2-50
“Instrumentation and Monitoring”.
This document specifies project specific data to be read in conjunction with section
C1-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this document take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS. Clause references in this document tie with
those in C1-20 with the same clause title.
1.1.1 Prescribed Scope of Survey and Monitoring

Carry out the condition survey and monitoring for the specific buildings as identified in
the PSD.
Carry out the condition survey and monitoring for the specific buildings as identified in
the following:
a. All buildings and structures within zone as recommended in BCA guidelines.

Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following work
sections:

Where the works are done as required by the authorities, comply with all standards
and regulation as directed by the authorities.
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Contractor’s Submissions and Proposals

Propose suitable methods of survey and instrumentation for the purpose of
monitoring, for SO’s acceptance and comply with such.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.2 Access to Adjacent Sites

Obtain appropriate permission for access to adjacent sites prior to commencement of
the works. Arrangements for the access are given in the PSD.
Arrangement for access to adjacent sites are as follows:
Site Arrangement

1.4.4 Verification of information

Obtain relevant information on existing buildings and structures from the SO. Verify
the information given and, if necessary, carry out additional investigation or request
from the authorities to ensure that adequate information is available to carry out the
works
1.4.5 Notice of Survey

Provide within time specified in the PSD, notice of the intended date and scope of
condition and post-condition surveys to the affected parties.
Provide within 7 days notice of the intended date and scope of pre-condition and
post-condition surveys to the affected parties.

Install suitable instrumentation for continuous monitoring of the conditions of the
prescribed buildings in the course of other construction works. Based on the condition
of the buildings surveyed, propose suitable schedule of instrumentation and
frequency of readings for SO’s acceptance.
Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may be
carrying out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of installation
and readings.
For general requirements of the instrumentation, refer to Section C2-50.
1.4.6.1 Instrumentation Engineer

Engage qualified instrumentation engineer(s) to the SO’s acceptance to install and
record readings for all the instruments.
1.5 Definitions
a. Trigger Value The value of movement or vibration detected as
reaching the “Alert” or “Work Suspension” level as
defined below.
b. Alert Level The value of movement or vibration detected at
which the frequency of readings is reviewed and the
instrumentation checked.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
c. Work Suspension The value of movements or vibration detected at

Level which the work causing the movement or vibration is
halted pending further review of both the structure
and the methods of working.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 The Survey

Provide adequate information to allow agreement as to the condition of the identified
buildings/structures/services prior to the commencement of the construction works
and any change in that condition that has occurred during and upon completion of the
construction works.
2.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring

Provide adequate record to identify changes that occurred and to allow changes to
methods of the construction works such as to avoid or minimise damage to the
surveyed buildings.
When planning for suitable methods and instrumentation for the survey, take account
on the limits on movements and levels of vibration, Section C2-50, Clause 4.2.2, as
well as in the respective work sections relevant to the other construction works. Also
take account of the frequency of monitoring as indicated in the respective sections.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Instrumentation
For general requirements of the instrumentation and monitoring works refer to
Section C2-50.
3.2 Camera
Use camera capable of producing digital records of the survey unless otherwise
agreed with the SO.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Working Method

Plan to carry out the Works in a manner that the Works do not cause any damage to
the buildings or properties. Submit a workable and reliable working method to the SO
for acceptance. If damage is inevitable provide a solution to rectify the damage to the
SO for acceptance prior to commencement of any work.
4.2 Photographic Record

Submit colour photographs and their negatives to the SO for record. Comply with size
and other requirements as described in the PSD. Where a digital camera is used,
submit an electronic copy of the photographs in either *.jpg or *.bmp format in place
of the photograph negatives.
The photographs shall show clearly all required details and shall contain a graduated
scale and colour chart for reference. These shall be taken under natural light
condition and the intensity of light shall be uniform to reflect the natural colour of the
intended objects. Use flashlight only as agreed.
Ensure that all labels and markers are clearly identified within the photograph.
4.3 Installation of Instrumentation

Give at least 48 hours notice of the intention to install any instrument unless
otherwise agreed by the SO. Install all instruments and establish initial readings prior
to the construction activity or area of works to which they relate unless otherwise
agreed by the SO.
4.4 Crack Survey

Carry out a visual survey of all structural elements in the adjacent properties for
cracks in excess of 0.1mm. Notify the SO if there are signs of structural damages.
Mark the location of cracks thus identified on plans and elevations as appropriate.
The survey shall include at least the cracks previously identified as described in the
PSD.
The survey shall include at least the cracks previously identified as described below:
CRACK SCHEDULE
Crack No. & Location1 Width2 Comments3
Nil NA NA
4.5 Level Survey

Establish the initial (datum) reading of each survey point and submit records to the
SO. Protect the datum during monitoring period.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.6 Reflector Targets

Install prism reflector targets at the locations shown in the drawings.
4.7 Plumb Survey

Carry out a plumb survey to establish the verticality of the members where
necessary.
4.8 Record of Defects

Record any obvious defects on plans/elevations.
4.9 Reading of Crackmeters and Tiltmeters

Typical details of acceptable installations for ground and building settlement points
are shown in the drawings.
Submit for approval details of any alternative installations.
Monitor and record the levels of ground survey and building settlement points
throughout the duration of the Works to the accuracy of 0.5mm.
4.10 Readings of Vibration Sensors

To be carried out by qualified personnel only.
4.11 Monitoring Records

Review the monitoring records on receipt. Notify the SO immediately if the alert or
work suspension levels are reached and agree any action proposed.
4.12 Reinstatement
Reinstate all affected or damaged areas to the acceptance of the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Method Statement

Submit to the SO for acceptance a method statement containing the following
information for each building/structure/service to be surveyed and monitored:
a. nature of survey to be undertaken
b. scheduling and timing of survey and monitoring
c. differentiating between initial survey and subsequent monitoring
d. effect of alert and work suspension levels on timing of subsequent monitoring
e. personnel undertaking survey and monitoring
f. special concern and method of survey and monitoring
g. anticipated damage to the surveyed area and proposed method of reinstatement
5.1.2 Proposals for Monitoring

Provide proposals for monitoring in the form of a method statement to the SO prior to
commencement of the work or as soon as practical during the survey if the results
indicate the need for additional monitoring.
The proposals shall include:
a. proposed instrumentation
b. details and drawings of instruments
c. manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations for installation and
maintenance
d. details of sequence of assembly and connections
e. location of instrumentation
f. programme of installation
g. details of monitoring arrangements and verification procedures
h. frequency of readings
i. format of records

10
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2 Survey Records

Submit survey records as listed in the PSD within time specified after completion of
the survey. Provide each neighbouring owner a copy of relevant portion of the survey
as directed by the SO.
Submit survey records as listed below within 14 days after completion of the survey:
(Tick where applicable):
Item Description Reference Applicable

Clause(s)
1. Photographic Records 4.2
2. Crack Survey Records 4.4

3. Level Survey Records 4.5
4. Records of Defects 4.8
5. Plumb Survey Records 4.7
6. Others (Insert where applicable)
5.3 Monitoring Records
5.3.1 General
Submit two copies of preliminary records of the installation of each instrument within
24 hours from the time of installation of each instrument.
Submit final records for each instrument incorporating any comments from the SO
within seven days of completion of installation of each instrument.
5.3.2 Record information

The records shall incorporate a graphical illustration of the instrument installation and
shall include the following information:
a. Instrument number and location (in eastern and northern co-ordinates and level).
b. Names of personnel responsible for installation.
c. Time and date for commencement and completion of instrument.
d. Plant and labour used.
e. Ground conditions encountered (if applicable).
f. Details of instrument installation (grout, fixings etc).
g. Instrument readings during installation, calibration and immediately after
installation are completed.
h. Location of instrument terminals, housings and any leads or cabling.
i. Details of any splices, numbers of casings or joins.
j. Details of any breakdowns or delays.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3.3 Factual Reporting

Submit the factual reports of monitoring results at intervals as specified in the PSD.
Submit in an acceptable format including a plan showing the location of the structure
and instrumented lines and comprise of at least the following:
a. Plots of measured parameters vs time, depth and/or location of construction
activity with reference to each instrument etc. as agreed with the SO.
b. A comparison of data with predetermined trigger values (Alert or Work
suspension levels), e.g. Settlement Vs Time, horizontal deflections vs time, load
vs depth of excavation, settlement vs location of construction activity / depth of
excavation etc.
c. Highlight of idle or damage instrument and provide estimated time frame for
corrective measures.
Submit the factual reports of monitoring results at an intervals of 7 days.
5.3.4 Interpretative Reporting
5.3.4.1 Frequency
Based on the factual information received, submit interpretative reports of monitoring
results at intervals as specified in the PSD.
Based on the factual information received, submit interpretative reports of monitoring
results at intervals of 7 days.
When established trends indicate potential problems then such areas of concern shall
be re-appraised at intervals consistent with the data collection and reports issued
accordingly as required.
5.3.4.2 Report content

Interpretative Reports shall include a summary plot of all instrumented lines or points
which indicate a trend (including historical data where appropriate) that could result in
a work suspension level being exceeded and any instrumented line or point in which
a work suspension level has been exceeded. Submit recommendations for any
protective measures or actions that are necessary.
5.4 Post-completion Survey Records

Submit the post-completion survey for the SO for record. Follow the same procedures
as for the pre-condition survey unless otherwise required by the SO.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-20 General Earthworks
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 2
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related sections 3
1.5 Definitions 8
2.1 General 9
2.2 Temporary Earth Retaining Supports 9
2.3 Slope Stability 9
2.4 Filling Works for Embankment 9
2.5 Ground Movements and Vibrations 10
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Granular fill materials 11
3.2 Special Fill Material 12
3.3 Rock Fill 13
3.4 Hardcore 13
3.5 Classification of Materials 13
3.6 Materials with Excessive Moisture Content 13
3.7 Blinding to Fill 13
3.8 Geotextile Sheet 14
4. WORKMANSHIP 16
4.1 Preparatory Work 16
4.2 Excavation: Generally 17
4.3 Excavations: Pits and Trenches 18
4.4 Excavations: Cuttings and Slopes 20
4.5 Excavation: Rock Blasting 20
4.6 Filling: Generally 21
4.7 Filling: Compaction of Fill 22
4.8 Filling: Fill Adjacent to Bridge Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls 26
4.9 Filling: Embankments and Fill Slopes 28
4.10 Hardcore Under Concrete Slabs 29
4.11 Use of Geotextile Sheet 29
4.12 Preparation for Cultivation with Spot and Close Turfing 30
4.13 Accuracy and Tolerance 30

5.1 Submissions 31
5.2 Inspection and Tests of Temporary Works 32
5.3 Fill Material Samples 32
5.4 Testing of Fill Materials 32
1. GENERAL
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the following general earthworks items for
building works:
a. Excavation
b. Filling
c. Site-won and imported fill materials
d. Rock-fill
This Document is supplementary to section C2-20 of the NPQS. It provides project
specific data to be read in conjunction with the main section. All modification and
additions noted in this documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.
1.2 Related sections

Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work
sections as follows:
C2-10 Site Investigation
C2-30-1 Diaphragm Wall
C2-30-2 Sheet Piling
C2-30-3 Contiguous Bored Pile Walls and Secant Pile Walls
1.3.1 Standards
requirements of the Standards and Codes listed below or referenced in the body of
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by
the SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes
comply with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes
quoted are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS EN1997 Geotechnical Design
SS CP 18 Earthworks.
SS 31 Aggregate from natural sources for concrete
SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
Other Standards
BS EN 1537 Execution of special geotechnical work – Ground anchors
BS 812 Part 111 Testing aggregates. Methods for determination of ten
percent fines values (TFV)
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS 1377 Soils for civil engineering purposes.

Part 1: General requirements and sample preparation.
Part 2: Classification tests.
Part 3: Chemical and electro-chemical tests.
Part 4: Compaction-related tests.
BS 3882 Specification for topsoil
BS 5228: Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites – Code of
Part 1 practice for basic information and procedures for noise and vibration
control
BS 5835 Recommendations for testing of aggregates.
Part 1: Compatibility test for graded aggregates
BS 5930 Code of practice for site investigations
BS 6906 Methods of test for geotextiles.
Part 8: Determination of sand-geotextile frictional behaviour by direct
shear
BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites.
Part 1: Code of practice for excavation and filling
BS 8002 Code of practice for earth retaining structures
BS 8081 Code of practice for ground anchorages
In the event that the standards or Codes are revised or superceded, refer to the latest
edition or the appropriate substitution for the relevant subjects.
1.3.2 Technical References

Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the works.
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1.1 Design for temporary works

A schematic temporary earth retaining support system including embedded retaining
walls such as sheet piles, diaphragm walls, and soil improvement works etc. may be
indicated in the drawings, together with the schematic strutting or ground anchor
system indicated in terms of the installation levels, the required stiffness and
preloading.
Based on the information, engage a Professional Engineer (Civil) who is experienced
in similar scale of works to:
a. Design and supervise the temporary works and precautionary measures including
temporary slope, retaining structures and supports for stability of the earthworks.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. Prepare a response plan in the event that the temporary works do not perform as
expected in the design.
c. Prepare and submit all design including drawings to the SO for review and the
authorities where applicable.
Take into account of the design requirements as specified in clause 2 below.
Submit the CV of the PE to the SO for acceptance.
1.4.1.2 Assessment on effects of ground movement

Carry out a Building Damage Assessment on the effects of ground movement to the
neighbouring properties due to the works, for the purpose of establishing suitable
values for ‘Alert’ and “Work Suspension’ levels for monitoring. Submit to SO with
endorsement from a PE.
1.4.1.3 Equipment and methods

Propose suitable equipment and methods to carry out the works.
1.4.1.4 Temporary diversion of services

Where applicable, propose schemes and details for the temporary diversion of
existing above ground or underground services to facilitate the works.
1.4.2 Coordination with other works

Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the same time at
the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation, safety and safeguarding
of adjoining properties and each other’s works.

Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a
condition survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements of section
C1-20 “Condition Survey and Monitoring”. Submit all records to the SO and adjacent
property owners where directed.

Provide instrumentation to monitor the ground movement, vibration and condition of
adjacent properties. Refer to Section C2-50, Clause 3.1, and the drawings for the
schedule of instrumentation required. If necessary or as required by the authorities,
propose and provide additional instrumentation and monitoring for records.
and readings.
Section C2-50.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

Accept responsibility for the upholding of the adjoining buildings and roads, footpaths
etc., where applicable, together with the mains and services from the time of taking
possession of the site through the duration of the works.
Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and keep
clear of mud and debris.
1.4.6 Verification of Site Information
1.4.6.1 Site Surveys

Verify and be satisfied that the information given in the existing site survey plans
provided are accurate. If necessary, engage a registered Surveyor to carry out
additional site survey before commencing any work.
1.4.6.2 Additional site investigation

Carry out additional ground investigation where additional information is needed for
the works or when directed by the SO. Carry out the works in compliance with
Section C2-10 “Site Investigation”.
Carry out the boreholes progressively prior to commencement of the works in areas
according to the contractor’s construction programme. On completion of drilling,
backfill the boreholes with a suitable bentonite/cement mix.
Submit the location and schedule for the boreholes to SO’s acceptance prior to
carrying out the works. On completion, prepare the site investigation report and
submit to the SO for acceptance.
1.4.6.3 Groundwater level

Verify the data on groundwater level from available ground investigation reports.
1.4.6.4 Contamination
Verify information on contamination identified or believed to be present on site.
In the event that contamination is either positively identified or suspected, draw to the
attention of all personnel working on site together with the need to take any
precautionary measures in handling contaminated materials, groundwater and
obnoxious vapours from the ground.
1.4.7 Existing Services Affected by the Works

Refer to General Preliminary for the requirements to deal with existing services
affected by the works.
1.4.8 Site Protection

Protect all equipment and working area using fencing or other methods as accepted.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS

Provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and divert and reinstate
the permanent drainage system.
approval prior to their construction.
Provide all temporary roads with drainage ditches over their full length.
1.4.10 Obstructions
If any obstructions such as existing fences, structures, footings, boulders, concrete
blocks, pipes, drains, driveways or ramp are encountered during excavation, submit
proposals for their removal for the SO's acceptance.
1.4.11 Supervision of the Works

Engage a competent and suitably experienced site engineer to the SO’s acceptance,
to supervise the field works.
1.4.12 Licensed Surveyor

Employ a Licensed Surveyor who shall be responsible for surveying the site and
submit the results to the SO.

1.4.14 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations,
notably:
a. Building Control Regulations
b. Code of Practice for Traffic Control at Work Zone
c. Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
Regulations
d. Factories Act
e. SS CP 79 Safety management system for construction worksites
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully
with Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
Additionally, comply also with the following:
b. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
descent of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.5 Definitions
a. Accredited The Testing Laboratory shall mean an organisation or
testing laboratory accredited under the Singapore Laboratory
laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) and fully equipped to carry
out all tests and checks required by the Specification.
b. Topsoil Soil which by its nutrient content is capable of supporting the
growth of vegetation.
c. Obstructions Include rock, concrete, reinforced concrete, solid brickwork,

sheet piles and the like, met within the excavations, but
excluding those met on the surface of the ground.
d. Formation The surface of the ground after completion of any excavation
or filling.
e. Temporary All construction works that are not part of the permanent works
works but are required for their completion.
f. Suitable All that which is acceptable in accordance with the Contract for
Material use in the works and which is capable of being compacted in
the manner as specified to form a stable fill having side slopes
as indicated on the Drawings.
g. Non-suitable Other than suitable material, including:
Material
a. Material from swamps, marshes or bogs.
b. Peat, logs, stumps or other organic matter and
perishable and toxic materials.
c. Material susceptible to spontaneous
combustion.
d. Marine clay generally and clay of liquid limit
exceeding 70 and/or plasticity index exceeding
35.
h. Rock Material with a large coherent mass of such size and strength,
which can be loosened or fractured only by blasting, or the
employment of heavy pneumatic tools, or by chemical
expansion methods.
Loose boulders up to 1m³ in volume that can be removed are
not classified as rock .
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 General
Carry out the earthworks in accordance with BS 8000 Pt 1 and SS CP 18.
2.2 Temporary Earth Retaining Supports

When carrying out detailed design for the temporary supports in clause 1.4.1.1,
ensure the temporary works will withstand all loads, including those due to the
hydrostatic pressure, earth pressure, surcharge loads, overburden, effects of
surrounding properties and varying load conditions due to different stages of
constructions.
Ensure the factor of safety and permissible wall deflection as stipulated are achieved
by taking into account the effects of the designed temporary strutting or anchoring
system.
Verify the design based on BS8002 unless otherwise agreed.
2.2.1 Pits and Trenches

Design, supply, fix and remove all planking and strutting for the excavation as
required. Ensure that the sides of pits and trenches remain stable at all times against
all anticipated loadings.
Ensure the safety of the workmen and to prevent damage to any adjoining property.
Ensure the design comply with the requirements of BS 8002.
2.3 Slope Stability

Provide necessary protective measures to ensure the stability of slopes during the
whole duration of the construction period and in the long term if relevant.
Check slopes from both cut and fill against slip failure to achieve the required factors
of safety as directed.
For slopes stabilized by berms, check the stability of both the overall slope and
slopes between berms.
For slopes formed in weathered or fresh rock such that joints dip into the excavation
are exposed, form the slopes on a continuous profile parallel to the joints to prevent
wedge failure.
2.4 Filling Works for Embankment

Design the filling works to remain stable at all times.
Before proceeding to higher fill at every stage of filling works, report the strength of
the underlying soil to the SO for review and consent to proceed.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.5.1 Ground Movement and Vibration Control for Existing Critical

Structures or Services
Propose for SO’s acceptance, the allowable ground movement and vibration due to the
works, taking into account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties after
carrying out damage assessment as stated in Clause 1.4.1.2. State the values for “alert”
and “work suspension” levels in accordance with the requirements of Building Control
Act [Section 7(2)] Annex (BE/CP/5 OCT 2001).
Notwithstanding the above, ensure that the ground movements and vibrations
generated by the works comply with the following if more stringent:
a. Generally comply with the requirements of BS 5228 Part 1.
b. The vibration generated by the works in MRT structures not to exceed a peak
particle velocity of 15mm/s.
c. Unless otherwise directed, refer to Section C2-50, Clause 4.2.2 for general
restrictions on ground movements and vibration limits for adjacent structures
where relevant.
2.5.2 Consolidation Settlement

Upon completion of the works, ensure that consolidation settlement due to filling
activities have achieved a degree as stipulated in the PSD. Make good any
settlement that may occur up to the end of the period of maintenance.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Granular fill materials

In general, granular fill material shall conform to the requirements of types 1 and 2
materials as delineated below:
3.1.1 Type 1
Fill materials of this category shall consist of any combination of:
a. Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock)
b. Crushed concrete
c. Crushed (non-expansive) slag
d. Well-burned non-plastic colliery shale
e. Natural sand
3.1.2 Type 2
Fill materials of this category shall consist of any combination of:
a. Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock)
b. Crushed concrete
c. Crushed (non-expansive) slag
d. Well-burned non-plastic colliery shale
e. Natural gravel
f. Natural sand
3.1.3 Gradation
The particle size distribution, determined in accordance with BS 1377-2, shall be
within the grading limits below:
Table 3.1.3 Gradation of Granular Fill Materials
BS Sieve Size % By mass passing
Type 1 Type 2
75 mm 100 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100 85 - 100
20 mm 60 - 100 60 - 100
10 mm 40 - 70 40 - 100
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
5 mm 25 - 45 25 - 85
600 micron 8 - 22 8 - 45
75 micron 0 - 10 0 - 10
3.1.4 Moisture Content of Fill
3.1.4.1 Type 1
The material shall be transported, laid and compacted without drying out or
segregation.
3.1.4.2 Type 2
The material shall be transported, laid and compacted at a moisture content within
the range 1% above to 2% below the optimum moisture content determined in
compliance with BS 5835 and without drying out or segregation.
3.1.5 Plasticity of Fines

The material passing the 425 micron BS sieve, when tested in accordance with
BS 1377-2, shall be non-plastic for Type 1 granular material and shall have a
plasticity index of less than 6% for Type 2 granular material. Report for each test the
amount of material retained on the sieve.
3.1.6 Crushing Resistance

When tested in accordance with Section 8 of BS 812-111, the fill material shall have
the following minimum 10% fines values:
Material 10% Fines (kN)
Type 1 50
Type 2 50
3.2 Special Fill Material

When required in the project, special fill material may consist of suitable material of
which at least 95 per cent shall pass a 125 mm BS sieve and at least 90 per cent
shall pass the 75 mm BS sieve. Up to 5 per cent of the material may be made up
from isolated boulders of maximum dimensions not exceeding half the thickness of
the layer of material being placed, provided that the fill can be compacted in the
manner as specified in Clause 4.7.
The coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 10. The fraction passing a 75 m
BS sieve shall be less than 20% by weight and shall have the following
characteristics:
a. Liquid limit not exceeding 35
b. Plasticity index not exceeding 12
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3 Rock Fill

Provide clean well-graded quarry waste from sources outside the Site. The material is
to be resistant to weathering. The maximum size particles in the material shall pass
through a rigid 200 mm square grid and the largest dimension of any particle shall not
exceed 300 mm. The material shall not have more than 10% of its particles passing a
0.75mm BS sieve.
Rock used in rock fill embankments shall, except for any specified external cover to
slopes or within 500 mm of formation levels, be of such size that it can be deposited
in horizontal layers each not exceeding 450 mm loose depth and extending over the
full available width of the embankment.
3.4 Hardcore
Hardcore shall consist of any combination of the above, together with broken brick
free from plaster, dust, loam, wood, rubbish or organic materials. All pieces shall be
less than 75 mm in any direction.
3.4.1 Crushing Resistance

When tested in accordance with Section 8 of BS 812-111, the hardcore material shall
have a crushing resistance of 50kN for 10% fines value.
3.5 Classification of Materials

For the purpose of compaction defined by Clause 4.7.2, materials are grouped as
follows:-
3.5.1 Cohesive Soil

Includes clays with up to 20 percent of gravel and moisture content not less than the
value of the plastic limit (determined in accordance with BS 1377 Test No. 3) minus 4.
3.5.2 Well-Graded Granular and Dry Cohesive Soils

Include clays containing more than 20 per cent of gravel and/or having a moisture
content less than the value of the plastic limit (determined in accordance with BS
1377 Test No. 3) minus 4, and well-graded sands and gravel with a uniformity
coefficient exceeding 10.
3.5.3 Uniformly-Graded Material

Includes sands and gravel with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less, and all silts and
pulverised fuel ashes. Any soil containing 80 per cent or more material in the particle
size range 0.06 - 0.002 mm will be regarded as silt for this purpose.
3.6 Materials with Excessive Moisture Content

Naturally occurring materials within the site that are non-suitable due only to
excessive moisture content may be spread and dried. The use of material treated in
this way shall subject to the acceptance of the SO.
3.7 Blinding to Fill

Blinding layer to the surfaces receiving sheet overlays or concrete shall be:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Grade 15 concrete or
b. Sufficient sand, fine gravel or other approved fine material applied to fill interstices
and moistened as necessary before final rolling to provide a flat, close smooth
surface.
Sand for blinding shall meet the requirements of SS 31 Table 6, Type C or M.
3.8 Geotextile Sheet

Unless otherwise specified, geotextiles shall be non-woven and shall be made of
polypropylene, polyethylene, polyester or a combination of the aforesaid materials.
Geotextiles shall not be susceptible to bacteria and fungus attack and shall be
resistant to chemical action and not affected by exposure to ultra-violet light.
Use class A geotextiles where the geotextiles serve as a separation or reinforcement
function, Use class B geotextiles where the geotextiles serve as a filtration function.
The property requirements for class A and class B geotextiles are specified below.
Submit methods of laying and jointing prior to commencement of work.
Table 3.8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GEOTEXTILES
Physical Property Class of Geotextile Specification

Class A Class B
Minimum 125 50 ASTM D5261 or

2
Unit Weight, g/m ISO 9864
Minimum Grab 530 270 ASTM D4632

Tensile Strength, N
Minimum Elongation 60 55 ASTM D4595

To Break, % Or ISO 10319
Minimum Trapezoidal 180 80 ASTM D4533

Tear Strength, N
Water Permeability, 2.0x10 -2 2.7x10 -2 Manufacturer’s

cm/sec test report to be
submitted
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Preparatory Work
4.1.1 General
Carry out at least the following in preparing the site for excavation or fill. Confirm the
extent of work before proceeding:
a. Break out old foundations, beds, drains, etc. Seal off drain ends and remove
contaminated earth. Backfill as necessary.
b. Remove existing fences, gates, walls, roads, paved areas and other site features
as required.
c. Remove trees, shrubs and hedges as shown on the drawings. Cut down, grub up
main roots and fill voids. Dispose of all wood using methods approved by the
Authorities.
d. Clear site of rubbish and vegetation. Grub up and dispose of large roots.
e. Remove unwanted materials from site.
4.1.2 Ground Movements

Establish an agreed datum to monitor ground movements at the start of the Works.
4.1.3 Topsoil
Remove all Top Soil to full depth (including turf) from the areas of cuttings and
embankments, and other areas shown on the drawings. Remove topsoil also from
existing embankments required to receive additional fill and from areas of new
ditches and watercourses.
Stockpile all removed top soil for re-use, where practical.
Remove the top soil in accordance with BS 3882.
4.1.4 Areas for stockpiling

Make arrangements and provide appropriate areas for stockpiling of Top Soil and/or
Suitable Material.
4.1.5 Ground improvement by Jet Grouting Method

Carry out ground improvement if necessary prior to commencing the earthworks.
For jet grouting methods of ground improvement refer to Section C2-40-1 “Jet
Grouting Method”, Clause 4.0.
4.1.6 Verification of Ground

Keep a copy of the site investigation report on site for verification of the ground.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2 Excavation: Generally
4.2.1 Drainage of Excavations
4.2.1.1 General
Arrange for the rapid dispersal of water shed on to the site from any source. Where
practicable, discharge the water into the permanent outfall for the drainage system.
Provide adequate means for trapping silt on temporary systems discharging into
permanent drainage systems.
4.2.1.2 Provision of temporary systems

Provide where necessary temporary water courses, ditches, drains, pumping or other
means of maintaining the earthworks free from water. Maintain a sufficient minimum
surface crossfall at all times and, where practicable, a sufficient longitudinal gradient
to enable them to shed water and prevent ponding.
4.2.1.3 Temporary obstruction of free drainage

Do not rely on pumping to provide drainage where temporary earth dumping
obstructs the free drainage of a cutting.
Construct temporary drains to a suitable outfall or install a permanent drainage
through the dumping to ensure free drainage for the whole duration of the Works.
4.2.2 Dewatering
4.2.2.1 General
Groundwater control and drawdown shall comply with the requirements of SS CP 4
and in accordance with agreed methods.
The dewatering method chosen shall ensure the stability of the excavation and the
safety of nearby structures.
Assess the effects of dewatering settlement on structures, services and land in the
vicinity to the acceptance of the SO.
4.2.2.2 Damage due to settlement

Where settlement due to consolidation is predicted to cause unacceptable damage to
structures or utilities, implement measures to prevent such damage.
4.2.2.3 Drainage control measures

For excavations carried out in permeable material below groundwater level, make
provisions for adequate drainage control measures to prevent piping or a general
weakening of the foundations due to the flow of water.
4.2.3 Adjacent Excavations

Where excavations are to be made in close proximity to each other, complete the
deepest excavations first and, where required, fill.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
Do not place excavated material adjacent to the excavation, unless the additional
surcharge from such placement has been considered in the design.
4.2.4 Surplus Excavated Material

Remove all surplus materials that are not specified to be spread and levelled on site
and dispose of to a suitable location.
4.2.5 Formations Generally

a. Remove the last 150 mm of excavations above formation level just before
inspection. Trim excavations to the required profiles and levels, and remove all
loose materials.
b. Keep the bottom of all excavations free from mud and water, trim clean, protect
from the effects of weather and thoroughly compact and consolidate by approved
means.
c. Unless otherwise specified, seal formations within 4 hours of inspection with
concrete or other agreed blinding.
4.2.6 Trafficking in Cuttings

Do not permit constructional traffic other than that required for the excavation and
trimming, on the surface of the bottom of a cutting unless the cutting is in Rock or as
agreed.
Make good any damage to the sub-grade arising from such traffic on the surface with
same materials or materials having the same characteristics.
4.2.7 Separation of Materials

Where the excavation reveals a combination of Suitable and Not Suitable Materials,
carry out the excavation in such a manner that the Suitable Materials are excavated
separately for use in the works without contamination by the Not Suitable Materials.
4.2.8 Temporary supports

Provide temporary supports including temporary retaining structures, strutting and
ground anchors where necessary, in accordance with the accepted design proposals.
Ensure that the construction sequence comply with the accepted design proposals.
Obtain the approval from the SO and the design PE for temporary supports for every
level of strut before proceeding with further excavations to the next level of struts.
4.3 Excavations: Pits and Trenches
4.3.1 General
Ensure the sides of pits and trenches remain stable at all times.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.2 Supports to Excavation

Where required by the nature of the materials being excavated, provide all necessary
planking, strutting, shoring, ground anchoring and any necessary stagings for
upholding the face of the excavation.
Before removing any planking, ground anchors or struts demonstrate that there is
sufficient support to the retained ground to avoid excessive movement.
For temporary ground anchors, as soon as progress of the works permits and with
the acceptance of the SO, de-stress temporary ties and remove all strands if
required. Identify locations where ties are to remain and ensure these are accepted.
Alternatively, subject to the prior agreement, suitably batter the face of the
excavation.
4.3.3 Struts and Walings

Struts and wailings shall be adequate to sustain the calculated maximum loads
without failure or unacceptable deflections.
When necessary, pre-load struts to remove any slackness of the propping system.
Submit the proposed magnitude of preloading for the SO’s acceptance.
Ensure the gaps between the waler and the retaining wall are properly wedged or
packed to SO’s acceptance.
Indicate all working loads of struts clearly on the relevant construction drawings.
4.3.4 Width and Length of Pits and Trenches

Trenches and pits shall not be wider than is necessary for the efficient laying and
jointing of pipes or for other works to be carried out. Do not excavate more than the
agreed length of trench at any one time.
4.3.5 Base of Excavation

Ensure the bottom of all excavations is to the correct levels as required. Fill any over-
excavation of foundation pits or trenches below the specified levels with Grade 15
concrete to the specified levels.
Remove any pockets of soft material or loose rock at the bottom of pits and trenches
and fill the resulting cavities and any large fissures with Grade 15 concrete, or
otherwise fill with Suitable Material compacted in layers as required. Do not trim the
side faces within 24 hours after placing such concrete.
4.3.6 Spoil
Remove all surplus spoil immediately on excavation and keep re-usable material tidy
at all times.
4.3.7 Backfilling of Pits and Trenches

Use Suitable Material, deposited and compacted by approved plant in accordance
with Clause 4.7.2.
Remove timber sheeting and other excavation supports carefully as the filling
proceeds except where they are required to be left in position as agreed.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4 Excavations: Cuttings and Slopes
4.4.1 Excavation in Rock

Unless otherwise specified, excavation in rock shall extend to at least 150mm below
the specified formation level and backfilled with approved materials.
4.4.2 Undulations
In all cuttings, whether in earth or rock, undulations in the general plane of the slope
will not be permitted.
4.4.3 Loose Material

Remove any overhanging, loose or unstable material on slopes.
4.4.4 Drainage
Ensure the working areas are adequately drained throughout the period of
construction.
4.4.5 Benching
Unless otherwise specified, when cutting through any material subject to fretting,
provide a 900mm wide horizontal bench at a height of 600mm above the table drain.
Slope the cut surface at both ends of the bench in accordance with Clause 4.4.6.
In cutting earth overlaying rock, which is required to be cut to a slope steeper than
1:2, provide a 900mm wide horizontal bench at the interface and slope the rock and
earth surfaces in accordance with Clause 4.4.6.
4.4.6 Required Slopes

Ensure the cut slopes achieve the stability as required in Clause 2.3.
4.5 Excavation: Rock Blasting
4.5.1 General
Should rock be met in the course of excavation, remove it by approved means, which
may include blasting.
4.5.2 Use of Explosives

On each occasion that the use of explosives is proposed:
a. Obtain the written consent of the SO.
b. Obtain all necessary licences from the appropriate authorities and conform to all
Government regulations relating to transport, storage, handling and use of the
explosives.
c. Conform also to the rules set out by the authority in charge of Arms and
Explosives.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.3 Safety Precautions
4.5.3.1 General
When blasting is proposed, determine the danger zone likely to be created and
ensure that no damage is caused to persons or property on or off site.
Provide full details as to the steps and precautionary measures to be taken to safeguard
the surrounding properties.
Prior to commencing blasting operations, submit a written report listing any existing
defects in the structures in the zone which may be affected, supported by photographs
where necessary, to the SO.
4.5.3.2 Road closures

When blasting operations are being carried out, close any road affected to traffic and
erect the appropriate signs in accordance with the latest “Code of Practice for
Temporary Traffic Control” published by the Land Transport Authority.
4.5.4 Removal of Loose Material

Upon completion, all rock faces shall be scaled of loose blocks.
4.6 Filling: Generally
4.6.1 General
Filling works shall include the preparation, placing and compaction of Suitable
Material at specified areas.
4.6.2 Placing Fill

Ensure that the areas to be filled are free from loose soil, rubbish and standing water.
Take all necessary precautions to ensure stability of adjacent structures. Ensure
plants employed for transporting, laying and compacting are suited to the material.
Spread and level material in layers and compact as soon as practical. Lay differing
materials separately so that only one type of material occurs in each layer.
4.6.3 Stability of Works

Ensure the filling works remain stable at all times.
4.6.4 Weather Condition

Stop all filling works when the weather is judged by the SO as would adversely affect
the compaction of the fill.
4.6.5 End Tipping

End tipping of fill is not permitted unless otherwise agreed.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7 Filling: Compaction of Fill
4.7.1 General
All materials shall be compacted in layers as soon as practicable after deposition.
Upon completion and before overlaying, the surface of the layer shall be free from
ridges, cracks, loose material, potholes, ruts or other defects. Rectify such defects to
the full thickness of the layer before overlaying.
Before commencing any filling, test each class of material to be compacted by an
acceptable laboratory to establish the maximum value of the dry density that can be
achieved and the optimum moisture content for compaction. Test in accordance with
BS 1377 test no. 13.
4.7.2 Compaction by mechanical plants

Table 4.7.2 below may be used as a guide in establishing appropriate use of
compaction methods and plants.
The depth of each compacted layer shall not be greater than the maximum depth of
the compacted layer stipulated for each type of compaction plant.
Earthmoving plant shall not be accepted as compaction equipment.
Alternative methods or plants may be accepted if it can be demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the SO at site trials that the required field density can be achieved.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7.2 GUIDANCE FOR THE USE OF COMPACTION PLANTS
Type of Cohesive Soil Well-graded granular Uniformly -graded

Compaction and dry cohesive soils materials
Category
Plant
Max depth Min Max depth Min No. Max depth Min
No. of of of of No. of
of
passes Compacted passes Compacted passes
Compacted
layer (mm) layer (mm)
layer (mm)
Smooth- Force per 100 mm
wheeled width
roller
2.1 - 2.6 kN 125 8 125 10 125 10*

2.61 - 5.2 kN 125 6 125 8 125 8*
More than 5.2 kN 150 4 150 8 Unsuitable
Gridroller Force per 100mm
width
2.6 - 5.2 kN 150 10 Unsuitable 150 10

5.3 - 7.8 kN 150 8 125 12 Unsuitable
More than 7.8kN 150 4 150 12 Unsuitable
Tamping More than 40 kN 225 4 150 12 250 4
roller
Pneumatic- Wheel Load
tyred roller
1 - 1.5 tonnes 125 6 Unsuitable 150 10*
1.5 - 2 tonnes 150 5 Unsuitable Unsuitable
2 - 2.5 tonnes 175 6 125 12
2.5 - 4 tonnes 225 5 125 10 Unsuitable
Unsuitable
4 - 6 tonnes 300 4 125 10 Unsuitable
6 - 8 tonnes 350 4 150 8 Unsuitable
Unsuitable
8 - 12 tonnes 400 4 150 8
More than
Unsuitable
12 tonnes 450 4 175 6
Vibratory Force per 100 mm
width
Roller
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
0.25 - 0.45 kN Unsuitable 75 16 150 16

0.46 - 0.70 kN Unsuitable 75 12 150 12
0.71 - 1.25 kN 100 12 125 12 150 6
1.26 - 1.75 kN 125 8 150 8 200 10*
1.76 - 2.30 kN 150 4 150 4 225 12*
2.31 - 2.80 kN 175 4 175 4 250 10*
2.81 - 3.50 kN 200 4 200 4 275 8*
3.51 - 4.20 kN 225 4 225 4 300 8*
4.21 - 4.90 kN 250 4 250 4 300 8*
Vibrating- Static pressure
plate under base plate
Compactor
8.6 - 10.3 kN/m2 Unsuitable Unsuitable 75 6
2
10.3 - 12.1 kN/m Unsuitable 75 10 100 6
2
12.1 - 13.8 kN/m Unsuitable 75 10 150 6
2
13.8 - 17.2 kN/m 100 6 125 6 150 4
2
17.2 - 20.7 kN/m 150 6 150 5 200 4
more than 20.7 200 6 200 5 250 4
kN/m2
Table 4.7.2 (Cont’d)
Type of Cohesive Soil Well-graded granular Uniform-graded

and dry cohesive soils
materials
Compaction Category
Plant Max depth Min Max depth Min Max depth Min
No. of No. of
of Of No. of of
passes passes
passes
Compacted Compacted Compacted
layer (mm) layer (mm) layer (mm)
Vibro- Mass kilogramme
Tamper
50 - 65 100 3 100 3 150 3
65 - 75 125 3 125 3 200 3
More than 75 200 3 150 3 225 3
Power Mass kilogramme
rammer
100 150 4 150 6 Unsuitable
more than 150 275 8 275 12 Unsuitable
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
Dropping Weight of hammer

weight over 5 kN
compactor
Drop 1m to 2m
600 4 600 8 450 8
Drop over 2m
600 2 600 4 Unsuitable
Read this table in accordance with the following definitions:
a. The depth of compacted layer is the height by which an embankment is raised by
each successive compacted layer.
b. The number of passes is the number of times that each point on the surface of
the layer being traversed by the compaction plant (or struck in the case of power
rammers or dropping weight compactors).
c. The effective width of a pneumatic-tyred roller is the sum of the widths of the
individual wheeltracks together with the sum of the spacing between the
wheeltracks provided that each spacing does not exceed 230mm. Where the
spacing exceeds 230mm the effective width shall be taken as the sum of the
widths of the individual wheeltracks only.
d. The force per 100mm width of roll is the total weight on the roller divided by the
total roll width. Where a smooth-wheeled roller has more than one axle the
machine shall be assessed on the basis of the axle giving the highest value of
force per 100mm width.
e. Wheel load is the total weight of the roller divided by the number of wheels.
f. For items marked with an asterisk (*), the rollers shall be towed by track-laying
tractors. Self-propelled rollers are unsuitable.
g. Where a combination of different types of plants are used, the following additional
definitions apply:
I. The depth of layer shall be that for the type of plant requiring the least
depth of layer.
II. The number of passes shall be that for the type of plant requiring the
greatest number of passes.
Disregard the above assessment when a lighter type of plant is used to provide some
preliminary compaction only to assist the use of heavier plant.
4.7.3 Required Field Density

Produce a compacted fill material having a field density of at least the following
percentage of the maximum dry density previously established for that material:
a. 95% in the case of material within 500mm of formation level.
b. 90% in the case of material more than 500mm below formation level.
Notwithstanding compliance with the table in 4.7.2, verify by site tests at a rate of 3
tests per 300m2 or less unless otherwise agreed, that the required field density is
being achieved and make any adjustments to the compaction methods if necessary.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7.4 Moisture Content

Maintain the moisture content of the in-situ material during compaction as close to the
optimum moisture content as possible. If necessary, adjust by wetting or drying on
site to consistently maintain the required in-situ field densities.
4.7.5 Compacting Different Materials

When materials of widely divergent characteristics are used in fill areas, compact in
separate clearly defined areas for each type of material.
If it is not practical to define the areas in which each material occurs, operate the
compaction plant base on the material which requires the greatest compacting effort.
4.7.6 Use of Rock Fill

Spread and level each layer of Rock fill and systematically compact by at least 12
passes of either:
a. A towed vibratory roller with a static load per metre width of roll of at least 1800
kg, or
b. A grid roller with a load per metre width of roll of at least 8000 kg, or
c. Other approved plant.
If the rock contains sufficient soft material for satisfactory compaction to the
requirements of table in 4.7.2 for well graded granular soil, compact the fill according
to the table.
4.7.7 Deterioration of Material

If the material deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot
be compacted in accordance with the specified requirements, seek agreement with
the SO to either:
a. Make good by removing the deteriorated material and replace with Suitable
Material, or
b. Make good the material by mechanical or chemical means to improve its property,
or
c. Cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such that it can be
compacted as required.
4.8 Filling: Fill Adjacent to Bridge Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls
4.8.1 Fill Material

Use Special Fill Material as defined in Clause 0 within the zones as stipulated in table
4.7.2 above.
TABLE 4.8.1: Fill Adjacent to Abutments, Culverts and Retaining Walls
Structure Minimum Width of Special Fill
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
Bridge Abutment & Wingwalls 2m

Culvert wingwalls H/3
Retaining walls H/3 or full width of base, whichever is greater
Barrels of box culverts H/3
Barrels of pipe culverts 600mm all round
4.8.2 Filter Drain

Provide a filter drain layer when filling behind structures with weepholes.
The filter drain shall consist of clean, hard and durable broken stones or hardcore
conforming to the grading as set out in the table below.
TABLE 4.8.2 Filter Drain Material
BS Sieve Size Percentage by weight passing
63mm 100
37.5mm 85 – 100
20mm 0 – 20
10mm 0-5
3.35mm 0
Place the larger stones adjacent to the weep-holes and the smaller particles behind
and above the larger layer.
Unless otherwise specified, the filter drain shall:
a. Have a width of 300mm.
b. Extend horizontally across the whole width of the structures.
c. Cover every weephole vertically by at least 300mm.
4.8.3 Placing Fill

For framed structures, bring up fill at both ends of the structure simultaneously with
the difference in levels of fills at both ends limited to 600mm.
Do not place fill against concrete structures within 21 days after placing concrete
unless sufficient supports have been provided to the walls to the acceptance of the
SO.
4.8.4 Compaction
Place fill in horizontal layers of thickness and compact using the appropriate plant in
compliance with Clause 4.7.2.
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
The degree of compaction shall be at least 95% of the maximum dry density
achievable of the material.
Do not use heavy compaction equipment close to the back of the wall.
4.9 Filling: Embankments and Fill Slopes
4.9.1 Material
Ensure Suitable Materials are being used for embankment fill, including materials
which may be initially wetter than specified but become Suitable after drying. For
capping layers ensure specified material including topsoil are placed to a
consolidated thickness below the formation level.
4.9.2 Build-up and Compaction

Unless justified as impractical, build up embankments evenly over the full width and
maintain a sufficient cambered surface to enable ready drainage of surface water.
Compact fill material as per Clause 4.7.
4.9.3 Rock Fill
4.9.3.1 Spreading and levelling

Using a crawler tractor weighing not less than 15 tonnes. Each layer shall consist of
well-graded rock.
4.9.3.2 Finishing
Fill surface voids with broken fragments before the next layer is placed.
Thoroughly blind the top surface and side slopes of embankments with approved fine
graded material to seal the surface.
4.9.3.3 Use of isolated boulders

Isolated boulders each within the range 0.02 m3 to 0.10 m3 in size may be used
provided that the specified compaction requirements are met and no stone exceeding
0.02m3 shall be placed less than 0.5 metres below the top of the embankment fill.
4.9.4 Embankments Bridging Culverts etc.

In constructing embankments up to and over culverts, pipe drains and bridges, bring
the embankments up equally on both sides. Filling may proceed over widths less than
the full width of the embankment and in steps not exceeding the depth of one layer
above the adjoining area of fill.
4.9.5 Construction Traffic

During construction, control constructional traffic uniformly over the full width of the
embankments.
If it is intended to use the surface of embankments for constructional traffic before
trimming to formation level, bring up and maintain the area to a level not less than
150 mm above formation level before allowing constructional traffic on the surface. In
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
areas of shallow filling where the ground level is within 300 mm of formation level,
bring up and maintain the surface level at least 300 mm above formation level.
Make good any damage caused to the subgrade.
4.9.6 Formation of Slope Faces
4.9.6.1 Form the slope faces of embankments by overfilling, cutting back and
trimming neatly to the determined profile. The formed slopes shall achieve
the stability as required by Clause 2.3.
4.9.6.2 Where an embankment is to be constructed on a hillside, or where the

natural surface falls away at a slope steeper than one vertical to four
horizontal, cut a horizontal bench to support the toe. The minimum width
of the bench shall be one third of the vertical height of the fill (measured
from the toe) but not less than 600mm.
4.9.6.3 Where an embankment is to be constructed on the slopes of existing

embankments exceeding one vertical to four horizontal, the existing slope
shall be cut in the form of horizontal terrace over the full area to be
covered by the new fill. Cut the terraces in minimum width of 600mm and
stepped progressively as the fill progresses.
4.9.6.4 At 1.2m below the embankment surface, no point on the completed slope
shall vary from the required face by more than150mm measured at right
angles to the slope. At greater than 1.2m below the surface, no point on
the completed slope shall vary by more than 300mm.
4.10 Hardcore Under Concrete Slabs

Use material as in Clause 3.4. Provide thicker layer than specified if necessary to
make up levels from stripped site levels to underside of slabs.
4.11 Use of Geotextile Sheet
4.11.1 General
a. Protect from exposure to light, except for a maximum of 5 hours during laying.
Protect from all materials listed as potentially deleterious by the manufacturer.
b. Before commencing laying, remove humps and sharp projections from the ground
and fill hollows. Do not stretch or bridge the geotextile over irregularities and
ensure that the specified lap is maintained.
c. Take care to avoid damage to geotextile by vehicles, plant or by tipping material
from excessive height. Do not allow construction traffic over geotextiles until
covered by the full thickness of fill.
d. Temporarily weight edges of sheet with fill and lay a maximum of 15m of
geotextile before covering to prevent uplift. Place fill as soon as possible after
laying and within a maximum of 24 hours.
e. Place geotextile patches over tears with minimum lap of 300mm beyond extent of
damage and cover immediately to retain in place.
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.11.2 Jointing
Propose and comply with one of the following methods of jointing:
a. 300mm overlap - Overlaps to be 300 to 1000mm, with the wider overlap
necessary on very soft subgrades to allow for movement when trafficked by
vehicles. Overlaps to be weighted down immediately with small amounts of
aggregate.
b. Single stitched prayer seam with high tenacity polyester thread – Carry out
sewing with portable stitching machines using high tenacity polyester or
polyester/cotton thread in a single or double stitch to form a prayer seam
configuration. A single line stitch is generally adequate.
c. Single welt with two rows of staggered, corrosion resistant staples – Carry out
stapling on welted seams with two rows of staggered, corrosion resistant,
staples.
4.12 Preparation for Cultivation with Spot and Close Turfing

Trim and cultivate cut or filled areas that are to be turfed as soon as possible after
completion of the earthworks.
For turfing requirements refer to the architectural specifications.
4.13 Accuracy and Tolerance
4.13.1 General
Comply with SS CP 18 except where noted below.
4.13.2 Permissible Deviations from Formation Levels

a. Beneath mass concrete foundations: ±25 mm.
b. Beneath ground bearing slabs and R.C. foundations: ±15 mm.
c. Embankments and cuttings: ±50 mm.
d. Ground abutting external walls: ± 50 mm, but such as to ensure that finished level
is not less than 150 mm below any damp proof course.
4.13.3 Blinding to Fill

Permissible deviations on surface level: +0, -25 mm
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions

Before work commences, provide the SO with a method statement including at least
the following information as relevant:
a. Proposed excavation and compaction plant.
b. Maximum depth of each compacted layer.
c. Minimum number of passes per layer.
d. Method of treating slopes.
e. Protection of formation and slopes.
f. Proposed temporary works.
g. Dewatering control.
h. Ground anchors, etc.
5.1.2 Programme of Works

Submit to the SO prior to the start of the Work unless otherwise agreed.
5.1.3 Additional Site investigation Factual Report

Extend to the SO, a copy of the factual report for additional site investigation
conducted under Clause 1.4.6.2.
5.1.4 Temporary Works Design
5.1.4.1 General
Before commencement of Work, submit details of proposals for supporting the sides
of all excavation which have slopes steeper than 1:2, or less if poor conditions exist,
or exceeding 1.5 m in depth which will be formed during the course of the work.
Provide adequate information to justify the adequacy of his proposals, if so
requested.
5.1.4.2 Flow chart for ground movement monitoring

Submit a flow chart clearly indicating the proposed line of actions and the persons in-
charge in connection with the actions to deal with critical ground movements for the
SO’s acceptance.
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.4.3 Use of ground anchors

Where there are use of ground anchors as part of the temporary works, submit to the
SO a detailed specification for the anchors as part of the method statement.
Provide an appraisal of the suitability of the proposed anchor installation in relation to
the ground conditions, the possible effects on adjoining structures and services, and
the rights of adjoining owners whose structure or land may be affected.
Ensure all necessary approvals and permits have been obtained from the Authorities.

5.2 Inspection and Tests of Temporary Works

Inspect the temporary works scheduled as follows:
a. Intermediate inspections if the works are in place for more than 1 week.
b. If there has been a change in loading conditions, including impact.
c. After any adverse weather conditions.
Submit a method statement for acceptance indicating the proposed frequency and
details of the inspections.
5.2.1 Pull Out Tests for Ground Anchors

a. Pull-out test shall comply with BS EN 1537
b. Propose numbers of tests for acceptance in the method statement.
c. Perform preliminary pull-out tests prior to the installation of working ground
anchors to verify the design capacity of ground anchors.
d. Carry out acceptance tests on the working ground anchors.
5.3 Fill Material Samples

At least 21 days before filling work commences, submit full details of the sources and
types of the proposed filling materials together with 25kg representative samples of
each type from each source.
On request from the SO collect and dispose of these samples.
At the same time, deliver to an accepted accredited laboratory, sufficient
representative samples of each material for the specified tests, at a rate of one set of
tests per sample.
5.4 Testing of Fill Materials

Carry out the following tests on all proposed fill materials at the rate of one test for
each representative sample:
a. BS 1377-1 Section 3: Classification
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. BS 5930 Site Investigation

c. BS 1377-2: Determination of the particle size distribution.
d. BS 1377-2: Determination of the plasticity index (of material passing the 425
micron BS sieve; % of material retained to be reported).
e. BS 1377-3: Determination of the total sulphate content.
f. BS 812-111: Determination of the ten per cent fines value.
The following tests may be required for certain materials as directed:

a. BS 1377-4: Determination of the dry density/moisture content relationship of
granular soil (vibrating hammer method).
b. BS 1377-4: Determination of the California Bearing Ratio.
c. BS 6906: Part 8: Determination of sand-geotextile frictional behaviour by direct
shear.
d. BS 5835: Determination of strength of aggregates.
5.4.1 Additional Tests

When directed, test all imported fill for compliance with specified limits on
contamination to ensure that material is 'clean' relative to the proposed end use.
Propose and submit the specific criteria, schedule and timing of tests required to SO
for acceptance.
33
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
2.1 Design Verification 8
2.2 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services 8
2.3 Actual Penetration Depth 9
2.4 Water Retention 9
3. MATERIALS 10
3.1 Steel Grade 10
3.2 Sheet Pile Coating 10
3.3 Fabricated Sheet Piles 10
3.4 Clutch Sealant 10
3.5 Installation Equipment 10
3.6 Reuse of Sheet Piles 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Marking and Storage 11
4.2 Clutch Sealant 11
4.3 Handling and Installation 11
4.4 Jetting 11
4.5 Length of Sheet Piles 12
4.6 Forming Holes in Sheet Piles 12
4.7 Cutting and Welding 12
4.8 Walings and Tie Rods 12
4.9 Installation Tolerances 13

5.1 Submissions 14
5.2 Inspection and Testing 15
5.3 Records and Reports 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of the following types of
embedded retaining walls:
C2-30-1: Diaphragm Wall
C2-30-2: Sheet Piling
C2-30-3: Contiguous Bored Pile Walls and Secant Pile Walls
The walls may be used solely to form embedded retaining walls resisting principally
horizontal loads, or also to support vertical loads.
This sub-section covers the requirements for sheet pile walls.
This document is supplementary to section C2-30-2 of the NPQS. It provides project
section.

C5-10 Structural Steelwork
C5-20 Protective Works for Structural Steelwork
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1997 Geotechnical design
SS CP 8 Use of manual metal arc-welding in the steel building construction
SS 187 Qualification test for manual metal-arc welders
Other Standards
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS 5228 Noise and vibration control on construction and open sites

Part 1 Code of practice for basic information and procedures for noise
and vibration control
Part 4 Code of practice for noise and vibration control applicable to
piling operation
BS 8002 Code of Practice for Earth Retaining Structures
BS PD 5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels
In the event that the standards or Codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
1.3.2 Technical Reference

a. Construction Industry Research and Information Association, England (CIRIA)
Report 104 (1984) Design of retaining wall embedded in stiff clay.
b. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low-rise building.
c. Construction Industry Research and Information Association, England (CIRIA)
Guide Special Publication 95 (1993) The Design and Construction of Sheet Piled
Cofferdams.
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Design Verification

The design of the sheet pile wall works are indicated in the drawings, together with
the schematic strutting or ground anchor system indicated in terms of the installation
levels, the required stiffness and preloading. Based on the information, engage a
Professional Engineer (Civil) with relevant experience to carry out:
1.4.1.1 Design verification checks based on actual ground conditions to confirm

the required penetration length and size of all temporary or permanent
strutting elements and wailings for the sheet pile walls and ensure that the
required control on wall deflection can be achieved.
1.4.1.2 Prepare a response plan in the event that the temporary or permanent
strutting elements do not perform as expected in the design in controlling
the wall deflection. Ensure the response plan is feasible in considering the
construction sequence and site restraints.
1.4.1.3 Prepare and submit all design and construction sequence, including
drawings endorsed by the PE to the SO for review and the authorities
where applicable.
1.4.1.4 Propose as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control
ground movement and vibration do not perform satisfactorily.
Take into account of the design requirements as set out in Clause 2.1 below.
Submit the CV of the PE to the SO for acceptance.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.2 Building Damage Assessment

1.4.3 Layout Drawings

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to prepare coordinated layout drawings
for the sheet pile wall panels.
Submit the drawings to SO for acceptance prior to commencing the installation works.
1.4.4 Coordination with Other Works



and readings.
Section C2-50.


5
Version 1.0
NPQS


Refer to Preliminaries and conditions of contract for the requirements to deal with
existing services affected by the works.

1.4.11 Obstructions


1.4.14 Welders' Qualifications

Employ only welders who are qualified in the accepted welding procedure in
accordance with SS 187 and have a proven record over the previous six months, or
who have attained an equivalent standard, on the Works. Provide copies of
certificates relating to welders' tests to the SO on request.
1.4.15 Safety
notably:
Regulations
d. Factories Act
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully
with Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
g. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low rise building
h. BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Design Verification

When carrying out the design verification as set out in Clause 1.4.1, take into account
the following considerations:
2.1.1 Factor of Safety and Deflection

The required size of sheet pile wall system is shown on the drawings, including the
wall penetration depth and the size of all permanent supports. A schematic temporary
strutting system indicated in terms of the installation levels, the required stiffness and
preloading are also shown on the drawings, where applicable.
Based on the actual ground condition encountered, verify the wall penetration depth
and the adequacy of sheet pile wall system to withstand all loads on it; including
those due to hydrostatic pressure, earth pressure, surcharge loads, overburden,
effects of surrounding properties and varying load conditions due to different stages
of construction. Ensure the factor of safety and control on wall deflection are achieved
by taking into account the effects of the intended temporary supporting system.
The design verification shall be in accordance with SS EN 1997 or 8002 or SS CP 4
as appropriate.
Use the appropriate factors of safety for permanent and temporary works in selecting
the sheet pile wall section as reported in Table 5 of CIRIA Report 104.
2.1.2 Embedment for Load Bearing

For sheet pile walls also used for vertical load bearing purposes, verify the required
embedment length taking into account the actual ground conditions and the results of
load tests of preliminary elements.
2.2 Permissible Damage Criteria for Existing Critical Structures or Services

Based on the results of the damage assessment as set out in Clause 1.4.2, propose
the allowable wall deflection, ground settlement and vibration limits due to the works
taking into account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
State the values for alert and work suspension levels in the submission in accordance
with the requirements of Building Control Act [Section 7(2)] Annex (BE/CP/5 OCT
2001).
where relevant.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.3 Actual Penetration Depth

Drive the sheet piles to a depth as shown in the drawings or when practical refusal as
follows is met if earlier:
a. under continuous vibrating : the rate of penetration  100mm
b. under driving: the sheet pile penetration  25mm per 10 blows
If practical refusal is met earlier than the stipulated depth, carry out design verification
as in clause 1.4.1 and report to the SO for further direction if any.
2.4 Water Retention

Fully interlock all clutches and close all corners. Specially fabricate the corner sheet
piles to prevent declutching and water leakage.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Steel Grade

All steel for sheet piles is to be manufactured to BS EN 10248 and to the grade as
defined in the PSD.
All steel for sheet piles is to be manufactured to BS EN 10248 and to grade 275 or
higher.
3.2 Sheet Pile Coating

Propose and provide suitable coating protection based on soil exposure conditions.
3.3 Fabricated Sheet Piles

Fabricate and supply all sheetpiles to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.4 Clutch Sealant

Unless otherwise specified in the PSD, propose suitable clutch sealant to SO’s
acceptance.
3.5 Installation Equipment

Satisfy the SO regarding the suitability, efficiency and energy of the installation
equipment.
Where a drop hammer is used, the mass of the hammer to be not less than half that
of the sheet pile. For other types of hammer the energy delivered to the sheet pile to
be at least equivalent to a drop hammer of the stated mass.
3.6 Reuse of Sheet Piles

Do not use sheet piles installed previously unless it can be demonstrated that they
meet all specified requirements.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Marking and Storage
4.1.1 Marking
Mark each sheet pile with its grade.
4.1.2 Storage
Store sheet piles of different grades separately.
4.2 Clutch Sealant

Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.3 Handling and Installation
4.3.1 Handling
Ensure the interlocks are clean and undistorted.
Avoid any significant damage to the sheet piles and their coatings during all lifting,
handling and pitching operations.
4.3.2 Installation
a. Provide 24 hours notice prior to the commencement of installation.
b. Guide all sheet piles and hold in position with temporary gates. Ensure all sheet
piles are properly interlocked.
c. Provide adequate support and restraint to the free length of sheet pile at all
stages during the installation process.
d. Install the end sheet piles in advance of the intermediate sheet piles. Avoid
excessive lead of the end sheet piles ahead of the general panel level.
e. Select plant to suit the ground conditions and type of sheet pile. Submit details.
f. Position the sheet pile installation equipment so that it is aligned with the axis of
the sheet pile as closely as possible.
g. Install sheet piles to the specified level or level of resistance.
h. In hard ground, cease installation at practical refusal or if the sheet pile is visibly
damaged.
i. Where the sheet pile has not reached the specified level propose how problems
will be dealt with.
4.4 Jetting
Where jetting is used to assist sheet pile installation in cohesionless soil ensure that
this does not affect:
a. The performance of the sheet piles
b. The stability of surrounding structures
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5 Length of Sheet Piles

Sheet piles may be supplied in more than one length with the following provisions for
the joints:
a. Locate splices away from positions of maximum stress.
b. Design spliced joints for full stresses imposed due to bending, shear and bearing.
c. Do not weld interlocks where sheet piles are spliced by butt-welding unless a
sealing weld is required.
4.6 Forming Holes in Sheet Piles

Do not burn holes without the acceptance of the SO. Drill holes in the sheet piles for
ties and attachment of walings etc. after installation.
Drill or burnt all holes using a template, and dress flush subsequently. Check that the
hole size is of sufficient clearance and include allowance for bolt/tie coatings and
inclination if not horizontal. Seal all holes not required in the finished works by
welding a plate of the same grade, of thickness not less than the pan thickness to the
pile. The minimum plate overlap is 40 mm and the minimum continuous filet weld is 6
mm. All holes are to be within a positional tolerance of ±10 mm.
4.7 Cutting and Welding

Do not carry out cutting or welding of sheet piles without prior approval from the SO.
Carry out all such cutting by means of Oxyacetylene, Oxypropane or the other
approved method. The remaining pile is to be of clean and even appearance with
grinding tools being employed to remove splatter. Mark cut offs so that it is clear from
which pile they came and dispose of in the pre-agreed manner.
Carry out cutting in such a way as to prevent damage or distortion to adjacent piles.
The finished level of the cut pile shall be within 20 mm of the theoretical level. Allow a
minimum cooling time of 30 minutes for welds before continuing the installation work.
Carry out welding in accordance with SS CP 8. Cut out and replace any defective
welds.
4.8 Walings and Tie Rods

Secure wailings to each pair of pile with anchor bolts, washers and bearing plates. All
splices, if welded or bolted, are to be at the fifth spacing between tie rods and splices
in wailings and are to be staggered by a minimum distance of 5 m.
Do not weld the tie rods or use for earthing purposes. Protect tie rods against welding
splash. Assemble Tie rods with necessary taper washers, washers and bearing
plates in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Take precautions during installation of the tie rods to avoid the following:
a. Deflection of the tie
b. Local bending of tie rod on wailing
c. Damage to the tie or its protective coating
Tension the ties by means of a turnbuckle only and agree the phasing of the
tensioning with the SO in advance. Take care to avoid damage to the tie rods during
subsequent operations such as backfilling. Submit procedure to accomplish this to
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
SO’s acceptance. Where settlement is expected to occur place the ties inside a tube
such that the tube will settle with the ground but the tie remain in the correct position.
4.9 Installation Tolerances

Base the sheet pile line on nominal sheet pile size.
Install sheet pile to the following tolerances unless deflected by obstructions:
a. Deviation perpendicular to theoretical line ±50 mm
b. Deviation of verticality normal to and along the line of the sheet piles, 1:75
c. Top of finished sheet pile level ±50mm
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions

Prior to commencement of sheet piling works, submit the following to SO’s
acceptance for the proposed method of installation to achieve the required
performance including:
a. Method of achieving penetration to depth as specified, including methods of
dealing with obstructions.
b. Proposals to deal with noise and vibration, and an assessment of vibration
characteristics for the different piling operations and how they will attenuate with
distance.
c. Details on the plant and equipment proposed for the installation of the sheet
piles.
d. Details of method of location and avoidance of critical services.
e. Proposed methods for control of the sheet piling works including the setting out
and description of the alignment controls including the proposed methods for
controlling the verticality and the rotation about longitudinal centreline of the
sheet pile.
f. Method of checking the verticality and corrective actions to be taken if the
deviation exceeds the maximum permitted limits.
g. All details of proposed monitoring equipment.
h. Details of inserts for segmental sheet pile and details of clutch sealant proposed.
i. Details of a Quality control for the site works.
j. Typical sheet pile record sheets.
5.1.2 Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings of the sheet pile works for the acceptance of the SO prior to
the commencement of works, where applicable.
5.1.3 Work Programme

Submit work programme indicating the anticipated time required for installation of the
sheet piles in the overall work programme.
5.1.4 Ground Investigation

Confirm that the ground investigation information provided is adequate for the sheet
piling works and design verification. Raise any concerns as to its adequacy to the SO.
5.1.5 Monitoring to Adjacent Structures

Provide proposals for surveys and monitoring of movement and vibration in adjacent
structures and services before work commences and during the course of the works.
Submit the assessment of the effect of wall deflection and ground settlement to
adjacent properties and the proposed control limits.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.6 Test Certificates

Provide the SO with test certificates, analysis and mill sheets.
5.1.7 Welding Procedures

Submit for acceptance full details of the welding procedures and electrodes with
drawings and schedules as may be necessary. Submit relevant documents for the
qualified welders as stated in Clause 1.4.14.

5.2 Inspection and Testing
5.2.1 Inspection
Allow the SO to inspect and test at any stage of the fabrication.
Ensure that adequate notice is given to the SO when the fabrication processes can
be inspected or tests can be witnessed.
5.2.2 Weld Testing

Refer to section C5-10, clause 5.4 for general requirement on welding tests.
Refer to PSD for additional requirement if any.
5.2.2.1 Radiographs of Welds

The acceptance standard for radiographs of sheet pile welds to be in accordance with
BS PD 5500.
5.3 Records and Reports
5.3.1 Sheet Piling Records

Provide record sheets with the following information and submit two copies of these
records to the SO within agreed time frame after the sheet pile was installed.
a. Sheet pile reference.
b. Sheet pile type and steel grade.
c. Overall sheet pile length.
d. Length of individual sheet pile sections.
e. Details of joints.
f. Type of hammer, if relevant.
g. Date of installation.
h. Commencing surface level and final toe level.
i. Working level and type of construction plant.
j. The number of blows to drive each 250 mm over the last 2.5 m shall be recorded,
if relevant.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
k. All information regarding unexpected installation conditions (both harder, e.g.

obstructions or easier, e.g. increased penetration rates) and other interruptions to
the sequence of work.
l. Where changes in the pile length have occurred due to lengthening or cutting, all
relevant information including off-cut length or extension length and reason for
such change shall be included.
5.3.2 As-Built Drawings

Unless otherwise agreed, submit as-built drawings of the sheet piling works for
records. Keep accurate records of the actual Works constructed. For those parts of
the works which will become hidden by further progress, check and verify such
records by the SO while those parts of the Works are open for inspection.
All drawings submitted are to have relevant particulars at the bottom right-hand
corner including the project title, Contractor's name, title of drawing, scale, date,
drawing number and notes identifying revisions made. Other details to be included in
the as-built drawings are as follows:
a. Layout plan of the sheet piles showing the actual positions and eccentricities in
perpendicular directions of the sheets at ground level.
b. Elevation view of the installed sheets from cut-off level to toe. Express cut-off
level as reduced levels.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C2-50 – Instrumentation and Monitoring
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.4 Trade Preambles
2.1 Quality of Instrumentation

3.1 Schedule of Instrumentation
3.2 Remote Data Acquisition
3.3 Inclinometer (Manual Read)
3.4 In-place Inclinometers (Remote Read)
3.5 Magnetic Extensometers
3.6 Rod Extensometers
3.7 Tape Extensometers
3.8 Deep Levelling Datum
3.9 Levels
3.10 Piezometers
3.11 Vibration Monitors
3.12 Settlement Markers
3.13 Tell-Tales
3.15 Temperature Sensors
3.16 Strain Gauges
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.2 Instrument Reading and Records
4.3 Inclinometers (Manual Read)
4.5 Extensometers
4.7 Piezometers
4.8 Strain Gauges
4.9 Vibration Monitoring Device
4.10 Tell-Tales
4.11 Markers, Crackmeters and Tiltmeters
4.12 Inspection of Adjacent Property
4.13 Completion

5.1 Submissions
5.2 Calibration of Instrumentation
5.3 Records and Reporting
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements for instrumentation using a number of

different methods and monitoring of the various construction works to:
a. Determine ground movements as a result of construction.
b. Determine the effects of settlement on existing structures, services and utilities.
c. Provide settlement and movement data in a form that will allow direct comparison
with performance criteria and design expectations.
additions noted in these documents take precedence over clauses noted in the main
section.


the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the
SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are
the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Standards
In the event that the standards or codes are revised or superseded, refer to the latest
1.4 Trade Preambles
Version 1.0
NPQS
The schedule of instrumentation and monitoring for the project is indicated in the
drawings and clause 3.1 below.
Based on the information issue, propose and submit the following to the SO for
acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Select suitable make and model of the instrumentation for the project.
1.4.1.2 Develop methods and details of the instrumentation installation and monitoring.
1.4.1.3 Propose suitable schedule for the monitoring reading and records.

Co-ordinate with other contractors who may carry out other works at the same time at the
site. Take into account of site access, space occupation, safety and safeguarding of
adjoining properties and each other’s works.


1.4.5 Specialist Personnel

1.4.5.1 Borehole installation
Engage qualified crew of not less than two men to the SO’s acceptance for the
operation of each boring or drilling rig.
Engage qualified personnel to the SO’s acceptance for every two drilling or boring rigs
to supervise all drilling works and to accurately record all drilling or boring and testing.
1.4.5.2 Registered land surveyor
Engage a registered land surveyor for surveying of settlement of the ground surface,
roads, drains, buildings, and other structures.
1.4.5.3 Installer
Engage qualified personnel to the SO’s acceptance to install and record readings for all
the instruments.
1.4.6 Safety
notably:
Version 1.0
NPQS

Regulations
d. F a c t o r ie s A c t
For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with Code of
Practice for Railway Protection.
2.1 Quality of Instrumentation

Use instruments and measuring devices manufactured by companies with proven
experience in the field of construction or geotechnical instrumentation.
Engage materials, designs and construction of the highest quality to provide robust,
corrosion and vibration resistant instruments. Use only instruments with a satisfactory
proven working life and are fully functional through the duration of the works.
The accuracy and dependability of the equipment shall not be significantly affected by
changes in temperature, humidity, stray currents or contaminants that may be
encountered.
2.1.1 Electrical Interference
Ensure that electrical instrumentation is not adversely affected by other temporary or

permanent electrical services and equipment, and does not affect any other services,
activities or equipment within or adjacent to the Works. Where transformers are used, they
shall have safety cutout devices to guard against overheating.
3. MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT
3.1 Schedule of Instrumentation

The schedule of instrumentation including the minimum frequency of reading to be
implemented for the works shall comply with Regulatory guidelines and subjected to SO
approval.
2 Remote Data Acquisition

Remote data acquisition set up, if required in compliance to regulatory requirements shall
be implemented. The numbers of locations for the set up shall be recommended by
Contractor’s Professional Engineer, subjected to final approval from SO.
3.2.1 Use of Readout Boxes for Remote Readout
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.1.1 Remote readout facilities

All electrical measuring devices to be capable of being read remotely using portable
readout units connected via the readout boxes. Supply readout units together with
leads for plugging into the measuring device and readout boxes.
3.2.1.2 Instrument range
Readout boxes to be capable of being placed up to 200 m from their associated
instrumentation or transducers with the specified accuracy of the instrumentation
maintained.
3.2.1.3 Remote readout cover boxes
Readout cover boxes to be made of robust water-resistant metal construction with lockable
sealed doors. Ensure all cable entries to the cover boxes are through watertight glands.
3.2.1.4 Link to site office
Include modem link and connection for direct computer link to allow reading for all
remotely read instrumentation and make links to the site office(s) as directed.
Use readout unit devices with facilities for recording monitoring data directly onto tape or
magnetic disc for subsequent computer processing.
3.2.2 Logger Stations

3.2.2.1 General
Use reliable and safe remote data collection systems with back-up facilities in the event
of mains power failure. Prove the reliability of the logger prior installation by
demonstration and records of previous works.
Use a flex outlet without switches for all loggers when connected to the mains
electrical supply. Do not use plug sockets.
3.2.2.2 Station requirements
Logger stations to be:
a. Capable of reading all instrument types proposed for each structure
b. Programmable to log data at any specified interval, including real-time.
c. Capable of accepting new instruments to extend or repair the proposed system.
d. Easily connected to an external computer by either a direct hard wire or modem
link as agreed with the SO.
e. Unaffected by external electrical influence, and shall not affect other electrical
equipment.
f. Safe: in the event of overheating or short circuiting, the device shall shut down.
Logger stations to collect the cabling from the various remotely read instruments and from
local terminal boxes, so that monitoring can be conveniently carried out from a single
position close to any instrumented section.
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.3 Type of Cable

Use cabling and connectors that are robust, water resistant and corrosion resistant for
instrumentation. Use only low smoke zero halon cabling for all cables, which is durable
and suitable for the proposed locations in the works.
Use items that are extinguishable non-metallic and emit no toxic fumes in the event of
fire.
3.3 Inclinometer (Manual Read)
3.3.1 General
Inclinometers are to take the form of an access tube with four keyways (in pairs at
right angles), which shall be grouted in to a borehole. The orientation of the keyways to
be such that they are parallel to and perpendicular to the orientation of any tunnel,
excavation or wall or otherwise as accepted by the SO.
3.3.2 System Accuracy

The system accuracy of the inclinometer is to be ±6 mm per 25 m of casing or better.
The inclinometer and logging system are to be capable of recording movements in
both directions (i.e. biaxial).
3.3.3 Probe
The probe used to have the following:
a. A wheel base of 500mm.
b. A measurement range of 53° or greater from vertical.
±
c. A resolution of 0.02mm or greater per 500mm with a repeatability of 0.003°. ±
d. A minimum radius curve for retrieval of 2.2m or less.

e. A working temperature range of -20° Celsius to +50° Celsius or greater.
f. A construction (externally) of stainless steel.
3.3.4 Data Recorder

Data recorder to have a capacity of 10,000 data points minimum with an operating
time of 16 hours or more.
A backup battery is to be incorporated to keep data secure for a minimum of 72 hours
on depletion of primary power source.
Signal shall be emitted to confirm power failure and confirm that the battery pack is
operative.
3.3.5 Taking Readings

When taking readings, insert the inclinometer probe in the tube. The inclinometer
shall travel along the whole length of the tube with its wheels engaged in each pair of
the keyways in turn to obtain deformation measurements in both directions. A force
Version 1.0
NPQS
balance accelerometer within the probe shall respond to changes in alignment, which
shall be displayed on a portable readout unit.
3.3.6 Calibration Device

Provide a calibration device with the instrument, which calibrates both the probe and
the portable readout unit to the acceptance of the SO.
3.3.7 Tubing
Inclinometer tube to be slotted plastic of 75 mm internal diameter that is pre-grouted
into a minimum 100 mm diameter borehole.
Tubing to be of uniform section and free of twist in manufacture and shall not twist
during installation.
3.3.8 Ground Level Installation

At the final ground level fit the inclinometer tubing with a removable cap within a
lockable vandal-proof cover set in a concrete surround.
Cover and surround details shall be to the acceptance of the SO.
3.4.1 General
The orientation of the keyways to be parallel to and perpendicular to the orientation of
any tunnel, excavation or wall or otherwise as accepted by the SO.
3.4.2 Sensor
Resolution of the sensor to be 0.04mm/m or better and the measuring range to be at least
±10°. The precision of the sensor to be ±0.1mm per m. The allowable maximum gauge
length to be 3m.
The operating temperature range to be -20° to 50° Celsius and the compensated
temperature range to be 0 to 45° Celsius.
3.4.3 Electrolevel System

Where specified use electrolevel inclinometer consisting of a waterproof sensor that is
remotely monitored using a computer data logging system. Use datalogger capable of
at least 14 days operation in the event of power failure.
3.4.4 System Accuracy

The system accuracy of the inclinometer is to be ±6 mm per 25 m of casing or better.
The inclinometer and logging system are to be capable of recording movements in
both directions (i.e. biaxial).
3.5 Magnetic Extensometers
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.5.1 General
Use magnetic extensometers in the form of a series of magnetic rings (“spider
magnets”) fixed into a maximum 150mm diameter borehole with plastic tubing of
nominal 75mm minimum internal diameter allowing access to the magnetic points for
the measurement of settlement.
3.5.2 Installation of Magnetic Rings

Set a datum magnetic ring at the base of the inclinometer tubing and also within the
instrument chamber base, located at the top of the borehole.
Install the magnetic rings at the depths accepted by the SO or at maximum 3m
intervals.
Check that the reading system is reliable and require minimal maintenance over the
required monitoring period. Thermal or other influences shall be negligible.
3.5.3 System Precision

The system precision to be 1.0mm.
±
3.5.4 Measurement of Relative Movement

Measure relative movement between the magnetic ring and the reference magnetic ring
at the top of the holes by a reed switch attached to a stainless steel tape. Raise and
lower the steel tape and reed switch assembly from the top of the borehole.
The magnetic rings to be housed in splay PVC holders (“spider magnets”) suited to
the ground. Install to the acceptance of the SO.
3.6 Rod Extensometers
3.6.1 General
Use rod extensometers in the form of a rod anchored at the remote end of the
borehole passing into a plastic tube fixed in a reference collar at the open end of the
hole.
3.6.2 Restrictions on Rods

Install no more than six rods in a single hole with each rod of a different length so that
displacements at various borehole depths may be recorded.
Where more than six rods are required, prepare another borehole as close as
possible to the initial hole and rods set at alternate depths in each hole.
3.6.3 Materials
Rods to be fabricated from stainless steel. The grade of steel rod shall suit the
environment and duration of the project. Make provision for threading the anchor
points onto the rod.
3.6.4 Measurement of Relative Movement
Version 1.0
NPQS
Measure relative movement between the end anchor and the reference collar by an
automated measurement device (an electrical transducer) registering on the free end of
the rod and by manual means using a system to the acceptance of the SO.
Extend the reading range beyond that of the measurement device by a range
adjustment device fitted at the reference collar.
3.6.5 Measuring Head

Measuring head to be of design to allow manual readings to be taken.
Extensometers to be of design that make the measurement of both elongations and
reductions in the length between anchorage point and measuring head possible.
Undertake remote reading using the electrical transducers linked to a logger station, with an
overall accuracy of +0.25 mm and with a measuring range of 150 mm. In the event that
movements potentially exceed 150 mm, make adjustment to allow continued monitoring. Use
transducers that are waterproof to 15bar.
Cabling to the terminal box to be capable of accepting up to six extensometers from

each hole. Provide a battery operated digital readout device capable of reading to the
required overall accuracy.
3.7 Tape Extensometers
Use a tape extensometer comprises a steel tape, portable measuring instrument with
metric dial calliper and a pair of anchor clips
.
Provide a minimum of two tape extensometers at the commencement of work and

these are to be calibrated against each other, so that in the event of damage to one
tape, accuracy is not compromised.
Use tape extensometer that is capable of being read to 0.15 mm, and have a range of
±
20 m. Demonstrate a repeatability of reading to 0.15 mm prior to use.

±

Deep Levelling Datum to comprise of a 25mm galvanised steel rod cast into a 250mm
diameter grout filled steel casing positioned within a 300mm diameter steel casing.
Fill the annulus between the two casings with grease. The top of the 25 mm steel rod
shall be domed and centre punched.
3.9 Levels
3.9.1 Standard Levelling
Use a basic Engineer’s optical level of an approved make and specification with a
single measurement precision of around ±1mm with a standard measuring staff.
The accuracy of results here should be within ±3mm.
3.9.2 Precise Levelling
Version 1.0
NPQS
Where more accurate levelling is required provide more precise instrument to the
accuracy as set out in the PSD.
Where more accurate levelling is required provide more precise instrument to the
accuracy as set out below:
Instrument Accuracy (mm)
3.10 Piezometers
3.10.1Casagrande Piezometers
3.10.1.1 Tube
The standpipe shall be of unplasticised Polyvinylchloride (uPVC), to BS 3506 (1969)
Class 6, of nominal diameter 19mm and supplied in lengths of 3m.
The tube shall be connected at its lower end by suitable PVC fitting to a piezometer
tip.
3.10.1.2 Filter
Clean sand between grading limits 1200 and 210 microns.
3.10.1.3 Tip
Porous ceramic element or rigid uPVC perforated pipe having an expanded
Polystyrene lining moulded to form an inner tube of not less than 13mm bore retained
in position by a moulded flange as approved, of minimum length 150mm and
minimum diameter 35mm, protected by uPVC fittings. Permeability to be
approximately 3 x 10-4 m/s.
If permeability test is to be carried out in piezometer, the filter tip shall be increased to
at least 900mm in length.
3.10.2 Vibrating Wire Piezometers

3.10.2.1 Type of Tip
Choose the type of tip to suit the expected maximum groundwater pressure and the
characteristics of the surrounding ground. Use only piezometers with high air-entry tips.
3.10.2.2 ‘Push-in’ Piezometers
Where accepted by the SO, ‘push-in’ vibrating wire piezometers may be used utilising a
mandrel of not less than 0.5m in length. In such cases there will be no requirement for a
sand cell. Backfill using bentonite and grout as directed.
Version 1.0
NPQS
The combined accuracy of the instrument and the readout device to be within 1.0 % of ±
the true pressure. Use instrument capable of measuring pressures up to 15bar.
3.10.3 Pneumatic Piezometers

Do not use.
3.11 Vibration Monitors

Type and specification of vibration monitors to be to manufacturer’s recommendation
and to the SO’s acceptance.
Vibration monitors shall be capable of taking and recording data on a continuous
basis. The monitors shall be capable of registering vibrations of magnitude and
frequencies that reflect the normal construction activities on site.
3.12 Settlement Markers
Provide settlement markers with drive in or cast in survey nails to SO’s acceptance
and at agreed locations.
3.13 Tell-Tales
Type and specification of tell-tales to be to manufacturer’s recommendation and to
SO’s acceptance.
Tell tales to generally comprise of two clear plastic overlapping plates, one marked with
a millimetre scale the other with a cross-hair marking to allow reading on two axis.
If the position of tell-tale is out of general sight, it shall be readable without
obstruction.

Install prism reflector targets at the locations shown in the drawings. Targets should be
durable, not damaged by rain and fixed so that they are not disturbed by vibration.
3.15 Temperature Sensors

Ensure the working range of the sensors to be at least –40 0 Celsius to +600 Celsius
with an accuracy of ±1° Celsius. All sensors to be capable of being remotely
monitored and the data being downloaded to a computer in an ASCII file format.
3.16 Strain Gauges
3.16.1 General
Vibrating wire strain gauges to have the following characteristics:
a. Strain range 2500 x 10-6 m/m
b. Accuracy ±3.0 x10-6 m/m
c. Resolution 0.5 x 10-6 m/m
Version 1.0
NPQS
Response time to be no more than 10 seconds.
3.16.2 Signal Cable
Shield signal cable with flexible polyurethane jacket. Temperature rated minimum
ranges 0° Celsius to 80 Celsius and to be compatible with the environment in which
the gauges are installed.
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.1 Instrument Maintenance

Maintain all instruments, including readout and data loggers, required for monitoring
in a satisfactory working order for the duration of the monitoring programme.
4.1.2 Storage
Securely store all equipment and installation accessories prior to installation where
they will not suffer physical damage or damage arising from excessive moisture,
extremes of temperature or any adverse conditions.
4.1.3 Installation and Testing

Install and test all equipment including connections and fittings in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Reconfirm the depth of installation of underground
instrumentation with the SO based on the soil profile encountered in the borehole for the
purpose.
4.1.3.1Grouting
Do not backfill boreholes with soil arisings, unless otherwise agreed with the SO.
Backfill all boreholes with cement bentonite grout, with standpipes and piezometers
together with their response zones installed at the depths specified, or as directed by
the SO.
Introduce the grout using a tremie pipe which is kept below the surface of the grout as
filling proceeds. Agree the methods to be used where ground conditions make normal
grouting impracticable. Leave the area in a clean and tidy condition.
Refer to Section C2-10 “Site Investigation”, clause 3.2 for requirement of cement
bentonite grout materials.
4.1.3.2 Testing
Undertake testing as necessary to ensure satisfactory functioning of the equipment at
each stage of the installation.
Version 1.0
NPQS
Report any instruments found to be malfunctioning at any time to the SO within 24

hours of the fault being identified, and replace at the earliest opportunity.
4.1.4 Fixing and Protection

Securely fix all instruments and adequately protect their terminations, including any
attendant wiring and terminal panels, against mechanical damage and ingress of
water and dirt.
Fix the equipment such that it is capable of resisting vandalism and adverse climatic
conditions at surface locations. In addition, protect all instruments by hoarding or
barriers as directed.
Tag all external visible protective covers to equipment using aluminium rigid
nameplates of minimum size 2500 mm2, swg 24 or similar to the acceptance of the
SO, identifying the following:
a. Project title and Contract No.
b. Equipment reference number.
c. A contact name and contact telephone number.
4.1.4.1 Protection details
Protection details for inclinometers, piezometers, extensometers and settlement

points are given in the Drawings. Develop alternatives if necessary to fit in with site
constraints and further improve protection to the instruments.
Develop also protection systems for other instruments. These protection systems
shall provide a similar or better level of protection as that provided by the systems
shown in the Drawings.
Submit the drawings showing the proposed protection systems to the SO for
acceptance. Protect each instrument using the accepted system.
4.1.4.2 Prevention of damage
Take all sensible measures to prevent damage to the instruments and ancillary
equipment during handling, installation and subsequent operations. Replace any
instrument and/or ancillary equipment damaged during handling, installation or
subsequent operation immediately.
Snake or coil cabling and tubing to provide sufficient slack to accommodate potential
ground movement.
4.1.5 Instrument Reference System

Establish a logical reference system for all the instrumentation equipment prior to
installation and to the satisfaction of the SO, so records for any particular location can
easily be recovered for interpretation or review.
4.1.6 Remote Readout
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.1.6.1 Location of readout boxes

Position readout boxes for ease of access and protect from damage during
construction.
4.1.6.2 Location of logger stations
Position logger stations for ease of access and protect from damage during
construction. Propose locations unless shown otherwise in the drawings for
acceptance by the SO.
4.1.6.3 Cable fixing and identification
Fix cabling for the instrumentation neatly and securely to appropriate cable trays
which in turn shall be securely fixed to the structure. Tag all cabling with an
appropriate reference, identifying the electrolevel or instrument to which it is attached.
Protect cables in galvanized pipes from ground level to one meter below cut-off level.
In addition, clearly label the cables at 0.5 meter interval within the protected length.
Where possible, use colour-coded cables for the purpose of identification.
Use single length cable for newly installed vibrating wire piezometer. Do not allow
splicing unless otherwise agreed. When splicing is allowed, ensure water tightness of
the splices in the event where the cables are damaged and need to be spliced.
4.1.6.4 Identification of cables
Tag each individual cable at least at the instrument end connection and at the logger
connection identifying that cable. Maintain a schedule showing all cables and their
respective connections.
4.2 Instrument Reading and Records
4.2.1 Schedule of Monitoring

Submit a proposed schedule of readings for the acceptance of the SO. Comply with
the minimum frequency and duration of readings for each instrument as stated in
clause 3.1.
Vary the frequency depending upon the stage of the works. In some cases
continuous logging will be required.
Increase the monitoring frequency at any stage as directed by the SO if the
performance of the Works being monitored does not perform as predicted, or the
Works are likely to cause adverse effects on the adjacent properties if they proceed
further.
4.2.2 Ground Movements and Vibrations

When planning for suitable methods and schedule for monitoring, take account on the
limits on movements and levels of vibration for the adjacent buildings as set out in the
PSD.
Version 1.0
NPQS
When planning for suitable methods and schedule for the monitorng, take account on the
general restrictions on movements and levels of vibration for the adjacent buildings as set
out below, unless otherwise agreed or indicated in the respective work specifications:
Restrictions on movements and levels of vibration for adjacent buildings
Building Limits on ground movement (mm) Limits on level of vibration (mm/s)
Horizontal Vertical (Settlement)

Alert Work- Alert Work- Alert Work-suspension
suspe suspe
4.2.3 Methods of Taking Readings

Do not use any form of instrument which uses electrical resistance methods for taking
readings unless otherwise agreed.
4.2.4 Initial Readings

Read all instruments as soon as possible after installation and at least once per day
for a period of two weeks thereafter. Where instruments appear not to have
stabilised, for example exhibiting a continued drift in the readings, the cause shall be
identified and the fault rectified and a new set of readings provided. When all
instruments are showing consistent results for a period of 1 week, readings shall be
averaged to provide a datum reading.
4.2.5 Site Conditions

When recording instrumentation readings, record all site conditions that may affect
the results, including temperature and humidity readings.
Record also the instrument type, location reference, datum and time of reading,
personnel carrying out the readings and measuring instrument or readout unit
reference.
Record any observations of unusual conditions that could influence the

instrumentation or the structure.
4.2.6 Reading Records

Record instrument readings in accepted format for subsequent analysis by computer.
Take backup copies on a daily basis on two sets of disks; one set to be stored remote
from the site office.
Make corrections for temperature difference or other factors as appropriate, but
uncorrected data shall also be available.
Version 1.0
NPQS
Produce plots of deformation, stress, raw data readings against time together with
plots of temperature and humidity, or other data as directed when relevant.
4.2.7 Consistency of Instrument Use

Use the same recording devices, e.g. tape extensometers, level, EDM and
Theodolite, etc. at any given location throughout the monitoring programme.
If this becomes impractical, take new datum readings immediately with a replacement
instrument, and use the new instrument for future readings.
4.2.8 Consistency of Readings

Readings shall be taken by the same personnel to maintain consistency. If personnel
need to be replaced for any reason, take a series of three duplicate readings by both the
outgoing person and his replacement.
4.2.9 Consistency of Location

Should a monitoring location become unavailable, read the instrument previously
read from this point from an alternative point, as soon as practicable after the location
becomes unavailable. Use this for all subsequent readings.
Include a reference to such changes on the summary plots.
4.3 Inclinometers (Manual Read)
4.3.1 General
All inclinometer tubing and instrumentation shall be resistant to aggressive/adverse
substances in the ground and shall conform to the requirements for sub-surface
installations.
4.3.2 Installation
Insert a slotted plastic inclinometer tube of minimum 60mm internal diameter into a
minimum 100mm diameter borehole or a steel duct of at least 150 mm cast into any
pile or wall.
Withdraw any temporary casing used during boring/drilling at the time of grouting the
inclinometer tubing. Embed the toe of inclinometer into hard stratum below which the
ground movement is negligible. Prior to installation, propose the installation level for
acceptance of the SO.
4.3.3 Tubing
Provide the tubing with appropriate couplings for joining tube lengths to the required
borehole length. Cap the base of the tube.
Version 1.0
NPQS
Adequately fix and seal the cap and coupling joints so that the tube is grout-and dirt-
tight
.
Lower the joined and sealed tubing into the borehole and grout the annulus using a
bentonite/cement grout tremied to the bottom of the hole. Fix the tubing from rotation
while being lowered.
4.3.4 Probe Location

Provide suitable means of measuring the position of the probe down the borehole to
an accuracy of ±10 mm from a reference point at the top of the borehole.
Establish the coordinate of the reference point prior to all readings by surveying from
a suitable stable benchmark.
4.3.5 Extension of Inclinometers

Where inclinometers already exist and are to be extended, the new tubing shall
match the existing tubing.
During earthworks operations, extend the inclinometer tubes in lengths and ahead of
the fill to a manner accepted by the SO.
4.3.6 Stability and Gain Check

Check stability and gain of the reading system at weekly intervals unless otherwise
agreed, and provide results to the SO.
4.3.7 Spiral and Inclination Check

Carry out spiral and inclination check prior to establishing the datum reading.
4.4.1 General
Ensure all inclinometer tubing and instrumentation to be resistant to aggressive/adverse
substances in the ground and conform to the requirements for sub-surface installations.
Ensure that the in-place inclinometer is capable of providing continuous, unattended
monitoring data.
4.4.2 Installation
Insert a slotted plastic inclinometer tube of 75 mm internal diameter into a minimum
100mm diameter borehole or a steel duct of at least 150 mm cast into any pile or wall.
Any temporary casing used during boring/drilling shall be withdrawn at the time of
grouting the inclinometer tubing. Embed the toe of inclinometer into hard stratum
below which the ground movement is negligible. Prior installation, propose the
installation level for the acceptance of the SO.
4.4.3 Tubing
Version 1.0
NPQS
Provide the tubing with appropriate couplings for joining tube lengths to the required
borehole length.
Cap the base of the tube.
Adequately fix and seal the cap and coupling joints so that the tube is grout- and dirt-
tight.
Lower the joined and sealed tubing into the borehole and grout the annulus using a
bentonite/cement grout tremied to the bottom of the hole. Fix the tubing from rotation
while being lowered.
4.4.4 Sensor
Install the biaxially electrolevels at spacing acceptable to the SO and connect with a
rod to give a fixed gauge length. At the end of the sensor and the gauge extension fit
a spring loaded wheel assembly. Do not use sensors mounted on sleds. Check that
the spacing of sensor is no greater than 3 m.
4.4.5 Stability and Gain Check

Check stability and gain of the reading system at weekly intervals by means of three
“dummy” electrolevels using precise resistors.
4.4.6 Spiral and Inclination Check

Carry out spiral and inclination check prior to establishing the datum reading.
4.5 Extensometers
4.5.1 Magnetic Inclinometer Extensometers

4.5.1.1 Installation of assembly
a. Grout the complete downhole assembly in place ensuring that the access tube
and magnets remain undisturbed during grouting operations.
b. Seal the access tube to prevent ingress of ground water.
4.5.1.2 Level check

a. Fix a level survey point to the top of the reference head of the extensometer to
allow precise levelling back to a datum.
b. Check the level survey point each time the instrument is read, unless otherwise
accepted by the SO.
4.5.2 Rod Extensometers

4.5.2.1 Rod assembly
Version 1.0
NPQS
Isolate each rod Individually by its own plastic sleeve and grout the complete
assembly in place, fixing the anchors to the ground but allowing free movement of
each rod within its sleeve.
Ensure a single reference housing receives all of the rods from a drill hole and
provide protection to the reference head and measurement device.
4.5.2.2 Survey point
Fix a level survey point to the top of the reference head of the extensometer to allow
precise levelling back to a datum.
4.5.2.3 Use of casing
Use casing to stabilise holes through unstable ground.
Determine the lengths of rods using the level of the ground at the hole location. For
grout used for backfilling, use bentonite/cement mix with just sufficient water to allow
it to be tremied to the bottom of the holes.
4.5.3 Tape Extensometers

Locate and fix anchors in a manner acceptable to the SO.
Take measurements by connecting the tape hook to the pertinent eyebolt and the
tape stretched across to the next bolt.
Adjust the tension of the tape and take the tape and calliper readings.
Use the same extensometer for each set of readings to maintain consistency.
4.6.1 Installation
Install a 300mm diameter casing not less than 300 mm into firm ground. Install the
250 mm diameter casing not less than 1500mm beneath the 300mm casing and fill
with water cement grout that is just pumpable. Ensure the founding depth of deep
levelling datum to be such that the founding strata is not affected by the construction
activity.
4.6.2 Protection
Protect the top of the Deep Levelling Datum by a manhole cover and by a surface
protection barrier to the acceptance of the SO.
4.7 Piezometers
4.7.1 Installation of Sand Filter
Version 1.0
NPQS
In placing the sand, ensure that no sand adheres to the soil in the sides of an unlined
hole. Where there is water in a hole, allow sufficient time for all the sand to settle, and
take measurements of the upper surface of the sand from time to time to ensure this.
Record the final elevation of the top of the sand.
4.7.2 Bentonite Seal

Tamp the bentonite seal formed of either stiff hard rolled balls or pellets over the sand
to a thickness of approximately 1500 mm. Backfill the hole with bentonite/cement
grout mix to the acceptance of the SO. Terminate grout backfill at the base of the
instrumentation chamber.
4.7.3 De-airing of Piezometer Tip

Check that the tip of each piezometer to be air free and the porous stone of the tip to
be fully saturated by submergence in clean de-aired water for a period of at least 24
hours prior to installation.
Confirm complete de-airing of the porous stone by periodic weighing.
4.7.4 Piezometer Installation
Install each piezometer in a separate borehole of 100mm nominal diameter.

Carry out the complete installation as soon as practicable, and no later than 24 hours,
after drilling in order to minimise the amount of deterioration or alteration of the ground
at the location of the piezometer tip. Carry out drilling to the required depth without the
use of air-flush in the vicinity of the tip position.
4.7.5 Use of Casing

Use casing to stabilise the hole through unstable ground.
If casing is used to maintain the hole open, withdraw it carefully so as not to damage
the instruments or cables, concurrently with the progress of the backfilling.
4.7.6 Testing Before Installation

Test all piezometers before installation by submergence in still clean water to a series of
depths appropriate to the anticipated pressure range of operation in order to verify the
calibration and accuracy of the instrument.
4.7.7 Records
Keep accurate records of the depths of the piezometers, sand surrounds and seals,
and record readings at each stage of the installation. For push-in piezometers, record
the increase in pore pressure as well as dissipation using a data logger.
Version 1.0
NPQS
Check the maximum pressure allowable during installation to be 50% of the

maximum for which the piezometer is rated.
4.7.8 Commissioning Test

On completion of the installation, commission all standpipes and piezometers using a
falling head test by filling the standpipe or piezometer full with water to the top of the
PVC tubing.
Monitor the drop in water level in the standpipe or piezometer at intervals of 15s, 30s,
1 min, 2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr, 4 hr, 5 hr, 6 hr, 7 hr, 8 hr,
16 hr, 24 hr, or when the water level has returned to its initial steady level.
The water standpipe or piezometer must be in working condition throughout the monitoring
period. Rectify any damaged water standpipe or piezometer before handing over.
Take samples of ground water of not less than one litre from the standpipes and
piezometer when required.
Store the water samples in clean sealed containers, clearly label and deliver to the
laboratory for chemical tests.
The tests for sulphate content (% S03), chloride content, acidity (pH value) and
degree of salinity shall be determined from the same sample.
4.8 Strain Gauges

Ensure strain gauges and cabling to be compatible for their intended location. Protect
them against any disturbance from the site activities.
4.8.1 Strain Gauges Embedded in Concrete

Use the embedment variety or securely attach to mounting plates welded to bars that
are then attached to the reinforcement.
The method of attachment shall prevent displacement of the gauge or damage to the
wires and cables during fixing of reinforcement, concreting, driving or other
processes.
Attach the bars at two locations only to limit the bending induced in the bars changes
by less than 50με.
4.8.2 Strain Gauges for Temporary Struts

Use spot weldable strain gauges to the SO’s acceptance. At the beginning of the strut
monitoring, install strain gauges in strut together with load cells for calibration
purposes. Establish a correlation between the gauges and loads measured by the
load cells and submit the results for review by the SO. Gauges from the same type
Version 1.0
NPQS
and source shall then be used to monitor other selected struts in place of load cells.
The locations of struts required strain gauges are shown in the drawings.
4.9 Vibration Monitoring Device

Engage a specialist to carry out the monitoring and recording of readings.
4.10 Tell-Tales
Fix the overlapping plates securely so that a gap of not greater than 1 mm separates
them at the start of monitoring and so that the cross-hairs are zeroed. Record the
location, orientation and plate separation for each telltale on the reading sheets.
4.11 Markers, Crackmeters and Tiltmeters

Typical details of acceptable installations for ground and building settlement points
are shown in the drawings.
Submit for approval details of any alternative installations proposed.
4.11.1 Accuracy of Levels
Monitor and record the levels of ground survey and building settlement points
throughout the duration of the Works, using a precise level and staff accurate to
0.5mm or better.
4.12 Inspection of Adjacent Property

Keep adjacent roads, neighbouring properties and structures clear of equipment and
spoils and regularly inspect the surface of the ground, properties and structures.
Report to the SO immediately any signs of subsidence or cracking.
4.13 Completion
Remove all specialist monitoring and make good all installations to the satisfaction of
the SO upon completion of the monitoring, or at other such times if accepted by the
SO.
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Description of Instrumentation

Provide fully detailed drawings, together with descriptions of the principal features,
Version 1.0
NPQS
mode of operation, the measuring range and the degrees of accuracy of the
equipment.

Submit detailed method statements for the installation of all instruments for the
acceptance of the SO prior to installation.
5.1.2.1 Content
Method statements shall include, at least the following information:
a. Details and drawings of instruments.
b. Manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations for installation and
maintenance etc., details of drilling equipment and drilling methods.
c. Details of all materials (including samples).
d. Details of sequence of assembly and connections.
e. Details of any backfill, proposed grout mixes.
f. Details of monitoring arrangements and verification procedures.
The method statement shall also include a programme of installation related to the
main construction activities to the acceptance of the SO.
5.1.3 Installation Drawings

Submit detailed drawings showing the precise location and depth for instrument
installation for the acceptance of the SO prior to commencement of installations .
5.1.4 Schedule of Manpower and Resources

Provide a detailed schedule of manpower and equipment resources to be employed for the
Works for SO’s acceptance before commencement within timeframe as directed.
5.1.5 Data Management System

Submit full details of the proposed data management system for the acceptance of the SO.
These shall include proposed formats for data acquisition, checking, processing, and
subsequent reporting to the SO for all instruments.
5.1.6 Calculations
Provide calculations to convert raw output to processed data for all instrumentation.
Provide a sample calculation with appropriate data listings to the SO, endorsed by the
Instrumentation Engineer.
5.1.7 Maintenance and Inspection Schedule

Submit a maintenance and inspection schedule prior to installation or use of the
instrumentation for the acceptance of the SO.
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.8 Quality Control Manual

Submit a Quality Manual containing a QA/QC programme for the Works to the SO for
acceptance within directed time frame.
The Quality Manual is to include at least information on the following:
a. Quality policy
b. Organisation charts and responsibilities
c. Internal quality control and audits
d. Facilities and equipment
e. Calibration and testing of equipment
f. Testing and inspection procedures
g. Subcontractors and suppliers
5.2 Calibration of Instrumentation

Correctly calibrate all the installed instrumentation in use.
Carry out calibration and provide certificates by an accepted accredited agency.
Carry out periodic checks at appropriate intervals to confirm the validity of calibration
of equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and make any
necessary adjustments. Check instruments to have a validity of calibration at least 3
months after their last intended reading in the project.
Repeat calibration if anomalous readings are recorded.
Keep records of checks, errors recorded and whether any adjustment was
undertaken.
5.2.1 Records of Calibration

Keep records of all calibration certificates and of dispatch of equipment off site for re-
calibration when required.
Retain copies of all certification and other records on site and make available for the
SO’s inspection when required.
5.3 Records and Reporting
5.3.1 General
Submit two copies of preliminary records of the installation of each instrument within
24 hours from the time of installation of each instrument.
Submit final records for each instrument incorporating any comments from the SO
within seven days of completion of installation of each instrument.
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3.2 Record Information

The records shall incorporate a graphical illustration of the instrument installation and
shall include the following information:
a. Instrument number and location (in eastern and northern co-ordinates and level).
b. Names of personnel responsible for installation.
c. Time and date for commencement and completion of instrument.
d. Details and records of boreholes.

e. Plant and labour used.
f. Ground conditions encountered (if applicable).
g. Details of instrument installation (grout, fixings etc).
h. Instrument readings during installation, calibration and immediately after
installation are completed.
i. Location of instrument terminals, housings and any leads or cabling.
j. Details of any splices, numbers of casings or joins.
k. Details of any breakdowns or delays.
5.3.3 Datum Readings of Survey Points

The registered surveyor shall establish the initial (datum) reading of each survey point
and submit records to the SO. Unless otherwise agreed, submit the datum readings
prior to any excavation and construction works.
5.3.4 Submission of Readings

Submit all instruments readings in approved tabular and graphical formats, within 24
hours of monitoring.
5.3.5 Factual Reporting

Submit reports of monitoring results in a factual report at intervals as specified in the
PSD, in an acceptable format including a plan showing the location of the structure
and instrumented lines and shall comprise at least the following:
a. Incorporate plots of measured parameters vs time, depth and/or location of
construction activity with reference to each instrument etc. as agreed with the SO.
b. Include a comparison of data with predetermined trigger values. (e.g. Settlement
Vs Time, horizontal deflections vs time, load vs depth of excavation, settlement vs
location of construction activity / depth of excavation etc.).
c. Highlight idle or damaged instrument and provide estimated time frame for
corrective measures.
Submit reports of monitoring results in a factual report at intervals of 7 days.
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3.6 Interpretative Reporting

5.3.6.1 Frequency
Based on the factual information received, issue interpretative reports at intervals as
specified in the PSD.
Based on the factual information received, issue interpretative reports at intervals of 7
days.
When established trends indicate potential problems then such areas of concern shall
be re-appraised and monitored at revised frequency as directed.
5.3.6.2 Report content
Interpretative Reports shall include a summary plot of all instrumented lines or points which
indicate a trend (including historical data where appropriate) that could result in a trigger
level being exceeded and any instrumented line or point in which a trigger level has been
exceeded. Submit recommendations for any protective measures or actions that are
necessary.
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-10 Concrete Construction Generally
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
2.1 Concrete Mix and Concreting Process 5
2.2 Control on Shrinkage and Temperature Effects 5
2.3 Construction Loads 5
2.4 Noise Nuisance 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Cement 6
3.2 Fine Aggregates 6
3.3 Coarse Aggregates 6
3.4 Water 7
3.5 Admixtures 7
3.6 Concrete Mix Constituents 7
3.7 Ready-Mix Concrete Plant 9
3.8 Surface Hardener 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Transportation of Concrete 10
4.2 Inserts 10
4.3 Placing and Compaction 10
4.4 Kickers 10
4.5 Construction Joints 10
4.6 Concreting in Hot Weather 11
4.7 Pours with Temperature Control 11
4.8 Protection from Rain 11
4.9 Formed Finishes 11
4.10 Unformed Finishes 12
4.11 Curing and Protection 13
4.12 Accuracy of Construction 13

5.1 Compliance Testing 21
5.2 Inspection 21
5.3 Temperature Control 22
5.4 Non-Destructive Testing 22
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for the use of structural quality concrete in
plain, reinforced or prestressed structures. Relevant requirements may also be
adopted for non-structural concrete, for example in external works. For particular
requirements of specialists works such as prestressing and pre-cast, refer to the
other respective sections.

C3-20 Reinforcement
C3-30 Formwork and Falsework
C3-40 Designed Joints
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1992 Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1 General rules and rules for building
Part 1-2 General rules - Structural fire design
Part 3 Liquid retaining and containment structures
SS 26 Ordinary Portland cement
SS 31 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and
fillers
SS 78 Testing concrete
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
SS 289 Concrete
Part 1 Guide to specifying concrete
Part 2 Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Part 3 Specifications for the procedures to be used in producing and
transporting concrete
Part 4 Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling,
testing and assessing compliance of concrete
SS 320 Concrete admixtures
BS EN 1008 Mixing water for concrete, specification for sampling, testing and
assessing the suitability of water
BS 4027 Sulfate-resisting Portland cement
BS 5606 Guide to Accuracy in Building
EN 197-1 Cement
Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for
common cements

Refer to the following technical for guidance where appropriate when carrying out the
works:
a. Kickerless construction (British Cement Association guide, 47.023, 1988)
b. CONQUAS 21 (BCA)
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Mix Design

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to prepare and submit concrete mix
design to SO’s acceptance.

No item.
1.4.3 Construction Joints

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to prepare and submit suitable
construction joints and details for acceptance by the SO.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Concrete Mix and Concreting Process

Ensure the concrete mix delivered and the concreting process will achieve the
specified strength and consistently for all concrete members as indicated in the
drawings, taking into consideration of site conditions and reinforcement details.
Take note that unless otherwise specified, concrete mix for structural elements to
achieve minimum grade 30.
2.2 Control on Shrinkage and Temperature Effects

Control the construction such that any crack due to shrinkage and temperature
effects does not exceed 0.1mm wide.
2.3 Construction Loads

Ensure during construction that the structure is not subjected to loads that will cause
short-term or long-term distress to the concrete.
2.4 Noise Nuisance

Take all necessary actions to ensure compliance with the Environment Public Health
Act, under Section 46 or the latest noise control regulations imposed by the NEA or
any relevant authorities.
The noise level at the nearest occupied building outside the Site is not to exceed the
following maximum permissible noise level, or shall have met the noise control
guidelines introduced by NEA whichever is the more stringent:
Type of occupied buildings Applicable period Maximum allowable equivalent
continuous noise level
measured over a period of 5
minutes in dB
(a) Hospital, school, home for 7am to 7 pm 75
the aged, sick etc
7pm to 7am 55
(b) Buildings other than those 7am to 7 pm 90
in (a) above
7pm to 7am 70
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Cement
3.1.1 Portland Cement

To SS 26.
3.1.2 Sulfate-resisting Portland Cement

To BS 4027.
3.1.3 Pulverized Fuel Ash (Pfa)

Comply with the requirements of EN 197-1, Clause 5.2.4 (Fly ashes).
3.1.4 Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag (Ggbs)

Comply with the requirements of EN 197-1, Clause 5.2.2 (Granulated blastfurnace
slag).
3.1.5 High Alumina Cement

Do not use.
3.1.6 Silica fume

Do not use without approval. To EN 197-1, Clause 5.2.7 (Silica fume) if allowed.
3.2 Fine Aggregates

Comply with SS 31 and not to be alkali reactive.
3.2.1 Testing
In accordance with SS 73.
3.2.2 Grading
Based on sieve analysis as described in SS 31 and SS 73, and to be within the limits
of one of the grading zones described in the standards subject to a tolerance of 5%.
3.3 Coarse Aggregates

Comply with SS 31.
3.3.1 Size
Not to exceed 40mm for lean and mass concrete.
Not to exceed 20mm for reinforced concrete.
To be graded down to a size retained on a 5mm mesh.
3.3.2 Grading
To be in accordance with SS 31 and SS 73. Aggregates not complying with SS 31 not
to be used.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.4 Water
All water used for mixing concrete, mortar and grout, for cleaning out formwork and
for curing to be clean and free from harmful matter in solution or suspension.
If taken from a source other than the Public Utilities Board, test in accordance with BS
EN 1008.
3.5 Admixtures
To comply with the requirements of SS 289: Part 1, Clause 4.4 (Admixtures).
Acceptance of admixtures will only be made upon provision of satisfactory information
relating to name, type, dosage and justification for use.
3.5.1 Air Entrainment

Admixtures to be based on Vinsol resin and comply with SS 320.
3.5.2 Chloride Content

Any admixtures used not to be substantially Calcium Chloride based.
3.5.3 Waterproofing Admixture

Refer to work section C3-50, clause 3.4 for general requirements of waterproofing
admixture.
3.6 Concrete Mix Constituents
3.6.1 Concrete Mixes
3.6.1.1 Design Mixes

Mix design to comply with requirements as set out in the PSD.
When designing the concrete mix, comply with the limiting mix parameters and
constituent materials as set out below to satisfy the strength and durability
requirements.
DESIGNED MIXES - (Extract from Annex A of SS 289: Part 2: 2000 Form A)
The mixes below shall be supplied as designed mixes in accordance with the relevant clauses of SS 289:
Parts 2, 3, and 4.
1 Mix reference DM1 DM2 DM3 DM4
2 Strength grade C30 C35 C40 C45
3 Nominal maximum size of aggregate (mm) 20 20 20 20
4 Type of aggregate
Coarse SS 31 SS 31 SS 31 SS 31
Fine SS 31 SS 31 SS 31 SS 31
Other BS 1047 BS 1047 BS 1047 BS 1047
5 Sulfate class [1] Class Class Class Class
Includes adjustment for acidity (yes/no) 1[1] (yes/no) (yes/no) (yes/no) (yes/no)
6 Cement type(s) or combinations conforming to
SS 26 PC PC PC PC
SS 477 PBFC PBFC PBFC PBFC
BS EN 197-1 PPFAC PPFAC PPFAC PPFAC
BS 4027 SRPC SRPC SRPC SRPC
BS EN 197-1[2] PLC PLC PLC PLC
Others
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
7 Minimum cement content [3] (kg/m3) 275 300 325 350

8 Maximum free water/cement ratio[3] 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.50
9 Quality assurance requirements
10 Rate of sampling intended by the purchaser for Table 15, Table 15, Table 15, Table 15,
strength testing (for information only) SS 289: SS 289: SS 289: SS 289:
Part 1 Part 1 Part 1 Part 1
11 Other requirements
See Part 1 Clause 4.1.1 (eg. maximum chloride,
alkali, if appropriate)
12 Workability
Slump (mm) 75 75 75 75
Compacting factor
Vebe (s)
Flow (mm)
13 Method of placing (for information only)

14 Other requirements (if appropriate)
1) Choose class 1, 2,3,4A or 4B. The purchaser should ensure that the sulphate class specified
accounts for the modifications required in tables 7c and 7d of SS 289: Part 1: 2000 where
appropriate. If the classification includes an adjustment for acidity (see table 7d of SS 289: Part 1:
2000), this should be specified in item 5.
2) Reference should be made to clause 4.2.4 of SS 289: Part 1: 2000 before specifying this cement.
3) Where a sulfate class is ringed and no preference for a cement type is indicated, the minimum
cement content and maximum free water/cement ration for the cement type to be used should be
in accordance with table 7a of Ss 289: Part 1: 2000.
3.6.1.2 Prescribed Mixes

To comply with requirements in the PSD.
Where required, provide concrete mixes in accordance with the following
requirements:
PRESCRIBED MIXES – (Extract from SS 289: Part 2: 2000 Form B)
The parts below shall be supplied as prescribed mixes in accordance with the relevant clauses of
SS 289: Part 2, 3 and 4
1. Mix Reference
2. Type(s) and standard strength class(es) of cement(s)
or combination(s)
3. Normal maximum size of aggregate (mm)
4. Types of Coarse
aggregate Fine
5. Mix Cement (kg)
proportions Fine aggregate (kg)
Coarse aggregate (kg)
Admixtures
Other
6. Workability Slump (mm)
Compacting factor
Vebe(s)
Flow (mm)
7. Quality assurance requirements
8. Method of compliance and rate of sampling
(for information only)
9. Other requirements
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
(e.g. maximum chloride, alkali, etc, if appropriate)

Limit the chloride content of the proposed concrete, including chloride contained in
the admixtures, to that specified in SS 289: Part 1, Clause 5.2.2 (Chlorides in
concrete).
Provide written evidence of conformance.
3.6.3 Calcium Chloride

Not to be included in any concrete.
3.6.4 Alkali-Silica Reaction

Take precautions, in accordance with SS 289: Part 1, Clause 5.2.4 (Alkali-silica
reaction), to prevent alkali-silica reaction. Test aggregates to determine any varieties
of susceptible silicas and for other local requirements.
3.6.5 Sulphates
Take precautions to restrict the amount of sulphate in the proposed concrete, in
accordance with SS 289: Part 1, Clause 5.2.3 (Sulphates in concrete).
3.6.6 Additions or Changes

Aditions or changes to the fresh concrete not to be made after batching without the
prior agreement of the SO.
3.7 Ready-Mix Concrete Plant

Obtain from an approved source. Ensure that the concrete supplied complies with the
requirements of this specification and the recommendations of SS 289.
Forward details of the ready-mix concrete plant proposed for use to the SO for
acceptance. Provide contingency plans prior to commencement of work in the event
of supplies being interrupted during a pour due to a plant breakdown. Where feasible,
details of a suitable back-up plant/supplier should be submitted to the SO for
acceptance.
3.8 Surface Hardener

To consist of aggregate particles which have a hardness of not less than 7, as
measured by Moh’s scale.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Transportation of Concrete

Supply and transport all concrete to the point of discharge from the mixer/agitator in
accordance with SS 289.
4.1.1 Delivery Tickets

Information to be in accordance with SS 289 Part 3, Clause 5.10.4.4 (Delivery ticket)
and to be completed and available prior to discharge of concrete into the structure.
4.2 Inserts
Ensure that any cast-in inserts are securely fixed prior to placing concrete.
4.3 Placing and Compaction

Place and compact the concrete in accordance with SS CP 65: Part 1: 1999 Clause
6.2.2 (Placing and compacting concrete).
Place and fully compact the concrete to avoid cold joints and honeycombing, and to
minimize segregation, excessive blemishes or other defects in the hardened
concrete.
4.4 Kickers
Kickers to be monolithic with the slab, of sound construction and not less than
100mm high.
Where kickerless construction is specified on the drawings, form horizontal
construction joints for walls and columns without kickers taking guidance from the
British Cement Association Guide: Kickerless Construction, Ref. 47.023, 1988.
Ensure robustness of the chosen method of construction and cast a sample wall and
column panel for the SO’s approval.
4.5 Construction Joints
4.5.1 General
Position and form joints such as to suit the structure and to avoid distress to the
structure.
Unless otherwise agreed with the SO limit pour sizes to as given in the following
table:
Max. Area Max. Dimension (m)
CONSTRUCTION (m²)
Water-resisting walls 25 5
Water-resisting slabs 100 10
Slabs with major restraint at both ends 100 13
Slabs with major restraint at one end 250 20
only
Slabs with little restraint in any direction 500 30
Walls 40 10
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.2 Preparation of Construction Joints

Carefully prepare construction joint surfaces to expose the coarse aggregate and
leave a roughened surface to provide a key. Apply a layer of cement grout on the joint
surface prior to pouring fresh concrete against a construction joint.
4.6 Concreting in Hot Weather

Comply with the recommendations of SS EN 1992 (Concreting in tropical climate)
and make reference to SS 289 where appropriate.
Cool formwork made of metal, concrete or other material with water before placing
concrete against it.
Ensure no standing water is left in formwork.
4.7 Pours with Temperature Control

In pours when temperature control measures are necessary to achieve the
performance requirement of crack control due to temperature and shrinkage in clause
2.3, or when rich mixes are to be placed at high ambient temperatures, or when
directed by the SO:
a. Propose suitable methods to SO’s acceptance to ensure the temperature of the
concrete does not exceed 65°C during hydration.
b. Control the temperature gradient across the section by the provision of thermal
insulation to prevent a differential greater than 20°C.
c. Monitor the temperature of the concrete through the section.
d. Continue temperature monitoring until the hottest part of the section is less than
20°C greater than the minimum daily ambient temperature.
e. Protect the concrete from abrupt changes in temperature at the end of the curing
period.
f. Inspect and remove any bleeding water and weak concrete at the top surface
prior to setting of concrete, replace the surface concrete and re-compact if
necessary.
The limits on temperature differential may be adjusted by agreement with the SO,
subject to assessment of information concerning the aggregate type and its effect on
the thermal coefficient of expansion of the concrete.
4.8 Protection from Rain

Protect the concrete during transportation and after placing using tarpaulins,
polythene sheeting etc.
If heavy rain commences during concreting, implement appropriate protection
measures before continuing.
4.9 Formed Finishes

All formed finishes to be type A in accordance with SS CP 65 unless otherwise
specified in the PSD.
All formed finishes to be type A in accordance with SS EN 1992 unless noted below:
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Location Type of Finish
Prepare a sample of the specified formed finishes at the start of the Contract for SO’s
acceptance, and to be kept and used as a reference throughout the duration of the
Contract.
4.9.1 Type A Finish

Use properly designed formwork or moulds of timber, plywood, plastics, concrete or
steel. Small blemishes caused by entrapped air or water may be expected, but the
surface to be free from voids, honeycombing or other blemishes.
4.9.2 Type B Finish

Use high quality concrete and formwork. Thoroughly compact the concrete. All
surfaces to be true, with clean arrises. Only very minor surface blemishes may occur,
with no staining or discolouration from the release agent.
4.9.3 Type C Finish

Obtain type C finish by first producing a type B finish, then removing all fins and
projections, thoroughly wash down and fill obvious surface blemishes with a colour-
matched paste of cement and fine aggregate. After curing, rub down the surface as
necessary to produce a smooth and even finish.
4.10 Unformed Finishes

Provide Type U1 finish unless otherwise specified in the PSD.
Provide Type U1 finish unless noted below:
Location Type of Finish
4.10.1 Type U1 Finish

Level the concrete to produce a uniform closed surface. No further work is required.

After the concrete has hardened sufficiently, float the surface by hand or machine to
produce a uniform, level surface free of depressions or ridges.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS

After the concrete has hardened sufficiently and the moisture film has disappeared,
trowel the surface by hand or machine, using a steel trowel to produce a dense
smooth surface with no aggregate showing.
4.10.4 Brushed Finish

Brush surface of concrete while still green with a stiff broom or wire brush to produce
a lightly textured surface. Bristles are to be 1.6mm diameter unless otherwise agreed.
Brush consistently and continuously across each area designated.
4.11 Curing and Protection
4.11.1 Curing
Cure the surface of the concrete to avoid premature drying-out. Methods of curing to
be in accordance with SS CP 65: Part 1, Clause 6.2.3.3 (Methods) and as agreed
with the SO.
Commence curing immediately after compaction: protection from radiation to be in
place within 30 minutes of final tamping.
Curing membranes to be compatible with any finishes to be applied subsequently.
Cure for not less than 3 days after casting.
4.11.2 Protection
Protect the structure against damage.
Propose methods for the repair of any damage occurring and make good subject to
the agreement of the SO.
4.12 Accuracy of Construction

Construct all work within the permissible deviations given below. Refer to PSD for
items where tighter accuracy is required.
Construct to tighter accuracy to items as noted below:
Clause No. Description Permitted Deviation (mm)
Note that the tolerances given here are not cumulative. Carry out regular checks on
the accuracy of the structure and if a part of the structure is found to be out of
tolerance, propose any remedial work required.
4.12.1 Hierarchy of Specified Permissible Deviations

Note that the requirements of 4.12.5 may be modified by 4.12.2.2, 4.12.8 and 4.12.9.
4.12.2 Size of Elements
4.12.2.1 Slab thickness

Permitted deviations on slab thickness to be as follows:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
Thickness, t (mm) Permitted deviation, D (mm)

Up to and including 150 ±6
Over 150 up to and including 600 ± 10
Over 600 up to and including 1000 ± 15
Over 1000 ± 20
4.12.2.2 Formed elements

The linear dimension L of formed elements (including beams, columns, walls,
openings) will be accurate to within the following (where L is length, height or width of
element in the direction considered).
L Permitted deviation, D (mm)
Up to and including 600mm 8
Over 600mm up to and including 10
1.5m
Over 1.5m up to and including 8m 15
Over 8m up to and including 15m 20
Over 15m up to and including 30m 30
Over 30m 30 + 1mm per metre or part
over 30m
4.12.3 Twist of Elements

The distance from any one corner to the plane containing the other three corners to
be accurate within the following:

Up to and including 600mm ±6
Over 600mm up to and including 3m ± 10
Over 3m up to and including 8m ± 15
Over 8m ± 15 + 2mm per metre or part
over 8m
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.12.4 Squareness of elements

Up to and including 600mm ±6
Over 600mm up to and including ± 10
2m
Over 2m up to and including 4m ± 15
Over 4m ± 15 + 1mm per metre or part
over 4m
4.12.5 Position on Plan
4.12.5.1 Foundations
Permitted deviation for position on plan of any element of the foundation relative to
the intended position = ± 30 mm.
4.12.5.2 Elements above foundation

Permitted deviation for position on plan of any element above the foundation relative
to the intended position = ± 10 mm measured at floor level.
4.12.5.3 Edge of slab

PD of position on plan of slab edges relative to the intended position = ± 10mm
measured at floor level.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.12.6 Level of Elements

The following tolerances are for surfaces that will receive further levelling finishes and
are pre-strike.
4.12.6.1 Intended level

Permissible deviation from intended level = ± 10mm.
4.12.6.2 Top of foundation

Permissible deviation of the top surface of any foundation = ± 25 mm
4.12.6.3 Level of intersecting beams

Permissible deviation of beams intended to be at the same level = + 10 mm.
4.12.6.4 Level between two points 6 m apart

Permissible deviation 10 mm.
4.12.6.5 Any point under a 3 m straight edge

Permissible deviation for any position on floor  6mm.
4.12.7 Cast-in Fixings

Permissible deviation from intended position = 6mm
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.12.8 Verticality of Elements

Plumb over a height including beams or edges above each other will be accurate to
within the following:
Height m  mm
Up to and including 1.5 5
Over 1.5 up to and including 2.5 10
Over 2.5 up to and including 4 15
Over 4 up to and including 8 20
Over 8 20 + 1mm per metre or part over 8m (to
a maximum of 50mm)
4.12.9 Bow of Elements
4.12.9.1 Unspecified bow as measured between extremities

Permissible deviation not to exceed the following:
Length m  mm
Up to and including 1.5 +/-5
Over 1.5 up to and including 3 +/-8
Over 3 up to and including 5 +/-10
Over 5 up to and including 8 +/-15
Over 8 +/-15 + 1mm per metre or part over 8m (with a
maximum of 25mm)
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.12.9.2 Specified pre-camber

Permissible deviation not to exceed the following:
Specified camber mm  mm
Up to and including 20 ± 5
Over 20, up to and including 40 ± 10
Over 40 ± 15
4.12.10 Abrupt Changes to Continuous Surfaces where Finish is not

Specified
 = Permitted up to 3 mm.
4.12.11 Cast-in Foundation Bolts

Pre-set foundation bolt or bolt groups when prepared for adjustment. Permitted
deviation from specified position as follows:
Pre-set foundation bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for adjustment. Permitted
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
Pre-set wall bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for adjustment. Permitted
4.12.12 Openings for Services

Permitted deviations for openings = + 10 mm for size and ± 25 mm for location.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Compliance Testing

Carry out sampling and testing during concreting operations in accordance with SS
289: Part 4 and the appropriate parts of SS 78.
Supply three copies of all test results to the SO as soon as they are available.
5.1.1 Addition of Water

If water or other materials are added to the ready-mix truck mixer drum before
discharge, comply with SS 289 Part 3, Clause 5.10.4.3 (Additional water). Carry out
additional concrete cube strength testing where designed mixes are used. The water
added to be recorded on the delivery ticket.
5.1.2 Testing of Concrete Cubes

Test concrete cubes in an accepted SAC accredited laboratory independent of
contractual parties in accordance with SS 289: Part 4.
5.1.2.1 Electronic Tagging

Unless otherwise agreed, all concrete cubes are to be electronically tagged to allow
accurate tracing of the cube samples. Propose suitable electronic tagging system for
SO’s acceptance.
Propose and provide an electronic recording system with the following capability:
a. Relevant data can be authenticated at the request of the SO
b. Results can be transmitted to the SO via the internet system, within 3 hours of the
test
c. Data management software is supplied and capable of providing analysis of the
results including standard deviation computations. The software shall also be
capable of displaying the cube testing data and analysis graphically.
d. All data can be compiled in a CD ROM to be submitted to the SO at the end of the
project.
5.2 Inspection
5.2.1 Inspection Before Concreting

Inspect the formwork, spacers, fixed reinforcement and inserts before placing the
concrete. Allow concrete to be placed only when the works are inspected and
satisfactorily accepted by the SO.
5.2.2 Inspection After Concreting

Inspect the concrete after the specified curing period. Identify any remedial work
required and submit proposal of rectification for agreement by the SO.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3 Temperature Control

Provide evidence that the temperature of the concrete will not exceed 65°C during
hydration where large sections and/or rich mixes are being used.
5.4 Non-Destructive Testing

Carry out non-destructive tests as indicated in the PSD, or as directed. Carry out the
tests in accordance with SS 78.
Carry out non-destructive testing to the concrete structure as scheduled below:
Type of test Location Number of test
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
C3-20 Reinforcement
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
2.1 Detail Reinforcement Drawings and Workshop Drawings 5
2.2 Bar schedule 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Reinforcement 6
3.2 Welded Fabric Reinforcement 6
3.3 Couplers 6
3.4 Spacers 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 7
4.1 Storage 7
4.2 Cutting, Bending and Fixing 7
4.3 Tying and Welding of Reinforcement 7
4.4 Surface Condition 7
4.5 Cages for Precast Units 7
4.6 Cover 8
4.7 Ground Bearing Slabs 8
4.8 Laps 8
4.9 Anchorages 8
4.10 Exposed Reinforcement 8
4.11 Accuracy 8

5.1 Submissions 9
5.2 Sample Tests 9
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for bars and welded fabric reinforcements
used in reinforced concrete elements.

No item.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 2 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
Part 1 Plain bars (steel grade 300)
Part 2 Ribbed bars (steel grade 500)
Part 3 Plain and ribbed bars (steel grades 250 and 460)
SS 18 Cold-reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete and the
manufacture of welded fabric
SS 32 Welded steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
Part 1 Steel grades 300 and 500
Part 2 Steel grade 485
SS CP 83 Construction computer-aided design (CAD)
SS 117 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
Other Standards
BS 6744 Stainless steel bars for the reinforcement of and use in concrete –
requirements and test methods
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
BS EN ISO
Metal arc welding of steel for concrete reinforcement
17660-1:2006
BS 8666 Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel
reinforcement for concrete
BS ISO 14654 Epoxy-coated steel for the reinforcement of concrete

a. CIRIA Report 92 (1981) Reinforcement connector and anchorage methods
b. Concrete Society Technical Report No. 51 Guidance on the use of stainless steel
reinforcement
c. Spacers for reinforcement concrete by Concrete Society Report CS 101 (1989)
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Detail Reinforcement Drawings

Refer to the PSD for requirement of producing detail reinforcement drawings based
on reinforcement schedules shown in the structural drawings.
Do not produce detail reinforcement drawings based on reinforcement schedules
shown in the structural drawings. Produce the drawings for the following locations:
Location Structural Elements Reference Drawing No.

NA NA NA
Submit - sets of detail reinforcement drawings to the SO for acceptance prior to

construction. Allow at least - days for review.
Engage qualified and experienced personnel to prepare the detail reinforcement
drawings for submission to the SO for acceptance prior to construction.
1.4.2 Workshop Drawings and Bar Schedules

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to prepare workshop drawings and bar
schedules prior to construction.

No items.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
2.1 Detail Reinforcement Drawings and Workshop Drawings

To comply with SS CP 83.
2.2 Bar schedule

To comply with BS 8666.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Reinforcement
3.1.1 Reinforcing bars

Use the following types, to SS2.
a. Plain bar reinforcement: Grade 250 or 300 as specified in the drawings.
b. Deformed bar reinforcement: Grade 460 or 500 as specified in the drawings.
3.1.2 Galvanized Reinforcement

Comply with SS 117 after cutting and bending. Thickness of galvanised coating to be
in accordance with clause 6.2 of SS 117.
3.1.3 Stainless Steel Bar Reinforcement

To BS 6744, type 304 S31 and 316 S33, strength grade 250 for plain round bars and
grade 460 for deformed high yield steel bars.
3.1.4 Epoxy Coated Bar Reinforcement

To BS ISO 14654, bond classification type 1 or 2 as indicated in the drawings.
Handle and fix so as to avoid damage to the coating, and avoid exposing the
underlying steel.
3.2 Welded Fabric Reinforcement

To SS 32.
3.3 Couplers
Performance requirements of couplers shall be in compliance with CIRIA Report 92.
Carry out installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation,
subject to acceptance by the SO.
3.4 Spacers
Detail, supply and fix all spacers, in accordance with SS CP 65:Part 1, Clause 7.3.
Seek SO’s acceptance for spacers where the concrete will be exposed subsequently.
Mortar spacers to have durability and strength characteristics not less than the
surrounding concrete.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Storage
Store reinforcement clear of the ground, and protect from mud, oil and other
substances that may adversely affect its use in the works.
Deliver and store steel fabric in flat.
4.2 Cutting, Bending and Fixing

In accordance with SS EN 1992: Part 1, Clauses 7.2 and 7.3.
4.3 Tying and Welding of Reinforcement
4.3.1 Tying Reinforcement

Tie reinforcement with black annealed mild-steel 16-gauge tying wire.
Tie stainless steel reinforcement using 16 swg annealed stainless steel wire.
4.3.2 Tying Wire

Bend all ends away from the concrete face and remove all loose ends before placing
concrete.
4.3.3 Welding of Reinforcement

Permitted only with the prior written approval of the SO. Where permitted, carry out
in accordance with SS EN 1992 and BS EN ISO 17660-1:2006.
4.3.4 Welding Procedures

All work is to be carried out by properly qualified welders using approved procedures.
4.3.5 Welding of Galvanised Reinforcement

Not permitted.
4.4 Surface Condition

At the time of placing concrete, ensure the reinforcement are clean, free of corrosive
pitting, loose rust and mill scale and other substances that may adversely affect the
bond with concrete. Light surface rust is acceptable.
4.5 Cages for Precast Units

Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement drawings to
provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover and fit within the
moulds are achieved.
Reinforcement not exceeding 12mm in diameter which projects from the face of the
units may be bent to facilitate the casting or demoulding of the unit subject to
approval for each case.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
4.6 Cover
Maintain concrete cover to reinforcement as shown on reinforcement drawings.
Ensure that the actual cover to all reinforcement is not less than the nominal cover
minus 5 mm.
Before concreting, check thoroughly that the specified cover dimensions have been
obtained.
4.7 Ground Bearing Slabs

Where these are reinforced with a single layer of fabric in the upper part of the slab,
the fabric may be placed in position on top of the first compacted layer of concrete,
followed by the top layer of concrete, placed within 30 minutes of the first layer.
4.8 Laps
Lap reinforcement as shown on the drawings unless otherwise agreed with the SO.
Where laps required are not shown in the drawings, propose suitable location for
SO’s acceptance. Comply with the requirements of SS CP 65: Part 1, Clause 3.12.8.
4.9 Anchorages
Protect all steel parts from corrosion and keep all threaded parts protected until used.
Keep all devices free from any coating or contamination.
Anchorages, including buried dead anchorages, shall be fixed with due regard to
cover requirements for corrosion resistance and fire protection.
4.10 Exposed Reinforcement

In the event that reinforcement are expected to be exposed for a prolonged period
over three months or such that loose rust and scale may form, apply a corrosion
protection coating to SO’s acceptance. Ensure the coating is compatible with the
concrete and will not reduce the bond of the reinforcement.
4.11 Accuracy
4.11.1 Cover to Reinforcement

Unless otherwise specified, ensure tolerances to be in accordance with SS CP
65:Part 1, Clause 7.3.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-20 Reinforcement
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Mill Certification

Prior to putting the reinforcement on site, provide mill certificate to confirm that each
batch of steel and mesh supplied to the site complies with SS 2, SS 18 or SS 32 as
appropriate. Include also information such as country of origin and the name of
supplier for review.
5.1.2 Details of Welding Works

Submit full details of welder’s qualifications, welding procedures and joint details for
acceptance prior to carrying out the works if required for the project.
5.2 Sample Tests

Carry out the following tests in an approved laboratory on every batch of
reinforcement delivered to site. Testing requirements and frequency to be in
accordance with SS 2 for reinforcement bars and SS 32 for welded steel fabric.
a. Tensile test
b. Bend and Re-bend test
c. Weldability test
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
2.1 Design Requirements 5
2.2 Formwork Use 5
2.3 Cambers 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Formwork Material 6
3.2 Permanent Formwork 6
3.3 Release Agents 6
3.4 Formwork Ties 6
4. WORKMANSHIP 7
4.1 Formwork 7
4.2 System Forms 7
4.3 Formwork Ties 7
4.4 Block Outs and Cast-in Items 7
4.5 Striking 8

5.1 Submissions 9
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the general requirements for falsework and formwork used for
structural concrete works except precasting mould, which is covered in section C3-
60.

No item.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore standards
SS 580:2012 Formwork Code of Practice
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of reinforced concrete buildings
1.3.2 Technical reference

Refer to the following technical for guidance in carrying out the works.
a. Formwork: a guide to good practice (Concrete Society Publication, 2nd Edition
1995)
b. Plain formed concrete finishes (Concrete Society Technical Report 52, 1999)
c. Formwork Striking Times – criteria, prediction and methods of assessment (CIRIA
Report 136)
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Contractor’s Submission and Proposal

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to carry out design and supervision of
the formwork and falsework supports in accordance with statutory requirements and
all relevant regulations. The design of falseworks shall be endorsed by a professional
engineer (civil) and submit to MOM when required statutorily.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS

No items.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Design Requirements

Carry out the design of the formwork and falsework system in accordance with SS
CP23. Account for all construction loads and dead weight of the structures. Account
also for the intended surface finish to the concrete members.
2.2 Formwork Use

Construct formwork so as to contain the concrete, to give the required surface finish
to the concrete and to adequately support the concrete in the desired final position
throughout the period of use.
2.3 Cambers
Unless otherwise indicated, provide cambers to the structural elements as indicated
in the PSD if any.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following cambers to the structural elements:
Element Location Pre-camber (mm or % span)
Beams
Slabs
Cantilevers
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Formwork Material

Use materials that suit the method of construction to be employed and the surface
finish required for the final work. Both timber and steel are acceptable materials.
Refer to PSD for preferred material for the formwork if any.
3.2 Permanent Formwork

May be used subject to the agreement of the SO. Refer to the PSD for requirement to
use permanent formwork if any.
3.3 Release Agents

Propose release agents to the acceptance of the SO to suit the method of
construction and the finish required, taking note of the requirements of subsequent
trades.
All release agents used to be non-staining, non-injurious to the finished concrete and
not to be adversely affected by the weather.
3.4 Formwork Ties

Submit proposals for SO’s acceptance.
In water-resisting construction, use ties of a type that does not induce seepage and
reduce the water-resistance of the structure.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Formwork
4.1.1 Condition of formwork

Ensure formwork is clean and clear of all debris and free water before concrete is
placed.
4.1.2 Joints
Seal all joints in formwork to avoid leakage of grout and staining of concrete surfaces.
4.1.3 Existing construction

Do not cast concrete directly against existing construction or faces of excavations
without prior agreement of the SO except as shown on the drawings.
4.1.4 Support from Ground

Where structural concrete relies on permanent or temporary support from the ground,
ensure that the support is firm enough for the concreting operations.
4.2 System Forms

Where system formwork is proposed to be used, comply strictly to manufacturer’s
requirements and recommendations. Submit details for SO’s acceptance.
4.3 Formwork Ties

Ensure that no ferrous metals are left in the concrete cover zone when the formwork
has been struck.
Make good any holes left exposed to view in the faces of the concrete to the
satisfaction of the SO.
In the case of water-resistant construction, do not fix formwork in a manner which
result in holes through the concrete section permanently.
4.4 Block Outs and Cast-in Items

a. Clear out block out items after concreting.
b. Set out and fix all cast-in items shown or referenced on the drawings.
c. Resolve any clashes between holes, cast-in items and reinforcement before any
concrete is placed.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5 Striking
4.5.1 Support
Provide support for the concrete in the required position until it has gained adequate
strength. Determine the strength of concrete required to support its own weight and
any construction loads, without short- or long-term distress, and propose for SO’s
acceptance.
4.5.2 Striking
Unless otherwise agreed with the SO, allow for the minimum period as follows before
striking the formworks:
Minimum period before striking
Location (surface temperature of concrete
not less than 16°C)
Vertical formwork to columns, walls and
1 day
beams
Slab soffits (props undisturbed) 3 days
Props to slab 7 days
Beam soffits (props undisturbed) 7 days
Props to beams 9 days
If earlier striking time is desired, proposed for SO’s acceptance, giving due
consideration to the concrete strength at the time of removal, the ambient conditions
and the curing and protection of the concrete when the formwork has been removed.
4.5.3 Sequence
Propose and agree with the SO, the sequence of propping/re-propping and
backpropping through the structure. Ensure that there are no damaging effects on the
permanent structure.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions

Submit the proposed sequence of propping/re-propping and backpropping through
the structure in a method statement and agree in advance with the SO prior to
procuring any material and execution of the works.
Include details of:
a. materials for falsework and formwork
b. target age and strength of concrete at striking
c. method of determining strength
d. calculation of imposed loads on lower slabs
e. methods to ensure that slabs are not struck understrength/overloaded
5.1.2 System Forms

Where jumpforming or slipforming are proposed, submit full details for SO’s
acceptance in advance to engaging the system. Include at least the following
information:
a. materials to be used
b. proposed rate of slip
c. concrete mix
d. methods of checking strength during the pour
e. methods of forming openings
f. details of cast-ins
g. methods of fixing reinforcement
h. placing methods
i. procedures for stopping the slip
j. protection
k. concrete repair
5.1.3 Falsework support

Submit all design for falsework supports to SO for acceptance prior to commencing
the works. Submit to the authorities such as Ministry of Manpower for records where
required.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.2 Related sections 3
1.3 Standards 3
2.1 Contractor’s proposal 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Movement Joint System and Fillers 6
3.2 Joint Waterproofing Material 6
3.3 Dowel System 7
3.4 Sheet Membrane for Sliding Joints 7
3.5 Crack inducers 7
4. WORKMANSHIP 9
4.1 Forming Joints 9
4.2 Construction Joints 9
4.3 Workmanship for Joint Waterproofing 9
4.4 Crack-inducing Grooves 9
4.5 Bottom of Slab Crack Inducers 10
4.6 Inserted Strip Crack Inducers 10

5.1 Submission 11
5.2 Samples / Mock-ups 12
5.3 Tests 12
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers general requirements for designed settlement and expansion
joints in concrete structures. It also covers crack induced construction joints. For
general requirements of normal construction joints refer to Section C3-10 (Concrete
Construction Generally).
1.2 Related sections
C3-50 Water-resistance to Concrete Structures
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 6093 Code of Practice for design of joints and jointing in building construction
1.3.2 Technical references
a. CIRIA Report 146 Design and construction of joints in concrete structures
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. Concrete Society Technical Report TR 34
1.4 Trade Preambles
The type of designed joints and locations are indicated in the drawings. Engage
qualified and experienced personnel to propose the following for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Suitable joint materials including joint fillers and waterproofing element
etc. to comply with the performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1
below.
1.4.1.2 Details and construction method to install the joint materials as proposed.
1.4.2 Provide Spare Material
Deliver to site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store
where directed, additional joint materials for minor replacement or repairs in the near
future, as listed in the PSD.
Provide spare materials as listed below:
Item Quantity
Joint filler
Joint sealant
Sealant backer rod
1.4.3 Warranty
Warrant all design joints for a minimum period as specified in the PSD, in accordance
with contract conditions against all defects from the date of completion.
Warrant all designed joints for a minimum period of 5 years, in accordance with
contract conditions against all defects from the date of completion.
1.4.4 Maintenance Manual
Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual covering the designed

joints and materials for the project. Refer to the General Requirements section,
clause 1.4.8 for details.
No item.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Contractor’s proposal
When carrying out the proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take account of the
following requirements and provide manufacturer’s data to confirm suitability:
2.1.1 Characteristics of the Joints
Satisfy the required characteristics of the joints as set out in the PSD.
Satisfy the required characteristics of the joints as set out below:
1. Joint type designation:
2. Type of joint
3. Characteristics Requirements
Movement: Vertical
Movement: Horizontal
Watertightness (Tick if req’d)
Fire-rating
2.1.2 Durability
Ensure the joints achieve the required design life as set out in the PSD.
Ensure the joints achieve the required design life of 10 years.
2.1.3 Proprietary products
When a proprietary product is specified, verify and submit evidence that the product
will satisfy the performance requirements as above. In case that the desired
performance of the selected product cannot be verified, notify the SO and propose
alternative product for acceptance.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Movement Joint System and Fillers
Comply with BS 6093 Table 2 – Fillers for movement joints.

Refer to PSD for the type of joint system and filler selected for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project:
Joint type Product manufacturer and Particular quality
model requirements (if any)
3.2 Joint Waterproofing Material
Refer to PSD for selected proprietary products for the project if any.
Item Product manufacturer Particular quality
and model requirements (if any)
Waterstops
Sealants
Gaskets
Baffles
Primer
Preformed sealing strips
3.2.1 Waterstops
Refer to Section C3-50, clause 3.5.
3.2.2 Sealants, Gaskets and Baffles
For general requirement refer to section C3-50, clause 3.8.
3.2.3 Primer
To be applied for concrete surfaces to facilitate the application of sealant.

Primer to be to sealant manufacturer’s recommendation and to be compatible with
the proposed sealant.
3.2.4 Preformed Compressible Sealing Strips
For general requirement refer to section C3-50, clause 3.8.3.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3 Dowel System
3.3.1 Sliding Dowel System
Refer to PSD for the type of sliding dowel system selected for the project if any.
Provide the following proprietary product or approved equivalent for the project
Item Product manufacturer and model
Sliding dowel system
3.3.2 Tie Bars
To be grade 250, clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and other
deleterious substances.
3.3.3 Mesh Tie Strips
To SS 32, clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil and other deleterious
substances.
3.3.4 Dowel Bars
To SS 2, provide in straight, with sawn (not sheared) ends.

3.3.4.1 Debonding
Propose a proprietary debonding compound or plastic sleeve to SO’s acceptance.
Apply to half of the dowel bars.
3.3.4.2 Cap
Propose suitable product to SO’s acceptance. Fit with not less than 20mm of
compressible material to the debonded end of the dowel.
3.4 Sheet Membrane for Sliding Joints
Refer to PSD for the product selected for the project if any.
Sheet Membrane for Sliding Joints
3.5 Crack inducers
3.5.1 Bottom of Slab Crack Inducer
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
Bottom of slab crack

inducer
3.5.2 Inserted Crack Inducer
Inserted crack inducer
3.5.3 Crack Inducing Grooves
Refer to the drawings and PSD for the required dimension of the grooves if any.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Forming Joints
4.1.1 Accuracy
Position and form joints accurately, straight, well-aligned and truly vertical or
horizontal or parallel with setting out lines of the building. Construct the joint within
an acceptable tolerance of 2mm unless otherwise specified.
4.1.2 Pour Sequence
Plan the pour sequence in such manner as to minimise restraints.

Do not use a chequered board sequence for water-resisting construction.
4.1.3 Modifications
Modifications to any joint design or location, if necessary, to be agreed before

proceeding.
4.1.4 Placing Concrete
Prevent concrete entering joints or penetrating compressible joint fillers and making
movement joints ineffective.
Do not place concrete simultaneously on both sides of movement joints.
4.2 Construction Joints
Propose suitable joint location and detail for SO’s acceptance. Take note of any
desired location that may be indicated in the drawings. Refer to Section C3-10,
clause 4.5.
4.3 Workmanship for Joint Waterproofing
For general requirement refer to section C3-50, clause 4.14.
4.3.1 Sealants
Apply in accordance manufacturer’s recommendation. Avoid overspill onto the

adjacent concrete surface.
4.4 Crack-inducing Grooves
Insert temporary strips into the fully compacted concrete. Compact and level the slab
along the strips. Remove strips.
If the type of aggregate so permits, saw grooves in the top surface of the slab
sufficiently early (within 24 hours of casting slab) to prevent random cracking.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5 Bottom of Slab Crack Inducers
Fix securely to sub-base.
4.6 Inserted Strip Crack Inducers
4.6.1 Forming groove
Fully compact and level the concrete, insert steel T bar and withdraw to form void.
4.6.2 Placing strip
Carefully insert strip to accurate line and level, then re-compact and re-level slab.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission
5.1.1 Tender submission
Submit the following information with the tender:

a. Technical details including catalogues of the joint system.
b. Certificates to show compliance with the codes set out in the specifications.
c. Sample of typical joint materials.
d. Records of past projects where the proposed joint system has been successfully
installed.
Provide a Method Statement for the acceptance of the SO prior to commencement of

the works containing at least the information given below:
5.1.2.1 Materials
For each material or system proposed, manufacturers’ data, test results, design life
certificates, health and safety information.
5.1.2.2 Sequence
Proposed sequence for each of the operations required to complete the works,
5.1.2.3 Methods
All tools and equipment to be used, application methods, proposed methods for
undertaking the various elements of the work, including details of access and
indicating how any restrictions on noise and nuisance are to be met.
5.1.2.4 Site organisation and quality control
Details of how the works are to be controlled, sampling regimes, proposed testing
methods and organisation.
5.1.3 Product Certificates
For all materials proposed, submit certificate from manufacturers showing evidence
of compliance with the specified quality requirements.
5.1.4 Maintenance / Replacement manual
Cover all joint systems and materials in the maintenance manual to be submitted
before handing over.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty for SO acceptance upon completion of the works.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2 Samples / Mock-ups
Submit samples of all joint system and materials for SO’s acceptance prior to
ordering of the material. Identify and label the samples appropriately.
5.3 Tests
5.3.1 Watertightness
For joints specified as watertight, test all joints after installation with a spraying hose
for watertightness.
If there is any leakage, dampness and presence of seepage water, propose and carry
out rectification or replacement to the SO’s acceptance.
5.3.2 Fire Resistance
For joints specified with fire rating requirements, submit certificate or evidence
demonstrating compliance with FSSB requirements. If certificate is not available,
submit samples of the materials to FSSB for testing to obtain the certification.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
2.1 Design Input Requirements 6
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Materials Compatibility 8
3.2 Damp-proof Membranes 8
3.3 Tanking Membranes 8
3.4 Waterproofing Admixtures 9
3.5 Waterstops 9
3.6 Injection System 10
3.7 Chemical/cement Grout 10
3.8 Materials for Joints 10
3.9 Waterproof Renders 11
3.10 Formwork Ties 11
4. WORKMANSHIP 12
4.1 Construction Loads 12
4.2 Storage 12
4.3 Protection 12
4.4 Pour Sizes 12
4.5 Fixing Formwork 12
4.6 Pipe Penetrations 12
4.7 Temporary Propping 12
4.8 Inspection 12
4.9 Repairs 12
4.10 Waterstops 13
4.11 Bonded Membrane Systems 13
4.12 Liquid Membranes 14
4.13 Pressure Grouting 14
4.14 Workmanship for Joints 14

5.1 Submissions 15
5.2 Samples / Mock-ups 16
5.3 Inspection and Rectification 16
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers primarily the requirements of waterproofing for below ground in-
situ concrete structures to exclude water. It may be adapted to cover the concrete
element of water retaining structures e.g. tanks and swimming pools. For
waterproofing applied as surface finish to such structures refer to Architectural
specifications.

No items.
1.3 Standards
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 81 Precast concrete slab and wall panels
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of reinforced concrete buildings
Other Standards
BS 2782 Methods of testing plastics
BS 3177 Method for determining the permeability to water vapour of
flexible sheet materials used for packaging
BS 6213 Guide to the selection of construction sealants
BS 8102 Code of practice for protection of structures against water from
the ground
ASTM D638-02 Standard test method for tensile properties of plastics
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
ASTM D5385-93e1 Standard test method for hydrostatic pressure resistance of

waterproofing membranes
ASTM E96-00e1 Standard test methods for water vapour transmission of
materials
ASTM E154-99 Standard test methods for water vapour retarders used in
contact with earth under concrete slabs, on walls, or as ground
cover

a. CIRIA Report 139 Water-resisting basements
b. BE 27: Appendix B: Part C(vi) & (vii) Waterproofing and surfacing of bridge decks,
Appendix B: Department of transport checks and test for the approval of
waterproofing systems for concrete decks to highway bridges
1.4 Trade Preambles

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to develop the design and propose a
complete waterproofing system to comply with the performance and quality
requirements as set out in this specification.

Coordinate all relevant interfacing work packages and trades as follows:
a. Structural substrate works
b. Services work crossing or penetrating the waterproofing works
1.4.3 Warranty
Provide a warranty for a period of 10 years in accordance with contract conditions for
the entire waterproofing system including all components and accessories.

Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual for the waterproofing
system, including the joint fillers and sealants, to be carried out by the building
owners. Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for details.

4
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.6 Specialist Personnel

The waterproofing works are to be executed by experienced operatives who have
performed satisfactorily on similar work. Use the specialists for all aspects of the
works.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Design Input Requirements

Account for the following design input requirements when carrying out the design
proposals in clause 1.4.1.
2.1.1 Durability
Refer to PSD for the required design life of the waterproofing system.
The waterproofing system is to achieve a design life of 50 years.
2.1.2 Basement Grade

Four grades of internal environment, with regard to basement usage and
performance level, are defined in Table 1 of BS 8102. The table is reproduced below
with additional guidance on the functional environmental requirements for different
uses within each grade of basement as recommended in CIRIA Report 139.
Refer to the PSD for the basement grade designation of the areas shown on the
drawings. The performance requirements given in the standard shall be met.
The basement grade designation for various areas of the project is as follows:
Basement Location Usage Grade
Likely Form of Target Commentary

usage of construction Performance
Grade
basement level
Grade 1 Car parks, Structurally integral Some seepage Unless there is good ventilation, or
(Basic plant rooms protection. Concrete and damp local drainage, visible water may
utility) other than design to SS CP 65 patches not be acceptable even for the
electrical tolerable*. suggested uses.
equipment, Running or Note: SS CP 65 contains only
workshops standing water limited guidance on crack control
not acceptable. and lacks consideration of early
thermal movement. Using Part 1
may result in the formation of
cracks with widths unacceptable in
permeable ground.
Calculated crack widths will be
less than 0.3mm - which can still
leak water.
Check groundwater for chemicals
etc which could have a deleterious
effect on the structure
Grade 2 Workshops, Tanked protection No water Membranes may be applied in
(Better plant rooms system using well penetration multiple layers with well-lapped
utility) requiring lapped joints to acceptable but joints.
drier membranes and multi there may be The performance assumes no
environment, layers as appropriate. some moisture serious defects in workmanship,
retail storage Structurally integral vapour**. although these may be masked in
areas protection – dry conditions or impermeable
Reinforced design to ground. Groundwater should be
SS CP 73. checked as for Grade 1.
Waterproofing A high level of supervision of all
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
admixtures may be stages of construction is required.

considered. Drained Note that design to SS CP 73 still
cavity will be used has cracks, although of limited
where there is a width, which will still allow water
diaphragm or piled passage
basement wall.
Grade 3 Ventilated Tanked protection Dry Comments as for Grade 2.
Habitable residential system as above. environment. If the ground is highly permeable
and working Drained cavity system multi-element systems will
areas to wall and floor and probably be required.
including DPM.
offices, Structurally integral
restaurants, protection using
leisure design to SS CP 73.
centres. Waterproofing
admixtures may be
considered. Vapour
proof membranes
may also be used in
some circumstances
Grade 4 Archives and Tanked protection Totally dry Comments as for Grade 3.
(Special) stores system as above. environment. There would be a high risk in using
requiring Drained cavity system The humidity Integral protection alone.
special to wall and floor, with levels will be
controlled vapour barrier to important.
environment inner skin of wall and
to cavity floor.
Structurally integral
protection with design
to SS CP 73 and a
vapour proof
membrane
2.1.3 Material Performance
2.1.3.1 Material quality

Ensure that all materials comply with the relevant product standards as defined in this
specification.
2.1.3.2 Hydrostatic head resistance

All materials used for waterproofing the structure are to be capable of resisting the
hydrostatic head associated with the relevant site conditions.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Materials Compatibility

Ensure that all materials used are compatible and comply with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.2 Damp-proof Membranes

Suitable materials for the damp-proof membrane include:
a. Heavy-duty polyethylene sheets
b. Bituminous sheet
c. Bituminous felt
Minimum thickness of the damp-proof membranes to be used for different types of
ground conditions shall be in accordance with clause 3.2.1 of SS CP 82. The
sheeting shall be laid and jointed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
instructions, lapped 150mm at joints and taped with a waterproof tape, laid over lean
concrete.
3.3 Tanking Membranes

Use preformed membranes or liquid applied membranes.
3.3.1 Preformed Bonded Membranes
3.3.1.1 Suitable materials

Suitable materials for bonded membrane include:
a. Flexible and self-adhesive bituminous membrane with minimum thickness 1.5mm,
based on high performance 250 micron thick polymer films.
b. Flexible membrane capable of forming a full bond with concrete subsequently
cast, minimum thickness 1.5mm.
c. Do not use Bentonite membranes.
3.3.1.2 Required properties of bonded membranes

Performance parameter Typical value Test method
Thickness 1.5mm min
Hydrostatic head 70m ASTM D5385-93
resistance
Water vapour transmission 0.06g/m²/day ASTM E96-00
rate
Tensile strength (Carrier Longitudinal 48.4 N/mm² ASTM D638-02
Film)
Transverse 45.4 N/mm²
Puncture resistance 280N ASTM E154-99
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3.2 Liquid Membranes
3.3.2.1 Components
Provide a system comprising a primer and one or more layers of a two-component
liquid applied Elastomeric membrane.
3.3.2.2 Required properties of liquid applied membranes

Performance Typical value Test method
Total dry film thickness Minimum 2.5 mm
Water vapour transmission BS 3177
-1
(75%RH/25°C)(MNsg ) 3.36
Tensile strength BS 2782
unaged 8.6
180 days heat aged at 70°C 10.6
28 days water soaked at 23°C 9.1
500 hour UV aged 8.8
Elongation to failure (%) BS 2782
unaged 117
180 days heat aged at 70°C 124
28 days water soaked at 23°C 122
500 hour UV aged 123
Resistance to cracking BE27, Appendix B:
23°C No damage Part C(vi)
0°C No damage
Tensile bond strength to concrete BE27, Appendix B:
-2
(Nmm ) Part C(vii)
unaged 0.62
28 days heat aged at 70°C 0.62
28 days water soaked at 23°C 0.55
3.3.3 Primer
For bituminous membrane, use a bituminous primer in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.4 Waterproofing Admixtures

Where the required waterproofing performance is to be achieved by the use of
concrete waterproofing admixture systems, provide details of the proposed admixture
for agreement by the SO and provide full details of the proposed mix(es) to both the
supplier and the SO for agreement.
3.5 Waterstops
All waterstops to be capable of providing hydrostatic resistance appropriate to the
structure and joint in which they are installed.
3.5.1 Active Waterstops

Expanding type or hydrophilic waterstops shall have a volumetric increase of between
200% and 300% when in contact with water.
Do not use bentonite-based hydrophilic waterstops.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
Use Hydrophilic waterstops provided with a delay coating that retards the onset of
expansion so as to prevent premature expansion prior to concrete casting.
3.5.2 Passive Waterstops

Use flexible rubber or pvc.
3.6 Injection System

Provide a complete system, including hoses, junction boxes, resin, pumps and all
other components required for its installation and use.
3.6.1 Resin
Use flexible aqua-reactive injection resin which is chemically resistant and will
produce an expanded closed-cell foam on contact with water.
Provide details of the proposed product to the SO for agreement prior to starting
work.
3.6.2 Hoses
Shall be tough, flexible and chemically inert, and capable of re-injection at a later date
if further leakage occurs.
3.7 Chemical/cement Grout

To be approved chemical grout, which will form a continuous, uniform gel. Mix
proportions are to be as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.8 Materials for Joints

Use approved Silicone, Polyurethane or Polysulphide according to the classification
as in Table 3.1 of SS CP 81.
3.8.1 Sealants for Joints

The gap of the joints must be sealed for water tightness. Sealants are classified as
elastic, elastoplastic or plastic according to their response to movement.
3.8.1.1 Sealants for use in water

Where there is permanent contact with water sealants use approved Polyurethane or
Polysulphide sealants.
3.8.1.2 Sealants for use in traffic loads

Use high modulus sealants in these conditions.
3.8.2 Gaskets
Use natural rubber compounds protected by a synthetic rubber skin. If special
properties, such as resistance to oils, are desired, synthetic rubber and plastics
materials have to be specifically formulated for the intended use. Gaskets can be
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
solid or hollow sections of various profiles formed from cellular or non-cellular

material or combinations of these materials or sections.
3.8.3 Sealing Strips

Two basic types are acceptable: mastic strips and impregnated or coated cellular
strips, in compliance with SS CP 81.
3.8.4 Joint fillers

Use cellular plastics and rubbers, which comply with Table 3.2 of SS CP 81.
3.8.5 Baffles
Comply with Table 3.1 of SS CP 81.
3.9 Waterproof Renders

Where required, propose proprietary product, organic or inorganic, which modifies the
permeability of the concrete.
Refer to PSD for proprietary product specified for this project if any.
3.10 Formwork Ties

Propose for SO’s acceptance, a type capable of maintaining the water resistance of
the structure.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Construction Loads

Ensure during construction that the structure is not subjected to loads that will cause
short-term or long-term distress to the concrete and the waterproofing system.
4.2 Storage
Keep all materials clean and dry, avoid damage and use strictly in accordance with
4.3 Protection
Apply protection to materials in accordance with the accepted proposals given in the
Method Statement.
4.4 Pour Sizes

Control pour sizes to minimise shrinkage and temperature stresses in the concrete
structure. Refer to work section C3-10, clause 4.5.1.
4.5 Fixing Formwork

Do not use methods of fixing formwork which result in holes through the concrete
section when the formwork is removed.
4.6 Pipe Penetrations

Use a puddle flange or other appropriate sealing detail. Avoid post-formed openings.
4.7 Temporary Propping

Allow adequate area around any temporary penetrations to incorporate waterstops
and ensure full compaction. Agree details in advance with the SO.
4.8 Inspection
Carry out jointly with the SO before backfilling or covering up to identify defects which
may lead to water penetration. Carry out further joint inspection to identify any water
penetration after backfilling and when any ground water has returned to normal level.
4.9 Repairs
Where concrete shows signs of leakage or damp patches, submit proposals,
including details of proposed materials and methods of application, for rectification to
the SO. Comply with BS8102 Clause 8.8 and 8.9.
Ensure that all repair materials are compatible with materials used in the original
construction.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.10 Waterstops
Use waterstops in all construction and movement joints in concrete specified as water
resistant unless otherwise noted and agreed with the SO.
Obtain the agreement of the SO for the methods to be used to maintain the
waterstops in position and to avoid damage during concreting and formwork removal.
4.10.1 Internal Waterstops

Submit details to the SO of the methods to be used to ensure full compaction around
the waterstop.
4.10.2 Hydrophilic Waterstops

Locate in a smooth groove formed in the kicker or at the edge of a slab.
4.11 Bonded Membrane Systems
4.11.1 Finishes
The finishes shall meet the membrane manufacturer’s requirements. In general,
provide the following minimum conditions:
a. Prepare slabs to receive a waterproof membrane to a U3 finish as defined in
section C3-10, clause 4.10.3.
b. For vertical surfaces provide a Type A finish as defined in section C3-10, clause
4.9.1, and where necessary, grind to remove arrises and fill locally with mortar
using a steel trowel to produce a smooth finish.
4.11.2 Application
Lay primer and membrane strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions,
including length and location of laps.
4.11.3 Change in Concrete Surface

Lay the material across a change in the plane of the concrete surface provided it is
sufficiently pliable to enable the adhesive to remain in contact with the primed
concrete. Where this cannot be achieved, provide preformed angles or other fixtures
as required and bond to the concrete surface.
4.11.4 Protection
Provide protection as soon as possible after laying by boards or other material to the
agreement of the SO, in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4.11.5 Continuity
Ensure that there is continuity of waterproofing at all junctions within the structure and
provide explicit details showing how this will be achieved.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.12 Liquid Membranes

Apply to concrete which is 28 days old and with a moisture content less than 5% prior
to application, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
4.12.1 Temperature
Generally, apply at temperature less than 35°C unless otherwise recommended by
the manufacturer.
4.13 Pressure Grouting

Drill grouting holes in carefully selected locations.
a. Locate drill holes away from embedded reinforcement by using a magnetic
induction digital display type cover meter. If drill hits reinforcement, stop drilling
immediately, relocate hole and inform SO.
b. On completion make good holes with a damp 1:3 cement: sharp sand mix
thoroughly rammed in and finished neat and flush.
4.14 Workmanship for Joints

Prepare the joints and apply the sealants, back-up materials, bond breakers and joint
fillers in accordance with clause 3.3 of SS CP 81.
4.14.2 Gaskets
Apply in accordance with clause 3.4 of SS CP 81.
4.14.3 Sealing Strips

Apply in accordance with clause 3.5 of SS CP 81.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Tender
Submit details of the proposed waterproofing system and supporting documents like
method statement, material testing results, samples, maintenance procedure during
and after the warranty period, and track record with the tender submission for SO’s
review and acceptance.

Submit a detailed method statement describing the waterproofing system to be used,
installation details, manufacturers’ details and requirements and protective measures
to be adopted at all stages of the application.
5.1.3 Suitability of System

Before starting work provide written confirmation to the SO from the supplier of the
waterproofing system that the proposed concrete mix, placing methods, release
agents, curing compounds, movement joint details, surface finishes, methods of
supporting reinforcement and loads will not adversely affect the performance of the
system.
5.1.4 Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings to the SO for acceptance showing the positions of joints and
details of all materials to be used. Details shall include schedules of junction pieces
and isometric layouts of waterbars.
5.1.5 Details
Submit coordinated details for acceptance including the following:
a. Junctions between roof/base slabs and external walls.
b. Pipe penetrations through external walls.
c. Junctions between base slab and piles/king posts.
5.1.6 Product Certificates

For all materials proposed, submit certificate from manufacturers showing evidence of
compliance with the specified quality requirements.
5.1.7 Maintenance / Replacement Manual

Cover all waterproofing systems used and materials in the maintenance manual to be
submitted before handing over.
5.1.8 Warranty
Submit the warranty for SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS

Prepare and submit a quality control plan for SO’s acceptance prior to commencing.
Submit all quality control records periodically during the course of construction.
5.2 Samples / Mock-ups

Submit samples of the proposed system and materials for SO’s acceptance prior to
ordering of the material. Identify and label all samples appropriately.
5.3 Inspection and Rectification

Carry out visual inspection to the completed works.
If there is any leakage, dampness and presence of seepage water resulting from
hydrostatic pressure or capillary action on the surfaces of the structural elements that
are visible, submit proposals for rectification for acceptance and carry out the
rectification.
The rectification works shall achieve the same design life and performance as the
waterproofing system specified.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-60 Precast Concrete Works
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards and References 3
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal Brief 6
2.2 Fabrication 6
2.3 Erection 7
2.4 Joints and Connections 7
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Moulds 8
3.2 Concrete 8
3.3 Reinforcement 8
3.4 Prestressing Components 8
3.5 Structural Steel Components 8
3.6 Non-Shrink Grout 8
3.7 Mortar 9
3.8 Permanent Inserts or Fixings 9
3.9 Waterproofing 9
3.10 Jointing 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Fabrication 11
4.2 Storage 13
4.3 Erection 14
4.4 Site Construction 15

5.1 Submissions 16
5.2 Mock-up Sample of Elements 19
5.3 Fabrication Inspection 19
5.4 Records 19
5.5 Tests 20
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers requirements for the contractor’s design, fabrication, handling,
storage, transportation and erection of structural precast concrete elements, including
elements used in composite structures.
C3-60 of NPQS. All modifications and additions noted in this document take

Read this section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following work
sections:
C3-20 Reinforcement
C3-70 Prestressed Concrete Works
For precast concrete used as cladding refer also to architectural specifications.
1.3 Standards and References
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 81 Precast concrete slab and wall panels
SS 26 Ordinary Portland Cement
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
SS 289 Part 1: Guide to specifying concrete

Part 2: Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Part 3: Specification for the procedures to be used in producing
and transporting concrete
Part 4: Specification for the procedures to be used in sampling,
testing and assessing compliance of concrete
In the event that the Standards or Codes are partially superseded or become
obsolete, refer to the latest edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.

a. CONQUAS Quality Standards for C&S Works
1.4 Trade Preambles

The layout and design intent of the concrete structures are shown in the drawings.
Based on the design intent, engage qualified and experienced personnel including a
PE (civil) where appropriate, to carry out the following proposals for the works to SO’s
acceptance.
Make relevant submissions to the authorities for approval as directed. All structural
calculations and drawings are to be endorsed by the PE.
1.4.1.1 Develop the design of precast concrete elements
Develop the design to produce the necessary details for fabrication and incorporation
of the precast elements to the main structure. Cover the items as indicated in the
PSD when developing the design.
Cover the following items when developing the design:
Item Description Applicable
1. Structural design of the elements in the permanent
building structure.
2. Design for prestress covering both temporary and
permanent states.
3. Design for demoulding stresses.
4. Design for Lifting, handling, transporting and
storage.
5. Design for all connections and joints.
6. Design for waterproofing of the permanent structure
and joints.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.1.2 Mould and formwork

Design all mould and formwork for the fabrication of the precast elements including all
accessories for the lifting, handling and storage of the elements.
1.4.1.3 Temporary supports
Provide all necessary temporary supports and ensure that the precast elements are
stable after erection but before the completion of the building structure.
Provide all necessary precautionary measures to ensure that any part of the concrete
structures is not subjected to loads that will cause short or long-term distress.
1.4.2 Shop Fabrication Drawings

Engage qualified personnel to develop the design drawings and produce shop
fabrication drawings for the fabrication of the precast elements. Submit all shop
fabrication drawings for SO’s acceptance prior to fabrication.

Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual for components and
connections as listed in the PSD.
Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual for components and
connections as listed below:
Item Description Applicable

1. Joint Sealant system
2. Structural steel connection and fasteners
3. Sliding joint membrane / pad
Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for details.

5
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal Brief

In carrying out the design and proposals in clause 1.4.1, account for the input
requirements as set out below.
2.1.1 Design Code

Design the elements in accordance with SS EN 1992 Part 1-1, Part 1-2 and Part 3.
2.1.2 Design Consideration

Design and detail the elements for all stresses induced by the worst loads,
movement, creep and shrinkage during the intended design life.
The elements and their inserts or fixings are to be capable of resisting all stresses
induced during the processes of manufacturing, lifting/handling, demoulding,
transportation, storage and erection.
Design loads are to comply with requirements stipulated in the Building Control
Regulations. Refer to the design drawings for other information on design loadings if
any.
Refer to the PSD for additional design consideration if any.
2.1.3 Joints and Connections

Design the joints and connections to transmit all forces developed at the joints of
structures.
2.1.4 Water Retaining Structure

In the case of water retaining structure, design the elements for maximum crack width
as specified in the PSD, or otherwise in accordance with SS CP 73, for durability and
low permeability against water seepage.
For water retaining structures design the elements for tightness class 3.
2.2 Fabrication
Ensure the precast concrete elements are fabricated in a manner that when erected
and all connections in place the design intent of the overall structure is achieved.
Incorporate the requirements of all other trades whose work requires blockouts,
recesses, notches, embedded metals or any other items.
Ensure that exposed concrete surfaces of the precast concrete elements are smooth,
free from honeycomb and unacceptable bubble holes.
In general ensure that the workmanship requirements as set out in the CONQUAS
Quality Standards for Precast Components are met.
Ensure that the specified architectural finishes requirements as indicated in the
design drawings or as scheduled in the PSD are achieved.
Ensure that the specified architectural finishes requirements as indicated in the
design drawings or as scheduled at the various locations below are achieved:
Location Type of finish Particular Proprietary
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
requirements product
(thickness etc.) specified (if any)
2.3 Erection
Erect the precast concrete elements at the designated location in accordance with the
design intention. Any deviation is to be within the acceptable tolerance limit as
specified in clause 4.3.3 below.
2.4 Joints and Connections

Fabrication and erect the elements in such manner that the joints are in accordance
with the design and detail. Any deviation in the joint width is to be within the
acceptable tolerance such that it will not affect the effectiveness of the joint’s
resistance against the forces developed as well as its protection against water,
weather, corrosion and fire where applicable.
Connection details are to be compatible with the design assumptions for the precast
concrete structure. Materials used for connections are to be robust and compatible
with the durability requirements of the overall structure. Avoid harmful bi-metallic
contacts, which may result in galvanic corrosion.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Moulds
Ensure that all moulds, regardless of materials, conform to the shape, lines and
dimensions of the precast concrete elements to be fabricated.
Design the moulds to prevent damage to the concrete from the following at all stages,
during concreting, curing and demoulding:
b. restraint as the concrete shrinks
c. stripping operation when the precast concrete elements are lifted from the mould
d. dimensional changes due to demoulding of precast concrete elements
Use rubber lining with sufficient rigidity and consistency to allow repeated use for
achieving a consistent quality of patterned finish.
Use high quality rubber mat to SO’s acceptance for carrying the tiles of precast
concrete elements with tile finish.
Self-vibrating moulds may be used subject to satisfactory demonstration of the
component quality achieved in terms of compaction and surface finish using the mix
proposed for the fabrication of the elements.
3.2 Concrete
Refer to section C3-10 “Concrete Construction Generally”, clause 3.0 for general
requirements for material of concrete.
For material requirements in ferrocement products refer to section C3-90-1.
3.3 Reinforcement
Refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 3.0 for general requirements for
material of reinforcement.
3.4 Prestressing Components

Refer to section C3-70 “Prestressed Concrete Works”, clause 3.0 for general material
requirement for prestressing.
3.5 Structural Steel Components

Refer to section C5-10 “Structural Steelwork”, clause 3.0 for general material
requirement for structural steel component in the precast elements, and section C5-
20 “Protective Works for Structural Steelwork”, clause 3.0 for the corrosion protection
of such components.
3.6 Non-Shrink Grout

Non-shrink grout for structural bedding of precast concrete elements is to be of at
least the same strength as the concrete of the building structures, or higher as
required in the design.
The grout is to be able to minimise stress induced arising from shrinkage, which
cause crack along the interface between the grout and the precast concrete
elements.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
Proprietary products may be used as an alternative to mortar or non-shrink grout,

subject to the SO’s acceptance. Demonstrate compliance of the product with the
specified requirements.
3.7 Mortar
Mortar for non-structural bedding of precast concrete elements is to be made of sand,
cement and water in proportions by volume of:
a. 1 part of portland cement to SS 26
b. 2 parts of sand to SS 31
Determine the quantity of water required to achieve a mix suitable for jointing details
shown on the drawings. Do not add other ingredients without the SO’s acceptance.
Mortar designated as dry-pack for non-structural bedding of precast concrete
elements is to be of such a consistency that it can be properly compacted by
ramming.
3.8 Permanent Inserts or Fixings

Cast-in inserts or fixings which would be permanently exposed either externally or
within the cavity of the building envelope is to be of corrosion resistant material, e.g.,
hot-dip galvanised, painted mild steel or stainless steel subject to the SO’s
acceptance. In other situations, agree with the SO any protective treatment required.
3.9 Waterproofing
Refer to section C3-50 “Water-resistance to Concrete Structures, clause 3.0 for
general requirements of material for concrete waterproofing.
3.9.1 Sealant
Refer to section C3-50 “Water-resistance to Concrete Structures”, clause 3.8.1. Use
suitable backer rod at joints where sealant is required for waterproofing.
3.10 Jointing
3.10.1 General
Refer to SS CP 65: Part 1: Clause 5.3 (Structural Connections Between Precast
Concrete Units).
3.10.2 Sleeve Jointing

Either of the following types may be used subject to satisfactory tests to determine
strength and deformation characteristics:
a. Grouted, resin-filled or swaged sleeve capable of transmitting both tensile and
compressive forces.
b. Sleeves that mechanically align the square-sawn ends of two bars to allow the
transmission of compressive forces only.
Submit proposals and details to the SO for acceptance.
Refer to the PSD for proprietary products selected for the project if any.
Sleeve for joints
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.10.3 Welding
Refer to section C3-20, clause 4.3.3 for welding of reinforcement and section C5-10,
clause 4.5 and clause 5.0 for welding of structural steel components.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication
4.1.1 Moulds
Seal all mould joints as necessary to prevent leakage of cement paste or mortar.
4.1.2 Reinforcement
4.1.2.1 General
Refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 4.0, for general requirements for
workmanship of reinforcement.
Make up cages and fix securely in accordance with the reinforcement detail drawings
to provide adequate rigidity and to ensure that the specified cover and required fit
within the mould are achieved.
4.1.2.2 Rebending of reinforcement

Reinforcement up to 16 mm in diameter that projects out from the face of the
elements may be bent to facilitate the casting or demoulding of the elements, subject
to the the SO’s acceptance in each case.
Do not re-bend to the final position in the structure before the concrete has achieved
two-thirds of its specified strength.
4.1.2.3 Spacer blocks

Use of spacer blocks for exposed concrete surface is to subject to the SO’s
acceptance.
4.1.3 Concreting
Refer to section C3-10, clause 4.0 for general requirements of workmanship for
concreting.
4.1.4 Normal Curing

Refer to section C3-10, clause 4.11 for general requirements of curing. Refer to
clause 4.7.1 of SS CP 81 for acceptable methods of curing.
4.1.5 Steam Curing

Precast concrete elements may be steam cured at atmospheric conditions subject to
the SO’s acceptance. Carry out steam curing under a suitable enclosure to retain the
live steam to minimise moisture and heat losses. The enclosure is to allow free
circulation of the steam around the sides and tops of members. Position steam jets so
that they do not discharge directly on the concrete, formwork or mould.
In addition, ensure compliance with the following conditions:
4.1.5.1 Total chloride ion content
The total content of the concrete from the aggregate, water and any admixtures is not
to exceed 0.1% of the weight of the cement.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.1.5.2 Timing
Commence steam curing after the concrete attains its initial set. Prevent surface
drying by means of a coating of membrane curing compound or otherwise agreed
with the SO during the period between placement of concrete and application of
steam.
4.1.5.3 Temperature
The temperature of the enclosure surrounding the elements is not to exceed 65° C
(175° F) when measured close to the surface of the elements.
4.1.5.4 Rate of ambient temperature
Increase the temperature of the enclosure surrounding the elements uniformly at a
rate of approximately 20° C per hour (40° F per hour) until it reaches the maximum
temperature stated above.
4.1.5.5 Rate of cooling
Take adequate precautions to prevent the elements being damaged by an excessive
rate of cooling. Rate of cooling is to be less than 20° C per hour.
4.1.5.6 Duration of curing

Continue curing, with or without steam, for a period in accordance with SS CP 65:
Part 1: Table 6.1 (Minimum Period Before Striking Formwork).
4.1.6 Finishes
For surfaces with specified architectural finishes such as plain finish, patterned finish,
tile finish, etc., agree the method of production with the SO and comply with the
recommendations from the product supplier of the finishes.
For surfaces to structural elements, refer to section C3-10, clause 4.9 for general
workmanship requirements to surface finishes.
For exposed surface ensure the requirements from CONQUAS quality standards for
exposed surface (Precast Components) are met.
Repair minor defects in accordance with the method in clause 6.6 of SS CP 81.
4.1.7 Demoulding
For elements cast under factory conditions determine the minimum period before
removing the formwork/mould on the basis of the assessed compressive strength of
the component. The concrete strength at demoulding is to be minimum 10 N/mm² or
higher if required by design.
4.1.8 Fabrication Tolerances

Before fabrication ensure that allowance has been made for all construction
tolerances to ensure proper final fit-up of the structure.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
Tolerances for manufacturing and casting of precast concrete elements are to be in

accordance with SS CP 81 Clause 4.8.2.2 (Tolerance Values). Also, check and
ensure the following items are in compliance with the tolerance values as set out in
the CONQUAS quality standards for precast components:
a. Dimensions
b. Lifting Points/ Inserts
c. Block outs
d. Sleeve systems
e. Cast-in steel items
f. Bolted/welded connections
In case of conflicting requirements, the requirements of SS CP 81 are to take
precedence.
Evaluate any deviation from the agreed values and submit proposals for any
necessary remedial work to the SO for acceptance.
4.1.9 Lifting/handling
Do not lift any component from the mould on which it was cast, before the concrete
has attained its design demoulding strength.
Determine the need for any additional reinforcement and inserts or fixings that may
be necessary for lifting or handling the elements until they are incorporated into the
structure.
Handle and transport the precast concrete elements taking into account their shapes
and design to avoid excessive stresses or damages in the elements. Place paddings
at the contact points between the tie down rope and the precast concrete elements.
Lift the precast concrete elements only at appropriate points shown in the fabrication/
erection shop drawings.
Make provisions for any temporary supports and make good any inserts or fixings,
holes, etc. used for lifting or handling or temporary bracing/supports.
4.1.10 Minor Remedial Work

Carry out minor repair of chipping and spalling in the factory unless otherwise agreed
by the SO. Do not attempt major repair until the proposed methods for the repair have
been accepted by the SO.
4.1.11 Marking
Clearly mark each item before delivery in accordance with the drawing to indicate its
weight, location and orientation in the structure so as to facilitate correct delivery and
erection. All marks are not to be easily removed. Position all marks at the concrete
surface that can be easily viewed.
4.2 Storage
Ensure that large enough storage spaces are provided for the elements with
adequate room for lifting equipment and delivery truck to manoeuvre. Store the
elements on firm supports clear of the ground.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
Ensure that the ground is clean, hard, level and well drained to prevent warp, bowing,
chipping, cracking, discoloration, staining or soiling of the precast concrete elements.
Provide the SO with proposals for storage. Issue storage instructions for all precast
concrete elements, defining the storage position, the allowable support points, the
maximum height of any stack and any protective measures required.
Protect the component faces to be exposed in the finished construction from
mechanical damage, dirt, staining, rust marks and other disfiguration. Also, protect
the elements to prevent breakage and staining.
4.3 Erection
4.3.1 Site Inspection

Inspect all precast concrete elements before and after erection with particular regard
to the following:
a. Soiling
b. Cracking
c. Chipping
d. Damage to built-in items
e. Tolerances
f. Accuracy of location of bearing surfaces, anchorages and connections
Remove any defective elements from site.
Do not carry out permanent jointing or connection between adjacent elements without
the SO’s acceptance.
Check the number, type and size of rebars at the connections before erection to
prevent cutting of starter bars.
4.3.2 Erection
Ensure that any precast concrete items to be incorporated into the structure are kept
stable in the erected position until the items can safely carry the construction loads
without distress.
4.3.3 Erection Tolerances

Control the alignment of precast concrete elements during erection/installation.
Position precast concrete elements in the frame within the tolerances given in SS CP
81: Clause 5.5.5 (Erection Tolerance). Also check against the erection tolerance
values as set out in the following items of the CONQUAS quality standards for
precast components:
a. Alignment, plumb and level
b. Interface requirements
In case of conflicting requirements, the requirements of SS CP 81 are to take
precedence.
Evaluate any deviation from the agreed values and submit proposals for any
necessary remedial work to the SO for acceptance.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4 Site Construction
4.4.1 Falsework
Provide suitable falsework support and temporary bracings for the erected precast
concrete elements in accordance with the contractor’s design. Refer also to section
C3-30 “Formwork and Falsework”, clause 4.0 for general requirement of the
falsework.
4.4.2 Joint Formwork

Comply with the following tolerance values from CONQUAS for the alignment, plumb
and level of joint formwork:
a. Tolerance for plumb: 3mm/m up to a maximum of 10mm.
b. Deviation of any point from its position: ±10mm.
c. Deviation of any point from its intended level:±10mm.
Ensure the transition from a joint to an element is flushed.
4.4.3 Concrete Joint Infill for Composite Construction

Thoroughly remove loose materials, clean all dust, dirt and grease and wet surfaces
of the precast concrete elements prior to concreting. Place and compact concrete in
accordance with section C3-10, clause 4.3. Maintain support to elements to prevent
elements from moving until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to ensure
stability.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions

Submit design calculations and drawings within time as directed by the SO for
acceptance. Include at least the following information:
a. drawing references
b. type of construction
c. overall depth (excl. finishes)
d. span
e. self-weight
f. distributed dead load of finishes, fixtures
g. allowance for general partitions
h. concentrated dead loads
i. distributed imposed load
j. concentrated imposed loads
k. deflections
l. basic fire resistance (as determined without regard to finishes)
m. finish to soffit
n. finish to top surface
o. other requirements
5.1.2 Fabrication/ Erection Drawings

Submit within time frame directed for SO’s acceptance, the fabrication/erection
drawings, showing the following information:
a. general arrangement of elements and details of reinforcement.
b. additional reinforcement for lifting/handling stress, inserts or fixings and devices
for lifting/handling.
Where applicable, submit shop drawings for joint waterproofing to the SO for
acceptance.

Submit to the SO for acceptance before work commences, a method statement
including at least the following information:
5.1.3.1 Fabrication plant
a. Details of plant
b. QA certification
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.3.2 Concrete batching plant

a. Details of plant
b. QA certification
c. Concrete mix design
5.1.3.3 Reinforcement fabrication

a. Concrete spacer
b. Materials for inserts/fixings
c. Corrosion protection for inserts/fixings
5.1.3.4 Mould
a. Type of mould
b. Marking identification
c. Date of casting
d. Method of vibration
e. Surface treatment
f. Method of curing
g. Minimum concrete age for demoulding
5.1.3.5 Lifting/Handling
a. Minimum concrete age for lifting/handling
b. Additional reinforcement for lifting/handling stress
c. Method of lifting/handling
d. Device for lifting/handling
e. Location of lifting/handling device
f. Details for lifting/handling device
g. Equipment for lifting/handling
5.1.3.6 Storage
a. Ground preparation
b. Supporting frame
c. Safety features
5.1.3.7 Transportation
a. Supporting frame
b. Wedging to cushion the base of precast concrete elements
c. Tie down detail
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.3.8 Erection
a. Erection sequence
b. Size of backers/shims
c. Laying of bedding
d. Device for temporary props/bracing
e. Details for temporary supports/bracing
f. Details for protection
g. Method of positioning, propping and installation
5.1.3.9 Connections
a. Details
b. Preparation
c. Grouting
d. Grout mix design
e. Temporary shims
5.1.3.10 Repairs
a. Method of repairs
5.1.3.11 Finishes
a. Method of achieving the specified surface finishes
5.1.4 Maintenance / Replacement manual

At the end of the project submit a maintenance / replacement manual for all
components and connections to be carried out by the building owners.
5.1.5 As Build Survey

Submit as constructed survey within time frame as directed for the completed
structure demonstrating compliance with permitted tolerances.

a. Quality policy
18
Version 1.0
NPQS

Subcontractors and suppliers
5.2 Mock-up Sample of Elements

Prior to mass production of precast concrete elements, produce at least one or
otherwise agreed number of sample of each type of precast concrete element for
SO’s acceptance. Display the accepted sample at the fabrication plant and use it as a
yardstick for the minimum standard and quality to be achieved for all precast concrete
elements.
5.3 Fabrication Inspection

Inspect all precast concrete elements before they leave the factory with particular
regard to the following:
a. Cracking
b. Chipping
c. Tolerances
d. Accuracy of location of inserts or fixings
In the case of precast concrete elements cast on site, inspect the elements before
transferring the elements to storage or erection.
Repair minor defects in accordance with the method in clause 6.6 of SS CP 81.
Submit the results of the inspection for SO’s acceptance. Ensure that no defective
precast concrete elements are delivered for erection.
5.4 Records
5.4.1 Casting Records

Keep casting records for all elements and allow for SO’s inspection. Include the
following information:
a. Component reference (marking)
b. Date cast
c. Mix details
d. Finish
e. Method of curing
f. Age and strength at demoulding
g. Age and strength at lifting
5.4.2 Inspection Records

Keep inspection records properly and allow for SO’s inspection.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.5 Tests
5.5.1 Material Compliance Tests

Refer to all related work sections in clause 1.2 above for test requirements to verify
compliance of the quality of at least the following materials:
a. Concrete
b. Grout and mortar
c. Reinforcements
d. Prestressing components
e. Structural steelwork and connections
f. Steel work protections
g. Sealants
h. Waterproofing
Submit all test results to the SO as soon as they are available.
Submit also the certificates from the supplier of any proprietary products used in the
works demonstrating compliance with the specified requirements.
5.5.2 Watertightness Test

Conduct watertightness test for the joints of the precast concrete elements as per the
following, unless otherwise agreed with the SO:
a. For floor, flood the floor with 25mm depth of water at the highest point.
b. For external wall, spray with a continuous water jet corresponding to 600 litres per
hour from a water hose with a nozzle velocity of 2 m per second and a cone
scatter of approximately 60o. Hold the hose at 30o to the horizontal plane and at
1.2 m away from the wall surface. Place the hose with the nozzle in line with the
vertical joint and at a level of horizontal joints so that the jet cone scatter will cover
the vertical and horizontal joints.
Refer to the PSD for the number of joints to be tested, and duration. The test is
deemed to have passed if there is no water seepage or dampness observed at the
face behind the face subject to the water test.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C3-80 Concrete Repair
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standard 3
1.5 Definitions 4
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal 5
2.2 Quality of the Works 5
3. MATERIALS 6
3.1 Cement 6
3.2 Aggregates 6
3.3 Water 6
3.4 Polymer Based Admixtures 6
3.5 Proprietary Concrete Repair Mortars 6
3.6 Surface Coatings 7
3.7 Reinforcement 7
3.8 Mixes for Rendering Mortar 7
4. WORKMANSHIP 9
4.1 General Requirements 9
4.2 Preparatory Works 9
4.3 Cutting Back of Defective Areas 10
4.4 Restoration of Reinforcement 11
4.5 Final Surface Preparation 12
4.6 Batching, Mixing and Transportation 13
4.7 Repair by Local Patching 14
4.8 Repair by Rendering 15
4.9 Repair by Pressure Grouting with Pre-packed Aggregate 16
4.10 Repair of cracks by Epoxy Resin Injection 16
4.11 Repair by Sprayed Concrete 17
4.12 Surface Coatings 17
4.13 Defective Areas 17
4.14 Reinstatement of Inserts, Fixings and Fittings 18
4.15 Health and Safety 18

5.1 Submission 19
5.2 Mock ups and Trials 19
5.3 Tests 20
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the repair to concrete surface or cracks by
patching or injection using cementitious, polymer-based and epoxy repair materials.

C3-20 Reinforcement
1.3 Standard
Singapore Standards
Part A1: Method of sampling fresh concrete on site
Part A2: Method for determination of slump
Part A8: Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete
Part A11: Method of normal curing of test specimens (27°C method)
Part A16: Method for determination of compressive strength of
concrete cubes
Part A20: Method for determination of the compressive strength of
concrete cores
Other Standards
BS 5262 Code of practice for external rendered finishes
clauses.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4 Trade Preambles

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to:
a. Propose suitable material and methods to be used for the repair works.
b. Design and provide suitable supports to the defective elements to be repaired.
All repairs and associated works are of a specialist nature and are to be undertaken
and supervised by appropriately experienced personnel. Provide evidence of past
experience to the SO prior to commencement of the Works.

Requirement section, clause 1.4.10 for guidance.
1.4.4 Warranty
The repair works have been specified to preserve the integrity of the structure.
Warrant the works in accordance with contract conditions for a minimum period as
specified in the PSD against all defects from the date of completion.
Warrant the Works for a minimum period of 10 years against all defects from the date
of completion.
1.5 Definitions
a. Bagging In’ Coat A coat provided for the purpose of filling blowholes to
cleaned or grit-blasted concrete to obtain an even surface.
b. Levelling/Fairing A coat provided for the purpose of giving a uniform finish to
Coat the surface of repaired and un-repaired concrete. It may be
trowelled or roller applied.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal

Take into account the strength and durability requirements of the works as specified
in the PSD.
Take into account the strength and durability requirements of the works as below:
a. Required design life of the works: 10 years
b. Characteristic strength of the repair material: Min. 50MPa
2.2 Quality of the Works

Ensure the repair works achieve the following general quality:
c. Low permeability to water
d. Consistently high quality
e. To the requisite strength throughout the works, taking into account local climatic
conditions.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Cement
Use Ordinary or Rapid-Hardening Portland cement complying with SS 26 and
supplied in sealed bags.
3.2 Aggregates
3.2.1 General
All aggregates are to be clean and free from salts and deleterious matter. Carry out
tests to establish suitability.
3.2.2 Fine Aggregates

Fine Aggregates are to be natural or crushed sharp sand complying with SS31.
3.2.3 Coarse Aggregates

Coarse aggregates are to be natural or crushed rock complying with SS 31 with a
maximum nominal size of 10mm.
3.3 Water
Use potable water supplied by PUB unless otherwise agreed.
3.4 Polymer Based Admixtures

Polymer based admixtures for mortar and priming coats to be either:
f. Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) emulsion having a British Board of Agrement
(BBA) certificate or accepted equivalent and a solids content of 47% by weight; or
g. A combination of cement reactive materials and a Polyacrylate Co-polymer Resin
dispersion, reinforced with mineral fibres, plasticiser and water-retaining
substances, having a British Board of Agrement (BBA) certificate or accepted
equivalent.
3.5 Proprietary Concrete Repair Mortars

Use all proprietary products strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations in respect to all matters such as storage, handling, application and
disposal.
3.5.1 Polymer Modified Mortar

Refer to the PSD for proprietary product specified for the project if any.
Unless otherwise agreed, use the following product or accepted equivalent:
Product
Characteristics
Compressive
strength: MPa
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
Tensile strength: Mpa

Water vapour
permeability
Water permeability
Minimum bond
strength at 7 days
Modulus of elasticity
3.5.2 Pre-packed Polymer Modified Mortar

Propose and use pre-packed concrete repair mortars including non-shrink grout to
SO’s acceptance.
3.5.2.1 Supply of Pre-packed Mortar
Supply in single-batch sized containers. Do not supply in part containers.
3.5.3 Shelf-life
Use materials in the order in which they are received on site. Observe the
manufacturer’s instructions with regard to use of materials after opening and/or
mixing.
3.6 Surface Coatings
3.6.1 Bitumen Based Compounds

3.6.2 Cementitious Based Compounds

3.6.3 Vapour Diffusion

Refer to the PSD for limitations to vapour diffusion properties for surface coatings.
3.7 Reinforcement
For general material requirement refer to C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 3.0.
3.8 Mixes for Rendering Mortar

Where site-batched mortars are to be used, rendering mortar is to consist of cement,
aggregate and water. Do not use other ingredients without acceptance by the SO.
Unless otherwise agreed, use the following mix for each batch of rendering material.
Priming Render Concrete Backing Coat Finishing
Coats Coats Coat
(SBR) (SBR)
Cement: 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg 50 kg
Polymer: 50 litres 14 litres 4.5 litres
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
Sand: 125 kg dry 125 kg dry 290 kg dry 340 kg dry

weight weight weight weight
Aggregate: 150 kg dry
weight
Water: 4 litres 13.5 litre Site adjusted Site adjusted
max to achieve to achieve
the required the required
workability workability
3.8.1 Adjustment to Water

Obtain prior agreement from the SO of any proposed adjustments to the water to be
added to allow for the moisture content of the aggregate and workability.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General Requirements
4.1.1 Methods
Submit for SO’s acceptance and adopt methods of repairs in accordance with the
recommendations of the material manufacturer and as set out in this section.
4.1.2 Location of Defects and Remedial Measures

Verify the location of the defects and their related remedial measures together with
any surface finishes required as stated in the drawings.
4.1.3 Sequence of Operations

Unless otherwise agreed, adopt the sequence of operations as set out below:
a. Surface inspection and testing.
b. Cutting back of local defective areas.
c. Restoration and replacement of reinforcement.
d. Removing dust and debris.
e. Priming and filling of defects.
f. General surface cleaning or preparation.
g. Applying surface treatment.
Carry out the final cleaning down or treatments to the whole surface as a single
continuous operation.
4.1.4 Dust and Debris

Keep the Works free of dust and debris at all times. Do not spray with water or liquids
unless otherwise agreed.
4.1.5 Protection for Adjacent Areas

Submit to the SO for acceptance, proposed methods of screening the areas to be
repaired and protecting the adjacent building and occupants of the building from dust,
falling debris or water run-off.
4.1.6 Temporary Support

Provide all necessary temporary supports to maintain stability during the
implementation of the works.
4.2 Preparatory Works
4.2.1 Check for Additional Defects

Immediately after erecting the working platforms prior to commencement of any work,
examine and hammer test the concrete surface in the zone of the repair or as
directed by the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
Notify the SO if any additional blemishes, imperfections or defects to those shown on

the drawings are found.
Notify the SO if, during the course of the works, the defects being repaired are found
to be greater or more extensive or of a different nature to those described on the
drawings.
Take samples of the defective concrete for testing in an approved testing laboratory.
4.2.1.1 Record Drawings
Keep on site a complete set of the Drawings for recording all additional defects and
their authorised method of repair. Make these drawings available for inspection at all
times.
4.2.2 Clearing Defective Surface

4.2.2.1 Attachments
Prior to commencement of the works remove all surface attachments (signs, notices,
electrical fittings, etc.) from the areas to be repaired or which obstruct access or are
in a position where they may be damaged.
4.2.2.2 Inserts and Fixings
Unless otherwise directed by the SO, remove all inserts and fixings, which have been
cast-in or mortared into pockets or otherwise attached to the concrete from the area
to be repaired. Adopt methods that avoid unnecessary damage and to SO’s
acceptance.
If cast-in inserts and fixings are to be removed by coring, ensure the diameter of the
core is not greater than three times the diameter of the insert or fixing and the depth
of the core not exceed the depth of the insert or fixing, do not core through the full
thickness of the concrete unless otherwise agreed.
4.2.2.3 Surface Finishes
Remove all plaster, render, paint and surface finishes from the area to be repaired.
Obtain specialist advice on the removal of special surface coatings or finishes where
shown in the drawings.
4.3 Cutting Back of Defective Areas
4.3.1 Methods of Cutting Back

Submit methods for cutting back defective concrete in localized areas to the SO for
acceptance. Do not adopt methods that will result in feathered or irregular broken
edges. Include in the methods, the following procedures for removing all loose,
defective and condemned concrete:
a. Remove all poorly compacted concrete and accumulations of coarse aggregates.
b. In the event of carbonation, remove the concrete to a minimum depth of 20 mm
behind the rebars to allow complete re-casement and 50 mm into non-carbonated
concrete at the edge of boundaries.
c. In the case of the chloride content being above the critical limit, remove the
concrete to a minimum depth of 30 mm behind rebars and 100 mm into concrete
with a chloride content below the critical value at the edge of boundaries.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
d. In the case of concrete that has been exposed to fire, remove all concrete
subjected to temperatures above +300°C. If the resulting exposed concrete
contains chlorides, comply also with item c above.
e. Clean the concrete surface by air blasting following mechanical removal.
f. Take care to carry out concrete removal without damage to the reinforcement or
the remaining concrete.
g. Use only hand operated pneumatic hammers unless otherwise agreed.
h. For edges of a cut out section, form an inward sloping angle of approximately 45°
from the adjoining external surface.
4.3.2 Size of Repair Area

Extend the surface area of the repair zone for a distance not less than 50mm each
side and end of the defective area of concrete, unless otherwise agreed. Take the
depth of breaking out to sound concrete or 20 mm whichever is the greater.
Where the defective area is within 100mm of a corner or edge, take the repair zone to
not less than 75mm round the arises.
4.3.3 Shape of Cut Back

Unless otherwise agreed, restrict the cut back areas to a uniform rectangular shape
with a clean sharp edge not less than 5mm deep.
4.3.4 Around Reinforcement

Upon cutting back and in the event where the exposed rebar is either:
a. exposed by more than 50%;
b. de-bonded;
c. corroded; or
d. has a cover of 10mm or less;
Remove the concrete to a minimum depth of 20 mm behind the rebars.
Where the corrosion has reduced the diameter of the reinforcing steel by 10% or
greater, cut back the concrete along the length of the bar for a distance on either side
of the reduced diameter in accordance with clause 4.4 (Restoration of reinforcement)
below.
4.3.5 Trial Area

Carry out a trial area of cutting back prior to commencing the rest of the work.
4.4 Restoration of Reinforcement
4.4.1 Cleaning of Reinforcement

Remove rust and corrosion scale from the reinforcement exposed after cutting back
and using method accepted by the SO.
Adopt methods using wire brushing and chemical rust removers with permission.
Clean all exposed reinforcement to remain in the completed works to a bright finish,
including areas behind the bars.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Do not leave the bars exposed for more than two days after cleaning. Unless
otherwise agreed, do not use rust inhibitors.
4.4.2 Defective Reinforcement

Unless otherwise directed, replace all reinforcing bars, which have corroded to more
than 10% reduction of the nominal diameter. Either cut out the defective portion or
clean it as specified.
Expose longitudinal bars on either side of the defective portion to leave an unaffected
length projecting from sound concrete, for a lap in accordance with SS CP 65 plus
50mm.
For links, binders or stirrups, leave not less than 12 diameters or 120mm, whichever
is the greater, of unaffected reinforcement projecting from the sound concrete.
4.4.3 Replacement Reinforcement

Replace or supplement all defective reinforcing bars with bars of the same type and
diameter exposed from the original construction unless otherwise designed. Likewise
provide cover as in the original construction.
Lap the replacement bars with the projected existing reinforcement in accordance
with the lap length requirement of SS CP 65 plus 20mm for links, binders or stirrups
and 50mm for all other reinforcing bars.
Fix and tie all replacement reinforcement in position and ensure no displacement
when making good the concrete. Do not weld the reinforcement unless otherwise
agreed.
4.4.4 Additional Reinforcement

Supply and fix additional reinforcement, such as steel fabric column and beam
wrapping or reinforcement to render coats, in accordance with the drawings.
4.5 Final Surface Preparation
4.5.1 Preparation on Different Surfaces

For smooth, board marked, acid etched and similar concrete surfaces to receive a
render finish, either mechanically scrabble or grit-blast to remove all surface laitance
and weak, friable concrete to a minimum depth of 3mm.
For bush-hammered, exposed aggregate and rough textured concrete finishes, either
grit-blast, pressure jet, wash or scrub with a stiff, non-metallic bristled brush.
In local areas where the reinforcement is exposed or the concrete removed exceeds
a depth of 20mm, cut back such areas and prepare as directed by the SO.
4.5.2 Fungicidal Washes

Carry out fungicidal washes not less than 7 days before the surface is to receive the
renders or coatings.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.3 Removal of Dust and Debris

Immediately before commencing the repair, remove all dust, debris and loose
material by air-blasting, vacuuming or vigorous brushing with a stiff, non-metallic
bristled brush.
Use water jetting and brushing on permission subject to compatibility with the
accepted repair method.
4.5.4 Wetness
Before applying the repair compounds or coatings ensure that the surface conditions
and the weather are suitable in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
Do not carry out repair work if any of the following conditions prevail:
a. The base concrete is saturated.
b. The surface to be repaired, including any previous applications of repair
compound, is damp.
c. During periods of drizzle or rainfall unless the area to be worked is adequately
protected.
4.5.5 Trial Area

Carry out surface preparation on a trial area prior to commencing the works.
4.6 Batching, Mixing and Transportation
4.6.1 Batching of Materials

Unless otherwise agreed, batch all dry materials by weight and liquids in graduated
flasks or dispensers.
Keep all containers used for batching clean and free from adhering materials.
4.6.2 Mixing
4.6.2.1 General
Clean all equipment used for mixing to be free of deleterious substances such as
lime, plaster, organic matter and dirt.
Mix adequate quantities of materials accounting for the volumes of the repair areas,
the procedures of application and the life of the mix. Do not reconstitute or re-work
the mixes.
Mix the constituents of resin-based compounds for priming, strictly to manufacturer's
recommendations.
Mix the constituents of cementitious based primers, mortars or concrete in
accordance with good practice and strictly in accordance with the admixture
manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not hand-mix mortar or concrete on a spot board or similar for batch yields
exceeding 0.015m³ unless otherwise agreed.
Mix in batches to comply with the limits of yield recommended by the mixer
manufacturer.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.6.2.2 Renders
Unless otherwise agreed, combine constituents for renders in a trough type mixer.
4.6.2.3 Cleaning
Clean all equipment used for mixing thoroughly after each batch is discharged.
4.6.3 Transportation
Mix small batches at the point of application. Transport all other mix loads to the point
of application in such a manner as to avoid delay, segregation or other harmful
effects.
4.7 Repair by Local Patching
4.7.1 General
Ensure that the applications of the repair compounds, including the requirements for
priming, thickness of coats, time periods between successive coats and the methods
of application comply with recommendations from the manufacturer.
For cementitious repair compounds, ensure the surface of the repair zone is wet but
not saturated, and remove any surplus water before work begins.
4.7.2 Priming
Apply priming coats thoroughly into all hollows and crevices in the prepared surface
and around the projecting reinforcement. Prime the reinforcing bars as the filling
coats built up.
Overlay priming coats as soon as they become tacky and will not lift from the repair
surface if touched. If at any time the primer completely dries out before overlaying,
re-prepare and re-prime the repair surface.
4.7.3 Filling
Apply filling coats in layers not exceeding 15mm thick. Thoroughly work and compact
each layer into the repair zone and around or between reinforcing bars.
Apply successive layers as soon as the preceding coat has become sufficiently stiff to
support the weight of the additional layer but is still adequately tacky to provide
bonding. If at any time the last layer applied completely dries out before over-laying,
re-prepare the surface.
4.7.4 Finishing
Apply finishing coats to not less than 5mm thick. Level off or profile and adjust the
colour and texture to match the adjacent original concrete.
Reinstate exposed aggregate finishes by coating the back of each individual stone
with primer and, when it is tacky, bed it firmly into the plastic final filling coat.
Profile moulded or sculptured features to match the original works. Submit to the SO
for acceptance methods of forming. Provide support to the features until they have
cured sufficiently to support their own weight.
4.7.5 Protection and Curing

Propose for SO’s acceptance and adopt methods of protecting and curing the
repaired areas for periods as recommended by the manufacturer.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7.5.1 Cementitious Based Repairs

Protect from the weather and cure by using damp hessian, polythene sheeting taped
down at the edges or other suitable methods. Cure for 48 hours unless otherwise
agreed.
4.8 Repair by Rendering
4.8.1 General
In general comply with BS 5262 for methods and procedures, modify where
necessary in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations if any.
4.8.2 Surface Condition

4.8.2.1 Local depressions and imperfections
Before work begins inspect the surfaces to be rendered to identify any local
depressions exceeding 10mm deep and area of loose or friable concrete. Prepare
and fill any imperfections and cure before rendering.
Check also for surface flatness and irregularities in all directions. Correct all
irregularities or deviations in flatness as follows:
Remove ridges and bulges greater than 5mm in height by accepted methods.
Bring depressions and hollow areas deeper than 5mm up to the general surface level
by rendering and allow to cure before applying the render.
4.8.2.2 Wetness
For cementitious rendering compounds wet but do not saturate the surfaces prior
commencement of application.
4.8.3 Day-work Joints

Propose the positions and details of day-work joints for SO’s acceptance. Form the
day-work joints in a regular pattern.
4.8.4 Priming
4.8.4.1 Priming coats
Work thoroughly over the surface and into all hollows and crevices.
Overlay priming coats as soon as they become tacky and will not lift from the surface
if touched. If at any time the priming completely dries out before overlaying re-
prepare and re-prime the surface.
4.8.4.2 Rendering Coats
Apply in accordance with the following:
Thickness per coat (mm)
Type of coat Number of coats
For modified render For plain renders
Undercoat 1 9 12
- 1 - 8
Finishing 1 6 5
Total 3 15 25
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
Place each coat and compact by trowel, scrape with a straight edge to give a level,
uniform thickness.
Apply the coats by either:
a. Cure the undercoat and scratch the surface for keying further coats. Thoroughly
brush the surface to remove all loose material and wet before applying
successive coats or
b. Apply successive coats as soon as the preceding coat has become sufficiently
stiff to support the weight of the additional coat but is still adequately tacky to
provide bonding. If at any time the last coat applied completely dries out before
over-coating, re-prepare the surface.
4.8.5 Finishing
Apply as directed, either:
a. Compact and float the finishing coat to give a dense, smooth finish free from
trowel marks; or
b. Immediately after compacting the finishing coat, provide a textured finish.
4.8.6 Protection and Curing

Propose for SO’s acceptance and adopt methods of protecting and curing the
repaired areas for periods as recommended by the manufacturer.
4.8.6.1 Cementitious Based Repairs
Protect from the weather and cure by using damp hessian, polythene sheeting taped
down at the edges or other suitable methods. Cure for 48 hours unless otherwise
agreed.
4.9 Repair by Pressure Grouting with Pre-packed Aggregate

Carry out preparation works as described above.
Erect formwork and temporary supports to its final position and pre-pack washed
aggregate with provision of inlet and outlet pipes.
Mix non-shrink grout or cement and additive with water and pump it through grouting
pump into the lowest inlet pipe. Grout continuously from the lowest inlet pipe to the
highest inlet pipe. Maintain grout pressure at 1.0 bar for 3 minutes.
Remove the formwork and temporary support after 24-36 hours and cure the repaired
surface with approved curing agent.
4.10 Repair of cracks by Epoxy Resin Injection
4.10.1 Preparation
Drill and insert injection ports along the crack at spacing and depth as recommended
by the manufacturer.
Seal all surfaces of cracks by accepted taping material and methods.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.10.2 Injection
Inject Epoxy compound into prepared ports under pressure using appropriate
equipment.
Commence injection at the lower entry port and continue until epoxy compound
appears in the adjacent entry port.
Lock off the first port. Continue from port to port until the entire crack is filled.
4.10.3 Finish
Remove temporary seal and excess epoxy.
Clean surface adjacent to repair and blend finish.
4.11 Repair by Sprayed Concrete
4.11.1 Application of Sprayed Concrete

Refer to section C3-100 “Sprayed Concrete”, clause 4.8.
4.12 Surface Coatings
4.12.1 General
Mix and use coatings strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Do not thin or dilute in excess of the recommendations.

Before work begins thoroughly treat the surfaces to be coated to remove all loose
material, debris and dust. Treat by grit blasting, high-pressured water jetting, or other
method as agreed with the SO.
4.12.3 Application
Apply coatings to thickness as indicated in the PSD.
Apply coatings to the following thickness:
Coat No. Material Thickness (mm)
Apply each coat in a single pass and allow to cure fully before applying subsequent
coats.
4.12.4 Filling of Pinholes

Fill pinholes and similar imperfections on the coated surface with accepted filler
compatible with the coating system. Apply the filler after the primer but before the
application of the finishing coat.
4.13 Defective Areas

Cut out and replace as directed, any areas of repair identified as being defective.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.14 Reinstatement of Inserts, Fixings and Fittings

On completion of the repair work reinstate all attachments in the position from which
they were removed, or as agreed with the SO.
4.15 Health and Safety

Comply with the manufacturer’s recommendation in respect of using and handling of
all materials.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission

Submit a method statement for acceptance prior to commencement of the works,
containing at least the following information:
a. Materials: For each material or system proposed, manufacturers’ data, test
results, design life certificates, health information, pot life and temperature at
application, number of coatings proposed, coating thickness.
b. Sequence: Proposed sequence of each process to completion, including drying
time between successive coatings.
c. Methods: All tools and equipment to be used, application methods including
details of access and meeting noise and nuisance restrictions.
d. Site organisation and quality control: Details of the control of the quality of works,
sampling regimes, proposed testing methods and organisation.
5.1.2 Warranty
Submit the warranty for SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.

5.2 Mock ups and Trials
5.2.1 Trial Mixes

Prior to commencement of the Work, provide trial mixes and tests to demonstrate
compliance with the specified requirements.
Submit the results of all trial mixes and any related tests not less than two weeks prior
to commencement of the works.
Adopt the accepted trial mix and materials consistently for the project.
5.2.2 Procedural Trials

Carry out procedural trials employing the intended materials and methods in the
works at agreed positions not less than two weeks prior to commencement of the
relevant work unless otherwise agreed.
5.2.3 Sample Panels

Submit for acceptance, sample panels as detailed in the PSD not less than two
weeks prior to commencement of the related work unless otherwise agreed.
Submit to the SO for acceptance the following sample panels not less than two weeks
prior to commencement of the relevant work unless otherwise agreed:
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
Maintain the accepted sample panels unaltered and protected for reference during
the course of the works.
5.3 Tests
5.3.1 Strength Test

For cementitious mortar carry out strength tests on 100 mm cubes in accordance to
SS 78.
5.3.2 Soundness Test

5.3.2.1 Hollow
Test the soundness of the repaired works by hammer to identify any area sounding
hollow.
5.3.2.2 Bond
Test the bond of the applied repair and coating materials using a pull-off tester,
approximately seven days after completion of the application. Test at a rate of one
per 50 m² unless otherwise directed.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
C4-20 Driven Piling
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standard and Regulations 3
1.5 Definitions 7
2.1 Requirements for Design Verification 8
2.2 Performance Criteria for Piles Under Test 8
2.3 Driving Requirement 9
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Pile Sections and Pile Dimensions 11
3.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles Including Spun Piles 11
3.3 Steel Piles 12
3.4 Treated Timber Piles 13
3.5 Proprietary Micropiles 15
3.6 Pile Shoes and Toes 15
4. WORKMANSHIP 16
4.1 Fabrication of Piles: Concrete Piles 16
4.2 Fabrication of Piles: Steel Piles 16
4.3 Handling and Pitching of Driven Piles 17
4.4 Installation and Driving 18
4.5 Welding 20
4.6 Damaged Piles 20
4.7 Tolerances 21
4.8 Pile Heads 21
4.9 Non-Performance of Working Piles 22
4.10 Noise and Disturbance 22

5.1 Submissions 23
5.2 Inspection and Test Certificates 24
5.3 Tests 25
5.4 Pile Testing 25
5.5 Records 26
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of driven piles, including the
use of the following pile types:
a. Precast Concrete piles including Spun Piles
b. Steel Piles
c. Treated Timber Piles
d. Composite Micro-piles
C4-20 of NPQS. All modification and additions noted in this documents take
precedence over clauses noted in NPQS.

C4-30 Pile Testing
C3-20 Reinforcement
C8-10 Structural Timberwork
1.3 Standard and Regulations
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic
wood preservatives
SS 187 Qualification test for manual metal-arc welders
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
SS CP 1 The use of timber in building construction

SS CP 7 Structural use of timber
SS EN 1992-1-1 Design of Concrete Structures
Other Standards
API 5L Line pipe
BS 1560-3.2 Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (class designated).
Steel, cast iron and copper alloy flanges. Specification for cast
iron flanges
BS 3100 Specification for steel casting for general engineering purposes
BS EN 1011 Welding- Recommendation for welding of metallic materials
BS 6265 Specification for steel butt-welding pipe fitting for the petroleum
industry. Wrought and cast austenitic chromium nickel steel
fittings
BS 7079 Preparation of steel substrate before application of paints and
related products – tests for the assessment of surface cleanliness
BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
BS 8008 Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction
and descent of machine-bored shafts for piling and other purposes
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels -Technical
delivery condition
BS EN 10113 Hot rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steel
BS PD 5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels Building
Control Regulations 1990
SIS 05 59 00 Swedish Standard. Pictorial surface preparation standards for
painting steel surfaces

Refer to the following technical reference for guidance in carrying out the works:
a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low-rise building.
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Design Verification

The piling design and details of the project are shown in the drawings. Based on the
information, engage suitably qualified personnel to carry out:
a. Design verification checks based on actual ground conditions to determine the
required length of each pile and ensure that the specified working load and
settlement criteria of the piles are achieved.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
b. Proposals to amend the design including compensating piles as necessary in the

event that for any reasons the installed piles do not perform as intended.
c. Proposals to amend the pilecap design of the building in the event that the piles
are installed out of the permitted tolerance.
d. Proposals as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control ground
movement and vibration do not perform satisfactorily.
Take into account of the design requirements as set out in Clause 2 below.
Submit the design to the SO for acceptance. Design proposals in (b) and (c) are to be
endorsed by a Singapore Professional Engineer.
1.4.2 Contractor’s Proposals
1.4.2.1 Proposals on Driving Equipment

Propose for SO’s acceptance, suitable driving equipment for the works. Take account
of the suitability, efficiency and energy of the driving equipment.
Submit calculations on proposed piles set and rebound control for SO’s acceptance.




and readings.
Section C2-50.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling





1.4.11 Obstructions

1.4.13 Welders' Qualifications

Engage only welders who are qualified in the accepted welding procedure in
accordance with SS 187 and have a proven record over the previous six months, or
who have attained an equivalent standard, on the Works. Provide copies of
certificates relating to welders' tests to the SO on request.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling

1.4.15 Safety
notably:
Regulations
d. Factories Act
f. For works within LTA Railway Protection Zone, ensure the works comply fully with
Code of Practice for Railway Protection.
1.4.16 As-Build Pile Surveys

Employ a Licensed Surveyor who is to be responsible for surveying pile locations and
eccentricities and submit the as–build survey to the SO in format as directed within 14
days after the piles have been trimmed to the cut-off level.
1.5 Definitions
a. Pile The term ‘coating’ includes the primer and the number of other
Coating coats specified.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
2.1 Requirements for Design Verification

The required working load and sizes of the piles are indicated in the drawings,
together with an indication of the required pile penetration depth.
Based on actual ground conditions encountered as revealed by boring logs or ground
investigations, carry out design check to confirm the required pile length as to achieve
the specified working loads within the specified limits for load settlement behaviour as
indicated in Clause 2.2. Account for effects of negative skin friction where applicable,
as well as the permissible stresses in the piles and joints below.
Verify the design based on SS EN 1997 unless otherwise agreed.
2.1.1 Permissible Stresses in Piles

Unless otherwise agreed, the stress in precast concrete piles due to the working load
is not to exceed 0.25 times the characteristic cube strength; For prestressed concrete
piles, the maximum compressive stress in the concrete due to the working loads and
effective prestress is not to exceed 0.25 times the characteristic cube strength.
2.1.2 Joints in Precast Reinforced Piles

Where two or more precast sections have to be joined to achieve the length of pile
required, provide full details of the method of jointing to the SO for acceptance.
Ensure that the joint is capable of generating the full axial capacity of the pile and,
where specified, the bending capacity of the section. The SO may require joint testing
to be carried out before acceptance.
2.2 Performance Criteria for Piles Under Test

Any of the piles, when under static or dynamic load test, is to satisfy the performance
criteria as set out below, unless otherwise specified in the PSD:
a. The maximum permitted settlement at one time the specified working load (SWL)
is to be 7mm, increased by 2.2% for every meter depth of pile length beyond
30m.
b. The maximum permitted settlement at two times SWL is to be 13mm for SWL 
65 tonnes, increasing by 0.2mm for every tonne above 65 tonnes, until maximum
25mm. For steel piles only, the maximum allowable settlement under two times
SWL may be increased further by not more than 0.15mm per metre length to
allow for the elastic shortening of the piles.
c. The maximum permitted permanent or residual settlement after removal of the
test load is 13mm.
In addition, the overall pile capacity is to have at least a factor of safety of 2.5 against
design ultimate compression and lateral loads respectively, and at least a factor of
safety of 3.0 against design ultimate tension load.
Any of the piles, when under static or dynamic load test, is to satisfy the performance
criteria as set out below:
Specified Permitted Permitted Permitted Max. Permitted
Working Load Settlement at Settlement at Settlement at Permanent
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
(SWL) 1*xSWL 1.5*xSWL 2*xSWL Settlement

(kN) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
2.3 Driving Requirement

Provide set calculations for acceptance prior to commencing work and revise, if
necessary, in accordance with the trial drives and preliminary load test results. Take
into account the following requirements in the calculations.
2.3.1 Drop Hammer

Where a drop hammer is used, check that the mass of the hammer is not less than
half that of the pile.
For other types of hammer, ensure the energy delivered to the pile is at least
equivalent to a drop hammer of the stated mass.
Ensure that hammer drop height and hammer weight are visible at all times to
facilitate the supervision of the driven pile construction.
2.3.2 Permissible Driving Stresses in Piles

Comply with relevant legislation and regulations for pile driving. Unless otherwise
agreed or specified, limit the driving stresses for pile installation and testing to the
values below:
Table 2.3.2 Recommended permissible driving stresses in piles
Pile Type Compression Tension Stress
Stress
Steel 0.9 fy 0.9 fy
Prestressed Concrete 0.80f’c fpe
Precast Concrete 0.85f’c 0.8(f’c )½ if reinforcement < 2%
(f’c )½ if reinforcement > 2%
fy = Steel yield strength (kN/m2)
f’c= Concrete compressive strength (kN/m2)
fpe = Initial prestress (kN/m2)

Based on the results of the damage assessment as set out in Clause 1.4.3, propose
the allowable ground settlement and vibration limits due to the works taking into
account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
2001). Notwithstanding the above, ensure that the ground movements and vibrations
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling

where relevant.
2.5 Noise Nuisance

Ensure compliance with restrictions from NEA and other authorities with jurisdiction
over the works.
Refer to the PSD for particular restrictions in noise control for the project if any.
Note particular restrictions in noise control for the project as follows:
To refer to NIA report.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Pile Sections and Pile Dimensions

Note that the piles sections and dimension indicated in the drawings and schedule
are the minimum acceptable dimensions.
3.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Piles Including Spun Piles
3.2.1 Concrete
Refer to Section C3-10, clause 3.0 for general requirement of concrete.
3.2.2 Reinforcement
3.2.2.1 General
Refer to section C3-20, clause 3.0 for general requirement of reinforcement and
section C3-70, clause 3.0 for requirement of prestress elements.
Ensure all precast concrete piles supplied are reinforced in accordance to the design.
The minimum number of longitudinal bars provided is to be four in rectangular piles
and six in circular or hexagonal piles. Minimum bar size is to be 12 mm.
Total cross sectional area of reinforcement is not to be less than 1% of the cross
section of the pile. Incorporate adequate reinforcement for lifting and handling
purposes.
3.2.2.2 Joints in Reinforcement

Ensure the main longitudinal reinforcing bars in piles not exceeding 12 m in length is
in one continuous length unless otherwise agreed. In piles exceeding 12 m long,
provide laps in main longitudinal bars at 12 m nominal intervals.
Check that joints in reinforcement are such that the full strength of the bar is effective
across the joint. Provide sufficient link bars to resist eccentric forces at lap or splice
joints.
3.2.3 Spacers
Check that spacers are designed and manufactured using materials, which will not
lead to reinforcement corrosion or spalling of the concrete cover.
3.2.4 Formwork
3.2.4.1 General
Refer to Section C3-60, clause 3.1 for general requirement of precast
mould/formwork.
Ensure formwork is clean, robust and constructed such as to prevent grout loss or
loss of aggregate during casting and to ensure the production of uniform sections.
When the sides of adjacent piles are used as formwork, use an accepted method to
prevent adhesion between concrete surfaces.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
3.2.4.2 Alignment of Formwork

The head of each pile is to be square to the longitudinal axis. The corners of the head
and the corners of the pile shaft for a distance of 300 mm from the head is to be
chamfered 25 mm x 25 mm.
The point of the pile or shoe is to lie on the longitudinal axis of the pile.
Holes for toggle bolts are to be at right angles to the faces of the pile, and are lined
with steel tubes or other accepted material. Provide holes for handling and pitching
and line with steel tubes. Alternatively, provide and cast in inserts to SO’s
acceptance.
3.2.5 Inserts for Segmental Precast Piles

Fabricated steel components is to comply with BS EN10025 Grades Fe 430A or
510A.
Propose for acceptance, details of all such components, the method of incorporating
within the concrete section and the method of connecting the precast sections.
3.2.6 Square Sections

When the precast concrete section is a square, chamfer the corners.
3.2.7 Dimensional Tolerances and Weight

The head of a pile element is to lie within a tolerance of 1 in 150 to the pile axis.
The cross-sectional dimensions of the pile are not to be less than specified and not
exceed by more than 6 mm. Any face of a pile is not to deviate by more than 6 mm
from a straight edge 3 m long laid on the face, and the centroid of any cross-section
of the pile is not to deviate by more than 12 mm from the straight line connecting the
centroids of the end faces of the piles.
For piles less than 3m long the permitted deviation from straightness is reduced to
below 6mm on a pro rata basis.
3.3 Steel Piles

Refer to Section C5-10, clause 3.1 for general requirement of materials for the steel
piles.
3.3.1 Pile Coating

To supplier’s recommendations and SO’s acceptance, take into account the available
ground and water conditions.
3.3.1.1 Quality of Finished Coating

The finished coating is to be generally smooth, of a dense and uniform texture and
free from sharp protuberances or pinholes. Sags, dimpling or curtaining on up to 3%
of the surface area of each member are acceptable although sharp protuberances
are to be removed by using a carpenter's chisel laid flat on the surface;
3.3.1.2 Treatment of Damaged Coatings

For area where the coating is damaged or removed, lightly wire brush and recoat with
the original coating in accordance with agreed methods.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
3.3.2 Welding
All welding for fabrication of steel piles and accessories are to be in accordance with
section C5-10 “ Structural Steelwork”, clause 4.5.
3.3.3 Dimensional Tolerances and Weight
3.3.3.1 Standard Rolled Sections

The deviation from straightness is not to exceed 1.04 (L- 4.5) where L is in metres
and the deviation in millimetres. For proprietary sections made up from rolled
sections, the deviation from straightness is not to exceed 1/1000 of the length of the
pile.
3.3.3.2 Tubular Piles

The deviation from straightness is not to exceed 1/600 of a length up to 10 m. When
two or more lengths are joined, the deviation from straightness is not to exceed 1/960
of the completed length unless otherwise agreed. The dimension of the pile is to
comply with the following further restrictions:
For a tubular pile carrying static load by the wall of the pile or by a concrete core, the
dimensions are to comply with API 5L unless otherwise agreed.
For a tubular pile where the loads are carried by the wall of the pile and subject to
reversal of stress during or after construction, the external dimensions at any section
as measured by using a tape on the circumference are not to differ from the
theoretical dimensions by more than -1% to +1%.
3.4 Treated Timber Piles
3.4.1 General
Timber piles are to comply with SS CP 1 and SS CP 7 in terms of classification and
strength, and are to be pressure treated with approved chemical preservative in
The piles are to be free from defects which may affect their strength and durability.
3.4.2 Species
All square sawn timber piles are to be Kempas or Keruing unless otherwise specified
or agreed.
3.4.3 Grading
Grading is to be in accordance with Malaysian Grading Rules by qualified timber
grading agents registered with Malaysian Timber Industry Board. Comply with the
following grading limits:
3.4.3.1 Knots
The size of knots is not to exceed one-quarter the width of the face or edge on which
they appear, and not be grouped closer than one knot per 1 metre of the length of the
pile. Unsound knots are not permitted.
3.4.3.2 Wane
Wane is to be allowed on one edge only and the total width of wane on its adjacent
faces is not to exceed:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
a. 65 mm for 125 mm square piles

b. 75 mm for 150 mm square piles
c. 90 mm for 175 mm square piles
3.4.3.3 Curvature
In piles up to 6 metres in length, maximum deviation is not to exceed 25 mm, ie the
longitudinal curvature is to fall within 25 mm of the centre line of the pile. In piles over
6 metres long, maximum deviation is not to exceed 35 mm.
3.4.3.4 Borer Holes and Pin Holes

A pile is not to have holes, which exceed the following table:
Table 3.4.3.4: Grading Limits for Defective Holes of Treated Timber Pile
Type of Defective Size Limit of Defective Holes
Holes
Pin Holes Up to 1.6 mm 32 nos. over an area of 0.01 sq.
metre
Shot Holes 1.6 mm – 3.0 mm 4 nos. over an area of 0.10 sq.
metre
Borer Holes 3.0 mm – 6.0 mm 2 nos. over an area of 0.10 sq.
metre
3.4.3.5 Open Shakes and Surface Checks

A pile is not to have shakes or checks whose depth, expressed as a fraction of the
width of the face at right angles to the one on which the defects occur, exceed 0.25.
3.4.3.6 End Splits

The longest split is not to exceed 75 mm at each end.
3.4.3.7 Compression strength

The ultimate direct compressive strength of the timber is not to be less than 41.4
MN/m2.
3.4.3.8 Brittle Heart & Boxed Heart

Brittle heart and boxed heart are not permitted.
3.4.3.9 Sloping Grain

The slope of grain is not to exceed 1 in 10 (30 mm per 300 mm).
3.4.4 Preservative Treatment

The timber piles are to be double treated; firstly to be pressure impregnated with
approved copper-chrome-arsenate wood preservative in accordance with SS 72 at a
pressure of not less than 15.5 kg/cm2 and with an average dry salt retention of 24
kg/m3 in the treatable volume: and secondly with creosote/fuel oil solution all in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
A sample boring taken from any part of any treated pile is to demonstrate evidence of
continuous and substantially even penetration of the preservation for the full depth of
the treated zone.
Submit a treatment certificate for every consignment of piles delivered. Provide
details of charge number, average dry salt retention, and the number and sizes of
piles supplied.
All timber piles delivered to site are to bear marks from approved labs certifying the
standard attained for treatment or otherwise tested at random at SO’s direction.
3.5 Proprietary Micropiles

Refer to the PSD for proprietary system required for the project if any.
Provide the following make and size of micropile or accepted equivalent for the
project:
Make and Type Size Minimum Working Load
Provide details of material and splice connections to SO for acceptance.
3.6 Pile Shoes and Toes

Provide the first section of each pile with a pointed co-axial shoe made of either steel
or chill hardened cast iron as follows:
3.6.1 Cast Steel Shoes

To BS 3100, grade A1. Straps or other fastenings to cast pile shoes is to be of steel
to BS EN 10025, Grade S275JO, and cast into the point to form an integral part of the
shoe.
3.6.2 Cast Iron Pile Shoes

To be made from chill hardened iron as used for making grey iron castings to BS
1560-3.2, Grade 150. The chilled iron point is to be free from major blowholes and
other surface defects.
3.6.3 Steel Pile Shoes

Flat plate and welded fabricated shoes provided to steel piles is to be to BS EN
10113 Grade 43A or 50A, or to BS EN10 025 Grade Fe430A or Fe 510A.
3.6.4 Strengthening of Pile Toe

The material used for the strengthening to the toe of a pile in lieu of a shoe or the
strengthening of the head of a pile is to be made from the material of the same grade
as the pile unless otherwise agreed.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication of Piles: Concrete Piles
4.1.1 Casting of Concrete Piles

Refer to section C3-60, clause 4.1 for general requirement.
Ensure provision of reinforcement cover to SS CP 4 and SS CP 65 unless otherwise
indicated in the drawings.
Cast all precast concrete piles on site, or at an approved yard.
4.1.1.1 Curing
Unless otherwise agreed, the piles are to be cured for the period as below.
Type of Cement Minimum Period from Time of Casting
Strike Side End of Wet Lift from Drive
Shutters Curing Casting Bed
Sulphate 12 hours 4 days 10 days 28 days
Resisting
Portland Cement
Rapid-Hardening 12 hours 3 days 7 days 10 days
Portland Cement
Do not lift piles from the casting bed until sufficient concrete strength has developed
to allow handling to take place without causing damage. Assess this on the basis of
the results of the concrete cube tests and the type of cement and admixtures used,
and provide a proposed level for acceptance.
When accelerated curing is used, the curing procedure is to SO’s acceptance and
must not cause deleterious effects to the pile. Allow not less than four hours from the
completion of casting before raising the temperature. Control rates of heating and
cooling in accordance with section C3-60, clause 4.1.5.
4.2 Fabrication of Piles: Steel Piles

For general workmanship requirements refer to section C5-10 Structural Steelwork,
clause 4.0.
4.2.1 Longitudinal Welded Piles
4.2.1.1 Welded Tube Piles

Engage automatic welding machines and method of rolling with approval.
Ensure that all welds are full penetration butt welds and, with the exception of
continuous tube-making processes, make longitudinal welds with the extension plates
at the starting and finishing points of each seam.
4.2.1.2 Welded Box Piles and Proprietary Sections

Weld box piles or proprietary sections made up from two or more hot rolled sections
in accordance with accepted methods.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.2.2 Butt Welding of Piles

Ensure that the root edges or root faces of lengths of piles that are to be butt welded
do not differ by more than 25% of the thickness of piles not exceeding 12 mm thick,
or by more than 3 mm for piles thicker than 12 mm. When piles of unequal thickness
are to be butt welded, the thickness of the thinner material is to be the criterion.
4.2.3 Coating Piles for Protection Against Corrosion

Where required as indicated in the PSD, provide coating for corrosion protection to
the piles. Propose suitable coating products to SO’s acceptance.
Protective coating is not required for the steel piles.
4.2.3.1 Specialist Labour

Ensure the preparation of surfaces and the application of the coats to the piles are
carried out by specialists or skilled labour to SO’s acceptance.
4.2.3.2 Protection During Coating

Undertake the preparation and coating in a weather-protected environment.
4.2.3.3 Control to Humidity During Coating

Do not apply the coatings when the humidity in the vicinity may cause condensation
on the surface.
4.2.3.4 Welded Parts

After welding, re-apply a layer of coating within 200 mm of the welded part.
4.3 Handling and Pitching of Driven Piles
4.3.1 Handling
Do not lift piles by slinging from other than accepted lifting holes or points. For each
section, clearly mark the lifting points.
Ensure that all piles within a stack are in groups of the same length and placed on
accepted supports.
Carry out handling, transporting and pitching of piles in a manner that avoid damage
to piles and their coatings.
4.3.1.1 Precast Concrete Piles

Do not subject the piles to loading, including its own weight, which will induce a
compressive stress in the concrete exceeding 0.33 of its strength.
4.3.2 Pitching
Before the commencement of driving, check each pile and the leaders or guides of
the pile frame for correct rake or plumb and maintain the rake or plumb during driving.
During the driving operation ensure the centre of the monkey or hydraulic ram does
not deviate more than 40 mm off the centre of the pile being driven.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.3.3 Marking and Storing

Mark all piles at intervals of 1 metre along their length prior to pitching.
4.3.3.1 Steel Piles

Mark to show grade of steel, length and identification number. Store the piles above
the ground surface and above standing water. Ensure that the piles are nested with
flanges vertical and stored on adequate numbers of timber blocks to avoid bending.
4.3.3.2 Precast Concrete Piles

Mark to show their identification number, length and date of casting. Provide
adequate facilities for supporting and aligning the lengths of pile.
4.4 Installation and Driving
4.4.1 General
Install each pile to a penetration as indicated in the drawings or as adjusted as a
result of the design verification check supported by accepted set records.
Ensure the equipment set up and installation procedures are in conformance with SS
CP 4.
4.4.2 Length of Piles

Unless otherwise agreed, provide lengths of pile so as to minimise the number of
joints within the expected penetration. Set up pile lengths so that the differences in
the lengths of the sections are as even as possible.
4.4.2.1 Matching of Pile Lengths for Tubular Piles

Arrange the piles such that the longitudinal seam welds and spiral seam welds of the
different lengths are evenly staggered. If, in order to obtain an acceptable match of
the ends of the piles or the specified straightness, these seam welds are brought to
close alignment at the joint, then ensure they are staggered by at least 100 mm.
4.4.3 Driving and Re-drive Checks
4.4.3.1 Strength of Piles

Do not drive piles until there are evidence indicating that the pile has achieved the
specified strength.
4.4.3.2 Depth
Drive each pile continuously until the specified depth or accepted set has been
reached. Acceptable set is indicated in the PSD. Do not suspend driving without
approval. Demonstrate that the rate of penetration prior to the cessation of driving will
be substantially re-established on its resumption.
4.4.3.3 Pile head protection

a. Helmet cushion: Ensure the helmet cushion used during driving is in accordance
to the manufacturer specification. The Hammer system and cushions used for
installation of working piles are to be the same as those used successfully for the
preliminary piles.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
b. Anti-Splitting Plates: Fit the piles with an approved anti-splitting plate at the butt
and toe to protect against brooming or splitting during driving.
4.4.3.4 Follower / Dolly

Do not use a follower/dolly unless agreed, in which case revise the set to take into
account the reduction in the effectiveness of the hammer blow.
4.4.3.5 Splicing of piles

When not shown in the design drawings, propose and provide suitable splicing
connections to SO’ acceptance to enable the continued driving of the piles.
Before splicing proceeds, accurately position the extension pile true to line and
vertical with the driven pile. Ensure full contact over the full cross section of the
butting pile surfaces.
4.4.3.6 Driving Resistance

Inform the SO immediately and take detailed record of the driving resistance if an
unexpected change in driving characteristics is noted. Take a similar detailed record
of the driving resistance over the full length of the next nearest pile for comparison if
available.
4.4.3.7 Ground Conditions

Report to the SO immediately any apparent variance in the ground conditions from
those reported or might have been inferred from reports.
4.4.3.8 Obstruction
In the event of encountering obstructions below ground level during piling operations,
inform the SO immediately for further directions.
4.4.3.9 Repair and Lengthening of Piles

Carry out any repairs necessary to the pile head to enable driving to the final level to
be completed. If lengthening is required, provide details of proposed methods to be
used to ensure that the extended pile is capable of withstanding safely stresses
imposed during driving and under load.
Do not complete driving after repair or lengthening until there are sufficient evidence
indicating that the required pile strength has been achieved.
4.4.3.10 Final Set

When a final set is being measured, check that the following requirements are met:
a. The exposed part of the pile is to be in good condition without damage or
distortion.
b. The dolly and packing, if any, is to be in sound condition. Set taken by dolly is to
be correlated with load test results.
c. The hammer blow is to be in line with the pile axis and the impact surfaces are to
be flat and at right angles to the pile and hammer axis.
d. The hammer is to be in good condition and operating correctly.
e. The temporary compression of the pile is to be recorded as directed.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.4.3.11 Re-drive Checks

Carry out if required to an accepted procedure.
4.4.3.12 Installation of Micro-piles

Install strictly to manufacturer’s recommendation and methods and procedures as
accepted.
4.4.4 Driving Sequence and Risen Piles

Drive piles in an accepted sequence to minimise the detrimental effects of heave and
lateral displacement of the ground so that the final position of each pile is within the
specified tolerances.
When required, take levels and measurements to determine the movement of the
ground or any pile resulting from the driving process.
When a pile has risen as a result of adjacent piles being driven, submit proposals to
the SO for correcting this by re-driving to the required set, and for avoiding such
situations in subsequent driving.
4.4.5 Leaders and Trestles

During driving and until incorporation in the structure, provide adequate support and
restrain to the piles by means of leaders, trestles, temporary supports or other
arrangements, such as to maintain position and alignment and to prevent buckling
and damage to the piles.
4.4.6 Preboring
Adopt pre-boring to assist pile installation only with permission.
Pitch the pile into a hole pre-bored to the depth and diameter as agreed with the SO.
Record the details of the pre-boring depth and diameter.
4.4.7 Jetting
Adopt jetting to assist pile installation only with permission. Propose details for the
jetting operations to SO’s acceptance before commencing. Do not carry out jetting
over the last 3m of penetration.
4.5 Welding
All welding are to conform to the requirement in section C5-10 “Structural Steelwork”,
clause 4.5. Ensure that all welding are carried out by a certified welder.
When welding the splice joints during driving, allow a minimum cooling time of 30
minutes for welds before continuing any driving work.
4.6 Damaged Piles

Unless otherwise agreed, provide compensating piles for any piles damaged due to
internal defects or due to improper handling or driving.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
4.7 Tolerances
4.7.1 Setting Out

Establish all lines, levels and be responsible for the correct positions of all piles. Set
out from the main grid lines of the proposed structure. Immediately before installation
of the pile, mark the pile position with suitable identifiable pins or markers.
4.7.2 Position
The maximum permitted deviation at the cut off level of the pile at centre is to be 75
mm in any direction.
4.7.3 Verticality
For vertical piles, the maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the
vertical is 1 in 75.
4.7.4 Rake
For raked piles, set and maintain the piling rig to attain the required rake. The
maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake is 1 in 25.
4.8 Pile Heads
4.8.1 Steel Pile Heads

If a steel superstructure is to be welded to steel piles, cut the piles square and to
within 5mm of the levels shown on the Drawings.
If piles are to be encased in concrete, cut them square and to within 20 mm of the
levels shown on the Drawings, and remove protective coatings from the surface of
the pile heads down to a level 100 mm above the soffit of the concrete.
4.8.2 Precast Concrete Pile Heads

On completion of installation of piles, cut off the piles to the required level as shown
on the drawings to a tolerance of 20 mm unless otherwise agreed.
Expose the main reinforcement and leave reasonably straight for bonding into the pile
cap. The minimum length of the main reinforcement to be exposed is as follows:
Grade of Pile Cap Concrete 30 40 or more
High Tensile Steel 37D 32D
2
(fy = 460 N/mm )
Mild Steel 30D 25D
2
(fy = 250 N/mm )
D = nominal diameter of bar.
In stripping pile heads, strip the concrete to a level such that the remaining concrete
will project 75 mm into the pile cap.
Where a pile has been formed below the required cut-off level, build it up with
concrete of at least the same grade and ensure that the reinforcement projects for
such length as above.
Provide details of the proposed method of cutting the pile heads.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
Take care to avoid shattering or damaging the rest of the pile. Cut away any cracked
or defective concrete and made good with new concrete properly bonded to the old to
provide a full and sound section to the cut-off level.
4.8.3 Timber Pile Heads

Saw off the piles at the cut-off levels. Apply two coats of approved preservatives
(20% M/V) to SS 72 to the cut-off pile heads, allow one hour between applications to
allow each application to soak into the end grain completely. Immediately after the
preservative solution has dried, coat the pile head with an approved bituminous
compound for the whole depth that the pile will be encased in the pile cap.
4.9 Non-Performance of Working Piles

Notify the SO if the performance of any pile is expected to be less than that of a
similar pile whose test behaviour has been accepted.
4.10 Noise and Disturbance

Carry out the work in such a manner as to minimise noise, vibration and other
disturbance.
Comply with all current regulations and environmental controls.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submission at Tender

Submit the following details with the tender:
a. Proposals to deal with noise and vibration, and an assessment of vibration
characteristics for the different piling operations.
b. Details of method of achieving penetration of the piles, as well as through
obstructions.
c. Details of method of avoidance of critical services.
d. Work programme indicating the anticipated time required for installation of the
piles from commencement to completion.
e. Track records showing evidence of experience of this type of work.
f. General methods for control of the piling works.
g. Confirm that the ground investigation information provided is adequate for the
piling works and design verification. Raise any concerns in the tender.

Prior to commencement of piling works, submit a method statement for the proposed
method of installation to achieve the required performance including:
a. All relevant details of the methods proposed during tender.
b. Methods to achieve the permitted verticality of pile. Method of checking the
verticality and corrective actions to be taken if the deviation exceeds the limits.
c. All details of proposed pile driving equipment and machineries.
d. All details of proposed monitoring equipment.
e. Details of inserts for segmental precast pile.
f. Method of cutting off pile head
g. Details of the Quality Management System.
h. Details of the equipment to determine the depth and verticality of the installation.
i. Typical pile record sheets, including also details such as unusual driving
conditions, interruption or delays and other information deemed essential.
j. Methods to control alignment including pile batter and vertical plumbness, and the
rotation about longitudinal centreline of the web for steel piles.
k. Full details of the welding procedures and electrodes with drawings and
schedules as may be necessary.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.1.3 Schedule of Pile Lengths

Before the commencement of installation of the working piles, provide the SO with a
schedule showing the sizes and segment lengths of the working piles, taking into
consideration the intended penetration depth and ground conditions.
5.1.4 Piling Programme

Submit to SO’s acceptance the sequence and programme of working pile installation.
Inform the SO of the piling programme scheduled for the following day and give
adequate notice of any intention to work outside normal hours and at weekends.
5.1.5 Monitoring of Adjacent Structures

Provide proposals for surveys and monitoring of movement and vibration in adjacent
structures and services before work commences.
5.1.6 As-Built Details

Engage a licensed Surveyor to carry out a survey of the eccentricity of each pile and
the pile group. Submit the results to the SO within time as directed after the piles
have been trimmed to the cut-off level. Include the following information:
a. Final setting out plan, pile depths, pile sizes, pile capacities, pile eccentricities,
and cut-off levels.
b. Location of piles, which have been discarded or not in use, e.g. abandoned piles,
unused existing foundation, rejected piles and preliminary test piles.
c. Location and type of pile load tests.

5.2 Inspection and Test Certificates
5.2.1 General
Provide the SO with test certificates, analysis and mill certificates. Ensure that
adequate notice is given to the SO to inspect the process or test.
5.2.2 Inspection of Coatings

Check the completed coating for thickness and continuity by an accepted magnetic
thickness gauge and Holiday detector. Apply additional treatment to areas where the
thickness is less than specified.
Check the completed coating also for adhesion by driving a sharp carpenter's chisel
laid almost flat through the coating and along the surface of the steel. A coating
adhesion is acceptable if no separation is apparent between coats and if it can be
seen to be adhering in the depressions on the exposed metal surface. Test once for
each 20 m2 of surface. Provide additional coats to areas where the adhesion is not
accepted. Ensure the coating for the piles are accepted before pitching and driving.
5.2.3 Uplift of Piles

Check the uplift of working piles at least weekly during the piling works and submit
the results to the SO.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.2.4 Final Set

Record the final set of each pile either as the penetration in millimetres per 10 blows
or as the number of blows required to produce a penetration of 25 mm.
5.3 Tests
5.3.1 Compliance Testing of Concrete and Reinforcement

Refer to requirements as set out in sections C3-10, clause 5.1 and section C3-20,
clause 5.0.
5.3.2 Weld Testing

Refer to section C5-10, clause 5.4 for general requirement and procedures on
welding test.
5.3.2.1 Weld Check on Longitudinal Welded Piles

Unless otherwise directed, during production of longitudinally welded tube piles, take
at least one radiograph approximately 300 mm long on each completed length as a
spot check on weld quality. Take on a circumferential or longitudinal weld at position
agreed.
5.3.2.2 Radiographs of Welds

The acceptance standard for radiographs of steel pile welds is to be in accordance
with BS PD 5500.
For a pile where the loads will be static and where the pile will receive lateral support,
or where the load will be carried by a concrete core, radiographs will not be required
unless specified, but ensure that welds are capable of withstanding handling, driving
and design load stresses.
5.4 Pile Testing

For general requirement and procedures of the pile load tests refer to Section C4-30
“Pile Testing”, clause 4.0.
5.4.1 Trial Drives

Carry out trial drives on selected driving wakes in accordance with the quantity and
locations indicated in PSD, before the installation of contract piles. Perform Pile
Driving Analyser (PDA) during the driving trials and carry out Case Pile Wave
Analysis Programme (CAPWAP) analysis.
Provide trial drives as follows before the installation of contract piles:
Location Pile size & depth Nos.
5.4.2 Preliminary Piles

Refer to section C4-30, clause 4.1 for requirements of the preliminary pile(s). Agree
locations with the SO.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
5.4.2.1 Acceptance of Follower

Verify the set required by preliminary pile test where a follower/dolly is to be used.
5.4.3 Working Pile Testing

Refer to section C4-30, clause 4.1 for the requirement of working pile tests.
5.4.4 Remedial measures
5.4.4.1 Piles Carrying Gravity Loads

For each pile test that has failed, propose and provide one or more substitute
compensating piles for acceptance by the SO. If, in the opinion of the SO, it is
impractical or inadvisable to install substitute piles in place of a failed pile, submit
proposals to rectify the defect. The proposal is subject to the acceptance of the SO.
5.4.4.2 Piles Carrying Lateral Loads

In the event that a pile fails a lateral working load test, carry out remedial measures
as follows:
a. Carry out a structural assessment to ensure the pile is structurally sound.
b. Excavation of all materials for a distance of not less than 5 metres from pile face
around the entire pile to minimum 1m below the level of the pile cap soffit. The
width of excavation is to be the same on all sides of the pile.
c. Backfilling and compaction of the excavation hard against the pile and testing and
re-testing as appropriate. Finally, completion of backfilling and compaction to the
level of the top of the pile cap.
Alternative remedial measures such as compensating piles may be proposed subject
to the acceptance of the SO. Carry out additional load tests as directed by the SO.
5.5 Records
Keep piling records with the following information and submit copies as directed in
good time to the SO. Note any unexpected boring conditions in the record.
a. Contract and site information
b. Pile reference number (location)
c. Pile type
d. Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter
e. Hammer weight
f. Hammer drop height
g. Temporary Compression
h. Re-drives Achieved
i. Final Set Achieved
j. Length of preformed pile
k. Date and time of installation
l. Date of pile casting
m. Length and details of reinforcement
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-20 Driven Piling
n. Concrete mix
o. Ground level at commencement of installation of pile
p. Cut off level
q. Depth from Cut off level to pile toe
r. Toe level
s. Depth from working level to Cut off level
t. All information regarding obstructions/delays and other Interruptions to the
sequence of work
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
C4-30 Pile Testing
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
CONTENTS
Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.5 Definitions 7
2.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 9

2.2 Pile Testing Requirements 9
3.0 EQUIPMENT 10
3.1 Calibration 10
3.2 Static Load Test 10
3.3 Osterberg Cell Load Test Equipment 10
3.4 Dynamic Load Test Equipment 11
3.5 Sonic Logging Equipment 11
3.6 Vibration Test Equipment 11
3.7 Modified Shock Test Equipment 11
3.8 Simple Shock Test Equipment 12
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 13
4.1 Schedule of Tests 13
4.2 Construction of Preliminary Test Pile 13
4.3 Load Testing: General 14
4.4 Load Test: Static Load Test Procedures 18
4.5 Load Test: Osterberg Load Test 21
4.6 Load Test: Lateral Load Test 21
4.7 Load Test: Dynamic Test 22
4.8 Integrity Tests: Proof Coring 23
4.9 Integrity Test: Non Destructive Tests (NDT) 24
4.10 Protection of Testing Equipment 26
4.11 Noise and Disturbance 26
5.0 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS 27

5.1 General Submissions 27
5.2 Preliminary Test Piles 28
5.3 Results of Static Gravity and Lateral Load Tests 28
5.4 Results of Dynamic Load Tests 31
5.5 Results of Osterberg Cell Load Tests 33
5.6 Results of Pile Integrity Tests 34
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the load and integrity testing of bored and
driven piles.
This document is supplementary to section C4-30 of the NPQS. It provides project
section.
1.1.1 Load Testing

Load testing involves the testing of the capacity of a pile by the application of a vertical
or horizontal load, or a combination of both. The types of load test may include:
a. Static load test
b. Osterberg load test
c. Lateral load test
d. Dynamic load test
1.1.2 Integrity Testing

Integrity tests involves verifying the soundness of the piles, using methods including:
a. Proof Coring
b. Sonic Logging
c. Vibration Test
d. Modified Shock Test
e. Simple Shock Test
Tests (b) to (e) are non-destructive method and tests (c) to (e) are classified as low
strain impact test.
Testing may be carried out on preliminary piles or on working piles installed to support
principally vertical loads, or horizontal loads.

3
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.3.1 Standards
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be proposed for approval by the
SO, provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are
the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS 78: Part A16 Testing Concrete. Method of determination of compressive

strength of concrete cubes
Other Standards
ASTM D1143 Standard test method for piles under static axial compressive load
(ASTM, D1995)
BS 8008 Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction
and descent of machine-bored shafts for piling and other
purposes.

a. BRE Digest 251 (1995) Assessment of damage in low-rise building.
1.4 Trade Preambles

Engage a PE (civil) to plan, design and supervise any temporary supports and reaction
foundation system necessary to enable the carrying out of the load tests.
Submit the design to SO for acceptance. All design calculations and drawings are to be
endorsed by the PE.
Propose as a response plan in the event that measures taken to control ground
movement and vibration do not perform satisfactorily.
1.4.2 Review and Endorsement of Test Results

Engage a PE (civil) with relevant experience to review the results and interpretation of
all load tests conducted and endorse on all reports submitted.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing

neighbouring properties due to the works, for the purpose of establishing suitable values
for ‘Alert’ and “Work Suspension’ levels for monitoring. Submit to SO with endorsement
from a PE.

the site. Take into account of site access, space occupation, safety and safeguarding of
adjoining properties and each other’s works.

Where applicable, prior to and upon completion of the site works, carry out a condition
survey to adjacent buildings in accordance with the requirements of section C1-20
“Condition Survey and Monitoring”. Submit all records to the SO and adjacent property
owners where directed.

Take cognisance of and co-ordinate with other contractors on site who may be carrying
out instrumentation and monitoring works to avoid duplication of installation and
readings.
For general requirements of the instrumentation and monitoring works refer to Section
C2-50.

Adequately maintain roads and footpaths within and adjacent to the site and keep clear
of mud and debris.



Engage a competent and suitably experienced site engineer to the SO’s acceptance, to
supervise the field works.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing

1.4.12 Safety
Provide safety precautions to comply with all current legislation and regulations, notably:
Regulations
d. Factories Act
BS 8008: Guide to safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent
of machine-bored shaft for piling and other purposes
1.4.12.1 Marking of Bores
Ensure that when the pile head is unattended the bore is clearly marked and fenced off
at all times.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
1.5 Definitions
The load which may be safely applied to a pile
1.5.1 Allowable Load
after taking into account its ultimate bearing
capacity, negative skin friction, pile spacing,
overall bearing capacity of the ground below
and allowable settlement.
A pile designed to resist compressive axial
1.5.2 Compression
force, which would cause it to penetrate
Pile
further into the ground.
A test in which the pile is extracted from its
1.5.3 Constant Rate
position as installed in the soil at a constant
of Uplift (CRU)
speed while the force applied at the top of the
Test
pile to maintain the rate of uplift is
continuously measured. The force/uplift
relationship obtained does not represent an
equilibrium condition between the extractive
force and the uplift.
The dead weight structure used in a loading
1.5.4 Kentledge
test.
A loading test in which each increment of load
1.5.5 Maintained
is held constant either for a defined period of
Load Test
time or until the rate of movement (settlement
or uplift) falls to a specified value.
The computation of the mechanical
1.5.6 Modified Shock
admittance of a pile as a function of frequency
Testing (MST)
by Fourier transform of the signal received by
a velocity transducer following a single
hammer blow to the head of the pile.
A pile installed before the commencement of
1.5.7 Preliminary
the main piling works or specific part of the
Test Pile
works for the purpose of establishing the
suitability of the chosen type of pile and for
confirming its design, dimensions, bearing
capacity and installation method. Preliminary
piles are not expected to be incorporated into
the permanent works unless otherwise
directed.
Coring of the pile shaft from the top of the pile.
1.5.8 Proof Coring
A load applied to a selected working pile to
1.5.9 Working Test
confirm that it is suitable for the load at the
Load
settlement specified. A working test load
should not normally exceed 200% of the
specified working load on a pile.
An arrangement of kentledge, piles, anchors
1.5.10 Reaction
or rafts that provides a resistance against
System
which the pile is tested.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
A pile installed at an inclination to the vertical.

1.5.11 Raking Pile
The measurement of the frequency response
1.5.12 Simple Shock
of a pile to a single hammer blow.
Test (SST)
Coring through the tube provided for sonic
1.5.13 Sonic Coring
logging.
The measurement of the travel time of sound
1.5.14 Sonic Logging
wave from an emitter to a receiver through the
concrete of a pile. The emitter and the
receiver are to be at the same level generally.
A pile designed to resist tensile axial force,
1.5.15 Tension Pile
which would cause it to be extracted from the
ground.
Any pile to which a test is to be applied.
1.5.16 Test Pile
The load at which both the skin and end
1.5.17 Ultimate
bearing resistance of the soil become fully
Bearing
mobilised, or when a total movement of the
Capacity
pile base equal to 10% of the base diameter
has occured.
The measurement of the mechanical
1.5.18 Vibration
admittance of a pile as a function of
Testing
frequency, by monitoring the vertical velocity
of the pile while it is being excited in the same
direction by a constant force vibrator being
driven at variable frequency between 20 and
5000 Hz.
The service load which the pile is designed to
1.5.19 Specified
carry.
Working Load
One of the piles forming the foundation of a

1.5.20 Working Pile
structure.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
2.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

When carrying out proposal for temporary supports and reaction systems in clause1.4.1,
ensure that the size, length and number of the piles or anchors, or the area of the rafts,
are adequate to transmit the maximum test load to the ground in a safe manner without
excessive movement or influence on the test pile.
Comply with SS CP4 and other regulations and authority requirements in the design of
the foundation for the works.
2.2 Pile Testing Requirements
2.2.1 Loading Tests

Plan for and ensure that all load testing are able to verify the loading capacities of the
piles for up to 3 times working load for preliminary piles, and 2 times working load for
working piles.
2.2.2 Integrity Tests

Plan for and ensure that all integrity tests are able to provide sufficient data to verify the
soundness of the installed piles in comparison with specified requirements.

Based on the results of the damage assessment as set out in Clause 1.4.3, propose the
allowable ground settlement and vibration limits due to the works taking into account the
vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
with the requirements of Building Control Act [Section 7(2)] Annex (BE/CP/5).
where relevant.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
3.0 EQUIPMENT
3.1 Calibration
Ensure all testing equipment and gauges used for pile load tests or integrity tests are
calibrated before and after each test by SAC-SINGLAS accredited laboratory.
All test equipments are to be calibrated at a maximum of six months interval and
calibrations are to remain valid for 2 months at the time of being used for the tests.
3.2 Static Load Test
3.2.1 Equipment for Applying Load

The equipment used for applying load is to consist of one or more hydraulic rams or
jacks.
Check that the total capacity of the jacks is at least equal to the required maximum load.
The jack or jacks are to be arranged in conjunction with the reaction system to deliver
an axial load to the test pile.
The complete system is to be capable of transferring the maximum load required for the
test.
Where kentledge is used, construct the foundations for the kentledge and any cribwork,
beams or other supporting structures in such a manner that there will be no differential
settlement, bending or deflection of an amount that constitutes a hazard to safety or
impairs the efficiency of the operation. Adequately bond, tie or otherwise hold together
the kentledge to prevent it from falling apart, or becoming unstable because of deflection
of the supports.
Check that the weight of kentledge is greater than the maximum test load and if the
weight is estimated from the density and volume of the constituent materials, allow an
adequate factor of safety against error.
3.2.2 Load Measuring Device

The load measuring device may consist of a proving ring, load measuring column,
pressure cell or other appropriate system. Use spherical seating in conjunction with any
devices that are sensitive to eccentric loading; take suitable care to avoid any risk of
buckling. Load measuring devices and jacks are to be short in axial length in order to
achieve the best possible stability; pay attention to details in order to ensure that axial
loading is maintained.
3.3 Osterberg Cell Load Test Equipment

The equipment is to consist of the following items:
a. Osterberg cell (s)
b. Hydraulics lines and fittings
c. Telltales devices
d. Pressure source and gauge
e. Linear vibrating displacement transducers (LVWDTs)
f. Vibrating wire strain gauges (VWSGs)
g. Reference beam and digital dial gauges
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
h. Data logger
i. Air driven or hand operated hydraulic pump
3.4 Dynamic Load Test Equipment

a. A hammer of mass (depending on pile size)
b. A pair of strain gauges/transducers
c. A pair of accelerometer
d. A Pile Driving Analyzer
3.5 Sonic Logging Equipment

a. A piezoelectric emitter
b. A piezoelectric receiver and amplifier
c. A drum holding two cables for supply and receipt of signals and with sufficient
strength to support the emitter and receiver, with enough capacity to accommodate
the cable required to reach the base of any pile to be tested and calibrated in such a
way that there is a measure of the position of the probes within the depth of the pile,
accurate to ±20 mm.
d. Signal conditioning equipment
e. A storage oscilloscope
f. A "Polaroid" camera mounted on the oscilloscope.
Where necessary, Provide means to centralise the probes within the tubes, so that
variation in the separation of the emitter and receiver resulting from clearance between
the probes and the tubes does not occur.
3.6 Vibration Test Equipment

The Vibration Test equipment is to consist of the following items:
a. An electrodynamics vibrator unit with an operating frequency range from about 20
Hz to about 2000 Hz.
b. A signal generator
c. A force amplifier
d. A velocity transducer
e. A frequency analyser
f. An X-Y plotter
3.7 Modified Shock Test Equipment

11
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
a. A load cell capable of measuring a transient force of up to 100kN.

b. A hammer of mass approximately 2 kg.
c. A velocity transducer.
d. A storage oscilloscope.
e. Signal conditioning equipment including a microprocessor programmed to carry out
a fast Fourier transform on the input signal.
3.8 Simple Shock Test Equipment

a. A hammer of mass approximately 2 kg fitted with an electrical triggering device
b. A velocity transducer
c. Signal conditioning equipment including an amplifier and filters
d. A storage oscilloscope
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Schedule of Tests

Refer to PSD for number and type of load tests required for the project.
For the purpose of establishing the number of tests required, the percentages given in
the schedule relate to the total number of working piles on a contract. Round up part
number of tests calculated based on the total number of piles.
4.2 Construction of Preliminary Test Pile
4.2.1 Method of Construction

Construct each preliminary test pile in a manner similar to that for the working piles, and
by the use of similar equipment and materials. Install preliminary test piles in ground
similar to that where the working piles are to be installed.
Provide extra reinforcement and concrete of increased strength as directed by the SO to
ensure no premature structural failure during load tests.
4.2.2 Instrumentation for Preliminary Piles

Instrument the preliminary piles with 2 or 4 nos. of extensometers through the pile depth
and a minimum of 2 nos. of vibrating wire strain gauges per level at various levels as
Fix the vibrating wire strain gauges and extensometer securely to the reinforcement
cages of the piles, and maintain orientation in the direction of the movement to be
measured, and protect from damage at all stages of pile construction.
4.2.3 Cut-off Level

Terminate the pile shaft slightly above the normal cut-off level or at a level required by
the SO.
Extend the pile shaft above the cut-off level of working piles so that gauges and other
apparatus to be used in the testing process will not be damaged by water or falling
debris.
Where the pile shaft is extended above the cut-off level of a working pile in soil which
would influence the load bearing capacity of the pile, install a sleeve to eliminate
additional friction which would not arise in the working pile. Alternatively, if the friction
above the designed cut-off level can be calculated with reasonable accuracy, a sleeve
need not be used, take the calculated friction into account in assessing the load applied
to the pile.
4.2.4 Pile Head Construction

4.2.4.1 Compression Test
For a pile that is tested in compression, form the pile head in a plane surface normal to
the axis of the pile, sufficiently large to accommodate the loading and settlement-
measuring equipment and adequately reinforced or protected to prevent damage from
the concentrated application of load from the loading equipment.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Ensure the pile head and/or cap is concentric with the test pile; check that the joint
between the cap and the pile is not weaker than the pile.
Make sufficient clear space under any part of the cap projecting beyond the section of
the pile so that, at the maximum expected settlement, load is not transmitted to the
ground except through the pile.
4.2.4.2 Tension Test.
For a pile that is tested in tension, provide means for transmitting the test load axially to
the pile. Construct the connection between the pile and the loading equipment with
strength equal to the maximum load which is to be applied to the pile during the test with
an appropriate factor of safety on the structural design.
4.2.5 Uniformity of Pile Shaft

For bored test piles, ensure the pile is uniform in diameter along its entire shaft with
overbreaks not exceeding 10% of its nominal diameter at any section.
Compute the percentage overbreak in the pile as the percentage excess between the
concrete volume discharged per truck as indicated by the concrete delivery docket and
the resulting concrete displacement in the bored pile based on the nominal size of the
piles. Take the overbreak into account in the interpretation of test results or reject at the
SO’s direction.
4.3 Load Testing: General

In addition to the methods and procedures prescribed below, ensure that the load
testing is in general conformance with the requirements of SS CP 4.
4.3.1 Testing Equipment

4.3.1.1 Stability
Ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring device are mounted on the pile
head, the whole system is stable up to the maximum load to be applied. Provide the
means to enable dial gauges to be read from a position clear of the kentledge stack or
test frame in conditions where failure in any part of the system due to overloading,
buckling, loss of hydraulic pressure etc. will not constitute a hazard to personnel.
4.3.1.2 Test Pressure
Ensure that the hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus to be
operated under hydraulic pressure are capable of withstanding a test pressure of one
and a half times the maximum working pressure without leaking.
4.3.1.3 Maximum Test Load
Check that the maximum test load or test pressure expressed as a reading on the
gauge in use is displayed and all operators are aware of this limit.
4.3.2 Verification of datum

Prior to carrying out a pile load test and setting up of the load test equipment, survey to
establish a datum for the pile head level relative to a permanent bench mark. Verify the
pile level each time before a loading cycle to ensure that the pile is not loaded prior to
being subjected to the test loads.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.3.3 Reaction Systems

4.3.3.1 Compression Tests
Carry out compression tests using kentledge, tension piles or specially constructed
anchorage. Do not use kentledge for tests on raking piles.
Where kentledge is to be used, support it on cribwork disposed around the pile head so
that its centre of gravity is on the axis of the pile. The bearing pressure under
supporting cribs is to be such as to ensure stability of the kentledge stack, and if
necessary, provide a pile support system to the kentledge. Do not rest the kentledge
directly on the pile head.
4.3.3.2 Tension Tests
Carry out tension tests using compression piles or rafts constructed on the ground. The
use of inclined reaction piles, or rafts is not precluded, subject to the acceptance of the
SO. In all cases, ensure that the resultant force of the reaction system is co-axial with
the test pile.
4.3.3.3 Use of Working Piles
Do not use working piles as reaction piles without acceptance from the SO. Where used
as reaction piles, measure their movement to within accuracy of 0.5 mm.
4.3.3.4 Use of Kentledge
Where kentledge is used for loading vertical piles in compression, the distance from the
edge of the test pile to the nearest part of the crib supporting the kentledge stack in
contact with the ground is to be not less than 3 times the diameter of the test pile and a
minimum of 2m whichever is greater.
4.3.3.5 Tension Pile and Ground Anchors
Where tension piles or ground anchors are used, ensure that the load is correctly
transmitted to all the tie rods or bolts. Do not extend the rods by welding unless it can
be ensured that the steel will not reduce in strength by welding. Ensure that the bond
stresses of the rods in tension do not exceed normal permissible bond stresses for the
type of steel and grade of concrete used.
4.3.3.6 Spacing of Vertical Reaction Piles
The centre to centre spacing of vertical reaction piles, including working piles used as
reaction piles, from a test pile, is to be not less than 3 times the diameter of the test pile
or the reaction piles or 2 m, whichever is the greatest. Where a pile to be tested has an
enlarged base, apply the same criterion with regard to the pile shafts, with the additional
requirement that the surface of the reaction piles is to be no closer to the base of the
test pile than half of the enlarged base diameter.
4.3.3.7 Spacing of Ground Anchors
Where ground anchors are used to provide a test reaction for loading in compression,
no part of the section of the anchor transferring load to the ground is to be closer to the
test pile than 3 times the diameter of the test pile. Where the pile to be tested has an
enlarged base, apply the same criterion with regard to the pile shaft, with the additional
requirement that no section of the anchor transferring load to the ground is to be closer
to the pile base than a distance equal to the base diameter.
4.3.3.8 Care of Piles
Ensure that the method employed in the installation of any reaction piles, anchors or
rafts do not damage any test pile or working pile.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.3.4 Measurement of Load

Measure the load by a load measuring device and by a calibrated pressure gauge
included in the hydraulic system. Record readings of both the load measuring device
and the pressure gauges. In interpreting the test data, regard the readings from the
load measuring device as normal and use the pressure gauge readings as a check for
gross error.
4.3.4.1 Calibration of Load Measuring Devices
Calibrate the load measuring devices before and after each series of tests, whenever
adjustments are made to the device or at intervals appropriate to the type of equipment.
Calibrate the pressure gauge and hydraulic jack together.
4.3.4.2 Adjustability of Loading Equipment
Check that the loading equipment is capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain
a smooth increase of load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of a
maintained loading test.
4.3.5 Measuring Movement of Pile Heads

4.3.5.1 Maintained Load Test
In a maintained load test measure the movement of the pile head by one of the methods
in Clauses 4.3.5.3 to 4.3.5.5 using methods appropriate to vertical piles or raking piles,
as required.
4.3.5.2 Constant Rate of Penetration (CRP) or Constant Rate of Uplift (CRU) Test
In a CRP or CRU test, use the method in Clause 4.3.5.4 or 4.3.5.5 below.
4.3.5.3 Levelling Method
An optical or any other levelling method by reference to an external datum may be used.
Where a level and a staff are used, choose the level and scale of the staff to enable
readings to be made to within an accuracy of 0.5 mm. A scale attached to the pile or
pile cap may be used instead of a levelling staff. Establish at least two datum points on
permanent objects or other well-founded structures or install deep datum points. Site
each datum point so that only one setting up of the level is needed.
Ensure that Datum points are not affected by the test loading or other operations on the
Site.
4.3.5.4 Independent Reference Frame
An independent reference frame may be set up to permit measurement of the
movement of the pile. The supports for the frame is to be founded in such a manner and
at such a distance from the test pile, kentledge support cribs, reaction piles, anchorages
and rafts that movements of the ground in vicinity of the equipment do not cause
movement of the reference frame during the test which will affect the required accuracy
of the test.
Check observations of any movement of the reference frame and check the movement
of the pile head relative to an external datum during the progress of the test. In no case
the supports are not to be less than three test pile diameters or 2 m, whichever is the
greater, from the centre of the test pile.
Measure the pile movement by at least two dial gauges rigidly mounted on the reference
frame that bear on surfaces normal to the pile axis, fixed to the pile cap or head.
Alternatively, fix the gauges to the pile and bear on surfaces on the reference frame.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Place the dial gauges in diametrically opposed positions and equidistant from the pile
axis. The dial gauges are to enable readings to be made up to within an accuracy of 0.1
mm. Use a scale ruler and levelling device to provide an independent measurement of
the pile head movement.
Protect the reference frame from the weather.
4.3.5.5 Other Methods
Details of any other method for measuring the movement of pile heads may be
submitted for acceptance.
4.3.5.6 Calibration of Dial Gauges
Calibrate the dial gauge used for the measurement of load by a SINGLAS accredited
laboratory to the accuracy as required.
4.3.6 Continuous Testing

Once commenced, carry out any test to completion without stoppage unless otherwise
agreed by the SO.
4.3.7 Completion of a Load Test

4.3.7.1 Measuring Equipment
On completion of a test dismantle and check all equipment and measuring devices and
either store so that they are available for use in further tests or remove from the site.
4.3.7.2 Kentledge
Remove Kentledge and its supporting structure from the test pile and store so that they
are available for use in further tests or remove from the site.
4.3.7.3 Ground Anchors and Temporary Piles
On completion of a preliminary test, cut off temporary piles 2 m below ground level, and
make good the ground with accepted material.
Remove all ground anchors unless otherwise directed.
4.3.7.4 Preliminary Test Pile Cap
Break off the pile cap, if formed in concrete, dispose the resulting material off the site. If
the pile cap is made of steel, cut it off and store so that it is available for use in further
tests, or remove from the site.
Break down preliminary test piles to 2 m below original ground level or as required and
backfill to the original ground level with suitable material.
4.3.7.5 Working Load Test Pile Cap
On completion of a working load test, strip the test pile cap if in concrete unless
otherwise agreed. Leave the pile in a state ready for incorporation in the permanent
works and dispose the resulting material off the site.
If the pile cap is made of steel, cut it off and store so that it is available for use in further
tests, or remove from the site as directed.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.4 Load Test: Static Load Test Procedures
4.4.1 Ultimate Load Test by Maintained Load

Unless otherwise specified the maximum load which is to be applied in an ultimate load
test is three times the specified working load. This test is only applicable to preliminary
piles. The loading and unloading is to be carried out in stages as shown in the table
below.
Ultimate Load Test Cycles
Load, Percentage of Minimum Time of Holding Load Cycle
Working Load (Minutes) Number
0 - 1
25 60
50 60
75 60
100 24hrs
70 60
35 60
0 60
0 - 2
50 60
100 60
125 60
150 60
175 60
200 24hrs
150 60
100 60
50 60
0 60
0 - 3
50 60
100 60
150 60
200 60
225 60
250 60
275 60
300 24 hrs
200 60
100 60
0 60
Following each application of load, hold the load for not less than the period shown or
until the rate of settlement is less than 0.1 mm/hr and slowing down. Calculate the rate
of settlement from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values of settlement
versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the points.
Proceed unloading for each stage after the expiry of the period shown in the table.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
For any period when the load is constant, record time and settlement immediately on
reaching the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for the 1st hr, at 30 min intervals
between the 1st and 4th hr and at 1 hr intervals between the 4th and 12th hr after the
application of the increment of the load.
Continue testing until the maximum test load has been reached or when the settlement
exceeds 10% of the pile diameter.
4.4.2 Working Load Test by Maintained Load

Unless otherwise specified the maximum load to be applied in a working load test on a
working pile is two times the specified working load. Carry out the loading and unloading
in stages as shown in the table below.
Working Load Test Cycles
Load, Percentage of Minimum Time of Holding Load Cycle
Working Load (Minutes) Number
0 - 1
25 60
50 60
75 60
100 24hrs
70 60
35 60
0 60
0 - 2
50 60
100 60
125 60
150 60
175 60
200 24 hrs
150 60
100 60
50 60
0 60
Following each application of an increment of load, hold the load for not less than the
period shown or until the rate of settlement is less than 0.1 mm/hr and slowing down.
Calculate the rate of settlement from the slope of the curve obtained by plotting values
of settlement versus time and drawing a smooth curve through the points.
Proceed unloading for each stage after the expiry of the period shown in the table.
For any period when the load is constant, record time and settlement immediately on
reaching the load and at approximately 15 min intervals for the 1st hr, at 30 min intervals
between the 1st and 4th hr and at 1 hr intervals between the 4th and 12th hr after the
application of the increment of the load.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.4.3 Constant Rate of Penetration (CRP) or Constant Rate of Uplift (CRU)

Test
The rate of loading is to be such that a CRP/CRU is maintained throughout the test as
far as practicable. Propose the rate of movement of each pile to be tested for SO’s
acceptance prior to the start of the test.
Take readings of load, penetration or uplift and time simultaneously at regular intervals;
choose the intervals such that a curve of load versus penetration or uplift can be plotted
without ambiguity.
Continue loading until one of the following results is obtained.
a. the maximum specified test load is reached.
b. a constant or reducing load has been recorded for an interval of penetration or uplift
of 10 mm.
c. a total movement of the pile base equal to 10% of the base diameter, or any other
greater value of movement required has been reached.
Reduce the load in five approximately equal stages to zero load; record penetration or
uplift and load at each stage and at zero load.
4.4.4 Combined Working Load Test and Constant Rate of Uplift (CRU) or
Constant Rate of Penetration (CRP) Test
When required, carry out a Working Load Test by maintained loading prior to a CRU or
CRP Test.
4.4.5 Quick Load Test Method

The testing procedure is to be in accordance with ASTM D1143.
Apply the load in increment of 10% to 15% of the proposed design load with a constant
time interval between increments of 2.5 min unless otherwise agreed. Add load
increments until continuous jacking is required to maintain the test load or until the
specified capacity of the loading apparatus is reached, whichever occurs first, at which
time stop the jacking. After a 5-min or otherwise agreed interval, remove the full load
from the pile.
4.4.6 Abandoning of Tests

Abandon a static load test if any of the following occurs: -
a. The specified material and workmanship requirements for loading and testing are
not met for any reason.
b. If any test had to be discontinued due to:
i. faulty jack on the gauge,
ii. unstable support of the kentledge,
iii. cracking in or damage to the pile cap,
iv. incorrect or disturbed datum,
v. prejacking or preloading before commencement of test.
vi. Any other causes deemed to affect the validity of the test results.
Disregard the results of abandoned tests. In the event of an abandoned test, carry out
another test as directed by the SO.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.4.7 Failure of Static Load Test

A static pile load test is deemed to have failed if the load-deflection performance criteria
specified in the piling specification are not satisfied. Carry out remedial measures as
stipulated in the piling specifications.
4.5 Load Test: Osterberg Load Test
4.5.1 Preparation of Pile

For bored piles, prior to concreting, clean the toe of pile and install O-cell. Attach the O-
cell assembly, including O-cells, bearing plates, related hydraulically supply, tremmie
pipes and instrumentation to reinforcing steel cage and lower them into the bored hole.
Initially, position the bottom of the O-cell assembly about 600mm above the pile base.
Use concrete with retarder to fill sufficiently high (at least 2m) above the O-cell
assembly. Lower the pile re-bars cage and O-cell assembly slowly into the underlying
concrete. Carry out the concreting as per standard/approved procedure.
For driven piles, cast the O-cell assembly, including O-cells, bearing plates, related
hydraulically supply and instrumentation together with the pile. After the concrete have
gained sufficient strength, drive the pile into the ground as per standard/approved
driving procedure.
4.5.2 Maximum Test Loads

Unless otherwise agreed, the maximum test load in an Osterberg Cell Load is to be the
ultimate capacity of a pile in either end bearing or side shear, or the maximum stroke of
the O-cell.
4.5.3 Abandoning of Osterberg Load Tests

Abandon load test if any of the following occurs: -
a. The specified material and workmanship requirements for loading and testing are
not met for any reason.
b. If any test has to be discontinued due to:
i. faulty O-cells,
ii. cracking in or damage to the pile,
iii. incorrect or disturbed datum,
iv. prejacking or preloading before commencement of test.
v. Any other causes deemed to affect the validity of the test results.
Disregard the results of abandoned tests.
4.5.4 Failure of Osterberg Cell Load Test

An Osterberg Cell load test is deemed to have failed if the load-deflection performance
criteria specified in the piling specification are not satisfied. Carry out remedial measures
as stipulated in the piling specifications.
4.6 Load Test: Lateral Load Test
4.6.1 Lateral Load Test on Preliminary Piles

Design the reaction and testing system to apply a horizontal load on the preliminary pile.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Check that the horizontal lateral load on the pile head is parallel to a pair of strain
gauges already installed in the pile. Identify piles into which the inclinometer tube is
required and submit to the SO for acceptance not less than 72 hours before the pile is
concreted.
The testing procedures are to be the same as that for static load tests except that only
one load cycle is required with each load increment to be held for 1 hour (mm) until the
ultimate lateral load capacity or 300mm pile top deflection, whichever occurs first.
Monitor the strain gauges in the pile at every load step.
4.6.2 Lateral Load Tests on Working Piles

Undertake lateral load tests on an adjacent pair of bored cast insitu piles. Test by either
jacking the piles apart or pulling them together.
Apply the test load at or within 0.5 metres of the pile cap soffit level. The test load is to
be equal to the lateral working load of the pile. Measure pile deflections parallel to the
direction of the applied load such that the movement of each pile is measured in
absolute terms and not as a relative movement between piles. Check that dial gauges
and load cells used are accurate to 0.1mm and 10kN for deflection and load
measurements respectively.
4.6.3 Recording Deflection

Record deflection for every 12.5% of the test load during both loading and unloading.
Where specified on the Drawings, record the rotation of the pile at the same increments.
Carry out loading sequence in 2 cycles. At the first cycle, test the pile to 75% of the test
load and then reduce to zero. At the second cycle, test to 100% of the test load and
then reduce to zero.
4.6.4 Increase of Load

For both loading cycles, increase the load only if the rate of movement is less than 0.2
mm in 20 minutes and subject to a minimum holding period of 20 minutes at the end of
each incremental increase. The minimum holding period may be reduced to 10 minutes
if the rate of movement is less than 0.1mm in 10 minutes for every load increment
previously applied on the first cycle during the second loading cycle. The minimum
holding period is 3 hours at the maximum load for both the first and second loading
cycle. The minimum holding period during unloading is 20 minutes at the end of each
incremental decrease for both load cycles.
4.6.5 Failure of Lateral Load Tests on Working Piles

A pile or pile group under lateral load test is deemed to have failed if the lateral
deflection or rotation at the pile cap soffit level exceeds the Serviceability Limit State
(SLS) criteria at the test load. Carry out remedial measures as stipulated in the piling
specifications.
4.7 Load Test: Dynamic Test

Carry out dynamic tests by companies accredited by SAC-SINGLAS only.
4.7.1 Preparation of Pile Heads

Prepare and level the pile head for fixing the testing instruments, such that consistent
results are obtained. Ensure that the pile head is free of debris and other deleterious
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
material. Remove any loose material from the pile head to expose sound concrete, and
ensure the head is horizontal over its complete cross-section.
4.7.2 Dynamic Load Testing Requirement

Piles may be tested during the entire driving process, at the end of driving or during
restrike. Carry out computer analysis of the field measurements to obtain the pile
resistance distribution and vertical load against displacement relationship.
Unless otherwise directed, conduct dynamic tests on all preliminary test piles which are
to be statically load tested, to provide the basis and calibration for other dynamic load
test results.
Provide a suitable hammer system able to mobilise the piles to a minimum of 2.5 times
the specified working load for driven piles, and a minimum of 1.5 times the specified
working load for bored piles. Check that the hammer system consists of an adequately
heavy hammer with a controlled drop to limit the driving stresses in the pile. In general,
the energy provided on to the pile during restrike tests is not to be less than that used to
drive the pile initially.
4.7.3 Failure Criteria for Working Piles

Piles which are dynamically tested are deemed to have failed if the measured resistance
of the pile is less than 2.0 times the specified working load or if any part of the test piles
is damaged during driving or testing. Carry out remedial measures as stipulated in the
piling specifications.
4.7.4 Damage Caused

Be responsible for any damage caused to the pile or dynamic test equipment, including
transducers and cables, due to handling of the pile, objects falling from the pile frame or
the pile hammer.
4.8 Integrity Tests: Proof Coring

Check the quality of concrete in bored piles by vertical coring to at least 0.5 metre below
the pile toe using a diamond coring barrel at an agreed location of the pile. Ensure that
the core so produced is not affected by drilling disturbance and reflect the condition of
concrete in the pile. The core is not to be less than 100 mm in diameter and is placed in
suitable core boxes in the order of core recovery.
Complete coring work before the concrete in the pile has reached an age of 28 days to
allow the cores to be tested at 28 days. Arrange for transport to the testing laboratory.
Deliver the remainder of cores to a core store.
On completion of proof coring, grout the core cavity within and below a pile. The grout is
to be of the same grade as the pile concrete, of a non-shrinkage type. Submit details of
the proposed grouting method and mixes for acceptance 14 days prior to undertaking
any such operation.
4.8.1 Acceptance of Proof Coring

Check the quality of cores produced against criteria as set out below. Piles, from which
cores do not satisfy the given requirements, may be rejected at the discretion of the SO.
4.8.1.1 In Concrete
For this purpose, concrete is considered as being rock. Requirements for cores are as
follows:
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
a. Visually free from defects, such as contaminants and honeycombing.

b. 100% Total Core Recovery (TCR)
c. 100% of Rock Quality Designation (RQD)
4.8.1.2 In Soil/Rock
Requirements for cores are:
a. 100% Total Core Recovery.
4.9 Integrity Test: Non Destructive Tests (NDT)
4.9.1 Sonic Logging Tests

4.9.1.1 Sonic Logging Tubes
Provide sonic logging tubes cast into piles selected for sonic logging tests.
The tubes are to be manufactured from steel and extend 0.2 m to 0.5 m above the pile
head and 0.2 to 0.5 m above the pile toe. The tubes are to have an internal diameter not
exceeding 50 mm, except for one tube in each pile, which is to be of internal diameter
100 mm in order to allow for coring of the concrete at the base of the pile.
Provide three tubes for piles up to 800 mm in diameter and four tubes for piles above
800 mm in diameter.
4.9.1.2 Coring
a. At least 7 days after the pile has been cast, but before carrying out any sonic logging
test, take a core of concrete and soil or rock from the founding material.
b. Take the core from the base of the 100 mm diameter sonic logging tube using a
triple tube core barrel. The core is to have a minimum diameter of 50 mm.
c. Keep the core in a suitable wooden box with depths clearly recorded on rigid
markers, and photograph it along with a scale and colour chart. Thereafter, deliver
these to a designated core store.
d. Scan the pile toe for its integrity by measuring the propagation time of transmitted
waves between the vertical tubes and the pile toe/ founding strata.
4.9.1.3 Sonic Logging Test Procedure

Carry out the following operations in sequence:
a. Fill the tubes with water.
b. Insert the probes into an adjacent pair of tubes and mount the drum over the pile.
c. Lower the probes to the bottom of the pile. Adjust their depths such that the delay
time is minimised, i.e. they are at the same level.
d. Slowly raise the probes so that successive traces of the time between signal
emission and receipt are displayed on the screen of the oscilloscope. Each time the
screen is filled, take a "Polaroid" photograph in order to provide a permanent record.
e. Repeat the process for each pair of tubes, i.e. three runs for a pile with three tubes
and six runs for a pile with four tubes.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
f. Lower one probe to the base of a 50 mm diameter tube while lower the other to the
same depth in the 100 mm diameter tube. While the former probe is held in position,
lower the latter probe into the cored hole to its lower limit. Obtain a record of the
received signal delay time as a function of the depth of the second probe. Repeat
this process with the first probe in all available tubes.
4.9.2 Low Strain Impact Tests

4.9.2.1 Preparation of Pile Heads
Refer to the requirements of Clause 4.7.1.
4.9.2.2 Procedures for vibration testing
a. Connect the electrodynamics vibrator unit firmly to the centre of the pile.
b. Connect the velocity transducer to the head of the pile near to its circumference.
c. Drive the vibrator at constant force output through two cycles up to 500 Hz and 1000
Hz.
d. Process the signal from the velocity transducer to provide a measurement of the
mechanical admittance of the pile as a function of frequency or both frequency
ranges. Obtain a permanent record of the mechanical admittance.
4.9.2.3 Procedures for Modified Shock Test

a. Connect a velocity transducer to the pile head.
b. Strike the head of the pile a sharp blow with a hammer of mass approximately 2 kg,
to which is attached a triggering device connected to the signal processing
equipment.
c. Process the signal from the velocity transducer to provide a permanent record of the
seismic response.
d. Transfer this response either in analogue or digital form as appropriate to a
microprocessor which is to perform a fast Fourier transform on the output signal
from which the relationship between mechanical admittance and frequency can be
determined.
4.9.2.4 Procedures for simple shock tests

a. Connect the velocity transducer to the pile head.
b. Strike the head of the pile in a sharp blow with the hammer.
c. Process the signal from the velocity transducer to provide a permanent record of the
seismic response.
4.9.3 Non-Destructive Testing - Anomalous Test Results

Any piles with anomalous results from typical non-destructive tests such as sonic
logging, vibration test and modified shock tests may be rejected at the discretion of the
SO, unless it can be demonstrated that the pile integrity is acceptable through proof
coring.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
4.10 Protection of Testing Equipment

4.10.1.1 Protection from Weather
Throughout the test period, protect all equipment for measuring load and movement
from the weather.
4.10.1.2 Prevention of Disturbance
Keep construction equipment and persons who are involved in the testing process at a
sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance to the measurement apparatus.
4.11 Noise and Disturbance

Carry out the work in such a manner as to minimise noise, vibration and other
disturbance.
Comply with all current regulations and environmental controls.
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.0 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS
5.1 General Submissions
5.1.1 Proposals
Submit the following proposals for SO’s acceptance prior to commencing any work:
a. Proposals to deal with noise and vibration.
b. The proposed testing sequence and programme including the anticipated time
required for installation of the preliminary test piles.
c. Details of the proposed temporary support and reaction system where needed.
Including design of Kentledge and other reaction piles. All design to be endorsed by
PE.
d. Details of any safety provision.
e. Details of the equipment to be used for the tests.
f. Details of the action that would be taken to stabilise an excavation during the
progress of a pile test.
g. CVs of personnel involved.
h. Method statement of loading arrangement and testing procedure.
i. Method statement of the Installation of instrumentations.
j. Method statement for dynamic load test.
k. Method statement for integrity tests.
5.1.2 Measures Against Fraud

Submit measures to prevent preloading of the test pile and tempering of testing
equipment and gauges for SO’s acceptance.
5.1.3 Certificates and Calibration Records

Submit all testing equipment calibration records and certificates for acceptance prior to
conducting any test:
a. Calibration certificates for measuring devices e.g. pressure gage, load cells and dial
gauges, strain gage and accelerometer and etc.
b. Calibration certificates for O-cell(s), Vibration Displacement Transducer(s), Hydraulic
Pressure Transducer(s) (for Osterberg Cell assembly).
5.1.4 Testing Programme

Inform the SO of testing for the following day and give adequate notice of any intention
to work outside normal hours and at weekends.

27
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.2 Preliminary Test Piles
5.2.1 Records
Submit the following documents for SO’s review at least 7 days prior to the
commencement of any preliminary pile testing.
a. Boring and concreting records of the preliminary pile
b. Results of concrete cube tests of preliminary pile
c. Details of the steel reinforcement cage, including depth and length of the
reinforcement laps
5.2.2 Boring/Driving Record

For each preliminary pile, make a detailed record of the soils encountered during boring,
or of the progress during driving at every 0.5m penetration and submit to the SO daily.
5.2.3 Concrete Test Cubes

Make three test cubes from the concrete used in each of the preliminary test piles. If a
concrete cap is cast separately from the preliminary pile, make a further three cubes
from this concrete. Make the cubes and test in accordance with SS78.
Do not start the pile test until the sample cubes have acquired strength such that the
applied direct stress is less than 0.5 times the cube strength. This requirement applies
to both the pile and pile cap
5.3 Results of Static Gravity and Lateral Load Tests
5.3.1 Initial Results

Submit results as a summary to the SO within 24 hours of the completion of the test
unless otherwise directed, include the following information:
a. for a working load test by maintained load for each stage of loading, the period for
which the load was held, the load and the maximum settlement or uplift recorded.
b. for CRU test, the maximum load reached and a graph of load against penetration or
load against uplift.
5.3.2 Schedule of Recorded Data

Submit the completed schedule of recorded data within seven days of completion of the
test. Provide information about the loading test as follows where applicable.
5.3.2.1 General
a. Site location
b. Contract and client identification
c. Proposed structure on which the pile supports
d. Main Contractor and Piling Contractor
e. Supervisors
f. Date of test
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
5.3.2.2 Pile Details

a. All types of pile
Identification (number and location)
Position relative to adjacent piles
Relative position within the site
Brief description of location (e.g. in cofferdam, in cutting, over water)
Ground level at pile position
Head level at which test load is applied
Type of pile (e.g. precast reinforced concrete, steel H, bored in place, driven in place,
composite type)
Vertical or raking, compression or tension
Shape and size of cross-section of pile, position of change in cross-section.
Shoe or base details
Head details
Length in ground
Level of toe
Any permanent casing or core
b. Concrete Piles
Concrete mix
Aggregate type and source
Cement type
Slump
Cube test results for pile and cap
Date of casting
Reinforcement
c. Steel Piles
Steel quality
Coating
Filling
5.3.2.3 Installation Details
a. All Piles
Dates and times of boring, driving and concreting of test pile and adjacent piles.
Unexpected circumstances and difficulties
Date and time of casting concrete pile cap
Start and finish of each operation during driving or installation of a pile and subsequent
testing
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
Difficulties in handling, pitching and driving piles

Delays due to sea and weather conditions
b. Bored Piles
Type of equipment used and method of boring
Temporary casing, method of installation and extraction.
Strata encountered during boring
Water encountered during boring
Method of placing concrete and conditions pertaining
Volume of concrete placed
Concrete level before and after extraction of casing
c. Driven Preformed Piles and Driven Cast In-Situ Piles
Method of support of Pile and hammer (frame, hanging leaders, suspended hammer or
other method)
Driven length of pile or temporary casing at final set
Hammer type, size and weight
Dolly and packing, type and condition before and after driving
Driving log (depth, blows per 250 mm, interruptions or breaks in driving)
Final set in number of blows to produce penetration of 25 mm
Redrive check, time interval and set in number of blows to produce penetration of 25
mm
At final set and at redrive set, for drop or single acting hammer, the length of the drop or
stroke; for diesel hammer, the length of the stroke and the blows per minute; for double-
acting hammer, the number of blows per minute
Condition of pile head or temporary casing after driving
Use of a follower
Use of preboring
Use of jetting
Lengthening
Details of temporary casing
Concrete level before and after extraction of casing
Method of placing concrete and conditions pertaining.
5.3.2.4 Test Procedure
a. Weight of kentledge
b. Tension pile, ground anchor or compression pile details
c. Plan of test arrangements showing position and distances of kentledge supports,
rafts, tension or compression piles and reference frame to test pile.
d. Jack capacity
e. Method of load measurement
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
f. Method(s) of penetration or uplift measurement

g. Working load test by Maintained Loading and CRU/CRP
h. Relevant dates and times
5.3.2.5 Test Results

a. In tabular form
b. In graphical form: load plotted against settlement (uplift), load and settlement
(uplift) plotted against time
c. Ground heave
5.3.2.6 Site Investigation (if any)

a. Site investigation report number
b. Borehole reference
5.3.3 Presentation of Graphical Results

Adopt scales for plotting load/settlement (uplift) curves such that a settlement of 10 mm
is equivalent to a load of 100 tonnes. Use the same scales for the load and settlement
(uplift) against time curves.
5.3.4 Results of Instrumented Piles

Engage a specialist to prepare interpretation of geotechnical bearing capacities, skin
friction and end bearing resistance of the test pile from the instrumentation. Engage a
PE (civil) to interpret the results of instrumented test pile.
The interpretation of test results is to contain at least the following plots:
a. Load-settlement plot;
b. Load transfer curves;
c. Unit skin friction versus applied load; unit end-bearing versus applied load including
assumptions made in the analysis including the value of Young’s Modulus of
concrete adopted in the computation of load and estimation of the ultimate load
capacity of the pile.
Submit as-built details of the steel reinforcement cage, including depth and length of the
reinforcement laps after installation of the instrumented pile.
5.4 Results of Dynamic Load Tests

Engage a PE (civil) to analyse the results of the Dynamic Load Tests.
Submit the complete field results and graphs immediately, and computer analysis
results 3 days after the test.
Submit the detailed report, including the interpretation, analysis and correlation with
static load test results, within 7 days after testing.
Submit the results in format as agreed with the SO.
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing

Results are to include:
a. Print-out of the raw data of PDA
b. Maximum force applied to pile head
c. Maximum pile head velocity
d. Maximum energy imparted to the pile
e. Estimated maximum resistance of the pile from PDA testing
5.4.2 Full Report

The full report is to include following information for all pile tested:
a. date of pile installation
b. date of test
c. pile identification number and location
d. length of pile below commencing surface
e. total pile length, including projection above commencing surface at time of test
f. length of pile from instrumentation to toe
g. hammer type and drop
h. blow selected for analysis
i. test load achieved
j. temporary compression
k. permanent set per blow
l. maximum force at pile head
m. maximum velocity at pile head
n. maximum downward energy imparted to the pile
o. dynamic soil resistance mobilised during the blow
p. mobilised static soil resistance and indicate clearly assumed soil damping parameter
q. magnitude and location of possible pile damage
5.4.3 CAPWAP Analysis

For all piles tested, carry out CAPWAP analysis to provide the following information:
a. pile head movement at equivalent Specified Woking Load
b. pile head movement at equivalent 2.0 times of Specified Working Load
c. pile head movement at maximum applied test load
d. permanent residual movement of pile head after each blow
e. magnitude and distribution of mobilised static soil resistance
f. magnitude and distribution of soil stiffness and damping
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
g. deduced static load deflection behaviour of the pile at the head and toe
h. assumptions made in the analysis
i. limitations of the method
5.5 Results of Osterberg Cell Load Tests

Engage a PE (civil) to analyse the results of the Osterberg Cell Load Tests.
Submit the complete field results and graphs immediately, and computer analysis
results 3 days after the test.
Submit the detailed report, including the interpretation, analysis and correlation with
static load test results, within 7 days after testing.
Submit the results in format as agreed with the SO.

Results are to include:
a. Maximum force applied to pile
b. Maximum movements above and below O-cell
c. Maximum movement measured by dial gauges at reference beam and LVDT’s
5.5.2 Full Report

The full report is to include:
a. Date of pile installation
b. Date of test
c. Pile identification number and location
d. Pile type and size
e. Length of pile below commencing surface
f. Total pile length, including projection above commencing surface at time of test
g. Length of pile from instrumentation to toe
h. O-cell type and size
i. Test load achieved
j. Osterberg Cell(s) Load-Movement Curves
k. Shear Creep Limit Curve for both End Bearing and Side Shear
l. Side Shear and End Bearing Data Used for Equivalent Top Load
m. Equivalent Top Load-Settlement Curve
n. Recorded loads during load test including compression calculations
o. Recorded movement during load test, including upward and downward movement
calculations.
p. Details of method to construct the Equivalent Top-Loaded Curve including
assumptions made, detail procedures, expected accuracy, and limitations
33
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
q. Soil data e.g. nearest borehole, soil boring log

r. As-built details of the O-cells assembly, instrumentations and steel reinforcement
cage including depth and length of the reinforcement laps
5.6 Results of Pile Integrity Tests

Engage a PE (civil) to interpret the results of pile integrity tests.
5.6.1 Photographic record for Sonic Logging Tests

The photographic records of the oscilloscope displays are to be analysed in detail.
Engage qualified personnel to analyse the results of Sonic Logging test.
5.6.2 Low Stain Impact Test Results

Examine the record of mechanical admittance as a function of frequency in detail.

Immediately after testing, provide a signed copy of all the raw test data of a pile to the
SO. Submit the results to the SO within 3 days after testing.
5.6.4 Report
Prepare and submit a report for each pile tested. The report is to contain the following
information:
a. contract number and name
b. pile location plan
c. pile reference number
d. pile size and depth
e. working load
f. date on which the pile was constructed
g. cube strengths of pile concrete
h. date on which the pile was tested
i. identification of supervisor
j. identification of analyser
k. the originals or clear copies of the photographic records
l. a record of the mechanical admittance of the pile
m. an interpretation of each record
n. a review of any anomalies in terms of influence of poor materials or workmanship
during pile construction.
5.6.4.1 Interpretation
Report the following information:
a. velocity of sound in concrete, appropriate to the strength of the pile
34
Version 1.0
NPQS
C4-30 Pile Testing
b. whether the above was assumed or measured

c. the equivalent cross-sectional area of the pile
d. the calculated pile length
e. the pile head stiffness
f. the condition of the pile toe
5.6.4.2 Defects
Report any deviation from the record to be expected from a pile constructed entirely of
sound concrete and without defect. In the report, indicate the nature, location and
severity of the defect and recommend further testing if necessary. Where directed,
evaluate the implication of the existence of the defect on the performance of the pile.
35
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards and Technical Reference 3
1.5 Definitions 8
2.1 Design Brief 9
2.2 Loading During Construction 9
3. MATERIALS 10
3.1 Steel Sections/Elements 10
3.2 Welding Consumables 11
3.3 Fasteners 11
3.4 Profiled Steel Decking 12
3.5 Protective Finishes 12
3.6 Grout 12
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General 14
4.2 Storage and Handling 14
4.3 Fabrication 14
4.4 Bolting 16
4.5 Welding 18
4.6 Permitted Deviations (PDs) of Fabrication 21
4.7 Erection 28
4.8 Permitted Deviations (PDs) in Erection 29

5.1 Submission 35
5.2 Procedural Trial and Trial Assemblies 37
5.3 Inspection 37
5.4 Non-Destructive Testing of Welds 37
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the fabrication and erection of normal
structural steelwork in buildings. It does not cover the use of stainless steel in special
structures.

1.3 Standards and Technical Reference
1.3.1 Standard
Singapore Standards
SS 470 Hot-finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural
steels
Part 1: Technical delivery requirements
Part 2: Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
SS 503 Cold formed welded steel structural hollow sections
Part 1 : Technical delivery requirements
Part 2 : Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
Other Standards
ANSI/AWS Structural welding code. Steel
D1.1-02
ASTM E165 Standard test method for liquid penetrant examination
ASTM E709 Standard guide for magnetic particle examination
ASTM E747 Controlling quality of radiographic testing using wire penetrameters
BS EN ISO 898- Mechanical properties of fasteners made of carbon steel and alloy steel.
1 Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS EN 10024 Hot rolled taper flange I sections. Tolerances on shape and dimensions
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery
conditions
BS EN 10029 Tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates
3mm thick or above
BS EN 10051 Specification for continuously hot-rolled uncoated plate, sheet and strip of
non-alloy and alloy steels. Tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10113 Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels
Part 1: General delivery conditions
Part 2: Delivery conditions for normalised/ normalised rolled steels
Part 3: Delivery conditions for thermomechanical rolled steels
BS EN 10137 Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength structural steel in the
quenched and tempered or precipitation hardened conditions
Part 1: General delivery conditions
Part 2: Delivery conditions for quenched and tempered steels
Part 3: Delivery condition for precipitation-hardened steels
BS EN 10155 Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance.
Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10163 Specification for delivery requirement for surface condition of hot rolled
steel plates, wide flats and sections
Part 1: General requirements
Part 2: Plates and wide flats
Part 3: Sections
BS EN 10210 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain structural
steels
Part 1: Technical delivery requirements
Part 2: Tolerances, dimensions and sectional properties
BS EN 10219 Cold formed welded structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine grain
steels
BS EN 10279 Hot rolled steel channels. Tolerances on shape, dimension and mass
BS EN 10034 Structural steel I and H section. Tolerance on shape and dimensions
BS EN 10055 Hot rolled steel equal flange tees with radiused root and toes. Dimensions
and tolerances on shape and dimensions.
BS EN 10056-1 Structural steel equal and unequal leg angles. Dimensions
BS EN 10056-2 Specification for structural steel equal and unequal leg angles. Tolerances
on shape and dimensions
BS 4-1 Structural steel sections. Specification for hot rolled sections
BS 2583 Podger spanners
BS 3692: ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts – specification
BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts – specification
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS 4395 High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for
structural engineering (metric series)
BS 4429 Specification for rigging screws and turnbuckles for general engineering
lifting purposes and pipe hanger applications
BS 4604 Use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steelwork (metric series)
BS 4921 Specification for sherardised coatings on iron and steel
BS 4933 ISO metric black cup and countersunk head bolts and screws with
hexagon nuts
BS 5531 Code of practice for safety in erecting structural frames
BS EN 1993 Design of steel structures
Part1
BS 7079 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related

products.
Part A1: Visual assessment of surface cleanliness
BS 7419 Specification for holding down bolts
BS 7644 Direct tension indicators.
Part 1: Specification for compressible washers
Part 2: Specification for nut face and bolt face washers
BS 7668 Weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections in
weather resistant steels
clauses.

When carrying out the works, take guidance from the following technical reference:
a. UK’s National Structural Steelwork Specification (NSSS), 4th Edition, 2002.
1.4 Trade Preambles

1.4.1.1 Connection Design
Develop the connection design when required as indicated in the PSD.
Development of the design of connections is required.
Engage a PE (civil) to develop the design of the connections based on the structural
design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Temporary Works
Engage a PE to plan, design and supervise any necessary temporary supports to
ensure the structural steelwork is stable throughout the construction, paying attention
to the safe erection of structural steelwork in accordance with BS 5531.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Engage qualified and experienced personnel to prepare coordinated shop drawings
for the fabrication and erection of the steelwork.
1.4.3.1 Steel Fabricators
Engage steel fabricators who are accredited under the Structural Steel Fabricators
Accreditation Scheme of the Singapore Structural Steel Society for the fabrication
works.
Refer to the PSD for the required grade of the fabricator.
The required grade of steel fabricator is S4 and above.
1.4.3.2 Supervisors
All structural steelwork and associated works are to be undertaken and supervised by
appropriately experienced personnel. Provide evidence of personnel’s past
experience and certificate to the SO for acceptance prior to commencement of the
Works.
1.4.3.3 Welder Qualification
Submit evidence of welders’ competence to the to undertake the specified work.
The welders are to be tested to meet the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 4
Part C. The welder’s test is to be conducted and certificates are to be issued by the
Independent Inspection and Testing Agency.

1.4.5 Accredited Laboratory

Engage a laboratory accepted by the SO and accredited under the Singapore
Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) to carry out tests and checks as
required by this Specification, including all on site weld tests where applicable.
1.4.6 Independent Inspection and Testing Agency (ITA)

Appoint an independent Inspection and Testing Agency (ITA) when required as
indicated in the PSD.
Appointment of an accredited inspection body is required.
When required, the scope of service of the ITA shall be as follows:

S/N Description Tick where
applicable
1. Review the quality manuals, inspection & test plans
2. Review fabrication and erection procedures
3. Review of welding procedure specification, procedure
qualification records, welder and welding operator qualification
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
records.
4. Pre-inspection meeting and audit of fabricator facilities/plants
5. Review of material test certificates/records, verify or inspect
materials and witness pre-treatment processes, if any
6. Witness cutting/edge joint preparations, verify joint geometry
and inspect fit-up condition
7. Verify that welding processes are carried out in accordance
with the approved welding procedures, codes/standards and
relevant documents
8. Perform visual inspection and verify dimensional records
9. Select weld joints for testing & witness non-destructive testing
and assess all results
10. Witness blasting & galvanising processes
11. Inspect painting and galvanising works
12. Identify & verify completed structural members and witness the
handling of these members onto lorry/truck for delivery to site
13. Inspect delivered structural members for damage due to
handling and transportation
14. Inspect the assembly of structural members at erection site
prior to welding
15. Verify all welding procedure and welder qualification records at
site
16. Witness procedure trial of stud welding process
17. Inspect all welds & bolt tightening
18. Select weld for testing and witness site NDT
19 Inspect all remaining site painting and witness repairing of all
protective treatment works
20. Witness fireproofing mock-up test as well as laboratory tests
21. Witness and inspect the application of fireproofing works
22. Final inspection of all structural members
23. Review all documents and records including but not limited to
the following:
- Dimensional
- Procedures
- Testing
Alternatively, the SO may engage the ITA separately.

In either of the above cases, make available to the ITA the following:
a. All requested documentation and a detailed programme to allow the ITA to
discharge its duties and to witness significant stages in the fabrication and
erection process.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. Any instruments or other equipment required checking the accuracy and quality
of the works.
1.5 Definitions
a. Design Drawings showing the dimensioned layout of the steel
Drawings structure with the size and material grades of all members,
the forces to be developed in their connections and any
cambers etc, from which shop drawings are made.
b. Shop Drawings showing all necessary information to fabricate the
Drawings structural steelwork, including the piece markings with the
location in the structure.
c. Reaming Forming, shaping, tapering, or enlarging a hole with a reamer.
d. Faying Surfaces which are tightly or closely fitted.
Surfaces
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Design Brief

When carrying out design as described in Clause 1.4.1, ensure the design conforms
to the requirements of SS EN 1993 or other design codes as indicated in the PSD.
Design the connections based on forces given in the design drawings.
2.2 Loading During Construction

Ensure that the steelwork is adequately braced or restrained to withstand all loadings
liable to be encountered during construction without inducing excessive stresses,
deflections or distortion in the structure.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Steel Sections/Elements
3.1.1 Material Qualities

Material qualities, dimensions and tolerances are to comply with the appropriate
standard as tabulated below:
MATERIAL, DIMENSION AND TOLERANCE STANDARDS
Material Qualities
Form Non-alloy Fine Q&T Weathering Dimensions Tolerances
steels grain steels steels
steels
Universal BS 4 -1 BS EN
Beams & 10034
Columns
Joists BS 4 -1 BS EN
10024
Channels BS 4 -1 BS EN
10279
Rolled (4) (4)
Asymmetric
Beams BS EN BS EN BS EN BS EN
Angles 10025 (1) 10113 10137-2 10155 BS EN 10056-1 BS EN
(2)
10056-2
Rolled Tees BS EN 10055 BS EN
10055
Split Tees BS 4 - 1 As UB & UC
Plates - BS EN
(Reversing Mill) 10029
Plates - BS EN
(Cut from Coil) 10051
Bars and Rods - -
Wide Flats(3) - -
Hollow Sections SS 470: Part 1 - BS 7668 SS 470: Part 2
(5)
(Hot-Finished) (BS EN 10210-1) (BS EN 10210-2)
Hollow Sections SS 503: Part 1 - - SS 503: Part 2
(5)
(Cold-Formed) (BS EN 10219-1) (BS EN 10219-2 (4))
Turnbuckles BS 4429
3.1.2 Mill Certificates

All steel elements are to have the manufacturer’s mill test certificates indicating
compliance with the specified codes.

3.1.3.1 General Condition
Steel for fabrication is not to be more heavily pitted or rusted than Grade C of BS
7079 Part A1.
3.1.3.2 Rectification of Surface Defects
For hot rolled plates and wide flats, if there are surface imperfections and defects as
classified in BS EN 10163-2 Clause 4 (Requirements) revealed during surface
preparation, rectify the surface in accordance to BS EN 10163-2 Clause 5 (Repair
Procedures).
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
For hot rolled sections, if there are surface imperfections and defects as classified in
BS EN 10163-3 Clause 4 (Requirements) revealed during surface preparation, rectify
the surface in accordance to BS EN 10163-3 Clause 5 (Repair Procedures).
For hot rolled hollow sections, rectify the surface imperfections and defects revealed
during surface preparation in accordance to BS EN 10210-1 Clause 6.8 (Surface
Condition).
3.2 Welding Consumables

Welding consumables for metal arc welding are to comply with ANSI/AWS D1.1
Clause 5.3 (Welding Consumables and Electrode Requirements).
Ensure compatibility between welding consumables and parent materials used for the
steelwork.
3.3 Fasteners
3.3.1 Ordinary Bolt Assemblies

Ordinary bolts (full and part threaded length) are to comply with BS 4190 for all
grades.
Ordinary nuts are to comply with BS 4190 (grade 4 for grade 4.6, 8 for 8.8 and 10 for
10.9).
For galvanised or sherardised bolts use class 10 nuts for 8.8 bolts and class 12 nuts
for 10.9 bolts.
Black steel washers are to comply with BS 4320 Section 2.
3.3.2 Countersunk Bolt Assemblies

3.3.2.1 Bolts
Comply with BS 4933 for grade 4.6 (cup headed bolts and 90° countersunk head
bolts).
Comply with BS 4933 (dimensions) and BS EN ISO 898-1 (material) for grade 8.8
bolts.
3.3.2.2 Nuts
Comply with BS 4190 (grade 4) for grade 4.6 bolts.
Comply with BS 3692 (grade 8) for grade 8.8 bolts.
3.3.2.3 Washers
Ordinary steel washers (normal diameter series) are to comply with BS 4320 Section
2.
3.3.3 High Strength Friction Grip Fasteners

Bolts, nuts and washers are to comply with:
a. BS 4395-1 for general grade bolts
b. BS 4395-2 for higher grade bolts
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3.4 Lock Nuts for Bolt Assemblies

Comply with BS 3692 or BS 4190 as appropriate.
3.3.5 Holding Down Assemblies

3.3.5.1 Bolts
Comply with BS 7419 for grades 4.6 and 8.8.
3.3.5.2 Nuts
Comply with BS 4190:
Grade 4 for grade 4.6 bolts.
Grade 8 for grade 8.8 bolts.
Class 10 for galvanised or sherardised grade 8.8 bolts.
3.3.5.3 Washers
Comply with BS 4320 Section 2 (normal diameter series) for bolts grades 4.6 and 8.8.
3.3.6 Shear Studs

Proprietary headed studs are to have the following properties:
a. Minimum yield strength of 350 N/mm2
b. Minimum ultimate tensile strength of 450 N/mm2
c. Elongation of 15% on a gauge length of 5.65√A, where A = area of test specimen
d. Diameter and nominal length as noted on the drawings
3.4 Profiled Steel Decking

Comply with BS 5950-4 Clause 3.1 unless otherwise agreed.
3.5 Protective Finishes
3.5.1 Galvanising Materials

Comply with BS EN ISO 1461.
3.5.2 Sherardised Coatings

Comply with BS 4921.
3.5.3 Metallic Blast Cleaning Abrasives

Comply with BS 7079-E2 for chilled iron grit.
Comply with BS 7079-RE3 for cast steel grit.
3.5.4 Surface Coatings

Refer to Section C5-20, clause 3.0 for all paints and other coatings.
3.6 Grout
Grout is to comply with BS 5950-2 Section 2.5.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
Grout around anchor bolts under base plates and between steel plates and concrete
surface is to have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 40 N/mm2.
Proprietary grouts are not to contain high alumina cement.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.1 Traceability
All steel elements are to be identified and traceable to the manufacturer’s
material/mill test certificates.
4.1.2 Marking
Mark all pieces so that they can be identified at all stages of fabrication.
Mark completed components in locations that will not be covered up by other material
after erection to avoid confusion.
Hard stamping may be used other than where specified in the PSD.
Keep areas of steelwork free of all markings where so required on the Drawings.
4.2 Storage and Handling

Prepare and comply with proper storage and handling procedures in approved
method statement to ensure achievement of the desired quality and to minimise
damage to the steelwork.
4.2.1 Holding Areas

Lay steel in separate holding areas and keep clean.
4.2.2 Storage
Adequately support steel clear of the ground. Keep clean and do not allow water to
accumulate on components. Protect steel against corrosion.
Ensure individual piece markings are visible when members are stacked.
4.2.3 Handling
Plan and carry out bundling, packing, handling and transport in a manner designed to
prevent permanent distortion to the steelwork and minimise damage to any protective
coating.
4.2.4 Storage and Drying of Welding Consumables

Store and protect welding consumables that have been removed from the original
package so that the welding properties are not affected.
Carry out drying or re-baking, where necessary, in accordance with the
4.3 Fabrication
Prepare and comply with proper fabrication procedures to SO’s acceptance, to
ensure achievement of the desired quality.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.1 Cutting
Comply with BS 5950-2 Clause 3.3 (Cutting).
Cut and shape steel by sawing, shearing, cropping, nibbling, plasma or laser cutting
and thermal or flame cutting.
Thermal cutting are not permitted.
4.3.1.1 Hand Flame Cutting
Use only where it is impractical to use machine flame cutting.
4.3.1.2 Flame Cut Edges
Flame-cut edges that are free from significant irregularities require no further
treatment other than dressing as specified in 4.3.3(Dressing).
4.3.2 Holing
Comply with BS 5950-2 Clause 3.4 (Holing).
4.3.2.1 Forming
Drill, punch, plasma or laser cut and thermal or flame cut round holes for fasteners.
Thermal holing or full size hole punching are not permitted at the areas indicated in
the PSD.
Thermal holing are not permitted:
4.3.2.2 Matching
Ensure all matching holes are formed such that fasteners can be inserted freely
through the assembled members at right angles to the contact faces.
Drifting to align holes may be used provided it neither enlarges nor distorts the holes.
4.3.2.3 Drilling through Multiple Thickness
Tightly clamp the separate parts before drilling and remove any burrs after separating
the parts.
4.3.2.4 Punching Full Size
Punching of full size holes is permitted when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. The tolerance on distortion of the punched hole does not exceed that specified;
b. The holes are free of burrs which would prevent solid seating of the parts when
tightened;
c. The thickness of the material is not greater than 30mm, nor greater than the
diameter of the hole being punched;
d. In spliced connections when the holes in mating surfaces are punched in the
same direction and the splice plates marked to show the assembly faces, if
packed separately.
4.3.2.5 Punching and Reaming

When the conditions in 4.3.2.4 is not satisfied, punching is still permitted provided that
the holes are punched at least 2mm less in diameter than the required size and the
holes are then reamed to the full diameter after assembly.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.3 Dressing
4.3.3.1 Removal of Burrs
Dress cut edges or holes to remove dross, burrs, irregularities and protruding edges.
If holes are drilled through components that are clamped together not intended to be
separated after drilling, removal of burrs is not required.
4.3.3.2 Dressing of Sharp Edges
Dress all sharp edges.
A 90° rolled, sheared or machined cut edge requires no further treatment.
4.3.4 Curving and Straightening

Curve or straighten components during fabrication using mechanical means or the
local application of heat.
4.3.4.1 Heating
Control the temperature carefully and do not let the temperature exceed 650°C.
4.3.4.2 Inspection
After the process is complete, visually inspect all welds within the area of curving or
straightening. Carry out non-destructive testing of welds, where directed.
4.4 Bolting
4.4.1 Hole Sizes for Bolting

4.4.1.1 Ordinary and HSFG Bolts
a. For bolts  24mm diameter, hole sizes are to be bolt diameter +2mm.
b. For bolts  24mm diameter, hole sizes are to be bolt diameter +3mm.
4.4.1.2 Holding Down Bolts

Hole sizes are to be bolt diameter +6mm with sufficient clearance to ensure the bolt
can be accommodated through the base plate when adjusted.
4.4.1.3 Fitted Bolts
Clearance of bolt in hole is not to exceed 0.3mm.
4.4.2 Ordinary Bolted Assemblies

4.4.2.1 Make-up of Bolt Assemblies
Refer to Clause 3.3.1(Ordinary Bolt Assemblies) for strength grade combination of
bolt/nuts/washers.
4.4.2.2 Condition of Bolts
Bolt assemblies are to be in such condition immediately before installation that the
nut turns freely on the bolt.
4.4.2.3 Differing Grades of Bolts
Unless otherwise agreed by the SO, do not use different bolt grades of the same
diameter in the same structure.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4.2.4 Bolt Length

The length of bolt is to be such that at least one clear thread shows above the nut
after tightening, and at least one thread plus the thread run out is clear between the
nut and the unthreaded shank of the bolt.
4.4.2.5 Washers
Use at least one washer placed under the nut or bolt head being rotated in each bolt
assembly where the rotation might damage the surface protective treatment on the
members being connected. Use a plate or heavy duty washer under the head and nut
where the members being connected have oversize or slotted holes.
4.4.2.6 Taper Washers
Place under bolt heads and nuts bearing on surfaces sloping 3° or more from a plane
at right angles to the bolt axis.
4.4.2.7 Galvanised Nuts
Check after galvanizing to ensure free running on the bolt. Re-tap nuts, if necessary,
to ensure satisfactory tightening.
4.4.2.8 Tightening
Use power tools or by hand using appropriate spanners to BS 2583.
4.4.2.9 Locking of Nuts
Secure nuts used in connections subject to vibration or reversal of stresses to prevent
loosening. If not specified on the drawings, include the proposed method in the
erection details.
4.4.2.10 Fit-up Using Ordinary Bolt Assemblies
Draw connected parts firmly together. If there is a remaining gap more than 2mm,
which may affect the integrity of the joint, take the joint apart and insert a pack of the
same steel material.
4.4.2.11 Reaming
Reaming may be used where the connection design allows the use of larger diameter
holes and bolts in cases where drifting would distort the steelwork.
4.4.3 High Strength Friction Grip Fasteners

4.4.3.1 Make-up of Bolt Assemblies
Refer to Clause 3.3.3(High Strength Friction Grip Fasteners) for strength grade
combination of bolt/nuts/washers.
Place the hardened washer under the nut or head being turned.
4.4.3.2 Tightening
Use high strength friction grip bolts in compliance with BS 4604-1 or 2.
Use the torque control method, the part-turn method or direct tension indicators in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for tightening in compliance
with BS 4604-1.
4.4.3.3 Calibration of Torque Equipment
Calibrate torque devices at least once each shift.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
Recalibrate where necessary in accordance with BS 4604.

4.4.3.4 Discarded Bolt Assemblies
If after tightening, a bolt or nut is slackened off for any reason, discard the complete
bolt assembly and do not re-use in the Works.
4.4.3.5 Fit-up Using High Strength Friction Grip Fasteners
Draw connected parts firmly together with all bolts partially tightened. If there is a
remaining gap, take the joint apart and insert a pack of the same steel material before
continuing tightening.
4.4.3.6 Reaming
Reaming may be used where the connection design allows the use of larger bolts in
cases where drifting would distort the steelwork.
Demonstrate by calculation that the connection is adequate for the specified forces.
4.4.3.7 Faying Surfaces for HSFG Fasteners
Remove all mill-scale from the faying surfaces of friction grip joints.
Ensure the faying surfaces of friction grip joints are free of distortion, deformities or
contaminants, which may reduce the slip factor below the design value.
4.4.4 Slotted Holes Bolts

Where slotted holes are provided for movement connections ensure the joint is free to
move.
4.4.5 Holes in Hollow Sections

Seal bolt holes and vent holes in hollow sections to prevent the ingress of moisture.
If not specified on the design drawings, show the proposed method on the shop
drawings.
4.5 Welding
4.5.1 Welding Processes

Processes for Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), submerged arc welding (SAW),
gas metal arc welding (GMAW) except GMAW-S, short circuiting transfer and flux
cored arc welding (FCAW) which conform to all of the requirements of ANSI/AWS
D1.1 Section 3 are deemed as pre-qualified and accepted for use without performing
the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) Qualification Tests.
Gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), electro-slag welding (ESW) or electro-gas welding
(EGW) and gas metal arc welding - short circuiting transfer (GMAW-S) are to conform
to all of the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 4.
4.5.2 Welding Supervisor

Carry out welding under the direction of a welding supervisor with appropriate
qualifications.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.3 Welding Procedures Specifications

4.5.3.1 Preparation
Prepare Written Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) in accordance with
ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 4 Part B for acceptance by the Independent Inspection and
Testing Agency.
4.5.3.2 Procedure Tests
All procedure tests conducted are to be witnessed by the Independent Inspection and
Testing Agency.
4.5.3.3 Availability of Welding Procedure Specifications
Make WPS available to the welder, the SO and the Independent Inspection and
Testing Agency prior to the commencement of the works.
4.5.3.4 Inspection and test plans
Submit all inspection and test plans for SO’s acceptance prior to carrying out welding
works.
4.5.4 Assembly
4.5.4.1 Fit-up
Fit up joints to the dimensional accuracy in accordance with the following:
a. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Clause 3.9 (Fillet Weld Requirement) for Fillet Welding
b. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Clause 3.11 (Common Requirements of Partial and Complete
Joint Penetration Groove Welds) and Clause 3.12 (Partial Joint Penetration
Requirements) for Partial Penetration Butt Welding.
c. ANSI/AWS D1.1 Clause 3.11 (Common Requirements of Partial and Complete
Joint Penetration Groove Welds and Clause 3.13 (Complete Joint Penetration
Requirements) for Partial Penetration Butt Welding.
4.5.4.2 Temporary Welds and Tack Welds

Temporary welds are subject to the same welding procedure requirements as the
final welds. Remove the temporary welds unless otherwise agreed by the SO. Make
flush the surface with the original surface after the removal.
Tack welds are subject to the same quality requirements as the final welds, with the
following exceptions:
a. Preheat is not mandatory for single-pass tack welds which are re-melted and
incorporated into continuous submerged arc welds.
b. Discontinuities, such as undercut, unfilled craters and porosity need not be
removed before the final submerged arc welding.
c. Tack welds, which are incorporated into the final weld, are to be made with
electrodes meeting the requirements of the final welds and are to be cleaned
thoroughly. Multiple-pass tack welds are to have cascaded ends.
Remove tack welds, which are not incorporated into the final weld, unless otherwise
agreed by the SO.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.4.3 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage

Procedure and sequence of welding is to be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1
Clause 5.21 to minimise distortion and shrinkage.
4.5.4.4 Temporary Attachments
Welding of temporary attachments required for fabrication or erection is to be carried
out in accordance with the requirements for permanent welds.
Remove after use where required by flame cutting or gouging at a point not less than
3mm from the surface of the parent metal.
Grind flush and inspect the area visually.
Where the parent metal is more than 20mm thick, check by magnetic particle testing
method inspection using the acceptance criteria stipulated in Clause 5.4 (Non-
Destructive Testing of Welds).
Do not remove temporary attachments by hammering.
4.5.5 Shear Stud Welding

4.5.5.1 Method
Fix shear studs in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for
materials, procedures and equipment.
4.5.5.2 Welding Procedure Trial
Where required, carry out welding procedure trial of studs to demonstrate the
suitability of the proposed welding system and equipment before commencement of
the work.
The trial is to use the materials and procedures proposed for the works. Test a
minimum of ten studs in the trial.
During the work, at the commencement of each shift, each welder is to undertake a
minimum of two trial welds.
4.5.5.3 Visual Inspection
Visually inspect all studs. They are to exhibit full 360 degree ‘flash’ with no evidence
of undercut into the stud base.
4.5.5.4 Bend Test
Subject studs to bend tests at locations agreed with the SO.
Test at least 5% of studs and not less than two per beam.
Bend the head of the stud by striking the head of the stud to an angle of
approximately 30° from their original axis with a hammer. Under this test the weld is
to show no visible signs of cracking or lack of fusion.
Do not straighten any studs so tested.
4.5.5.5 Defective Studs
Replace any studs with defective welding and re-test as above.
Where defective studs are removed check the surface as specified in 4.5.5.3 above.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.6 Removal of Slag

Remove slag by light hammering, wire brushing or other means that do not deform
the surface of the weld.
4.6 Permitted Deviations (PDs) of Fabrication
4.6.1 PDs in Rolled Components After Fabrication

4.6.1.1 Cross Section After Fabrication
In accordance with the appropriate standards given in clause 3.1.1(Material Qualities)
4.6.1.2 Squareness of Ends not Prepared for Bearing
PD = D/300, where D is the depth of the section.
D = D/300
Plan or Elevation of End
4.6.1.3 Squareness of Ends Prepared for Bearing

PD = D/1000, where D is the depth of the section and the deviation is measured
relative to the longitudinal axis of the member.
= D/1000
90°
D
Plan or Elevation
4.6.1.4 Straightness
PD of a member from a straight line drawn between adjacent points of subsequent
effective lateral restraint = 3mm or L/1000, whichever is greater, where L is the
distance between restraints.
= L/1000 or 3mm
whichever is the greater
4.6.1.5 Camber
PD from specified or proposed camber at mid-length = 6mm or L/1000, whichever is
greater, where L is the length of the member.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
Deviation
L
Deviation = L/1000 or 6mm
4.6.1.6 Length
PD after cutting, measured on the centre line of the section or on the corner of angles
= 2mm.
L±
= 2mm
4.6.2 PDs of Fabricated Components

4.6.2.1 Position of Fittings
PD from the intended position for fittings and components whose location is critical to
the force path = 3mm.
= 3mm
4.6.2.2 Position of Holes

PD from the intended position of hole or group of holes = 2mm.
= 2mm
4.6.2.3 Punched Holes

Distortion caused by a punched hole is not to exceed D/10 or 1mm, whichever is
greater, where D is the nominal hole diameter.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
= D/10 or 1mm
4.6.2.4 Sheared or Cropped Edges of Plates or Angles

Deviation from a 90° edge is not to exceed t/10 where t = plate thickness.
= t/10
4.6.2.5 Flatness
Gaps in joints that depend on contact bearing when assembled during fabrication are
not to exceed 0.75mm and are to be less than 0.25mm over 50% of the length of
contact of the section.
=0.75mm
4.6.3 PDs in Plate Girder Sections

4.6.3.1 Depth
PD measured on centre line = ± 4mm.
D±
= 4mm
4.6.3.2 Flange Width

For flange width B < 300mm, PD = ±3mm.
For flange width B 300mm, PD = ±5mm.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
Bw ±
B w or B n < 300
= 3mm
_ 300
B w or B n >
= 5mm
Bn ±
4.6.3.3 Squareness of Sections

For flange width B, PD on out of squareness = B/100 or 3mm, whichever is greater.
B Flange width
= B / 100 or 3mm
whichever is
the greater
4.6.3.4 Web Eccentricity

PD on intended position of web from one edge of flange = ± 5mm.
b
= 5mm
±
4.6.3.5 Flanges
For flange width B, PD on out of flatness = B/100 or 3mm, whichever is greater.
B Flange width
= B/100 or 3mm
4.6.3.6 Top Flange of Crane Girder

PD on out of flatness where rail seats = 1mm.
w = Rail width + 20mm

w w
= 1mm
4.6.3.7 Length
PD on length on centre line = ± 3mm.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
L±
= 3mm
4.6.3.8 Flange Straightness

PD on straightness of individual flanges = L/1000 or 3mm, whichever is greater,
where L is length.
= L/1000 or 3mm
4.6.3.9 Curve or Camber

PD on intended curve or camber at mid-length of curved portion = L/1000 or 6mm,
whichever is greater, where L is length and deviation is measured with web
horizontal.
Deviation
L
Deviation = L/1000 or 6mm
4.6.3.10 Web Distortion

PD on distortion on web depth (or gauge length) = d/150 or 3mm, whichever is
greater, where d is depth of web.
gauge length = web depth
= d/150 or 3mm
4.6.3.11 Cross Section at Bearings

PD on squareness of flanges to web = D/300 or 3mm, whichever is greater, where D
is depth of section.
= D/300 or 3mm
4.6.3.12 Web Stiffeners

PD on straightness of stiffener out of plane with web after welding = d/500 or 3mm,
whichever is greater, where d is depth of stiffener.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
= d/500 or 3mm
PD on straightness of stiffener in plane with web after welding = d/250 or 3mm,

whichever is greater, where d is depth of stiffener.
= d/250 or 3mm
4.6.4 PDs in Box Sections

4.6.4.1 Plate Widths
For Bf or Bw < 300mm, PD = ±3mm, where Bf , Bw are flange width and web depth
respectively.
For Bf or Bw  300mm, PD = ± 5mm.
B ±
f
B ±
w
B or B w < 300
f
= 3mm
_ 300
B or B w >
f
= 5mm
4.6.4.2 Squareness
PD on squareness measured at diaphragm positions = D/300, where D is section
depth.
= D/300
4.6.4.3 Plate Distortion

PD on distortion on width or gauge length = w/150 or 3mm, whichever is the greater,
where w is depth of web.
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
gauge length = width, w
= w/150 or 3mm
4.6.4.4 Web or Flange Straightness

PD on straightness of individual web or flanges = L/1000 or 3mm, whichever is the
greater, where L is full length.
= L / 1000 or 3mm
4.6.4.5 Web Stiffeners

PD on straightness in plane with plate after welding = d/500 or 3mm, whichever is the
greater, where d is depth of web.
= d / 500 or 3mm
PD on straightness out of plane to plate after welding = d/250 or 3mm, whichever is

the greater, where d is depth of web.
= d / 250 or 3mm
4.6.4.6 Length
PD on length measured on centre line = ± 3mm.
L±
= 3mm
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.6.4.7 Curve or Camber

PD on deviation from intended curve or camber at mid-length of curved portion when
measured with the un-cambered side horizontal = L/1000 or 6mm, whichever is the
greater, where L is length of the curved portion.
Deviation
Deviation = L / 1000 or 6mm

4.7 Erection
4.7.1 General
Prepare and comply with proper erection procedures to SO’s acceptance, to ensure
achievement of the desired quality and safety, paying attention to site conditions,
constraints and restrictions.
4.7.2 Erection Loads

Ensure that the structure is not overloaded by stacking of materials.
4.7.3 Temporary Supports

Any temporary supports used may be removed after the structure has been lined,
levelled and plumbed, provided sufficient components have been erected and
secured to ensure the overall structure remains stable under the worst anticipated
conditions of loading.
4.7.4 Alignment
Align each part of the structure as soon as practicable after erection. Do not make
permanent connections between members until the structure has been sufficiently
aligned, levelled, plumbed and temporarily connected so that members will not be
displaced during subsequent erection or alignment of the remainder of the structure.
4.7.5 Temperature Adjustment

Take due account of the effects of temperature on the structure and measuring
equipment when measurements are made for setting-out and erection, and for
dimensional checks carried out subsequently.
Adopt 30°C as the reference temperature unless otherwise agreed.
4.7.6 Site Welding

Carry out site welding only by agreement with the SO or as shown on the design
drawings.
Carry out all site welding in accordance with clause 4.5(Welding) above.
Do not carry out site welding in inclement weather unless adequate weather
protection is provided for welders and materials.
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7.7 Foundation Bolts

Hold foundation bolts firmly in position during all setting-in operations.
Protect bolts, threads and nuts against damage, corrosion and contamination at all
stages of construction.
Keep pockets formed around foundation bolts clean and free from all extraneous
matter.
Use templates to set in the holding-down bolts.
4.7.8 Packs and Wedges

Plumb and level columns using steel packs and wedges of adequate strength and
stiffness, and not larger than necessary for the purpose.
Where packings are to be left in position and subsequently grouted, place them such
that they are totally enclosed by the grout.
4.7.9 Grouting
Carry out grouting in accordance with BS 5950-2 Clause 6.3.
Do not carry out grouting under column base plates until a sufficient portion of the
structure has been aligned, levelled, plumbed and adequately braced.
Immediately before grouting, clean the space under the column base plates to be free
of all extraneous matter.
Prepare, mix and place proprietary grout in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4.7.10 Profiled Steel Decking

Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, including the provision of
edge trims, temporary supports, lapping, etc.
4.8 Permitted Deviations (PDs) in Erection

Erect steelwork within the PDs in the following clauses.
4.8.1 Receiving Structures and Connections

Ensure that structures by others to which the steelwork attaches is constructed within
the anticipated PDs before commencing steel erection.
Where components and fixings are cast in by others ensure that they are also within
the anticipated PDs before commencing steel erection.
Inspect for position and level in good time before the planned start of steelwork
erection.
In the event of any discrepancies found, notify the SO, propose and correct the
discrepancies.
4.8.2 PDs of Holding Down Bolts

4.8.2.1 Bolts or Bolt Groups with Allowance for Adjustment
a. Bolt level: +25/-5mm.
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. Minimum clearance: 25mm at top of concrete

c. Bolt centroid: ±10mm from specified position at top of concrete.
= ± 10 mm from specified position

at top of concrete
+ 25 mm
= - 5 mm bolt level
25 mm minimum
clearance at top
of concrete
4.8.2.2 Bolts or Bolt Groups with No Allowance for Adjustment

a. Bolt level: +45/-5mm.
b. Bolt centroid: ±3mm from specified position at top of concrete.
= ± 3 mm from specified position
at top of concrete
+ 45 mm
= - 5 mm bolt level
4.8.2.3 Bolts or Bolt Groups Cast into Walls (No Allowance for Adjustment)
a. End of bolt: +45/-5mm.
b. Bolt centroid: ±3mm position in plan and elevation.
+ 45 mm
= - 5 mm bolt level
= ± 3 mm
position in plan
and elevation
4.8.3 PD of Level of Base Plate

PD of level of column base plate = 5mm.
4.8.4 PDs of Erected Components

4.8.4.1 Position of Columns at Base
PD of section centreline from the specified position = 10mm.
= 10mm
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.8.4.2 Overall Plan Dimension

PD on length or width = 20mm for L  30m and [20 + 0.25 (L-30)] mm for L  30m,
where L is the specified overall dimension in metres.
4.8.4.3 Plumb of Single Storey Columns
PD of top relative to base = ± h/600 or 5mm, whichever is greater, on main axes,
excluding portal frame columns, where h is the storey height.
H H
= ± H/600 or 5 mm
whichever is greater
Max = ± 25mm
4.8.4.4 Plumb in Multi Storey Columns

PD in each storey of column = h/600 or 5mm, whichever is greater, where h is the
storey height.
PD of column at top storey relative to specified position at base plate = 50mm
maximum.
H
h = storey
height
h = ± h/600 or 5 mm
H = 50mm maximum
4.8.4.5 Alignment of Adjacent Perimeter Columns

PD of one column relative to the next on a line parallel to the grid line = 10mm when
measured at the base or splice level.
critical face of columns
= 10 mm
4.8.4.6 Gap Between Bearing Surfaces

PD = (D/1000 +1) mm where D is the dimension along the bearing surface.
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
= (D / 1000) + 1 mm
4.8.4.7 Level of Beams

a. PD of two or more beams meeting at a column = ± 5mm.
Specified
Level
= ± 10mm
b. PD on level of beam at its ends = 5mm.
= ± 5mm
c. PD on level of adjacent beams within a distance of 5m = ± 5mm.
= ± 5mm
d. PD from specified level of beam at supporting column = ± 10mm.

Floor
Level
h
Floor
Level
h<3m, = 5mm
h<3m, = h/600
e. PD of beam relative to adjacent beam above or below = 5mm for h < 3m and
h/600 for h  3m, where h = storey height in m.
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.8.4.8 Plumb of Crane Gantry Columns

PD = ± Hc/1000 or 5mm, whichever is greater to a maximum of ± 25mm.
H
c
= ± Hc /1000 or 5mm
Max = ± 25mm
4.8.4.9 Crane Gantries Gauge of Rail Tracks

PD from true gauge = ± 10mm.
G+H
= ± 10mm
4.8.4.10 Joints in Gantry Crane Rails

a. PD on rail surface across joint = 0.5mm.
= 0.5mm
b. PD on rail edge alignment across joint = 1mm.
= 1mm
4.8.4.11 Profile Steel Floor Decking

PD of dimension between deck edge trim and perimeter beam = ± 10mm for deck
span in either direction.
Actual beam
CL
x± Grid
line
Generic profile
deck may span
either direction
= ± 10mm
33
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.8.5 Deviations Exceeding PDs

Inform the SO as soon as possible if checks show that the deviation in position of the
steelwork as erected exceeds the PDs given above. Propose and carry out remedial
measures as required.
34
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission

When required in Clause 1.4.1, submit to the SO for acceptance calculations and
drawings for the connection details within time as directed by the SO prior to
5.1.2 Shop Drawings

Submit to the SO for acceptance complete and coordinated shop drawings within
time as directed by the SO prior to commencement of any works. Include all details of
the steel structures incorporating at least the following information:
a. Number of pieces of steel sections
b. Dimensions
c. Tolerances
d. Connection details
e. Bearing locations and details
f. All other fabrication and erection details

Provide a detailed method statement to the SO for acceptance within directed time
prior to commencement of any works. Include at least the following information:
a. A site plan showing the work layout area, position and type of cranes, access
routes, datum level, setting-out lines, storage area, etc.
b. Fabrication procedure/manual, locations (local and/or overseas), list of
subcontractors/suppliers and their scope of works, quality assurance system, etc.
c. Storage and handling.
d. Maximum size of structural steel components that can be delivered to the site.
e. Assembly of structural members on the ground level before erection, where
partial or complete fabrication work is required on site.
f. Sequence and method of erection and assembly of structural members taking
into account the site conditions, site constraints, site restriction and interface with
other trades.
g. Detailed drawings and calculations for temporary works.
h. Details of proposed site inspection systems by the Accredited Inspection Body.
i. Details of staging, platforms and weather protection where site welding is to take
place.
j. Remedial procedures for damaged steelwork during fabrication, transportation,
storage, handling and erection.
k. Safety procedures for handling and erection of steelwork on site.
35
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.4 Construction Information

Provide the following information within time as directed by the SO prior to
commencement of the Works:
a. Welder qualification records, welding procedure records, stud welding procedure
records.
b. Details of welding procedures in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1 for all welds,
including tack and sealing welds.
c. Details of proposed shop inspection system by the Independent Inspection and
Testing Agency.
5.1.5 Programme
Provide a detailed programme to show the planned timing of the various items of
work to be done within time as directed by the SO, including:
a. Preparation and submission of construction information
b. Order and delivery of materials
c. Fabrication
d. Application of protective coatings
e. Transportation to site
f. Erection
Include in the programme, the time required for all procedural trials, inspection and
testing, and trial assemblies.
5.1.6 Material Certificates

Submit to the SO for acceptance, material certificates duly verified by the
Independent Inspection and Testing Agency within time as directed by the SO prior to
commencement of any work.
5.1.6.1 Mill Certificates
Provide mill certificates for every batch of supply confirming compliance with the
specified standards before the supply of material to the works.
5.1.6.2 Test Certificates/Reports for Bolts and Inserts
Provide test certificates/reports and demonstrate by testing on 2% of actual materials
used that bolts and inserts used in the Works conform to the specified requirements.
5.1.7 Inspection by ITA

Submit all reports from the Independent Inspection and Testing Agency to SO
periodically as agreed with the SO.
5.1.8 As-built Drawings

Submit as-built drawings to the SO for record upon completion of the Works. Include
information on all element type, sizes, position including deviation exceeding the
36
Version 1.0
NPQS
permitted PD if any, connection and assembly details, and protective works applied if
any.

a. Quality policy
Subcontractors and suppliers
5.2 Procedural Trial and Trial Assemblies

Carry out procedural trial and trial assemblies as agreed with the SO, including tests
on material and workmanship in accordance with the Specification, prior to
commencement of the Works. Give adequate period of notice as agreed with the SO.
Keep records of all tests and make them available to the SO and the Independent
Inspection and Testing Agency for examination throughout the duration of the Works.
5.3 Inspection
5.3.1 Inspection of Accuracy of Fabrication and Erection

Provide inspection reports in agreed batches endorsed by the Independent
Inspection and Testing Agency, verifying that the fabrication and erection of the works
comply with the specified requirements.
5.3.2 Visual Inspection of Welds

Carry out visual inspection over the full lengths of all welds prior to any Non-
Destructive Testing (NDT).
Immediately examine any welds that will be covered up before loss of access.
The acceptance criteria for visual inspection are to be in accordance with ANSI/AWS
D1.1 Table 6.1.
5.4 Non-Destructive Testing of Welds
5.4.1 Scope of Inspection

Carry out Non-Destructive Testing as tabulated below unless otherwise agreed.
Inspection requirements may be reduced by agreement with the SO based on
satisfactory performance in the initial tests.
Full Penetration Butt Welds Partial Penetration Butt Welds
37
Version 1.0
NPQS
Examples: Examples:
MT / Thickness All thicknesses All thicknesses

PT
Frequency 50% (site welds 100%) 50% (site welds 100%)
UT / Thickness tmax  3 mm tmax  3 mm

RT
Frequency 50% (site welds 100%) 50% (site welds 100%)
Fillet Welds
Examples:
MT / PT Thickness Fillet weld size  3 mm

Frequency 10% (site welds 100% but longitudinal welds 0.5m in each 10m or part
thereof)
Thickness Fillet weld size  20 mm
Frequency 20% (site welds 100% but longitudinal welds 1.0m in each 10m or part
thereof)
UT / RT As directed by SO
5.4.2 Hold Time Prior to NDT

For welds subject to NDT, carry out the testing at least 24 hours after the completion
of the welds. For quenched and tempered steel, carry out NDT not less than 48 hours
after the completion of the welds.
5.4.3 Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) and Penetrant Testing (PT)

Where magnetic particle testing (MT) is required in accordance with Clause
5.4.1(Scope of Inspection), the procedure and technique are to be in accordance with
ASTM E709.
If Magnetic Particle testing is impractical, use Penetrant testing in accordance with
the procedure and technique given in ASTM E165.
5.4.4 Ultrasonic Examination (UT)

Where ultrasonic testing is required in accordance with Clause 5.4.1(Scope of
Inspection), the procedure and technique are to be made in accordance with
ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 6 Part F.
38
Version 1.0
NPQS
If ultrasonic testing is impractical, for example when the plate thickness is less than
8mm, use radiographic testing in accordance with the procedure and technique given
in ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 6 Part E.
5.4.5 Radiographic Examination (RT)

Where radiographic testing is required in accordance with Clause 5.4.1(Scope of
Inspection), the procedure and technique are to be in accordance with ASTM E94
and ASTM E747.
5.4.6 Acceptance Criteria and Corrective Actions

Acceptance criteria are to be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1 Section 6 Part C.
Propose corrective actions to the SO for acceptance if the welds do not conform to
the acceptance criteria.
5.4.7 Weld Test Records

Record the results of all visual inspections and non-destructive testing and make all
records available for inspection.
39
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.5 Definitions 6
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal Brief 7
3. MATERIALS 9
3.1 Proprietary Products 9
3.2 Paint Coating Materials 9
3.3 Hot-Dip Galvanising Materials 9
3.4 Sealants 9
3.5 Fireproofing Materials 9
3.6 Compatibility of Products 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 General 11
4.2 Surface Preparation 11
4.3 Hot Dip Galvanising 12
4.4 Sprayed-on Metal Coatings 12
4.5 Paint Coatings 13
4.6 Application of Thin Film Intumescent Paints 14
4.7 Sprayed-on Fireproofing 14
4.8 Dry Lining 16

5.1 Submission 17
5.2 Mock-up and Samples 18
5.3 Verification Tests 19
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the protection of structural steelwork against
corrosion and fire.
those in C5-20 with the same clause title

C3-100 Sprayed Concrete

Singapore Standards
SS 37 Aluminium paint
Other Standards
BS 476-8 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Test methods and criteria for the
fire resistance of elements of building construction
BS 476-21 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Methods for determination of the
fire resistance of load bearing elements of construction
BS 4652 Zinc-rich priming paint (organic media)
BS 6213 Guide to the selection of construction sealant
BS 7079 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products
Part A1: Visual assessment of surface cleanliness.
Specification for rust grades and preparation of uncoated
steel substrates and of steel substrates after overall removal
of previous coatings
Part C1: Surface roughness characteristics of blast-cleaned
steel substrates. Specification for surface profile comparators
for assessment of abrasive
steel substrates. Method for the grading of the surface profile
of abrasively blast-cleaned steel using a comparator
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
steel substrates. Method for the calibration of surface profile

comparators and for the determination of surface profile
using a focusing microscope
Part C4: Surface roughness characteristics of blast-cleaned steel substrates.
Method for the calibration of surface profile comparators and for the
determination of surface using a stylus instrument
BS 8202 Coatings for fire protection of building elements

Part 2: Code of practice for the use of intumescent coating systems to metallic
substrates for providing fire resistance
BS EN ISO Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles. Specification
1461 and test methods
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes - Cross-cut test
2409
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes - Determination of film thickness
2808
ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes. Pull-off test
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel
12944 structures by protective paint systems
Part 1: General introduction
Part 2: Classification of environments
Part 3: Design considerations
Part 4: Types of surface and surface preparation
Part 5: Protective paint systems
Part 6: Laboratory performance test methods
Part 7: Execution and supervision of paintwork
Part 8: Development of specifications for new work and maintenance
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures - Zinc and aluminium
14713 coatings - Guidelines
BS EN Metallic and other inorganic coatings - Thermal spraying - Zinc, aluminium and
22063 their alloys
ASTM B117 Standard practice for operating salt spray (fog) apparatus
ASTM E119 Standard test method for fire tests of building construction and materials
ASTM E605 Standard test method for thickness and density of sprayed fire-resistive
material (SFRM) applied to structural members
ASTM E736 Standard test method for cohesion/adhesion of sprayed fire-resistive material
(SFRM) applied to structural members
ASTM E759 Standard test method for effect of deflection on sprayed fire-resistive material
ASTM E760 Standard test method for effect of impact on bonding of sprayed fire-resistive
ASTM E761 Standard test method for compressive strength of sprayed fire-resistive
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
ASTM E859 Standard test method for air erosion of sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRMs)
applied to structural members
ASTM E937 Standard test method for corrosion of steel by sprayed fire-resistive material
ANSI / UL Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
263
clauses.
1.4 Trade Preambles

The structural steelwork layout and design are shown in the drawings. All structural
steelworks require protection against corrosion and areas where protection against
fire is required are indicated.
Engage qualified and experienced personnel to develop the design intent and
propose the following for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Complete system of protection against corrosion and fire including types
and manufacturer of the materials to be applied and details such as
coating thickness etc., based on the performance requirements as set out
in clause 2.1 below. The system may consist of corrosion or fire protection
materials or a combination of both.
1.4.1.2 Details of methods of application including preparations and precautions.
All protective works and associated works are to be undertaken and supervised by
experienced personnel. Provide evidence of personnel’s past experience and
certificate to the SO for acceptance prior to commencement of the Works.

Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) to carry out tests and checks as
required by this Specification.
1.4.4 Independent Inspection and Testing Agency

Appoint an independent Inspection and Testing Agency (ITA) when required as
indicated in the PSD.
Appointment of an Independent Inspection and Testing Agency is required.
When required the scope of service of the ITA shall be as follows:

S/N Description Tick where
applicable
1. Review the contractor’s proposal for the protective
system
2. Review the quality control plans
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. Inspect the application of: Corrosion protection

Fire protection
Alternatively, the SO may engage the ITA separately.

In either of the above cases, make available to the ITA the following:
a. All requested documentation and a detailed programme to allow the ITA to
discharge its duties and to witness significant stages in the fabrication and
erection process.
b. Any instruments or equipment required for checking the accuracy and quality of
the works.


Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual covering the entire
protective systems and materials for the project. Refer to the General Requirements
section, clause 1.4.8 for details.
1.4.7 Warranty
Warrant the Works in accordance with contract conditions for a minimum period as
specified in the PSD against all defects from the date of completion.
Warrant the Works in accordance with contract conditions for a minimum period of 10
years against all defects from the date of completion.
For the sprayed-on fireproofing, warrant that the materials will not flake, dust,
delaminate or erode.
1.5 Definitions
a. DFT Dry Film Thickness (local
thickness of a sprayed metal or
galvanised coating).
b. Intumescent Types of fire-retardant paint that
Paint protect the substrates to which
they are applied.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Contractor’s Proposal Brief

When carrying out the proposal for the protective system in Clause 1.4.1, account for
the following performance requirements:
2.1.1 Durability
Account for the required durability range indicated in the PSD.
Account for the required durability range of: 5 to 10 years for the protective system.
Assess the level of coating failure before the first major maintenance in accordance
with EN ISO 12944.
2.1.2 Level of Corrosion Protection

2.1.2.1 Environmental Exposure Class
Account for the environmental exposure class for the project as indicated in the PSD.
Account for the environmental exposure class for the project as follows:
Location Member Environmental Remarks
Exposure Class
2.1.2.2 Required Systems

The required corrosion protective system (paint coating or galvanising) at various
locations for the project is indicated in the drawings.
For paint coatings comply as a minimum, the recommended thickness for protective
coating systems for various environments given in Annex A of EN ISO 12944-5.
For galvanised protective systems comply as a minimum, the recommended
thickness for various environments given in Table 2 of BS EN ISO 14713. Also
account for the rate of corrosion indicated in Table 1 of BS EN ISO 14713.
Obtain the manufacturer’s recommendation if the fire protection coatings are included
as parts of the system for corrosion protection.
2.1.3 Level of Fire Protection

2.1.3.1 Period of Fire Resistance
Account for the required period of fire resistance indicated in the PSD.
Account for the level of fire protection required for the various members as follows:
Location Member Fire Rating (Hour) Remarks
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1.3.2 Compliance with Authorities’ Requirements

All sprayed-on fireproofing are to comply with the applicable requirements of the
Authorities (FSSB and NEA) and the requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories
Inc. (UL). In case of conflict, refer to the SO for resolution, the SO’s decision is be
final.
2.1.4 Environmental Requirements

Ensure that all materials comply with the requirements of NEA in terms of chemical
and organic compositions as well as level of volatile emissions.
2.1.5 Architectural Finishes

For architecturally exposed steelworks, account for the required finish effects as
stipulated in the PSD.
Account for the required architectural finish effects at the various locations:
Location Type of finish Particular Proprietary product
requirements specified (if any)
(thickness etc.)
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Proprietary Products

When proprietary products had been selected for the project as indicated in the
drawings or this specification, verify that the products will satisfy the requirements as
above. In case that the selected product is unable to satisfy the desired performance,
notify the SO and propose alternative product for acceptance.
3.2 Paint Coating Materials
3.2.1 Source of Materials

Unless otherwise agreed, obtain all products in a particular paint and coating scheme
from a single manufacturer.
3.2.2 Prefabrication Coating

Provide prefabrication coating required as indicated in the PSD. When required, apply
the prefabrication coating in order to provide protection to blast-cleaned steel prior to
specified coatings. This coating is additional to the specified protection system.
Provision of Prefabrication coating is not required.
The prefabrication coating is to be fully compatible with the specified protection

system.
3.3 Hot-Dip Galvanising Materials

Comply with BS EN ISO 1461.
3.4 Sealants
Comply with BS 6213.
Refer to the PSD for proprietary product selected for the project if any.
Use the following product or approved equivalent for sealing all gaps and connections
where required.
Gap Sealants
3.5 Fireproofing Materials

All fire protection materials are to be approved by FSSB and comply with stipulations
in the Code of practice for fire precautions in buildings.
Submit evidence of the approval for SO’s acceptance.
3.5.1 Intumescent Paints

Comply with the requirements of BS 8202-2.
Refer to the PSD for the proprietary product selected for the project if any.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
Intumescent Paints
3.5.2 Sprayed-on Fireproofing

3.5.2.1 Protection of internal steelwork
Use mineral fibre products unless otherwise agreed by the SO.
3.5.2.2 Protection of external steelwork
Use vermiculite cement products unless otherwise agreed by the SO.
3.5.2.3 Proprietary Products
Refer to the PSD for the proprietary products selected for the project if any.
Fireproof coating
3.5.3 Dry Lining

Refer to the PSD for the proprietary product selected for the following items, if any.
Board Lining
Material wrapping
a. Board Lining: Comply with ASTM E119, ANSI/UL 263, BS 476-8 or BS 476-21.
b. Material Wrapping
3.6 Compatibility of Products

Ensure that all products to be used are compatible. Obtain confirmation from
manufacturer of their compatibility.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.1 Work Procedures

Carry out the Works strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and agreed methods.
4.1.2 Transportation, Storage and Handling

Establish procedures for transportation, storage and handling of all materials in order
to minimise the risk of damage and contamination.
Deliver materials in original unopened packages. Store material above floor level,
under cover and in a dry location until ready for use. Reject and remove from the site,
all materials that have been exposed to water/air before use or have overrun the
expiry date.
Mark or label all products and store them in such a way that identification of product
and batch numbers is available at all times.
4.1.3 Multiple Coats

Where two or more coats of the same product are to be applied, use a different colour
for alternate coats in order to provide visual indication of the stage reached or
progress of the coating work.
4.2 Surface Preparation

For corrosion protective system carry out surface preparation as below. For fire
protection system carry out in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
4.2.1 Surface Cleanliness

Clean the steel of dirt, grease and other contaminants.
The surface cleanliness at the time of coating is to be in accordance with BS 7079
Part A1, Grade Sa 2½, unless otherwise agreed by the SO.
4.2.2 Surface Roughness

After surface preparation the surface roughness is to be compatible with the coating
to be applied in accordance with BS 7079 Part C2.
4.2.3 Measurement of Surface Profile

Measure the surface profile of the steelwork to be coated using the methods in BS
7079 Group C.
4.2.4 Surface Defects

Rectify all defects exposed during surface preparation using the methods given in BS
7079 Group C.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2.5 Cleaning Prior to Application of Full Coating

Blast-clean all areas and welds prior to applying the full coating.
4.3 Hot Dip Galvanising
4.3.1 Procedures
Carry out galvanising in accordance with BS EN ISO 1461 Annex A to D.
Where higher strength steels are to be galvanised, propose for SO’s acceptance,
suitable precautions to minimise the risk of critical welds cracking.
4.3.2 Vent Holes

Position vent holes in hollow members in compliance with BS EN ISO 14713 Clause
A.4 (Design Features) of Annex A (Design for Hot-Dip Galvanising of Products).
4.3.3 Making Good of Hot-Dip Galvanised Coatings

Where uncoated areas exceed 0.5% of total surface of a member or 10cm², re-
galvanise the component.
Otherwise, repair uncoated areas by:
a. Zinc thermal spraying in accordance with BS EN 22063; or
b. Zinc rich primer to BS 4652
4.3.4 Painting of Hot-Dip Galvanised Steel

4.3.4.1 Surface preparation
Degrease using a detergent wash or steam cleaning followed by etch priming with T-
wash.
4.3.4.2 Barrier
Apply Epoxy Micaceous Iron Oxide (MIO) at 100 microns minimum DFT.
4.3.4.3 Finish
Apply Acrylic Urethane 50 microns minimum DFT.
4.4 Sprayed-on Metal Coatings
4.4.1 Procedures
Apply aluminium or zinc sprayed coatings to the surface in accordance with SS 37
(aluminium) and BS EN 22063 (zinc).
4.4.2 Sealing Before Overcoating

For sprayed metal coatings which are to be subsequently overcoated, seal before
applying the overcoating in accordance with BS EN 12944.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5 Paint Coatings
4.5.1 General
Apply the designated system in layers according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
4.5.2 Sealing of Joints

Seal all bolted joints against the ingress of water.
Before site painting commences, seal gaps at joints with compressible washers or
sealant as appropriate.
Avoid water trapped within the joint.
4.5.3 Painting of Site Welds and Fasteners

Clean, to the level of Clause 4.2.1(Surface Cleanliness), all site welds and fasteners
that are not suitably protected with an accepted protective system.
Paint the weld areas and fasteners with an approved protective system with similar
properties, performance and compatibility with the protective treatment used on the
surrounding surfaces.
4.5.4 Minimum and Maximum Overcoating Time

Adhere to any minimum and maximum time recommended by the manufacturer.
4.5.5 Stripe Coats

Apply extra stripe coats of primer over all edges and corners to seal gaps between
adjacent components such as bolted connections for all steelwork that will be
externally exposed in the finished works.
4.5.6 Coating of Surfaces to be Encased in Concrete

Where surfaces are to be encased in concrete, blast cleaning and painting are not
required unless otherwise directed by the SO.
Do not allow a primer to be applied where composite action is required unless
adequate shear keys have been provided as verified by the SO. Take note that the
paint will significantly reduce the bond.
4.5.7 Making Good Damaged Coatings

Propose to the SO for acceptance method statement for making good damaged
coatings.
Repair all areas of damaged coating in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification and to the standard of the original work, the manufacturer’s
recommendations and the accepted method statement.
All making good is to be in accordance with the agreed method statement.
4.5.8 Surface of Through Deck Stud Welding

Where a metal deck is to be attached by through deck stud welding, keep the top
flange of the beam free from all paint with the following exceptions:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Procedural trials are held on representative samples of the work, in which the
primer is applied before welding, and the soundness of the fastening can be
demonstrated.
b. Weldable paint is specified.
4.6 Application of Thin Film Intumescent Paints

Do not apply where standing water can occur that does not drain away freely.
4.7 Sprayed-on Fireproofing
4.7.1 Surface Conditions

Ensure that surfaces to be fireproofed are in a suitable condition according to the
manufacturer’s recommendation to receive the sprayed-on material. They are to be
dry, free form oil and other contaminants that are likely to impair adhesion. They are
to also be chemically resistant and non-reactive to the fireproofing materials.
Painted surfaces are to be properly cured and in a sound condition.
4.7.2 Application
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the type of material and
condition of substrate in each case.
Obtain details from the manufacturer, conditions not fully covered by the printed
recommendations and record in writing any oral recommendations received.
Copy any such recommendations to the SO and the manufacturer.
4.7.3 Equipment
Use spray equipment recommended by the manufacturer including equipment used
for measuring, mixing and auxiliary equipment such as air compressors.
4.7.4 Thickness
Extend full thickness of the material over the entire substrate such that it is covered in
a monolithic blanket of uniform fine texture.
Check the thickness of the sprayed-on material with a single point gauge or a site
thickness indicator.
Where required by the manufacturer to meet FSSB's approval, tamp the surface of
the freshly sprayed-on fireproofing to provide a smooth texture of the required
thickness.
The average thickness recorded for each the location is not to be less than that
required to achieve the specified fire resistance.
4.7.5 Condition of Material

Do not use material that has partially set or caked or lumpy material.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7.6 Sealer
Apply sealer to sprayed-on fireproofed surfaces to prevent flaking, dusting,
delaminating or erosion of the sprayed-on material in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations.
Sealer material is to be as furnished by the manufacturer and is to be tested as part
of the required fire rating assembly.
4.7.7 Fixing of Lath

Fix metal lath where it is required for the application of the sprayed-on fireproofing to
the parent steel surface, using methods that will not adversely affect the properties
and strength of the steel members in accordance with agreed proposals.
4.7.8 Application
4.7.8.1 General
Prior to starting work, cover all adjoining finished surfaces with a layer of heavy
polyethylene film in a manner that precludes the subsequent dispersal of sprayed-on
particles.
The covering is to remain in place until work of sprayed-on fireproofing is completed.
4.7.8.2 Protection to Personnel
During spraying operations, provide necessary protection to persons in the vicinity
against harm and/or injury and to protect against health hazards from exposure of the
sprayed-on fireproofing. Comply with requirements from the authorities where
applicable and take at least the following precautions:
a. Before the start of spraying operations, clean and clear the floor of the area of all
objects, material and equipment other than that employed in the application of the
fireproofing.
b. Enclose the area of the floor to be fireproofed with plastic or plastic-coated
tarpaulins in a manner, which is to preclude the escape of material from the
enclosure.
c. Sweep up wet material, which has fallen to the floor and place in a suitable
container marked for legal disposal off the Site.
d. After drying, thoroughly vacuum the floors and enclosure before its removal.
Dispose off the bags in a safe manner, which disallows escape of the material.
4.7.8.3 Completion of Operations

Upon completion of spraying operation, protect all fireproofing from damage by
subsequent building construction operations and effects of weather. Protection
methods is to be as recommended by the manufacturer of the accepted sprayed-on
fireproofing system.
4.7.9 Patching
Do all patching, cutting, and repairing of damaged or unsatisfactory sprayed-on
fireproofing or improper application of sprayed-on fireproofing as directed by the SO.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.8 Dry Lining

Fix boards and wrapping materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission
5.1.1 Proposed System and Methods

Provide details of the proposals to the SO for acceptance within directed time frame
prior to commencement of the works.
The submission is to include at least information on the following:
a. Materials and system proposed including product data, schemes of the coatings,
certificates and manufacturer’s recommendation indicating suitability with regard
to the specified performance requirements.
b. Method of transportation, storage and handling
c. Surface preparation
d. Method of application
e. Schedule of tests and inspection
f. Sequential details of all procedures involved
g. Supervision
h. Details of the proposed method of remedial or rectification work including surface
preparation, materials to be used and method of application
i. Fabrication techniques that help or affect application
j. Painting of areas that will be made inaccessible at a later stage

a. Quality policy
g. Subcontractors and suppliers
5.1.3 Data on Fire Protection System

5.1.3.1 Schedule of Thickness of Fireproofing
Provide a thickness schedule for all members to the SO for acceptance within
directed time frame.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
Support the proposed thickness by accepted test reports, which verify that it will
provide the specified fire resistance.
Submit shop drawings on the thickness schedule with the endorsement of an
approved specialist.
5.1.3.2 FSSB’s approval
Submit FSSB’s approval on the fire protection materials to be used to the SO.
5.1.3.3 Accredited Laboratory Report
Submit test data report from an accredited laboratory to confirm that:
a. The fire protection system meets fire rating and performance in accordance with
ASTM E119, ANSI/UL 263, BS 476-8 or BS 476-21.
b. The fire protection materials contain no asbestos or free crystalline silica.
c. There is no flaking, dusting, delaminating or erosion to the fire protection
materials after sealer is applied.
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit warranty from the manufacturers of the works upon completion.

Submit maintenance/ replacement manual at the completion of the construction.
5.1.6 Inspection by ITA

Submit all reports from the Independent Inspection and Testing Agency to SO
periodically as agreed with the SO.
5.2 Mock-up and Samples
5.2.1 Reference Areas for Paint Protection Coating

Prepare reference areas to the SO for acceptance within directed time frame prior to
commencement of the related work. Refer to the PSD for the required number of
reference areas.
Prepare the reference areas where the corrosive stresses are representative for the
structure on each important constituent element of the structure as follows:
a. Surface preparation
b. Application of each of the specified coatings including thickness of each coat
Obtain acceptance for each step of preparation and application prior to
commencement of the actual operation.
Record details the accepted reference areas accurately.
5.2.2 Mock-up of Sprayed-on Fireproofing

Apply sprayed-on fireproofing on a mock-up at a location as directed or indicated in
the drawings prior to the proposed on-site application of fireproofing.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
Construct the mock-up to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirement, in

the same manner and using the same materials as intended for the rest of the Works
involving sprayed-on fireproofing.
The accepted mock-up is to form part of the Works and is to be left in an environment
similar to the actual location.
5.2.2.1 Tests on Mock-up
Carry out all tests listed in Clause 5.3.4(Testing on Sprayed-on Fireproofing Material)
on the mock-up.
Submit a full report on the mock-up tests to the SO for acceptance within directed
time frame after the completion of the tests.
The report is to include at least information on the following:
a. Detail results of the tests
b. Application procedure
If in the opinion of the SO, the tests on the mock-up fail to comply with this
specification, submit a new proposal for the testing of additional mock-ups for the
acceptance of the SO.
If the tests on the mock-up are accepted, proceed with the application of sprayed-on
fireproofing to the rest of the Works in a similar manner.
5.2.3 Samples
Submit samples and manufacturer's recommendation for each type of product to the
SO for acceptance within directed time frame.
5.3 Verification Tests
5.3.1 Schedule of Tests

Refer to the PSD for the schedule and applicability of tests for the project.
Carry out the following tests:
Item Description Reference Applicable
Clause(s)
Corrosion Protection
1. Test for Dry Film Thickness 5.3.2.2
2. Test for Adhesion 5.3.2.3
3. Test for Porosity/Pinholes 5.3.2.4
Fire Proofing Material
4. Test for Dry Density and Thickness 5.3.4.1
5. Test for Air Erosion 5.3.4.2
6. Test for Deflection 5.3.4.3
7 Test for Compressive Strength 5.3.4.4
8 Test for Bond Impact 5.3.4.5
9 Test for Cohesion/Adhesion 5.3.4.6
10 Test for Contribution to Corrosion 5.3.4.7
11 Salt Spray Testing 5.3.4.8
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3.2 Testing on Paint Systems

5.3.2.1 General
Check coatings for compliance with the specified requirement as follows:
a. By visual assessment for uniformity, colour and surface defects
b. By use of instruments for compliance with requirements for dry film thickness,
adhesion and porosity.
5.3.2.2 Test for Dry Film Thickness

Check dry film thickness of coating at the completion of each coating using agreed
methods in accordance with BS EN ISO 2808.
Use notch-cutter measurements where destructive testing is required.
5.3.2.3 Test for Adhesion
Test adhesion using destructive methods in accordance with BS EN ISO 2409 or ISO
4624.
5.3.2.4 Test for Porosity/Pinholes
Test porosity/pinholes using low or high-voltage hollowness detectors. The test can
be carried out using any one of the following methods:
a. DC low voltage sponge
b. DC high voltage
c. AC high voltage
Ensure safety requirements against potential hazards such as electrical shock,
explosion or fire.
5.3.3 Testing on Hot-Dip Galvanised Coatings

Sampling, reference areas, procedures and acceptance criteria are to be in
accordance with BS EN ISO 1461.
5.3.4 Testing on Sprayed-on Fireproofing Material

5.3.4.1 Test for Dry Density and Thickness
Dry density of the fireproofing material is to be determined in accordance with ASTM
E605. The field density measured is to be consistent with that reported in the
performance tests.
The thickness of the fireproofing material applied to structural members such as
beams, columns, etc. is to be determined in accordance with ASTM E605.
Select one test location per area not exceeding 1000m² but not less than two test
locations per floor.
5.3.4.2 Test for Air Erosion
Determine the loss of fireproofing material due to air movement across its surface in
accordance with ASTM E859.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3.4.3 Test for Deflection

The fireproofing material is not to crack when tested in accordance with ASTM E759.
Select randomly 10%.
5.3.4.4 Test for Compressive Strength
The fireproofing material is not to deform more than 10% when subjected to 500 psf
compressive forces in accordance with ASTM E761.
5.3.4.5 Test for Bond Impact
Subject the fireproofing material to impacts in accordance with ASTM E760.
Select randomly 10%.
5.3.4.6 Test for Cohesion/Adhesion
Determine the cohesion/adhesion of fireproofing material applied over uncoated or
galvanised steel in accordance with ASTM E736. Sample as follows:
a. Beams
Select four number test locations in an area not exceeding 200m².
Take a total of nine readings at two positions 300mm apart and determine the
average of the eighteen readings.
b. Trusses and Columns
As stipulated for beams except take a total of twelve readings and determine the
average of twenty-four readings.
5.3.4.7 Test for Contribution to Corrosion
Determine contribution to corrosion in accordance with ASTM E937.
5.3.4.8 Salt Spray Testing
Engage an accredited laboratory to carry out salt spray test for the fireproofing
material in accordance with ASTM B117.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-10 Building Sewers Construction
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals 9
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Concrete 11
3.2 Brickworks 11
3.3 Reinforcements 11
3.4 Pipes 12
3.5 Ground Material 12
3.6 Sewer Manholes 13
3.7 Piles 13
3.8 Trench Supports 14
3.9 Paving 14
3.10 Accessories 14
4. WORKMANSHIP 16
4.1 General 16
4.2 Setting-out 16
4.3 Excavation 16
4.4 Embedment and Support 17
4.5 Pipework Installation 19
4.6 Sewer Joints and Connections 21
4.7 Manholes and Inspection Chambers 21
4.8 Backfill and Reinstatement 22

5.1 Submission 24
5.2 Testing 25
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of minor sewer works in
building projects as part of external works. It does not cover major sewer and
treatment plant works in infrastructure development, which are undertaken by the
Public Utilities Board. Refer to specification issued by the Sewerage department for
such works.
The section covers the civil engineering aspects of the construction of sewers outside
of buildings, such as setting out, earthworks, concreting, piling and ground monitoring
etc. For requirements of piping works, pumps, vents and system testing etc., as well
as sanitary works within the building, refer to Mechanical specifications.
section.

C3-20 Reinforcement
C4-20 Driven Piling
C7-20 Paving for Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways

1.3.1 Technical Standards

Singapore Standards
SS 17 Steel tubes suitable for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
SS 30 Manhole tops and surface-box tops
SS 34 Undercoat paint for gloss enamel
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
SS 103 Burnt clay and shale bricks

SS 183 Concrete cylindrical pipes and fittings including manholes and street
gullies
SS 272 Unplasticized PVC pipes below ground for drainlines and sewers
SS 494 Lead and Chromate free primer for iron and steel substrates
PUB Code of practice on Sewerage and Sanitary works
Other Standards
BS 1200 Building sands from natural sources
BS 1247 Manhole steps
BS 1377 Soils for civil engineering purposes
BS 1471 Specifications fro wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
engineering purposes: drawn tube
BS 1472 Specifications for wrought aluminium, and aluminium alloys for general
engineering purposes: forging stock and forgings
BS 1474 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
engineering purposes- boxes, extended round tubes and sections
BS 1740 Specification for wrought steel pipe fittings
BS 4962 Specification for plastics pipes and fittings for use as subsoil field drains
BS 6164 Code of practice for safety in tunnelling in the construction industry
BS EN 295-1 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers –
requirements
BS EN 598 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for sewerage
applications – requirements and test methods
BS EN 1610 Construction and testing of drains and sewers
clauses.

a. Sewerage department (PUB) standard drawings
b. BRE Digest 251, Assessment of damage in low rise building, 1995
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended layout and details for the proposed sewer system for the project are
shown in the drawings. Based on the information given engage qualified and
experienced personnel to propose the following for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Equipment and Methods
Propose suitable equipment and methods to carry out the works including excavation,
trenching, piling, laying, pipe jacking, backfill and compacting etc. Take into account
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
of the performance requirement as set out in clause 2.1 and submit the proposals to
the SO for acceptance.
1.4.1.2 Design for Temporary Works
Engage a PE (Civil) to design and supervise the temporary works (if necessary) and
precautionary measures including temporary slope, retaining structures, temporary
trench supports and control of ground water etc. for the stability of the works.
Submit the design to the SO for acceptance and to the Authority where applicable.
1.4.1.3 Assessment on Effects of Ground Movement
1.4.1.4 Temporary Diversion of Services
Propose schemes and details for the temporary diversion of existing above ground or
underground services to facilitate the works.



and readings.
Section C2-50.

5
Version 1.0
NPQS



1.4.9 Obstructions

Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) to carry out tests as required by this
Specification.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS

Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual for the completed sewer
system, to be carried out by the building owners. Refer to the General Requirements
section, clause 1.4.8 for details.
1.4.12 Connection to Existing Services

Be responsible for the connection of the works to the receiving sewer system to the
acceptance of PUB.
1.4.13 Qualified Personnel

Specialist operations such as pipe jacking are to be carried out only by experienced
and qualified personnel. Submit the experience of the relevant personnel engaged for
the works for acceptance before work commences.


Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-out of
alignment and levels of the sewer line. Develop the details for the setting-out based
on the information given in the drawings.

No items.
1.4.17 Safety
notably:
Regulations
d. Factories Act
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.18 As-Build Surveys

Engage a Licensed Surveyor to be responsible for surveying the position and levels
of the sewer system and submit the as–build survey to the SO in format as directed
upon completion of the works. Submit the as-built surveys to the authorities where
applicable.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Contractor’s Proposals

When carrying out the contractor’s proposals as set out in clause 1.4.1, take into
account the following performance requirements:
2.1.1 General Requirements of the Sewer System

Ensure the following basic performance requirements to which the sewer systems
operate are achieved:
c. The sewers are to operate without blocking
d. Public health and life are to be safeguarded
e. Sewers are not to endanger existing adjacent structures and utility services.
f. Sewers are to achieve and maintain the structural integrity and required durability.
g. Sewers are generally watertight at the joints and connections.
h. Odour nuisance and toxicity do not arise
i. Appropriate openings and ventilation are provided for safe maintenance of
manholes and ICs.

Ensure the adequate provision of temporary supports to provide stability for the
excavation and for the control of ground water draw down and ground movement to
safeguard adjacent properties.
2.1.3 Compliance with Standard PUB Requirements

2.1.3.1 Workmanship
Ensure that the workmanship of the works meet with the requirements of PUB
Sewerage Department as set out in the code of practice on sewerage and sanitary
works.
2.1.3.2 Standard Details
Verify and ensure that the various elements of the sewer system comply with the
standard details as set out in PUB (Sewerage Department) ‘s “Standard Details
Drawings”.

Based on the results of the damage assessment as set out in Clause 1.4.1.3,
propose the allowable ground settlement and vibration limits due to the works taking
into account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
2001).
9
Version 1.0
NPQS

where relevant.
2.3 Noise Nuisance

over the works.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Concrete
For general requirements of concrete refer to section C3-10, clause 3.0.
Unless otherwise specified in the PSD, use Ordinary Portland cement for all concrete
works.
When required as indicated in the drawings, Granolithic concrete is to consist of one
part cement, two parts of sand and three parts of 5mm single sized aggregate
complying with BS EN 1610, Table B15.
3.1.1 Curing Materials

Curing materials are to comply with the following specifications:
a. Liquid membrane-forming compounds ASTM C309, Type 2
b. White polyethylene film ASTM C171
c. White burlap-polyethylene sheeting ASTM C171
Propose suitable product for SO’s acceptance.
3.2 Brickworks
3.2.1 Brick
Common bricks is to be of standard size, even shape, hard, well burnt, and machine
made pressed bricks with true arrises to SO’s acceptance.
Engineering bricks are to be obtained from accepted manufacturers and are to be
hand selected so that they will in general conform to SS 103 with a minimum average
compressive strength not less than 31 N/mm2. They are to be sound, hard, square
made, well burnt throughout, regular in size and shape, with good faces and clean
arrises and free from lime, chalk, pebbles, shell or other extraneous matter and other
defects.
3.2.2 Sand
The sand for cement mortar etc. is to be fine sand complying with BS 1200.
3.3 Reinforcements
For general requirements refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcements”, clause 3.0.
3.3.1 Tie Bars

Tie bars are to be high yield deformed bars complying with SS 2.
3.3.2 Dowel Bars

Dowel bars are to be plain mild steel bars complying with SS 2, and be free from
burring or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to
the construction site, a minimum of two-thirds of the length of each dowel bar is to be
painted with one coat of rust preventive paint.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
The sleeves for dowel bars used in expansion joints are to be of an approved design
to cover 50 mm to 75 mm of the dowel, with a closed end and with a suitable stop to
hold the end of the bar at least 25 mm from the closed end of the sleeve. Sleeves
are to be designed such that they will not collapse during construction. The sleeves
are to fit the dowel bar tightly and the closed end is to be watertight.
Propose details of the sleeves for SO’s acceptance.
3.4 Pipes
3.4.1 Vitrified Clay Pipes

All vitrified clay pipes and fittings are to comply with BS EN 295. The crushing
strength of vitrified clay pipes is not to be less than the values for class number 160
as given in table 5 in BS EN 295-1 when laid by open trench method; and not less
than the values for class number 240 for micro-tunnelling or pipe jacking method.
3.4.2 Ductile Iron Pipes

All ductile iron pipes and fittings are to comply with BS EN 598. They are to be
internally lined with high alumina cement (HAC) mortar in accordance with BS EN
598 or alternatively, sulphate resisting cement (SRC) complying with the type tested
for chemical resistance and abrasion resistance as specified in BS EN 598 for HAC.
They are also to be externally coated with a layer of metallic zinc and covered by a
bituminous coating finishing.
3.4.3 Precast Concrete Pipes

3.4.3.1 Thick-Wall Reinforced Concrete Pipes
All thick-wall reinforced concrete pipes are to have an internal sacrificial layer of
38mm in addition to the normal cover for reinforcement as provided for in the design
of reinforced concrete pipes and in compliance with SS 183.
3.4.3.2 PVC or HDPE Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipes
All PVC or HDPE lined reinforced concrete pipes are to be manufactured in
compliance with SS 183 and to be internally lined with a minimum thickness of 1.5mm
PVC or HDPE lining. The lining is to be fixed to the concrete surface by mechanical
keys and cover not less than 330 of the internal circumference of the pipes.
3.4.3.3 Joints and Fittings
Pipes and fittings are to be double spigot for jointing with push-fit polypropylene
flexible couplings.
3.4.4 uPVC Pipe

uPVC pipes and fittings are to comply with SS 272.
Perforated uPVC pipes and fittings are to comply with BS 4962.
3.5 Ground Material
3.5.1 Granular Material for Bedding

Granular material for bedding of channels and drain sections is to be natural sand,
crushed rock or crushed concrete or other accepted granular material which are well
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
graded and lie within the grading limits tabulated below. The particle size is to be
determined in accordance with BS 1377.
Gradation of Sub-base Materials
BS Sieve Size % by Weight Passing
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
10 mm 45 - 100
5 mm 25 - 85
600 m 8 - 45
75 m 0 - 10
3.5.2 Hardcore
Hardcore are to consist of broken stone, brick, or other approved hard material. They
are to be free from clay, dust and other deleterious matter and are not to contain
pieces exceeding 150mm or less than 60mm gauge.
3.5.3 Backfill Material

Refer to section C2-20, clause 3.1 for general requirement of fill material. Excavated
material may be used for backfill subject to agreement from the SO.
3.5.4 Top Soil

Top soil are to be excavated separately from the subsoil and are to be kept separate
and be used to cover trenches, embankments, slopes, verges, etc. as directed.
3.6 Sewer Manholes
3.6.1 Standard Manholes

Unless otherwise indicated in the design drawings, all sewer manholes are to be
constructed using pre-cast circular units or chamber rings in compliance with the
Sewerage Department (PUB)’s Standard Details of Manholes. These details are
found in the appropriate Standard Drawings produced by the Sewerage Department
(PUB).
The underside of all intermediate platforms and roof slabs of manholes/ chambers is
to be lined with PVC or HDPE lining.
3.6.2 Frames and Covers

All manhole frames and covers are to be of the type approved by the Sewerage
Department (PUB) and are to comply with SS 30. These approved standard manhole
frames and covers are shown in the Sewerage Department (PUB)'s Standard
Drawings.
3.7 Piles
3.7.1 Reinforced Concrete, Steel and Treated Timber Piles

Refer to section C4-20 “Driven Piling”, clause 3.0 for requirement on materials.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.7.2 Bakau Pile

Bakau Piles are to be good, sound, straight piles with fresh uninjured bark and of
uniform size. They are to be supplied in 3 metres, 4.5 metres, 6 metres, 8 metres, 10
metres or 12 metres lengths as required and measured after the heads have been
squared and the ends pointed. They must be not less than 65mm diameter at the
thinner end and of an approved species of timber for use as piles in ground below the
water table.
Splicing is to be by means of a mild steel collar of 110mm internal diameter and
400mm in length. The collar is to be fabricated from a single Galvanised Steel Sheet
of SWG 12 (2.64mm) thickness with 15mm diameter mild steel bar strut at the centre
of the collar and all is to be well coated with bituminous paint to SO’s acceptance
before being put to use.
3.8 Trench Supports
3.8.1 Timber
All timber used for timbering of excavation or shoring are to be of adequate section
and quality. Timber used in trenches to support the face of the excavations must be
at least Medium Hardwood as in accordance with the Malaysian Grading Rules for
Malaysian Timbers.
The timber used in shuttering must be of sound, well seasoned timber and free from
shakes, twists or other defects. Plywood lining for shuttering must be of an approved
thickness and type of timber, resin bonded and water repellent.
Timber used in carpentry and joinery must be sound, thoroughly seasoned and free
from defects. The timber is to have a straight uniform grain and be of an approved
species for each purpose.
3.8.1.1 Timber Preservative
All timber hardboard etc. to be permanently incorporated into the works are to be
pressure impregnated with an approved preservative. The preservative are to be of a
type resistant to all forms of rot, termite and insect attack.
3.8.2 Steel
Refer to section C5-10, clause 3.1 for general requirement of structural steel.
Refer to section C2-30-2, clause 3.0 for general requirement of steel sheet piles.
3.9 Paving
For paving on driveways and footways refer to section C7-20, clause 3.0.
For finishing on concrete slab refer to architectural specifications.
3.10 Accessories
3.10.1 Aluminium Rung

Provide rungs at 300mm centres and stringers 380mm apart. Provide strong support
stays on both sides of the rungs at not more than 2.5m centres.
For drains to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department, the aluminium rungs are
to comply with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
Where otherwise indicated, the rungs are to be of alloy H30 in the form of HE 30 TF
to BS 1474 and the stringers are to be of alloy N5 in the form of NE 5m to BS 1474.
3.10.2 Step-Iron
Step-irons are to comply with BS 1247.
3.10.3 Handrailing
Provide standard safety railings for all open drains more than 1.0m deep. The safety
railings are to comply with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage if the
drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department.
Where otherwise indicated, handrailings are to be made from welded hot dipped
galvanised mild steel tube of 30mm internal diameter, complying with SS 17. Fittings
for handrail are to comply with BS 1740.
3.10.4 Paint
Obtain all paints including primers and undercoats as ready mixed for use from
accepted manufacturers. All paintings are to comply with the Code of Practice on
Surface Water Drainage if the drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage
Department.
Tints and shades (including undercoats) are to SO’s selection and acceptance.
Unless otherwise indicated, priming paints for structural steel and cast iron are to
comply with SS 494. Priming paints for zinc or aluminium surfaces are to be
approved zinc chromate priming paint. Oil-based undercoat and finishing paints are
to be similar to SS7 and SS34 but the pigments are to exclude white lead.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
In planning and executing the works, be guided by the requirements as set out in BS
EN 1610. Comply also with the relevant requirements of PUB’s Code of Practice on
Sewerage and Sanitary works.
4.2 Setting-out
Before any work commences, set out the pipe conduit trace. Mark centre of manholes
by a peg whose location is tied to 3 pegs situated outside the working area for
verification after excavation.
Mark the centre line of the pipe conduit with sight rails painted black and white, use
boning rods to give the distance from the sight rails to the invert of the pipe conduit.
Boning rods are to be designed to show the pipeline invert level below the site rails.
Note that for the lengths of the pipelines which are curved in plan or in elevation the
curve is to be achieved by deflecting the pipes at joints.
Maintain the setting out of the line of the pipelines not less than 500 metre in advance
of pipe-laying.
When excavation is complete, drive wooden pegs into the formation at not more than
5 metre centres and adjust the level of each peg to the proposed pipe conduit invert
by the use of the sight rails and boning rods.
Check and verify the setting out before pipe laying and backfilling works.
4.3 Excavation
4.3.1 General
Comply with the workmanship requirements in section C2-20, clause 4.3. Take note
of other particular requirements as below.
Ensure the excavation works are carried out in accordance with Part XII Excavation
Work of the Factories Act, 1973 (Act 6 of 1973); and The Building Operations and
Works of Engineering Construction Regulations, 1977.
4.3.2 Trenching
Excavate trenches to straight lines and gradients required for the pipes and beds as
specified in the drawings.
Form the excavation with vertical sides or such slopes as agreed with the SO.
Cut and trim the formations of the excavations to the exact lines, levels and depths
required; Manually excavate the final 150mm only immediately before pipe laying.
Where a concrete or granular bed or surround is required, excavate to the overall
dimensions of the bed or surround with vertical sides and no undercutting.
Where pipes are to be laid on rock formation take the excavation down to 100mm
below bedding level over the width of the trench and re-fill with granular material or
concrete as directed.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
Remove soft spots from the bottom of trenches. Re-fill and compact to formation level
with accepted material. Re-fill voids resulted from over-excavation below formation
level in the same manner.
4.3.2.1 Supports for Trenches
All excavations is to be supported and secured in accordance with accepted design to
ensure the proper execution of the works and to prevent any settlement of the
adjoining ground or structures. Plan the works with the object of minimizing the
amount of excavation open at any time.
Use systems of timbering including poling boards, runner or steel trench sheeting
according to the ground conditions. Ensure the support system will prevent the loss of
ground during excavation and that backfilling can be carried out as required, leaving
no voids.
Timber, sheeting, piling, struts, walings and bracings may only be left in the
excavations if so directed.
Keep all trenches sufficiently dry so as not to affect the quality of the permanent
works.
4.3.2.2 Trench Widths
Excavate the trench in minimum width necessary but giving due consideration for the
bedding, laying, aligning and jointing of the pipes and with allowance for timbering,
shuttering or other necessary temporary work.
Unless otherwise agreed, control trench width in accordance with clause 6.2.2 of BS
EN 1610 “Minimum Trench Width”.
4.3.2.3 Trench Levels
All trenches are to be in straight lines both in alignment and gradient between
manholes, rodding eyes, access chambers etc. Changes of direction are only to be
where shown in the drawings.
4.3.3 Excavated Material

Adequately protect materials that are suitable for use as backfill to preserve the
suitability for re-use.
Place excavated materials at a safe distance from the excavations and not closer
than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the excavation, unless suitable
working and safety arrangements are otherwise agreed.
4.3.4 Excessive Excavation

Where excavations have been carried out beyond the width or depth required, to the
detriment of the support or foundation of any of the works, re-fill with G10 concrete or
other compacted material as agreed.
4.4 Embedment and Support
4.4.1 Piling
4.4.1.1 Bakau Piling
Where shown in the drawings or when the excavated formation is assessed to be
unable to support the works without undue settlement, drive Bakau piles as directed
to improve the support capacity.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
Drive test piles as necessary or as directed to establish the stability of the ground
below formation level, as well as to establish an indicative value for the set and
number of blows based on the weight of the Monkey in order to achieve the required
improvement to the ground stability.
Drive Bakau piles straight in positions. Where necessary join piles to form lengths
longer than those naturally available. Ensure such joints will firmly secure the two
sections and bring the pile ends into close contact for driving.
On completion of driving, saw off all the pile heads to the required level. Trim the
excavation from around the piles and clean the pile heads free of clay and other soils.
4.4.1.2 Other Pile Types
Where the loads, conditions or water table are unsuitable for the use of Bakau piling,
or where indicated in the drawings, use alternative method and types of piling
including Precast RC piles and Tanalised timber piles. Refer to section C4-20, clause
4.4 for driving requirements.
Submit full details of the type of piling, load testing, sets proposals etc. for SO’s
acceptance before the work commences.
4.4.2 Bedding
4.4.2.1 Concrete Bed, Haunching & Surround
When a concrete bed and surround is required, excavate the trench to the exact
dimensions required. Where soft conditions occur in the trench, lay 50mm thick
Grade 10 concrete blinding at a level below the specified thickness of concrete bed.
Extend the blinding to the full width of the trench. Where wet conditions are
encountered, provide sub-drains and granular material below the concrete mat or
surround as directed.
Place the concrete in the surround right against the side of the trench excavation.
When directed either omit timber from the base of the trench or pull up the timbering
as the concrete is placed.
Carry out the bedding and pipe laying in such manner that pipes are laid with the
whole of the barrel of the pipe bedded on concrete still sufficiently plastic to permit
adjustment of level and packing under the barrel of the pipe.
Clean the exposed set concrete forming the bed and place the remaining concrete
surround steadily and evenly on both sides of the pipe. Do not place concrete around
the pipes until the pipe joints have been inspected and approved. Ensure proper
compaction.
Form a complete vertical break in the bed and surround at the flexible joints where
detailed and at approximately every four pipes or 6 metre whichever is less. Form the
joint by vertically shuttering the bed or surround with 25mm thick fibreboard, timber or
other approved material. The break in the concrete is to be flush with the face of the
socket extending not less than 25mm along the barrel of the pipe adjoining. Where
the concrete bed is required to be reinforced all reinforcement are to stop on either
side of the joint.
4.4.2.2 Granular Bed & Surround
When a granular bed or surround is required excavate as per concrete surround.
Place the material carefully in shallow layers to the full width of the trench and
compact thoroughly by hand or approved mechanical tampers. Add water to the
granular material to obtain an optimum moisture content for compaction.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
Ensure the pipes are laid evenly on the barrel at the required level without hollows or
voids under the pipe. Where holes are left in the bedding for pipe jointing take
particular care to ensure proper filling of the holes after pipe testing.
4.5 Pipework Installation
4.5.1 General
4.5.1.1 Alignments and Levels
Before commencing pipe laying, check the position and levels of the sewer line. All
pipes are to be laid in straight lines both in direction and gradient between manholes,
rodding eyes, access chambers etc. Provide bends only where shown in the
drawings.
4.5.1.2 Tolerance
The allowable tolerance on invert levels is to be ±5mm, provided that the as-laid
gradient of the pipe does not vary by more than 10% from required and provided that
the relative level differences between pipes in an individual installation are
maintained.
Setting out on plan is to be within ±5mm.
4.5.1.3 Drains Through Structure & Manhole Walls
Provide two flexible joints where the pipeline is built into and supported by a structure
or a manhole/inspection chamber, position the joints at 150mm and 750mm from the
face of the structure.
4.5.1.4 Drains Below Structure
Where the top of a pipe of less than 150mm diameter is within 300mm below the
underside of a concrete slab or footing, the pipe is to be bedded and surrounded in
150mm of concrete.
4.5.1.5 Pipe Ends
All ends of pipe runs left open are to be temporarily fitted with propriety end caps as
supplied by the pipe manufacturer. Where these are not available, use expanding
stoppers.
4.5.1.6 Floatation
Take adequate precautions to prevent flotation of the pipeline.
4.5.1.7 Protection
*Protect all sewers laid in open trenches and backfill with approved materials.
Depending on the ground conditions and the type of the sewer material used, lay the
sewer in accordance to 4 main section types, viz. Type ‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’ and ‘D’. The
details of these sections can be found in Sewerage Department (PUB)’s Standard
Drawings. Submit proposals for SO’s acceptance.
4.5.2 Handling Pipes

During loading or unloading, handle pipes by approved lifting tackle. Do not unload
by rolling pipes down planks or other form of ramp unless otherwise agreed.
Carefully stack pipes with timber packings under and between the pipes. Do not
stack above 2m high.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.3 Pipe Laying

All pipes are to be carefully brushed out inside and tested for soundness before being
laid.
Lay pipes to true inverts with the whole of the barrel of the pipes evenly and solidly
supported by the bedding material with shaped holes to receive the sockets.
Where pipes are to be supported on concrete bedding or surround, provide two
rectangular blocks of grade 20 concrete for each pipe, set and boned in the correct
level on the formation bottom and lay the pipe on them, properly centred and
socketed. Use two hardwood folding wedges driven between the body of the pipe
and the block to bring pipe to the exact level required.
Where pipes are supported on granular material, provide timber blocks and wedges
for the fine adjustment of the pipes to line and level. Remove the wedges and blocks
before completion of the bedding.
Do not use bricks or other hard packings as temporary pipe supports. Do not permit
pipe spigots to bear on socket inverts in such a manner as to produce uneven
pressure on the joints.
Keep the trenches and joint holes free from water until the pipes are laid, jointed and
surrounded with concrete. Do not allow water from the trenches to enter the new
pipes.
4.5.4 Pipe Jacking

Carry out pipe jacking only when it is demonstrated as necessary and accepted by
the SO.
Carry out the works in a safe manner and comply with all current construction safety
regulations and be guided by the relevant parts of BS 6164. Ensure all site staffs are
trained in the skills required for pipe jacking and safe working.
Use only approved vitrified clay jacking pipes and precast concrete pipes for jacking.
Ensure the joints of the sewer pipes are made of the double spigot type and the
jointing sleeves are made of Stainless Steel Type 316. Attach pressure transfer rings
to the face of one of the spigot ends before jointing.
Use a jacking ring and a jacking frame in all jacking operations. Ensure the jacking
ring is designed to allow the jacking pressure to be distributed evenly around the wall
of the jacking pipes, and the jacking frame designed to distribute the stresses from
the jacks evenly onto the jacking ring.
The allowable tolerance in the displacement of the centreline of the jacked pipe from
the required centreline is 50mm in the horizontal plane and 25mm in the vertical
plane. Ensure no backfall at any point along the sewer laid.
4.5.5 Jointing Pipe

Install and join all pipes in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, using
accepted jointing gaskets and fillers. For concrete pipes with rebated joint, carry out
jointing by filling the opening at the joints with cement mortar of one part cement to
three parts sand unless otherwise agreed and finished off flush. For double spigot
pipes jointed using proprietary flexible couplings, take care to ensure alignment of the
spigots.
Notwithstanding the flexibility provided at the pipe joints, ensure pipes are secured
and movement prevented during and after the making of the joint.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.6 Damaged Pipe

In the event of pipes being damaged during installation, immediately remove and
replace pipe including the bedding if necessary. Re-make all leaking joints.
4.6 Sewer Joints and Connections

Ensure all sewer pipes are connected using approved flexible joints.
Join all sewer pipes connecting to manholes at soffit levels. In the case of a new,
larger diameter sewer connecting to an existing smaller diameter sewer downstream,
provide a manhole for the connection.
Ensure all connection into manhole walls are made watertight.
Ensure sewer pipes leading into and away from a manhole at the same level do not
form acute angles. Smoothly render the channels and the benching in the manholes
to reduce turbulence in the sewage flow.
4.6.1 Provision for Future Connections

Where provisions have been made for future connections seal the ends of the pipes
with proprietary end caps marked with red plastic tape and mark the positions of the
ends on the surface with a concrete post or pad installed with a galvanized wire
linking to the stopper to facilitate location at a later date.
4.6.2 Rehabilitated Sewers

When building new manholes or Y-junctions over existing sewers that have been
rehabilitated, ensure that joints to the rehabilitated sewers are constructed in
compliance with PUB requirements.
4.7 Manholes and Inspection Chambers
4.7.1 General
Construct all manholes and inspection chambers including accessories to the
standard details issued by the sewerage department.
Provide benching finish in 25mm granolithic rendering in two courses.
Install manhole covers on frames securely bedded in 1:3 cement mortar on the
manhole walls. Tolerance for the manhole cover level is to be 5mm low.
4.7.2 Pre-cast Concrete Manholes

Construct using pre-cast circular units or chamber rings in compliance with the
Sewerage Department (PUB)’s Standard Details of Manholes.
Cover each joint of the manhole rings with 1:3 cement mortar before the next ring is
lowered into position. The joints are to be wiped clean and flush pointed.
When lowering the rings into position take care that the step irons are truly aligned
vertically and in the correct position as required.
After erection seal any holes formed in the pre-cast units for lifting purposes with 1:3
cement mortar finished flush with the inside of the manhole.
Ensure all manholes and inspection chambers are constructed as watertight. In the
event of leakage, propose and remedy to SO’s satisfaction.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7.3 Brick Manholes

Where required, construct brick manholes and inspection chambers from accepted
engineering bricks.
Construct the chamber base slab of concrete on prepared bedding, with channels
and benching as shown in the drawings.
4.7.3.1 Brickwork
Lay brickwork in English bond and fill all joints solidly in 1:3 cement mortar and neatly
flush pointed internally as the work proceeds. Do not use bats or broken bricks
except as closers for the purpose of breaking bond. Joints are not to exceed 7mm in
thickness.
Where brickwork is corbelled each course is not to oversail the course below by more
than 32mm.
For pipes 300mm diameter or larger, provide arches or concrete lintels as directed to
relieve the load of brickwork on the pipe.
4.7.3.2 Cement Mortar Rendering
Mix one part of cement to six parts sand together with approved plasticiser used in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Apply rendering to finished surfaces in two coats to a total thickness of 20mm. The
first coat about 12mm thick, cross scored to receive the second coat, which is to be
about 4 to 8mm thick, trowelled to a smooth surface.
4.8 Backfill and Reinstatement
4.8.1 Backfill
4.8.1.1 Backfill Material
Backfill with approved material re-cycled from the excavation or imported as agreed
otherwise.
4.8.1.2 Placement
Ensure the initial layer of backfill is free from stones and other undesirable material.
Carefully place the initial layer under and around pipes and compact in thin layers
using hand tools, up to at least 300mm above the top of the pipe or special surround.
Deposit filling above the initial layer in layers not exceeding 300mm loose depth, and
compact to a dry density not less than that of the adjoining soil.
Withdraw trench supports ahead of the layer to be filled, take care to keep the sides
of the trenches stable and fill all the spaces left by the withdrawn supports.
Use mechanical tempers for compaction only when there is a minimum of 450mm of
material above the crown of the pipe, ensure the appliance is suitable for the
conditions and will not damage or displace the pipes.
Under carriageways and where directed, backfill trenches with 40mm all-in gravel
aggregate to Table B17 of BS EN 1610. Lower the first 300mm into the trench in
skips and thoroughly hand punned. Fill and power ram the remaining depth in 300mm
layers, water in when necessary to ensure maximum compaction for the full depth of
the filling.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.8.2 Surface Reinstatement

4.8.2.1 General
As the work proceeds replace and maintain the surface soil and turf, kerbs, paving or
other material to restore the disturbed surfaces to their original state or condition to
4.8.2.2 Reinstatement of Unpaved Areas
Refill and compact trenches through unpaved areas to within 300mm of the adjoining
ground level. Fill the top 300mm with top-soil to the finished level. Include fertilizing
soil and re-turfing as necessary.
4.8.2.3 Reinstatement of Paved Areas
Refill and compact trenches through paved areas up to the underside of the existing
paving construction (including sub-base). Construct the base and paving similar to
the original to the satisfaction of the owner or appropriate authority. For rigid concrete
slab pavement ensure proper lapping between the replaced and existing
reinforcement.
4.8.2.4 Reinstatement of Existing Fences & Hedges
Replace and restore all fences and hedges with matching material or as directed.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission

5.1.1.1 General
Provide a detailed method statement to the SO for acceptance prior to
commencement of the works.
Include proposals for the methods and sequence of works, proposal for temporary
works and or ground water control required, plant and equipment, removal of debris,
control of noise, dirt, dust and any other potential nuisance.
Using BS EN 1610 as a guide, give detailed accounts of:
a. Delivery, handling and storage of pipes and other materials
b. Trenching work and supports for stability, dewatering, backfilling and
reinstatement.
c. Pipe laying work, giving sequence, e.g. starting at downstream end, line and level
control, protection of the work at intermediate stages, cutting and jointing and
other situations, e.g. pipes near structures.
d. Testing sequence, methods and arrangements.
5.1.1.2 Pipe Jacking

For pipe jacking works provide further information as follows:
a. General description of the method of construction, with details of sequence,
including information such as whether any crucial operations will proceed on a 24-
hour basis
b. Main kinds of materials and equipment to be used, supported by technical details
c. Site data that is relevant to the method of work or appropriate to the proposed
equipment and materials, e.g. the soil profile and soil parameters; nearby utility
lines and structures, etc
d. Proposed jacking procedures, including handling and jointing of pipes, temporary
jacking pits and thrust blocks
e. Information on key personnel deployed, their qualifications and past experience –
to indicate their performance capability
f. Special measures and precautions, e.g. for maintaining face stability, preventing
or minimising loss of ground movement or subsidence and contingency provisions
especially for unstable ground ahead of the jacking face
g. Corrective procedures for misaligned or damaged pipe sections
h. Monitoring of the jacking process and also of nearby structures and utility lines,
including recording and reporting procedures
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.2 Programme
Submit the programme for various stages of work for acceptance.
5.1.3 Setting-out Plan

Submit the setting-out plan for the sewer line as endorsed by the registered surveyor
to the SO for acceptance prior to commencing the field works.

Submit as-built drawings to the SO for record on completion of each phase of
completion of work.

Submit maintenance/ replacement manual at the completion of the construction
5.2 Testing
5.2.1 Testing for Concrete and Reinforcement Works

clause 5.0.
5.2.2 Testing for Earthworks Materials

Refer to section C2-20, clause 5.4.
5.2.3 Testing for Pavement Reinstatement Works

5.2.4 Pipework Testing for Watertightness

Test all sewers below 600 mm in diameter before being surrounded and covered, by
filling with water. The pressure is to be measured relative to the highest point of the
pipeline under test and is to be minimum 1.5 metre head of water. Pipelines are not
accepted until they have withstood the required pressure for 30 minutes without a
loss in excess of 1.5 litres for 100 m for each 300 mm in diameter. Test length of
sewers between manholes.
Sewers of 600 mm and above in diameter need not be hydraulically tested. They are
to be inspected manually or by CCTV.
Carry out a further water test on completion of the works preceded by rodding with a
profile disk to ensure the nominal bore of the drain is clear of any restriction.
Upon completion of each section of the work, submit an Interim Test Certificate as
confirmation of the successful testing of backfilled drain lines and manholes.
5.2.5 Manhole Testing

Clean manholes internally prior to testing.
Unless otherwise directed adopt the following procedure:
Seal all connections to the manhole, then fill with water to a level 1.5m above the
channel invert, or 0.5m above the highest connection, whichever is greater. After
allowing for absorption to take place, add water up to the previous level. Do not add
more water for 30 minutes. If at the end of this period, the water has not dropped in
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
level by more than 0.40l/m², the manhole is regarded as satisfactory. Should the
drop in level be more than 25mm, locate and repair the leakage.
For manholes constructed below the ground water table, close all outlet pipes by
means of expanding stoppers. After a period of 30 minutes if water has entered the
manhole at a rate of 0.40l/m² or more, the manhole is regarded as unsatisfactory.
Locate and repair the leakage.
5.2.6 System Testing and Commissioning

Carry out Air Test and or Water Test in accordance with PUB requirement where
relevant, or BS EN 1610 where directed. Refer to Mechanical work section P5-40 for
details of tests.
In the event of the failure of any test, or the occurrence of infiltration, locate and repair
the defect and repeat the test.
Submit a final Test Certificate following successful testing of the entire works.
5.2.6.1 Authority Inspection
For sewers to be handed over to Sewerage department for maintenance allow for
inspection by the authority representative. Propose and rectify any defects to the
satisfaction of the authority.
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
C6-20 Building Drain Construction
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
3. MATERIALS 11
3.1 Concrete 11
3.2 Brickworks 11
3.3 Reinforcements 11
3.4 Formwork and Shuttering 12
3.5 Pipes 12
3.6 Water-Resistance Elements 13
3.7 Ground Material 13
3.8 Piles 14
3.9 Trench Supports 14
3.10 Geotextiles 14
3.11 Paving 15
3.12 Accessories 15
4. WORKMANSHIP 17
4.1 General 17
4.2 Setting-out 17
4.3 Excavation 17
4.4 Embedment and Support 17
4.5 Drain Construction 18
4.6 Silt Traps and Sumps 19
4.7 Backfill and Reinstatement 19

5.1 Submission 20
5.2 Inspection and Testing 20
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of external drains in building
projects as part of external works in the vicinity of a building compound or within an
estate development. It does not cover major drainage projects in infrastructure
development, which are undertaken by the Public Utilities Board. Refer to
specification issued by the PUB Drainage Department for such works.
This section covers the construction of open channel or box drains and culverts.
section.

C3-20 Reinforcement
C4-20 Driven Piling
C7-10 Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and Footways
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 7 Paint-Finishing, gloss enamel
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
SS 17 Steel tubes suitable for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads

SS 34 Undercoat paint fro gloss enamel
SS 103 Burnt clay and shale bricks
SS 183 Concrete cylindrical pipes and fittings including manholes and street
gullies
SS 272 Unplasticized PVC pipes below ground for drainlines and sewers
SS 494 Lead and Chromate free primer for iron and steel substrates
Other Standards
BS 1200 Building sands from natural sources
BS 1424 Manhole steps
BS 1472 Specification fro wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys fro general
engineering purposes-bars, extruded round tubes and sections:
forging stocks and forgings
BS 1474 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general
engineering purposes-bars, extruded round tubes and sections
BS 1521 Waterproof building papers
BS 1740 Specification for wrought steel pipe fittings
BS 2499-1 Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavement.
Specification for joint sealants
BS 4962 Specification for plastics pipes and fittings for use as subsoil field
drains
BS 5212 Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements.
BS EN 1610 Construction and testing of drains and sewers
EN ISO 9864 Geosynethetics. Test method for the determination of mass per unit
area of geotextiles and geotextiles related products.
BS EN ISO Geotextiles - Wide-width tensile test
10319
ASTM C171 Standard specification for sheet materials for curing concrete
ASTM C309 Standard specification for liquid membrane-forming compounds for
curing concrete
ASTM D1752 Standard specification for preformed sponge rubber and cork
expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction
ASTM D2628 Standard specification for preformed polychloroprene elastomeric
joint seals for concrete pavements
ASTM D4533 Standard test method for trapezoidal tearing strength of geotextiles
ASTM D4595 Standard test method for tensile properties of geotextiles by the
wide-width strip method
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
ASTM D4632 Standard test method for grab breaking load and elongation of
geotextiles
ASTM D5261 Standard test method for measuring mass per unit area of geotextiles
clauses.

a. LTA Standard Details of Road Elements
b. BRE Digest 251, Assessment of damage in low-rise building, 1995
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended layout and details for the proposed drainage system for the project are
shown in the drawings. Based on the information given engage qualified and
experienced personnel to propose the following for the works to SO’s acceptance:
Propose suitable equipment and methods to carry out the works including excavation,
piling, laying of precast units, backfill and compacting etc. Take into account of the
performance requirement as set out in clause 2.1 and submit the proposals to the SO
for acceptance.
precautionary measures including temporary slope, retaining structures, temporary
trench supports and control of ground water etc. for the stability of the works.
Submit the design to the SO for acceptance and to the relevant Authority.
underground services to facilitate the works.

5
Version 1.0
NPQS


and readings.
Section C2-50.


6
Version 1.0
NPQS


1.4.9 Obstructions

Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) to carry out tests as required
1.4.11 Connection to Existing Drains

Be responsible for the connection of the works to the receiving drainage system to
the acceptance of PUB Drainage Department.

Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-out of
alignment and levels of the drains. Develop the details for the setting-out based on
the information given in the drawings.

No items.
1.4.14 Safety
notably:
Regulations
d. Factories Act
7
Version 1.0
NPQS

1.4.15 As-Build Surveys

Engage a Licensed Surveyor to be responsible for surveying the position and levels
of the drain system and submit the as–build survey to the SO in format as directed
upon completion of the works. Submit the as-built surveys to the authorities where
applicable.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 General Requirements of the Drainage System

Ensure the following basic performance requirements to which the drainage systems
operate are achieved:
a. The drains are to operate without blocking or stagnation of water
b. Public health and life are to be safeguarded
c. Drains are not to endanger existing adjacent structures and utility services.
d. Drains are to achieve and maintain the structural integrity and required durability.
e. Drains are generally watertight at the joints and connections.
f. Appropriate openings and ventilation are provided for safe maintenance of box
drains and culverts.

Ensure the adequate provision of temporary supports to provide stability for the
excavation and for the control of ground water draw down and ground movement to
safeguard adjacent properties.
2.1.3 Compliance with Standard PUB Drainage Department Requirements

2.1.3.1 Workmanship
Ensure that the workmanship of the works meet with the requirements of PUB
Drainage Department as set out in the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
2.1.3.2 Standard Details
Verify and ensure that the various elements of the drain system comply with the
standard details as set out in the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage and
LTA ‘s “Standard Details Drawings”.

Based on the results of the damage assessment as set out in Clause1.4.1.3, propose
the allowable ground settlement and vibration limits due to the works taking into
account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
2001).
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
where relevant.
2.3 Noise Nuisance

over the works.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Concrete
For general requirements of concrete refer to section C3-10, clause 3.0.
Unless otherwise specified in the PSD, use Ordinary Portland cement for all concrete
works.
When required as indicated in the drawings, Granolithic concrete is to consist of one

part cement, two parts of sand and three parts of 5mm single sized aggregate
complying with BS EN 1610, Table B15.
3.1.1 Curing Materials

Curing materials are to comply with the following specifications:
3.2 Brickworks
3.2.1 Brick
Common bricks is to be of standard size, even shape, hard, well burnt, and machine
made pressed bricks with true arrises to SO’s acceptance.
Engineering bricks are to be obtained from accepted manufacturers and are to be
hand selected so that they will in general conform to SS 103 with a minimum average
compressive strength not less than 31 N/mm2. They are to be sound, hard, square
made, well burnt throughout, regular in size and shape, with good faces and clean
arrises and free from lime, chalk, pebbles, shell or other extraneous matter and other
defects.
3.2.2 Sand
The sand for cement mortar etc. is to be fine sand complying with BS 1200.
3.3 Reinforcements
For general requirements refer to section C3-20 “Reinforcement”, clause 3.0.
3.3.1 Tie Bars

3.3.2 Dowel Bars

Dowel bars are to be plain mild steel bars complying with SS 2, and free from burring
or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the
construction site, a minimum of two-thirds of the length of each dowel bar is to be
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.4 Formwork and Shuttering

Refer to section C3-30, clause 3.0 for general requirements.
Shuttering for concrete is to be rigidly constructed. Faces in contact with concrete are
to be free from adhering grout, projecting nails, splits or other defects. Joints are to be
sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of cement grout, and to avoid the formation of
fins or other blemishes. Faulty joints are to be caulked. Form openings for inspection
of the inside of the shuttering and for the escape of water used for washing out so
that they can be conveniently closed before placing the concrete.
Connections are to be constructed to permit easy removal of the shuttering and are to
be either nailed, screwed, bolted, clamped wire or otherwise secured so as to be
strong enough to retain the correct shape during consolidation of the concrete. Bolt-
holes in concrete are to be made good after removal of the bolts. Wire ties passing
through concrete are to be used only where approved, and the ends of the wires are
to be concealed and measures taken to prevent rust stains on the concrete.
Provide shuttering for the top faces of sloping work and anchored to prevent
floatation, where the slope exceeds 1 in 2½.
Shuttering is to be true to line and braced and strutted to prevent deformation under
the weight and pressure of the wet concrete, construction loads, wind, and other
forces. The defection is not to exceed 3mm.
3.5 Pipes
All materials used for sub-soil drains are to conform to the following requirements:
3.5.1 Precast Concrete Pipes

3.5.1.1 Thick-Wall Reinforced Concrete Pipes
All thick-wall reinforced concrete pipes are to have an internal sacrificial layer of
38mm in addition to the normal cover for reinforcement as provided for in the design
of reinforced concrete pipes and in compliance with SS 183.
3.5.1.2 Joints and Fittings
Pipes and fittings are to be double spigot for jointing with push-fit polypropylene
flexible couplings.
3.5.2 uPVC Pipe

uPVC pipes and fittings are to comply with SS 272.
Perforated uPVC pipes and fittings are to comply with BS 4962.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6 Water-Resistance Elements
3.6.1 Pre-moulded Expansion Joint Filler

Unless otherwise agreed, pre-moulded joint filler for expansion joints is to comply with
the requirements of ASTM D1752 and be punched to admit the dowel bars where
required.
For contraction joints, the filler is to be a resin-impregnated fibreboard or self-
expanding cork complying with the requirements of ASTM D1752.
3.6.2 Joint Sealers

Joint sealers are to comply with the following standards:
a. Hot-poured Sealant BS 2499, Type A2
b. Cold-poured Sealant BS 5212
c. Performed Compression Seal ASTM D2628
3.6.3 Waterproofing Membrane

Unless otherwise directed, provide a waterproofing membrane complying with the
requirements of BS 1521 Class BIF on top of the prepared subgrade or sub-base.
Where an overlap of the membrane is necessary provide at least 300 mm lap.
3.7 Ground Material
3.7.1 Granular Material for Bedding

Granular material for bedding of channels and drain sections is to be natural sand,
crushed rock or crushed concrete or other accepted granular material which are well
graded and lie within the grading limits tabulated below. The particle size is to be
determined in accordance with BS 1377.
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
10 mm 45 - 100
5 mm 25 - 85
600 m 8 - 45
75 m 0 - 10
3.7.2 Hardcore
Hardcore are to consist of broken stone, brick, or other approved hard material. They
are to be free from clay, dust and other deleterious matter and are not to contain
pieces exceeding 150mm or less than 60mm gauge.
3.7.3 Backfill Material

Refer to section C2-20, clause 3.1 for general requirement of fill material. Excavated
material may be used for backfill subject to agreement from the SO.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.7.4 Top Soil

Top soil are to be excavated separately from the subsoil and are to be kept separate
and be used to cover trenches, embankments, slopes, verges, etc. as directed.
3.8 Piles
3.8.1 Reinforced Concrete, Steel and Treated Timber Piles

Refer to section C4-20 “Driven Piling”, clause 3.0 for requirement on materials.
3.8.2 Bakau Pile

Bakau Piles are to be good, sound, straight piles with fresh uninjured bark and of
uniform size. They are to be supplied in 3 or 6 metres lengths as required with
maximum one joint, measured after the heads have been squared and the ends
pointed. They are not to be less than 65mm diameter at the thinner end, and of an
approved species of timber for use as piles in ground below the water table.
Splicing is to be by means of a mild steel collar of 110mm internal diameter and
400mm in length. The collar is to be fabricated from a single Galvanised Steel Sheet
of SWG 12 (2.64mm) thickness with 15mm diameter mild steel bar strut at the centre
of the collar and all is to be well coated with bituminous paint to SO’s acceptance
before being put to use.
3.9 Trench Supports
3.9.1 Timber
All timber used for timbering of excavation or shoring are to be of adequate section
and quality. Timber used in trenches to support the face of the excavations must be
at least Medium Hardwood as in accordance with the Malaysian Grading Rules for
Malaysian Timbers.
The timber used in shuttering must be of sound, well seasoned timber and free from
shakes, twists or other defects. Plywood lining for shuttering must be of an approved
thickness and type of timber, resin bonded and water repellent.
Timber used in carpentry and joinery must be sound, thoroughly seasoned and free
from defects. The timber is to have a straight uniform grain and be of an approved
species for each purpose.
3.9.1.1 Timber Preservative
All timber hardboard etc. to be permanently incorporated into the works are to be
pressure impregnated with an approved preservative. The preservative are to be of a
type resistant to all forms of rot, termite and insect attack.
3.9.2 Steel
Refer to section C5-10, clause 3.1 for general requirement of structural steel.
Refer to section C2-30-2, clause 3.0 for general requirement of steel sheet piles.
3.10 Geotextiles
Unless otherwise agreed, geotextiles are to be non-woven and to be made of
Polypropylene, Polyethylene, Polyester or a combination of these materials.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
Geotextiles are not to be susceptible to bacteria and fungus attack and to be resistant
to chemical action and not affected by exposure to ultra-violet light.
Where the geotextiles serve a separation or reinforcement function, use class A
geotextiles. Where the geotextiles serve a filtration function, use class B geotextiles.
The requirements for class A and class B geotextiles are as tabulated below:
Physical Properties of Geotextiles
Class of Geotextile
Physical Property Specification
Class A Class B
Minimum Unit Weight, 125 50 ASTM D5261 or

g/m2 BS EN ISO 9864
Minimum Grab Tensile 530 270 ASTM D4632
Strength, N
Minimum Elongation to 60 55 ASTM D4595 or
Break, % BS EN ISO 10319
Tear Strength, N
Water Permeability, 2.0x10-2 2.7x10-2 Manufacturer’s test
cm/sec report to be submitted
3.11 Paving
For paving on driveways and footways refer to section C7-20, clause 3.0.
For finishing on concrete slab refer to architectural specifications.
3.12 Accessories
3.12.1 Gratings
Unless otherwise specified, Gratings for both pedestrian and vehicular traffic are to
be galvanised mild steel in compliance with the standard details as set out in PUB
Drainage Department’s Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
3.12.2 Roadside Drop Inlets and Gratings

Comply with the standard precast details as set out in PUB Drainage Department’s
Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage and LTA’s Standard details of road
elements.
3.12.3 Aluminium Rung

Provide rungs at 300mm centres and stringers 380mm apart. Provide strong support
stays on both sides of the rungs at not more than 2.5m centres.
For drains to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department, the aluminium rungs are
to comply with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
Where otherwise indicated, the rungs are to be of alloy H30 in the form of HE 30 TF
to BS 1474 and the stringers are to be of alloy N5 in the form of NE 5m to BS 1474.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.12.4 Step-Iron
Step-irons are to comply with BS 1247.
3.12.5 Handrailing
Provide standard safety railings for all open drains more than 1.0m deep. The safety
railings are to comply with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage if the
drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department.
Where otherwise indicated, handrailings are to be made from welded hot dipped
galvanised mild steel tube of 30mm internal diameter, complying with SS 17. Fittings
for handrail are to comply with BS 1740.
3.12.6 Paint
Obtain all paints including primers and undercoats as ready mixed for use from
accepted manufacturers. All paintings are to comply with the Code of Practice on
Surface Water Drainage if the drain is to be handed over to PUB Drainage
Department.
Tints and shades (including undercoats) are to SO’s selection and acceptance.
Where otherwise indicated, priming paints for structural steel and cast iron are to
comply with SS 494. Priming paints for zinc or aluminium surfaces are to be
approved zinc chromate priming paint. Oil-based undercoat and finishing paints are
to be similar to SS7 and SS34 but the pigments are to exclude white lead.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
In planning and executing the works, be guided by the requirements as set out in BS
EN 1610. Comply also with the relevant requirements of PUB Drainage Department’s
Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
4.2 Setting-out
Before any work commences, set out and mark the centreline of the drain line by
pegs.
Verify and confirm the levels and alignment of the drain line before excavation.
4.3 Excavation
4.3.1 General
Comply with the workmanship requirements in section C2-20, clause 4.3 for
excavation. Take note of other particular requirements as below.
Ensure the excavation is carried out in accordance with the Factories Act, and The
Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction Regulations.
4.3.2 Trenching
Refer to section C6-10, clause 4.3.2.
4.3.3 Excavated Material

Adequately protect materials that are suitable for use as backfill to preserve the
suitability for re-use.
Place excavated materials at a safe distance from the excavations and not closer
than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the excavation, unless suitable
working and safety arrangements are otherwise agreed.
4.3.4 Excessive Excavation

Where excavations have been carried out beyond the width or depth required, to the
detriment of the support or foundation of any of the works, re-fill with G10 concrete or
other compacted material as agreed.
4.4 Embedment and Support
4.4.1 Piling
4.4.1.1 Bakau Piling
Where shown in the drawings or when the excavated formation is assessed to be
unable to support the works without undue settlement, drive bakau piles as directed
to improve the support capacity.
Drive test piles as necessary or as directed to establish the stability of the ground
below formation level, as well as to establish an indicative value for the set and
number of blows based on the weight of the hammering equipment in order to
achieve the required improvement to the ground stability.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
Drive bakau piles straight in positions. Where necessary join piles to form lengths
longer than those naturally available. Ensure such joints will firmly secure the two
sections and bring the pile ends into close contact for driving.
On completion of driving, saw off all the pile heads to the required level. Trim the
excavation from around the piles and clean the pile heads free of clay and other soils.
4.4.1.2 Other Pile Types
Where the loads, conditions or water table are unsuitable for the use of Bakau piling,
or where indicated in the drawings, use alternative method and types of piling
including Precast RC piles and Tanalised timber piles. Refer to section C4-20, clause
4.4 for driving requirements.
Submit full details of the type of piling, load testing, sets proposals etc. for SO’s
acceptance before the work commences.
4.4.2 Hardcore Bedding

Lay hardcore and compact to the required crossfalls and levels in the same manner
as sub-base preparation as set out in section C7-10, clause 4.4. Ensure the hardcore
material is fully blinded with accepted sand or granite dust to form a firm base to
receive the precast units or cast in place concrete. Provide Grade 10 lean concrete
where required in the drawings.
4.5 Drain Construction
4.5.1 Cast In-situ Culverts and Drains

Comply with the general requirements of concrete works as set out in sections C3-10,
clause 4.0, and C3-20, clause 4.0.
4.5.2 Precast Channels

Lay all channels to the required lines and depths as shown in the drawings with all
bends and junctions being carefully made to allow smooth and even flow.
Lay the precast units on concrete base or sand with or without bakau rollers as
shown in the drawings. Seal all joints and finish the internal surfaces and tops of the
channels with cement and sand mortar (1:3), trowel smooth.
4.5.3 Cascades
Where the natural slope of the ground falls steeply longitudinally or where indicated in
the drawings, provide cascade steps of minimum 75mm high, formed with Grade 30
concrete to the required levels and finish smooth on exposed surface.
4.5.4 Sub-Soil Drains

Refer to section C6-10, clause 4.5 for general requirements of pipe laying and
jointing.
Cover the pipes with granular material and then wrap with geotextile to prevent
ingress of fines.
Backfill and reinstate as in clause 4.7 below.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5.5 Roadside Inlet Pipe Drains

Lay precast inlet pipe drains in excavated trenches on Grade 30 concrete bedding,
haunched to the required levels and gradients.
4.5.6 Weepholes
Provide weepholes with accepted uPVC pipes without any bend or sag.
Provide granular material and geotextile wrapping as required before backfilling of the
drain surrounding.
4.5.7 Gratings
Propose and comply with suitable method to secure the gratings on the drain slab.
4.6 Silt Traps and Sumps

Construct Silt traps, sumps and covers generally as for manholes and inspection
chambers in section C6-10, clause 4.7.
4.7 Backfill and Reinstatement
4.7.1 Backfill
4.7.1.1 Backfill Material
Backfill with approved material re-cycled from the excavation or imported as agreed
otherwise. Refer to section C6-10, clause 4.8 for general requirements.
4.7.2 Surface Reinstatement

4.7.2.1 General
As the work proceeds replace and maintain the surface soil and turf, kerbs, paving or
other material to restore the disturbed surfaces to their original state or condition to
4.7.2.2 Reinstatement of Unpaved Areas
Refill and compact trenches through unpaved areas to within 300mm of the adjoining
ground level. Fill the top 300mm with top-soil to the finished level. Include fertilizing
soil and re-turfing as necessary.
4.7.2.3 Reinstatement of Paved Areas
Refill and compact trenches through paved areas up to the underside of the existing
paving construction (including sub-base). Construct the base and paving similar to
the original to the satisfaction of the owner or appropriate authority. For rigid concrete
slab pavement ensure proper lapping between the replaced and existing
reinforcement.
Refer to section C7-20, clause 4.0 for general requirements of different types of
paving.
4.7.2.4 Reinstatement of Existing Fences & Hedges
Replace and restore all fences and hedges with matching material or as directed.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission

5.1.1.1 General
Include proposals for the methods and sequence of works, proposal for temporary
works and or ground water control required, plant and equipment, removal of debris,
control of noise, dirt, dust and any other potential nuisance.
5.1.2 Programme

Submit the setting-out plan for the sewer line as endorsed by the registered surveyor
to the SO for acceptance prior to commencing the field works.

Submit to the SO for record as-built drawings on completion of each phase of
completion of work.
5.2 Inspection and Testing
5.2.1 Testing for Concrete and Reinforcement Works

clause 5.0.
5.2.2 Testing for Earthworks Materials

5.2.3 Testing for Pavement Reinstatement Works

5.2.4 Drain Testing

5.2.4.1 Sumps and Silt Traps
Test completed sumps and silt traps for watertightness at the joints by water test in
the same manner as for manhole testing in section C6-10, clause 5.2.5.
5.2.4.2 Drain
Test the drain for flow and alignment by water. Propose and rectify any defects before
backfilling and reinstatement.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2.4.3 Authority Inspection

For drain to be handed over to PUB Drainage Department for maintenance allow for
inspection by the authority representative. Propose and rectify any defects to the
satisfaction of the authority.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards and Technical References 3
1.5 Definition 7
3. MATERIALS 10
3.1 Subgrade Soil 10
3.2 Sub-bases 10
3.3 Bases 11
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 Services 14
4.2 Setting-out 14
4.3 Subgrade 15
4.4 Sub-bases and Bases 15
4.5 Paving 17
4.6 Surface Regularity and Rectification 17
4.7 Use Of Surfaces by Vehicular Traffic 19

5.1 Submission 20
5.2 Tests 20
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of roads and driveways in
building projects as part of external works or as estate roads for circulation within an
estate development to be handed over to LTA for maintenance. It does not cover
public road-works from major arterials (expressways) to local access roads, which are
undertaken by or for the LTA. Refer to the LTA’s Material and Workmanship
Specifications for such works.
The section covers general construction requirements such as setting out, tolerances,
sub-grade, sub-base and bases. For requirements of paving refer to section C7-20
and for ancillaries refer to section C7-30.
section.

C7-30 Road Ancillaries
1.3 Standards and Technical References
1.3.1 Standards
Singapore Standards
Other Standards
BS 5835: Part 1 Recommendations for testing of aggregates. Compatibility test for
graded aggregates
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
EN ISO 9864 Geosynthetics-Test method for the determination of mass per unit
area of geotextiles and geotexttiles related productstextiles -
Determination of mass per unit area
BS EN ISO Geotextiles - Wide-width tensile test
10319
ASTM D2950 Standard test method for density of bituminous concrete in place by
nuclear methods
ASTM D4533 Standard test method for trapezoidal tearing strength of geotextiles
ASTM D4595 Standard test method for tensile properties of geotextiles by the
wide-width strip method
ASTM D4632 Standard test method for grab breaking load and elongation of
geotextiles
ASTM D5261 Standard test method for measuring mass per unit area of geotextiles
clauses.

a. LTA Standard Details of Road Elements
b. LTA Material and Workmanship Specification for C&S works
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended layout and details for the proposed road and paving works for the
project are shown in the drawings. Based on the information given engage qualified
and experienced personnel to propose the following for the works to the SO’s
acceptance:

Propose suitable equipment and methods to carry out the works including mixing,
transporting, laying, compacting and protection of the various courses. Take into
account of the performance requirement as set out in clause 2 and submit the
proposals to SO for acceptance.

precautionary measures including temporary slope, retaining structures and supports
for the stability of the works.
Submit the design to the SO for acceptance and to the Authority where applicable.

4
Version 1.0
NPQS

underground services to facilitate the works. Obtain approval from the relevant
services department.



and readings.
Section C2-50.


5
Version 1.0
NPQS




Provide and maintain all necessary temporary access roads and divert and reinstate
the permanent drainage system to the satisfaction of the relevant authority.
approval prior to their construction.
Provide all temporary roads with drainage ditches over their full length.
1.4.9 Obstructions

Specification.

Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual for the completed road
works, including paving and ancillaries, to be carried out by the building owners.
Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for details.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
Incorporate the maintenance of the road works against long term residue settlement
where required as indicated in the PSD.


Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-out and
levelling of the horizontal and vertical alignments, and all other ancillary works.
Develop the details for setting-out for horizontal and vertical alignment based on the
information given in the drawings.

No items.
1.4.15 Safety
notably:
Regulations
d. Factories Act
1.4.16 As-build Surveys

Engage a Licensed Surveyor to be responsible for surveying the alignment and levels
of the estate roadwork system and submit the as–build survey to the SO in format as
directed upon completion of the works. Submit the as-built surveys to the authorities
where applicable.
1.5 Definition
a. Subgrade The layer immediately below formation level on
which the sub-base is laid.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Strength and Densities Requirement of the Respective Layers

Ensure the achievement of the strength and density requirements for the sub-grade,
sub-base and bases as stipulated in clause 3 below.

Comply with the requirement of earth works as stipulated in section C2-20 “General
Earthworks (Excavation and Filling)”, clause 2.0, including the requirements for
temporary supports, slope stability and control of ground movements to adjacent
structures and properties.

On completion of compaction the surface of any layer of material is to be well-closed,
free from movement under compaction plant, ridges, cracks or loose material. Make
good and re-compact all loose/segregated or otherwise defective areas to the full
thickness of the layer.
2.1.4 Standard Details

Verify and ensure that the various elements of the road works comply with the
standard details as set out in LTA’s “Standard Details of Road Elements”.

Based on the results of the damage assessment as set out in Clause 1.4.1.3,
propose the allowable ground settlement and vibration limits due to the works taking
into account the vulnerability and sensitivity of the adjacent properties.
2001).
where relevant.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.3 Noise Nuisance

over the works.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Subgrade Soil

The soil at the top 500mm of the subgrade is to have a soaked CBR (California
Bearing Ratio) value of more than 6%. In the event that the required CBR value is
less than specified, remove and replace with selected fill or stabilise the in-situ soil by
accepted means.
In fill areas use material capable of being compacted to achieve the required value.
Do not use non-suitable materials, including:
a. Material from swamps, marshes or bogs.
b. Peat, logs, stumps or other organic matter and perishable and toxic materials.
c. Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion.
d. Clay of liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55.
3.1.1 Subgrade Density

In areas where the above requirement is met, compact the top 200mm to densities
relative to the maximum dry density based on BS 1377 as follows:
a. 95% in the case of subgrade falling within 500mm below formation level.
b. 90% in the case of subgrade falling more than 500mm below formation level.
3.2 Sub-bases
Sub-base materials are to be natural sand, crushed rock or crushed concrete or other
accepted granular material that are well graded and lie within the grading limits
tabulated below. The particle size is to be determined in accordance with BS 1377.
75 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
10 mm 45 - 100
5 mm 25 - 85
600 m 8 - 45
75 m 0 - 10
The material passing the 425m sieve, when tested in accordance with BS 1377, is
to have a plasticity index of less than 6. If 10% or less of the material is retained on
the 20mm sieve, the fraction that passes is to satisfy the soaked CBR value of 30%
when tested in accordance with BS 1377, using the dynamic compaction method with
a 4.5 kg rammer at the specific density and moisture content likely to be achieved in
the field.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.1 Sub-base Density

The in-situ field density of the compacted layer is to be not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density.
3.3 Bases
3.3.1 Graded Granite Aggregate Base
3.3.1.1 Aggregate
Aggregates are to consist of graded crushed, clean and hard angular aggregate
complying with the requirements of SS 31 and conforming to the gradation tabulated
below:
Gradation of Crushed Granite Aggregate
Aggregates BS Sieve Size % by Weight Passing
50 mm 100
37.5 mm 95-100
Coarse Aggregate 20 mm 60-80
10 mm 40-60
5 mm 25-45
Fine Aggregate 2.36 mm 15-35
425 m 6-18
Mineral Filler 75 m 0-10
3.3.1.2 Water
Water used for mixing is to be clean and substantially free from detrimental impurities
such as oil, salts, acids, alkali and vegetable substance.
3.3.1.3 Soil-Binder Material

When used in a pavement, which is to carry a bituminous surfacing, that portion of
the soil-binder material (if any), which passes a 425m sieve, is to have the following
properties:
a. Liquid Limit: not more than 25%
b. Plasticity Index: not more than 6%
c. Linear Shrinkage: not more than 3%
The sand equivalent of the material passing the 4.8mm sieve is to be not less than
30.
When used in a pavement, which is not to carry a bituminous surfacing, the portion of
the soil-binder material (if any), which passes a 425m sieve, is to have the following
properties:
a. Liquid Limit: not more than 35%
b. Plasticity Index: between 4 and 9%
c. Linear Shrinkage: between 2 and 4%
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3.1.4 Compaction Density

Compaction Density is deemed satisfactory when compacted in accordance with
clause below.
3.3.2 Coarse Granite (Crusher Run) Aggregate Base

Provide coarse aggregate of either crushed stone or crushed gravel free from excess
flat, elongated, or disintegrated pieces, dirt or other objectionable matter. The coarse
aggregate is to have a percentage of wear of not more than 45 at 500 revolutions as
determined by AASHTO T96 (Los Angeles Rattler Test), and meet the gradation
requirements as tabulated below:
Gradation of Coarse Granite Aggregate
90 mm 100
63 mm 80 - 100
37.5 mm 20 - 65
20 mm 0 - 15
Provide fine aggregate screenings obtained from hard, strong granular graded
material of 19mm size and smaller, composed of crushed stone, gravel or sand that
can be used to infill the interstices among the coarse aggregate in the base after
laying.
3.3.2.1 Compaction Density

Compaction Density is deemed satisfactory when compacted in accordance with
clause 4.4.4 below.
3.3.3 Other Types of Bases

Refer to the requirements of LTA’s Material and Workmanship Specification for other
types of base material which are indicated for the project, including:
a. Cement-Bound Granular Material Base
b. Lean Concrete Base
c. Granite Blocks Pitching Base
d. Bitumen-Bound Granular Base
3.3.4 Geotextiles
Unless otherwise agreed, geotextiles are to be non-woven and are to be made of
Polypropylene, Polyethylene, Polyester or a combination of these materials.
Geotextiles are not to be susceptible to bacteria and fungus attack and are to be
resistant to chemical action and not affected by exposure to ultra-violet light.
Where the geotextiles serve a separation or reinforcement function, class A
geotextiles are to be used. Where the geotextiles serve a filtration function, class B
geotextiles are to be used. The requirements for class A and class B geotextiles are
as tabulated below:
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
Physical Properties of Geotextiles

Class of Geotextile
Physical Property Specification
Class A Class B
Minimum Unit Weight, 125 50 ASTM D5261 or BS EN

g/m2 ISO 9864
Minimum Grab Tensile 530 270 ASTM D4632
Strength, N
Minimum Elongation to 60 55 ASTM D4595 or BS EN
Break, % ISO 10319
Tear Strength, N
Water Permeability, 2.0x10-2 2.7x10-2 Manufacturer’s test report
cm/sec to be submitted
3.3.5 Bitumen Emulsion

Bitumen emulsion is to be rapid setting cationic bitumen emulsion conforming to the
requirements of Section C7-20, clause 3.1.3.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Services
Before work on pavement above formation level commences all ducts, drains, and
other works beneath the road are to be completed and backfilled.
4.2 Setting-out
4.2.1 Demarcation
Demarcate all setting-out works on site by masonry nails or wooden pegs, where
appropriate, at 30m intervals along the straight and 5 - 30m intervals along the curves
as tabulated below:
Chord Intervals for Setting-out Curves
Radius of Curve Chord Intervals
R < 600 m 5m
600 m < R < 900 m 10 m
900 m < R < 1800 m 15 m
1800 m < R 30 m
Propose details of the demarcation to the SO’s acceptance.

Demarcate tangent points of curves if they fall within the demarcating intervals.
Drive reference pegs indicating the chainages and reduced levels of the
corresponding stations alongside with the demarcating pegs.
All protruding stems of wooden pegs are to be durable wooden pegs of not less than
50mm diameter and 600mm long, driven 300mm into the ground and embedded in
concrete foundation. Unless otherwise accepted, paint all protruding pegs as
tabulated below:
Colour Codes for Demarcation
Natural of Peg Colour
Centreline Yellow
Kerbline Yellow and white
Road reserve Orange
Reference peg White
Intersection point Red
4.2.2 Horizontal and Vertical Alignment

Determine the horizontal and vertical alignments for setting-out based on the
requirements as indicated in the drawings. Set out edges of carriageways (kerb lines)
by constant offsets from a reference line (centre or inner edge lines) unless otherwise
agreed with the SO.
The edges of the carriageways as constructed are to be correct within a tolerance of
±25 mm. The setting-out of the horizontal alignment is to have a minimum accuracy
of 1 in 5000.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3 Subgrade
4.3.1 Preparation of Subgrade

Subgrade is to be compacted to meet the requirements for field density in Clause
3.1.1 (Subgrade Density).
When completed the surface is to be true to the lines, grades and cross-section
shown in the Drawings. Correct any irregularities by loosening the material and
remove or add material until the surface is smooth and uniform. Compact any portion
not accessible to a roller to the required density by accepted mechanical tampers.
Detect and remove any soft and yielding materials, which will not be compacted
readily when rolled or tamped and replace with suitable material. After grading
operations are completed, remove and dispose of all loose stones larger than 50mm
in their greatest dimension from the surface of all proposed graded paving areas.
4.3.2 Protection of Subgrade

At all times, keep the top of the subgrade in such condition that it will drain readily
and effectively. Take all necessary precautions to protect the subgrade from damage.
Limit hauling over the finished subgrade to that which is essential for construction
purposes. If ruts are formed, reshape and roll the subgrade. Do not store or stockpile
materials on the top of the subgrade. Until the subgrade had been checked and
accepted, no sub-base, base course or pavement is to be laid.
4.3.3 Tolerances in Subgrade Levels

Determine the levels of subgrade from the true finished pavement surface calculated
from the vertical profile and cross-falls as shown in the Drawings. The vertical depth
below the true finished pavement surface of any point on the constructed surface of
subgrade is to be within  25mm.
4.3.4 Compaction
Comply with the requirements as set out in Section C2-20 “General Earthworks
(Excavation and Filling)”, clause 4.7.
4.4 Sub-bases and Bases
4.4.1 Work Method

Carry out the mixing, transporting, laying and spreading, compaction and protection
of the sub-bases and bases in accordance with the requirements as set out in LTA’s
Material and Workmanship Specification.
4.4.2 Mixing
4.4.2.1 Plant Mixing for Graded Granite Aggregate Base

Mix the aggregates at a mixing plant by continuous mixing using a pug-mill mixer or
batch type mixing using a revolving blade, rotary pan, or rotary tilting drum mixer. The
plant is to be in sound mechanical condition and consistently produce a uniform
mixture of aggregates and water at optimum moisture content or at the moisture
content proposed and accepted by the SO.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4.2.2 Mixing In-place Graded Granite Aggregate Base

Deposit the base aggregate and thoroughly mix in-place by means of accepted
graders, discs, harrows, rotary tillers or other accepted equipment. Continue mixing
until the mixture is uniform throughout. Correct any segregation by adding suitable
material and re-mixing. If necessary, apply water uniformly prior to and during the
mixing to maintain the material at the required moisture content.
4.4.3 Laying and Spreading

Place and spread sub-base material evenly. Undertake spreading immediately after
placing material on site. Compact the sub-base material in layers of not more than
200mm thick. Lay the material using mechanical aggregate spreader. The sub-base
material under un-reinforced concrete pavements with warping joints is to provide a
smooth close textured surface, when laid and compacted.
Lay the graded granite aggregate base material using a mechanical aggregate
spreader in uniform layers of not more than 150mm, each layer without segregation
of size and in such loose depth that when compacted, the thickness of the compacted
layer is not to exceed 250mm. Provide a smooth close textured surface to the sub
base material under un-reinforced concrete pavements with warping joints.
Other mechanical equipment, which can level off the material to an even depth, may
be used subject to SO’s acceptance.
Begin the spreading of the sub-base or base material along the centreline of the
pavement on a crowned section or on the high side of pavements with a one-way
slope.
4.4.4 Compacting
Compact the sub-base and base material in layers of not more than 200 mm thick as
soon as possible after deposition. The depth of each compacted layer is to be
compatible with the compaction plant used and in accordance with the requirements
tabulated below:
Compaction Requirements for Granular and Cement-Bound Granular Materials
Type of Category Number of Passes
Compactio < 100mm < 150mm < 225mm
n Plant per layer per layer per layer
Smooth- Force per 100mm width
Wheeled 2.6 kN - 5.2 kN 16 Unsuitable Unsuitable
roller more than 5.2 kN 8 16 Unsuitable
Pneumatic- Wheel Load (Tonnes)

tyred roller 4 – 6 12 Unsuitable Unsuitable
6–8 12 Unsuitable Unsuitable
8 – 12 10 16 Unsuitable
more than 12 8 12 Unsuitable
Vibratory Static force per 100mm
Roller width of vibratory roller
(kN)
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
0.70 – 1.25 16 Unsuitable Unsuitable

1.26 – 1.75 6 16 Unsuitable
1.76 – 2.30 4 6 10
2.31 – 2.80 3 5 9
2.81 – 3.50 3 5 8
3.51 – 4.20 2 4 7
4.21 – 4.90 2 4 6
Vibrating- Static pressure under
Plate base plate (kPa)
compactor 13.8 – 17.2 8 Unsuitable Unsuitable
17.3 – 20.7 5 8 Unsuitable
more than 20.7 3 6 10
Vibro- Mass (kg)
Tamper 50 – 65 4 8 Unsuitable
66 – 75 3 6 10
more than 75 2 4 12
Power Mass (kg)
rammer or
dropping 100 – 150 5 8 Unsuitable
Weight 500 5 8 12
compactor
4.5 Paving
4.6 Surface Regularity and Rectification
4.6.1 Surface Levels
4.6.1.1 Pavement Courses

The levels of pavement courses is to be determined from the true finished pavement
surface, which is to be the surface of the wearing course for flexible pavement,
calculated from the carriageway vertical profile and cross-falls as shown in the
drawings. The depth of the constructed pavement courses/formation at any point
below the true pavement surface is to be within the appropriate tolerances tabulated
below:
Surface Tolerances
Finished Surface Base Sub-base Formation
±5 mm ±15 mm ±20 mm ±25 mm
Measurements of surface levels are to be taken at grid points of 30m centres

longitudinally, 10m centres on curves and 3m centres transversely starting at 1m from
the edge of the pavement. In any length of pavement represented by the grid,
compliance is deemed to be met when not more than 1 measurement in 10 exceeds
the permitted tolerance as specified in the table.
4.6.1.2 Wearing Course

The surface level of the laid wearing course is not to deviate vertically at any point
from the true pavement surface by more than ±5 mm. However, for flexible
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
pavements, the negative tolerance is not permitted in conjunction with the positive
permitted tolerance for the surface of the base course, if the thickness of the wearing
course is reduced by more than 10 mm.
4.6.2 Surface Regularity
4.6.2.1 Longitudinal Regularity

The longitudinal regularity of the surfaces of wearing course and base course is to be
within the relevant tolerances tabulated below. An irregularity is a variation in the
profile of the road surface as measured by a 3m long rolling straight edge or
equivalent instruments operated parallel to the centreline of the carriageway and
1.2m from the nearside edge of each lane of the carriageway. Irregularity is not to
exceed 10mm.
Maximum Permitted Number of Irregularities
a) Flexible base course of
Finished surface of carriageways
carriageways b) Finished surface of any
hard shoulder, lay-by, or
service area
Irregularity 3mm 6mm 3mm 6mm
exceeding
Traverse length 300m 75 300 75m 300m 75m 300 75m
m m m
Local access 40 18 4 1 66 27 6 3
roads
4.6.2.2 Traverse Length

The traverse length of 300m and its associated numbers of irregularities applies
whenever the continuous length of completed carriageway is 300m or more, whether
or not it is constructed in shorter lengths. Where the total length of pavement is less
than 300m, take the measurements based on 75m lengths.
4.6.2.3 Surface Regularity on Short Pavement Lengths

For lengths less than 75m, or where it is agreed that the use of the rolling straight
edge is impractical, test the surface of wearing course and base course where
necessary at points decided by the SO, with a straight edge of 3 m length placed
parallel with and/or at right angles to the centreline of the road. The maximum
allowable deviation of the surface below the straight edge is to be:
a. For pavement surfacing: 5 mm
b. For base course surfacing: 10 mm
4.6.3 Levels of Footways

Ensure the levels of the constructed footways matches the level of the existing
neighbouring footways if any.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.6.4 Rectification of Levels

Where any tolerance is exceeded, determine the full extent of the area, which is out
of tolerance and propose methods of making good the defects to SO’s acceptance.
All layers are to be made good before laying the materials for the next layer.
Be guided by the requirements as set out in LTA’s Material and Workmanship
Specification for making good the various layers and types of materials.
4.7 Use Of Surfaces by Vehicular Traffic
4.7.1 Construction Traffic on Pavement Under Construction

Ensure construction traffic used on pavements under construction are suitable in
relation to the thickness of the pavement courses so that damage is not caused to the
subgrade or the material already laid. The tyres or tracks of plant moving over the
various pavement courses are to be kept free from deleterious materials. Restrictions
on use are as follows:
4.7.1.1 On Lean Concrete or Other Cement Treated Layer

No construction traffic is permitted until the curing period for the material has expired.
4.7.1.2 On Concrete Slabs

No construction traffic is permitted until all joints and grooves have been temporarily
sealed and after concrete has reached 80% of the characteristic strength or 7-day
strength whichever is greater unless otherwise agreed with the SO.
4.7.2 Normal Traffic on Pavement Under Construction

Restrictions on use are:
4.7.2.1 On Lean Concrete or Other Cement Treated Layer

No construction traffic is permitted until the curing period for the material has expired.
4.7.2.2 Concrete Slabs – Ordinary Portland Cement

Vehicular traffic is permitted when the concrete has reached minimum compressive
design strength or 7-day strength whichever is greater unless otherwise agreed.
4.7.2.3 Concrete Slabs – Rapid Hardening Cement

Vehicular traffic is permitted when the concrete has reached minimum compressive
design strength or 3-day strength whichever is greater unless otherwise agreed.
4.7.3 Rectification of Damage

Accept responsibility for rectification of defects and damage to the pavement arising
out of the use of surfaces under construction.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submission

Include proposals for sequence of works, any temporary works required, plant and
equipment, removal of debris, control of noise, dirt, dust and any other potential
nuisance.
5.1.2 Programme

Submit the setting-out plan as endorsed by the registered surveyor to the SO for
acceptance prior to commencing the field works. Include at least the following
information:
a. The centreline of the road reserve/pavement
b. The limits of any road reserve
c. The inner edge and outer edge of all slip-roads and junctions
d. The positions of culverts, bridges/underpasses and other structures
e. All drain works
f. Kerb lines of carriageway

Submit to the SO for record, as-built drawings on completion of each phase of
completion of work. The as-built drawings are to be certified as correct by a Licensed
Surveyor or a Professional Engineer as appropriate.

Include the following additional information in the maintenance manual and logbook.
Maintenance of the road works against long term residue settlement where required
as indicated in clause 1.4.11.
5.2 Tests
5.2.1 Sub-bases Compaction

The depth of each compacted layer is to be compatible with the compaction plant
used and is to be in accordance with the requirements as shown in the table in clause
4.4.4(Compacting). Each layer is to be tested and accepted by the SO, prior to the
placing of the next layer.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
The in-situ field density of the compacted layer is to be not less than 95% as a
percentage of the maximum dry density. Determine both densities in accordance with
BS 1377, with the former using the sand replacement method (large pouring
cylinder), and the latter using the 4.5kg rammer method (soils with some course
gravel-size particle). Carry out at least 3 in-situ field test for every 500 m2 or less of
surface area of each compacted layer. Remove and replace with suitable material any
layer that fails to meet the density requirement represented by each in-situ field test.
Subject to the SO’s acceptance, the in-situ field density may alternatively be
determined with nuclear device in accordance with ASTM D2950. The maximum
density is to be the average density of 3 laboratory compacted specimens. Take the
in-situ percentage level of compaction with respect to this maximum density. In the
event that the nuclear device shows an in-situ percentage level of compaction above
100%, modify the maximum density for that particular test to the maximum in-situ
density measured.
5.2.2 Compaction of Graded Granite Aggregate Base

Compact the graded granite aggregate base to a dry density of not less than 98% of
the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with BS 1377 using the
vibrating hammer method. Carry out the in-situ dry density tests in accordance with
sand replacement method (large pouring cylinder) specified in BS 1377. Carry out
blading and rolling alternately to obtain a smooth, even and uniform compacted base.
Subject to the SO’s acceptance, the in-situ field density may be determined with
nuclear device in accordance with ASTM D2950 as above.
Take samples of graded granite aggregates at the rate of one per 100 m3 of graded
granite aggregate laid with at least 3 samples at each site in a day. For a site where
more than 400m3 of graded granite aggregate are laid in a day, take a maximum of 5
samples. Mark these samples with the date laid and location identification, and test at
the accredited laboratory for compliance.
5.2.3 Other Types of Bases

For requirements of density and strength tests for other types of bases, refer to LTA’s
Material and Workmanship Specifications.
5.2.4 Test Results

Submit report of all test results in copies as directed, including the original copy, to
the SO immediately after they are available.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 8
3.2 Rigid In-situ Concrete Pavements 11
3.3 Precast Concrete Flags, Clay and Concrete Blocks 13
3.4 Precast Concrete Kerbs 13
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General 14
4.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavings 14
4.3 Rigid Insitu Concrete Pavement 17
4.4 Precast Concrete Flags, Clay and Concrete Block Pavings 21
4.5 Precast Concrete Kerbs 22

5.1 Submissions 23
5.2 Quality Control 23
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the construction of paved finishes for estate
roads, driveways and footways within a building development. It covers three main
types of pavings, namely:
a. Asphaltic Concrete Pavings
b. Rigid insitu concrete slab
c. Precast concrete Flags and Clay or Concrete interlocking block pavings
For tiled finishes and grass blocks refer to architectural specifications.
The paving is to be laid on base and/or sub-base constructed in compliance with
section C7-10 and the design drawings. For requirements of sub-grade, sub-base or
base refer to section C7-10 “Construction of Estate Roads, Driveways and
Footways”,

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 31 Aggregates from natural source for concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand and
fillers
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
Part A1: Method of sampling fresh concrete on site
Part A2: Method for determination of slump
Part A8: Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete
Part A11: Method of normal curing of test specimens (27°C method)
Part A16: Method for determination of compressive strength of
concrete cubes
Part A20: Method for determination of the compressive strength of
concrete cores
SS 85 Bitumen emulsion for road construction
SS 86 Method of sampling and testing bitumen
Other Standards
BS 594 Part 1: Hot rolled Asphalt for roads and other paved areas.
Specification for constituent materials and Asphalt mixtures
BS 1521 Waterproof building papers
BS 2499 Part 1: Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavement.
BS 5212 Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavement
BS 6717 Precast, unreinforced concrete paving blocks. Requirements and test
methods
BS 7263 Part 1: Precast concrete flags, kerbs, channels, edgings and
quadrants. Precast, unreinforced concrete paving flags and
complementary fittings. Requirements and test method
BS 7533 Pavements constructed with clay, natural stone or concrete pavers
Part 1: Guide for the structural design of heavy duty pavements
constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete paving blocks
Part 2: Guide for the structural design of lightly trafficked pavements
constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete paving blocks
Part 3: Code of practice for laying precast concrete paving blocks
and clay pavers for flexible pavements
Part 4: Code of practice for the construction of pavements of precast
concrete flags or natural stone slabs
ASTM C29 Standard test method for bulk density (unit weight) and voids in
aggregate
ASTM C88 Standard test method for soundness of aggregates by use of sodium
sulfate or magnesium sulfate
ASTM C131 Standard test method for resistance to degradation of small size
coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles
machine
ASTM C171 Standard specification for sheet materials for curing concrete
ASTM C309 Standard specification for liquid membrane-forming compounds for
curing concrete
ASTM C535 Standard test method for resistance to degradation of large size
coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles
machine
ASTM D242 Standard specification for mineral filler for bituminous paving
mixtures
ASTM D5581 Standard test method for resistance to plastic flow of bituminous
mixtures using Marshall apparatus
ASTM D1752 Standard specification for preformed sponge rubber and cork
expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
ASTM D2628 Standard specification for preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric

joint seals for concrete pavements
ASTM D2950 Standard test method for density of bituminous concrete in place by
nuclear methods
ASTM D4318 Standard test methods for liquid limit, plastic limit and plasticity index
of soils
clauses.
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended design of the driveways and estate roads finishes including the type of
paving, levels and alignments are shown in the drawings. Based on the information,
engage qualified and experienced personnel to develop the design and carry out the
following proposals for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Suitable products and manufacturer / plants to comply with the design
intent and performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1 below,
including suitable mix design and plants for Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
1.4.1.2 Details, equipment and construction methods to lay and finish the paving
materials as proposed.

1.4.3 Site Surveys

provided are accurate. Engage a registered Surveyor to carry out additional site
survey before commencing any work.


Employ a registered surveyor throughout the Contract Period for the setting-out and
levelling of the horizontal and vertical alignments, and all other ancillary works.
Develop the details for setting-out for horizontal and vertical alignment based on the
information given in the drawings.

No items.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

Engage a laboratory to SO’ acceptance and accredited under the Singapore
Specification.

No item.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Strength Requirements

Achieve the strength and other property requirements for the various types of
pavement as indicated in the drawings or specified in clause 3 below.

On completion of compaction the surface of the paving material is to be well-closed,
free from movement under compaction plant, ridges, cracks or loose material. Make
good and re-compact all loose/segregated or otherwise defective areas to the full
thickness of the layer.
2.1.3 Concrete Kerbs

For precast concrete kerbs the transverse strength of units is to be established by
testing in accordance with BS 7263: Part 1 except that the maximum stress in
bending is to be calculated from the failing load and is not to be less than 4.0 N/mm2.
Units are to be bonded to the pavement surface and capable of withstanding a static
push-off load of 10 KN/m, applied parallel to the pavement surface at right angles to
the kerb.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
3.1.1 General
Asphaltic concrete paving is to consist of a mixture of graded mineral aggregate and
Asphaltic binder, laid with a bitumen binding course and compacted on a prepared
base as the wearing course in conformity with the design requirements of alignment,
level and dimensions.
3.1.2 Aggregates
Aggregates are to consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel or crushed slag with or
without sand or other inert finely divided mineral aggregate. The components of the
aggregates is to be classified as follows:
Aggregate Classification
Aggregates Requirement
Coarse Aggregate Retained on BS 3.2mm sieve
Fine Aggregate Passed BS 3.2mm sieve and retained
on 75 m sieve
Mineral Filler Passed BS 75 m sieve
3.1.2.1 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregates are to be / have
a. Consist of sound, tough, durable particles, free from adherent coatings of clay,
organic matter and other deleterious substances.
b. Contain not more than 8% by weight of flat or elongated pieces.
c. No more than 40% wear when tested in accordance with ASTM C131.
d. Sodium Sulphate soundness loss not exceeding 9%, and Magnesium Sulphate
soundness loss not exceeding 12%, after five cycles, when tested in accordance
with ASTM C88.
Crushed coarse aggregates are to contain at least 75% by weight of pieces having at
least two fractured faces.
Slag used as coarse aggregate is to be air-cooled blast-furnace slag and have a
compacted weight of not less than 1.12 tonnes/m³ when tested in accordance with
ASTM C29.
Note that a flat particle is one having a width to thickness ratio of greater than 5 and
an elongated particle is one having a length to width ratio of greater than 5.
3.1.2.2 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregates are to be / have:
a. Consist of clean, sound durable, angular particles produced by crushing stone,
slag or gravel
b. Be free from coatings of clay, silt, clay balls or other deleterious matter.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
c. Meet the soundness and wear requirements as specified for coarse aggregate.
The fine aggregate with any blended filler is to have a plasticity index not greater than
6, and a liquid limit of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM
D4318, and in addition have a silt content of not greater than 0.3% of the total weight
when tested in accordance with SS73.
Natural sand, when added to produce the desired gradation or to increase the
workability or compactibility of the mixture is to be limited to 15% by weight to obtain
optimum pavement properties.
3.1.2.3 Filler
Filler, in addition to those naturally present in the aggregate, is to meet the
requirements of ASTM D242.
3.1.3 Bitumen Emulsion

Bitumen emulsion is to be / have:
a. Homogeneous after thorough mixing, for at least 30 days after delivery.
b. Rapid setting cationic bitumen emulsion conforming to the requirements
tabulated below:
Requirements for Cationic Bitumen Emulsion
Property Unit Setting (CSS - 1) Method of
Min Max Testing
Test on emulsion SS 85
Saybolt Furol s 20 100 SS 85

Viscosity at 25 0C
Settlement, 5 days % weight - 5 SS 85

difference
Sieve test % weight - 0.1 SS 85
Particle charge test Positive SS 85
Residue from % weight 60 - SS 85

distillation
Tests on residue SS 86
from distillation test
Penetration at 0.1 mm 60 200 SS 86
250C 100g, 5s
Ductility at 25 0C, 5 cm 40 - SS 86
cm/min
Solubility in % weight 97 - SS 86
Trichloroethylene
3.1.4 Bitumen
Bitumen is to be / have:
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Petroleum bitumen of 60/70 penetration grade. No mineral matter other than that
naturally contained in such bitumen is to be present.
b. Homogeneous, free from water and not foam when heated to 175°C.
c. Conform to the requirements tabulated below:
Requirements for Bitumen
Property Unit 60/70 Method of
Penetration Testing
Grade
Min Max
Penetrating at 250C 0.1 mm 60 70 SS 86
100g, 5s
0
Flash Point, Cleveland C 232 - SS 86
Open Cup
Ductility at 250C, 5 cm cm 100 - SS 86
per min
Solubility in % weight 99 - SS 86
trichloroethylene
Thin-film oven test, 3.2 SS 86
mm, 1630C, 5 hrs
a) Loss on heating % weight - 0.8 SS 86

b) Penetration of % of original 54 - SS 86
residue at 250C
c) Ductility of residue at cm 50 - SS 86
250C, 5 cm per min
0
d) Softening Point, Ring C 47 56 SS 86
and Ball
e) Specific Gravity at 25 - 1.0 1.11 SS 86
0
C
3.1.5 Admixture
Agree with the SO any admixture to be added to the Asphaltic Concrete mix.
3.1.6 Water
Water used in diluting the bitumen emulsion or wetting the wheels of rollers is to be
clean, fresh and free from organic or inorganic matter in solution or suspension in
such amounts that may impair the strength and durability of the Asphaltic Concrete.
3.1.7 Mix Design

3.1.7.1 Aggregate Grading
Propose suitable Asphaltic Concrete mix design for SO’s acceptance. Take guidance
from the following table for aggregate grading for the different types of mixes:
Aggregate Grading for Asphaltic Concrete Mix
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
Mix Classification Road Mixes

Type of Mix Wearing Course Wearing Course Binder Course
Thickness of Course 30 – 40 mm 40 – 65 mm 50 - 100 mm
Max Size of Stone 12.5 mm 19 mm 35 mm
(BS) Passing
50 mm - - -
37.5 mm - - 100
25 mm - - 95 – 100
19 mm - 100 84 – 92
13.2 mm 100 85 - 95 65 – 82
9.5 mm - - -
6.3 mm 58 - 68 58 - 68 48 – 62
3.35 mm 40 - 50 40 - 50 35 – 50
1.18 mm 21 - 31 21 - 31 22 – 35
300 m 11 - 17 11 - 17 12 – 19
75 m 4-8 4-8 3–8
% Soluble Bitumen (60/70 Min Max Min Max Min Max
Pen Grade) 4.5 6.0 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5
(% by Weight of Total Mix)
3.1.7.2 Marshall Design Criteria

Mix design is to be based on Marshall method to meet with the specified criteria
unless otherwise agreed by the SO. Asphaltic concrete samples tested for Marshall
Design Criteria is to conform to the requirements of the following table:
Marshall Design Criteria
Marshall Stability (kN)
(Minimum) (Number of blows = 75) 9.00 kN
Flow value (0.254mm units) 8 – 16
Voids in mix (%) 3–5
% of aggregate voids filled with bitumen binder 75 – 82
3.2 Rigid In-situ Concrete Pavements
3.2.1 Concrete
Comply with the requirements in Section C3-10, clause 3.0.
For roads and driveways, coarse aggregates are to additionally comply with ASTM
C131 Or ASTM C535 as appropriate for abrasion resistance.
3.2.2 Mix Design

Propose suitable mix design to SO’s acceptance. Designed concrete mix is to comply
with the following requirements and have a mean strength greater than the required
minimum strength by at least the margin of 0.40 N/mm².
a. Minimum Indirect Tensile Strength at 28 days: 2.3 N/mm²
b. Minimum Cement Content: 280 kg/m³
c. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio: 0.55
d. Slump for Side-form Paving: 38-65 mm
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
e. Compacting Factor for Side-form Paving: 0.87-0.91
3.2.3 Reinforcements
For general requirements refer to section C3-20, clause 3.0.
3.2.4 Tie Bars

3.2.5 Dowel Bars

Dowel bars are to be plain mild steel bars complying with SS 2, and free from burring
or other deformation restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the
construction site, a minimum of two-thirds of the length of each dowel bar is to be
3.2.6 Pre-moulded Joint Filler

Unless otherwise agreed, pre-moulded joint filler for expansion joints is to comply with
ASTM D1752 and be punched to admit the dowel bars where required.
For contraction joints, the filler is to be a resin-impregnated fibreboard or self-
expanding cork complying with ASTM D1752.
3.2.7 Joint Sealers

Joint sealers are to comply with the following standards:
a. Hot-poured Sealant BS 2499
b. Cold-poured Sealant BS 5212
c. Performed Compression Seal ASTM D2628
3.2.8 Curing Material

Curing materials are to comply with the following standards:
3.2.9 Waterproofing Membrane

Unless otherwise directed, provide a waterproofing membrane complying with the
requirements of BS 1521 Class BIF on top of the prepared sub-grade or sub-base.
Where an overlap of the membrane is necessary provide at least 300 mm lap.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3 Precast Concrete Flags, Clay and Concrete Blocks
3.3.1 Precast Concrete Flags

Precast concrete flags are to be hydraulically pressed, complying with BS 7263: Part
1.
3.3.2 Clay Pavers

Clay Pavers are to comply with BS 7533-2, with chamfers. The shapes, dimensions
and colours are to be as shown in the drawings.
3.3.3 Concrete Block Pavers

Precast Concrete Pavers are to comply with BS 6717, with chamfers. The shapes,
dimensions and colours are to be as shown in the drawings.
3.3.4 Bedding Sand

Sand bedding is to comply with SS 31 Grade C. Refer to LTA’s Standard Details of
Road Elements.
3.3.5 Masonry Sand Joint Filler

Masonry Sand Joint Filler is to be dry and free from deleterious, soluble salts and
other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence.
3.4 Precast Concrete Kerbs

Precast concrete kerbs are to comply with BS 7263: Part 1 to the dimensions as
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
4.1.1 LTA’s Requirements

In general, be guided by the workmanship requirements as set out in the LTA’s
Material and Workmanship Specifications.
4.1.2 Setting-out
Refer to Section C7-10 Clause 4.2 (Setting-out).
4.1.3 Tolerances in Surface Levels and Regularity

Refer to Section C7-10 Clauses 4.6 (Surface Regularity and Rectification).
Test the surface for trueness, after the Asphaltic base course has been completed,
with a 3m long straight edge applied parallel with and at right angles to the centre
line. The maximum deviation of the surface below the straight edge is not to exceed
10mm.
4.1.4 Rectification of Levels

Refer to Section C7-10 Clause 4.6.4 (Rectification of Levels).
4.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavings
4.2.1 Asphaltic Concrete Mixing Plants

Design the Asphaltic concrete mix and operate a suitable plant to produce a uniform
mixture conforming to the specification.
Furnish the SO in advance with full details of the proposed Asphalt mixing plant.
Mixing plants are to be well maintained and have an average output capacity of not
less than 100 tonnes/hr.
Allow access to the SO at all times for inspection and taking samples.
4.2.2 Mixing Temperature

Heat the aggregate to between 150°C - 170°C. Heat the bitumen of 60/70
penetration grade to 150°C - 165°C. The difference in temperature between the
aggregate and the bitumen is not to exceed 15°C. To ensure the normal life of the
Asphaltic concrete material, prohibit the overheating of the aggregate or binder. Also
do not reheat condemned mixtures unless agreed.
After heating, thoroughly mix the hot aggregate together with filler and bitumen binder
in the correct proportion until every particle of aggregate is completely coated.
Discharge the Asphaltic concrete after mixing at the range of 140ºC to 160ºC.
4.2.3 Preparation of Site

Thoroughly clean and dry the surfaces to be paved and keep free from any loose or
surplus materials. Repair all depressions and unevenness. Previously laid premix is
to be cut back by power-saw, by at least 150mm in a straight line and prime with a
coat of bituminous emulsion prior to laying of Asphaltic concrete.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
Where a manhole cover is lower than the premix surface, provide a wooden frame to
demarcate its position so that it can be recognised and raised subsequently. Prior to
commencement of work, inspect the site to distinguish and indicate by paint on the
road kerb or footpath, the types of manholes and distance of it from the indicated
point.
Prior to the laying of the Asphaltic concrete, apply a suitable prime coat/tack coat of
cationic bitumen of rapid setting type to all surfaces receiving the Asphalt paving
including all manholes, kerbs, channels and other projections against which Asphalt
paving is to be laid. Spray the prime coat/tack coat of bitumen emulsion at rates of
1.14 litre/m² and 0.54 litre/m² for aggregate base course surface and premix surface
respectively.
Allow a period of not less than 10 minutes ‘to break’ before Asphalt concrete can be
laid.
4.2.4 Transporting
Plan the transport to ensure continuity of supply of Asphalt concrete. Use canvas
cover to protect the mix from the weather regardless of the ambient temperature or
haul distance. Transport the mix from the mixing plant without delay to prevent
segregation. Ensure the temperature of any batch does not fall below the specified
laying temperature at discharge into the spreader. Minimise the use of dust, coated
dust, oil or water to facilitate discharge. If contamination of the mixture occurred,
clean the vehicle thoroughly before being used again.
4.2.5 Laying
4.2.5.1 Asphaltic Concrete Finisher
The bituminous paver is to be capable of spreading and finishing courses of the plant
mix materials in lane widths, to the specified thickness at various rates of travel
consistent with the rate of delivery and the type of Asphalt mixture to be laid. The
receiving hopper is to have sufficient capacity for a uniform spreading operation,
which produce a surface finish without tearing, shoving or grazing the surface.
For lengths of road in excess of 500m, the paver is to be equipped and operated with
an automatic level control system e.g. wire sensor, sensor shoe etc. Submit details
for SO’s acceptance.
4.2.5.2 Laying Temperature
The temperature of the hot-mix Asphalt in the spreader hopper is to be 130°C to
140ºC at the time of spreading. If the hot-mix on arrival at the site is above 140º,
allow cooling down to the required temperature before being discharged into the
spreader hopper. Reject the hot-mix if temperature falls below 130°C on arrival.
Supply two small accurate thermometers of 100 mm length for checking the
temperature of the newly laid premix and two large accurate thermometers for
checking the temperature of the premix on the tippers. The large thermometers are to
consist of a weatherproof dial head of diameter not smaller than 62 mm and a
stainless steel stem of length 600 mm.
4.2.5.3 Spreading and Finishing
Tip the plant mixture onto the hopper of the paver and spread, level, tamper and
finish to the correct profile, camber or cross-fall without causing segregation,
dragging, burning or other surface defects or irregularities. Feed the mixture to the
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
paver at such a rate as to permit continuous laying. Rectify all the irregularities and
surface defects while the surface is still hot and before the final rolling is completed.
Do not place the Asphaltic concrete mix when weather conditions prevent proper
handling, compaction and finishing.
On areas where the use of mechanical spreading equipment is impracticable, spread,
rake, level and compact the mixture by hand tools.
4.2.6 Compacting
Use self-propelled rollers capable of reversing without backlash. The following types
are acceptable:
a. Static three-steel-wheeled, smooth-roll roller having a weight between 8 to 12
tonnes and a weight per mm width of rear wheel between 5.4 kg and 7.2 kg.
b. Two-steel-wheeled, smooth-roll tandem roller having a weight of between 8 and
12 tonnes and a weight per mm width of rear wheel between 3.5 kg and 7.2 kg.
c. Self-propelled vibratory tandem roller with a net weight of 10 tonnes and static
linear load in both drums of 30 N/mm. The roller is to be capable of transmitting
vibrations at a rate between 2000 to 3000 vibrations per minute and giving
amplitude of 0.4 to 0.8 mm.
d. Self-propelled pneumatic rubber wheel tyre roller having a weight between 10
and 30 tonnes and with tyre pressure varying between 545 and 827 kN/m².
Commence compaction of the Asphaltic concrete as soon as it will bear the weight of
a roller without undue movement, cracking or shoving. Carry out initial rolling with a
three-wheeled roller followed by intermediate rolling with a pneumatic-tyre roller. Final
rolling is to be done with a tandem roller.
Carry out rolling in the direction of laying. Proceed with the driving wheels leading
and travel slowly enough to avoid displacement of the hot mixture. Commence rolling
at the edge abutting any previously laid surfacing. Lap successive passes so that on
completion all roller marks are obliterated. Check the levels and surface accuracy of
the Asphalt surfacing continuously and correct any displacement by the use of rakes.
Apply water or other approved parting fluid to prevent adhesion in minimum quantities
if necessary.
Start the rolling of a free lane at one of the outer edges, with the drum projecting
about 50 - 100 mm outside the pavement. Subsequently continue rolling in parallel
lanes with overlap of about 100-200mm. If the surface has a transverse inclination,
commence rolling at the lowest side.
On thick Asphaltic concrete layers carry out the initial passes about 300 - 400 mm
inside the edges, allow the mix to cool and provide for a stable bearing area for the
roller before the outer edges are compacted.
Continue rolling for no less than 45 minutes after the last mix has been laid until all
roller marks are eliminated, no further compression is possible and the surface is of
uniform texture and true to grade and level.
4.2.7 Joints
Form joints by cutting back on the previous day’s run to expose the full depth of the
course; Provide for a proper bond with the adjacent course by applying a light coat of
bitumen emulsion at the exposed edge. Rake the fresh mixture against the joint and
thoroughly tamp and roll. Place the course at a transverse joint as continuous as
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
possible. (See Fig. 4.2.7-1). Place longitudinal joint staggered with that in the base,
binder, or existing surface course by at least 0.5 m (See Fig. 4.2.7-2).
In two-layer construction, offset the longitudinal joint between layers by about 150
mm. Place the joint in the top layer at dividing lane lines if the roadway is two-lanes or
more in width.
Saw-cut transverse joints to form a wedge-shaped groove of 25 mm depth and 75
mm width to enable the newly laid Asphaltic concrete to be flush with the existing
surface.
FIG. 4.2.7-1: CONSTRUCTION OF A TRANSVERSE JOINT
2m MIN. FROM THE BOTTOM

WOODEN
PLANK 1.5m OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
RAMP TO BE REMOVED WHEN NEW
LANE CONTINUES FRON HERE
nd
2 LAYER
st
1 LAYER
STONE BASE COURSE

BOTTOM LAYER
TRANVERSE JOINT
FIG. 4.2.7-2: DIAGRAMMATIC VIEW OF A LONGITUDINAL JOINT
MINIMUM 0.5 m
2nd LAYER OF
ASPHALTIC
CONCRETE
1st LAYER OF
ASPHALTIC
ONCRETE
STONE BASE COURSE
4.3 Rigid Insitu Concrete Pavement
4.3.1 Forms
Use forms to achieve the prescribed edge thickness without horizontal joint. For
curves of 30 m radius or less, use flexible or curved forms to SO’s acceptance.
Secure forms so as to withstand the impact and vibration of the consolidating and
finishing equipment. The top face of the form is not to vary from a true plane more
than 3 mm in 3 m. Use repaired forms or built-up forms only with the agreement of
the SO.
4.3.2 Form Setting

Thoroughly tamp the forms after being set to the correct grade. Stake forms into
place with not less than 3 pins for each 3m section. Place a pin at each side of every
joint. Tightly secure the forms free from movement in any direction. The forms are not
to deviate from true line by more than 6 mm at any joint. Clean and oil forms prior to
the placing of concrete.
4.3.3 Placement of Reinforcement

When the concrete is placed in two layers, place the reinforcement directly upon the
bottom layer, then place the top layer of the concrete, strike off, and screed. If initial
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
set has taken place at the bottom layer before being covered with the top layer,
remove and replace with freshly mixed concrete.
When the concrete is placed in one layer, position the reinforcement in advance of
concrete placement or place in plastic concrete by mechanical or vibratory means
after spreading.
Keep reinforcing steel free of mud, oil, or other organic matter that may adversely
affect or reduce bond.
4.3.4 Placing Concrete

Immediately ahead of concrete placement, moisten the prepared subgrade with
water, without saturating, to prevent rapid loss of moisture from the concrete.
Unless otherwise agreed, unload the concrete into an approved spreading device and
mechanically spread on the grade to prevent segregation of the materials. Place
continuously between transverse joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads.
Where necessary, hand spread with shovels and not rakes.
When mechanical equipment will be operated on the existing lane of pavement when
placing concrete in an adjoining lane, observe the restriction on the use of
construction traffic as stipulated in section C7-10, clause 4.7.
Thoroughly consolidate concrete along the faces of all forms, and both sides of joint
assemblies by means of vibrators, but do not allow the vibrators to come in contact
with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. Do not operate the vibrator longer
than 15 seconds in any one location.
Deposit concrete as near to expansion and contraction joints as possible without
disturbing them. Do not dump from the discharge bucket or hopper into a joint
assembly unless the hopper is well centred on the joint assembly.
4.3.5 Joints
4.3.5.1 General
Construct all joints true to line with their faces perpendicular to the surface of the
pavement. Joints are not to vary more than 13 mm from a true line or from their
designated position. Finish the vertical surface of the pavement adjacent to all
expansion joints to a true plane and edge to a radius of 6 mm or as shown in the
drawings. Test the surface across the joints with a 3 m straight edge as the joints are
finished and correct any irregularities in excess of 6 mm before the concrete has
hardened. When required, accurately form keyways with a template of metal or wood.
4.3.5.2 Tie Bars and Dowels
Place tie bars at intervals of 750 mm, unless otherwise specified. Hold in position by
agreed means. Tie bars may be bent at right angles against the form at longitudinal
construction joints, unless threaded bolt or other assembled tie bars are specified.
Ensure these bars are not painted, greased, or enclosed in sleeves.
Place dowel bars or other load-transfer units and hold rigidly in the middle of the slab
depth by an approved assembly device to be left permanently in place.
The maximum permissible tolerance on dowel bar alignment in each plane, horizontal
and vertical, is not to exceed 2% or 6 mm per 300 mm of a dowel bar.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.5.3 Longitudinal Joints

Form longitudinal construction joints against suitable side forms (usually made of
steel) with or without keyways as directed. Provide longitudinal grooves formed or
sawn at the top of the slab where indicated in the drawings. Form the groove in the
plastic concrete with accepted tools or inserts, or saw with approved equipment in the
hardened concrete to the dimensions required. Ensure grooves are clean cut to avoid
spalling at intersections with transverse joints.
Install longitudinal expansion joints as indicated on the drawings to manufacturer’s
recommendations. Securely stake or fasten the pre-moulded filler into position.
Provide a metal cap to protect the top edge of the filler and to permit the concrete to
be placed and finished and carefully withdraw after the concrete has been placed.
Finished and tool the joint edges while the concrete is still plastic.
4.3.5.4 Transverse Joints
Install transverse construction joints when the concreting is to be interrupted for more
than 30 minutes, or when directed. Plan to locate the joints at a contraction or
expansion joint where possible. Do not locate the joints within 2.4 m of a regularly
spaced transverse joint.
Install transverse expansion joints with accepted devices, which are easily removable
without disturbing the concrete. Immediately after removing the forming devices,
remove any concrete bridging the joint space at the ends.
Install transverse contraction joints or weakened-plane joints by forming a groove or
cleft at the top of the slab while the concrete is still plastic or by sawing a groove into
the concrete surface after the concrete has hardened.
4.3.6 Finishing
For side-form construction, use internal type vibrators with immersed tube initially and
finish with surface pan type for the full width of the concrete slab. Vibrators may be
attached to the spreader or the finishing machine or they may be mounted on a
separate carriage. Do not allow vibrators to come in contact with the joint, load-
transfer devices, subgrade, or side forms. Ensure the frequency of the internal type
vibrators are at least 7000 vibrations per minute and the surface vibrators are at least
3500 vibrations per minute. Check by using a tachometer. Use hand vibrators to
consolidate the concrete along forms and other isolated areas.
4.3.7 Sawing Joints

When sawing of joints is required, ensure adequate equipment is provided.
Use circular cutters capable of cutting a groove in a straight line and produce a slot at
least 3 mm wide and to the depth as required. Widen the top portion of the slot or
groove by means of a second shallower cut or by accepted bevelling to provide
adequate space for joint sealers. Commence sawing of the joints as soon as the
concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling, or
tearing. Saw the joint consecutively in sequence of the concrete placement, unless
otherwise directed.
4.3.8 Final Strike-off, Consolidation and Finishing

4.3.8.1 Sequence
Operate in the sequence of strike-off and consolidation, floating and removal of
laitance, straightening, and final surface finish.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.8.2 Additional Water

Apply water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations only with
agreement with the SO. Apply as a fog spray by means of approved equipment.
4.3.8.3 Finishing at Joints
Finish in a manner to avoid damage or misalignment of joints and without voids or
segregation against the joint material.
4.3.8.4 Machine Finishing
Screed the placed concrete by an approved finishing machine with accepted method
such that the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and free
from porous areas.
4.3.8.5 Hand Finishing
Do not hand finish except in the event of breakdown of the equipment, or in areas of
narrow widths or irregular dimensions where operation of the mechanical equipment
is impractical.
4.3.8.6 Surface Testing and Correction
After the pavement has been struck off and consolidated, and while the concrete is
still plastic, test for trueness with a 3m straight edge. Advance in successive stages of
not more than half the length of the straight edge. Remove any excess water and
laitance from the surface of the pavement. Fill any depressions immediately with
freshly mixed concrete or cut down on high areas, strike off, consolidate, and refinish.
4.3.8.7 Surface Texture
Texture the surface of all newly constructed concrete pavements with a broom.
Texture when the water sheen has practically disappeared. Carry out transversely
across the pavement surface, providing corrugations that are uniform in appearance
and approximately 2 mm in depth. Do not tear or unduly roughen the pavement
surface during the operation. Correct any imperfections resulting from the texturing
operation.
4.3.8.8 Alignment and Surface Tolerances
Ensure that the following tolerances are satisfied:
a. Lateral deviation from established alignment of the pavement edge is not to
exceed ±30 mm in any lane.
b. Vertical deviation from established grade is not to exceed ±6 mm at any point.
Ensure that the combination of permitted tolerances in different pavement levels do
not result in a reduction of the thickness of the concrete slab of more than 5 mm from
that specified.
Deviation for surface smoothness is not to exceed 6 mm from a 3 m Straight-edge,
placed in any direction.
Where tolerances are exceeded, remove and replace the pavement section in length
not less than 3 m or the full width of the lane, unless otherwise agreed.
4.3.9 Curing
Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed, cure the entire
surface of the newly placed concrete using one of the materials below. Do not expose
the concrete for more than half an hour during the curing period.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Impervious Membrane (Curing compound): Use to manufacturer’s

recommendations.
b. Polythene Films: Ensure vapour tightness and maintain in contact with the
surface for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed with suitable weights.
c. White Burlap Polythene Sheets: Ensure vapour tightness and maintain fully
wetted and in contact with the surface for 72 hours after the concrete has been
placed with suitable weights.
4.3.10 Removing Forms

Do not remove forms from freshly placed concrete until it has set for at least 12 hours
unless otherwise agreed. After removal of the forms, cure the sides of the slab as
above and repair defective areas in sections of length not less than 3 m or the full
width of the lane involved.
4.3.11 Sealing Joints

Unless otherwise specified, seal the joints in the pavement immediately following the
curing period to recommendation by the sealant manufacturer.
4.3.12 Protection of Pavement

Protect the pavement against both public traffic and site traffic. Protect fresh concrete
against the effects of rain using rolled polyethylene sheeting at least 0.1 mm thick.
4.3.13 Opening to Traffic

Observe the restriction as set out in section C7-10, clause 4.7.
4.4 Precast Concrete Flags, Clay and Concrete Block Pavings
4.4.1 General
Lay precast concrete flags in accordance with BS 7533: Part 4.
Lay clay and concrete block paving in accordance with BS 7533: Part 3.
Lay paving on a bedding of sand compacted to thickness of 50mm in accordance with
BS 7533: Part 2. On an existing paved area, lay bedding to 39-44mm thickness. Do
not leave bedding exposed to adverse weather and/or overnight.
Lay paving up slopes and/or away from edge restraints to avoid creep and damage to
the bedding layer.
4.4.2 Laying
Lay paving blocks hand tight to the pattern shown in the drawings. Bed blocks with a
vibrating plate compactor using 2-3 passes as necessary, until no more compaction is
evident.
Brush-fill joints with masonry sand joint filler and vibrate surface to assist joint filling. If
necessary, top-up joints during early life by brushing with loose masonry sand.
For setts, fill joints with limestone dust and ram down 3-4mm. Alternatively, use weak
dry sand/ cement mix, 1:9 mix. Keep setts dry during joint filling to prevent mortar
staining. Sweep clean then moisten with a watering can fitted with a medium rose.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.5 Precast Concrete Kerbs

Lay in accordance with BS 7263: Part 2 on a mortar bed on concrete substrate.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions

nuisance.
5.1.2 Programme

Submit the setting-out plan as endorsed by the registered surveyor to the SO for
acceptance prior to commencing the field works. Include at least the following
information:
a. The centreline of the road reserve/pavement
b. The limits of any road reserve
c. The inner edge and outer edge of all slip-roads and junctions
d. The positions of culverts, bridges/underpasses and other structures
e. All drain works
f. Kerb lines of carriageway

Submit to the SO for record, as-built drawings on completion of each phase of work.
5.2 Quality Control
5.2.1 Asphaltic Concrete Pavings

5.2.1.1 Job Mix Design Submission
Refer to LTA’s Material and Workmanship Specification for details.
5.2.1.2 Details of Asphalt Mixing Plant
Submit details of the mixing plant for acceptance, including information on Type,
model and manufacturer of the plant, age and average output capacity in tonnes per
hour, and location of the plant.
5.2.1.3 Trial Mixes
Submit trial mix samples to comply with clause 3.1.7, using the materials intended for
use for SO’s acceptance prior to work commencement and establish a job mix
formula for each type of mixture to be used. Do not modify the mix formula unless
otherwise agreed with the SO.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
Establish a single percentage of an aggregate passing each required sieve size, a

single percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate, and a single
temperature at which the mixture is to be delivered at the point of discharge for the
job mix formula for each mixture.
5.2.1.4 Sampling and Testing of Asphaltic Concrete

Neatly cut samples with a saw, core drill or other similar equipment. Backfill voids left
by sampling with new material.
Determine the field density of the Asphaltic concrete from 100mm diameter core-
samples extracted from the sites not later than 7 days after the laying of the Asphaltic
concrete. Produce not less than 6 (six) core samples at each site at locations
selected on a random basis.
Test five cores from each site at an accredited laboratory. Determine the field density
of the mix by the mean value of the five samples. A field density of 98% or more of
the Laboratory Density is deemed satisfactory. Agree with the SO on further
directions where the field densities are less than 98% of the Laboratory Density.
The Laboratory density is the average of the laboratory density of all Marshall
samples (75 blow on both sides of the samples) taken during the laying of the
Asphaltic concrete at the corresponding site.
In lieu of the core method of density determination, with the agreement of the SO,
testing for acceptance may be carried out with nuclear device in accordance with
ASTM D2950.
Take note of the testing procedures and acceptance criteria as below:
a. Mix content
Choose bituminous mixture samples for laboratory tests for bitumen content and
gradation specimens on a random basis. Take samples at a rate of one per 50 tonnes
of Asphaltic concrete laid and take at least 3 samples at each site in a day. Mark
samples with the mix type, date laid, location and plant identification. Select at
random from all the samples taken on the particular day for each mix type per plant, a
minimum of 3 and a maximum of 10 samples. The results obtained for each mix type
for each day are deemed to be representative of all the sites for that day. When the
work for a site is done over a period longer than one day, use the results from all
relevant days.
Compact the specimens in accordance with ASTM D1559, Section 3.5, except that
the temperature of the mixture immediately prior to compaction is to be 120°C ±5°C.
Record the temperature of the mix at the time of sampling, and if Marshall tests are to
be carried out, compact the specimens immediately before the mix has had time to
cool. If for any reason it has to be kept for a while, use insulated boxes to store the
mix. Compact Marshall specimens on a standard pedestal mounted on a firm base.
Test the samples for the determination of the Marshall Laboratory Density and other
Marshall properties. The average Marshall Laboratory Density per mix type is to be
used for the determination of the field density.
b. Rejection of Asphaltic Concrete Mixes
Where any of the Extraction Test (Sieve Analysis and Bitumen Content) and Field
Density Test Results fails to comply with the criteria as tabled below, reject the
sections represented by the samples and replace with new material unless agreed
otherwise.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES

No Description of Test Requirement
(A) (B) (C)
Extraction Test
(a) Gradation Analysis
Coarse Aggregate
Refer to table in Clause 3.1.7.1
Fine Aggregate (Aggregate Grading) for
aggregate grading requirements
Filler
for various mixes
(b) Bitumen Content
Road Wearing Course 4.5 % to 5.5 %
Mixes Binder Course 4.5 % to 5.5 %
2 Marshall Density Tests

Field Density (FD) Above 98% of Marshall Density
5.2.2 Rigid In-situ Concrete Pavement

5.2.2.1 Concrete
For the purpose of determining the strength of concrete, make four test specimens of
150 mm x 150 mm cube from each mix for test at 28 days. Cure and test in
The strength requirement is satisfied if for each set of four test specimens tested at
28 days, both the following conditions are met:
a. None of the strengths of the four test specimens is below the specified strength.
b. The average strength of the four test specimens is greater than the required
specified strength by at least half the margin of 0.40 N/mm².
5.2.2.2 Admixtures
Furnish all relevant technical information on any admixture intended for use and
provide certification from approved body that the admixtures will comply with the
specified requirements.
In addition, conduct further tests at the direction of the SO to justify consistency in
complying with specified requirements.
5.2.3 Test Results

Supply report of all test results, including original copy, to the SO immediately after
they are available. Agree the number of report copies with the SO.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standard and Technical Reference 3
3. MATERIALS 8
3.1 Driveway Markings 8
3.2 Vehicular Impact Guardrail 9
3.3 Retro-Reflective Sheeting for Traffic Signs 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 Road Markings 14
4.2 Vehicular Impact Guardrail 14
4.3 Installation of Retro-Reflective Sheeting 15

5.1 Submissions 16
5.2 Quality Control 16
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for common types of road ancillaries used for
estate roads and driveways of buildings, including:
a. Driveway Markings
b. Vehicular Impact Guard-rails
c. Retro-reflective Sheeting for Traffic Signs
For other types of street furniture such as traffic signals and Street-lights etc. refer to
specifications from the LTA and other relevant authorities.

1.3 Standard and Technical Reference
1.3.1 Standard
Singapore standards
SS 221 Road marking paint
SS 498 Hot-applied thermoplastic road marking materials.
Other standards
BS 381C Specification for colours for identification coding and special purposes
BS 7371 Coatings on metal fasteners
BS EN 1423 Road marking materials – drop on materials – glass beads, antiskid
aggregates and mixtures of the two
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods
BS 7371: Part 8 Coatings on metal fasteners. Specification for sherardized coatings
ASTM A153 Standard specification for zinc coating (hot-dip) on iron and steel
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
hardware
ASTM A307 Standard specification for carbon steel bolts and studs, 60.000 psi tensile
strength
ASTM A653 / Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
A653M Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A563 Standard specification for carbon and alloy steel nuts
ASTM D4956 Standard specification for retroreflective sheeting for traffic control
AASHTO M232 Zinc coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
clauses.

a. LTA Standard details of road elements
b. LTA Material and Workmanship Specification for C&S works
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended design of the various ancillaries is shown in the drawings. Based on the
information, engage qualified and experienced personnel to develop the design and
carry out the following proposals for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Suitable products and manufacturer / plants to comply with the design
intent and performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1 below.
1.4.1.2 Details, equipment and construction methods to install the elements as
proposed.


where directed, additional joint materials for minor replacement or repairs in the near
future. Refer to PSD for list of items required.
Supply the following spare materials and store in an area agreed with the SO:
ITEM Quantity
Road Marking Paint

Vehicle Guard Rails
Retro-reflective sign sheeting
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

No items.

Engage a laboratory to SO’s acceptance and accredited under the Singapore
Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) to carry out tests as required.

Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual for all the road ancillary
items in this project. Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for
details.
1.4.7 Warranty
1.4.7.1 Warranty For The Reflective Sheeting and Vinyl Films
Provide a warranty in accordance with contract conditions to cover the quality and
performance of the reflective sheeting and vinyl films in respect of colour fungus
resistance and adhesion, for the period stipulated below. Submit the Warranty from
the sheeting manufacturer covering the same.
Period of warranty for different sheeting
Types of Period of Warranty
Sheeting
Engineering Grade Three (3) years
High Intensity Grade Seven (7) years
Diamond Grade Seven (7) years
For reflectivity sheeting, the warranty is to also cover its retro-reflective elements for
the warranty period.
1.4.7.2 Other road ancillary items
Provide a warranty in accordance with contract conditions for road markings and
guard rails for a minimum period as listed in the PSD against all defects from the date
of completion.
Warrant the following items for a minimum period as indicated against all defects from
the date of completion:
Item Period of warranty
Road Marking Paint 3 Months
Vehicle Guard Rails 1 Year
1.4.8 Safety
Provide safety precautions in compliance with all current legislations and regulations.
Provide and maintain sufficient proper and efficient life-saving appliances. These are
to be conspicuous and available at all times.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
Ensure that all personnel understand the use of the appliances and carry out drills to
ensure that all necessary procedures are understood and followed.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Functionality and Durability

All items are to achieve the functional quality as specified in clause 3 below during
the stipulated period of warranty.
2.1.1.1 Road Markings
Markings are to be free from raggedness at their edges and free from streaks.
All road markings are to achieve a durability of at least three months such that the
visibility will not decrease by more than 50% at any time during this period. Repaint
the entire works if the painting has faded below 50% visibility within the first three
months.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Driveway Markings

Permanent road markings are to be either pavement marking paint (normal
temperature application) or thermoplastic material as indicated in the drawings.
3.1.1 Pavement Marking Paint

3.1.1.1 General
All paints used for pavement marking are to be quick-drying, chlorinated rubber
based and comply with SS 221. The material is to be white, yellow or red as indicated
in the drawings.
3.1.1.2 Paint Properties
Paint is to meet the requirements tabulated below:
Quantitative Requirement of Paint
Characteristic Requirement
Minimum Maximum
Pigment content, % by weight of paint 40 60
Non-volatile matter, % by weight of paint 60
Viscosity, Krebs unit 70 80
Specific gravity 1.22
Fineness of grind, microns 50
“No pick-up” drying time, mins 15
Opacity (contrast ratio), %
- white 70
- yellow 60
- red 50
3.1.1.3 Yellow Colour

The yellow colour is to visually match with colour 356 of BS 381C unless otherwise
agreed by the SO.
3.1.1.4 Container Identification
The following information is to be legibly and durably marked on each container:
a. Name of the paint
b. Type
c. Colour
d. Name of the manufacturer and/or recognised trademark
e. Batch or code number
f. Quantity
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1.1.5 Reflectorisation
Where reflectorisation is required, provide solid glass beads which comply with BS
EN 1423. Apply the beads to the wet surface of the marking at the rate of 400-500
g/m².
3.1.1.6 Flow cups and Wet Film Gauges
Provide approved flow cups (ISO Flow Cup or Equivalent) for measuring the
consistency or viscosity of the paint used. Provide wet film gauges with a measuring
range of 0 to 600 microns having an accuracy of 25 microns for the determination of
the wet film thickness of paint laid. Supply six aluminium plates 200 x 200 mm of 15
SWG (1.83 mm) for the purpose of testing the thickness of the road line paint.
3.1.2 Thermoplastic Road Markings

3.1.2.1 General
Comply with SS 498: Class A.
The skid resistance level, measured as described in SS 498: Part 2, is to be not less
than 45 unless otherwise directed.
3.1.2.2 Reflectorisation
Where reflectorisation is required, provide solid glass beads which comply with BS
EN 1423 and incorporate into the thermoplastic mixture. Also apply the beads to the
wet surface of the marking in accordance with SS 498. Verify this requirement against
the technical requirements of the LTA and ensure compliance.
3.1.3 Paintings for Kerbs and Other Street Furniture

Use paint to SS 221 or gloss enamel as indicated in the drawings. Refer to
architectural specifications for requirements of gloss enamel or other external paints
and coatings.
3.2 Vehicular Impact Guardrail
3.2.1 General
For material requirement refer to section C5-10 “Structural Steelwork”, clause 3.1.
3.2.2 Fasteners
Unless otherwise specified or agreed, bolts and nuts are to be of carbon steel
complying with the requirements of ASTM A307 Grade A and ASTM A563 Grade A
respectively.
3.2.3 Mechanical Properties

The beam metal is to conform to the following tensile requirements:
a. minimum yield point - 345 N/mm²
b. minimum tensile strength - 483 N/mm²
c. 12% minimum elongation on a 50mm test gauge length of beam element
Prepare test specimens and test in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M. If
galvanised test specimens are used, the correction for thickness is to be 0.15mm.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
All bolts are to have a tensile strength of at least 414 N/mm² tested in accordance
with ASTM A307.
3.2.4 Metal Thickness

Unless otherwise shown in the design drawings, the base metal of beam or sheet is
to be of nominal thickness of 3mm. The nominal thickness for the galvanised beam
or sheet is to be 3.15mm with a tolerance for under specified thickness of 0.25mm.
There is to be no limit for over thickness. For fabricated beams, thickness
measurements are to be made for tangent portions of the cross section.
3.2.5 Beam Dimensions

Shape beam from sheets with a projected width of not less than 305mm and a depth
of not less than 76mm. The sheets used are to have a nominal width of 483mm.
Permissible tolerance from the nominal width is to be minus 3.2mm.
Unless otherwise shown in the design drawings, the effective length of the beam
element is to be 3810mm long with provision of mounting of post at 1905mm centres.
3.2.6 Terminal Sections

Fabricate terminal sections from sheet steel manufactured from the same type of
metal and having the same gauge thickness and galvanised in the same manner as
the beam elements and also to the same mechanical properties.
3.2.7 Galvanising
In general comply with the requirements of BS ISO 1461.
Hot-dip galvanise the guardrail elements after fabrication using zinc coating with total
weight on both sides of beam not less than 1220 g/m². When subject to Single Spot
Test, test specimen is not to have a coating weight less than 1100 g/m².
Hot-dip galvanise all bolts, nuts and washers for use with guardrail as specified in
ASTM A153 or AASHTO M232 or sheradize as specified in BS 7371: Part 8.
3.2.8 Painting
All primer, undercoat and finishing coats are to be materials and paints
recommended/ manufactured by the same manufacturer, unless otherwise accepted
by the SO.
3.3 Retro-Reflective Sheeting for Traffic Signs
3.3.1 General
The sheeting is to be:
a. Suitable for the manufacturing of traffic signs, directional signs and miscellaneous
signs for road guidance.
b. Highly reflective when normal to vehicle headlight depending on the angle of
incidence. The reflectivity is to be sharp and glareless.
c. Free from dirt, solid lumps, scales, ragged edges and non-uniformity of colour,
etc.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
The surface of the sheeting is to be smooth and flexible. No cracking is to occur when
bent.
The reflective layer of the sheeting is not to delaminate, crack, peel or chip during the
manufacturing process.
3.3.2 Colour
The colour of the sheeting is to be even and free from all spots or decolorization. The
colour is not to easily fade under local weather conditions.
Colours of the sheeting are to be compatible to the colours of the sample sheeting to
SO’s acceptance.
3.3.3 Adhesive Backing

The adhesive backing of the sheeting is to be/ have:
a. Either pressure sensitive or heat sensitive type depending on the requirements.
b. Give high quality bonding to clean, smooth and grease free surfaces such as
aluminium and glass-fibre glass, etc.
c. Fully covered by protective paper liner to prevent deterioration by dirt and
moisture before use. The paper liner is to be moisture resistant and easily
removed without soaking into water or any other solvent.
3.3.4 Grades of Sheeting

3.3.4.1 Engineering Grade
Sheeting is to have optical lens elements enclosed within a transparent resin that has
a smooth, flat outer surface.
The minimum retro-reflective values of the Engineering Grade reflective sheeting is to
have minimum initial readings and minimum readings at the end of warranted life as
tabulated below:
Minimum Initial Readings
Minimum Coefficient of Retro-reflection (RA) (Candelas per lux per square metre)
Observation Entrance White Yellow Red Blue Green
Angle Angle
0.2 -4 70 50 14.5 4.0 9.0
0.2 + 30 30 22 6.0 1.7 3.5
0.5 -4 30 25 7.5 2.0 4.5
0.5 + 30 15 13 3.0 0.8 2.2
Minimum Readings at the End of Warranted Life (3rd Year)

Where Entrance Angle is - 4° and Observation Angle is 0.2°
Min. Initial Readings Min. Readings at End of Warranted
Life
White 70 28
Yellow 50 20
Red 14.5 5.8
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Blue 4.0 1.6

Green 9.0 3.6
3.3.4.2 High Intensity Grade

Sheeting is to have optical lens elements adhered to a synthetic resin encapsulated
by a flexible transparent plastic that has a smooth, flat outer surface. The sheeting is
to be provided with heat activated adhesive and is designed for application in a heat
lamp vacuum applicator with approved temperature backing.
The minimum retro-reflective values of the High Intensity Grade reflective sheeting is
to have minimum initial readings and minimum readings at the end of warranted life
as tabulated below:
Observatio Entrance White Yellow Red Blue Green
n Angle Angle
0.2 -4 250 170 45 20 45
0.2 + 30 150 100 25 11 25
0.5 -4 95 62 15 7.5 15
0.5 + 30 65 45 10 5.0 10
Minimum Readings at the End of Warranted Life (7th Year)

Where Entrance Angle is -4° and Observation Angle is 0.2°
Min. Initial Readings Min. Readings at End of Warranted
Life
White 250 200
Yellow 170 136
Red 45 36
Blue 20 16
Green 45 36
3.3.4.3 Diamond Grade

Sheeting is to have Prismatic lens that are formed in a transparent synthetic resin and
sealed.
The minimum retro-reflective values of the Diamond Grade reflective sheeting is to
have minimum initial readings and minimum readings at the end of warranted life as
tabulated below:
0° Orientation
Observation Entrance White Yellow Red Blue Green
Angle Angle
0.2 -4 430 350 110 20 45
0.5 -4 250 200 60 10 25
1.0 -4 80 65 20 4.0 10
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
0.2 30 235 190 60 11 24

0.5 30 170 140 40 7.0 19
1.0 30 50 40 13 2.5 5.0
Minimum Readings at the End of Warranted Life (7th Year)

Minimum Coefficient of Retroreflection (RA) (Candelas per lux per square metre)
0° Orientation
Where Entrance Angle is - 4° and Observation Angle is 0.2°
Min. Initial Readings Min. Readings at End of Warranted Life
White 430 250

Yellow 350 200
Red 110 60
Blue 45 23
Green 20 10
3.3.5 Markings
All completed signs are to have a coloured sticker at its rear/underside/post indicating
the month and year of manufacture, which constitutes the start of the warranty.
Use stickers of various colours to indicate the different year of manufacture.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Road Markings

Before any paint is applied, ensure the prepared surfaces are inspected and
accepted by the SO.

All pavement line paints and pavement markings, including pedestrian crossing, box
junctions, continuous broken lines, numerals, bus zones, arrows, lettering, etc. are to
drawn or spray painted by mechanised pavement line painting machine. Do not
apply by brushes unless otherwise agreed.
Do not paint on surfaces that are wet or damp from rain, dew or other causes until
properly dried. Ensure surfaces receiving the painting are free from dirt, grease, oil or
other deleterious substances.
After a coat has been applied, do not apply succeeding coats until the work has been
inspected and accepted. Allow a minimum 24 hours or interval otherwise agreed after
the first application.
Supply all paints for pavement marking in ready-mixed form by the manufacturer. Do
not permit thinning on site. Strictly control the use of thinners and other solvents at
the site and monitor against adulteration.
Apply all paints for pavement markings by apparatus accepted by the SO to a wet film
thickness of 375 microns and to a tolerance of 50 microns.

Lay material no thicker than 5mm.
Prepare the pavement in accordance with SS 498. Apply only to surfaces that are
clean and dry.
Lay longitudinal markings by mechanical means to a regular alignment.
On concrete surfaces, remove all traces of curing compound by wire brushing or
other approved means. Apply a tack coat compatible with the road surface and the
marking material.
4.2 Vehicular Impact Guardrail
4.2.1 Fabrication
Fabricate in accordance with methods as proposed by the manufacturer and
accepted by the SO.
Do not punch, drill, cut or weld in the field unless agreed by the SO for special
reasons and for sampling.
The beam is to be of uniform section, straight or curved as required and so designed
that when installed it will not hold water. The edges are to be rolled or rounded to
eliminate sharp edges. Reject warped, kinked or bent sections.
Beams erected on a radius of less than 45m are to be shop-curved.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2.2 Installation
Erect the guardrail after placing the finished wearing course unless otherwise
accepted by the SO.
Erect to the alignment as shown in the Drawings.
When erecting adjacent to live traffic, assemble in the direction of traffic flow in order
to avoid vehicles striking rail ends.
4.2.3 Connections and Splices

Splice beam elements with a lap length no less than 318mm lapping in the direction
of traffic. Fasten the splice with eight bolts and form all connections or splices with
oval shoulder button-headed bolts to minimise projections on the road-side of the
guardrails. Emboss all bolt heads with the manufacturer’s brand.
4.2.4 Painting
When painting is required, clean the guardrail elements from all grit and dirt by
thorough rinsing with clear water. Wipe off greasy deposits with paint thinners. Dry
the surface thoroughly prior to painting.
Apply one coat of approved etching primer (mordant solution) to the galvanised
surface followed by one coat of zinc chromate primer, one undercoat and two
finishing coats.
4.3 Installation of Retro-Reflective Sheeting

To accepted method proposed by the manufacturer.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions

nuisance.
5.1.2 Programme

Submit to the SO for record as-built drawings on completion of each element.
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit all warranties for SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.

5.2 Quality Control

5.2.1.1 Statement of Characteristics
Submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the paint complies with the
specified requirements in clause 3.1.1(Pavement Marking Paint).
5.2.1.2 Viscosity
When determined on site with the ISO Flow Cup with a diameter of 4 mm, the time to
empty the flow cup is to be from 60 to 70 seconds. If the paint sample fails to meet
this viscosity requirement, then reject all paint works represented by the test and
propose remedial measures to the satisfaction of the SO.
5.2.1.3 Wet Film Thickness
Run the marking apparatus with pre-set settings over one test plate and measure the
wet film thickness. If the paint sample fails to meet this viscosity requirement, then
reject all paint works represented by the test and propose remedial measures to the
satisfaction of the SO.

Measure the thickness of the markings as described in SS 498.
5.2.3 Vehicular Impact Guardrail

Submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the guard rail elements comply
with the specified requirements.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2.3.1 Sampling
Select one piece of guardrail, backing plate and terminal section from each lot of 200
pieces for testing to determine that specification requirements have been complied
with. If the lot is less than 200 pieces, select one piece each of guardrail, backing
plate and terminate section for testing. If the selected piece fails to meet the
requirements, then test two additional pieces. If either one of these pieces fail to
conform again, then reject the lot represented by these samples and propose
remedial measures to the satisfaction of the SO.
5.2.4 Retro-Reflective Sheeting

5.2.4.1 Engineering Grade
Test is to conform to ASTM D4956.
5.2.4.2 High Intensity Grade
Test is to conform to ASTM D4956.
5.2.4.3 Diamond Grade
Test to verify properties as stiputated in Clause 3.3.4.3(Diamond Grade).
5.2.4.4 Test Report
Submit a test report to include the following technical information:
a. The reflectivity factors at certain range of angles,
b. The maximum angle of incidence for good reflection towards light source,
c. Durability of reflective surface due to weathering, dew and moisture effects,
d. Workability in bending,
e. Durability of colour, compatibility to colours of sample sheeting,
f. Strength and durability of adhesive,
g. Corrosion and abrasion resistance etc.
Cover all colours of sheeting.
Submit the Test reports together with illustrative pamphlets/technical information
leaflets/ catalogues, etc. and a sample of 300mm x 300mm for each colour of
sheeting and/or materials to the SO for acceptance before installation.
5.2.5 Test Results

Supply report of all test results, including the original copy, to the SO immediately
after they are available. Agree number of report copies with the SO.
17
Version 1.0
Architectural General Specifications
NNPQS
G1-10 General Requirements
Version 1.0
NNPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Project Particulars 3
1.2 General Description of the Works 3
1.3 Codes, Regulations, Standards and Technical Reference 3
1.4 Work Preambles 4
1.5 Abbreviations and Definitions 6
2.1 General Requirement 8
2.2 Environment 8
3. MATERIALS 9
3.1 Materials Generally 9
3.2 Ordering of Materials 9
3.3 Certificates for Materials 9
3.4 Storage of Materials 9
3.5 Rejected Materials 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Workmanship Generally 10
4.2 Co-Ordination of Drawings 10
4.3 Setting Out and Levels 10
4.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling 10
4.5 Protection of Products and Components 11
4.6 Suitability of Conditions at the Start of Works 11
4.7 Existing Services 11
4.8 Execution of the Works 12
4.9 Holes, Chases, Inserts and Fixings 13
4.10 Protection of Works 13
4.11 Defective Work 13
4.12 Cleaning Up 13

5.1 Records and Certificates 14
5.2 Tests to Establish Acceptability of Works 14
5.3 Trial Panels, Test Samples, Mockups 14
Version 1.0
NNPQS
1. GENERAL
This section sets out the general requirements for carrying out any works for the
project and shall be read in conjunction with all relevant work sections and other
contract documents.
1.1 Project Particulars

Refer to the PSD for particular information of the project.
1.2 General Description of the Works

Refer to the PSD for the general description of work requirements for the project.
1.3 Codes, Regulations, Standards and Technical Reference
1.3.1 Regulations
The whole of the Works and materials are to be in accordance with the Building
Control Regulations, other regulations as set out by the authorities having jurisdiction
over the works, and the relevant bylaws unless otherwise stated.
Ensure that the requirements in the Specification are strictly adhered to when
carrying out the Works, unless otherwise directed.
1.3.2 Standards and Codes of Practices

clauses.
In case of conflicting requirements between the codes, refer to the SO for resolution.
Assume priority of precedence of different standards and codes in descending order
as follows:
a. Singapore Codes SS and SS CP
b. SS ISO or ISO
c. BS or BS EN
d. Other standards such as ASTM (US), AS (Australia) and DIN (German),
as agreed with the SO.

Where specified, be guided by the principles and methods as set out in the technical
reference when carrying out the works. Alternative methods and principles may be
proposed in lieu of the referenced document, subject to SO’s acceptance, if it can be
demonstrated that the specified quality or performance of the works can be achieved.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
1.4 Work Preambles
1.4.1 Ambiguity
Before commencing any works, obtain clarification or instructions in relation to any
discrepancy or ambiguity, which is discovered within and between the Specification
Work sections, and / or other contract documents issued by the various parties.
1.4.2 Approved Sub-contractors

All sub-contractors for the works are subject to the SO’s acceptance. At the time of
tender, submit the list of subcontractors intended to be engaged for the works. Submit
with the list, details such as the relevant track records of the firms, the qualification of
the personnel and details of equipment to be engaged for the works.
1.4.3 Licences, Permits and Liaison with the Authorities

Be responsible to initiate the application for all necessary licences, permits, etc and to
carry out all necessary liaison with the Government Departments and Statutory
Boards, etc whenever necessary, for the satisfactory completion of the Works.
Be responsible for ensuring that these licences and permits are obtained in good
time.
1.4.4 Safety Regulations and Temporary Works

Strictly observe all necessary safety requirements to comply with the provisions of the
Factories Act 1973 and The Factories (Building Operations and Works of Engineering
Construction) Regulations 1985, and any other requirements from the authorities
having jurisdiction over the works.
1.4.5 Safeguarding Properties Adjacent to Site

Propose and adopt site procedures and methods of working such as to limit to a
minimum any disturbance and vibration to the buildings around the Site.
Identify and implement protective measures necessary to safeguard the adjacent
properties prior to carrying out the works.
Indemnify the Employer in accordance with contract conditions against all claims for
loss and/or damage to the adjoining properties by reason of the carrying out of the
works or by reason of insufficiency of precautionary measures.
1.4.6 Site Supervision

Provide personnel with adequate and relevant experience to SO’s acceptance, to
supervise the Work. Submit the CV of the superviser(s) to SO where directed.
1.4.7 Coordination of Works

Ensure that all units, components or assemblies whether from one or different
sources, are available in time for incorporation into the Works.
Develop and submit for SO acceptance, a strategy in the form of a maintenance

manual and logbook, to ensure that elements that are likely to deteriorate significantly
can be replaced or rectified.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
The maintenance manual and logbook are to describe the procedures for the
satisfactory long-term care and regular maintenance of the materials and
components identified in the work sections, to be carried out by the building owners.
Include the following information, where appropriate:
a. An outline description of the installation and detailed description of specific items
with product names, types, serial numbers, etc.
b. The name, address and telephone number of each supplier, fabricator,
finisher, installer etc. involved in the Works.
c. Recommendation on maintenance periods and planned preventive maintenance
procedures.
d. Copies of manufacturers’ warranties or guarantees, service manuals, brochures,
recommendations, etc.
e. Copies of test and approval certificates.
f. One original copy of documents showing “As Built” information and the like,
relevant to the installation. Submit the “As-Built” information in soft copies where
directed by the SO. The Contractor shall compile one single set of the information
from various sub-contractors for submission.
g. Compilation of a list of parts to be replaced periodically and the names and
contacts of the suppliers.
h. Realignment and adjustment instructions where relevant.
i. Procedures for dismantling and reassembling.
j. Details of finishes, including colour and required maintenance.
k. Logbook pages set up for recording the times of performance of the above
procedures, sufficient in number to receive the entries for a minimum of ten years
or otherwise directed. Show examples of typical entries by recording any
maintenance procedures (such as cleaning) performed during the contract and or
defects liability periods.
The forms of the maintenance manual and logbook are to be in A4 size, printed or
typed on durable printing paper, each page consecutively numbered, neatly bound in
durable vinyl or similar hard cover, and permanently labelled with the project name
and date of issue. The Contractor shall compile one single set of the information
from various sub-contractors for submission.
1.4.9 Testing Authority

When tests and checks are called for in the specifications, engage a suitably
equipped organisation or laboratory accredited under the Singapore Laboratory
Accreditation Scheme (SINGLAS) and to SO’s acceptance, to carry out the tests
and checks required.

Prepare and submit a quality control plan for SO’s acceptance. Include a set
of procedures / actions to:
a. Ensure the understanding of the project brief.
b. Ensure a number of checks and verification are put in place in the work process
to enable the delivery of the brief.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
c. Ensure the right person is employed to carry out the works.
c. Ensure the works are carried out based on proper operating instructions.
d. Ensure feedback and poor / defective works is picked up and attended to,
and corrective / preventive action is in place.
e. Ensure prior approvals are obtained from SO for any deviations from
the specifications before works commence.
f. Ensure documents of all tests and quality checks as specified are properly
done and kept as records.
1.5 Abbreviations and Definitions
1.5.1 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are applicable when referred to in the specifications:
AS Australian Standard
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
BCA Building and Construction Authority
BMS Building Management System
BMU Building Maintenance Unit (Also known as Gondola system,
Façade Maintenance Unit)
BS British Standard
CFC Chlorofluorocarbon
ETTV Equivalent thermal transfer value
HCFC Hydro-chloro-fluoro-carbon
OH&S Occupational Health and Safety
OTTV Overall thermal transfer value
PE Professional Engineer
PSD Project Specific Data
PVC Polyvinylchloride
SAA Standards Association of Australia
SS and SS CP Singapore Standard and Code of Practice
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets
M&E Mechanical and Electrical
RH Relative Humidity
SO Superintending Officer
UV Ultraviolet
More to be added
1.5.2 Definitions
Wherever the following terms are used they shall have the following meaning:
“The Works” The whole of the Works envisaged by the Contract including the
works of the Local Authority and Public Undertakings unless
specifically stated otherwise.
"Directed" Directed by the SO.
"Inspected" Inspected by the SO.
"Submitted" or Submitted to or submit to the SO for review and acceptance.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
“Submit”
"Accepted" or Accepted or acceptance by the SO.
"Acceptance"
"Approved" or Approved by or approval from the SO.
“Approval”
“Acceptance” and “Approval” are used within the following limitation:

a. No approval or acceptance by the SO shall relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility to achieve the specified quality and performance of the work
under the Contract.
b. Any approval given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods

of construction submitted in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification, are not to be interpreted as denoting any degree of satisfaction
with the materials used in the Works or in the execution of the Works.
2.1 General Requirement

Engage methods and resources that will ensure the works achieve the specified
quality within the agreed programme and cost.
2.2 Environment
Ensure the carrying out of the works will not cause un-acceptable pollution, noise,
erosion and vibrations to the environment as stipulated by the NEA and other relevant
authorities.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Materials Generally

Products are to be new unless otherwise specified. All materials are to be supplied
clean, undamaged and in good condition ready to be used for the Works.
For products with a limited shelf life, ensure no parts or whole are expired.
Where a choice of manufacturer or source is allowed for any particular product,
supply the whole quantity required as the same type and from the same manufacture
and/or source unless otherwise approved. Produce written evidence of sources of
supply when requested. Ensure that the whole quantity of each product supplied is of
consistent kind, size, quality and overall appearance.
Ancillary products and accessories are to be of a type recommended by the main
product manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.
3.2 Ordering of Materials

Unless otherwise directed, do not place orders for materials before the sources and
samples of the materials have been approved and the results of any preliminary tests
required by the Specification have been accepted.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
3.3 Certificates for Materials

All materials and products are to be manufactured and tested in accordance with the
appropriate Standard or as specified. All materials and products delivered to the site
are to bear the manufacturer's name, brand name or any other data required to verify
compliance with the specified requirements. Where appropriate, provide certificates
from the supplier or test agencies verifying such compliance. Include, whenever
applicable, the location in the Works or the delivery or batch which the certificate
represents.
Where certificates of manufacture or tests are not available for materials proposed for
use in the Works, carry out independent testing to determine compliance with the
specified requirements where directed by the SO.
3.4 Storage of Materials

Store all materials in a manner, which is not detrimental to their use in the Works and
in accordance with any specified requirements.
Ensure that the storage facilities and the loadings resulting from the storage will not
adversely affect the construction, the building and other buildings/amenities nearby.
Engage specialist advise if appropriate.
Do not permit the storage of materials, components or equipment on new or partially
completed work without prior approval.
3.5 Rejected Materials

Immediately remove from the site, all materials which are unidentified or do not
comply with the Specification.
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Workmanship Generally

Ensure that all works are carried out:
a. In accordance with the specified methods and procedures where applicable;
b. In accordance with good building practice;
c. In accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions where applicable;
d. By suitably qualified and experienced personnel.
4.2 Co-Ordination of Drawings

Check all Drawings and schedules to ensure that there are sufficient information to
carry out the works and that all the instructions, drawings and schedules provide
compatible information on the works to be carried out.
In the event of any discrepancy being found between the contract drawings and/or
schedules, and other contract documents, notify the SO immediately for resolution,
the SO’s decision shall be final.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
4.3 Setting Out and Levels
4.3.1 Accuracy
Arrange the setting out, erection, juxtaposition of components and application of

finishes in such manner as to ensure:
a. Compliance with specified tolerances
b. Satisfactory fit at junctions,
c. No visually unacceptable changes in plane, line or level,
d. True, regular finished appearance.
4.3.2 Levels
Site levels, either spot or contour, and all other levels shown in the drawings are
established with respect to the datum of 100.00 m at mean sea level. Check and
verify all existing and proposed levels as indicated in the drawings, highlight and
resolve any discrepancy prior to the commencement of the works.
4.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling

Deliver materials and products to the site with labels showing brand name, product
name and manufacturer's batch number.
Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use in order of
delivery and before expiration of the shelf life date.
4.5 Protection of Products and Components

Take measures to prevent over-stressing, distortion and other damage to the
products.
Keep products and components clean and free from contamination. Prevent staining,
chipping, scratching or other disfigurement, particularly of products exposed to view
in the finished work.
Keep dry to prevent premature setting, moisture movement and similar defects.
Where appropriate store off the ground and allow free air movement between stored
products.
Prevent excessively high or low temperatures and rapid changes of temperature in
the products.
Protect adequately from rain, damp, sun and other elements as appropriate. Ensure
that products are at a suitable temperature and moisture content at time of use.
Ensure that sheds and covers are of ample size, in good weatherproof condition
and well secured.
Keep different types and grades of products separately and adequately identified.
Keep products in their original wrappings, packings or containers until immediately
before they are used. Wherever possible, retain protective wrappings after fixing until
shortly before handing over to the owners.
Ensure that protective measures are fully compatible with and not prejudicial to the
products and materials.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
4.6 Suitability of Conditions at the Start of Works

Provide all trades with necessary details of related types of work. Before starting each
type of work, ensure that:
a. Previous work is appropriately complete, in accordance with the project
documents, to a suitable standard and in a suitable condition to receive the new
work.
b. All necessary preparatory work has been carried out, including provision for
services, openings, supports, fixings, damp proofing, priming and sealing.
c. The environmental conditions are suitable.
4.7 Existing Services

Take due care to safeguard all existing services that will be affected by the works.
Where existing services are required to be terminated or diverted for the execution of
the works, give the necessary notices to the Authority and the owner. Co-ordinate
and arrange for the works to be carried out.
4.7.1 Statutory requirements

Comply with all the requirements of the various Statutory Authorities and Government
Departments in respect of the existing services at and around the vicinity of the Site,
whether underground, on or above ground, or at the site peripherals.
Terminate or divert all relevant existing services as required by the authorities before
work begins.
4.7.2 Information on services

Obtain information in relation to existing services from the SO.
Verify actual sizes and locations of all services with the Public and Statutory
Authorities and make enquiries as to the presence and location of any privately
owned land drains and services. Locate, identify and mark on site before
commencing work.
Arrange with and offer the Authorities all necessary assistance in ensuring timely
diversion, disconnection, termination, or capping off of the services.
4.7.2.1 Detection of services located on site

Locate and mark the positions of services affected by the work.
Conduct detection of suspected below ground services. Propose suitable method for
acceptance by the SO.
Mark below ground services with signboards giving type and depth and inform the
Authorities concerned of any such services encountered on site.
4.7.3 Drains in Use

Protect drains, manholes, gullies, vent pipes and fittings still in use and ensure that
they are kept free of debris at all times. Make good any damage arising from the
Works and leave clean and in working order at completion.
Version 1.0
NNPQS
4.7.4 Bypass Connections

Provide as necessary to maintain continuity of services to occupied areas of the site
and adjoining properties. Give a minimum 72 hours notice to occupiers if shutdown is
necessary during changeover.
4.7.5 Services to Remain

Notify the SO and the authorities or owner of any damage. Make all arrangements for
repair to the satisfaction of the SO, the authorities or owner.
4.8 Execution of the Works
4.8.1 Methods
Carry out the works in accordance with accepted methods and equipment.
4.8.2 Allowance for Movements

Ensure that the performance, appearance and proper functioning of the Works are
not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection, expansion or contraction that
can be reasonably expected to occur in the building or the Works.
Where applicable, form joints between the works and adjacent works to
accommodate possible movements, settlement, deflection, expansion or contraction
between the works.
4.8.3 Application / Installation of Products and Components

Use or fix each product and components in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Inform the SO if these conflict with any other specified
requirement.
Provide suitable packings at screwed and bolted fixings to take up tolerances and
prevent distortion.
Adjust the location and fixing of components and products so that joints which are
opened to view are even and regular.
Ensure that all moving parts operate properly and freely. Do not cut, grind or plane pre-
finished components and products to remedy binding or poor fit without approval.
4.9 Holes, Chases, Inserts and Fixings

Obtain approval for the size and positions of any hole, chase, insert or fixing required
before the related work begins. Unless otherwise agreed, form all holes and chases
and build in any inserts or fixings at the time of construction. Do not cut or drill any part
of the works without approval.
Do not cast any conduits, recesses, pipes etc inside structural columns, walls, beams
or slabs unless otherwise agreed.
4.10 Protection of Works

Take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the work from rain and other
hazards, and due to the other works in progress, until hand over.
4.11 Defective Work

Where in the opinion of the SO, any of the finished work or materials or workmanship
in any part of the works fail to comply with the specification, that part of the works will
not be accepted and may be classified as defective.
NNPQS
All work classified as defective are to be cut out and removed from the works and
replaced or otherwise dealt with in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
Propose and carry out suitable remedial measures to SO’s satisfaction.
The extent and nature of any measures required as a result of defective work are to
be determined by the SO.
4.12 Cleaning Up
Remove all protection, surplus materials, empty containers, rags, dirt and other
debris. Remove daubs and spatters from coatings and materials, and leave surfaces
clean.
5.1 Records and Certificates

Unless otherwise directed, maintain 3 copies of records of all inspections and tests
performed to substantiate conformity with the Contract Specification, including those
carried out by Sub-Contractors and/or third party testing agencies and
manufacturers' or suppliers' certificates of test.
Retain one copy of these records on Site and make available for inspection at any
time. Submit the other two copies to the SO and the Employer respectively and
progressively. On completion of the Works, hand over all records to the SO unless
otherwise agreed.
Submit to the SO without delay, any records which indicate that the work or materials
not complying with the specification, in order that proposals for any rectification may
be assessed and carried out in good time.
5.2 Tests to Establish Acceptability of Works

In the event of failure to comply with the requirements of the Specification, propose
suitable tests to establish the acceptability of the Works and be responsible for any
consequential costs and delays.
The results of such tests will not necessarily be accepted as proof of compliance with
the Specification.
5.3 Trial Panels, Test Samples, Mockups

Provide all materials or components and erect or assemble, to the satisfaction of the
SO, all trial panels, test samples, mockups required by the specification or as directed
by the SO. Adequately protect and maintain such construction and use as
benchmarks for acceptable quality of the works. Upon completion of the works,
demolish and remove such works from the site as directed.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
A1-20 Windows
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
CONTENTS
Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.4 Trade Preamble 4

2.1 Contractor’s Brief 6
3.0 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 11

3.1 Types of Window Systems 11
3.2 Glazing 11
3.3 Aluminium Components 13
3.4 Carbon Steel Components 13
3.5 Stainless Steel Components 14
3.6 Timber 14
3.7 Frame Material Compatibility 15
3.8 Fixings and Fasteners 15
3.9 Setting Blocks 15
3.10 Sealants 15
3.11 Accessories 16
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 17
4.1 Fabrication 17
4.2 Installation 18
4.3 Protection and Cleaning 20
5.0 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION 21

5.1 Submissions 21
5.2 Samples and Mock-ups 22
5.3 Inspections 22
5.4 Tests 22
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for windows with Aluminium, Steel or Timber
frames. It does not cover windows with PVC frame or panes, which are to proprietary
manufacturer’s specification. Windows forming parts of a curtain wall or cladding
system are regarded as operable openings within the system, refer to work sections
A1-10 Curtain Walls and A1-40 Metal Cladding for requirements.

sections including the following:
A1-80-1 External Render
A1-80-2 External Wall Tiling
A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating
A3-40 External Metalwork
A3-50 External Timberwork
1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 212 Specification for Aluminium Alloy Windows
SS Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (Human impact
341.1989 considerations)
Other Standards
BS 6262 Code of practice for glazing for buildings
BS 6375 Performance of Windows
BS 6213 Guide to the selection of constructional sealants
BS 5889 Specification for one-part gun grade silicone-based sealants
BS 8118 Structural use of aluminium
BS 6339-2 Loading for buildings. Code of practice for wind loads
BS 5250 Code of practice for control of condensation in buildings
BS EN ISO Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles -
1461 specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures - zinc
14713 and aluminium coatings – guidelines
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and

stoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections
for external architectural purposes
stoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections and
preformed steel sheet for windows and associated external
architectural purposes
BS 5713 Specification for hermetically sealed flat double glazing units
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Chemical composition
BS 1161 Specification for aluminium alloy sections for structural purposes
PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bimetallic contacts and its alleviation
BS 8200 Design of non-loadbearing vertical enclosures
ASTM C1036 Standard specification for flat glass
ASTM C1048 Standard specification for heat-treated flat glass kind HS, kind FT
coated and uncoated glass
ASTM C1172 Standard specification for laminated architectural flat glass
1.4 Trade Preamble
1.4.1 Contractor’s Submissions

The design intent including type and locations of windows for the project are indicated
in the drawings and schedules.
Engage qualified and experienced personnel to carry out and submit the following
items for the SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the fabrication and installation of the
windows, and to meet with the performance requirements as set out in
clause 2.1 below; Details to develop may include shape and sizing of
components, accessories and connections to the building.
1.4.1.2 Design for the appropriate structural support for the window system
including the panes, frame and connections. Where required as indicated
in the PSD, engage a PE (structural) to verify the design and endorse the
submissions.
1.4.1.3 Develop waterproof details for the junction between the windows and the
walls.
1.4.1.4 Propose names of manufacturers and products for components and
accessories when called for.
1.4.2 Co-ordination with Other Works

Co-ordinate the window installation works, particularly the interfaces with the
following work packages and trades:
a. External walls and finishes.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
b. Internal walls and finishes.
1.4.3 Provide Spare Materials

where directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair. Refer to
PSD for list.
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the performance of the
following items:
a. Five-Year warranty for the general window systems and other accessories
components.
b. Ten-Year indemnity for aluminium and glazing works.

Refer to the PSD for any requirement to provide a quality control plan.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
2.1 Contractor’s Brief

following requirements:
2.1.1 Resistance to Climatic and Environmental Conditions

2.1.1.1 Weather Resistance
a. Limit airflow through the windows, from the exterior surface to the interior surface
through any of its joints, to the air leakage rates below when subject to wind
induced pressures or suctions of 600 Pa across the window.
i. through openable windows: not more than 2.0 cu m/hr per metre
length of the air seal around the perimeter of the opening frames.
ii. through fixed windows and spandrels: not more than 1.5 cu m/hr
per square metre.
iii. there must not be any concentrated airflow through the windows or
at any interfaces.
b. Prevent leakage of water into the interior of the building from the outer face of the
assembly, resulting from wind pressure, gravity, surface tension, or capillary
action with wind and precipitation likely to be experienced, up to 600 Pa static
pressure for any period of 5 minutes, and 600 Pa dynamic pressure for 3 second
periods at random intervals.
c. Prevent water entering into those parts of the windows that would be adversely
affected by the presence of water.
d. Where the system requires water to appear on the inside surfaces of the window,
such as in a track of a sliding door or window, any water must drain unassisted
within 10 minutes.
e. Maintain such weather-tightness under reasonably anticipated imposed loads and
thermal, structural or other movements.
Account for additional requirement for weather resistance as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.2 Thermal Performance and Solar Gain
Achieve at least the performance levels as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.3 Condensation
Resist the formation of condensation on visible surfaces, interstices or locations
where it is unable to drain.
Provide air and vapour barriers if necessary to eliminate dampness and condensation
around the windows.
2.1.1.4 Thermal Stress
Resist cracking to glass caused by thermal stress.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
Expansion and contraction of the window frames must not cause unacceptable noise
or induce significant stresses to any components.
2.1.2 Resistance to Structural Loading

2.1.2.1 Gravity Loading
Support the self weight of the windows and transmit this weight safely back to the
supporting structure without overstressing or permanently deforming any components
Transmit all the design loads to the building structure via the anchors as designed
with an adequate margin of safety appropriate to each material and product.
2.1.2.2 Wind Loading
Withstand loading from inside and outside the building determined in accordance with
BS CP3 using a basic wind speed of 35m/s and terrain category suitable for the site.
Transmit these loads safely back to the supporting structure without overstressing or
permanently deforming any components. Take account of all applicable local
pressure coefficients.
Sustain no permanent damage to framing members, glazing or anchors when tested
at both positive and negative applications of the design wind loads multiplied by a
factor of 1.5. Framing members must not be buckled. Glazing, glazing beads and
decorative capping pieces must remain securely held and gaskets must not be
displaced.
Permanent deformation to framing members is not to exceed 1/500 of the span
measured between points of attachment to the structure after loading.
The calculated stress of all combined forces is not to exceed 1.33 times the
appropriate maximum permissible stress in the short term.
Design stays, locks, operating mechanisms, actuator motors etc. so that:
a. windows are not sucked or blown open when closed
b. stays or hinges not torn off if window is partly opened
c. window to be closeable under full design load
2.1.2.3 Impact Loading

Framing must satisfy the requirements of Tables 3 and 4 of BS 8200.1985 "Design of
non-loadbearing vertical enclosures" for category B in table 2. The maximum visually
acceptable dent in the metal surface is 10mm in diameter and 3mm in depth.
2.1.2.4 Maintenance Loading
Sustain and safely transmit a static load of 500 N applied horizontally through a
square of 100 mm side on any framing in vertical or near vertical windows.
2.1.2.5 Barrier Loading
For windows acting as barrier, sustain and safely transmit static horizontal loads in
accordance with schedule 4 of the Building control regulations.
2.1.2.6 Loading from Temporary Conditions
Sustain and safely transmit any temporary loading that may arise from lifting, storing,
transporting, hoisting and installing the windows.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
2.1.2.7 Window Framing Deflection Limits

Achieve deflection limits, as follows under the design load for serviceability:
a. Framing members - at both positive and negative applications, the maximum
frontal deflection must not exceed 1/240 of the span of the member measured
between points of attachment to the building, or 20 mm, whichever is the lesser.
b. Framing members supporting single glazing - the maximum deflection must not
exceed 1/125 of their length measured along the pane edge.
c. Framing members supporting double glazing units - the maximum deflection must
not exceed 1/175 of their length measured along the unit edge, or 15 mm,
whichever is the lesser, or more restrictive limits if set by the unit manufacturer.
d. The vertical deflection of framing members and transoms, which support the
weight of glazed panels, must not exceed 1/250 of their length.
e. Surfaces (metal panel, glass, etc.) that are horizontal or inclined at less than 150
must not deflect under self-weight by more than L/360.
f. Water must not pond on any part of the window system.
g. All framing members are to recover fully from the above deflections when the
loads are removed.
2.1.2.8 Locked in Stresses

Avoid the introduction of locked-in stresses that may be detrimental to the
performance of the windows.
2.1.2.9 Vibration and Repetitive Loading
Resist loosening of anchors and other components due to the effects of vibrations or
cyclic effects of load, deflections and thermal expansion.
2.1.2.10 Anchors
Take account of any reduction in safe working loads in fixings due to their spacing,
location in areas of tension, near edges or proximity to cast in inserts/existing fixings,
or thickness of shims.
2.1.2.11 Structural Design
Carry out the design in accordance with the following codes:
a. SS 212 for Aluminium Alloy Windows
b. BS 6262 for Glazing
c. BS 8118 for Aluminium
d. BS 5950 for Steelwork
e. SS CP 7 for Timber
2.1.3 Movement and Tolerance to Structure

2.1.3.1 Structural Movement and Movement Between Works by Others
Ensure that performance, appearance and proper functioning of the window system is
not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection, expansion or contraction,
which can be expected to occur in the building or the construction process.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
Junctions between the window systems and adjacent work by others are to be formed
to accommodate possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent element
without distortion to the works, or disintegration of joints between the works.
Refer to the PSD for design movements and deflections to account for.
2.1.3.2 Structure Tolerances
Accommodate tolerances on structure and window openings as indicated in the PSD
to the respective works.
2.1.4 Acoustic and Noise Performance

2.1.4.1 Acoustic Performance
Ensure that the window, its seals, baffles and flashings that form part of acoustic
separators achieve the following STL values as indicated in the PSD against noise
break-in.
Install insulation / sealant to eliminate noise break in through air gaps around
windows
2.1.4.2 Noise
Minimise drumming, creaking, rattling, whistling and any other noises from the
windows audible to occupants.
2.1.5 Fire and Smoke Performance

2.1.5.1 Non-Combustible Materials
Ensure materials in the windows do not readily support combustion or add
significantly to the fire load or give off toxic fumes.
2.1.5.2 Surface Spread of Flame and Fire Propagation
Achieve Class O classification when tested in accordance with BS 476: Parts 6 & 7
internally and externally.
2.1.5.3 Fire and Smoke Stopping
Meet the requirements for BCA and FSB for separation of fire and smoke
compartments. It is noted that where the window does not bridge the edge of a floor
or the wall separating two compartments there are no requirements.
2.1.6 Functionality
2.1.6.1 Appearance
a. Achieve the geometry presented in the drawings and schedules.
b. Achieve colours and appearances as per samples approved by the SO.
2.1.6.2 Operability
a) Meet the recommendations of SS 212 and BS 8213-1 in respect of reach
distances to ensure the safe operation of opening vents by users.
b) Meet the requirements for force required to operate the sash of a window set out
in SS 212 and BS 6375-2, for the type(s) of windows concerned.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
2.1.6.3 Security
Resist wilful dismantling in order to gain unauthorised entry or vandalism.
2.1.6.4 Infestation
Resist attack or infestation by micro-organism, fungi, insects, reptiles, birds or bats
and rodents.
Have no openings in the windows that permit entry of insects, reptiles, birds or bats
and rodents.
2.1.7 Durability
2.1.7.1 Design Life of Components
Achieve the following minimum design life requirements:
a. IGU’s 10 years
b. PVF2 coating 15 years
c. All metal components 10 years
d. All gaskets 10 years
e. Hinges, stays, locks and other ironmongery – 50,000 cycles
2.1.7.2 Corrosion
In locations subject to wetting or condensation, do not use material susceptible to
corrosion; or cause rust staining, or bi-metallic action.
2.1.7.3 Maintenance and Replacement
Identify materials and components which under normal service conditions cannot
meet the specified design life and allow for their monitoring and replacement.
Detail the components such as to permit removal and replacement of individual
assemblies without affecting adjacent assemblies or supporting framework.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.0 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
3.1 Types of Window Systems

Refer to the PSD for the types of window systems and component requirements for
this project.
3.2 Glazing
3.2.1 General
All glass must:
a. Comply with the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2.
b. Be clean cut, without significant edge faults (including feathered edges, shells or
other imperfections) and free from bubbles, inclusions, cracks, rippling, dimples,
sleeks or other defects.
c. Be cut to accurate sizes in the factory.
d. Be assessed for optical and visual faults as described in BS EN 572-2. Spot faults
to be no worse than category C. Ensure there are no linear/extended faults.
Optical faults to be within the limits set in BS EN 572-2.
e. Have no local defects producing irregular reflections.
3.2.2 Lamination
Laminated panes must:
a. Comply with SS 341.
b. Have PVB interlayer complying with BS 6206 Class A.
c. Have edge steps less than 0.5mm in toughened or heat-treated glass.
d. Bear identification marks indicating its nature and processor.
Protect the interlayer material from the effects of moisture absorption in service
including clouding, shrinking back, degassing and delamination.
Ensure that the interlayer is compatible with glazing sealants.
3.2.3 Heat Strengthened Glass

Heat strengthened glass must:
a. Comply with the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2.
b. Be tempered on a roller hearth furnace eliminating tong marks
c. Conform to the following requirements in the horizontal heat treatment process:
i. Maximum bow 0.2%
ii. Roller wave: All thicknesses 0.15mm depth maximum between
peaks and troughs
iii. Edge dip: 0.25mm maximum
d. Have identification marks indicating its nature and processor.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.2.4 Toughened Glass

Toughened glass must:
a. Comply with SS 341.
b. Be tempered on a roller hearth furnace eliminating tong marks
c. Conform to the following requirements in the horizontal toughening process:
i. Maximum bow: 0.2%
ii. Roller wave: All thicknesses 0.15mm depth maximum between
peaks and troughs
iii. Edge dip: 0.25mm maximum
d. Have identification marks indicating its nature and processor. Location to be
agreed with the SO.
Heat soak test all toughened glass for a minimum of 8 hours at 290 C, in accordance
with DIN 18516 Part 4, to convert all nickel sulphide inclusions greater than 40 µm in
diameter from the to the ß phase so that the glass will fracture in the test. After the
test the probability of failure in service should be less than one in 130 tonnes. The
manufacturer must, upon request, show by statistical analysis of test data that the
probability of failure is not greater than the value quoted above.
3.2.5 Heat Treatment

Prior to heat treatment:
a. Grind flat edges to a small arris.
b. Dubb corners.
c. Grind out small shells and/or chips.
d. Maximum chip/shell diameter 2 mm.
Not more than four randomly placed chip/shells in any single pane of glass.
3.2.6 Insulating Glazed Units

Insulating glazing units must have:
a. Hermetically sealed complying with BS 5713.
b. Mechanically applied primary polyisobutylene seal located between glass and
spacer providing a continuous vapour proof barrier with a minimum width of 2mm
and a secondary two part silicone sealant extending around the perimeter of the
unit.
c. Aluminium alloy spacers with a natural or black finish and sufficient rigidity for
their purpose, which are formed to accommodate seals and contain desiccant.
d. All breather tubes nipped closed prior to installation.
e. All corners and joints fabricated to ensure a vapour tight construction.
3.2.7 Low Emissivity Coating

Low emissivity coating must have:
a. Emissivity less than 0.2.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
b. Nominally neutral in colour and uniform in tone, hue, colour, texture, pattern and
opacity
c. Consistent appearance to the glazed units.
3.3 Aluminium Components
3.3.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS 1474 unless otherwise agreed with the SO
Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755
Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 1.2mm
Platforms, webs, flanges, races and screw flutes of sufficient size to satisfy all
structural requirements and eliminate distortion of elements in the works.
3.3.2 Sheet, Strip and Plate

Alloy to comply with BS EN 485-3.
Not less than 1.6mm thick for hidden flashings, not less than 2mm thick for
components exposed to view or to impact Stainless Steel Components.
3.3.3 Finishes to Aluminium

3.3.3.1 General
Shop finish all visible and all other surfaces of aluminium exposed to the external
environment, including drained and ventilated cavities and pressure equalisation
chambers. Finish after any fabrication processes likely to damage the finish i.e.
folding of sheet, but prior to assembly into units.
3.3.3.2 PVF2 Coating
Resin content 70%, to meet requirements of AAMA 2605.
Refer to the PSD for number of coats.
3.3.3.3 Polyester Powder Coat
Heavy duty external grade polyester powder coat that conforms to AS 3715. Finish to
be applied to all internal surfaces.
3.3.3.4 Anodised Aluminium
Anodic oxidation of wrought aluminium to comply with AS 1231 with thickness grade
AA25.
3.4 Carbon Steel Components
3.4.1 General
Comply with structural specifications for requirements relating to secondary steel
framing.
Where used, comply with one of the following:
a. Hot rolled steel complying with the requirements of BS EN 10025.
b. Hot rolled sections to BS 4: Part 1, BS EN 10210-2 and BS EN 10021-1, tubes to
BS 6323: Parts 1, 2 & 3 and angles to BS 4848: Part 4.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
c. Cold formed pre-galvanised steel sections to BS EN 10142, BS EN 10143, BS EN

10147
d. Steel sheet to BS 1449: Part 1.
3.4.2 Hot Dip Galvanising

All carbon steel components to be hot dip galvanised in accordance with BS ISO
1461.
Isolate all galvanised steel components in direct contact with cementitious surfaces
with thin dense PVC or EPDM isolation packs. Do not use bituminous paint.
3.4.3 Paint Finishes

For general requirement of applying paint on galvanised surfaces refer to structural
specifications.
Colours and gloss levels of any exposed items to the SO’s direction.
Finished surfaces to be dense and consistent, free from flow lines, streaks, pin holes,
blisters, tears, lumps and other coating defects or surface imperfections when viewed
from a distance of 1 metre under normal diffused daylight.
3.5 Stainless Steel Components
3.5.1 General
Stainless steel components to be austenitic, complying with BS EN 10088 grades:
a. X2CrNi18-10 (formerly grade 304 S11) for concealed locations
b. X8CrNi18-9 (formerly grade 304 S31) for concealed locations
c. X2CrNiMo17-12-2 (formerly grade 316 S11) for exposed locations
d. X2CrNiMo18-14-3 (formerly grade 316 S13) for exposed locations
3.5.2 Plate, Sheet, Strip

Comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO 3506-2.
Unless otherwise noted, grade 1.44xx (formerly 316) to be used for all visible
components, in all other circumstances grade 1.34xx (formerly 304) to be used.
Unless otherwise noted, grade A4 to be used for visible fasteners, in all other
circumstances grade A2 to be used.
Select the fastener property class so as to meet the performance criteria specified.
3.6 Timber
Unless otherwise specified all timber to be Kapur, Chengal or Balau
Moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content between
adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%.
Pressure impregnate all timber, impregnation system to approval of the SO.
Fire retardant treatment system to the approval of the SO. Season and kiln dry timber
after treatment.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
3.6.1 Timber Surface Treatment

Refer to section A3-50 “External Timberwork” clause 3.3.
3.7 Frame Material Compatibility

Select, design and install different materials to prevent bimetallic corrosion.
3.8 Fixings and Fasteners

Use stainless steel fixings and fasteners with stainless steel and aluminium, or with
non-metallic components wherever wetting may occur.
a. Grade A4 to BS 6105 where visible
b. May be reduced to grade A2 to BS 6105 where not visible
Stainless steel fasteners may have hardened tips of other composition for self-drill
and self-tap screws only
Use carbon steel bolts with carbon steel components
Ordinary bolts and nuts to BS EN 24032, BS EN 24033, BS EN 24034.All plain and
tapered washers to BS 4320, Form E.
Nuts to BS 4190 for grade 8.8.
The use of zinc plating to BS 1706 – Fe/Zn 8 is acceptable where serrated fixings are
used.
3.8.1 Anchors
Use stainless steel, galvanised steel or aluminium anchors and stainless steel fixings
wherever wetting may occur (including condensation).
3.9 Setting Blocks

Setting blocks to be Silicone Rubber, Polychloroprene or EPDM of appropriate
hardness and resistance to compression set.
Compounds must not leach out over time and cause staining, or deterioration of the
block.
3.10 Sealants
Select and install in accordance with BS 6213.
Silicone sealants to comply with BS 5889.
Polyurethane sealants to comply with BS 5215
Design sealant geometry (and cross section) to accommodate the anticipated
substrate movement.
Do not use acid curing sealants.
Non-structural sealants-approved low modulus silicone (exposed or concealed) or
approved polyurethane sealant (concealed)
Use in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, particularly relating to the use
of primers.
Sealants are to have:
a. Backing rods- Non-gassing polyethylene closed cell foam
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
b. Primers and joint preparation materials- as recommended by the sealant

manufacturer.
Refer colour selection of any visibly exposed sealants to the SO.
3.11 Accessories
3.11.1 Hinges, Stays, Locks and Other Ironmongery

To manufacturer’s recommendation to comply with performance requirement and
subject to the SO’s acceptance.
Refer to the PSD for specific product selected for the project if any.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication
4.1.1 Methods
a. Select methods used for fabrication that will achieve the specified performance.
b. Use jigs and computer controlled tools wherever appropriate to achieve accuracy.
c. Use the correct tools for each task and equipment that is well maintained. Do not
use blunt and worn tools.
d. Carry out grinding, cutting, shaping and finishing materials using tools, techniques
and ancillary materials that will not contaminate windows components with
particles or substances which could disfigure, stain or corrode them.
e. Undertake the assembly of components under factory controlled conditions.
4.1.2 Marking
Mark strong points on components and materials for lifting, or to permit assembly or
installation in a particular sequence;
Clearly mark upper and lower faces, left and right handed pieces, top and bottom,
components and materials or lengths close but critically different from one another.
Ensure marks are removable or concealed when installed.
4.1.3 Fabrication Tolerances

4.1.3.1 Windows Framework
Achieve the following maximum allowable tolerances for all windows framework:
a. ±1.5 mm on length
b. ±1.5 mm on straightness
c. ±2° accuracy on angles
d. ±1mm on sides and ±2mm on diagonals of opening positions
4.1.3.2 Glazing
Achieve the following maximum allowable tolerances for individual panes of glass:
a. ±2.0 mm on height and width
b. ±1.0 mm on straightness of edges
c. Tolerances on insulating glazed units allowed by BS 5713.
4.1.4 Corner Joint Fabrication

Stake and crimp corners of windows.
4.1.5 Factory Glazing Work

a. Comply with the recommended guidelines set out in SS212 and BS 6262
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
b. Remove any protective tapes from the edges of insulating glazed units.
c. All roller wave to be horizontal
d. Install glazing units with at least 5mm clearance at the sides and top from the
framing, and 6mm at the bottom with allowance for water to drain freely.
e. Install gaskets without incorrect distortion such as stretching or compression of
length, or folding back of wiper seals.
4.1.6 Factory Sealant Work

a. Apply and cure sealants in accordance with their manufacturer’s directions on
minimum and maximum temperature and RH conditions.
b. Achieve the depth to width geometry.
c. Prevent three-sided adhesion.
d. Use appropriate backer rods, tapes, surface preparation and primers as
manufacturer’s directions.
e. Tool off sealants neatly
f. Use small joint sealant in crevices where extrusions mitre together.
4.2 Installation
4.2.1 Line and Level Survey

Undertake a survey of line and level and condition of structure and openings to verify
acceptability to receive windows.
4.2.2 Setting-out Marks

Ensure marks are removable or concealed when windows are installed.
4.2.3 Handling of Materials and Components

Handle window by designed strong points only
4.2.4 Erection Tolerances

Install the sub-frames and the windows to the more onerous of the following permitted
deviations:
Horizontal and vertical position on ± 10 mm.
elevation from site datum
Horizontal position relative to ± 2 mm
adjoining wall finishes
Level: ± 2 mm in any one structural bay.
Plumb: ± 2 mm in any one-storey height.
Plane: ± 2 mm in any one storey height or structural
bay width.
Intersection: ± 2 mm in alignment in any direction between
any two adjoining windows
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
4.2.5 Window Anchors

Verify correct location and fixing onto the building structure
4.2.6 Head and Subsills

Install head and subsills with end dams and complete seals internally and to
substrates.
Secure head and subsills into window opening to resist loading as specified herein
Install window unit into sub head / sub sill system to resist loading and weather
penetration and to allow for building movements
Incorporate any drains and ventilation holes from the sub-sill.
4.2.7 Installation of Fixings

Install fixings in accordance with their manufacturer’s instructions and procedures.
The strength grade combination of bolts, nuts and washers to be as prescribed or
recommended in British Standards.
Use a torque spanner to achieve correct tightening of fixings to achieve correct
tension load and avoid under / overstressing,
Use lock-nuts to prevent loosening.
At least one clear thread to show above the nut.
Where required seal the heads of bolts and fixings.
4.2.8 Site Glazing Work

Comply with the recommended guidelines set out in BS 6262
Remove any protective tapes from the edges of insulating glazed units.
All roller waves to be horizontal
Install glazing units with at least 5mm clearance at the sides and top from the
framing, and 6mm at the bottom with allowance for water to drain freely.
Install gaskets without incorrect distortion such as stretching or compression of
length, or folding back of wiper seals.
4.2.9 Site Sealant Work

Apply and cure sealants in accordance with their manufacturer’s directions on
minimum and maximum temperature and RH conditions.
Achieve the depth to width geometry.
Prevent three-sided adhesion.
Use appropriate backer rods, tapes, surface preparation and primers as
manufacturer’s directions.
Tool off sealants neatly.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
4.3 Protection and Cleaning

Protect vulnerable coated surfaces; glass, metal edges, corners and features. Apply
temporary removable protection against damage from following trades or operations
and the anticipated hazards.
Materials used for temporary protection to be compatible with and subsequently
removed from the surface and finishes without detriment to the finish. The
component suppliers and finishers must approve methods for removal.
Unless agreed otherwise by the SO protection should remain in place until all work
potentially damaging to the components or their finish has been undertaken.
Replace any damaged components in the windows. Concession to this requirement
will only be given if the contractors proposed repair procedure is authorised by the
SO and complete and warranted repair of the damage is achieved.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
5.0 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Tender Submissions

Submit the following information with the tender:
a. Name of the window frame manufacturer including copies of technical data
relating to the proposed frame section and detailed sections through the head, sill
and jamb.
b. Name of the glass supplier and including copies of technical data relating to glass
(for complying and alternatives).
c. Glazing methods proposed and methods of dealing with mitred corners of
gaskets.
d. Name of proposed sub-contractor(s) if any.
e. Track record of the window manufacturers’ current or completed similar jobs
during the previous 5 years and details of quality control procedures adopted.
5.1.2 Work Submissions

Submit the following for SO’s acceptance prior to commencing fabrication and
installation works:
a. Method statements including methods and sequence of construction.
b. Detailed drawings
At a scale of no less than 1:2 illustrating the head, sill and jamb conditions, and their
relationship to adjacent surfaces including tolerances, sealant application, backing
rods and bond release tapes, internal finishes. Where relevant include for all changes
in window direction in horizontal or vertical plane.
5.1.2.1 Shop Drawings
a. Elevation of all windows at scale 1:10 including location of fixings, hinges and
handles.
b. Section through the head, sill, jam including adjacent surfaces and any change in
direction at a scale of 1:2.
Do not commence fabrication until shop drawings have been reviewed and
permission to proceed has been obtained from the SO. Allow 21 days for the SO
review
5.1.2.2 Certification of Materials
Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturer of the following materials/
components, certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade, strength,
size, finish, etc, and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified.
a. Glass
b. Frame finish
c. Sealant compatibility
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
5.1.3 Maintenance Submissions

Include the following information in the maintenance manual and logbook.
a. Cleaning methods for glazing and metal
b. Maintenance of hinges and handles
5.1.4 Warranty
Submit the warranty for the SO’s acceptance upon completion of the works.
5.1.5 Quality Control Plan Submission

5.2 Samples and Mock-ups
5.2.1 Samples
Submit one sample of each window type including glazing and proposed hardware for
the SO’s acceptance prior to ordering material. All approved samples to be kept in
site store for reference.
Submit also sample of hinges and handles and other ironmongeries for acceptance
prior to fabrication.
5.2.2 Visual Mock-ups

Refer to the PSD for requirement of mock-up panels for the project, if any.
5.2.3 Performance Mock-ups

Refer to the PSD for requirements of mock-up panels for the project, if any.
If required the window system shall be tested to SS381.
5.3 Inspections
No items.
5.4 Tests
5.4.1 Glass testing

Demonstrate by the prime manufacturers testing that the surface compressive stress
in the glass meets the requirements of SS 341 clause 3.2.
5.4.2 Field Testing

When required, carry out field testing as specified in the PSD (in accordance with
AAMA 501 and/or the Building and Construction Authority (CONQUAS 21)
Watertightness Test for Windows, and/or other test method approved by the SO). The
locations of tests to be agreed with the SO prior to commencement
5.4.3 Aluminium Finishes Testing

Measure film thickness in four locations on every tenth window and report results to
the SO. Do not install windows until the SO has first test result of.
Carry out adhesion test in a location not visible after the window has been installed.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
A1-20 Windows
5.4.4 Sealant Testing

5.4.4.1 Compatibility
Provide test certificates for each sealant used to confirm compatibility of the sealant
with all surrounding materials including finishes (PVF2, paint etc.), glass coatings,
glazing gaskets, setting blocks, spacers, backing fin, steel, aluminium, etc.
Compatibility means that the sealant will not cause staining of the adjacent material at
any time during the service life of the facade, nor will the adjacent material affect the
performance of the sealant.
5.4.4.2 Weatherseals and Air seals
Test wet sealants prior to installation on site. Check at least 3 tests of each type of
detail, at 3 separate locations, using the "Hand Pull" method to ASTM C794-01.
Test dry weather seals (gaskets) and air seals in the actual position and on the actual
substrates for the relevant seal.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations 4

2.1 Contractor’s proposals 6

3.1 Paint Coating Systems 7
3.2 General Requirement of Paint Coatings 8
3.3 Pipework Paints 8
3.4 Miscellaneous Materials 8
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 9
4.1 General 9
4.3 Preparation 9
4.4 Application 11
4.5 Protection 11
4.6 Making Good Defects 12
4.7 Cleaning Up 12

5.1 Submissions 13
5.3 Inspection 14
5.4 Tests 14
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on exterior surfaces of
buildings and other external elements as described. For the requirements relating to
painting and coating for external structural steelwork refer to structural specifications.

1.3 Standards
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply
with the requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted
are the current version, unless specific year references are noted.
Singapore Standards
SS ISO 1248 Iron oxide pigments for paint
SS ISO 3262 Extenders for paint
SS CP 22 The painting of buildings
SS 5 Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
SS 7 Paint: finishing, gloss enamel
SS 38 Aluminium wood primer
SS 82 Bitumen based primer for cold or hot application
SS 88 Mineral solvents (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents) for
paints and other purposes
SS 90 Glossary of paint and related terms
SS 91 Solvent-based paint remover
SS 150 Emulsion paints for decorative purposes
SS 269 Paint colours for building purposes
SS 345 Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes
SS 494 Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
Other Standards
BS 4652 Zinc rich priming paint (organic media)
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
AS 2855 Paints and related materials. Micaceous iron oxide pigment

AS/NZS Guide to long-life coatings for concrete and masonry – Latex –
4548.3 Textured coatings – Non-aggregate
ASTM Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
D3359-02
SIS 05 59 00 Pictorial surface preparation standards for painting steel surface
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended type of painting systems and locations are indicated in the Schedules
and Drawings. Engage qualified and experienced personnel to carry out and submit
the following items for SO’s acceptance:
1.4.1.1 Submit the name of the manufacturer and the proprietary brand name of
the painting and coating products to be used. Wherever possible, obtain
the paint products from the same manufacturer.
1.4.2 Co-ordination with other Works

Co-ordinate the external painting works, particularly the interfaces with the following
work packages and trades:
a. Masonry and in-situ concrete walls
b. Windows, doors and louvres

PSD for list.
1.4.4 Warranty
Submit a five-year warranty in accordance with the contract conditions for all external
sprayed coating system.

Prepare and submit a maintenance/replacement manual covering external painting
and coating systems. Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for
details.

Prepare and submit a quality control plan for SO’s acceptance.
1.5 Definitions and Abbreviations

The following definitions and abbreviations appear within this work section:
a. UPVC Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. Primer coat first coat

c. Undercoat intermediate coat
d. Top coat finishing coat
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1 Contractor’s proposals

2.1.1 Durability and weather resistance

Paint products Submited are to achieve a service life of 5 years, and must not
degrade or deteriorate due to solar or any other weathering exposure.
2.1.2 Fungal/Algae Resistance

Where noted in the PSD, finishing coats to be fungal/algae resistant for the period of
the design life.
2.1.3 Appearance
Ensure the paintworks achieve uniform colour and texture as that accepted in a
mock-up panel, with no defects that would impair appearance.
Provide joints as indicated in the drawings if any.
2.1.4 Fire
Take into account, that the works are to be non-combustible throughout.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Paint Coating Systems

Refer to the PSD for selected coating systems for this project.
Refer to the chart below for possible permutations for painting external surfaces and
standards to comply with where applicable.
SUBSTRATE SYSTEM PRIMER STANDARD 1ST COAT FINISHING STANDARD
COAT(S)
MASONRY Conventional Solvent borne Acrylic Acrylic SS 150
AND acrylic sealer emulsion emulsion
CONCRETE Water borne Acrylic textured AS/NZS
acrylic sealer topcoat 4548.3
Elastomeric Primer suitable Elastomeric Elastomeric
for substrate coat coat
High Polyamide Acrylic aliphatic
performance epoxy sealer urethane
topcoat
FERROUS Conventional Alkyd zinc BS 4652 Alkyd Alkyd enamel SS 7
METAL phosphate undercoat topcoat
primer
Alkyd AS 2855 Alkyd AS 2855
micaceous iron micaceous iron
oxide oxide
High Epoxy zinc BS 4652 Epoxy amine Acrylic aliphatic
performance phosphate urethane
primer
Epoxy AS 2855 Solvent borne
micaceous iron acrylic topcoat
oxide
NON Conventional Etch primer Alkyd Alkyd enamel SS 7
FERROUS (compulsory for undercoat topcoat
METAL galvanised
ferrous metal
substrate)
Alkyd zinc BS 4652 Alkyd AS 2855
phosphate micaceous iron
primer oxide
Alkyd AS 2855
micaceous iron
oxide
High Etch primer Acrylic aliphatic
performance urethane
Epoxy zinc BS 4652 Solvent borne
phosphate acrylic topcoat
primer
Epoxy AS 2855
micaceous iron
oxide
WOOD Conventional Aluminium SS 38 Alkyd Alkyd enamel SS 7
wood primer undercoat topcoat
Aluminium Water borne Water borne
wood primer acrylic acrylic topcoat
undercoat
Modified alkyd Modified alkyd
transparent transparent
wood finish wood finish
Polyurethane Polyurethane
varnish varnish 2X
High Epoxy sealer Solvent borne
performance acrylic topcoats
2X
TRANSPARENT Transparent Transparent
WOOD STAIN stain stain
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
Note that the products listed have been selected for the types of surfaces or
substrates, and the standard of quality particularly applicable to the specific surfaces
to be painted or coated.
3.2 General Requirement of Paint Coatings

Supply all primer and first coats, intermediate coats and finishing or top coats from
one manufacturer for use on the same surface. The various appropriate coats must
be recommended by the manufacturer for the particular substrate and take into
consideration the condition of the substrate, weathering exposure and usage of the
premises. The various coats must be compatible.
Where surfaces have been treated or applied with preservative or fire retardant,
check with the paint manufacturer for the types of paint products suitable for use on
such surfaces. The paint products selected must:
a. Be compatible with the treatment product.
b. Not inhibit the performance of the treatment or paint product.
3.3 Pipework Paints
3.3.1 Exposed uPVC Products

Unless otherwise specified, apply one coat of polyamide epoxy primer followed by
two coats of enamel paint.
3.3.2 Galvanised Steel Pipes and Fittings

Unless otherwise specified, apply:
a. One coat etching primer
b. One coat lead and chromate free primer
c. One coat enamel paint undercoat
d. Two finishing coat of enamel paint
3.4 Miscellaneous Materials

Take into account, that paint thinners, tints, turpentine and fillers, are manufactured
by the same manufacturer as the coatings, or are approved by the coating
manufacturer for use with their paint products.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
Only apply paint to firm and dry surfaces, prepared in accordance with good trade
practice. Paint to be evenly and thoroughly applied, using clean brushes, rollers or
spraying equipment.
Make edges of completed paintwork adjoining other materials, building elements and
different coloured paintwork clean and sharp without overlapping.

Deliver materials to site ready-mixed (except for two pack paint products) in original
sealed containers with labels intact showing brand name, product name and
manufacturer's batch number.
delivery and before service life expiry date.
After stoppage of work and when containers are not in use, close the containers
(empty or otherwise) and remove to the designated storage area.
4.3 Preparation
4.3.1 Generally
Clean all surfaces to be painted of all oil, grease, dirt, mould, mildew, loose or flaking
paint and all other material deleterious to achieving a good paint finish prior to filling,
sanding or painting.
Smooth surface irregularities. Fill and patch up all joints, cracks, holes and other
depressions with appropriate non-shrink, ultra violet resistant fillers suitable for the
substrate. Finish off flush with surface and abrade to a smooth, even finish. Make
good defects to the satisfaction of the SO prior to any coating work being carried out.
Use the types of preparation materials as recommended by the material
manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being
prepared.
4.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surfaces

Remove form oil, mould release oil, laitance, grease, dirt and debris from concrete
surfaces using a suitable solvent and then neutralize. Remove grit, dirt, loose
materials, mortar drippings and the like; remove all nibs, projections and
protuberances.
Patch concrete surfaces with a non shrink cementitious grout, or filler compound,
suitable for such use filling all cracks, depressions, and voids to provide smooth
surfaces. Refer any defects other than surface imperfections to the SO before
patching.
Prior to application, allow the concrete to cure for a minimum of 30 days. Test the
concrete surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content is below
15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.3 Preparation of Wood Surfaces

Sand down the wood surfaces to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers,
splinters, and brush to remove dust. Remove all grease and dirt using a solvent
recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Fill all cracks, splits, nail holes, screw holes, and surface defects with wood putty or
non shrink compound after the priming coat has been applied. Apply putty flush with
the surface, sand smooth and touch-up with primer when dry. For varnishing work,
ensure the putty matches the finished colour.
Cover knots and sappy areas with two coats of appropriate wood sealer before
priming.
Prior to installation, prime fire-retardant treated wood or preservative treated wood,
required to be painted or stained, with shellac or other selected sealer, as
recommended by the manufacturer.
4.3.4 Preparation of Rendered Surfaces

Allow surfaces to dry prior to applying primer coat. Remove any efflorescence and
brush down. Scrape off all plaster nibs and other projections and sand smooth. Do
not apply any primer coat until efflorescence ceases.
Cut out all scratches, cracks, holes depressions and voids and fill with non-shrink
grout, patching plaster or other selected patching material. Allow to dry, refill if
necessary sand smooth to provide a flush, smooth surface.
Test the rendered surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content
is below 15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used or
this application.
4.3.5 Preparation of Masonry Surfaces

Thoroughly clean off all grit, grease, dirt, mortar drippings and splatters. Remove
nibs or projections from masonry surfaces. Fill cracks, holes and voids, with
appropriate cementitious grout, or filler compound, and wipe surface so that it has the
same texture as the adjacent masonry surface.
4.3.6 Preparation of Ferrous Metal Surfaces

Abrade rusted, and marred surfaces back to bare metal and grind smooth all rough
surfaces before priming.
Clean galvanised surfaces with a galvanised cleaner of an approved proprietary
brand, then wash with clear water. Prime galvanised surfaces with etching primer or
epoxy primer (suitable for galvanised metal) prior to coating.
Shot blast clean mild steel surfaces to receive high performance coatings in
accordance with SA 2.5 from SIS 055900.
Mechanically clean mild steel surfaces to receive conventional coatings in
accordance with ST3 from SIS 055900.
Seal rusty spots that are difficult to remove to bare metal using chelated polymeric
oxirane 100% solid epoxy primer.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.7 Preparation of Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces

Remove any surface corrosion/oxidisation and lightly abrade with fine abrasive paper
and white spirit. Apply pre-treatment etching primer or polyamide epoxy primer where
recommended by the coating manufacturer.
4.3.8 Painting Pipework

Lightly sand the surface before the application of coatings.
4.4 Application
4.4.1 Conditions
Apply paint only to surfaces prepared in accordance with this work section.
Maintain adequate ventilation during painting and drying periods.
Apply materials at the rate as recommended by the manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for drying times between coats.
Ensure that each coat is dry before the next coat is applied
4.4.2 Climatic Conditions

Take into account the influence of the changeable weather on the drying time for all
the various coats of the paint or coating system.
Do not undertake painting or coating when the air is dust-laden or when weather and
temperature conditions are unsuitable, as specified by the manufacturer.
4.4.3 Substrate Condition

Take into account, that the substrates are in a suitable state for the application of any
coating
4.4.4 Other Trades

Do not apply any coatings when other ongoing trades create dust or damp conditions.
4.4.5 Coating colours

Where specially required ensure each succeeding coat of paint differs slightly in
colour from the preceding coat.
4.4.6 Finishing Coat

Ensure that all finishing coats are smooth, and free of streaks, laps, pile-up of paint,
skipped or missed areas.
Ensure that the final Dry Film thickness is in accordance with that as specified in the
manufacturers technical literature.
4.5 Protection
Protect all surfaces not to be coated, by covering with dust sheets, masking or other
suitable materials. Provide adequate signage and barriers to protect the general
public, and to prevent damage to freshly applied coatings.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.6 Making Good Defects

Make good all damages caused to other works. Re-touch all coated and finished
work wherever necessary.
4.7 Cleaning Up
clean.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Include in construction program, event for submission of the following information:
a. Name of the paint manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data relating
to paints to be used.
b. Name of Sub-Contractor – (if sub-contracted).
c. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
5.1.2 Design Submissions

Prepare an installation strategy, containing the following information:
a. Method statements
5.1.3 Fabrication Submissions

No item.
5.1.4 Maintenance Manual Submissions

Include the following information in the maintenance manual and logbook:
a. Cleaning methods for glazing and metal / timber parts
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the Warranty upon completion of the works.

5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples for SO’s acceptance prior to ordering material:
a. A 1.0m x 1.0m panel of each of the paint or coating systems noted in clause 3.1
in a location to be agreed upon with the SO.
b. A 1.5m long sample of the paint system on any frame or tube or other building
element/component to be agreed upon with the SO.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for requirement of mock-up of the paint system for the project.
5.3 Inspection
Upon completion of the first section of any paint type, inform and request an
inspection from the SO. Proceed only after approval from the SO.
The SO will determine the extent of the ‘first section’.
5.4 Tests

Refer to the PSD for the schedule of tests required for this project.
5.4.2 Pull-off Test

Inform the SO when the first section of paint has cured. Undertake a pull-off test by
pasting five lengths 150mm length of adhesive tape onto the paint surface and pull off
slowly. Should the paint be removed in any of the tests, undertake five more. Should
any further failures occur, remove the paint from the wall by sanding down to a firm
surface and repaint.
5.4.3 Adhesion test

Carry out adhesion test when directed by the SO. Ensure that all adhesion tests are
carried out in accordance with SS 5.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A2-30 Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.5 Definitions / Abbreviations 5
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS 8
3.1 Types of Applied Finishes System 8
3.2 General Material Requirements 8
3.3 Substrate Preparation Materials 8
3.4 Waterproofing Systems: Membranes 9
3.5 Waterproofing Systems: Waterproof Screed 9
3.6 Skylights 9
3.7 Waterproofing Systems: Auxiliary Components 10
3.8 Waterproofing Systems: Primers and Bonding Compounds 10
3.9 Waterproofing Systems: Materials for Joints 10
3.10 Insulation 11
3.11 Surfacing Materials 11
3.12 Rainwater Goods 12
3.13 Fall Arrest System 12
4. WORKMANSHIP 13
4.1 General Workmanship Requirements 13
4.2 Preparation 13
4.3 Application of Membranes 14
4.4 Waterproof Screed 17
4.5 Insulation 17
4.6 Skylights 17
4.7 Installation of Rainwater Goods 18
4.8 Protection 18
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION 19
5.1 Submissions 19
5.3 Inspection and Tests 21
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the general requirements for applied finishes for flat roofs,
including various combinations of:
a. Waterproofing
b. Insulation
c. Surfacing

Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other
work sections including the following:
A2-40 Skylights
A3-10 Hardscape
A4-30 Floor Screeds and Hardeners
1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 26 Drainage of Roofs
SS CP 33 Lightning Protection
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of Reinforced Concrete Buildings
SS 133 Bituminous emulsion for Roof Waterproofing
SS 141 Unplasticized PVC pipe for cold water services and industrial uses
SS 374 Preformed Waterproofing Membranes for Concealed Roof
Other Standards
BS EN 363 Personal protective equipment against falls from a height – Fall
Arrest Systems.
BS EN 10088 Stainless Steels
BS 460 Cast iron for rainwater goods
BS 3837 Expanded Polystyrene Boards
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
Part 1 Specifications for Boards Manufactured from Expandable Beads

Part 2 Specification for extruded boards
BS CP 3 Code of basic data for the design of buildings: Chapter V Loading
1.4 Trade Preambles

The design intent and types of flat roof finishes for the project are set out in clause
3.1 and locations are indicated in the drawings. Based on the information, engage
qualified and experienced personnel to carry out and submit the following items to
the SO:
1.4.1.1 Design Development
Develop all necessary details including connections and interfaces etc. for the
construction of the roof system based on the design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Construction Methods
Submit suitable methods to carry out the works including setting out, application of
waterproofing membranes, installation and fixing of associated components, etc.
Take into account of the performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1 and
submit the construction method to the SO.
1.4.1.3 Manufacturer and products
Submit manufacturer and products to the SO, to meet with specified requirements
when called for.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Prepare coordinated shop drawings incorporating all developed details.

Co-ordinate the roofing works, particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
a. Main Structural Roofing Works
b. External Masonry and Cladding
c. Lightning Protection
d. Plumbing Works
e. Mechanical Services
f. Electrical Services
g. Ceilings
h. Balustrades
i. External Doors and Thresholds
j. External Painting & Coating
Liaise and coordinate with services engineer for location of roof penetrations,
attachments and other services to be fixed into and or onto the roof(s).
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

where directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair. Refer
to PSD for list.
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the following items:
a. Waterproofing and watertightness of the roofs.
b. Insulation systems of the roofs.
c. Surfacing screed, other accessories and components.
Refer to the PSD for warranty requirements.

Prepare and submit a maintenance / replacement manual covering all components
and accessories. Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for
details.

Prepare and submit a Quality Control Plan to the SO.
1.5 Definitions / Abbreviations

a. RC Reinforced Concrete
b. WFT Wet Film Thickness
c. DFT Dry Film Thickness
d. RWDP Rainwater Down Pipe
e. UV Ultraviolet
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Structural
2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete applied finishes
system shall not exceed the assumed design value as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.2 Live Loads
Unless otherwise specified, account for the Live Loads as stipulated in the Building
Control Regulations, and additional requirements of other statutory authorities having
jurisdiction over the works if any.
2.1.1.3 Wind Uplift
Account for possible wind uplift effects for loosely laid systems.
2.1.1.4 Thermal Stress and Structural Movement
Account for all thermal stress and other structural movement.
2.1.1.5 Structural Fixing
Structural fixings shall be able to resist the worst combination of the applied loads, as
well as foreseeable vibration transmitted to the roofing system.
2.1.1.6 Maintenance Loads
For accessible areas allow for maintenance loadings including loadings from
personnel, plant and equipment, Include the dynamic effects of such plants and
equipments. Refer to PSD for maintenance loading requirements.
2.1.1.7 Secondary Building Movements
Take into account, movements from secondary support structures, including vibration
and thermal movement from M&E equipment and related works.

Comply with the requirements of the FSSD and additional requirements of other
statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works if any.
2.1.3 Environmental
2.1.3.1 Thermal Performance
Comply with the applicable OTTV or U-value referred to in the PSD.
2.1.3.2 Rainwater Drainage

Take into account, compliance with the requirements of SS CP 26 for roof drainage,
and that of other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works if any.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1.3.3 Watertightness
The completed roof shall be in-penetrable to water and not give rise to any
observable dampness on visible surfaces under the normal environmental conditions
expected.
2.1.4 Maintenance
2.1.4.1 The roof system shall be maintainable and replaceable in parts or whole
from the outside.
2.1.4.2 Allow routine cleaning to be conducted with minimal disruption to the
building occupants.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS
3.1 Types of Applied Finishes System

The applied finishes system(s) for the project may consist of varying combination of
different components as set out below. Refer to the PSD for requirements of
different types of system(s) for the project.
The finishes system may be assembled on site with the individual components, or
supplied and installed as a composite system incorporating one or more
components.
3.1.1 Proprietary Composite Systems

Where specified, submit suitable supplier for the proprietary systems specified, to the
SO. Take into account, the individual components comply with the specified
requirements and the performance as a composite system shall match or exceed the
performance requirements specified for the whole system.
3.2 General Material Requirements
3.2.1 Ancillary Products and Accessories

Where ancillary products and accessories and miscellaneous components are not
specified, submit suitable types for the intended purpose to the SO.
3.2.2 Length of Components

Components, particularly sheet waterproofing membrane, down pipes, capping, and
flashing shall be in the longest lengths as practical to minimise lapping, joints and
wastage.
3.2.3 Compatibility of Materials and Separation

Take into account, compatibility of different materials used for the roofing system in
particular.
a. Prevent contact between incompatible materials / components, particularly
primer with metal pipes and metals with alloys.
b. Materials used for separation of dissimilar materials / components shall comply
with the following quality:
I. Non-conducting, non-compressible and non-water absorbing.

II. Compatible with the elements with which it comes into contact.
3.3 Substrate Preparation Materials
3.3.1 Base Slab and Screed

Where practical construct the structural base slab to a fall of 1:80.
Where not possible or practical to construct the base slab to a fall, apply a base
screed to achieve a fall of 1:80. Base screed to be cement/sand with proprietary
additives. Refer to work section A4-30, clause 3.0 for general requirement of screed
materials.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
Provide galvanised wire mesh reinforcement when the screed is thicker than 50 mm.
3.3.2 Wall Render

Refer to work section A1-80-1, clause 3.0 for general requirement of external render
materials for walls, parapets, upstands and curbs.
3.4 Waterproofing Systems: Membranes
3.4.1 Liquid Applied Membranes

3.4.1.1 Bituminous
Bituminous liquid applied membrane to comply with SS 133.
3.4.1.2 Non-Bituminous
Non-Bituminous liquid applied membranes to be of the following types.
a. Rubber-based systems
b. Polyurethane systems
Submit suitable proprietary products and relevant technical literatures, standards
referred to and product specifications to the SO.
3.4.2 Sheet Membranes

Sheet membranes to be of the following types and to comply with SS374 unless
otherwise agreed:
a. Bituminous
i. Self-Adhesive
ii. Torch-On
b. Thermoplastic
3.4.3 Flexible Cementitious Membrane

Submit suitable proprietary products and relevant technical literatures, standards
referred to and product specifications to the SO.
3.5 Waterproofing Systems: Waterproof Screed

Minimum 20 mm thick, comply with SS CP 82.
Where required these shall be proprietary pre-packed product, organic or inorganic.
Refer to clause 3.1 for product(s) specified for this project if any.
3.6 Skylights
Refer to section A2-40, clause 3.0 for general requirement of materials for skylights.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.7 Waterproofing Systems: Auxiliary Components
3.7.1 Membrane Reinforcement

Membranes reinforcement shall comply with SS 133 and SS 374. The following
materials may be used:
a. Polyester Film with Glass Fibre Matt
b. Perforated Fibre Glass Matt
c. Non-woven Polyester Fabric
3.7.2 Slip Sheet

Submit suitable product of the following materials to the SO:
a. Polyester Geotextile Fabric overlaid with Polyethylene sheeting
b. Polypropylene
c. PVC sheeting
3.7.3 Filter fabric

Polyester woven filet fabric, minimum 140g/m2.
3.7.4 Pressure seals

Pre-drilled extruded aluminium with head recess to allow for the formation of a
suitably shaped sealant joint. Submit suitable product to the SO.
3.8 Waterproofing Systems: Primers and Bonding Compounds
3.8.1 Primer
Primer shall be proprietary type, compatible with the membrane used and
recommended for the intended purpose by the membrane manufacturer, to be
submitted to the SO.
3.8.2 Bonding Compounds

Unless otherwise agreed, use oxidised bitumen as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer for the conditions and type of surface.
3.8.3 Bonding Compounds for Insulation

Use cold bonding bituminous adhesive, complying with SS 133 and recommended by
the insulation manufacturer.
3.9 Waterproofing Systems: Materials for Joints

Sealant materials use for joints shall be approved silicone, polyurethane or
polysulphide, complying with SS CP 82.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.9.2 Sealants for use in Water

Where there is permanent contact with water, sealants shall be polyurethane or
polysulphide, to be submitted to the SO.
3.9.3 Sealants for use in Traffic Loads

Use high modulus sealants in these conditions, to be submitted to the SO.
3.9.4 Gaskets
Natural rubber compounds protected by a synthetic rubber skin. If special properties
such as resistance to oils are desired, synthetic rubber and plastics materials have to
be specifically formulated for the intended use. Gaskets can be solid or hollow
sections of various profiles formed from cellular or non-cellular material or
combinations of these materials or sections. Submit suitable product to the SO.
3.9.5 Sealing strips

Sealing strips to be mastic strips and impregnated or coated cellular strips, complying
with SS CP 82.
3.9.6 Joint fillers

Joint filler such as cellular plastics and rubbers shall comply with SS CP 82.
3.9.7 Baffles
Materials for baffles shall comply with SS CP 82.
3.10 Insulation
3.10.1 Rigid Insulation

3.10.1.1 Expanded Polystyrene Board
To BS 3837: Part 1.
3.10.1.2 Extruded Polystyrene Board
To BS 3837: Part 2.
3.11 Surfacing Materials
3.11.1 Topping Screed

Topping screed shall be cement/sand and proprietary additives and achieve a fall of
1:80 unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
Provide galvanised steel mesh reinforcement when the screed is thicker than 50 mm.
3.11.2 Reinforced Concrete Topping

Unless otherwise specified this shall be grade 25 concrete with coarse aggregate not
exceeding 14mm, reinforced with steel reinforcement as indicated in the drawings.
For material requirement refer to structural specifications.
Submit suitable joints and joint filler material to the SO.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.11.3 Surface Tiling

Refer to section A1-80-2 “External Wall Tiling”, clause 3.2 and A3-10 “Hardscape”,
clause 3.0 for general requirement of materials.
Refer to clause 3.1 for type of tiles selected for the project.
3.11.4 Ballast
Ballast materials to be of stone, aggregate, gravel, pre-cast concrete pavers and clay
pavers. Refer to section A3-10 “Hardscape” clause 3.4, for general requirement of
materials.
Submit to the SO, suitable products, able to resist the expected wind uplift, protect
the membrane from surface pedestrian traffic and other imposed loads.
3.12 Rainwater Goods

Comply with SS CP 26 and in accordance with membrane manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.12.1 Counter and Cap Flashing

Use:
a. Stainless steel grade 1.4401 (formerly 316), comply with BS EN 10088
b. Galvanised mild steel in accordance with structural specifications.
3.12.2 Drain Covering

Comply with the requirements of ENV. Use:
3.12.3 Rainwater Down Pipes

Ductile Iron Pipes and fittings to BS 460
uPVC pipes and fittings to SS 141
3.12.4 Holder Bats

Use:
3.13 Fall Arrest System

Where shown in drawings, provide a support system for the purpose of carrying out
periodical maintenance and cleaning, capable of taking the load of two number
operatives and comply with the requirements of BS EN 363.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General Workmanship Requirements
4.1.1 Method of Works

Carry out the works in accordance with the method of works, as submitted to the SO.
Take into account, construction will achieve the design as set out in the approved
shop drawings.
4.1.2 Co-ordination and Setting Out

Co-ordinate the roofing works with all interfacing works packages and trades to
ensure correct setting out and positioning of all penetrations, attachments, and other
constituent materials and elements.
4.1.3 Handling and Hoisting

Handle and hoist assemblies carefully, at all stages to ensure that sections and
finishes are not damaged, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.2 Preparation
4.2.1 Slope to Fall

Grade all substrate to a fall of 1:80 towards drainage outlets, either by tilting the RC
structural base slab or by means of screeding. Refer to work section A4-30, clause
4.0 for general requirements on workmanship for screeding.
4.2.2 Render to Walls

Flush point mortar joints and render walls with cement/sand mix to extent of
waterproofing application. Refer to work section A1-80-1, clause 4.0 for general
requirements on workmanship for rendering.
4.2.3 Surface Preparation

Prepare all horizontal and vertical surfaces, to which membrane shall be applied
(including elevations, upstands, curbs, and protrusions), ensuring that the substrates
shall be clean, dry, smooth, free from honeycombs, sharp protrusions, voids,
laitance, dust, loose material, sand particles, paint, oil, incompatible curing agent or
any other contaminates, unwanted particles, and other defects.
4.2.3.1 Moisture Content Test
Use a moisture meter to carry out a moisture content test to verify that the moisture
content of the substrate is within the product specific tolerance, suitable for the
application of waterproofing membrane.
4.2.4 Cracks
Seal all cracks and movement joints, with reinforcement and sealant, and allow to
cure. Repair all structural cracks to SO’s approval.
4.2.5 Chamfering of Corners

Provide fillet beads to chamfer all 90 degree corners (such as those formed by RC
deck to wall, RC deck to curb etc.), reinforce, seal, and allow to dry or cure. Provide
50 x 50mm triangular beads from sealants or mortar.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2.6 Priming
Apply primer to substrate, ensuring full coverage and allowed to dry prior to
application of membrane.
4.3 Application of Membranes
4.3.1 General Requirements

4.3.1.1 Extent of Waterproofing
Apply waterproofing membrane to the entire floor area to be waterproof and turn up
every wall to a minimum height of 300 mm from the finished floor level.
4.3.1.2 Dressing of Membrane
Dress membrane over penetrations and attachments, and down into floor outlets.
4.3.1.3 Perimeter of Membrane
Mechanically secure pressure seal at all edge conditions, changes of plane, curb
flashings, upstands, etc.
Lay a strip of reinforced membrane at the edge of the horizontal plane and
mechanically fasten.
Dress membrane over all perimeter profiles and bond to substrate and to secured
perimeter reinforcing strip.
4.3.2 Application of Liquid Applied Membranes

Where liquid applied membranes consist of two formulations (one for horizontal and
one for vertical application), determine the correct formulation prior to application.
For two components (two part) systems, ensure that the compounds are accurately
measured and mixed for the time recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
4.3.2.1 Bituminous
Mix mechanically, the waterproofing compounds as necessary, to achieve a lump
free and workable liquid for application.
Where required, apply a proprietary recommended primer.
Apply the bituminous liquid applied membrane onto all prepared and primed
surfaces, using brush, roller, spray, or squeegee, in accordance with the following
product specific requirements.
a. Minimum number of coats required
b. WFT per Coat
c. Drying time between coats
d. Minimum total DFT
e. Tile-over time (after final coat)
Where reinforcement is required, apply polyester reinforcement fabric over the
membrane, making sure that there is no entrapment of air in between.
In an exposed system, overlaid a proprietary recommended capping sheet to protect
the membrane from UV exposure.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
In a concealed system, provide a proprietary recommended surface protection

course over the membrane and add a slip sheet in between, if recommended by the
membrane manufacturer.
Ensure provisions of protection against unfinished works when it rains.
Where require, apply a proprietary recommended primer.
Apply the non-bituminous liquid applied membrane onto all prepared and primed
surfaces to be waterproofed, using roller, spray, brush, trowel, or squeegee, in
accordance with the following product specific requirements.
b. WFT per Coat
4.3.3 Application of Sheet Membranes

4.3.3.1 Bituminous: Self-Adhesive
Plan the installation of the self-adhesive sheet membrane to avoid joins at corners
and penetrations.
Install the membrane from lowest point to the highest point of a surface to ensure
that laps are self-flashing to facilitate shedding water.
Install the membrane, by bonding the membrane to the prepared and primed
substrates.
Do not allow entrapment of air, bubble or wrinkles.
Lap and seal all longitudinal and transverse joints.
Apply a proprietary recommended protection course and or material(s), to protect the
membrane.
4.3.3.2 Bituminous: Torch-On
Plan the installation of the torch-on sheet membrane to avoid joins at corners and
penetrations.
Install the membrane by starting from lowest point to the highest point of a surface to
ensure that laps are self-flashing to facilitate shedding water.
Install the membrane on to prepared and primed substrates by torch bonding.
Do not overheat through to the top surface of the sheet.
Seal all exposed perimeter edges.
membrane.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.3.3 Thermoplastic: Loosely Laid

Plan the installation of the membrane to avoid joins at corners and penetrations.
Clean and dry the joint surfaces for the full width of the lap prior to welding.
Weld and seal all laps with a hot air welder or other equipments recommended by the
membrane manufacturer, extent of lapping to be in accordance with product specific
requirements. Where cold solvents are used for welding of laps, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Test the joint after welding by drawing a metal probe
along the seam edge. Make good any defective welds.
Mechanically fix compatible proprietary metal profiles along edges and corners.
In a conceal system, follow the manufacturer’s instructions to protect the membrane
prior to application of ballast or other surfacing materials.
4.3.3.4 Thermoplastic: Mechanically Fasten Expose System
Mechanically fasten the membrane along edges, corners and the lower sheet of the
lapping area with fasteners and equipments recommended by the membrane
manufacturer.
requirements. Where cold solvents are use for welding of laps, follow the
4.3.3.5 Thermoplastic: Adhesive Bonding
Bond the membrane to prepared and primed surfaces with a proprietary adhesive or
a bonding agent recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Lay sheets on a
continuous even coating of adhesive, allowed to dry until tacky, taking care to avoid
wrinkles and any stretching of the membrane. Ensure there is a full bond over the
whole surface, with no air pockets.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to protect the membrane prior to application of
ballast or other surfacing materials.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.4 Application of Flexible Cementitious Membrane

Where the flexible cementitious membrane consist of two formulations (one for
horizontal and one for vertical application), determine the correct formulation prior to
application.
Ensure that the two components (components A & B) are accurately measured and
mixed for the time recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Mechanically mix the cementitious waterproofing components to the consistency
required.
Pre-water the surfaces to which the membrane shall be applied.
Do not apply the membrane onto a hot substrate.
Apply the flexible cementitious membrane onto prepared and primed surfaces, from
lowest point to the highest point, using brush, trowel, squeegee, roller or spray, in
b. WFT per Coat
Allow the applied flexible cementitious membrane surfaces to cure.
Protect the applied flexible cementitious membrane surfaces from rain, ponding of
water, wind and direct sunlight, with plastic sheeting, during the curing period.
4.3.5 Surfacing
Where required, apply a 20 mm thick waterproof screed over the membrane.
Apply surfacing material over the waterproof screed.
Where tiles are laid directly onto the waterproof screed or membrane, use a
compatible proprietary adhesive recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Where the surfacing material is a RC topping slab or ballast materials, add a
proprietary recommended slip sheet in between the membrane and surfacing
material.
4.4 Waterproof Screed

Apply strictly to manufacturer’s recommendations and accepted methods.
4.5 Insulation
Lay rigid insulation boards to accepted methods and in accordance with supplier’s
recommendations.
4.6 Skylights
Install skylight(s) in accordance with section A2-40, clause 4.0.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7 Installation of Rainwater Goods

Provide and install rainwater goods to comply with SS CP 26, in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations, the requirements of ENV and any other statutory
authorities having jurisdiction over the works.
4.7.1 Flashing
Flash all exposed vertical edges of membrane above the finished roof level.
Seal all membrane edges around upstands with pressure seal, protrusions and
services penetrations with fillet beads or other sealant materials, to be submitted to
the SO.

Space all RWDPs at required centres, fit to drains and fix securely to walls or
columns with holder bats, space at 1200 mm centres. Seal all joints.
4.8 Protection
Ensure that from completion of the waterproofing works until Practical Completion:
a. The waterproofed area is not used as a working platform unless fully protected to
the satisfaction of the SO.
b. Do not allow petroleum based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to
come into contact with the waterproofed surface.
c. Protect the waterproofed areas from damage by subsequent building operations.
4.8.1 Wet Weather

Provide temporary covers and drainage as required to keep unfinished areas dry.
Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary
roof is provided over the working area.
If unavoidable wetting of the construction does occur, take prompt action to minimise
and make good any damage.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the waterproofing membrane manufacturer and inclusion of copies of
technical data relating to system.
c. Information of current or similar jobs completed during the previous 5 years and

Prior to commencing construction work, submit a detailed method statement to the
SO. Include at least the following information:
a. Sequence of Construction
b. Application of waterproofing system
c. Accommodation of lightning protection systems
5.1.3 Shop Drawings

Where specified, prepare shop drawings, particularly include the following items:
5.1.3.1 Typical and Non-Typical Details
Sectional details of the finishing system and associated components including:
a. Composition of the roof finishing system
b. Flashing at upstands
c. Interfaces with adjoining structure and / or other cladding elements
5.1.3.2 Drainage System

Typical details of drainage system, including:
a. Cross section of drain
b. Detail at drainage outlet
c. Waterproofing treatment to RWDP and drain
d. Fixing details of RWDP
5.1.3.3 Penetrations to roof

Waterproofing of lightning protection points, all perforation through roof, including
vent pipes and other building services protrusions.
permission to proceed has been obtained from the SO.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.4 Material Certification

Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturers of the following materials /
components, certifying that the respective materials are of the correct grade,
strength, size, finish, etc, and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards
specified.
a. Waterproofing membrane
b. Rigid board insulation
c. Vapour barrier
d. Flashing and reinforcement materials
e. Surfacing materials
f. Sealant materials
g. Rainwater goods

a. An outline description of the completed roof finishing system
b. A detailed description of specific materials and components with product names,
types, serial numbers, etc.
c. Recommendation on maintenance periods and planned preventive maintenance
procedures
5.1.6 Warranty
Submit the warranty upon completion of the works.

Prepare and submit the quality control plan to the SO prior to starting work.
5.2.1 Samples
For each system type specified provide samples of each component to permit
approval of material quality, thickness, finishes and profile.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Within timeframe as directed, provide mock-up panel of sufficient size to permit
approval of the intended construction. Include the following elements where
applicable:
a. Typical composition of roof system
b. Upstand
c. Vent pipes / other building services protrusions
d. Rainwater outlet
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
e. Connection of rainwater outlet to drain

If approved, this sample mock-up panel may form part of the works.
Refer to the PSD for additional requirements of mock-up panels if any.
5.3 Inspection and Tests
5.3.1 Inspections
Carry out inspections at the following stages, ensuring that the work is carry out in a
proper and orderly manner:
a. Preparation of the slab deck, ready for the application of the waterproofing
membrane.
b. Application of the waterproofing membrane.
c. Commencement of any required testing, on or off site.
5.3.2 Application Photographs

Provide progressively, photographs to verify the composition and sequence of each
successfully completed stage of the waterproofing system, to the SO.
5.3.3 On Site Water Test

Carry out on site water test(s) to verify serviceability and water-tightness, in
accordance with the following procedure and the membrane manufacturer’s
recommendations and specifications.
a. Do not conduct on-site water test until the membrane is cured and set.
b. Inform the SO 5 days prior to carrying out the test(s).
c. Carry out the water test(s) by blocking up the drain holes and flooding the floor to
a depth of 25mm above the highest point of the floor for 24 hours.
d. Any areas showing water penetration through the floor, signs of seepage or other
defects, shall be made good. Submit a method statement and remedial measures
to the SO. Re-test the area after the remedial works have been completed.
Refer to PSD for area and frequency of test.
5.3.4 On Site Drainage Test

Carry out on site drainage test in accordance with CP 26 to verify proper functioning
and performance of roof drainage system.
Comply with CP 26 when discharging water after the completion of each stage of the
above on-site water tests.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
A3-30 Softscape
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
2.1 Requirements for Contractor’s Proposal 5
3. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 6

3.1 Soil 6
3.2 Sand 9
3.3 Light Weight Aggregate 9
3.4 Water Retention Polymer 9
3.5 Slow Release Fertilizer 9
3.6 Soil Mixes 9
3.7 Trees and Plants 10
3.8 Turfs 15
3.9 Drainage 16
3.10 Supports 17
3.11 Water 18
3.12 Landscape Lighting 18
3.13 Masonry Planter Walls 18
3.14 Planter Waterproofing 18
4. WORKMANSHIP 19
4.1 Supply of Plants 19
4.2 Preparation Prior to Planting 19
4.3 Planting 21
4.4 Turfing 24
4.5 Maintenance 26
4.6 Chemicals 28

5.1 Submissions 29
5.2 Samples and Mock-Ups 30
5.3 Inspections 31
5.4 Defective Work or Materials 32
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers soft landscaping works for building projects, involving the
planting and care for:
a. Mature trees.
b. Turfing.
c. Hedge material
d. Ground cover
It also covers associated works such as subsoil drainage etc.

A1-70 External Masonry
1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
Other Standards
BS EN 10244-2 Steel and wire products-zinc alloy coating
BS 3998 Recommendations for tree work
BS 4031 Recommendations for transplanting semi-mature trees
1.4 Trade Preambles

The design intent for the soft landscaping works for the project is shown in the
drawings. Base on the information available, engage qualified and experienced
personnel to submit the following items to the SO:
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
1.4.1.1 Temporary supports and maintenance to all trees and plants until
established.
1.4.1.2 Select sources of supply for the plants and soil as required.

Take into account, that the works carried out are interfaced and co-ordinated with
other trades in the project, namely:
a. Lightning Protection
b. External Sanitary Services
c. External Sewer Services
d. External Electrical Services
e. External Drainage & Irrigation Services
f. External Lighting Services
g. External Fire Services
h. External Security System
The works shall also include the co-ordination of affected external building works,
mechanical & electrical external service installations interfacing with the soft
landscaping.
1.4.3 Spare Material

to PSD for list.
1.4.4 Warranty
Refer to PSD for warranty requirements, if any.

No item.
1.4.6 Protection and Maintenance

Protect and maintain in required conditions of all plants and accessories during
construction until hand over.

No item.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
2.1 Requirements for Contractor’s Proposal

Account for the following requirements when carrying out the contractor’s proposals
in cl.1.4.1.
2.1.1 Wind Loads

There shall be no fracture nor any deterioration resulting from the Works being
subjected to maximum wind pressures at the work site recorded by the nearest
Singapore meteorological station over a 50 year return period.
2.1.2 Stability
The Works shall remain rigid and un-deteriorated when subjected to normal use.
2.1.3 Structural Movement and Movement Between Works by Others

Take into account, that the performance, appearance and proper functioning of the
Works are not affected by any movements, settlement or deflection in the building
structure, which can reasonably be expected to occur. Also take into account the
construction accuracy of works by others to which the softscape works are attached.
2.1.4 Environmental Conditions

Take into account, that the Works are able to resist exposure to weather and
moisture, and take all necessary precautions to protect the Works under such
conditions.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
3.1 Soil
3.1.1 Subsoil
Subsoil shall be:
a. A free draining soil, to be used as fill materials.
b. Generally taken from a level of 300 mm below the original surface, either
excavated from the site, or imported from accepted sources.
c. Free from all impurities including chemicals, oils, cement, unworkable clays and
stones exceeding 50 mm in diameter.
3.1.2 Top Soil Mixes

Top soil mix shall be as follows:
a. free draining organic soil from horizons less than 300 mm from the original
surface,
b. a workable crumbly and lump free loamy character
c. contain no grass or weed growth of any kind or other foreign material or stones
exceeding 3 mm in diameter.
Submit to the SO, I litre sample with back up soil test data before installation or
mixing.
3.1.3 Imported Topsoil

Topsoil shall be:
a. Free of any noxious or invasive weeds or grasses such as couch grass
b. Free of any contamination from chemicals or any foreign matter such as glass or
bricks etc.
Stockpiles of imported topsoil shall be:
a. No higher than 2.0 m high
b. Must not be compacted through any site activity,
c. Remain free of weeds
d. Free of contamination arising from deleterious material.
e. Protected as required, with suitable approved fencing to prevent any site
personnel or site vehicles from compacting or disturbing the soil.
Visual examination: the topsoil shall have a defined granular or blocky structure.
3.1.4 Topsoil Constituent Criteria

Topsoil shall comply with the criteria as indicated in the PSD.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.1.4.1 Texture of Fine Earth Fraction (Lower Strength)

Clay content (0µm - 20µm) <15%
Silt content (20µm - 50µm) <25%
Sand content (50µm – 2mm) <85%
3.1.4.2 Organic Matter

a. 4 - 20% (by weight) at 65°F using Walkley Black RB427
b. No roots larger than 15 mm diameter or longer than 200 mm shall be allowed
3.1.4.3 Conductivity
a. Avery & Bascombe - 3.0 mΩ/cm
b. Not more than 1500 micro Siemens using a 1:2.5 extract
3.1.4.4 Limit of Toxic Elements

Threshold Concentration (Lower Strength)
Arsenic < 40 mg/kg
Cadmium (total) < 15 mg/kg
Chromium < 1000 mg/kg
Lead (total) < 2000 mg/kg
Mercury (total) < 20 mg/kg
Solenium <6 mg/kg
Boron (water soluble) <3 mg/kg
Copper (total) < 130 mg/kg
Nickel (total) < 70 mg/kg
Zinc (total) < 300 mg/kg
Phenols <5 mg/kg
Total cyanide < 25 mg/kg
Complex cyanides < 250 mg/kg
Thiocyanate < 50 mg/kg
Sulphate (water soluble) < 1.2 g/litre
Sulphide < 250 mg/kg
Polyaromatic Hydrocarbons (EPA16) < 100 mg/kg
Sulphide (elemental) < 5000 mg/kg
All units are mg/kg unless otherwise
stated.
3.1.4.5 Acidity
pH: 5 – 7.5
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.1.4.6 Nutrients (Lower Strength)

Nitrogen (total) > > 0.2%
Phosphorous (available) > > 26 mg/kg
Potassium (available) > > 240 mg/kg
Magnesium (available) > > 80 mg/kg
3.1.5 Existing Site Soil Types

If existing soils are available on site whether subsoil or topsoil, they should be tested
prior to use and the results made available for inspection and approval.
3.1.6 Soil Conditioner

Soil Conditioner shall be:
a. Organic compost or
b. Other fibrous approved organic matter suitable for mixing with topsoil to make a
friable growing medium for plants.
c. Resistant to rapid decay, free of soluble salts below 900 ppm, pH 6-7 and free of
large lumps or debris.
Submit 1 litre sample with back up test data before installation.
3.1.7 Organic Compost

Organic compost shall be:
a. Vegetable compost produced by a thorough horticultural or industrial composting
process.
b. Clean.
c. Free from decomposed smell.
d. Free from any rotting substances, debris, refuse, clay or visible fungus.
e. Free from vermin.
Submit samples and test data for approval before usage. All composts are to be
sterilised before being packed for transport. Odorous materials shall be rejected.
3.1.8 Mulch
Mulches shall be:
a. Approved friable-composted organic material such as Oil Palm husks, organic
composts or an approved mix.
b. Coco Peat will not be allowed on its own unless mixed into a proportion of 50-50
with another mulching material
c. Free from soluble salts or toxic materials
d. Resistant to rapid decay.
e. Have a pH of between 5.5-7.0
Submit samples and pH values for approval, before use.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.2 Sand
Sand shall be:
a. Clean, washed sharp sand free from any contamination
b. Conform to SS 31.
Submit sample for approval by the SO.
3.3 Light Weight Aggregate

Light weight aggregate shall be:
a. Approved low-density inert material such as expanded clay or volcanic scoria or
other porous aggregate capable of being compacted within the soil zone to 90%
compaction without being crushed.
b. Free from dust and debris,
c. pH 6 - 6.5
d. Free of soluble salts.
A 2-litre sample shall be submitted and tested, as part of the soil mix, for physical and
chemical performance.
3.4 Water Retention Polymer

Water retention polymer shall be:
a. A modified cross linked acrylic amide with co polymer bonding (polyacrylamide)
usually available in its dry state as white or colourless crystals or pellets,
b. Non toxic
c. Capable of absorbing up to 400 times its own weight in water
d. Slowly releasing water to planted materials upon demand.
e. Biodegradable producing only harmless and non-toxic substances
f. Have an operating lifetime of not less than 5 years after installation.
g. Used according to manufacturer instruction.
h. Usage of such water retention polymer shall not alter the characteristics of the
surrounding planting medium.
3.5 Slow Release Fertilizer

Refer to the PSD for proprietary product selected for the project.
3.6 Soil Mixes

Unless otherwise agreed, use the following soil mixes as appropriate for planting
subject to confirmation with the SO.
Soil Mix Use Composition
Type
A For use in tree pits, ground level shrubs Topsoil 50%
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
and turf planting areas. This shall be Sand 20%

mechanically cultivated to the correct
proportions, prior to placement on site or Soil Conditioner 15%
backfilling. Organic Compost 15%
B For use in planter boxes, planter beds and Topsoil 40%
roof planter. This shall be prepared under
Sand 15%
controlled mixing conditions such as on a
concrete floor to ensure even mixing and Conditioner 15%
free from contamination.
Light Weight Aggregate 15%
Organic Compost 15%
Water retention polymer – to
C For use in planter on ground Topsoil 40%
Sand 30%
Charcoal 15%
Organic Compost 15%
D For use as potting material Topsoil 30%
Sand 30%
Charcoal 20%
Organic Compost 20%
3.7 Trees and Plants
3.7.1 Selection
Refer to the PSD for list of plants selected for the project.
Refer to drawings and schedules for location.
3.7.2 General Quality

Trees and plants supplied shall be:
a. Free from disease, infestation and infection.
b. First class representatives of their normal variety or species, having strong
growth. Drawn plants with soft growth requiring additional supports other than
specified are not acceptable.
c. Have average or normally well developed branch systems together with good,
fibrous root systems as expected of the species.
d. Free from disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark or wind injury or other
disfigurements.
e. Bear evidence of proper pruning.
f. Trees shall have a straight, sturdy, clean stem, a well-balanced branching head
and an undamaged root system.
g. Conform to height and growth as specified in the plant schedule.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.7.3 Instant Trees (INS)

Instant trees shall be/have:
a. Semi-mature trees specially prepared in advance for transplanting.
b. Root pruning cleanly cut to diameter of root ball, executed at least 3 months in
advance of transplanting.
c. Minimum 450 mm in girth measured at 1 m from the ground.
d. Minimum clear stem of 1.8 m measured from ground.
e. Head of tree well balanced with a good body with minimum 4 main branches,
each branch at least 500~1000 mm in length giving an overall height of 3~4m.
f. Any saw cuts being clean and free from rips or splits and trimmed smooth after
cutting with a sharp knife.
g. Any wounds painted with approved insecticide/fungicide solution and reapplied
once per week until leaf growth has established.
3.7.4 Extra Heavy Standard Trees (EHS)

Extra heavy standard trees shall be/have:
a. Large size nursery grown trees pruned during growth in order to achieve a tight,
well-rounded head and a straight stem clear of leaves or twigs.
b. Possess 200~250 mm in girth measured 1m from ground.
c. Have a clear straight stem of minimum 1.8m.
d. ‘Heads’ which are full bodied and well balanced with minimum 4 main branches
giving an overall height of 4~5m at time of planting.
e. Have a well-defined central leader.
f. Root ball dimensions: Diameter 750 (minimum depth 600 mm).
g. Branching / leaf spread to be 2.2 ~ 2.4m diameter.
Pruning at time of removal from nursery is not permitted. In dry conditions trees are to
be sprayed with an approved anti transpirant approved by the SO. For Columnar,
Fastigiate or Conifer tree varying from this description refer to the schedule of plants.
3.7.5 Heavy Standard Trees (STD)

Heavy standard trees shall be/have:
a. Medium size nursery grown trees pruned during growth to produce a tight, well
rounded head and a straight stem clear of leaves or twigs.
b. Have 100mm~150mm in girth as measured 1.0m from ground level.
c. Have a clear straight stem of minimum 1.8m.
d. ‘Heads’ to be full bodied and well balanced with minimum 4 main branches giving
an overall height of 2.5m~3.5m at time of planting.
e. Have a well defined central leader.
Pruning at time of removal from nursery is not permitted. In dry conditions trees are to
be sprayed with an approved anti transpirant to be approved by the SO.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Root ball dimension: diameter 350mmx300mm deep minimum.

Branching/leaf spread 1500mm ~ 1800mm diameter.
3.7.6 Feathered Whips (SFW)

Feathered whips shall be/have:
a. Medium sized nursery grown trees having a single straight stem and unbroken
leader giving an overall height of 1.5m ~ 2.5m.
b. Fully furnished with evenly spread and balanced lateral branches down to ground
level and shall be 620mm~1000mm in girth measured 1m from ground.
c. Have a strongly developed fibrous rot system.
d. Container grown.
e. Leaves or branches shall not be cut off before planting.
f. Root Ball dimension: diameter 350mmx300mm deep minimum.
g. Branching/leaf spread 500mm diameter.
3.7.7 Whips/Saplings (SAP)

Whips shall be/have:
a. Young trees grown from seeds or cuttings, which are trimmed or pruned,
furnished with branches down to ground level.
b. Trees shall that have a single straight stem and unbroken leader between 900
mm ~ 1500 mm overall height.
c. Trees with stem thickness, which varies with species but should possess a strong
stem which does not bend over.
d. Trees with a strongly developed fibrous root system.
e. Cultivated in container. Leaves shall not be cut before planting.
f. Root ball dimension: diameter 200 mm x 250-mm deep minimum.
3.7.8 Palms
3.7.8.1 Single Stem Palms
Single stem palms shall have a clear straight trunk.
Heights shall be as measured from root collar to based of lowest leaf sheath, and
shall be as specified in the plant schedule.
Acceptable tolerances to variations in stem height shall be plus or minus 200 mm.
Heads of palm shall be well balanced with minimum 7 leaves and a healthy growing
apical shoot, all free from pest and disease.
Root Ball dimension shall be in proportion to stem heights as follows:
Stem Height Root Ball Diameter Depth
1m 400mm 400mm
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
2m 750mm 600mm
3m 900mm 600mm
4m 1200mm 750mm
3.7.8.2 Multi Stem Palms

Multi stem palms are palms, which naturally grow as a multi stemmed clump by
sending out suckers.
This category includes Chrysalidocarpus, Pinanga, Cyrtostachys and Ptychosperma
species.
Palms shall have a minimum of four stems each with a clear trunk height of 1.5m
from root collar to the base of the leaf sheath.
There shall be at least three leaves on each stem and evidence of one new growing
shoot per stem, all free from pest or disease attack.
Imported palms shall be acclimatised for at least six months before removal from the
nursery.
Root Ball dimension: Diameter 600mm x 300mm deep.
Smaller multi stemmed palms such as Rhapis and Licuala species shall be as above
but with stem height 900 mm from the base of the root collar to the base of leaf
sheath. These plants shall be grown in containers.
3.7.9 Timber Tree Supports

Timber for all tree supports shall be tanalised, peeled, round wood, de-barked and
seasoned to 25% or less moisture content prior to impregnation.
Each tree shall be supported by a half round timber cross brace fixed to 2 numbers
upright timber posts.
Posts shall be 80-100 mm diameter and 2.0m long half round timber. Cross braces
shall have the same diameter. At least 1.0m of the posts shall be driven below ground
level.
Rubber spacers and rubber straps or similar approved shall be used to attach each
tree to each cross brace. The spacers shall be used to cushion the tree stems from
chaffing on the cross braces.
3.7.10 Shrubs, Herbaceous Plants, Ground Covers etc.

3.7.10.1 Shrubs
Shrubs are woody perennials of generally multi stemmed and bushy habit ranging
from 3~4.5m down to 500 mm in height.
Shrubs shall have:
a. No less than three main stems.
b. A well-balanced and bushy with strongly developed fibrous root systems.
c. Pruning in advance as required to achieve the specified height tolerances.
d. Branches which ‘break’ from the base of the plant just above root collar.
e. A well furnished body with leaves right down to ground level.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
f. Been grown in containers of suitable dimensions for the species.

g. Flowers at time of planting.
3.7.10.2 Herbaceous Plants

Herbaceous plants are non-woody perennials usually of a clump forming habit.
Plants shall have:
a. A well-developed main stem or stems with good symmetry.
b. A healthy root system and are free from pest or disease.
c. Clumps of herbaceous plants which may include rhizomes, corns, tubers or roots.
d. Soil undisturbed by lifting with evidence of growing shoots emerging above soil
level.
e. Been grown in containers unless specified as being produced by alternative
method.
f. Flowers at time of planting.
3.7.10.3 Groundcover plants

Groundcover plants are low growing 500 mm or less or prostrate shrubs or
herbaceous plants whose habit is to totally cover the soil.
All groundcover species shall be evenly balanced to allow equal growth in all
directions.
Plants shall have fully developed roots, leaves and flowers at time of planting.
Rooted cuttings are not allowed.
All plants are to be container grown.
3.7.10.4 Rooted shoots
Rooted shoots of certain spreading groundcover plants shall be used where
specified, planted as ‘sprigs’ as opposed to established plants in soil.
Plants shall be rooted shoots and shall have at least one shoot of the minimum
dimensions stated in the Schedules and evidence of vigorous root growth.
Recent cuttings with underdeveloped roots are not allowed.
3.7.10.5 Climbers
Climbers are plants whose growth habit is to climb upwards by means of twining
stems, tendrils or clinging roots.
Plants shall be grown to reach the recommended size using stocks no less than one
year old, and no more than five years old at time of contract.
Plants shall have at least two leaders, shoots up to the recommended height, a
vigorous root system, and flowers at time of planting.
All plants are to be container grown.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
3.7.11 Hedging Plants

3.7.11.1 Tall Hedging Plants
Tall hedging plants shall be trees such as Casuarina, previously prepared to establish
a uniform height, and complete all around foliage cover to the stem from ground level
upwards.
Plants shall be of a minimum overall height of 1.8m with one vertical stem, leader
removed to promote side branching from ground level and a strongly developed
fibrous root system.
Root ball Dimension: Diameter 500mm x 300mm deep, minimum.
Tall Hedging plants shall be prepared by root and branch pruning at least 4 months
before transplanting and shall be shaped according to the drawings and the SO’s
directions.
3.7.11.2 Low Hedging Plants
Low hedging plants shall be shrubs such as Ehretia, Acalypha Siamensis or Ixoras as
suited to regular clipping, previously prepared to establish a uniform height and
complete foliage cover to the stem from ground level upwards.
Plants shall be a minimum overall height of 500mm with a minimum of 4 branches
rising from ground level, with a strong, well-developed fibrous root system.
Branches shall be well-covered in leaves down to ground level. All plants shall be
container grown in suitable size containers.
Hedging plants shall be prepared by root and branching pruning so as to achieve
‘box’ shape, at least 3 months before transplanting.
3.7.12 Container Grown Plants

Container grown plants shall mean shrubs which have been grown in containers
sufficiently large to hold the developing root system from seed or cutting and shall be
filled with suitable nutrient rich, free draining compost.
Container grown stock shall be well watered prior to despatch from the nursery and
shall remain in the container until planted on site, whereupon the container shall be
carefully removed to avoid soil disturbance.
Empty containers are to be removed from site.
3.8 Turfs
3.8.1 Close Turf

Close turf shall be/have:
a. Stoloneferous Axonopus Compressus containing not more than 10% of other
perennial grass within a typical grass sod or mat of 300 mm square, with a well
developed root system growing to a minimum of 25mm soil bed, free from stones
or extraneous roots.
b. Cut mechanically or by hand to give an extra thickness and texture.
c. Free from weeds, fungus, pest, disease, contamination or pollutants.
d. Kept moist, under shade and in exceptionally dry weather to be kept well watered
at the nursery or turf farm in order to keep full green leaves structure.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
e. Planted within 24 hours after lifting.

f. Must not be dry, brown or wilting.
g. Not contain any weed.
3.8.2 Fine Turf

Fine turf shall be/have:
a. Fine baled rhizomatous grass such as Zoysia or ‘Bermuda’ grass unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Be live grass sod or mat at least 300 mm square with a well developed root
system, growing in a minimum of 25 mm soil bed free from stones or extraneous
roots.
c. Cut mechanically or by hand to give an even thickness and texture.
Submit samples of 300mm x 300mm turf squares for approval.
3.9 Drainage
3.9.1 Subsoil Field Drains

Subsoil field drains and trenches drains shall include:
a) Drainpipes
b) Inspection pipes
c) Filter fabric or filter membrane
d) Stabilising aggregate substrate
e) Aggregate filler
f) Connections of under drainage system to storm drainage network, according to
the invert levels of the storm drainage system
All trenches and drainage shall be lined with filter membrane laid over the based of
the trench and up the sides with sufficient membrane to wrap over the top of the
gravel back filling with minimum overlap of 300 mm. Filter membrane shall be
undamaged and approved by the SO.
Base of trench to have a layer not less than 30mm and not more than 50 mm depth of
fine granite chippings 8mm ~ 12 MM diameter or coarse sand laid to accurate falls for
bedding the perforated pipes. Drainage pipes shall be approved prefabricated subsoil
drainage system with proprietary accessories.
Free ends of all pipes unless connected to a rodding eye shall be capped with a fitted
perforated end stopper and fixed in position.
Where subsoil drainage pipes pass under paths or structure the pipe shall be a non-
perforated pipe joined at either end to perforated pipes, and shall be surrounded with
concrete haunching. Submit thickness and nature of haunching to the SO.
PVC pipes with drilled holes are not permitted.
Trenches are to be backfilled with 100 mm up to the finished level with clean coarse
grained sand or crushed granite chippings 8~12mm diameter free of any fine
particles. The gravel shall be lightly compacted.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Edge to drainage trench shall be lined with sacrificial timber segregating strip, 100
mm x 12 mm thick, level with established landscape platform for ease of grass
cutting.
Submit to the SO, preliminary survey of drainage pattern and invert levels prior to
commencement of work.
3.9.2 Pipes
For Precast concrete or cast iron pipes, refer to structural specifications.
3.9.3 Drainage Gravel

Gravel for drainage layers shall be 20 - 25 mm, mainly round, clean gravel, free from
fines. Granite chipping 8~12mm diameter.
Submit sample for approval by the SO.
3.9.4 Filter Material

Proprietary material. Refer to the PSD for selected product for the project.
3.9.5 Drainage Mats

Drainage mats shall be/have:
a. 400 x 600 x 30 mm thick refer to the PSD for proprietary product selected
Enclosed by approved filter material, laid over base of planter boxes.
c. Individual sections close butted.
d. Returned 300 mm up the edge of planters or planting beds.
e. Protected with approved liner to prevent damage from grass cutting operations.
f. Covered with filter fabric secured by filter fabric cement with 300 mm overlap.
3.9.6 Filter Fabric

Refer to the PSD for proprietary product selected.
Use in conjunction with manufacturers approved fastening method.
3.9.7 Filter Fabric Cement

Shall be an approved non-solvent bonding agent.
3.10 Supports
3.10.1 Staples
Staples for fixing wire to timber shall be 40 mm x 4 mm zinc coated to BS EN 10244-
2.
3.10.2 Underground Guys

Provide1 kit per tree unless otherwise agreed. Adhere to manufacturer’s instructions
and recommendations.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Submit suitable system to meet performance requirements. Submit written details

(including samples for approval. Submit data justifying the proposals are adequate
for the required loading.
Guy wires shall be driven into the ground or fixed to timber deadmen.
3.10.3 Timber Deadmen

Timber deadmen shall be pre-treated 150 x 125 mm timber sections with minimum
length of 1.5m. Install 4 deadmen per tree consisting of 2 laid across width of trench
and 2 ran lengthwise along the trench over the drainage layer. Submit details for
deadmen installation for approval.
3.10.4 Timber Sleepers

Timber sleepers for deadmen shall be the following size:
1.50m length - 150mm x 125mm section.
3.11 Water
Water shall be free from impurities.
3.12 Landscape Lighting

Provide proprietary product as indicated in the drawings and schedules. For cabling
requirements refer to electrical specifications.
3.13 Masonry Planter Walls

For material requirement refer to section A1-70 “External Masonry”, clause 3.0.
3.14 Planter Waterproofing

For material requirement refer to section A2-30 “Applied Finishes for Flat Roofs”,
clause 3.4.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Supply of Plants

Carry out the following:
a. Liase with the nursery to arrange and co-ordinate the deliveries of plants.
b. Inspect carefully all plants prior to delivery to the site and ensure himself of the
health and vigour of the specimens before accepting them.
c. Off-load all plants either to their final locations (after acceptance of delivery), or to
a temporary holding location. Any plants off-loaded to a temporary holding
location shall be heeled in by covering the rootball liberally with sharp sand.
d. Maintain all off-loaded plants in accordance with proper horticultural practice as
accepted by the SO.
e. Hold all delivered plants vertical.
f. Make provision for all measures required for the short-term storage of trees on
site prior to final placement.
g. Ensure that plants in transit are adequately protected against desiccation or
damage.
h. Be liable for the healthy establishment of all plants.
4.2 Preparation Prior to Planting
4.2.1 Excavation of Trenches and Beds

4.2.1.1 Tree Trenches
Excavate all tree trenches to 1150 mm deep and 1.80m wide along the tree lines
shown in the drawings. Break the base of excavations to allow free drainage, and
create falls to one side towards land drains. The depth of excavation allows for:
a. 150mm Drainage Layer
b. 550mm Subsoil
c. 450mm Topsoil
4.2.1.2 Hedge Planting

Excavate 600mm Overall depth and allow for:
a. 450mm Topsoil
b. 150mm Subsoil
4.2.1.3 Areas Adjacent to Planting Beds Areas

Excavate to a depth of 450mm and allow for 450mm Topsoil.
4.2.1.4 Seeded and Turf Areas
Excavate 300mm depth to allow for 300mm Topsoil.
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.2.2 Pre-planting Coordination

Prior to planting, convene a meeting at the Site to:
a. Review preparation, procedures, scheduling required and co-ordination with
related Work. Review methods and procedures related to:
I. Condition of substrate, conditions of site, and other preparatory Works

performed by other building trades.
II. Required submittals
III. Programme of Work and verify availability of materials, personnel,
equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
IV. Required inspections and material usage accounting procedures.
b. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavourable conditions including possibility of temporary protection.
c. Verify the pH level of existing site conditions for each type of plant and method to
alter the pH level of site conditions to suit plants. Submit proposal to SO.
Record discussions of conference, decisions, and agreements reached and furnish
copy of record to each party attending.
4.2.3 Drainage and Irrigation

Construct all drainage works including subsoil drains prior to planting. Refer to
structural specifications for workmanship requirements.
4.2.3.1 Inspection Pipes
Install Inspection pipes with caps at every tree along tree lines to connect with gravel
drainage layers.
4.2.3.2 Irrigation Points
Provide and install irrigation systems as required. Coordinate with MEP Contractors
for connection to the building system.
4.2.4 Laying Soil

4.2.4.1 Subsoil
Spread subsoil into trenches (avoiding compaction) to a level of 500mm below the
finished ground level allowing for settlement whilst allowing for the placement of
rootballs at correct levels over the installed deadmen.
4.2.4.2 Spreading of Topsoil
Provide depths of topsoil as follows:
a. Grass: a minimum of 300mm depth
b. Shrub: a minimum of 450mm depth
c. Tree Trenches: a minimum of 450mm depth
Do not compact topsoil.
Do not work under wet weather.
Do not saturate topsoil.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Rework or remove and replace topsoil that is accidentally compacted as directed by

the SO.
Spread compost over topsoil surface, within the confines of the trench to a
consolidated depth of 75 mm, within the top 450 mm.
4.2.5 Deadman
Set out and install timber deadmen anchors as indicated in the drawings.
4.2.6 Weed Control Prior to Planting

Suppress all weed growth before any planting commences by the application of any
approved contact herbicide used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Maintain in a weed-free condition to top soiled areas at all times by approved
chemical means or by hand as required.
4.3 Planting
4.3.1 General
No planting allowed when the ground is waterlogged.
Protect roots of plants to prevent drying out while waiting planting.
Adopt proper horticultural practice.
Use only approved mechanical aids, otherwise execute planting by hand.
4.3.2 Setting-out
Peg out individual tree positions in accordance with agreed planting plan.
Figure dimensions in planting plan by the SO to take precedence, where dimensions
are not shown setting out to be guided by defined paths, paving or other works.
Scaled dimension may be used.
Minor refinement to the design with adjustments to lines, levels and grouping of
plants during planting process is required.
Planting shall not commence until sets out positions have been approved. Any
planting where positions were not approved prior to planting may require adjustment.
Trees shown at regular spacing shall be accurately and evenly spaced in true lines
and true to level.
Where planting is likely to take place prior to hard landscape construction works,
setting out dimensions will be critical and must be done in strict agreement with other
trades.
Plants shall be spaced evenly so that when established they will completely fill the
areas indicated.
Extent of the area to be filled by each species shall first be defined by plants spaced
around the perimeter.
4.3.3 Care of Plants

Pruned out any damage, which occurs.
21
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Heeled in plants delivered to site in containers in specially prepared trench if not used
within 3 days of delivery. Trench to be covered with clean sand and plants to be well
watered thoroughly and regularly until required.
Containerised and pot grown plants which are not planted on arrival on site shall be
watered frequently to prevent drying out.
Replaced all plants, which have dry out to the extent that their health or visual
appearance is affected.
Water all containerised plants before planting, unless directed otherwise.
Allow for protection of top soiled areas, stacking of materials, tracking and trampling
over top soiled areas are not allowed.
Replaced any topsoil that becomes unsuitable due to contamination, loss of structure,
or for any other reason during site operations.
Plant only when the soil is reasonably dry to prevent damage to the soil structure.
4.3.4 Planting Root-balled Plants (Trees)

Plant trees delivered from nursery to same soil mark on stem with soil distributed
evenly around root system.
All works to comply with BS 4031 or Singapore equivalent.
Semi-mature trees are to be lifted by the root ball only. No lifting stress on the main
trunk allowed.
Use mechanical lift for unloading from the lorry and placing in the prepared trench. All
terrain cranes are preferred. Lifting gear shall have the ability to span at least two
complete avenues working left to right.
Plan access routes for planting between the clear avenues bisecting tree planting
beds to minimise disturbance and compaction of soil. Such disturbance/compaction
shall be addressed after completion of all tree planting and before ground cover
planting or grass seeding commences.
Provide for means of inspection by way of a pipe set vertically through the overall
depth of the pit.
Do not glaze or compact surfaces during excavation. If any glazing or compaction
occurs it shall be thoroughly roughened and worked to ensure unrestricted movement
of water.
Orient trees to present the best face to an edge of road or building.
Prior to planting the root ball shall be measured and make necessary adjustments to
the trench.
Set tree in the trench so that the top of the root ball is 100 mm proud of surrounding
ground levels to allow for settlement. Cover and dress exposed root ball with soil
mixed with 3 parts sand to 1 part topsoil as 80mm blinding.
Plant trees to give a vertical trunk and leader.
Examine outer surface of the root ball to detect for damage, by rolling back or cutting
the root ball cover. Any hard surfacing or glazing shall be carefully slit or scarified.
Spread fertiliser on the finished surface in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
22
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Provide a single Wavin watering pipe 80 mm diameter, or as approved, or as

indicated on the detailed drawing. Fit watering pipes with fitted plastic caps.
Anchor trees securely such that root balls do not pivot in the soil under windy
conditions.
Protect root balls using three-way treated softwood root ball covers where anchors
are used.
Prune any broken branches after completion of planting.
Pared back damaged areas of bark neatly to sound tissue and all cuts and wounds
over 25 mm in diameter should be treated with a fungicidal sealant to BS 3998, or
Singapore equivalent.
Irrigate trees by hand immediately after planting until such time as the irrigation
system or maintenance program is functioning.
Soil moisture cells to be installed to tree pits as directed by the SO.
Protect trees with PVC collar protector and/or fencing immediately on completion of
planting.
4.3.5 Tree in Car Park Dividers

Evacuated trenches to 1150mm depth allowing for 150mm gravel drainage layer,
500mm subsoil and 450mm topsoil. Trenches width shall be 1500mm.
Install perforated land drains wrapped in filter membrane laid in the drainage layer
and ensure connection to carrier drains within tree planting trenches.
Install an aeration/watering pipe with a cap at ground level for each tree.
Install 100 mm diameter inspection pipe to the drainage layer for each tree.
Install a soil moisture cell to every tenth tree.
4.3.6 Planting Shrubs/Ground Cover Plants

Plant shrubs and / or ground cover at the same depth as previously grown, care
being taken to avoid damage to the root system and stems.
Position plants such that their best side shown to the front.
Bare and carefully spread out roots and packed around with the fine soil.
As the rest of the soil is returned it shall be well consolidated and firmed round the
roots to eliminate all air pockets.
Remove sufficient soil from the soil bed to enable the roots to be fully spread.
4.3.7 Pruning
Allow for canopy reduction and pruning of trees and shrubs after planting.
4.3.8 Fertiliser
Spread fertiliser on the finished surface of each shrub planting station in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.3.9 Mulching
Apply mulches in a 50 mm layer over the entire surface of shrub and ground cover
beds.
23
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Mulching to be reapplied to all plating areas every 3 months after initial installation
until the end of the Maintenance Period or until complete surface cover by vegetation
is achieved.
Initial mulching is to take place within 2 days of installation of planting.
4.3.10 Post Planting Weed Control

Maintain all planted areas in a weed-free condition at all times without injury to plants.
Use only qualified and experienced staff when employing herbicides and shall ensure
that herbicide applications are carried out in accordance with current safety
regulations and manufacturer’s instructions.
Advise the SO of the which herbicides used and what specific conditions must be
maintained for their effective use and formally inform the SO of safety measures to be
adopted for the use of herbicides.
4.3.11 Watering
Maintain a watering program for all plant material, especially those in containers to
keep plants in a healthy state for successful establishment.
Lack of availability of water will not release the Contractor from his obligations to
replace all dead or dying plants at the end of the first season of growth after planting
or any plants which have suffered visually.
4.3.12 Timber Tree Supports

Install timber tree supports in accordance with practices adopted by National Parks
Board unless agreed by the SO. These shall be aligned parallel to either adjacent
kerbs or hedges.
4.4 Turfing
4.4.1 Cultivation
Ripped grass beds at 300mm centres to 200mm depth and rotated to a depth of
100mm incorporating pre-seeding fertiliser, thereafter raked or harrowed to produce a
fine seed bed tilth approximately 25mm deep and lightly consolidated with an
approved roller.
Remove stones over 50mm in diameter to tip.
Shape and grade subsoil to finished formation levels. Remove surplus subsoil.
Remove subsoil considered unsuitable in any way for use in making up formation
levels to grass areas.
Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 300mm over finished subsoil formation levels
or drainage levels. Topsoil shall be rotated to a depth of 250mm incorporating
fertiliser or other soil improvement measures to be agreed with the SO.
Raked out or harrowed to produce a fine bed of approximately 25mm deep and lightly
consolidated with an approved roller. Stones over 50mm shall be removed to tip.
Finely grade grass beds during cultivation to remove all minor hollows or ridges, such
operations being carried out when the soil is dry and friable. Final finished surface
shall have a smooth and even fall or gently rolling curves between the finished level
and the boundary of the areas.
24
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Arrange levels to give gentle falls for drainage and any ponding developing after
completion of cultivation shall be made good.
Use wooden planks or plywood boards for access during turfing operations to prevent
compaction of soil. Incidental compression of completed graded topsoil shall be
racked over before laying of sods. Re-cultivate all compacted areas.
Water and complete within same working day all areas of completed turf.
4.4.2 Close Turf Operations

Lay close turf sods onto prepared ground with leaf turf upwards, close butt jointed to
achieve uniform cover.
Top dressed turf area with fine sifted topsoil mix to give even smooth surface.
Lightly compact by treading or with wooden beater to ensure even coverage
Water turf area immediately after planting using a find spray to avoid disturbance on
soil.
4.4.3 Grass Establishment Cut and First Cut

When grass reaches 50mm height, turf areas are to be cut to an average 30mm
height and lightly rolled. This shall be repeated for a second cut. Cuttings are to be
removed from site.
Grass shall be established and maintained and presented as:
a. Uniform dense sward between 25-30mm high.
b. Healthy and attractive green condition, free from brown/discoloured edges and
patches,
c. Free from excessive thatch
d. Free from evidence of disease, fungus, moss, or other weeds.
The surface shall be even and free from irregularities, stones and other objects
greater than 20mm diameter and free from bare patches.
All interfaces with paved surfaces/structures shall be edged to maintain a crisp and
even junction.
The number of grass cuts shall be sufficient to maintain the sward at the required
level.
Final cut prior to completion to be conducted in presence of building landscape
maintenance team.
4.4.4 Rolling
When the grass has grown 50mm high the areas are to be lightly rolled in two
directions with a roller not exceeding 0.25 tonne. All bare patches to be re-turfed.
4.4.5 Grass Cutting

4.4.5.1 Generally
Grass cutting shall be carried out with tools or machines properly sharpened and set.
Remove clippings from site.
25
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.4.5.2 First Cut

Prior to cutting, all stones exceeding 50mm diameter in any direction shall be
removed from the surface. When the grass is approximately 100mm high it shall be
topped without tearing using a rotary mower to leave 25-50mm growth.
4.4.5.3 Second Cut
When the grass reaches 75mm high the second cut shall be carried out with a rotary
mower reducing the grass without tearing to 25 mm high and all grass clippings shall
be spread evenly to prevent damage to grass beneath.
4.4.5.4 Additional Cuts
During the growing season the grass shall not exceed 50mm high. The margins of
seeded areas shall be trimmed with edging shears at the time of every second
mowing. Grass shall be normally maintained at 25mm height.
4.4.5.5 Completion
Prior to the issue of the Completion certificate the grass shall have been cut at least
twice as above.
Grass areas will only be accepted when germination has proved satisfactory and all
weeds have been removed.
4.4.5.6 Edges
Where grass abuts planting areas, kerbs etc., these shall be defined to straight lines
or neat curves as shown on the contract drawings.
4.5 Maintenance
4.5.1 General Requirement

Maintenance for soft landscape include:
a. Watering
b. Weeding
c. Mulching
d. Pruning
e. Disease and insect control
f. Dust cleaning from leaves
g. Adjustment of guy wires/tree ties
h. Grass cutting to ensure successful establishment
i. Litter clearance up to completion
j. Visits to site as necessary, to verify well being of all planting and activate any
measures to protect health of plants and equipment to standards required.
k. Undertake after care works only during suitable weather conditions
During the execution of aftercare works, make good any damage caused including
replacement if necessary.
26
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.5.2 Adjustment to Semi-Mature Tree Guys

Re-tensioned tree anchors periodically to maintain taut, prevent excessive wind rock
and to compensate for settlement.
Protective coverings shall be regularly checked and made good where necessary.
Tree ties, cross braces and posts shall be maintained secure and tight at all times,
periodically checked and adjusted as necessary to prevent rubbing, or tightened to
prevent rocking.
4.5.3 Re-firming
All plant material shall be re-firmed periodically.
Ensure that all plants remain firm in the ground, and any plants loosened due to
strong winds or surface water movement shall be re-firmed as required.
4.5.4 Pruning
Remove dead twigs or water shoots occurring on the clear stems of trees.
Cut back any species requiring pruning to encourage bushiness.
Allow for topping/crowning reduction to all trees.
Employ skilled operatives for pruning without any brushing or tearing of the bark.
4.5.5 Site Cleanliness

Maintain the site free from all spillages of fuel, building debris, clippings and
excessive leaf litter and all litter and objects greater than 50 m which are not germane
to the site.
4.5.6 Weed Control

Keep planted beds free from weed either by hand, mechanical or approved chemical
means.
All relevant Statutory Laws and the manufacturer’s instructions concerning the
handling, use and storage of the chemicals must be followed.
Dispose of containers and other contaminated equipment in an approved manner.
4.5.7 Maintenance of Grass Areas

Give a minimum of 48 hours notice to building owner and user of intention to maintain
grass areas before commencement of maintenance operations.
Carry out the following maintenance elements:
a. Irrigation
b. Spiking
c. Feeding
d. Weed control
27
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
4.6 Chemicals
Employ only qualified and experienced staff when using herbicides and fungicides
and shall ensure that applications are carried out in accordance with current safety
regulations and manufacturer’s instructions.
Inform building owner and user at all times of which chemical is used the specific
conditions to maintained effectiveness and safety.
28
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Company profile and track record
b. Name and contact number of intended supervisor
c. CV of intended supervisor
d. Name of the tree and plant supplier
e. Name of the grass supplier
f. Name of the topsoil supplier
g. Method statement, showing installation quality assurance
h. Maintenance approach to be adopted after completion
i. Name of sub-contractor(s), if any
j. Method of supports for intended planting materials, both horizontal and vertical
methods of supports.
k. Brief program showing times for procurement and installation.
l. Information of landscaping contracts current or completed during the previous 5
years and details of Quality Control Procedures adopted.
m. Confirmation of acceptance and allowance or all requirements in the specification
n. Sample of deed of warranty
o. Samples and mock-ups
5.1.2 Post Tender Submissions

5.1.2.1 Soil
Submit for approval the following:
a. Written analysis of topsoil before importing soil to site.
b. A report on the suitability of the topsoil for the intended softscape works.
c. Recommendations to improve quality and soil handling recommendations.
5.1.2.2 Contractors Documents

Submit for approval the following documents:
a. Shop drawings of landscaping incorporating the ground and planting sections and
support requirements.
b. Equipment to be used
c. Setting out plans.
29
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
d. Detail program showing detail times for procurement and installation.
5.1.2.3 Sources Name

a. Tree supplier
b. Other plant material supplier if different from tree supplier
c. Source of topsoil to be imported for use
d. Source for fertiliser
e. Source of water to be used
f. Source for pesticide and herbicide to be used

5.1.2.5 Samples
5.1.2.6 Materials Certificates
5.1.2.7 Executed Warranty Deeds
5.1.3 Maintenance
Submit for approval:
a. A written programme of Aftercare – Continuing Works prior to completion and
throughout the 24-month maintenance period.
b. Date for submission of monthly activity report indicating record of maintenance
carried out during contract period.
Maintain a record of all visits with reference to those maintenance tasks carried out
and submit this record as required.

No item.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the SO upon completion of the works, if required under clause
1.4.4.

No item.
5.2 Samples and Mock-Ups
5.2.1 General
Agree source of planted material with S.O. at tender stage, and arrange visit to the
nursery to agree quality of planted material.
In the case of grass and turfing a one meter square of sample grass or turf to be
submitted with documentation certifying origin of sample and sufficiency of quantity
for intended work.
30
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
Tag and mark plant selected for project at nursery and agreement to schedule and
method of deliveries.
5.2.2 Soil Samples

Soil samples shall be identified with the SO’s approval. Each soil mix shall be tested
at an approved soil-testing laboratory. Soil analysis shall include the following
information:
a. pH
b. nutrient values (N,P,K)
c. soluble salt content (Electrical Conductivity)
d. physical structure (sand, slit, clay and organic content as a %)
e. toxic substances (heavy metals)
f. recommendation for amelioration
g. bulk density.
Submit test result in advance of intended date of installation. Proposals of
ameliorating measures to be submitted with test results.
If multiple sources of soil mix are to be used, a one-litre sample from each source
shall be submitted together with test results and amelioration measures. Additional
test sample may be required if there is deviation from samples is detected in the
course of delivery.
5.3 Inspections
5.3.1 Grass
Inspection with the SO shall be conducted after 28 days or as agreed within
contractor’s program, after laying of turf looking for evidence of green healthy growth
and to the satisfaction of the SO.
The following shall be evident:
a) Even cover of at least 90% of turf area with leaves and spreading shoots of
Axonopus Compressus.
b) Free of perennial weeds or disease
c) Healthy, vigorous and showing a strong developed root system.
Any settlement due to lack of compaction to be corrected by application of top
dressing with finely sifted soil to a maximum depth of 25 mm. For depression greater
than 25 mm the affected area shall be lifted and the depression filled with sifted
topsoil and lightly compacted and the affected area re-turf to desired grade.
5.3.2 Defects Liability Period

At the end of Maintenance Period and Defects Liability Period, conduct a joint
inspection of the works with the SO.
31
Version 1.0
NPQS
A3-30 Softscape
5.4 Defective Work or Materials

Record all defective works with the SO.
Submit program for replacement works to the SO as soon as defective works are
identified.
Planting rates deem to include cost for replacement.
32
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Types of Metalworks 9
3.2 Stainless Steel 9
3.3 Carbon Steel 10
3.4 Aluminium Alloy Components 11
3.5 Prefinished Metals 11
3.6 Fixing and Fasteners 11
3.7 Grout 12
3.8 Timber 12
3.9 Protective Coatings 12
3.10 Standard Elements 13
4. WORKMANSHIP 15
4.1 Fabrication 15
4.2 Grinding, Polishing and Finishing 15
4.3 Joints 15
4.4 Shims 15
5. VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION 16

5.1 Submission 16
5.3 Tests 17
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the fabrication and installation of external
metalwork which are generally meant for gates and fences, railings etc. This section
does not cover metal fixtures and fittings and furniture such as lamp post, benches,
bins etc. which shall be to specialist suppliers’ specifications.

1.3 Standards
the Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submit to the SO,
Singapore Standards
SS 470 Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy and fine
grain structural steel
Other Standards
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel
articles - specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel
fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 3506-2 Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
fasteners. Nuts
BS EN 485 Aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS EN 499 Welding consumables – covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels - classification
BS EN 895 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials – transverse
tensile test
BS EN 910 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials – bend tensile
test
BS EN 1172 Sheet & strip for building purposes
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS EN 1321 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials –

macroscopic and microscopic examination of welds
BS EN 1461 Galvanising
BS EN 1652 Plate, sheet, strip & circles for general purposes
BS EN 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel
fasteners
BS EN 10048 Stainless Steel
BS EN 10055 Equal flange tees
BS EN 10056-1 & 2 Equal and unequal angles
BS EN 10088 Stainless Steels
BS EN 10088-01 Stainless steel-List of Stainless steel
BS EN 10088-02 Technically delivery conditions for semi finished products-
sheet/plate and strip for general purposes
BS EN 10088-3
Technically delivery conditions for semi finished products-
bars rods and sections for general purposes
BS EN 10111 Low carbon steel sheet & strip for cold forming
BS EN 10130 Cold-rolled low carbon steel flat products for cold forming –
technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10131 Cold-rolled uncoated low carbon and high yield strength steel
flats products for cold forming – tolerances on dimensions
and shape
BS EN 10137-1 to 3 Plates & wide flats. High yield strength steel
BS EN 10139 Uncoated mild steel narrow strip (1) for cold forming
BS EN 10140 Cold rolled narrow steel strip-tolerances on dimension and
shape
BS EN 10142 Continuously hot dip zinc coated low carbon steels strip and
sheet for cold forming – technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot dip metal coated steel sheet and strip –
tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10147 Continuously hot dip zinc coated structural steel sheet & strip
- technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10149-1 to 3 Flat products. High yield strength for cold forming
BS EN 10152 Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products for
cold forming – Technical delivery conditions (AMD
Corrigendum 14564)
BS EN 10169-1 Organic coated flat products
BS EN 10209 Low carbon steel flat products for vitreous enamelling
BS EN 10210-1 & 2 Non alloy & fine grain steels. Hot finished
BS EN 10214 Hot dip zinc-aluminium (za) coated sheet & strip
BS EN 10215 Hot dip aluminium-zinc (az) coated sheet & strip
BS EN 10218-2 Wire and wire products. General
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS EN 10258 Cold-rolled stainless steel and narrow strip and cut lengths -
BS EN 10259 Cold-rolled stainless steel wide strip and plate/sheet -
BS EN 10268 Flat products. High yield strength micro-alloyed steels for cold
forming
BS EN 12163 Rod for general purposes
BS EN 12166 Wire for general purposes
BS EN 12167 Profiles & rectangular bar for general purposes
BS EN 12449 Tube for general purposes
BS EN 12540 Corrosion protection of metals - Electrodeposited coatings
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
BS 1052 Wire: Mild steel for general engineering purposes
BS 1449-1-1.15 Narrow strip (1). General engineering purposes
BS 1449-1-1.8 & BS Narrow strip (1). Formable & general engineering purposes
1449-1-1.14
BS 1453 Specification for filler materials for gas welding (AMD 5363)
(AMD 10840) (AMD Corrigendum 13107)
BS 1703 Refuse chutes and hoppers
BS 2901 Fillers and rods for gas shielded arc welding
BS 2994 Steel sections
BS 3692 ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 3830 Vitreous enamelled steel building components
BS 3987 Specification for anodic oxide coatings on wrought aluminium
for external architectural applications (AMD 10944)
BS 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
BS 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
BS 4360 Specification for weldable structural steels
BS 4464 Spring washers for engineering work
BS 4604 The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steel
work. Metric series
BS 6323-1 to 7 Tubes. Seamless & welded
BS 6363 Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow
sections
BS 7668 Weather resistant steels. Hot finished
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodic oxidation coatings
AS 3715 Metal finishing: Thermoset powder coating
ASTM 2605.2 Organic coatings on aluminium extrusions
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended type and locations of the external metalworks are indicated in the
drawings and schedules. Based on the information supplied, engage qualified and
experienced personnel to carry out and submit the following items to the SO:
work, and to meet with the performance requirements as set out in clause
2.0 below; Details to develop may include shape and sizing of
components, accessories and connections to the building.
1.4.1.2 Design for the appropriate structural support for the works including
structural connection to the building frames, and foundations, if not shown
in the structural engineering drawings. Where required as indicated in the
PSD, engage a PE (civil) to verify the design and endorse the
submissions.
1.4.1.3 Submit suitable methods of installation to the works.
1.4.1.4 Submit manufacturer and product for proprietary items when called for.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Prepare and submit shop drawings to enable the fabrication and installation of the
works.

Co-ordinate the metalworks particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
a. Walls and parapets
b. Foundation for the metalworks
c. Hardscape
d. Softscape
e. All External services
1.4.4 Spare Material

to the PSD for list.
1.4.5 Warranty
following items:
a. A ten-year indemnity for all aluminium works and glazing.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS

No item.

No item.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Structural Criteria

2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the metalworks shall be
supported and transferred to the main building structure.
2.1.1.2 Loading Capacity
All works shall sustain and withstand as a minimum, the gravity and lateral loadings
as set out in the Building Control Regulations, including crowd loads and impact
loads.
2.1.1.3 Wind Loads
The whole of the Works shall be able to withstand repeatedly imposed wind
pressures based on a design wind speed of 35 m/s.

Take into account, that performance, appearance and proper functioning of the
external metalworks are not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection,
expansion or contraction which can be expected to occur in the site,building or the
construction process.
Form the junction between the external metalworks systems and adjacent work by
others to take into account, possible structural deflections or movement in that
adjacent element without distortion to the Works, or disintegration of joints between
the works.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Metalworks

Refer to the drawings for types and locations of external metalworks required for the
project. Refer to the PSD for any specified proprietary product.
3.2 Stainless Steel
3.2.1 Sections
Stainless steel shall be to BS EN 10088-1. Stainless steel sections shall comply with
BS EN 10088-3.
Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel grade shall be 1.4401 (previously 316
external grade).
3.2.1.1 Finishes
a. 1G/2G (3A) Ground: Coarse, unidirectional texture; low reflectivity.
b. 1J/2J (3B or 4) Brushed or dull polished: Unidirectional texture; smoother than
1G/2G; low reflectivity.
c. 1K/2K (5) Satin polished: Smoother than 1J/2J. Suitable for marine and external
architectural applications.
d. 1P/2P (7 or 8) Bright buffed/polished: Nondirectional finish with high degree of
reflectivity. Achieved by mechanical polishing.
Note the references in brackets are the nearest equivalent finishes to the superseded
BS 1449-2.
The finish is achieved on the exposed surface only unless specified otherwise.
3.2.2 Plate, Sheet and Strip

3.2.2.1 Stainless steel in plate, sheet and strip to comply with, BS EN 10048, BS
EN 10258, BS EN 10259 and BS EN 10088 as appropriate.
3.2.2.2 Unless noted otherwise, grade 1.4401 (formerly 316) shall be used for
visible components, in all other circumstances grade 1.4301 (formerly 304)
shall be used.
3.2.3 Welding of Stainless Steel

Comply with BS 1453 and BS 2901.
Use electrical fusion metal-arc method. Carbon-arc or gas welding will not permitted.
Undertake in a thorough manner, with edging rod of same composition as sheets or
part welded.
Weld completed welds, strong and ductile, with excess metal ground off and joints
finish smooth to match adjoining surface. Welds shall be free of Mechanical
imperfections such as gas holes, pits, runs, crack etc. and shall have same colour as
adjoining surfaces.
Continuously butt weld all sheets together with welds ground smooth and polished.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
Butt welds made by spot welding strips under beams and filling in the voids with
solder and finishing by grinding will not be acceptable
Wherever welds occur on surfaces not finished by grinding and polishing, such welds
and the accompanying discolouration shall be suitably coated in the factory by
means of metallic base paint to prevent the possibility of progressive corrosion to
such joints.
3.2.4 Fixtures and Fastenings

Comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO 3506-2.
Unless noted otherwise, use grade A4 for visible fasteners, in all other circumstances
use grade A2.
Submit suitable fastener property class to the SO, to meet the performance criteria
specified.
3.3 Carbon Steel
3.3.1 Generally
Steel components to be hot dip galvanised after fabrication unless alternative
corrosion protection is approved.
Do not cut, drill or work galvanised members.
3.3.2 Metal Material

3.3.2.1 Steel Plates and Shapes
To BS4360
3.3.2.2 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
To BS 3692: (Grade 8.8) / BS 4190: (Grade 4.6) High friction grip bolts shall comply
with BS 4604:
a. Part 1: General grade
b. Part 2: ( Parallel shank).
3.3.2.3 Cold Rolled Steel

To BS 1449: Section 1.3: matte finish.
3.3.2.4 Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel Sheets
To BS EN 10143:
3.3.2.5 Cold Formed Steel Hollow Section
To BS 6363:
3.3.2.6 Welding Materials
To BS EN 499: and BS 6363:
3.3.2.7 Concrete Inserts
Cast steel or malleable bolts, washers, and shims, hot-dipped galvanized.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3.2.8 Fasteners & Washers

a. Fasteners – BS EN 3506-1:
b. Washers – BS 4320: and BS 4464:.
3.3.3 Welding of Steel

To BS 499: Part 1: & Part 2: and BS 135
3.4 Aluminium Alloy Components
3.4.1 Aluminium Alloy Plate, Sheets and Strip

To BS EN 485: acceptable 3003 – H14 and 5005 – H14 alloy and temper
combinations for sheet and plate subject to fabrications, finish and structural
requirements. Provide 3.0 mm minimum nominal thickness.
3.4.2 Aluminium Alloy Bars

Extruded tube sections and hollow sections: To BS EN 12020: acceptable alloy and
temper combinations for 6063-T5 and 6063-T6 for extrusion subject to fabrication,
finish and structural requirement. Nominal wall thickness of 3.0 mm or greater is
required for structural extrusions. Minimum nominal wall thickness for non-structural
trim shall be 1.5 mm.
3.4.3 Aluminium Alloy Drawn Tubes

To BS EN 12020: acceptable alloy and temper combinations 6063-T5 and 6063-T6.
3.4.4 Welding of Aluminium

a) Weld aluminium in the factory and in conformance to BS EN 895, BS EN 910
and BS EN 1321. Use inert gas process electric arc with a protective envelope
of argon gas. Oxyacetylene welding is not permitted as a substitute. Do not
solder aluminium.
b) Weld aluminium only where specifically approved by the SO.
3.5 Prefinished Metals

Prefinished metals may be used if methods of fabrication do not damage or alter
appearance of finish.
3.6 Fixing and Fasteners
3.6.1 Generally
Submit suitable fasteners to the SO.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6.1.1 Fasteners to be to the appropriate Singapore/European/British standards

as agreed with the SO. And, unless stated otherwise, to be of the same
metal as the component with matching coating and finish.
3.6.1.2 Where a particular fixing or fastening is not shown or fully detailed, design
the fixing in order to fulfil the performance criteria.
3.6.2 Methods
Concealed fixings are to be adopted unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Locate face fixings in unobtrusive positions.
3.6.3 Strength
Allow minimum safety factor of 2.5 in addition to the anchorage design safety factor.
Where requested on drawings supply a torque setting for bolted or screwed
fastenings.
Structural anchorage to be by two or more fixing devices.
3.7 Grout
Grout between base/face plates and concrete is to have a minimum compressive
strength at 28 days of 40 N/m²
3.8 Timber
Timber accessories such as handrails etc shall be formed of species as noted in the
drawings.
Timber handrails to be finished as set out in Section A1-80-3 “External Painting and
Coating” clause 3.1.
3.9 Protective Coatings
3.9.1 Generally
Apply coats after completion of fabrication and drilling of all fixing holes.
Remove all burrs and sharp arrises prior to coating.
3.9.2 Galvanizing
To BS EN ISO 1461.
Provide all necessary vent and drain holes in approved locations and seal to approval
after galvanizing.
3.9.3 Electrolytically Zinc Coating

Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products to BS EN 10152.
3.9.4 Cadmium/Zinc Plating

Cadmium/zinc plating of steel to BS 1703.
3.9.5 Chromium Plating

Chromium plating to comply with requirements of BS EN 12540.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.9.6 Vitreous Enamelling

Vitreous enamelling to steel surfaces shall be to BS 3830.
3.9.7 Anodizing
Anodizing to aluminium surfaces shall be 25 micron thick to BS 3987
3.9.8 Externally Painted Steel

Refer to Section A1-80-3 “External Painting and Coating” clause 3.1.
3.9.9 Anodizing
Comply with AS1231 thickness grade 25.
3.9.10 PVF2
Wet applied fluoropolymer to comply with ASTM 2605-2.
Resin content minimum of 70%, minimum coating 25 microns.
3.9.11 Polyester Powder Coating

Comply with AS3715.
Minimum thickness 50 microns. Submit suitable thickness to the SO.
3.10 Standard Elements

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, adopt the general requirement for standard
elements as below:
3.10.1 Chain Link Fence

Unless otherwise noted on drawings fence to be formed of:
a. 50mm square PVC coated galvanised mesh – 16 SWG including PVC
b. 9SWG strong wire, PVC coated galvanised
c. 3mm thick, 75mm diameter galvanised steel hollow section top, bottom and
bracing rails
d. 4mm thick 100mm square galvanised hollow section posts
e. Mesh attachment 20 x 10 x 3 galvanised U bolts.
Height above ground as indicated in the drawings.
Steel posts bedded in 450 square and 500 deep Grade 25 concrete set 100 below
finished ground level.
Align top and bottom rails with ground contour.
3.10.2 Steel Guard Rails, Handrails and Railings

Fabricate to dimensions shown on drawings.
Sand down all welded joints to provide a smooth finish.
Paint or finish as noted on drawings and in accordance with Section A1-80-3, clause
3.1.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.10.3 Metal Gates

Fabricate as shown on drawings, refer to clause 3.1 for proprietary product including
mechanised movement control, and manufacturer if any.
3.10.4 Standard PUB Elements

3.10.4.1 Safety Railings
In accordance with standard details published by PUB (Drainage or Sewerage
Departments).
3.10.4.2 Special Railings
Departments).
3.10.4.3 Drainage Reserve Marker, Bollard and Posts and Chain
Departments).
3.10.4.4 Gratings, Chequered Plate and Access Shaft
Departments).
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Fabrication
Verify dimension and clearances on site prior to shop fabrication.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. Locate joints
only as indicated on the architectural drawings.
4.2 Grinding, Polishing and Finishing

Welded exposed joints are to be suitably ground flush with adjoining material. All
ground surfaces shall be smooth and consistent with good workmanship.
Exercise care in all grinding operations to avoid excessive heating of metal and metal
discoloration.
Remove grain of rough grinding by successive polishing operations. Texture of final
polishing operation shall be uniform and smooth.
4.3 Joints
Butt joints and contact joints, wherever they occur, shall be close fitting and shall not
require solder as filler.
Sheared edges are to be free of burrs, fins or irregular projection.
Neatly finish mitres or bull nose with under edges of material ground to uniform
condition. Do not overlap materials.
4.4 Shims
Separate all pairs of moving surfaces with friction reducing pads. Pads shall have/be:
a. minimum 3 mm thickness,
b. sufficiently reduce friction to permit movement,
c. resistant to wear,
d. positively retained in position ( open ended slots are not acceptable ).
e. not be subjected to heat damage from welding , cutting or to excessive pressure
from over tightening of bolts.
Plastic shims are acceptable at static connections for which the shims transfer only
compressive forces.
Wood shims shall not be used.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
5. VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
5.1 Submission
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Technical details for the manufactured items noted in clause 3.1.
b. Details of fabricators for items set out on drawings
c. Details of PVF2 applicator

Prepare an installation strategy, containing the following information, prior to the
preparation of detailed shop drawings.
a. Sequence of construction
b. Method statements
c. Specimen of warranty
Do not proceed to Fabrication stage until the SO has approved Design drawings and
installation strategy.

Prepare shop drawings, which shall include:
a. Plan Layout and sections of all metalworks at a scale of 1:50.
b. Section showing all details of connections/interfacing.
Fabrication shall not commence until shop drawings have been reviewed and
5.1.4 Certification of Materials

Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturer of all materials/components,
certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade, strength, size, finish, etc,
and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified.

No item.
5.1.6 Warranty

Refer to the PSD for the schedule of samples and mock-ups required for the project.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3 Tests
No items unless otherwise noted in the PSD.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-10 Internal Plaster and Render
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Plaster/Render Types 7
3.2 Cement 7
3.3 Gypsum Plaster 7
3.4 Sand 7
3.5 Water 7
3.6 Beads 7
3.7 Lathing 8
3.8 Materials For Plastering and Skimming Works 8
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Plastering Works 10
4.2 Rendering 11
4.3 Patching 12
4.4 Cleaning 13
4.5 Protection 13

5.1 Submissions 14
5.4 Tests 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for the application of plaster and render to
internal reinforced concrete, masonry and plasterboard surfaces.

A4-40 Internal Tiling
A4-100 Internal Waterproofing
A5-10 Dry Wall Partitions
1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 56 Internal plastering
SS 477 Portland blastfurnace cement
SS 483 Ceramic floor and wall ties
SS CP 68 Ceramic wall and floor tiling
Other Standards
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes
12944
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures – zinc
14713 and aluminium - guidelines
BS EN 197-1 Specification for Portland cement
BS EN 459-1 Building lime – Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel-Lists of stainless steel
BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortar
BS 146 Specification for Portland-blast furnace cement
BS 1369-1 Specification for expanded metal and ribbed lathing
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS 4551 Methods of testing mortars, screeds and plasters

BS 4721 Specification for ready mixed building mortars
BS 5492 Code of Practice for Internal plastering
BS 5262 Code of Practice for external plastering
BS 6452 Beads for internal plastering and dry lining
BS 8000-10 Code of Practice for plastering and rendering

AS 2529 Gypsum Plaster
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended types of plaster and render for the project are set out in clause 3.1 and
locations are indicated in the drawings. Based on the information, submit the
following items to the SO:
1.4.1.1 Submit manufacturer(s) and products of pre-packed plasters where

specified.
1.4.1.2 Submit suitable mix and application methods taking into account of the
performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1.

Co-ordinate the works with the other work packages and trades in the project:
a. Internal walls including masonry and dry walls
b. Tiling works
1.4.3 Spare Materials

1.4.4 Warranty

No item.

No item.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

a. Spatterdash A keying mix of 1 part cement to 1½ parts clean sharp
coat: coarse sand mixed to a slurry paste and applied to the wall
surface.
b. Bonding A liquid applied to a masonry surface to increase the
agent: adhesion of the undercoat to the surface or a liquid added
to a sand/cement render mix to increase adhesion.
Normally a polymer base.
c. SBR: Styrene butadiene, a liquid added to cement render mixes
to provide additional adhesion to the render to the surface.
d. Undercoat or The first coat applied to the surface of the wall. Normally
ground coat: left scratched to provide a key for the final coat.
e. Final coat: Normally a render coat applied over the undercoat and
finished to a level 2-4mm below the final level, with a wood
float finish if it is to receive a final finishing coat of gypsum
plaster. If the surface is to be painted the final coat can
receive a steel trowelled finish, which provides a smooth
dense surface.
f. Skim coat A thin (maximum 6mm) coat of premixed or pre packed
onto RC polymer modified mortar.
surfaces:
g. Skim coat A thin gypsum based coat applied onto plasterboard walls
onto gypsum in a thickness of 2-4mm. The term is occasionally used to
plasterboard: describe the final finishing coat of gypsum plaster onto a
sand cement render coat.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

following requirements, ensure that there are no undue shrinkage or cracks in the
works:

plastering and rendering Works are not affected by any movements, settlement,
deflection, expansion or contraction which can be expected to occur in the building or
the construction process.
Junction between the plastering/rendering Works and adjacent work by others shall
be formed to take into account, possible structural deflections or movement in that
adjacent element without distortion to the Works, or disintegration of joints between
works.
2.1.2 Environmental
Take into account the environment for which the Works are to be applied, paying
particular attention to the following environmental effects:
a. Daily variations in humidity and temperature resulting from air-condition
operations within the building.
b. For non air-conditioned areas, daily and seasonal variations in rainfall, humidity
and temperature in the Tropics.
c. Humidity or damp variations or other consequences resulting from the activities
occurring within the spaces for which the Works are applied or in proximity.
2.1.3 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to ensure that the surface finishes are uniform in
colour and texture and appearance throughout.
Achieve surface level tolerance as set out in SS CP 56.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Plaster/Render Types

Refer to the PSD for specific requirement of the plaster and rendering works for the
project.
3.2 Cement
Portland Cement: Grey or white to SS 26. Coloured cement for integral coloured
plaster may have colouring additive not exceeding 5% of the cement by weight
incorporated. Colours are to be directed by the SO.
3.3 Gypsum Plaster

To AS 2592.
3.4 Sand
To be a naturally occurring material, conforming to BS EN 13139.
3.5 Water
Potable, clean, fresh and free from mineral and organic substances.
3.6 Beads
3.6.1 Corner Beads

Galvanized steel (450g) to BS 1369 ,Grade 1.4401 stainless steel to BS EN 10088-
1steel or PVC, refer to clause 3.1. Nominal sizes – provide 5mm bead with 62mm
minimum expanded metal wings subject to manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.6.2 Casing Beads

Galvanized steel for interior work. Nominal sizes to be 5mm return square-edged
bead with 75mm wide expanded metal wing depth to suit plaster thickness. Materials,
gauges and sizes subject to manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.6.3 Control Beads

For plaster to plaster surfaces use two casing beads back-to-back of the same type
and manufacturer as specified for casing beads. For joints between plaster and
dissimilar material use a single casing bead.
3.6.4 Expansion Joint Beads

Galvanised or stainless steel with adjustable opening (subject to manufacturer’s
recommendations). Metal gauge and size to manufacturer’s recommendations.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6.5 Special Beads and Accessories

Provide ‘shadow gap’ beads at all wall/ceiling junctions, if included in tender issue
drawings.
3.7 Lathing
Lath shall be galvanised, self-furring diamond mesh, standard diamond mesh and flat
rib. Metal gauge and size to manufacturers recommendations.
Corner lath shall be best to form 75mm wide wings, or as indicated on tender issue
drawings.
Rib lath shall be integrally ribbed galvanised steel expanded with 10mm deep ribs.
3.8 Materials For Plastering and Skimming Works
3.8.1 Portland Cement Plaster
3.8.1.1 Scratch Coat (on Metal Lath).

One part Portland cement to four parts damp, loose sand, by volume, plus 0.05kg of
binder to each sack (50 kg) of Portland cement.
3.8.1.2 Undercoat (on Brickwork or Concrete).

To be same as scratch coat (on metal lath) for ‘Portland Cement Render’ mixes, but
no binder.
3.8.1.3 Finish Coat

One part Portland cement, four parts damp, loose sand, by volume.
3.8.2 Plaster Mixes

Plastering shall be premixed or pre packed machine mixed and measured in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
‘Shovel’ measurements and hand mixing shall not be permitted.
Add minimum quantity of water to produce sufficient workability.
Clean mixer and remove all set or hardened materials prior to loading mixer with each
new batch of materials. Mix each batch separately.
Do not retemper or use partially set materials.
Do not use caked or lumpy material.
3.8.3 Pre-Packed Mortar Mix for Plastering Works

Use approved pre-mixed mortar system or approved pre-packed mortar mix for all
plastering Works on masonry walls, solid block walls and RC surfaces. The pre-mixed
mortar system shall be a fully automated system that stores, conveys and mixes
mortar for instant application.
The pre-packed mortar mix shall be in bag form, mix mechanically according to the
manufacturer's recommendation.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.8.4 Portland Cement Undercoat for Ceramic Tile

One part Portland cement to four parts dry sand or five parts damp, loose sand, by
volume.
3.8.5 Skimming Materials

Use approved skimming materials for all skimming Works. Mix the pre-packed
skimming materials mechanically according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
For skim coat onto sand cement background use Gypsum skim plaster. For skim coat
onto RC use proprietary skim coat containing polymer additive
3.8.6 Gypsum Plaster Skim Coat

Proprietary mix for thin coat application onto sand cement base.
3.8.7 Grouting for Metal Door Frame

One part Portland cement to three parts damp loose fine sand, by volume.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Plastering Works
4.1.1 General
At plastered partitions, fill metal, frames, grounds and beads solid with plaster during
plastering application. Cut back base and finish coats where render finishes against
metal bucks or frames.
Extend plaster on vertical surfaces full height, from floor to underside of structural
slab or beam, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate plaster work at end of each day at casing bead, corner, opening, or other
acceptable intersection of surfaces.
All plaster finished surfaces shall be plumb, level, and true, accurately finished to
planes or profiles indicated, without trowel marks or defects.
Angles, intersections, and corners shall be clean, sharp and accurately formed.
Flat surfaces shall be level and true within 4mm in 3 m, checked with a metal straight
edge. Curved, radial, splayed and irregular plaster surfaces shall be true to profile
and shall be formed and verified by means of accurate metal forms and templates.
Test wall surfaces after 10 days to identify any hollow areas in accordance with test
noted in clause 5.0 below.
Do not use or remix partially or wholly set plaster.
4.1.2 Preparation for Plastering

Clean masonry, concrete, metal lath, and other plaster backing surfaces of dust, dirt,
debris, oil and any other detrimental materials.
Correct Irregular brick and concrete surfaces, which cannot be covered by plaster
base coat, prior to base coat application.
Paint all rust producing surfaces with rust-inhibitive paint where plaster is in direct
contact.
Examine work to ensure that all casing beads, corner beads, screeds, joints, and
other metal accessories are properly secured and accurately located.
4.1.3 Application of Plaster

Moisten masonry surfaces prior to base coat application to obtain uniform suction.
Where specified in clause 3.1 apply spatterdash coat including SBR bonding agent to
concrete and brick surfaces prior to base coat application in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
4.1.4 Chases
If chases or recesses are more than 50mm wide, cover with metal lath extending
75mm beyond the each side of the recess.
4.1.5 Arrises and Angles in Plastering

Arrises, internal angles, external angles, etc. shall be straight plumbed and slightly
rounded.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.1.6 Plastering onto Masonry Surfaces

Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect
the bonding. Dampen surface and apply 10 mm thick undercoat of 1:4½ sand
cement, to even line lightly scratch, keep damp for 24 hours and allow to dry.
Cover with 3-5mm layer of Gypsum skim plaster.
4.1.7 Plastering onto Plasterboard Surface

Refer to section A5-10 Dry Partitions, clause 4.8.
4.1.8 Making Good

Making good of defective plaster shall be carried out in rectangular areas, the edges
undercut to form dovetailed key and finished flush with face of surrounding plaster.
4.2 Rendering
4.2.1 Rendering to RC Surface

Clean, using high pressure water jet, to free the surface of dust, residue of any form
oil and organic growth prior to the application of render.
Apply spatterdash coat of 3-5mm coat thrown onto concrete surface and kept damp
with waterspray. Allow to dry out slowly and harden before applying second coat.
On dense high strength concrete surface add SBR (styrene butadiene) additive to the
spatterdash coat in the proportions recommended by the manufacturer.
First coat of the render to be of a thickness between 5 to 8mm and be pressed hard
onto the surface. Lightly scratch to provide key for the second coat and allowed to
cure for at least 12 hours before the application of the second coat.
Thickness of rendering on RC surface shall be a minimum of 5mm and not exceed
18mm. Should the structural Works be constructed with good alignment and surface
condition, application of a thinner coat of render or skimming may be acceptable. The
finished surface shall be smooth and true to plane and shape.
Total thickness not to exceed 15mm on vertical surfaces or 13mm on horizontal
surfaces
4.2.2 Skim Coat on RC Surfaces

1. Fill surfaces and irregularities of concrete surface.
2. Apply bonding agent – Applied to manufacturer’s instruction.
3. Remove all protrusions, fins, imperfections and blemishes from concrete
surface. Apply skim coat 3-5mm thick. Finish coat shall be smooth, level, plumb,
true finish, and free of waves, trowel or brush marks, telegraphing, and other
defects.
4. Water cure skim coats commencing 12 hours after completion by fog spraying
very lightly and then continue fog spraying for 36 hours. Protect against rapid
drying until the whole surface is thoroughly cured.
5. Skim coat plaster (on concrete surfaces) shall only be provided where shown on
the tender issue drawings for finish schedules.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2.3 Render onto Metal Lath
4.2.3.1 Under Coat

Apply under-coat on metal lath approximately 9mm thick with sufficient forces to form
good key, adhere firmly and form good bond into lath. Scratch surface horizontally.
Keep coat moist with fog spray of water until scratch coat has cured (about 4 to 5
hours), or for 48 hours if finish coat is not to be applied immediately after under coat
has set.
Under coat on concrete surfaces shall be water cured with fog spray for 48 hours and
then allowed to dry for at least 24 hours.
4.2.3.2 Final Coat

Dampen under coat prior to final coat application to obtain uniform suction. Apply final
coat approximately 6mm to 9mm thick, bring out to face of grounds and bring to a
true surface with straight edge, and float to a uniform texture to receive finish coat.
Keep final coat moist with fog spray of water for 48 hours, then allow minimum drying
out for 5 days.
4.2.4 Render Backing for Ceramic Wall Tiles

Refer to the specific requirements of the ceramic tile supplier, and section A4-40
“Internal Tiling” clause 4.1.
Clean the background to remove all laitance, dust, oil or other substances that affect
the bonding of rendering. Wash the background using water jet.
Dampen surface to prevent excessive absorption of water
Apply rendering to the background to a finished thickness not exceeding 10mm to
achieve a flat surface with a wood float finish.
Increase to a finished thickness not exceeding 18mm to allow for concealment of
M&E services. Lay 100mm wide sheet of galvanised expanded metal or chicken wire
across all service runs buried in render background.
Where M&E services have been chased into the wall provide wire reinforcements
according to good practice.
4.3 Patching
Repair, point, cut and patch all plasterwork around all work abutting, setting into, or
extending into plastered surfaces after work of other trades is in place.
1. Repair plaster disturbed or damaged due to installation of work of other trades.
2. Cut out and repair all plaster in which hairline cracks, pits, checks, waves,
blisters, discolouration, or other defects develop.
3. Cut out and replace with new materials all beads or fames which are rusted,
improperly set, out of alignment or otherwise defective.
Repair work shall be thoroughly raked out, or cut out, moistened and filled with
plaster finish coat material, surfaces floated or trowelled flush to match adjoining
work. Use bonding agent on existing plaster edges or surfaces to which new plaster
will be applied.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4 Cleaning
Clean all finishes and adjoining work immediately upon completion of plasterwork in
each room or space. Remove stains, finger marks and writing.
4.5 Protection
Protect plastered surfaces from dust, dirt, and draught during plastering application
and until completely cured.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the any specialist plaster manufacturer, include copies of relevant
technical data.
b. Name of the additive, bead manufacturer/s and include copies of technical details.

Prepare and submit to the SO, an application strategy and detailed method statement
demonstrating compliance with the required performance requirements, prior to
commencing works.

a. Sand
b. Beads

No item.
5.1.5 Warranty
1.4.4.
5.1.6 Quality Plan Control Submission

No item.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples:
a. 1m length of all beads.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2.2 Mock-Ups
Complete one wall, for the plaster/render finishes as set out in clause 3.1, location to
be agreed with the SO. Do not proceed with other walls until the SO has approved
the mock-ups.
Refer to the PSD for additional mock up requirements if any.
5.3 Inspection
Inform the SO when substrate of sample wall has been prepared ready for plastering.
5.4 Tests
5.4.1 Tap Test

Tap all walls at centres of not more than 600mm 10 days after installation of final coat
to identify any hollow areas.
5.4.2 Adhesion Test

Conduct pull-out tests onto plaster applied to concrete surfaces. The first test is to be
conducted at an early stage of plastering work. The remaining tests shall be spread
out and carried out progressively.
Each test is to cover five randomly selected spots and conducted within 21-28 days
after plastering. The test spots shall be cut to a size of 75mmx75mm for the pull out
test. The average tensile pull out strength of the five spots shall achieve a minimum
value of 0.35N/mm². No individual test shall fall below 0.25N/mm².
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3


3.1 Paint Coating Systems 8
3.2 General Requirement of Paint Coatings 9
3.3 Pipework Paints 9
3.4 Miscellaneous Materials 9
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 General 10
4.3 Preparation 10
4.4 Application 12
4.5 Protection 12
4.6 Making Good Defects 12
4.7 Cleaning Up 13

5.1 Submissions 14
5.3 Inspection 15
5.4 Tests 15
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on surfaces of building
elements/components not subject to the weather. It covers application of paints on
substrates that may be of cementitious, timber, metal or PVC in nature.

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS ISO 1248 Iron oxide pigments for paint
SS ISO 3262 Extenders for paint
SS CP 22 The Painting of Buildings
SS 5 Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
SS 7 Paint: finishing, gloss enamel
SS 38 Aluminium wood primer
SS 82 Bitumen based primer for cold or hot application
SS 88 Mineral solvents (white spirit and related hydrocarbon solvents) for
paints and other purposes
SS 90 Glossary of paint and related terms
SS 150 Emulsion paints for decorative purposes
SS 269 Paint colours for building purposes
SS 341 Safety glazing materials for use in buildings (human impact
considerations
SS 345 Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes
SS 494 Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
Other Standards
BS EN ISO Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
8503 related products – Surface preparation methods
BS EN ISO Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
8504 related products – Surface preparation methods
BS EN ISO Paints and varnishes
12944
BS EN ISO Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in structures – zinc and
14713 aluminium - guidelines
BS EN 927-1 Paints and varnishes - Coating materials and coating systems for
exterior woods. Classification and selection
BS.EN 971-1 Paints and varnishes. Terms and definitions for coating materials.
BS EN 10169 Specification for continuously organic coated steel flat products
BS 381C Specification for colours for identification, coding and special
purposes
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures
BS 1710 Specification for identification of pipelines and services
BS 3698 Specification for solvent-based paint remover
BS 3900 Part Determination of film thickness
C5
BS 4310 Specification for permissible limit of lead in low-lead paints and
similar materials
BS 4652 Specification for metallic zinc-rich priming paint (organic media).
BS 4756 Specification for ready mixed aluminium priming paints for woodwork
BS 4800 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes
BS 5589 Code of practice for preservation of timber
BS 5707 Solutions of wood preservatives in organic solvents
BS 6150 Code of practice for painting of buildings
BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving
to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and performed sections for
external architectural purposes, and for the finish on aluminium alloy
extrusions, sheet and performed sections coated with powder
organic coatings.
BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and stoving
to hot-dip galvanised hot-rolled steel and preformed steel sheet for
windows and associated external architectural purposes, and for the
finish on galvanised steel sections and preformed sheet coated with
powder organic coatings.
BS 6900 Specification for raw, refined and boiled linseed oils for paint and
varnishes
BS 7956 Specification for waterborne priming paint for woodwork
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
AS 2855 Paints and related materials. Micaceous iron oxide pigment

AS/NZS Guide to long-life coatings for concrete and masonry – Latex –
4548.3 Textured coatings – Non-aggregate
ASTM Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
D3359-02
DD 24 Recommendations for methods of protection against corrosion on
light section steel used in building
SIS 05 59 00 Pictorial surface preparation standards for painting steel surface
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended type of painting systems and locations are indicated in the Schedules
and Drawings.
items to the SO:
a. Submit the name of the manufacturer and the proprietary brand name of the
painting and coating products to be used. Wherever possible, obtain the paint
products from the same manufacturer.

Co-ordinate the internal painting works, particularly the interfaces with the following
a. Dry walls
b. Internal masonry, render and plaster
c. Internal joinery and doors

to PSD for list.
1.4.4 Warranty

No item.

No item.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

The following definitions and abbreviations appear within this work section:
a. uPVC Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1.1 Appearance
Ensure the paintworks achieve uniform color and texture as that accepted in a mock-
up panel, with no defects which would impair appearance.
Provide joints as indicated in the drawings if any.
2.1.2 Fire
Ensure that the completed works comply with fire regulations
7
Version 1.0
NPQS

Refer to the PSD for selected coating systems for this project.
Refer to the chart below for possible permutations for painting internal surfaces and
standards to comply with where applicable.
SUBSTRATE SYSTEM PRIMER STANDARD 1ST COAT FINISHING STANDARD
COAT(S)
MASONRY Conventional Solvent borne Acrylic SS 150
AND acrylic sealer emulsion
CONCRETE Water borne Acrylic AS/NZS
acrylic sealer textured 4548.3
topcoat
FERROUS Conventional Alkyd zinc BS 4652 Alkyd Alkyd enamel SS 7
METAL phosphate undercoat topcoat
primer
Alkyd AS 2855 Alkyd AS 2855
micaceous iron micaceous
oxide iron oxide
High Epoxy zinc BS 4652 Epoxy Acrylic
performance phosphate amine aliphatic
primer urethane
Epoxy AS 2855 Solvent borne
micaceous iron acrylic topcoat
oxide
NON Conventional Etch primer Alkyd Alkyd enamel SS 7
FERROUS (compulsory for undercoat topcoat
METAL galvanised
metals)
Alkyd zinc BS 4652 Alkyd AS 2855
phosphate micaceous
primer iron oxide
Alkyd AS 2855
micaceous iron
oxide
High Etch primer Acrylic
performance aliphatic
urethane
Epoxy zinc BS 4652 Solvent borne
phosphate acrylic topcoat
primer
Epoxy AS 2855
micaceous iron
oxide
WOOD Conventional Aluminium SS 38 Alkyd Alkyd enamel SS 7
wood primer undercoat topcoat
Water borne
acrylic topcoat
Modified alkyd
transparent
wood finish
Polyurethane Polyurethane
varnish varnish
Transparent Transparent
wood stain wood stain
The products listed have been selected for the types of surfaces or substrates, and
the standard of quality particularly applicable to the specific surfaces to be painted or
coated.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2 General Requirement of Paint Coatings

Supply all primer and first coats, intermediate coats and finishing or top coats from
one manufacturer for use on the same surface. The various appropriate coats must
be recommended by the manufacturer for the particular substrate and take into
consideration the condition of the substrate and usage of the premises. The various
coats must be compatible.
Where surfaces have been treated or applied with preservative or fire retardant,
check with the paint manufacturer for the types of paint products suitable for use on
such surfaces. The paint products selected must:
a. Be compatible with the treatment product
b. Not inhibit the performance of the treatment or paint product
3.3 Pipework Paints
3.3.1 Exposed uPVC Products

Unless otherwise specified, apply one coat of polyamide epoxy primer followed by
two coats of enamel paint.
3.3.2 Galvanised Steel Pipes and Fittings

Unless otherwise specified, apply:
a. One coat etching primer
b. One coat lead and chromate free primer
c. One coat alkyd based paint undercoat
d. Two coats coat alkyd based enamel paint
- Or
e. One coat of Polyamide Epoxy primer
f. Two coats Enamel paint
Agree the selection with the SO.
3.4 Miscellaneous Materials

Ensure that paint thinners, tints, turpentine and fillers, are manufactured by the same
manufacturer as the coatings, or are approved by the coating manufacturer for use
with their paint products.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
Only apply paint to firm and dry surfaces, prepared in accordance with good trade
practice.
All materials to be applied by skilled trades people. Paint to be evenly and thoroughly
applied, using clean brushes, rollers or spraying equipment.
Make edges of completed paintwork adjoining other materials, building elements and
different coloured paintwork clean and sharp without overlapping.

Deliver materials to site ready-mixed (except for two pack paint products) in original
sealed containers with labels intact showing brand name, product name and
manufacturer's batch number.
delivery and before service life expiry date.
After stoppage of work and when containers are not in use, close the containers
(empty or otherwise) and remove to the designated storage area.
Stir liquid paint so that solids are fully and evenly incorporated.
Shake clear varnishes, do not stir.
4.3 Preparation
4.3.1 Generally
Clean all surfaces to be painted of all oil, grease, dirt, mould, mildew, loose or flaking
paint and all other material deleterious to achieving a good paint finish prior to filling,
sanding or painting.
Smoothen surface irregularities. Fill and patch up all joints, cracks, holes and other
depressions with appropriate non-shrink, ultra violet resistant fillers suitable for the
substrate. Finish off flush with surface and abrade to a smooth, even finish. Make
good defects to the satisfaction of the SO prior to any coating work being carried out.
The types of materials used in preparation must be as recommended by the material
manufacturers and the coating manufacturer for the situation and surfaces being
prepared.
4.3.2 Preparation of Concrete Surfaces

Remove form oil, mould release oil, laitance, grease, dirt and debris from concrete
surfaces using a suitable solvent and then neutralize. Remove grit, dirt, loose
materials, mortar drippings and the like; remove all nibs, projections and
protuberances.
Patch concrete surfaces with a non shrink cementitious grout, or filler compound,
suitable for such use filling all cracks, depressions, and voids to provide smooth
surfaces. Refer any defects other than surface imperfections to the SO before
patching.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
Prior to application, allow the concrete to cure for a minimum of 30 days. Test the
concrete surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content is below
15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used.
4.3.3 Preparation of Wood Surfaces

Sand down the wood surfaces to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers,
splinters, and brush to remove dust. Remove all grease and dirt using a solvent
recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Fill all cracks, splits, nail holes, screw holes, and surface defects with wood putty or
non shrink compound after the priming coat has been applied. Apply putty flush with
the surface, sand smooth and touch-up with primer when dry. For varnishing work,
ensure the putty matches the finished colour.
Cover knots and sappy areas with two coats of appropriate wood sealer before
priming.
Prior to installation, prime fire-retardant treated wood or preservative treated wood,
required to be painted or stained, with shellac or other selected sealer, as
4.3.4 Preparation of Rendered Surfaces

Allow surfaces to dry prior to applying primer coat. Remove any efflorescence and
brush down. Scrape off all plaster nibs and other projections and sand smooth. Do
not apply any primer coat until efflorescence ceases.
Cut out all scratches, cracks, holes depressions and voids and fill with non-shrink
grout, patching plaster or other selected patching material. Allow to dry, refill if
necessary sand smooth to provide a flush, smooth surface.
Test the rendered surfaces for moisture content and ensure that the moisture content
is below 15% if a Protimeter scale is used and below 6% if a Kett meter is used or
this application.
4.3.5 Preparation of Masonry Surfaces

Thoroughly clean off all grit, grease, dirt, mortar drippings and splatters. Remove
nibs or projections from masonry surfaces. Fill cracks, holes and voids, with
appropriate cementitious grout, or filler compound, and wipe surface so that it has the
same texture as the adjacent masonry surface.
4.3.6 Preparation of Ferrous Metal Surfaces

Abrade rusted, and marred surfaces back to bare metal and grind smooth all rough
surfaces before priming.
Clean galvanised surfaces with a galvanised cleaner of an approved proprietary
brand, then wash with clear water. Prime galvanised surfaces with etching primer or
epoxy primer (suitable for galvanised metal) prior to coating.
Shot blast clean mild steel surfaces to receive high performance coatings in
accordance with SA 2.5 from SIS 055900
Mechanically clean mild steel surfaces to receive conventional coatings in
accordance with ST3 from SIS 055900
Seal rusty spots that are difficult to remove to bare metal using chelated polymeric
oxirane 100% solid epoxy primer.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.7 Preparation of Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces

Remove any surface corrosion/oxidisation and lightly abrade with fine abrasive paper
and white spirit. Apply pre-treatment etching primer or polyamide epoxy primer where
recommended by the coating manufacturer.
4.3.8 Painting Pipework

Lightly sand the surface before the application of coatings.
4.4 Application
4.4.1 Conditions
Prior to applying paint ensure surfaces are prepared in accordance with this
specification.
Maintain adequate ventilation during painting and drying periods.
Apply materials at the rate recommended by the manufacturer.
Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for drying times between coats.
Ensure that each coat is dry before the next coat is applied
4.4.2 Climatic Conditions

Take into account the influence of the changeable weather on the drying time for all
the various coats of the paint or coating system.
Do not undertake painting or coating when the air is dust-laden or when weather and
temperature conditions are unsuitable, as specified by the manufacturer.
4.4.3 Substrate Condition

Ensure that the substrates are in a suitable state for the application of any coating
4.4.4 Other unsuitable conditions

Do not apply any coatings when other ongoing trades create dust or damp conditions.
Do not apply paint when the lighting levels are too low to ensure acceptable levels of
finish.
4.4.5 Appearance
Finishing coats to be smooth, and free of, streaks, laps, pile-up of paint, skipped or.
missed areas.
4.5 Protection
Protect all surfaces not to be coated, by covering with dust sheets, masking or other
suitable materials.
Provide adequate signage and barriers to protect the general public, and to prevent
damage to freshly applied coatings.
4.6 Making Good Defects

Repair damage caused to other work. Re-touch all coated and finished work
wherever necessary.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7 Cleaning Up
clean.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the paint manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data relating
to paints to be used.

Prepare an installation strategy, containing the following information:
a. Method statements

No item.
5.1.4 Maintenance Manual Submissions

No item.
5.1.5 Warranty
1.4.4.

No item.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples to the SO prior to ordering material:
a. A 1.0m x 1.0m panel of each of the paint or coating systems as set out in clause
3.1 in a location to be agreed upon with the SO.
b. A 1.5m long sample of the paint system on any frame or tube or other building
element/component to be agreed upon with the SO.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for requirement of mock-up of the paint system for the project.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3 Inspection
Upon completion of the first section of any paint type inform and request an
inspection from the SO. Proceed only after approval from the SO.
The SO will determine the extent of the ‘first section’.
5.4 Tests

Refer to the PSD for the schedule of tests required for this project.
5.4.2 Pull-off Test

Inform the SO when the first section of paint has cured. Undertake a pull off test by
complying with ASTM D3359-02.
5.4.3 Adhesion test

Carry out adhesion test when directed by the SO. Adhesion tests are to be carried out
in accordance with SS 5.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1.0 GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3


3.1 Types of Floor Screed Systems 7
3.2 Material Requirement for Different Screed Types 7
3.3 Movement Joint 13
3.4 Floor Hardener 13
4.0 WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 Preparation 14
4.2 Batching and Mixing 15
4.3 Laying 15
4.4 Finishing 16
4.5 Protection 16
4.6 Hardeners 17
4.7 Curing 17

5.1 Submissions 18
5.3 Tests 18
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for common floor screeds applied in buildings,
including bonded and un-bonded cement sand screeds, polymer modified toppings
and resin flooring. It also covers the requirement for common floor hardeners.

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 31 Aggregate from natural sources for concrete
SS 73 Methods of sampling and testing mineral aggregates sand and fillers
SS 78 Testing of concrete
SS 289 Concrete
SS 477 Portland blastfurnace cement
Other Standards
BS EN 934-2 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout
BS EN 12878 Pigments for the colouring of building materials based on cement
and/or lime – Specifications and methods of test
BS 146 Specification for Portland blastfurnace cements
BS 410 Specification for test sieves
BS 1052 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
BS 1521 Specification for waterproof building papers
BS 3837 Expanded polystyrene boards
Part 1: Specification for boards manufactured from expandable
beads
BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS 4841 Rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for

building applications
Part 1: Laminated board for general purposes
BS 5385 Wall and floor tiling
Part 3: Code of practice for the design and installation of ceramic
floor tiles and mosaics
Part 5: Code of practice for the design and installation of terrazzo tile
and slab, natural stone and composition block flooring
BS 6213 Guide to selection of construction sealants
BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites
Part 9: Code of practice for cement/sand floor screeds and concrete
floor toppings
BS 8204 Screeds, bases and in situ floorings
Part 1: Code of practice for concrete bases and screeds to receive in
situ floorings
Part 2: Code of practice for concrete wearing surfaces
Part 3: Code of practice for polymer modified cementitious wearing
surfaces
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended types of floor screed for the project are set out in clause 3.1 and
locations are indicated in the drawings. Base on the information, submit the following
items to the SO:
1.4.1.1 Submit manufacturer(s) and products of pre-packed or proprietary screed
and hardeners where specified.
1.4.1.2 Submit suitable mix and application methods taking into account of the
performance requirements as set out in clause 2.1.

Co-ordinate the screeding works particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
a. Floor finishes
b. Floor waterproofing
c. Dry walls
d. Internal masonry
Liase and coordinate with services engineer for location of services perforations in
the floor.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

the PSD for the list.
1.4.4 Warranty
1.4.4.1 Floor Hardeners
Provide a ten-year indemnity in accordance with contract conditions for the floor
hardeners where specified in the project.
1.4.4.2 Epoxy Coatings
Provide a ten-year indemnity in accordance with contract conditions for the epoxy
coatings where specified in the project.

No item.

No item.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

following performance requirements:
2.1.1 Structural Movement and Movement between Works by Others

screeding Works are not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection,
expansion or contraction which can be expected to occur in the building or the
construction process.
Junction between the screeding Works and adjacent work by others shall be formed
to take into account, possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent
element without distortion to the Works, or disintegration of joints between works.
2.1.2 Environmental
Take cognisance to the environment for which the Works are to be applied, paying
b. For non air-conditioned areas, daily and seasonal variations in humidity and
temperature in the Tropics.
occurring within the spaces for which the Works are applied or in proximity.
2.1.3 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to take into account, that the surface finishes are
uniform in colour and texture and appearance throughout.
Achieve surface level tolerance as set out in BS 8204.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Floor Screed Systems

Refer to the PSD for the types of screed and component requirements for this project.
3.2 Material Requirement for Different Screed Types
3.2.1 Fully Bonded Screed

3.2.1.1 Base
In-situ slab mechanically prepared or heavily roughened and thoroughly cleaned base
concrete substrate.
3.2.1.2 Thickness
20 mm~50mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
3.2.1.3 Mix
Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blastfurnace to SS 477.
Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10% passing
sieve size 150 microns.
Mix proportions: 1:3 for flexible floor finishes and/or 1:4~4.5 for thick or rigid floor
finishes.
Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.2.1.4 Finish
Refer to clause 3.1.
3.2.1.5 Soundness
Test to BS 8204: Part 1: Appendix B.
3.2.1.6 Maximum Depth of Indentation
3mm for areas expected to take very heavy traffic and/or where disruption, dust or
pollution may occur.
4mm for areas expected to take heavy traffic including heavy trolleys e.g. public
areas and main corridors.
5mm for other areas subject to mainly foot traffic and light trolleys.
3.2.2 Cement Sand Screed – Unbonded

3.2.2.1 Base
Separating Layer or DPM on concrete that will not provide a good bond e.g. smooth
high strength concrete.
3.2.2.2 Thickness
50mm~200mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.2.3 Reinforcement for Crack Control

Mesh Type D49, D98 or other conforming to BS 4483 or SS 32 to be provided for
every 16m2 of screed area and at all joints.
3.2.2.4 Mix
Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.
Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10% passing
sieve size 150 microns.
Mix proportions: 1:3 for flexible floor finishes and 1:4~4.5 for thick or rigid floor
finishes.
Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.2.2.5 Finish
3.2.2.6 Soundness
As for unbonded screed.
3.2.3 Cement Sand Screed – Partially Bonded

3.2.3.1 Base
Base concrete prepared by brushing prior to hardening.
3.2.3.2 Thickness
50~75mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
Mesh Type D49, D98 or other conforming to BS 4483 or SS 32 to be provided for
every 16m2 of screed area and at all joints.
3.2.3.4 Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
passing sieve size 150 microns.
c. Mix proportions: 1:3 for flexible floor finishes and 1:4~4.5 for thick or rigid floor
finishes.
d. Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
e. Other Requirements: e.g. movement joints, mat well frames, pre-formed access
ducts, drainage channels etc.
3.2.3.5 Finish
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.3.6 Soundness
3.2.4 Fine Concrete Floating Screed

3.2.4.1 Base
Separating Layer or DPM on thermal or acoustic insulation on base concrete with
floated finish.
3.2.4.2 Thickness
65mm~200mm unless otherwise indicated in the drawings.
Type D49, D98 at mid-depth of the screed, to SS 32 or other to BS 4483.
3.2.4.4 Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26 or Portland blast furnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/ Fine Aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
c. Coarse aggregate: To SS 31, 10mm single sized.
d. Mix proportions: 1:4~5 total aggregate, proportion of sand to coarse aggregate
between 60/40 and 40/60, adjusted to facilitate trowelling.
e. Admixture: Water reducing to BS EN 934-2: Part 1, dosage to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.2.4.5 Finish
3.2.5 Quick Drying Screed

3.2.5.1 Construction
Bonded, Unbonded or Floating Construction.
Type D49, D98 at mid-depth of the screed, to SS 32 or other to BS 4483 for
description of appropriateness of use.
3.2.5.3 Minimum Thickness at Any Points
Depth may vary in accordance with manufacturers recommendations however the
general rule of thumb is as follows:
a. 40-50 mm Bonded
b. 50-65 mm Unbonded
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
c. 65-75 mm Floating
3.2.5.4 Insulation
Thermal or Acoustic insulation in accordance with performance requirements
3.2.5.5 Manufacturer
Submit to the SO.
3.2.5.6 Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS 26.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: To SS 31, grading limit M, but with not more than 10%
c. Coarse aggregate: This may be included in the manufacturers list for screed over
75mm. Delete if not appropriate.
d. Mix proportions: 1:4~1:5 total aggregate, proportion of fine to coarse aggregate
40/60, adjusted to facilitate trowelling.
3.2.5.7 Finish
3.2.5.8 Soundness
Test to BS 8204: Part 1: Appendix B - Not applicable for floating construction.
3.2.6 Polymer Modified Screed

PVA materials are water sensitive. Do not use in areas where permanent dampness
is expected.
3.2.6.1 Base
Mechanically prepared or heavily roughened and thoroughly cleaned base concrete
substrate.
Bonded.
Depth may vary in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and may be as
little as 6mm however inaccuracies in the base slab should be considered so
generally the screed will rarely be less than 20m
Submit to the SO.
3.2.6.5 Mix
Pre blended proprietary mix
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
Mix proportions: Polymer content in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations or refer to BS 8204: Part 3 clause 6.4 table 1 and table 2 for the
actual proportion
3.2.6.6 Finish
3.2.6.7 Soundness
3.2.7 High Strength Concrete Toppings (Including Granolithic)

3.2.7.1 Base
In-situ concrete slab
Bonded in accordance with BS 8204 Part 2.
Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings:
a. 20mm for bonded
b. 100mm for unbonded
c. 45mm for floating screed
3.2.7.4 Mix
a. Cement: Ordinary Portland to SS26 or Portland blastfurnace to SS 477.
b. Sand/Fine aggregate: Natural sand of uniform colour, to SS 31, grading limit M.
c. Coarse aggregate: To SS 31, 10 mm single sized.
d. Proportions: 1:1:2
3.2.7.5 Finish
3.2.8 Polymer Modified Cementitious Topping

3.2.8.1 Base
Surface strength and hardness of base to be in accordance with BS 8204.
Bonded.
Submit to the SO.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.8.4 Mix
Proportions: To proprietary manufacturer’s recommendations.
Other Requirements: Colour, limitations on bay size etc
3.2.8.5 Finish
3.2.8.6 Surface Hardness
Test to BS 8204: Part 3: clause 10.7.
Minimum rebounds hammer value in accordance with wearing class defined in the
above BS.
3.2.8.7 Slip Resistance
Test to BS 8204: Part 3: Annex C.
3.2.9 Flow Applied Cementitious Topping

3.2.9.1 Base
Concrete substrate to be prepared in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations
Fully Bonded. This type of topping should fully reflect any movement joints within the
structural base
Submit to the SO.
3.2.9.4 Mix
Proportions in accordance with manufacturers recommendations
3.2.9.5 Finish
In accordance with manufacturers recommendations some systems specify epoxy
resin with grit texture for additional slip resistance.
3.2.10 Resin Flooring

3.2.10.1 Base
Concrete surface prepare in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
Fully Bonded (where structural movement joints are incorporated in the base they
should be reflected through the asphalt topping at the same width and to accurate
alignment.)
Submit to the SO.
3.2.10.4 Mix
Refer to manufacturer for specification and mix appropriate for use.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.10.5 Thickness
Between 0.1-12mm (refer to manufacturers recommendations for appropriate
thickness)
3.2.10.6 Finish
Trowel applied heavy duty floor, self smoothing, or sealant all applied in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
3.3 Movement Joint
3.3.1 Metal Edgings

Refer to clause 3.1 for selected proprietary product to be used for movement joint.
Bed in 1:3 cement/sand centred over joint and to finished floor level. Mechanically fix
with stainless steel screws to base.
3.3.2 Movement Joint Filler

Closed cell polyethylene filler, bond breaking tape and sealant as noted in clause 3.1.
3.4 Floor Hardener

Proprietary water based metallic fluorosilicate and wetting agents solution designed
for the hardening of concrete surfaces.
Submit suitable product to the SO. If no metallic hardener is specified, proprietary
non-metallic hardener may be submitted to the SO.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Preparation
4.1.1 Suitability of Bases

Before starting work ensure that
Bases are sufficiently flat to permit specified levels and flatness of finished surfaces,
bearing in mind the permissible minimum and maximum thicknesses of the
screed/topping.
Bases are clean and free from plaster, dirt, dust and oil.
4.1.2 Bonded Construction

Shortly before laying screed/topping completely remove mortar matrix from surface to
expose coarse aggregate over entire area of hardened base slab using abrasive
blasting or, for in situ slabs only, pneumatic scabbling. Remove all dust and debris.
Keep base slab well wetted for several hours before laying screed/topping. Remove
free water then brush in recommended bonding agent: cement slurry.
Lay screed/topping while slurry is still wet to ensure a good bond.
4.1.3 Partially Bonded Construction

Before surface of base slab has completely hardened brush off all surface laitance
with a stiff broom.
Thoroughly clean base slab and keep well wetted for several hours before laying
screed. Remove free water then brush in recommended bonding agent: cement
slurry.
Lay screed/topping while slurry is still wet to ensure a good bond.
4.1.4 Unbonded Construction

Lay separating sheet of polythene not less than 65 microns thick (250 gauge) on
base and lap all joints not less than 50 mm.
4.1.5 Floating Construction

Lay insulation with tight butt joints and turn up for full depth of screed at all wall
abutments.
Lay separating sheet of polythene not less than 125 microns thick (500 gauge) with
50 mm laps.
Lay wire netting to BS 1521, mesh size 50 mm, wire designation 19 over separating
sheet with 50 mm laps tied securely with tying wire at 300 mm centres.
4.1.6 Conduits
Haunch up in cement/sand 1:4 on both sides of conduits.
Conduits which are to be cast into screeds to be overlaid with 500 mm wide strip of
steel fabric to SS 32 or BS 4483, reference D49. Place the reinforcement at mid
depth between the top of the conduit and the screed surface.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2 Batching and Mixing
4.2.1 Batching
Batch proportions of mixes by weight. Batching by volume may be permitted on the
basis of the previously established weight-volume relationship(s) of the particular
materials and using accurate gauge boxes.
Batch proportions of mixes made with lightweight aggregates by volume using
accurate gauge boxes.
4.2.2 Mixing
Keep water content of mixes to the minimum, slump not exceeding 25 mm, necessary
to achieve full compaction, low enough to prevent excessive water being brought to
the surface during compaction.
Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-fines must be
mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer: do not use a free fall type (drum)
mixer.
Use all mixes within 2 hours or time limit set out by supplier / manufacturer. Discard
all left over mixes.
Use while sufficiently plastic for full compaction.
4.3 Laying
4.3.1 Sand/Cement Screeds

Fully compact by double beam vibrator or plate vibrator or, where this is not
practicable, by hand.
4.3.2 Fine Concrete Screed/Toppings

Either:
Lay in two layers of approximately equal thickness, thoroughly hand compacting both
layers. Roughen the surface of the lower layer and lay the upper layer within one
hour, or
Lay in a single layer and compact by double beam vibrator or plate vibrator.
4.3.3 Joints in Screed

Unless otherwise specified cast screeds continuously, as far as possible without
defined joints, using ‘wet screeds’ between strips or bays.
4.3.3.1 Movement Joints
Ensure that movement joints are taken through the full depth of the screed and are
clean prior to the insertion of the filler strip.
4.3.3.2 Joints in Toppings
Unless otherwise specified, bay sizes to be not more than 16m², ratio of length to
breadth not more than 3:2, a joint occurring over every construction joint in the base
slab.
Where location of bay joints is not shown on drawings obtain approval before starting
work.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
Forms to be square edged with steel top surfaces, securely fixed. Compact
thoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no lipping.
Alternatively, toppings may be cast continuously, bay joints being formed with
approved plastics or metal dividing strips.
4.4 Finishing
4.4.1 Timing
Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to the setting and
hardening of the material. Do not wet surfaces to assist surface working. Do not
sprinkle cement onto surface.
4.4.2 Wood Floated Finish

Use a wood float to give an even slightly coarse texture with no ridges or steps.
4.4.3 Trowelled Finish

Trowelled finish to receive applied floor finishes.
Float to an even surface with no ridges or steps.
Hand or power trowel to give a uniform smooth but not polished surface free from
trowel marks and other blemishes, and suitable to receive the specified flooring
material.
4.4.4 Accuracy of the Works

Tolerances for finished surfaces shall be as follows:
Finish Maximum abrupt Gradual irregularity
irregularity expressed as maximum
deviation over any 500mm
(mm)
straight edge (mm)
Basic/Plain 5 8
Fine 3 5
Superfine 1 2
Trowelled 0.5 2
Maximum departure from the datum level over whole floor/surface ±5mm.
4.5 Protection
Adequately protect the surface from construction traffic.
If, because of inadequate finishing or protection, the surface of the screed is not
suitable to receive the specified flooring material, submit to the SO and carry out
remedial measures.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.6 Hardeners
4.6.1 Application
Allow concrete floor to cure for 14 days prior to treatment. Remove all loose material,
laitance or grease contamination.
Prepare solution of hardener strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Apply only to dry surfaces. Brush out to prevent ponding, allow the solution to be
absorbed for two hours, do not let the floor dry out during this period.
While the floor is still damp wash with clean water and dispose of surplus solution.
Re-Apply further coat to dry surface after 24 hours ensuring the floor is dry.
4.6.2 Disposal of Material

Do not discharge soluble fluoroisilicates into the drains. Surplus solution is to be
vacuum collected, stored in polythene, plastic or stainless steel containers and
neutralised by the addition of builders lime until a PH of 7 or above is achieved before
disposal.
Strictly follow Manufacturers details for neutralisation and disposal.
4.7 Curing
Unless otherwise specified:
a. Immediately after laying, protect surface from wind, draughts and strong sunlight.
b. As soon as screed/topping has set, closely cover with polythene sheeting and
keep in position for not less than 7 days.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the manufacturer and inclusion of copies of technical data relating to
each screed system proposal.
b. Name of sub-contractor, if any.

Prepare an installation strategy, containing the following information, prior to the
preparation of detailed shop drawings:
a. Sequence of construction
b. Method statements

No item.
5.1.4 Warranty

No item.
5.2.1 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for mock-ups to be provided. Each sample to be no smaller than
2mx2m and to include movement joint and skirting when the latter is formed from the
screed material.
5.3 Tests
5.3.1 Tap Tests

Tap test all screeded areas four weeks after laying at intervals at 1m intervals and
submit a report to the SO. There shall be no hollows in the completed screed.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Types of Tiled Finishes 7
3.2 Tiles 7
3.3 Sand 7
3.4 Cement 7
3.5 Water 7
3.6 Adhesive 7
3.7 Screed 8
3.8 Slurry 8
3.9 Spatterdash 8
3.10 Grout 8
3.11 Sealant and Accessories 8
3.12 Waterproof Membrane 8
3.13 Separating Membrane 8
3.14 Crack Control Reinforcement: 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.1 Preparation of Wall Substrate 10
4.2 Preparation of Floor Bases for Tiling 10
4.3 Fixing 11
4.4 Sealant 14
4.5 Grouting 14
4.6 Coloured Grout 14
4.7 Protection/Completion 15

5.1 Submissions 16
5.2 Mock-ups and Samples 17
5.3 Inspection 17
5.4 Tests 17
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for adhesive fixed tiling on internal walls and
floors. It covers ceramic, homogenous and stone tiled finishes.
Details of the bedding layer for the semi dry method of laying floor tiles is included
since this is deemed to be undertaken by the tiler.
Details of floor screeds for tile fixing by adhesive methods are set out in section A4-
30 ‘Floor Screeds and Hardeners’.
Details of the render coating for the adhesive fixing of wall tiles are set out in section
A4-10 ‘Internal Plaster and Render’.

A1-60 Stone Cladding
1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 68 Code of practice for ceramic wall and floor tiling
SS 26 Portland cement (ordinary and rapid-hardening)
SS 31 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources of concrete
SS 483 Ceramic Tiles – Definitions, Classifications, Characteristics and
Marking
SS 485 Slip resistance classification of public pedestrian space surface
materials
Other Standards
ISO 10545 Ceramic tiles
BS EN 1322 Adhesives for tiles – definitions and terminology
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel-List of stainless steels
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortars

BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 5385: Part 3 Code of practice for the design and installation of ceramic floor tiles
and mosaics
BS 5385: Part 5 Code of practice for the design and installation of terrazzo tile and
slab, natural stone and composition block flooring
BS 5980 Specification for adhesives for use with ceramic tiles and mosaics
ANSI A118.3 Specification for chemical resistant, water cleanable tile setting and
grouting epoxy water cleanable, tile setting epoxy adhesive
ANSI A118.4 Specification for latex Portland cement mortar
ANSI A136.1 Organic adhesives for installation of ceramic tile
ASTM C920 Standard specification for elastomeric joint seal
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended types of applied tiled finishes for the project are set out in the clause 3.1
and locations are indicated in the drawings. Engage qualified and experienced
personnel to carry out and submit the following items to the SO:
1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the tiling layout based on the design
drawings.
1.4.1.2 Submit the tiles, tile bedding, adhesive, sealant and grout. Submit
technical literature on the products selected.
1.4.1.3 Submit suitable method of laying and fixing the tiles to meet with specified
performance requirements.
1.4.1.4 Submit suitable proprietary product and supplier when called for.

Co-ordinate the internal tiling works in particular interfacing with the following work
packages and trades:
b. Floor screeds and Internal plastering
c. Internal service runs and outlets
Liaise and coordinate with services engineer for location of all services buried
beneath tiling in either floor or walls

4
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide a five-year warranty in accordance with contract conditions for the bonding of
tiles.

No item.

No item.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Dead Loads

The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete tiling layer-tiles and
sublayer are to be supported and transferred to the main building structure.
2.1.2 Floor Loads

Take account of the schedule of imposed loads designed for the floors and walls as
indicated in the engineer’s drawings. Also take cognisance and request from the
engineer the likely concentrated load which will be imposed on the floors. Account for
the dynamic effects of the imposed loads where applicable.
2.1.3 Slip Resistance

Comply with SS 485 for slip resistance requirements for public pedestrian surfaces.
Refer to PSD for slip resistence requirements for non-public pedestrian surfaces.

Take into account, that the performance, appearance and proper functioning of the
Works are not affected by any movements, settlement or deflection in the building
structure which can reasonably be expected to occur. Also take into account the
construction accuracy of works by others to which the tiling works are attached.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Tiled Finishes

Refer to the PSD for the specific types and component requirements of internal tiling
works for the project.
3.2 Tiles
3.2.1 Ceramic and Homogeneous Tiles

Comply with the requirements of SS 483.
3.2.2 Stone Tiles

Refer to section A1-60 “Stone Cladding”, clause 3.3 for requirements of various types
of stone.
3.3 Sand
Clean and graded natural sand complying with BS EN 13139.
3.4 Cement
Comply with SS26.
3.5 Water
All water to be potable.
3.6 Adhesive
3.6.1 General
Comply with BS 5890 and BS EN 1322.
Use adhesives strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.6.2 Traditional Cement Mortar Mixed with Water

Premixed Bedding mortar cement/sand 1:2 with additive complying with SS 26 and
SS 31.
3.6.3 Cementitious Adhesive

Mixture of hydraulic binding agents, minerals, polymeric and other organic additives.
Mix thin set mortar with water before use.
Where used in wet areas consult manufacturers literature and mix with latex
admixture rather than water.
3.6.4 Latex Portland Cement Mortar

Modified Portland cement mortar with polymer additive suitable for use as thin bed
mortar. Comply with BS EN 1322. Follow manufacturers instructions for use.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6.5 Dispersion Adhesive

Use Ready-to-use mixtures. Do not use in wet areas.
3.7 Screed
For requirement of screed material refer to section A4-30 ‘Floor Screeds and
Hardeners’, clause 3.0.
3.8 Slurry
Stipple: As for spatterdash plus latex admixture to proportions recommended by
manufacturer.
3.9 Spatterdash
Spatterdash: 1-1.5 parts Portland cement to SS 26 to 2 parts clean sharp sand. Mix
to a thick slurry and keep well stirred.
3.10 Grout
3.10.1 Joints: to 3mm

Use proprietary unsanded grout with polymer additive and colouring pigment. Colour
to the SO’s selection.
3.10.2 Joints: 3-12mm

Use proprietary sanded grout with polymer additive and colouring pigment. Colour to
the SO’s selection.
3.11 Sealant and Accessories
3.11.1 Sealant
Refer to clause 3.1 for proprietary product selected for the project.
3.11.2 Joint Filler

Polyethylene rod. Submit proprietary product to the SO.
3.11.3 Trims and Nosing Tiles

Submit proprietary product to the SO.
3.12 Waterproof Membrane

Submit suitable product to the SO. Refer to section A4-100 “Internal Waterproofing”
clause 3.0 for general requirements of waterproofing materials. Refer to clause 3.1 for
particular waterproofing product specified under the tiles if any.
3.13 Separating Membrane

1200 gauge polyethylene.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.14 Crack Control Reinforcement:

Type: galvanised 25mm mesh centre, wire no less than 1.0 mm diameter to SS 32 or
BS 4483.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Preparation of Wall Substrate
4.1.1 New In-situ Concrete

Scrub with water containing detergent to ensure complete removal of mould oil,
surface retarders and other materials incompatible with the bedding. Rinse with clean
water and allow to dry unless specified otherwise.
4.1.2 New Plaster

Ensure plaster is dry, solidly bedded, free from dust and friable matter. Apply plaster
primer if recommended by the adhesive manufacturer and allow to dry before tiling.
4.1.3 Plasterboard Backgrounds

Ensure that sheets are dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings and the
face intended to receive the decorative finish is exposed.
4.1.4 Fibro Cement Backgrounds

Ensure that boards are dry, securely fixed and rigid with no protruding fixings. Seal or
prime surfaces to be tiled where recommended by the tile adhesive manufacturer.
4.1.5 Hacking for key

Roughen specified backgrounds thoroughly and evenly by removing the entire
surface to a depth of 3 mm by pneumatic scabbling, bush hammering or abrasive
blasting. Remove all dust and debris and wash clean before commencing tiling.
4.1.6 Spatterdash/Stipple Keying Mix

Apply spatterdash by throwing and stipple by brushing vigorously onto previously
dampened background to a thickness of 3-5 mm and leave rough.
Keep damp with fine water spray or by covering with polyethylene until set and allow
to dry out slowly before applying bedding.
4.2 Preparation of Floor Bases for Tiling
4.2.1 Preparing Concrete Bases for Fully Bonded Bedding

Completely remove mortar matrix from surface to expose coarse aggregate over
entire area of hardened base (including any associated minor areas such as skirtings,
treads and risers) using a pneumatic scabbler or abrasive blasting. Remove all dust
and debris and wash clean.
Keep surface well wetted for several hours before laying bedding. Remove free water
then brush in a slurry bonding coat of creamy consistency. Lay screeded bed while
slurry is still wet to ensure a good bond.
4.2.2 Preparing Concrete Bases for Partially Bonded Bedding

The surface of the base (including any associated minor areas such as skirtings,
treads and risers) must have a brushed finish with no surface laitance.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
Shortly before laying bedding, thoroughly wash clean the surface and keep well
wetted for several hours. Remove free water then brush in a slurry bonding coat of
creamy consistency.
Lay screeded bed while slurry or bonding agent is still wet to ensure a good bond.
4.2.3 Preparing Concrete Bases for Unbonded Bedding

Unless the bedding is laid over a suitable sheet DPM, lay separating layer of
polythene sheet on clean base lapping 100 mm at joints. Lay wire mesh in to the
centre of the bedding.
4.2.4 Smoothing Underlayment

Apply underlayment as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Apply to the
base and allow to dry before fixing tiles.
4.3 Fixing
4.3.1 Setting-out
Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps.
Joints on walls to be truly horizontal, vertical and in alignment round corners.
Joints in floors to be parallel to the main axis of the space or specified features.
Cut tiles/slabs to be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive
locations.
Joints in walls and floors to be in alignment.
Where positions of movement joints are not specified they are to be agreed with the
SO.
Before laying tiles obtain approval of setting out drawings.
4.3.2 Fixing Generally

Check that there are no unintended colour/shade variations within the tiles for use in
each area/room. Thoroughly mix variegated tiles.
Check that adhesive is compatible with background/base. Use a primer where
recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
Cut tiles neatly and accurately.
Unless specified otherwise, fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the
background/base and tile backs.
Before bedding material sets make adjustments necessary to give true, regular
appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.
Clean surplus bedding material from joints and face of tiles without disturbing tiles.
4.3.2.1 Adverse Weather
Do not fix tiles in wet conditions.
Comply with manufacturers' recommendations for maximum temperatures when
using proprietary adhesives.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Take adequate precautions to protect work from inclement weather, and premature
drying out.
4.3.3 Fixing Floor Tiles

4.3.3.1 Floors Laid to Fall
No backfalls or areas where water can pond will be accepted.
4.3.3.2 Mortar for Bedding
Use Prepacked Portland cement to SS26.
Sand for floors: To BS EN 13139 with not more than 10% passing a 150 micrometre
sieve and not more than 3% passing a 75 micrometre sieve. Where fine sand is
specified, grading limit F applies.
Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform consistence in a suitable forced action
mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type (tilting drum) mixer. Use the minimum
amount of water necessary to give required workability.
Use mortar within two hours of mixing at normal temperatures. Do not use after the
initial set has taken place and do not retemper.
4.3.3.3 Crack Control Reinforcement
Place centrally in depth of bed, lap edges not less than 100 mm and tie together with
galvanised steel wire.
4.3.3.4 Porous Tiles
If to be bedded in cement: sand, soak in clean water for at least 30 minutes, and fix
as soon as surface water has drained.
4.3.3.5 Coved Tile Skirtings
Bed solid to wall with adhesive before laying floor tiles. Ensure joints in skirtings
match and align with joints in floor tiling.
4.3.3.6 Sit-on Tile Skirtings
Bed solid to wall with adhesive after laying floor tiles. Ensure joints in skirtings match
and align with joints in floor tiling.
4.3.3.7 Thick Bed Adhesive – Solid Floors
Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base and comb the surface with the
recommended solid bed trowel. Apply adhesive to backs of tiles as necessary to fill
any depressions or keys. Press tiles firmly into position to give finished bed thickness
within the range recommended by the manufacturer.
4.3.3.8 Cement/Sand Bed (Floors)
Prepacked mortar mixed to a stiff plastic consistency.
Lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed and thoroughly compact to level
with a finished thickness not less than 15 mm, not more than 25 mm.
Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat the entire back of each tile
with the specified adhesive. Press tiles firmly into position to give a finished adhesive
thickness within the range recommended by the manufacturer.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.3.9 Semi-dry Cement/Sand Bed (Floors)

Prepacked Mortar mixed to give a water content such that a sample squeezed in the
hand will retain its shape and not crumble, and such that a film of water does not form
on the surface of the bed when compacted.
Lay separating layer with 100mm laps.
Dampen the base then lay suitably small working areas of screeded bed and compact
thoroughly to the required level, insert crack control mesh into bedding layer.
Within two hours and before bedding sets, evenly coat the entire back of each tile
with the specified adhesive and beat firmly into position to give a finished adhesive
thickness within the range recommended by the manufacturer.
Joint width as indicated in the drawings or clause 3.1.
Grout tiles as specified in clause 4.5.
4.3.4 Fixing Wall Tiles

4.3.4.1 Thin Bed Adhesive - Ribbed
Apply 3 mm floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of approximately 1
m², then trowel to a ribbed profile using the recommended notched trowel. Press tiles
firmly into adhesive with a twisting/sliding action.
4.3.4.2 Thin Bed Adhesive - Solid
Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background in areas of approximately 1 m² and
comb the surface with the recommended solid bed trowel. Apply thin even coat of
adhesive to backs of dry tiles. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to
give finished bed thickness of not more than 3 mm.
4.3.4.3 Thick Bed Adhesive
Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry background and comb the surface with the
recommended solid bed trowel. Fill any keys and apply thin even coat of adhesive
over the entire back of each tile. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action
to give finished bed thickness within the range recommended by the manufacturer.
4.3.5 Checking Tile Adhesion

As work proceeds and before the bedding has set, carefully remove random tiles to
verify that there is the specified adhesion. Remove the initial adhesive, butter the
removed tiles with fresh adhesive and refix.
4.3.6 Tolerance
4.3.6.1 Level of Floor Tiling
Permissible deviation in level from datum for 3mm to be ± 1.0 mm.
4.3.6.2 Flatness/Regularity of Tiling
Sudden irregularities not permitted. When checked with a 2 m straightedge with 3 mm
thick feet at each end, placed anywhere on the surface, the straightedge shall not be
obstructed by the tiles and no gaps shall be greater than 6 mm.
4.3.6.3 Level of Tiling Across Joints
Maximum deviation between tile or slab surfaces either side of a joint, including
movement joints to be:
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. 1 mm for joints less than 6 mm wide.

b. 2mm for joints 6 mm or greater in width.
4.4 Sealant
4.4.1 Sealant Movement Joints with Metal Edgings

Edging material: 1.4401 (formerly 316) grade Stainless steel
Size: Submit to the SO.
Fixing: Bed in 1:3 cement/sand to exact finished level of floor. Fix securely to base
with stainless steel screws
Ensure that joints coincide with any movement joints in the base.
Joint width: 12mm
Prepare joints and apply sealant as manufacturers instructions.
4.4.2 Sealant Movement Joints Through Floor Joint

Ensure that joints extend through tiles and bedding to substrate and that they
coincide with any movement joints in the substrate. Refer to clause 3.1 for Joint
width, sealant and sealant colour.
4.4.3 Sealant Movement Joints Through Wall Joint

Ensure that joints extend through tiles and bedding to substrate and that they
coincide with any movement joints in the substrate. Refer to clause 3.1 for Joint
width, sealant and sealant colour.
4.5 Grouting
Grout tiles as soon as possible after bedding has set sufficiently to prevent
disturbance of tiles.
Ensure that joints are 6 mm deep (or the depth of the tile if less), and are free from
dust and debris.
Fill joints completely, tool to an approved profile, clean off surface and leave free from
blemishes.
Polish wall tiling with a dry cloth when joints are hard.
Check the potential risk of staining by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial
area. If discolouration occurs apply a protective sealer to the tiles and repeat the trial.
4.6 Coloured Grout

Check the potential risk of staining by applying the grout to a few tiles in a small trial
area. If discolouration occurs apply a protective sealer to the tiles and repeat the trial.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.7 Protection/Completion
4.7.1 Protection Generally

Adequately protect and keep clean all completed areas. Clean off any droppings
immediately.
4.7.2 Protection in Wet Areas

Tiles/slabs type(s) kitchens and bathrooms to be kept dry and not brought into service
for at least three weeks after grouting/jointing.
4.7.3 Protection of Floors

Keep completed floors clear of traffic for at least seven days and permit only light
traffic for the next 10 days.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. The name of the stone and tile manufacturer and other components, include of
copies of technical data relating to each of the tile and component types. Refer to
section A1-60, clause 5.3 for the tests to be selected for the selection of stone.
b. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
5.1.2 Works Submissions

5.1.2.1 General information
Submit the following to the SO prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings.
a. Copies of technical certificates for each tile bedding mortar, tile type, adhesive,
admixture and component
b. Means of accommodating movement in the tiles and substrate.
c. Specimen of warranty if any.
d. Drawing list setting out the drawings to be prepared.

a. Drawings to show all tiles on elevation and floor plans at 1:20 with movement
joints, falls, service outlets and termination details.
b. Details of tiles junctions at all terminations, junction with drainage outlets, skirting
and any other element puncturing the tiles
Do not commence laying tiles until shop drawings have been reviewed and

components,
a. Tiles
b. Adhesive
c. Sealant

No item.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.5 Warranty
5.1.6 Quality Plan Control Submission

No item.
5.2 Mock-ups and Samples
5.2.1 Samples Required

Note requirement for sample submission in the PSD. When required, submit the
following samples:
a. At tender stage three samples of each tile.
b. The SO may request samples at any time for testing.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
A wall approximately 3mx2.4m (location to be agreed with the SO) and adjacent floor
area approximately 2mx2m to be tiled including termination at head, skirting,
movement joint and drainage outlet.
Do not undertake any more internal wall or floor tiling until the SO has approved the
mock-up.
The mock-up may form part of the final building, if not it is to be retained until the SO
agrees for its removal.
Refer to the PSD for any additional requirements and timeframe of mock-up.
5.2.3 Stone Samples and Mock-ups

Refer to section A1-60 ‘Stone Cladding’ clause 5.1 and 5.2 for submission of samples
and mock-up for stones.
5.3 Inspection
No item.
5.4 Tests

Where requested in the PSD undertake the following tests on the tiles.
Provide certificates by a test laboratory accredited under SINGLAS to cover the
following as described in SS 483:
a. Dimensional tolerances
b. Straightness of sides
c. Rectangularity
d. Flatness of surface
e. Surface condition
f. Crazing resistance
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
g. Modulus of rupture
h. Scratch hardness of surface (Moh,s Scale)
i. Resistance to acids and alkalis
j. Water absorption
k. Colour fastness and lightfastness.
l. Reverse staining test.
m. Stain resistance, method as ISO 10545-14, stain resistance to be Class 3.
Submit the test certificate to the SO prior to bulk ordering. Tiles, which do not comply,
are to be rejected. Laid tiles, which do not comply, are to be hacked up and replaced.
5.4.2 Testing and Inspection for Stone

Refer to section A1-60 ‘Stone Cladding’ clause 5.3 for requirements of testing and
site control for stones.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A4-80 Suspended Ceiling
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT 6
2.1 Contractor’s proposals 6

3.1 Types of Suspended Ceilings 9
3.2 Mineral Fibre Board Ceiling 9
3.3 Metal Strip Ceiling 10
3.4 Seamless Fibrous Plaster Board Ceiling 11
3.5 Skim Coat to Exposed Slab Soffit 12
3.6 Paint and Coatings 13
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General 14
4.2 Fabrication 14
4.3 Installation 14
4.4 Fixings and Suspension Systems 15
4.5 Light Fittings & other fixtures 16
4.6 Protective Treatments for folded steel on site 16
4.7 Skim Coat to concrete soffit 16
4.8 Cleaning 16
5. VERIFICATION 17
5.1 Submission 17
5.3 Test 19
2 Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This Specification covers the works on the following types of ceiling systems,
including supports and grid components, and provisions to receive fittings and
equipment in contact with the ceiling:
a. Modular Mineral fibreboard
b. Modular Metal ceiling
c. Seamless fibrous plasterboard with skim coat
d. Skim coating to soffit of exposed concrete slab
This specification does not cover proprietary fire rated ceiling, where these shall be
constructed to specialist supplier’s specifications.

A4-20 Internal Paint and Coating
Skim coating works to plasterboard ceilings are described in section A4-10 “Internal
Plaster and Render”.
1.3 Standards
Other Standards
BS EN 1461 Hot Dip Galvanised Steel
BS EN 10152 Steel Finishes
BS EN 20354 Acoustics of sound in reverberation rooms
BS CP 290 Code of Practice for Suspended Ceiling using Metal Fixing
Systems
BS 1191 Gypsum building plaster
BS 5368: Part 3 Methods of testing windows:
Wind resistance test
BS 5821 Sound Transmission
BS 6375: Performance of Windows:
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
Part 1 Classification of weathertightness

stoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed
sections for external architectural purposes
BS 6497 Powder Coating Steelwork
BS 8290 Suspended Ceilings
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended design of the suspended ceiling systems for the project are indicated in
the drawings. Base on the information available, engage qualified and experienced
personnel to carry out and submit the following items to the SO:
1.4.1.1 Design development: Develop all necessary details including connections
and interfaces etc. for the construction of the suspended ceiling system(s)
based on the design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Selection of product and systems to comply with the design intent as
described in the tender drawings.
1.4.1.3 Design of the structural support of the ceiling panels and grid. The design
is to be endorsed by a PE.
1.4.1.4 Methods of installation.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

ceiling works.

Co-ordinate the ceiling works particularly the interfacing with the following trades
a. Partition and heads of partitions
b. Affected mechanical and electrical services installations interfacing with the
suspended ceilings both above and below the ceiling line, including forming
openings for modular lighting, air diffusers, smoke and heat detection systems,
sprinkler installations, signage and the like.

PSD for list.
1.4.5 Warranty
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

and accessories. Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for details.

Prepare and submit a quality control plan to the SO.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS
2. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
2.1 Contractor’s proposals

Account for the following design input requirements when carrying out the
contractor’s design proposals in cl.1.4.1.
2.1.1 Structural Movement and Movement between Works by Others

Ceiling Works are not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection, expansion
or contraction which can be expected to occur in the building or the construction
process.
Junction between the Ceiling Works and adjacent work by others shall be formed to
accommodate possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent element
without distortion to the Works, or disintegration of joints between works.
2.1.2 Strength and Loadings

Capable of sustaining and transmitting to its point of support all loadings resulting
from its dead weights, plus the imposed loads resulting from other equipment such as
light fittings, ventilation grilles, diffusers. Capable of sustaining such loads without
deflection, fracture, permanent deterioration, or irreversible deformation beyond the
allowable tolerances as set out by the PE in clause 1.4.1.3.
Access tiles and their method of fixing shall be sufficiently robust to withstand
temporary removal without permanent damage or disfigurement.
All parts of the Works fixed externally shall be capable of resisting wind loads such
that the works would not suffer any deterioration if tested in accordance with BS
5368: Part 3 and BS 6375: Part 1. In instances where there is wind lift potential only
fixed suspension system capable of withstanding a wind load derived from wind
speed of 33m/s shall be used.
Take into account, that the weight of other equipment such as light fittings, ventilation
grilles etc are independently supported and not from the ceiling suspension system.
2.1.3 Noise
Take account of the effects of air movement in the building to eliminate incidental
rattling, creaking or any other noise.
Take account of normal activities in the building (eg footfalls on floors above, doors
closing, thermal movement etc) or operation of the light fittings, loudspeakers, etc and
ensure that these do not result in audible rattles, "buzzing" or other extraneous noise.
2.1.4 Sound Absorption

Ceiling areas designated as absorptive, shall present the following random incidence
absorption coefficients, when tested in accordance with BS EN 20354 (ISO 354).
Octave Band Centre Frequency, Hz.
125 250 500 1k 2k 4k
Absorption Co-eficients 0.1 0.45 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.8
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
2.1.5 Fire Performance

Fire resistance shall meet with FSSD requirements.
Ceiling Materials or any of its parts shall not contain any substance, which will emit
toxic fumes as a result of overheating or combustion.
Where a Ceiling is penetrated by multi-service runs, e.g. pipework, ductwork,
trunking, cabling, etc., the relevant section or sections of the barrier shall be replaced
with materials which are equally incombustible and to details approved by SO.
2.1.6 Total Moisture Resistance

95% at 40 degree Centigrade.
No hygroscopic ceiling materials shall be used.
2.1.7 Thermal Performance

U Value not exceeding 0.031 W/m2.
2.1.8 Durability and Maintenance Criteria

Take into account, that the Ceiling Works are easily maintainable and can be
replaced as stated in the Maintenance Manual.
Suspended tiles and grid and plasterboard access panels shall be easily removable
and/or opened without damage or loss of appearance to allow access into the ceiling
void.
Take cognisance to the environment for which the ceiling is to be installed, paying
b. For non air-conditioned ceilings, daily and seasonal variations in humidity and
temperature in the Tropics.
occurring within the spaces for which ceiling is installed or in proximity.
2.1.9 Methods of fabrication and installation

Take into account of the recommendations of BS 8290.
2.1.10 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to take into account, that the surface finishes are
uniform in colour and texture and appearance throughout.
Exposed or conceal grids shall be straight and levelled.
No fixing screws, cleats or other unintended metal part of the system shall be visible
on the underside of the ceiling.
The ceiling systems, in particular ceiling with acoustic performance, shall remain
stable in shape and dimension when subject to:
a. Heat generated by the light fittings or services equipment.
b. The normal building environment during construction and when completed.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Suspended Ceilings

Suspended ceiling system(s) for the project may consist of one of the following types:
a. Mineral fibreboard: Modular, regular mineral fibreboard suspended ceiling tiles, on
a pre-finished metal suspension system, in either concealed or exposed manner.
b. Metal ceiling: Modular, metal suspended ceiling either in tiles or as planks (strips)
on concealed suspension systems.
c. Seamless fibrous plasterboard suspended ceiling system with skim coat of plaster
finish, supported on concealed metal suspension system.
d. Skim coating to soffit of exposed concrete slab where there are no suspended
ceiling.
Refer to the PSD for specific requirement of the suspended ceiling types for the
project.
3.2 Mineral Fibre Board Ceiling
3.2.1 Board Material

Mineral Board Ceiling shall be manufactured from mineral fibre or high-density resin
bond glass fibre in pre-formed tiles with finished white textured surface. Surface may
be perforated as recommended by manufacturer for enhanced acoustic performance.
The boards shall be suspended on an exposed or concealed metal grid.
3.2.1.1 Material Characteristics
Ceiling material shall have the following characteristics.
a. Washability: Able to withstand cleaning with damp cloth soaked in light detergent
solution.
b. Edge of ceiling board shall be flushed with exposed metal grid.
Refer to the PSD for additional characteristics required if any.
3.2.2 Delivery and Protection

Deliver Ceiling boards to site in protective packaging capable of withstanding
splashes from water or rain without staining or damaged to the boards and its
components. Store in demarcated, designated zones with additional protection where
necessary. Site protection may include raised plinth to prevent contamination from
ground moisture.
3.2.3 Suspension System

Suspension system may be of the following types, comply with BS CP 290:
a. Joint-less systems
b. Frame and tile systems (exposed grid)
Mineral fibreboard ceiling panel relying on self-weight on exposed metal grids shall
not be used in areas where there are open fenestrations. No ceiling board shall be
dislodged resulting from wind uplift.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.2.4 Provision for access & fittings

Provide lift and tilt tiles for access to the ceiling void.
Formed apertures shall be cut within the ceiling tiles within a square or rectangular
plain zone to suit appropriate fittings such as electronic alarm sounders, smoke
detectors, air grilles and sprinkler heads as required.
3.3 Metal Strip Ceiling
3.3.1 Strip Material

Flush mounted lay-in rectangular planks with square edges on all four sides, fully
accessible and supported on a beam grid as indicated in the drawings. Strip may be
manufactured from Steel or Aluminium of appropriate thickness relative to support
spacing as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 0.6 mm.
3.3.1.1 Strip Perforation
Submit sample to be approved by SO.
3.3.1.2 Strip Size
As indicated in the drawings.
3.3.1.3 Protective treatment
All metal surfaces shall be protected in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendation, able to resist rust in the environment conditions as depicted in
clause 2.1.6.
Steel sections shall be hot dip galvanised or in accordance with manufacturing
process in compliance with this specification. On site protective treatment shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and approved by SO.
3.3.1.4 Finish and colour
Visible metal components of the ceiling system shall be polyester powder coated or
fluorocarbon coating. Colour to be approved by the SO.
3.3.1.5 Polyester Powder Coating
Ensure no distortion in metal sheets before application of powder coating process.
Pre-treated in accordance with the coating manufacturer’s requirements :
a. when on aluminium components, finish to be BS 6496,
b. when on electro-galvanised components, finish to be BS 6497.
Minimum continuous film thickness shall be 40 microns, with an average of 60
microns, as measured on any surface where colour coating is required.
Only one proprietary process shall be used throughout the Works. Double coating of
processed work shall not be accepted.
Visible finished surfaces shall be consistent in appearance, free of seeding, pinholes,
tears, blisters, damage or other coating defects.
Do not use solvents to remove adhesive residues left after removal of protective tape,
unless allowed by ceiling manufacturer.
The polyester powder coated finish shall have a gloss level of 15% - 20% when
measured on a 60º Gardiner Head.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3.2 Accessories:
3.3.2.1 Acoustic backing pads
Sound absorbing backing pads, in dark colour, woven or non-woven inert mineral
fibre and installed by manufacturer prior to delivery to site.
3.3.2.2 Gaskets:
9mm x 3mm non-flammable closed cell black gasket fixed at site to grid profiles.
3.3.2.3 Perimeter trims.
Extruded aluminium profile, either straight or curved as necessary. Allow shadow gap
between ceiling perimeter and wall surfaces for neat junction.
Jointing of perimeter trims shall be carried out neatly without lipping or twisting. Use
mitred joints at all internal and external corners and the longest lengths of trims
available from the manufacturer to keep intermediate butt joints to a minimum. Co-
ordinate joints of straight runs to coincide with grid locations.
3.3.3 Suspension System

Suspension system shall be rust proof.
Suspension system shall be by angles, threaded rods or other rigid system. Wire
hangers shall not be permitted.
Include all hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary channels,
perimeter trims, splines, noggins, clips, bracing, bridging etc. which are necessary to
complete the installation and achieve the specified performance requirements.
3.3.4 Accessibility and fittings:

Provide manufacturer recommended system for access to void above ceiling.
Apertures and perforations to be formed by cutting with manufacturer’s recommended
cutting techniques and tools.
3.4 Seamless Fibrous Plaster Board Ceiling
3.4.1 Board Material

Use 1 layer of 12.5mm plasterboard Boards screw-fixed to the support systems.
Screws must be rust proof.
Where ceiling is used externally, such as walkways, corridors or car porches, submit
waterproofing additives for water resistance.
3.4.2 Soffit
Use approved Gypsum Plaster Skim
3.4.3 Perimeter treatment

At all perimeter interfaces use Aluminium profile to stiffen edge, either straight or
curved as necessary. Edging material shall be capable of receiving skim coat in a
manner consistent with the ceiling soffit.
Jointing of perimeter trims shall be carried out neatly without lipping or twisting. Use
mitred joints at all internal and external corners and the longest lengths of trims
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
available from the manufacturer to keep intermediate butt joints to a minimum. Co-
ordinate joints of straight runs to coincide with grid locations.
3.4.4 Suspension
Submit concealed metal grids to the SO.
3.4.5 Services and fittings

Seamless fibrous plaster board ceiling may house equipment such as light fittings,
electronic alarm sounders, smoke detectors, air grilles and sprinkler heads. These
shall be independently supported without imposing load on ceiling material and
systems.
Forming of apertures and perforations to receive such equipment shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s procedures using approved tools.
3.4.6 Sealer
Two coat sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.5 Skim Coat to Exposed Slab Soffit

Use pre-mixed plastering compound to achieve level surface on the soffit of RC slab
and beams where there is no suspended ceiling.
3.5.1 Material
Use pre packed plastering compound conforming to BS 1191 and consisting mainly
of gypsum with chemical additives. When accepted by SO include aggregates and/or
fibres for added adhesion and bulk. Unless otherwise agreed apply one finishing coat
3 mm thick plaster conforming to BS 1191 class C & D.
Do not use site mixed skim plaster.
3.5.2 Fire performance

Where fire performance is indicated in drawings, use only non-flammable and non-fire
hazardous pre packed plaster.
3.5.3 Ability to receive paint

Completed skim coat surface shall be suitable to receive paint.
3.5.4 Colour
Colour of skim coat shall be consistent without gradations or stains.
3.5.5 Edging
Use proprietary edge beading to all corners and edges.
3.5.6 Skim Coat Defects

Cracks or uneven surface due to shrinkage or crumbly plaster damp surfaces shall
not be accepted.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6 Paint and Coatings

Refer to section A4-20 “Internal Paint and Coating”, clause 3.1 for requirements
under different substrate materials.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 General
Carry out the works in accordance with methods as submitted and accepted by the
SO.
Ensure achievement of the specified performance requirements as set out in clause
2.
4.2 Fabrication
Comply with the recommendations of BS 8290.
4.3 Installation

Prior to installation ensure proper documentation for the following items:
a. Sample of ceiling material and components to be installed
b. Mock ups in simulated operational environment
c. Manufacturer’s brochure
d. Setting out plan of each room / space for ceiling works showing
i) structures
ii) benchmarks and horizontal reference grids for each level of the building
within room / space with ceiling installation
iii) anchor points
iv) ceiling grids
v) Location and size of services fixtures such as light fixtures, air condition
fixtures, as well as types of suspension / fixing system for these fixtures
e. Special or cut ceiling panels / tiles / strips with notes on suspension methods.
4.3.2 Pre-Installation
Address and document and submit to SO, the following agenda:
a. Review load-bearing framing conditions, anchorage and interface with other finish
material, penetrations and other preparatory works performed by other building
trades.
b. Review required submittals
c. Review and finalise Construction Programme and resources of Work.
d. Review required inspections and testing procedures.
e. Review procedures for coping with unfavourable conditions including possibility of
temporary protection.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.3 Acclimatisation
Before installation commence, store the suspended ceiling components on site for at
least 24 hours to allow for stabilisation. Ensure free circulation of air to all surfaces.
Verify that material and components are within dimensional tolerances as set out by
the manufacturers.
4.3.4 Setting out

Set out accurately to cover position and levels of soffits, lipping, observable ceiling
lines and joints.
Inspect the structure defining the space enclosing the ceiling works for the following:
a. Take actual measurements and highlight dimensional discrepancy from the
design drawings
b. Verify that dimensional discrepancies are within permissible deviations and
acceptable tolerances.
c. Take into account permissible deviations for adjacent works by other trades.
d. Identify potential areas of moisture or damp from
i) Ambient atmosphere
ii) Splashes from rain run off
iii) Pipe leakage or condensation.
Provide suitable measures to tackle the problems at these areas.
4.3.5 Particular Measures

4.3.5.1 Mineral Fibre Board Ceiling
Do not install tiles when site environmental temperature and ambient humidity is
subject to change by adjacent factors or works. Do not install tiles when floor is wet.
4.3.5.2 Metal strip ceiling
Wear clean glove when handling ceiling strips during installation and maintenance.
4.3.5.3 Seamless Fibrous Plaster Board
Apply two coats of sealer to joints and seams prior to application of paint or coating.
4.3.6 Level
The finished ceilings shall be installed within ±3mm from the specified level.
4.4 Fixings and Suspension Systems

Do not connect fixings and suspension systems to any services installation (including
insulation where applicable).
Use additional supports and/or trimmers where services traverse ceiling plane.
Use only stainless steel screws.
Do not use timber for suspension.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4.1 Material Compatibility

Establish nature of materials to ensure compatibility with ceiling materials and
equipment fixtures within ceiling.
Provide separator or bimetallic segregation to eliminate the risk of electrolytic
corrosion or any other adverse action where different metallic materials are used.
4.5 Light Fittings & other fixtures

Mark and cut openings for all ceiling fixtures such as light fittings etc. base on
accepted drawings and methods.
No openings other than those approved shall be permitted.
Ensure, at time of installation of all light fittings and other attachments that no
equipment load or operational loads are transferred to the ceiling.
Endorse the conformance with the above requirements and submitted to SO for
record.
4.6 Protective Treatments for folded steel on site

Protect steel folded on site with cold galvanising finish to BS EN 10152.
Treat cut ends with one coat of cold galvanising coating or other accepted zinc rich
primer to manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.7 Skim Coat to concrete soffit

Apply of skim coat plaster in accordance with manufacturer’s application processes
using approved tools.
Thickness of plaster not to exceed 3 mm. Substrate shall be remedied
4.7.1 Edging
Provide accepted proprietary edging and corner beads to all corners and edges
receiving the skim coats. Submit brochures and technical literature of such beading.
4.7.2 Moisture content to substrate

Do not apply skim coat if substrate is wet.
Conduct water test to soffit to ensure watertightness if there is wet areas (kitchens,
toilets) above slab.
4.8 Cleaning
Vacuum completed ceiling, both soffit and surface within ceiling void to remove dust.
Clean completed ceiling works with damp cloth in light detergent solution where
necessary before inspection for hand over.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5. VERIFICATION
5.1 Submission
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the ceiling manufacturers and the relevant technical data.
b. General elaboration of installation method.
c. Name & CV of supervisor appointed for the works.
d. Portable sample of ceiling components to be used.
e. PSB product certificates.
f. Fire test certificates by PSB or acceptable equivalent institutes.
g. Details of fire protection treatment (if specified)
h. Brief program showing times for lead-up shop drawings, tests, supply, fabrication
and installation, where applicable.
i. Information of current and previous track records.
j. Confirmation of acceptance and allowance or all requirements in the specification,
and sample of warranty.

Upon commencement of the works, submit the following to the SO:
5.1.2.1 Technical information
Technical information and data demonstrating conformance with design intent as
5.1.2.2 Concept Drawings
Submit concept drawings to demonstrate the ‘Design Development in Principle’, prior
to the preparation of shop drawings.
Prepare shop drawings showing clear and complete details of each assembly,
component and connection together with detailed information relative to their
fabrication, material, surface treatment and erection.
Prepare the shop drawings in a professional manner by a person experience in this
type of drafting. ‘Mark-ups’ and ‘overnotes’ on the contract issue drawings shall not
be accepted.
Include information on:
a. Setting out plans
b. Sectional details of typical and non-typical elements and associated elements.
c. Sectional details of all interfaces with adjoining structures and disciplines.
d. Dimensions of overall assembly.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
e. Procedures and sequence to produce distortion-free components and

assemblies.
f. Identification of type and extent of protective coatings to be applied.
g. Method of installation
i. type and location of attachments to be built in to the building structure.
ii. junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces.
h. Methods of meeting performance requirements for thermal insulation, fire
resistance, sound transmission and the like.
Do not commence fabrication and procurement until the shop drawings have been
reviewed and permission to proceed has been obtained.
5.1.2.4 Methods Statements
Submit installation and fixing method.
Demonstrate provisions made to accommodate all horizontal and vertical variations
and permitted deviations in the work of others at the points of attachment.
Provide for all necessary adjustment to enable the Works to be fitted to the building
as found.

Before commencement of fabrication, obtain certification from the manufacturer of
each ceiling material and components testifying to the correctness of:
a. the grade,
b. strength,
c. size,
d. finish
e. applied coatings,
f. applicable standards
Submit copies of all such certification.
5.1.4 Warranty
1.4.5.

Prior to completion submit the Maintenance Manual including procedures for the
satisfactory long-term care and regular upkeep of the ceiling systems.

5.1.7 As-Build Plans

Upon completion of the works submit as build drawings as directed by the SO,
documenting variations from the approved plans and design.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.2.1 Samples
Submit samples of part of each ceiling showing face materials, and grid supports and
technical data.
Submit fire and acoustic test certificates and assessments for each type of ceiling
assembly, where applicable.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Install a mock up area complete with all finishes, components and fixtures and fittings
of the ceiling tiles. Unless otherwise agreed, selected area to be 4500 mm x 4500.
Complete the mock up and submit to the SO prior to procurement and fabrication.
Provide additional mock-up as noted in the PSD.
5.3 Test
5.3.1 Tensile pull out test

Unless otherwise directed, conduct tensile pull out test for all ceiling works at one
location per 5 floors of building. At least one pull out test shall be conducted per
building or project. The location of pull out tests shall be selected by the SO.
5.3.1.1 Mineral Fibre Board Ceiling
Tensile pull out test results shall exceed:
a. For 1200 mm x 600 mm ceiling panel – 2 kg
b. For 600 mm x 600 mm ceiling panel – 4 kg
c. For suspension system
i) At anchor points – 50 kg
ii) At mid span of suspension grid – 12 kg before L / 20 deflection.
5.3.1.2 Metal strip ceiling

a. For ceiling strips – 15 kg
b. For suspension system
5.3.1.3 Seamless fibrous plasterboard

a. For plaster board at centre of suspension grid – 20kg
b. For suspension system
19
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.3.1.4 Skim Coat ceiling

Conduct tensile pull out test between 21 days to 28 days after application.
Average result of pull out test shall exceed 0.40 N /mm 2.
Test result of each location shall be not less than 0.30 N /mm 2.
5.3.2 Moisture Penetration

Conduct inspection of plasterboard ceiling after operating building M&E services for
48 hours to observe for wet or damp locations due to leakage or condensation.
Conduct inspection of plasterboard ceiling after completion of roof shelter works to
check for evidence of rainwater drips to plasterboard ceiling.
Mark and annotate on a relevant reflected ceiling plan drawing with description of
causes for moisture or damp.
Submit remedial measures to eliminate moisture due to leakage or condensation, to
SO before commencement of the measures. Include approved remedial measures in
the maintenance manual.
20
Version 1.0
NPQS
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
1.5 Definitions / Abbreviations 5
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS 7
3.1 Types of Internal Waterproofing System 7
3.3 Substrate 7
3.4 Waterproofing Systems: Membranes 8
3.5 Waterproofing Systems: Waterproof Screed 8
3.6 Waterproofing Systems: Auxiliary Components 8
3.7 Waterproofing Systems: Primers and Bonding Compounds 9
3.8 Waterproofing Systems: Materials for Joints 9
3.9 Surfacing Materials 10
3.10 Drainage 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 General Workmanship Requirements 11
4.2 Preparation 11
4.3 Application of Membranes 12
4.4 Waterproof Screed 15
4.5 Protection 15
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION 16
5.1 Submissions 16
5.3 Inspection and Tests 17
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the design development, application, installation and verification
of waterproofing systems for internal walls and floors of internal wet areas that are
not directly exposed to weather, such as toilets, bathrooms and kitchens. It covers
various combinations of:
a. Waterproofing Membranes
b. Waterproof Screeds
c. Floor Screeds and Wall Renders
d. Surfacing Materials

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 133 Bituminous emulsion for Roof Waterproofing
SS 374 Preformed Waterproofing Membranes for Concealed Roof
SS CP 82 Waterproofing of Reinforced Concrete Buildings
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended types of internal waterproofing are set out in clause 3.1. The locations
of the internal waterproofing are shown on the drawings. Based on the information,
carry out and submit the following items to the SO:
Submit manufacturer and products for each of the components of the Waterproofing
system(s) to meet with specified requirements.
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4.1.2 Design Development

Develop all necessary details including connections and interfaces etc. for the
construction of the waterproofing system based on the design drawings.
Submit suitable methods to carry out the works including setting out, application of
waterproofing membranes, installation and fixing of insulation, surfacing and
associated components, etc. Taking into account of the performance requirements
as set out in clause 2.1.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Prepare coordinated shop drawings incorporating all developed details.
1.4.3 Co-ordination With Other Works

Co-ordinate the roofing works particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
a. Main structural slab and substrate
b. External Masonry and Cladding
c. Internal Masonry and Partitions
d. Plumbing Works
e. Mechanical Services
f. Electrical Services
g. Floor and Wall Finishes
h. Doors and Windows
i. Fixtures and Fittings

PSD for list.
1.4.5 Warranty
following items:
a. Ten-Year warranty for waterproofing and watertightness of walls and floors of wet
areas.
b. Ten-Year warranty for waterproofing additives.

and accessories. Refer to the General Requirements section, clause 1.4.8 for
details.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

Prepare and submit a Quality Control Plan to the SO.
1.5 Definitions / Abbreviations

a. RC Reinforced Concrete
b. WFT Wet Film Thickness
c. DFT Dry Film Thickness
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Structural
2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete water proofing
system shall not exceed the assumed design value as indicated in the PSD.
2.1.1.2 Live Loads
Unless otherwise specified, account for the Live Loads as stipulated in the Building
Control Regulations, and additional requirements of other statutory authorities having
jurisdiction over the works if any.
Take into account, all thermal stress and that the performance, appearance and
proper functioning of the Works are not affected by any movements, settlement or
deflection in the building structure, which can reasonably be expected to occur. Also
take into account the construction accuracy of works by others to which the applied
finishes works are attached.
Take into account, forces resulting from secondary support structure movements,
including vibration and thermal movement from M&E equipments and related works.

Comply with the requirements of the FSSD and additional requirements of other
statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works if any.
2.1.3 Construction
Achieve the following construction accuracy:
a. The overall thickness of the waterproofing assembly shall not exceed that as
indicated in the design drawings.
b. Fall shall be within tolerance of the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations
and specifications.
2.1.4 Durability
The floor and adjacent walls to which the waterproofing system is applied shall
remain in-penetrable to water and moisture under the normal conditions that are
expected over the design life of the waterproofing system.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3. MATERIALS / COMPONENTS
3.1 Types of Internal Waterproofing System

The internal waterproofing system(s) for the project may consist of varying
combination of different components as set out below.
Refer to the PSD for requirements of different types of system(s) for the project.
3.1.1 Proprietary Composite Systems

Where specified, submit to the SO, suitable supplier for the proprietary systems
specified. Ensure the individual components comply with the specified requirements
and the performance as a composite system shall match or exceed the performance
requirements specified for the whole system.

Where ancillary products and accessories and miscellaneous components are not
specified, submit suitable types for the intended purpose to the SO.

Components, particularly sheet waterproofing membrane, profile capping, and
flashing shall be in the longest lengths as practical to minimise lapping, joints and
wastage.

Ensure compatibility of different materials used for the waterproofing system in
particular.
a. Prevent contact between incompatible materials / components, particularly primer
with metal pipes and metals with alloys.
b. Materials used for separation of dissimilar materials / components shall comply
with the following quality:
I. Non-conducting, non-compressible and non-water absorbing.

II. Compatible with the elements with which it comes into contact.
3.3 Substrate
3.3.1 Base Slab and Screed

Where practical construct the structural base slab to a fall of 1:80.
Where not possible or practical to construct the base slab to a fall, apply a base
screed to achieve a fall of 1:80. Base screed to be cement/sand with proprietary
additives. Refer to section A4-30, clause 3.0 for general requirement of screed
materials.
Provide galvanised wire mesh reinforcement when the screed is thicker than 50 mm.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3.2 Wall Render

Refer to section A4-10, clause 3.0 for general requirement of render materials for
walls.
3.4 Waterproofing Systems: Membranes
3.4.1 Liquid Applied Membranes

3.4.1.1 Bituminous
Bituminous liquid applied membranes to comply with SS 133.
Non-Bituminous liquid applied membranes to be of the following types. Submit to the
SO, suitable proprietary products and submit relevant technical literatures, standards
referred to and product specifications.
a. Rubber-based systems
b. Polyurethane systems
3.4.2 Sheet Membranes

Sheet membranes to be of the following types and to comply with SS 374 unless
otherwise agreed:
a. Bituminous
i. Self-Adhesive
ii. Torch-On
b. Thermoplastic
3.4.3 Flexible Cementitious Membrane

Submit to the SO, suitable proprietary products and relevant technical literatures,
standards referred to and product specifications.
3.5 Waterproofing Systems: Waterproof Screed

Minimum 20 mm thick, comply with SS CP 82.
Where required these shall be proprietary pre-packed product, organic or inorganic.
Refer to clause 3.1 for product(s) specified for this project if any.
3.6 Waterproofing Systems: Auxiliary Components
3.6.1 Membrane Reinforcement

Membranes reinforcement shall comply with SS 133 and SS 374 unless otherwise
agreed. The following materials may be used:
a. Polyester Film with Glass Fibre Matt
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
b. Perforated Fibre Glass Matt

c. Non-woven Polyester Fabric
3.6.2 Slip Sheet

Submit to the SO, suitable product of the following materials:
a. Polyester Geotextile Fabric overlaid with Polyethylene sheeting
b. Polypropylene
c. PVC sheeting
3.6.3 Pressure seals

Pre-drilled extruded aluminium with head recess to allow for the formation of a
suitably shaped sealant joint. Submit to the SO, suitable product.
3.7 Waterproofing Systems: Primers and Bonding Compounds
3.7.1 Primer
Primer shall be proprietary type, compatible with the membrane used and does not
affect metal fittings, PVC and other plastics, and recommended for the intended
purpose by the membrane manufacturer, to be submitted to the SO.
3.7.2 Bonding Compounds

Unless otherwise agreed, use oxidised bitumen as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer for the conditions and type of surface.
3.8 Waterproofing Systems: Materials for Joints

Sealant materials use for joints shall be approved Silicone, Polyurethane or
Polysulphide, complying with SS CP 82.
3.8.2 Sealants for use in Water

Where there is permanent contact with water, sealants shall be Polyurethane or
Polysulphide, to be submitted to the SO.
3.8.3 Sealants for use in Traffic Loads

Use high modulus sealants in these conditions, to be submitted to the SO.
3.8.4 Gaskets
Natural rubber compounds protected by a synthetic rubber skin. If special properties
such as resistance to oils are desired, synthetic rubber and plastics materials have to
be specifically formulated for the intended use. Gaskets can be solid or hollow
sections of various profiles formed from cellular or non-cellular material or
combinations of these materials or sections. Submit suitable product to the SO.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.8.5 Sealing strips

Sealing strips to be mastic strips and impregnated or coated cellular strips, complying
with SS CP 82.
3.8.6 Joint fillers

Joint filler such as cellular plastics and rubbers shall comply with SS CP 82.
3.8.7 Baffles
Materials for baffles shall comply with SS CP 82.
3.9 Surfacing Materials
3.9.1 Topping Screed

Topping screed shall be cement/sand and proprietary additives and achieve a fall of
1:80 unless otherwise indicated in the drawings. Provide galvanised steel mesh
reinforcement when the screed is thicker than 50 mm.
3.9.2 Reinforced Concrete Topping

Unless otherwise specified this shall be grade 25 concrete with coarse aggregate not
exceeding 14mm, reinforced with steel reinforcement as indicated in the drawings.
For material requirement refer to structural specifications.
Submit suitable joints and joint filler material to the SO.
3.9.3 Surface Tiling

Refer to section A4-40 “Internal Tiling”, clause 3.2 for general requirement of
materials.
Refer to clause 3.1 for type of tiles selected for the project.
3.10 Drainage
For requirements of waste pipes, valves and fittings refer to the drawings and
mechanical specifications.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP

Carry out the works in accordance with the method of works, as submitted to the SO.
Ensure construction will achieve the design as set out in the approved shop and
drawings.

Co-ordinate the waterproofing works with all interfacing works packages and trades
to ensure correct setting out and positioning of all penetrations, attachments, and
other constituent materials and elements.
4.1.3 Handling and Hoisting

Handle and hoist assemblies carefully, at all stages to ensure that sections and
finishes are not damaged, and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.2 Preparation
4.2.1 Slope to Fall

Grade all substrate to a fall of 1:80 towards drainage outlets, either by tilting the RC
structural base slab or by means of screeding. Refer to work section A4-30, clause
4.0 for general requirements on workmanship for screeding.
4.2.2 Render to Walls

Flush point mortar joints and render walls with cement/sand mix to extent of
waterproofing application. Refer to work section A4-10, clause 4.0 for general
requirements on workmanship for rendering.
4.2.3 Surface Preparation

Prepare all horizontal and vertical surfaces, to which membrane shall be applied
(including elevations, upstands, curbs, and protrusions), ensuring that the substrates
shall be clean, dry, smooth, free from honeycombs, sharp protrusions, voids, laitance,
dust, loose material, sand particles, paint, oil, incompatible curing agent or any other
contaminates, unwanted particles, and other defects.
4.2.3.1 Moisture Content Test
Use a moisture meter to carry out a moisture content test to verify that the moisture
content of the substrate is within the product specific tolerance, suitable for the
application of waterproofing membrane.
4.2.4 Cracks
Seal all cracks and movement joints, with reinforcement and sealant, and allow to
cure. Repair all structural cracks to SO’s approval.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.2.5 Chamfering of Corners

Provide fillet beads to chamfer all 90 degree corners (such as those formed by RC
deck to wall, RC deck to curb etc.), reinforce, seal, and allow to dry or cure. Provide
50 x 50mm triangular beads from sealants or mortar.
4.2.6 Priming
Apply primer to substrate, ensuring full coverage and allow to dry prior to application
of membrane.
4.3 Application of Membranes
4.3.1 General Requirements

4.3.1.1 Extent of Waterproofing
Apply waterproofing membrane to the entire floor of the wet area and turn up every
wall to a minimum height of 300 mm from the finished floor level. In bath and shower
areas, apply waterproofing membrane to a height of at least 1800 mm from the
finished floor level and width of1500 mm for all walls of the enclosure.
4.3.1.2 Dressing of Membrane
Dress membrane over penetrations and attachments, and down into floor outlets.
4.3.1.3 Perimeter of Membrane
Mechanically secure pressure seal at all edge conditions, changes of plane, curb
flashings, upstands, etc.
Lay a strip of reinforced membrane at the edge of the horizontal plane and
mechanically fasten.
Dress membrane over all perimeter profiles and bond to substrate and to secured
perimeter reinforcing strip.
4.3.2 Application of Liquid Applied Membranes

Where liquid applied membranes consist of two formulations (one for horizontal and
one for vertical application), determine the correct formulation prior to application.
For two components (two part) systems, ensure that the compounds are accurately
4.3.2.1 Bituminous
Where required, apply a proprietary recommended primer.
Apply the bituminous liquid applied membrane onto all prepared and primed surfaces,
using brush, roller, spray, or squeegee, in accordance with the following product
specific requirements.
b. WFT per Coat
12
Version 1.0
NPQS

Where reinforcement is required, apply polyester reinforcement fabric over the
membrane, making sure that there is no entrapment of air in between.
Where require, apply a proprietary recommended primer.
Apply the non-bituminous liquid applied membrane onto all prepared and primed
surfaces to be waterproofed, using roller, spray, brush, trowel, or squeegee, in
b. WFT per Coat
4.3.3 Application of Sheet Membranes

4.3.3.1 Bituminous: Self-Adhesive
Plan the installation of the self-adhesive sheet membrane to avoid joins at corners
and penetrations.
Install the membrane from lowest point to the highest point of a surface to ensure that
laps are self-flashing to facilitate shedding water.
Install the membrane, by bonding the membrane to the prepared and primed
substrates.
Do not allow entrapment of air, bubble or wrinkles.
membrane.
Lay a proprietary recommended slip sheet over the entire membrane surface, if the
protection course is a RC topping slab.
4.3.3.2 Bituminous: Torch-On
Plan the installation of the torch-on sheet membrane to avoid joins at corners and
penetrations.
Install the membrane on to prepared and primed substrates by torch bonding.
Do not overheat through to the top surface of the sheet.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
Seal all exposed perimeter edges.

membrane.
Lay a proprietary recommended slip sheet over the entire membrane surface, if the
protection course is a RC topping slab.
4.3.3.3 Thermoplastic: Adhesive Bonding
Bond the membrane to prepared and primed surfaces with a proprietary adhesive or
a bonding agent recommended by the membrane manufacturer. Lay sheets on a
continuous even coating of adhesive, allowed to dry until tacky, taking care to avoid
wrinkles and any stretching of the membrane. Ensure there is a full bond over the
whole surface, with no air pockets.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to protect the membrane prior to application of
ballast or other surfacing materials.
4.3.4 Application of Flexible Cementitious Membrane

Where the flexible cementitious membrane consist of two formulations (one for
horizontal and one for vertical application), determine the correct formulation prior to
application.
For two components (two part) systems, ensure that the components are accurately
Mechanically mix the cementitious waterproofing components to the consistency
required.
Pre-water the surfaces to which the membrane shall be applied.
Do not apply the membrane onto a hot substrate.
Apply the flexible cementitious membrane onto prepared and primed surfaces, from
lowest point to the highest point, using brush, trowel, squeegee, roller or spray, in
b. WFT per Coat
Allow the applied flexible cementitious membrane surfaces to cure.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
Protect the applied flexible cementitious membrane surfaces from rain, ponding of
water, wind and direct sunlight, with plastic sheeting, during the curing period.
4.3.5 Surfacing
Where required, apply a 20 mm thick waterproof screed over the membrane.
Apply surfacing material over the waterproof screed.
Where tiles are laid directly onto the waterproof screed or membrane, use a
compatible proprietary adhesive recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
Where the surfacing material is a RC topping slab or ballast materials, add a
proprietary recommended slip sheet in between the membrane and surfacing
material.
4.4 Waterproof Screed

Apply strictly to manufacturer’s recommendations and accepted methods.
4.5 Protection
Ensure that from completion of the waterproofing works until Practical Completion:
a. The waterproofed area is not used as a working platform unless fully protected to
the satisfaction of the SO.
b. Do not allow petroleum based solvents or other chemicals harmful to bitumen to
come into contact with the waterproofed surface.
c. Protect the waterproofed areas from damage by subsequent building operations.
4.5.1 Wet Weather

Provide temporary covers and drainage as required to keep unfinished areas dry.
Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary
If unavoidable wetting of the construction does occur, take prompt action to minimise
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
5. SUBMISSIONS / VERIFICATION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Waterproofing system
I. Manufacturer, supplier and proprietary brand and technical details of the

membrane being used
II. Composition of the waterproofing system and other associated
components
b. Membrane applicator
I. Name
II. Information of contracts, current or completed over last 5 years and details
of Quality Control Procedures adopted

SO. Include at least the following information:
a. Sequence of Construction
b. Application of waterproofing system
c. Protection of the works
5.1.3 Shop Drawings

Prepare shop drawings, particularly include:
a. Setting out Plans, including the following information:
I. Location of services and protrusions

II. Layout of membrane
III. Layout of surface finishes
b. Coordination Drawings, showing integration of the following items:
I. Drainage and mechanical services system

II. Surface finishes
c. Typical sectional details of:
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
I. Composition of the waterproofing system

II. Flashing at upstands
III. Flashing of Services and protrusions
IV. Termination of Surfacing materials
V. Dressing of waterproofing membrane at floor traps and wastes
Do not commence installation until shop and installation drawings have been
reviewed and permission to proceed has been obtained from the SO.
5.1.4 Material Certification

Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturer(s) of the following materials /
components, certifying that the respective materials are of the correct grade,
specified.
a. Waterproofing membrane
b. Sealant materials

a. Cleaning of drain outlets
5.1.6 Warranty

5.2.1 Mock-ups
Prepare 1 x 1 metre panel sample of each internal floor and wall waterproofing type,
clearly showing compositional materials and components from structural slab to
finished surface. Include a sample of the floor /wall junction, the flashing around a
50mm diameter pipe and the drain outlet.
Keep at least one panel of each respective sample on site, for use as a site quality
standard for the remainder of the works.
Refer to the PSD for additional mock-up requirement if any.
5.3 Inspection and Tests
5.3.1 Inspections
Carry out inspections at the following stages, ensuring that the work is carried out in a
proper and orderly manner:
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Preparation of the building substrate, ready for the application of the

waterproofing membrane.
b. Application of the waterproofing membrane.
c. Commencement of any required testing, on or off site.
5.3.2 On Site Water Test

Carry out on site water tests at the following stages to verify serviceability and water-
tightness, in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations and
specifications.
a. Upon completion of final coat of membrane.
b. Upon completion of surfacing material installation.
Do not conduct on-site water test until the membrane is cured and set.
Inform the SO 5 days prior to the tests being carried out
Carry out the water tests by blocking up the drain holes and flooding the floor to a
depth of 25mm above the highest point of the floor for 24 hours and the running of
the shower head onto each of the tiled walls for 15minutes.
Any areas showing water penetration through the floor, signs of seepage or other
defects, shall be made good. Submit a method statement and remedial measures to
the SO. Re-test the area after the remedial works have been completed.
18
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
A5-10 Metal Roof
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3
3. MATERIALS 7
3.1 Metal Roof System 7
3.3 Metal Sheeting 7
3.5 Roof Deck (Liner) 8
3.6 Sk yl igh t s 8
3.7 Acc es so ri es 8
3.8 Pu r lin s 8
3.9 Underlay and Insulation System 8
3.10 Rainwater Goods 8
3.11 Safety and Maintenance 8
3.10 Cavity Barriers
8
4. WORKMANSHIP 7
4.1 General Workmanship Requirement 10
4.2 Supporting Members 10
4.3 Underlay and Insulation System 10
4.4 Installation of Metal Roof Sheeting 12
4.5 Sk yl ig h ts 12
4.6 Installation of Rainwater Goods 12
4.7 Protection 12

5.1 Submissions 13
5.3 Inspection 14
5.4 On-Site Tests 14
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
1. GENERAL
Read this Section with G01-010 "General Requirements" and all other contract
documents.
1.1 Scope
This Section covers the requirements for the construction of metal roofing systems
including metal sheets, finishes and insulation. The following types of metal sheets are
covered:
(a) Profiled Metal Sheets
(b) Standing Seams

A5-01 Structural Steelwork
1.3 Standards, Codes, Regulations and Technical References
1.3.1 Standards
Specification. Alternative Standards and Codes may be submitted to the SO, provided it
can be demonstrated that the alternative Standards and Codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All Standards and Codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted. In the event that the standards or
codes are partially superseded or have become obsolete, refer to the current edition or
the approved substitution for the relevant clauses
Singapore Standards
SS EN 1991-1-1 Actions on structures – General actions - Densities, self-weight

and Imposed loads for buildings
SS EN 1991-1-4 Actions on structures, Part 1-4: General actions – Wind actions
NA to SS EN 1991-1- 4 Singapore National Annex to Eurocode 1 – Actions on
structure. Part 1-4: General actions – Wind actions
SS EN 1998-1 Design of structures f or earthquake resistance – Part 1:
General rules, seismic actions and rules for buildings
SS CP 7 Code of practice for structural use of timber
SS 72 Specification for treatment of timber and plywood with
copper/chrome/arsenic wood preservatives
SS 141 Specification for unplasticised PVC pipe for cold water services
and industrial uses
SS 525 Code of practice for drainage of roofs
SS 555 Series Protection against lightning
SS 572 Code of practice for the use of timber in buildings
SS 631 Specification for metal roofing system
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Other Standards
BS EN 363 Personal fall protection equipment. Personal fall protection
systems
BS EN 485-2 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Part 2: Sheet, strip and
plate. Mechanical properties
plate. Tolerances on dimensions and form for hot-rolled
products
plate. Tolerances on shape and dimensions for cold-rolled
products
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Chemical composition and
form of wrought products – Part 3: Chemical composition and
form of products
BS EN 1396 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Coil coated sheet and strip
for general applications. Specifications
BS EN 10088 Stainless steels
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip – Tolerances
on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10223 Steel wire and wire products for fencing and netting
BS EN 13162 Thermal insulation products for buildings – Factory made
mineral wool (MW) products. Specification
BS EN 13501-1 Fire classification of construction products and building
elements – Part 1: Classification using data from reaction to fire
tests
BS EN 13501-5 Fire classification of construction products and building
elements– Part 5: Classification using data from external fire
exposure to roofs test
BS EN 13523 Coil coated metals – Test methods
BS EN 13823 Reaction to fire tests for building products – Building products
excluding floorings exposed to the thermal attack by a single
burning item
BS ISO 4998 Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated and zinc-iron alloy-coated
carbon steel sheet of structural quality
BS ISO 9364 Steel sheet, 55 % aluminium-zinc alloy-coated by the
continuous hot-dip process, of commercial, drawing and
structural qualities
BS 460 Cast iron rainwater goods – Specification
BS 1449-1.1 Steel plate, sheet and strip – Carbon and carbon-manganese
plate, sheet and strip – General specification
BS 6399-3 Code of practice for imposed roof loads
BS 8000-0 Workmanship on construction sites – Introduction and general
principles
EN ISO 1182 Reaction to fire tests for products – Non-combustibility test
EN ISO 1716 Reaction to fire tests for products – Determination of gross heat
of combustion (calorific value)
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
EN ISO 11925-2 Reaction to fire tests - Ignitability of products subjected to direct

impingement of flame – Part 2: Single-flame source test
ISO 834 Fire-resistance tests – Elements of building construction
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings
AS 1397 Continuous hot-dip metallic coated steel sheet and strip -

Coatings of zinc and zinc alloyed with aluminium and
magnesium
AS 1530 Methods for fire tests on building materials, components and
structures
AS 1562.1 Design and installation of metal roof and wall cladding, Part 1:
Metal
AS 3566.1 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries,
Part 1: General requirements and mechanical properties
AS 3715 Metal finishing – Thermoset powder coating for architectural
applications of aluminium and aluminium alloys
AS 4040.1 Methods of testing sheet roof and wall cladding – Resistance to
concentrated loads
AS/NZS 2728 Prefinished/prepainted sheet metal products for interior/exterior
building applications – Performance requirements
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C1371 Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of
Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable
Emissometers
ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials
ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests Of Roof Coverings
ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials
ASTM E413 Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
ASTM E903 Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and
Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres
ASTM E1980 Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of
Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces
AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on
Aluminium Extrusions and Panels
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
1.3.2 Regulations
Refer to the following regulations for compliance in carrying out the Works”
 Building and Construction Authority â Approved Document ("Approved Document")
 Building and Construction Authority â Building Control Regulations
 Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings ("Fire Code")
 Code for Environmental Sustainability of Buildings
 Code of Practice on Environmental Health
 Code on Envelope Thermal Performance for Buildings
 Guidelines on Envelope Thermal Transfer Value for Buildings
The above regulations refer to the latest edition (including any amendments) that are
currently in use.
Refer to the following technical references for guidance in carrying out the Works:
Building and Construction Authority â CONQUAS 21 Enhancement Series, Good
Industry Practices Guide Books
Chartered Institution of Building Services â Guide A: Environmental Design
1.4 Trade Preambles

The design intent of the metal roof system(s) is indicated in the drawings and type(s)
specified in Section A05- 010: Clause:3.1.
Engage qualified personnel to carry out and submit the following items to the Architect.
1.4.1.1 Design development
Shop drawings with all necessary details, including interfaces with other works.

Method statements for the carrying out the Works, including setting out, fixing and
installation of metal roofing and related components, waterproofing, etc. Take into account
the performance requirements as set out in Part 2
1.4.1.3 Temporary Supports

Design of the appropriate temporary supports (including support of personnel working on
the roof and roof loading resulting from the installation process), to ensure the roof
installation is stable throughout the construction, endorsed by a PE (Structural).

Names of manufacturer(s) and product information.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof

(a) Roof structure
(b) Skylights
(c) External masonry and cladding
(d) Lightning protection
(e) Services penetrations
(f) Internal masonry and partitions
(g) Ceilings
(h) External painting and coating
(i) Any equipment located on the roof, e.g. photovoltaic cells panels
1.4.3 Provision of Spare Materials
Deliver to site in appropriate protective packaging marked for identification, and store
where directed by the Architect, the following spare components and materials for future
replacement and repair:
Prepare and submit a quality control plan to the Architect.
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide the following warranties in accordance with the specimen warranty, or otherwise
as approved agreed with the SO:
Item of Works to be Warranted Period of Warranty Required

Roofing sheet, capping, flashing & fascia 10 years

Prepare and submit a maintenance manual covering all metal cladding systems (including all
components and accessories). Refer to Section G01-010:Clause:1.4.5 for details.
Include the following information in the maintenance manual:
(a) An outline description of the completed roof system.
(b) A detailed description of specific materials and components with product names,
types, serial numbers, etc.
(c) Cleaning methods for roof surface, roof and gutters to be cleaned every 6 months.
(d) Roof flashings and sealant to be inspected every 2 years.
(e) Fall arrest systems to be inspected at intervals not exceeding 2 months.
(f) Safety advice for maintenance personnel
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof

The following definitions and abbreviations apply within this Section.
1.5.1 Definitions
1.5.1.1 U-value
Thermal transmittance
1.5.2 Abbreviations
1. 5.2 .2 BM T
Base metal thickness
1.5. 2.3 ETT V
Envelope Thermal Transfer Value
1.5. 2.4 PUR
Polyurethane
1.5.2.5 RETV
Residential Envelope Transmittance Value
1.5.2.6 RTTV
Roof Thermal Transfer Value (applicable for roofs with skylights)
1.5.2.7 RWDP
Rainwater down pipe
2.1 Contractor s Brief
When carrying out the proposals as set out in Section A05-010: Clause:1.4.1, take
account of the following requirements:
2.1.1 Structural
2.1.1.1 Dead Loads
The loads shall be supported and transferred to the main building structure at the
appropriate locations as indicated in the drawings.
2.1.1.2 Live Loads
Unless otherwise specified, account for the live loads as stipulated in the Approved
Document, and additional requirements of other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over
the Works, if any.
2.1.1.3 Wind Loads
Allow for wind loads computed based on SS EN 1991-1 to 4 with a basic wind speed
of 35 m/s, and as recommended in SS 631.
Allow for all thermal stress and other structural movement.
2.1.1.5 Structural Fixing
Structural fixings shall be able to resist the worst combination of the applied loads, as
well as foreseeable vibration transmitted to the roofing system.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
2.1.1.6 Maintenance Loads

For accessible areas, allow for maintenance loadings, including loadings from personnel,
plant and equipment. Include the dynamic effects of such plants and equipment.
Take into account, movements from secondary support structures, including vibration and
thermal movement from M&E equipment and related works.
Comply with the requirements of the Fire Code and additional requirements of other statutory
authorities having jurisdiction over the Works if any.
2.1.3 Functional
2.1.3.1 Air Infiltration
The metal roofing system shall be sufficiently air tight such as to prevent undesirable noise
resulting from wind movements.
2.1.3.2 Invasion of Pests
Gaps and openings shall be sealed off for bird-proofing and for disallowing the invasion of
pests.
2.1.4 Environmental
Comply with the following: ETTV shall not exceed 50W/m2
The U-value of the roof shall not exceed the limit prescribed in the table below.
Weight Group Weight Range (kg/m2) Maximum thermal transmittance (Wim2K)

Light Under 50 0.5
Medium 50 to 230 0.8
Heavy Over 230 1.2
2.1.4.2 Rainwater Drainage

Comply with the requirements of SS 525 for roof drainage, and that of other statutory
authorities having jurisdiction over the Works if any.
2.1.4.3 Watertightness
The completed roof is to be impenetrable to water and not give rise to any observable
dampness on visible surfaces under normal environmental conditions expected.
2.1.4.4 Durability
Provide necessary corrosion protection to roofing sheets, components and
accessories, appropriate to the location, use and design life of the building.
2.1.5 Acoustic Integrity
2.1.5.1 Sound Insulation
Attain acoustic rating as specified in Section A05-010: Clause:3.1.
2.1.6 Maintenance
Comply with the Workplace Safety and Health Act (Cap. 354A) and relevant safety
requirements of statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the Works.
The roof system shall be maintainable and replaceable in parts or whole
from the exterior. Allow routine cleaning to be conducted with minimal
disruption to the building occupants.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
3 MATERIALS
3.1 Metal Roof System
The metal roofing system may be assembled on site with the individual components, or
supplied and installed as a composite system incorporating one or more components.
The metal roofing (MR) system(s) shall consist of the following types:
Type: Metal Deck Roofing

Clause
Item Requirements
Reference
Metal Sheeting . .
- Manufacturer Contractor to propose to Architect's approval .
Hi-strength ribbed profile with min 700 mm cover width and 45

- Form of Sheeting mm min rib height, capable of allowing min falls of 3 degree, in .
clean pre-coated steel (colour to Architect’s selection).
- Metallic Coating AZ200 .
- BMT Min. 0.42mm .
- Min End Lap Width To manufacturer's details .
Protective Coating . .
- Exposed Side Super Polyester 20µ m (max. 20% reflectance) .
- Exposed Side Colour Colour to Architect's selection .
- Reversed Side Polyester 10µ m .
- Reversed Side Colour Colour to Architect's selection

- Daylight Reflectance Specular reflectance shall not exceed 10%
AS 3566 Class 4 fasteners with non-conductive EPDM washer.

- Fixings and Fasteners
Concealed fastening system to manufacturer’s detail.
- Profile fillers/ Rib End System to be used for all end and expansion joints, to
Stops manufacturer's details
- Sealants Neutral-cure silicone sealant to Manufacturers details
Sound dampening coating to be applied to underside of metal
- Acoustic Treatment:
sheet
- Underlayment and
Insulation System
- Waterproof Underlay
High tensile strength radiant and vapour barrier manufactured
with a high density core with cross linked polymer
reinforcements. The self-supporting foil is able to span up to 1.4
meter lengths across purlins. All metallic surfaces shall be
- Radiant/Vapour Barrier uniformly coated so that the low emissivity properties of the
surface are not harmed by atmospheric contaminates.
Tensile Strength (MD): 4.8 kN/m Elongation (MD): 101.5 % Tear
Resistance (MD): ≥2.0 N
- Thermal Insulation 50mm thick non-combustible, light weight rockwool insulation

- Wire Mesh Support
- Acoustic Treatment: Sound dampening coating to be applied to underside of metal

sheet
Rainwater Goods
- General Flashing
- Penetration Flashing
- Gutter Material and

Profile
- Gutter Support Material
- Gutter Covering Material
- RWDP Material and

Profile
- Holder Bat Material . .
- Miscellaneous
- .
Components
Flashing, ridge caps, valleys, fascia etc. shall be of similar material
- Component(s) .
and colour to match the selected roof material
- Fall Arrest System See table below (Horizontal Lifeline System) .
- Holder Bat Material . .

NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Type: Horizontal Lifeline System

Clause
Item Requirements
Reference
Lifeline The anchor and cable systems shall be a horizontal lifeline system
that allows continuous uninterrupted access to all areas of a roof.
.
It can span up to 12m between anchors and provides continuous
hands-free access for all users of the fall protection system.
Anchor Modular multi-directional system design which activates and absorbs
energy no matter which orientation the load is applied, providing total
freedom and flexibility in system design.
Unique energy absorbing system reduces the overturning
.
movement on the bolts by 50%, enabling the use of fewer fasteners,
therefore, reducing the number of roof penetrations. Conforms to
EN 795, OSHA, ANSI, AS/NZS standards and has been tested to
both EN795 Class A and C standards
- Base Plate The base plate design incorporates several fixing holes to allow
the same plate to be fitted on different roof types Approx. .
405x405mm in size.
- Components A. Anchor
B. Hex swage tensioner
C. 8mm 7x7 SS cable
D. Traveler
E. Anchor intermediate guide .
F. Anchor 90deg corner

G. Hex swage toggle
H. Baseplate
I. Anchor module end
- Accessories 2 sets of stainless steel travelers .
2 sets of Double Lanyard (energy absorber, scaffold hook –

comply with EN 355-354) .
2 sets of min. 20m Adjustable Lanyard (comply with EN 355)

.
2 sets of Full Body Harness (front & back attachment, leg
.
adjustment – comply with EN 361)
- PE Calculation & The lifeline design shall be in accordance with the lifeline specialist’s
Endorsement requirement. A calculation of the lifeline design and system shall be
.
prepared by a PE. The lifeline design and system shall be endorsed
by the PE.

Where ancillary products and accessories and miscellaneous components are not specified,
recommend types by the metal sheeting manufacturers, for the intended purpose.
Components, particularly metal sheeting, gutters, down pipes, capping, and flashing shall
be in the longest lengths as practical to minimize lapping, joints and wastage.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof

Take into account the compatibility of different materials used in or near the roofing system:
(a) Prevent contact between incompatible materials/components, particularly contact
between incompatible metals, and metals with alloys to avoid bimetallic corrosion.
(b) Prevent contact with green or chemically treated timber, wet or dry concrete, and soil.
(c) Materials use for separation of dissimilar materials/components shall have the
following quality:
(i) Non-conducting, non-compressible and non-water absorbing.
(ii) Compatible with elements with which materials come into contact.
3.3 Metal Sheeting
To SS 631.
3.3.1 Materials
3.3.1.1 Steel
To BS 1449-1.1.
3.3.1.2 Stainless steel
To BS EN 10088. Grad e 316 shall be used, unless otherwise specified in Section
A5-010: Clause:3.1.
3.3.1.3 Aluminium
To BS EN 485-2, 3, 4.
3.3.2 Form of Sheeting
Acceptable forms are as follows:
(a) Corrugated sheet in sinusoidal or trapezoidal profiles
(b) Standing seams
(c) Concealed fix profile
3.3.3 Base Metal Thickness
As specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1.
3.3.4 Pitch
Pitch shall be as indicated in drawings and shall comply with the minimum roof pitch

3.4.1 Metallic Coatings to Steel Roofing Sheet
Steel roof sheets shall be supplied with one of the following hot-dipped coatings, as
specified in Section A5- 010: Clause:3.1:
(a) Aluminium-zinc alloy coated to BS ISO 9364 or AS 1397 and AS/NZS 2728.
(b) Aluminium coated to BS EN 10143.
(c) Zinc coated to BS ISO 4998 or ASTM A653.
3.4.2 Anodizing to Aluminium Roofing Sheet
To be 25 micron thick to AS 1231.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
3.4.3 Paint Coatings

3.4.3.1 PVF2 Coating
To AAMA 2605.
Resin content shall be minimum 70%. Minimum thickness 25 microns.
To AS 3715.
Minimum thickness shall be 50 microns.
3.4.3.3 Silicone Polyester or Silicone Modified Polyester
To manufacturer’s recommendation to satisfy Section A5-010: Clause:2.1.4.4.
3.4.3.4 Polyurethane
To manufacturer’s recommendation to satisfy Clause Section A5-010: Clause:2.1.4.4.
3.4.4 Colour and Daylight Reflectance
To be as specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1, and comply with BCA Approved
Document.
3.5 Roof Deck (Liner)
Use proprietary metal sheeting recommended by the manufacturer.
3.6 Skylights
Refer to Section A05-040 "Glass Roof System" for general requirement of materials for
skylights.
3.7 Accessories
3.7.1 Fixings, Brackets, Screws and Washers
Be in accordance with SS 631, AS 3566.1 and roof sheeting manufacturer’s
recommendations. Take into account design life of the roofing, and use fasteners of
similar life expectancy to roofing sheet.
Use minimum class 3 fasteners, and class 4 in moderate to severe marine environments.
3.7.2 Profile Fillers and Rib End Stops
Be in accordance with roof sheeting manufacturer’s recommendations and match the profile
of metal sheeting selected.
3.7.3 Weather Seals and Air Seals
Sealants shall be to manufacturer’s recommendation and shall be non-staining and
compatible with the other components.
Sealant geometry (and cross sections) to be designed to accommodate the anticipated
substrate movements.
Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, non-structural sealants shall be either one of
the following:
(a) low modulus silicone (exposed or concealed)

(b) polyurethane (concealed)
Do not use acrylic sealants for frame seals or smoke flashings.
Do not use acid curing sealants.
Backing rods shall not adhere to the sealant and to be compatible with the substrate. The
colour of all visible sealants shall be to the Architect’s approval.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
3.7.4 Acoustic Treatment

Refer to Section A5-010: Clause:3.1 for acoustic treatment material, if any.
To achieve rating specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1 when tested to ASTM E90
and ASTM E413.
3.8 Purlins
Refer to Section C05-010 "Structural Steelwork" and C08-010 "Structural Timberwork".
3.9 Underlay and Insulation System

3.9.1 Waterproof Underlay
Waterproof underlay shall be one of the following materials or similar impervious sheet
materials of adequate puncture resistance.
(a) Double-sided reflective foil laminates
(b) Waterproofing felts
3.9.2 Vapour Barrier
Vapour barrier shall be one of the following materials or similar impervious sheet materials
of adequate puncture resistance.
(a) Double-sided reflective foil laminates
(b) Waterproofing felts
3.9.3 Thermal Insulation
3.9.3.1 Double-sided Reflective Foil Laminates
Where double-sided reflective foil laminate is expected to perform as a waterproof underlay
(or vapour barrier) as well, the laminate shall be subject to the requirement of these items.
Double-sided foil shall comply as follows:
(a) BS 476-7, class 1 and BS 476, part 6, class 0
(b) Reflectivity to ASTM C1371, min 95%
(c) Emissivity to ASTM C1371, min 5%
(d) Water Vapour Transmission rate to ASTM E 96, 0.01g/m2/h
3.9.3.2 Mineral Wool
Be in accordance with BS EN 13162.
3.9.3.3 Other Types of Insulations
Other types of insulations shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) Not to contain organic components which may be subject to volatilization and
condensation
(b) Non-combustible
(c) Rot and vermin resistant
(d) Does not degrade in moisture
3.9.4 Wire Mesh Support
Where required, support for roof underlay shall be hexagonal or square wire mesh to BS EN
10223, complying to the following requirements:
(a) Mesh shall consist of minimum 1.2 mm galvanised wire with tensile strength
minimum 450 MPa.
(b) Does not sag when stretched between supports.
(c) Rigidly connected at junction without welded joints.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
3.10 Rainwater Goods

Be in accordance with SS 525 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.10.1 Flashing
All flashings and capping to have a minimum BMT of 0.55 mm, with the same coating
system and profile as the selected metal sheeting, and comply with SS 631.
3.10.2 Gutters and Gutter Support
As specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1. Use the following:
(a) Stainless steel to BS EN 10088 grade 1.4401 (or AISI 316)
(b) Galvanised mild steel in accordance with structural specifications
3.10.3 Wire Mesh Gutter Covering
Be in accordance with SS 631. Provide where indicated on drawings or as specified in
Section A05- 010:Clause:3.1, or otherwise necessary to prevent objects from falling into
the gutter which may cause water stagnation and become potential breeding habitat for
mosquitoes. Use the following:
(b) Galvanised mild steel mesh to BS EN 10223
Ductile Iron Pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with BS 460. uPVC pipes and
fittings shall be in accordance with SS 141.
3.10.5 Holder Bats
Use the following:
(b) Galvanised mild steel in accordance with structural specifications
3.11 Safety and Maintenance

Fall protection shall comply with the Workplace Safety and Health Act (Cap.354A), and
relevant regulations.
3.11.1 Maintenance Walkways
Provide maintenance walkway where shown on drawings.
3.11.2 Fall Arrest System
Comply with SS 528.
Fall arrest system(s) shall be as shown in drawings, or specified in Section A5-010:
Clause:3.1, to satisfy the purpose of carrying out periodical maintenance and cleaning,
and to be capable of taking the load specified in Section A5-010: Clause:2.1.1.6.
3.12 Cavity Barriers
Provide cavity barriers at concealed spaces in the roof space, where indicated in the
drawings, and comply with the Fire Code.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
4 WORKMANSHIP
Carry out the Works in accordance with the method statement as submitted to the
Architect. Ensure that construction will achieve the design as set out in the approved
shop drawings.
Co-ordinate the works with all interfacing works packages and trades to ensure
correct setting out and positioning of all penetrations, attachments, and other
constituent materials and elements.
4.1.3 Storage, Handling and Hoisting
4.1.3.1 Storage
Roof sheeting shall be stacked neatly, protected from rain or condensation with waterproof
covers and stored in a dry area, clear off the ground.
4.1.3.2 Handling and Hoisting
Handle and hoist assemblies carefully, at all stages to ensure that sections and finishes
are not damaged, and are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.1.4 Finished Tolerances of Systems
4.1.4.1 Fabrication
Linear dimensions: Â±2 mm

Squareness (diagonal): Â±3 mm
Flatness: Â±0.5 mm in 300 mm
Joint widths shall vary by not more than 2 mm or 10%. Adjacent "flush" surfaces separated
by "hair line" joints to step by not more than 0.5 mm.
4.1.4.2 Installation
Linear dimensions: Â±2 mm
Level: Â±2 mm
Position at floor or ceiling: Â±2 mm from grid
Verticality: Â±H/500 or < 5 mm between floors and ceiling
Steps in plane: Â±2 mm
Steps out of plane: Â±1 mm
Camber .
Bow .
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
4.2 Supporting Members
Install supporting members in accordance with structural drawings and specifications.
Comply with SS 631 and take into account the following:
(a) The spacing of supporting members is within tolerances recommended by the roof
sheeting manufacturer.
(b) Any vertical or horizontal misalignment at the abutting ends does not exceed 2 mm.
(c) The top of the supporting members is substantially in a plane parallel to the specified
roof pitch.
4.3 Underlay and Insulation System
4.3.1 Waterproof Underlay
Lay the waterproof underlay to comply with the following requirements:
(a) In direction of falls
(b) Fixed to structural support
(c) Allow for drainage of any water to the outside, or into gutter area
(d) End and side laps are at least 150 mm
4.3.2 Vapour Barrier
Locate and lay vapour barrier to comply with SS 631, in accordance with
manufacture’s recommendations, and to prevent interstitial condensation on visible
surfaces. Where condensation is expected, ensure adequate drainage provision is
made.
4.3.3 Thermal Insulation and Wire Mesh Support
Locate and lay thermal insulation and wire mesh support to comply with SS 631 and
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.4 Installation of Metal Roof Sheeting
Carry out the installation of metal roof sheeting, including any roof deck (liner)
materials, to comply with SS 631, in accordance manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where possible, minimize site work by using sheets cut to length in the factory.
Comply with the following requirements.
4.4.1 Laying the Sheeting
Support sheets as near to their ends as practicable, notwithstanding that the sheet
end shall always positively overhang the full width of the supporting surface to
prevent water intrusion by capillary action. Ensure compliance with manufacturer’s
recommended maximum and minimum unsupported end overhang for the sheet.
4.4.2 Fixing of Metal Roof Sheeting
Fix sheeting to manufacturer’s recommendation.
Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, install fasteners normal to the plane
of the roof.
Pay particular attention to combinations of internal and external wind pressures
and frictional drag.
Where non-returnable movement is allowed to take place during fixing, make
provision for anchoring of the sheets.
Give consideration to the anchoring of roofing against movement down the slope due
to vibration and thermal movements.
4.4.2.1 Pierce Fixing
Where pierce fixing is used, always place screws through the crown of a rib, and
adequately seal all fasteners which pierce the roofing to prevent leakage.
4.4.2.2 Concealed Fixing
Use clips provided by the roof sheeting manufacturer.
For steep pitches, pierce fix through each sheet under the flashing or capping,
along the top of the sheets.
4.4.3 Projections
Adequately flash any projections through roofs such as pipes, ducts and conduits
and to approved details.
4.4.4 Vibration Proofing of Fixings
Vibration proof all fixings subject to vibrating loads by the use of locking nuts, locking
washers or other methods approved by the Architect.
4.4.5 Prevention of Bimetallic Corrosion
Prevent corrosion of dissimilar metals in contact from galvanic action by:
(a) separating or isolating the dissimilar metals with separator
(b) appropriate detailing of the overlapping of metal sheets to avoid crevice
corrosion.
4.4.6 Drilling, Piercing and Cutting
When making holes, mask the area around the hole to protect the paint from damage
by swarf. Remove swarf, nails, screws, other metallic particles, etc. immediately after
drilling, piercing and cutting of metal roof sheeting. If swarf becomes stuck to
sheeting, remove without damaging paint coating of the sheeting.
Do not punch holes, unless it can be done without causing local distortions to the
metal roof sheeting.
4.4.7 End and Side Laps
4.4.7.1 Planning
Plan and lay metal roof sheeting to minimize end and side laps. Avoid formation of
laps at roof protrusions and attachments.
4.4.7.2 End Laps
Provide two strips of manufacturer’s recommended profile fillers and sealant, one at
the low end of the lap to prevent capillary and the other at the high end to prevent
condensation from entering the lap. Mechanically fasten when recommended by the
manufacturer.
4.4.7.3 Side Laps
For pierced fastened roof sheeting, form side laps with the lap cavity on top of the
sheet with profile filler or sealant such that any moisture build-up in this cavity can be
drained down the roof slope unobstructed by the filler or sealant.
4.4.8 Sealant Jointing
Apply sealants and jointing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Carry out the following in respect of the sealant jointing works:
(a) Clean and prepare joint surfaces before application and ensure that joints are free
from dust, grease and other contaminants.
(b) Apply jointing material so that joints subject to ingress of water are made watertight and
are in accordance with details in shop drawings approved by the Architect. Ensure
backing rods, when needed, are installed at the correct depths.
(c) Apply sealant on the same day as joint surfaces are cleaned.
NPQS
NPQS
4.5 Skylights A5-10
A5-10 Metal
Metal Roof
Roof
Install skylight(s) in accordance with Section A5-040: Clause:4.
4.6 Installation of Rainwater Goods

Install rainwater goods to comply with SS 525, in accordance with manufacture’s
recommendations, the requirements of ENV and any other statutory authorities
having jurisdiction over the Works.
4.6.1 Flashing
Flash and cap all parts of the roof to prevent water penetration and dampness into
the inner parts of the building, including areas around vent pipes, skylights, ducts,
and all other penetrations, ridges, verges, and along roof slopes that abut walls.
4.6.2 Gutters
(a) Install to required fall, space gutter support at 600 mm centres.
(b) Box gutters shall be continuously supported.
(c) Fix stop ends shall match gutter profile and colour.
(d) Lap all gutters in the direction of flow and seal all joints.
4.6.3 Down Pipes
Space all down pipes at required centres, fit to gutters and fix securely to walls or
columns with holder bats spaced at 1200 mm centres. Seal all joints.
4.7 Protection
4.7.1 Completion of Roof
Ensure that from completion of the roof until contractual completion:
(a) The roof is not used as a working platform unless fully protected to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
(b) Do not allow solvents or other harmful chemical to come into contact with the
roof surface.
(c) Protect the finished roof areas from damage by subsequent building
operations.
4.7.2 Wet Weather
In wet weather, carry out the following:
(a) Provide temporary covers and drainage as required to keep unfinished areas of the
roof dry.
(b) Suspend work in severe or continuously wet weather unless an effective temporary
(c) If unavoidable wetting of the construction occurs, take prompt action to minimize
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
5 VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSION
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Technical Submissions
Include in the construction programme, events for submission of the following
information:
(a) Name of the metal roof manufacturer and all components of the roofing system,
and relevant technical data.
(b) Name of Subcontractor â (if any).
(c) All other submissions specified in this Section.
5.1.1.1 Computation Submissions
Where only performance values are specified, submit computations as follows:
(a) Structural calculations for fixing system
(b) Thermal performance calculation
(c) Sound transmission performance data
(d) Temporary support system calculation (if necessary)
5.1.2.1 Method Statements
Architect. Include at least the following information:
(a) Sequence of construction.
(b) Acceptance of structure and substrate.
(c) Fixing and installation of the roof system.
(d) Method of forming laps, joints and penetrations, and application of sealant
and fillers.
(e) Accommodation of lightning protection systems.
(f) Accommodation of all penetrations and other trades/items which impact the
roof.
Where specified, prepare shop drawings, and include:
(a) Typical and non-typical details of roof system and associated components
including interfaces and flashings with adjacent structure and/or other cladding
elements.
(b) End and side lap details and details at scales agreed with the Architect, of
ridge, eaves, gutters, valley, hips and any changes in roof pitch.
(c) Provision and supports for insulation, underlay and vapour barriers.
(d) Waterproofing of penetration through roof, including lightning protection points
and/or tapes, and vent pipes etc.
(e) Details of roof drainage system
(f) Penetrations to roof
permission to proceed has been obtained from the Architect.
5.1.3 Test Reports and Certificate Submissions

NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Submit relevant test reports and certificates from a recognised Certification Body to
demonstrate compliance with all required material and system characteristics
specified.
(a) Tests
Carry out tests as follows:
Material Test Description
Steel Roof sheeting ASTM E108 Surface Flame Spread (Class 0 or Class A)
Structural support
. .
members
Fasteners . .
BS 476- Part 6 and 7 Fire Propagation and Surface Flame Spread

Radiant/Vapour
ASTM C1371 Reflectivity & Emissivity Water Vapour
Barrier
ASTM E 96 Transmission
EN 13501-1/ BS EN 1182
Insulation Non-Combustibility Thermal Conductivity
ASTM C518
Rain water goods . .
(b) Certificates
Provide certificates as follows:
Roof Sheeting SGBP/Green Label Sustainable Building Product Certification
Radiant Barrier SGBP/Green Label Sustainable Building Product Certification
5.1.4 Quality Control Plan Submissions

Prepare and submit the quality control plan to the Architect prior to starting work.
5.1.5 Warranty
Submit the warranty to the Architect upon completion of the Works, if required under Section
A5- 010: Clause:1.4.5.
Submit maintenance manual on completion of the Works, to Section A5-010:
Clause:1.4.6.

5.2.1 Samples
For each system type specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1, provide samples of each
component to demonstrate compliance with material quality, thickness, finishes and profile.
5.2.2 Mock-Ups
Within the timeframe shown in the construction programme, provide mock-up panel of
sufficient size to obtain agreement on the intended construction. Also include the following
elements, where applicable:
(a) Eaves
(b) Ridge
(c) Edge/gutter
(d) Upstand
(e) Vent pipes / other building services protrusions / penetrations
If approved by the Architect, this mock-up panel may form part of the Works. Provide
additional mock-ups as follows:
Mock-up Requirement
- -
- -
5.3 Inspections
Inform the Architect on completion of the substrate / roof structure and each stage of
installation for each roof system specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1. Proceed to next
stage after approval by the Architect.
5.4 On-Site Tests
5.4.1 Water Tests
Carry out on-site water tests upon completion of a part of the Works, in accordance with the
following procedure:
(a) Spray with a continuous water jet from a water hose with normal tap pressure. Hold
the hose at 1.2 m
away from the roof surface. Place the hose at the level of horizontal joints so that the
jet cone scatter will cover the joints.
(b) The test is deemed as passed if there is no water seepage or dampness observed
from the underside of the roof.
(c) Any areas showing water seepage or other defects to be made good after a
method statement for
reinstatement has been approved by the Architect.
Use tested areas as a site quality standard for the remainder of the project.
Carry out on-site water test at the following area and frequency:
Area of Test Frequency of Test
High volume water hose to Architect's direction for a

Main roof and all joints
duration of 15 minutes
- -
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
5.4.2 Roof Drainage Tests

Upon completion of the roofing works and installation of rain water goods, carry out on-site
drainage test to verify proper functioning and performance of the roof drainage system, in
5.4.3 Acoustic Tests
Conduct field tests and measurements at locations to be agreed with the Architect, to verify
that acoustic rating specified in Section A5-010: Clause:3.1 is achieved.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-10 Internal Doors
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Types of Internal Doors 7
3.2 Fire Doors 7
3.3 Timber 7
3.4 Plywood 7
3.5 Paint and Finishes 7
3.6 Facing 8
3.7 Aluminium Frames 8
3.8 Glass 8
3.9 Gaskets 9
3.10 Seals 9
3.11 Ironmongery 9
3.12 Door Accessories 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Frame Construction 11
4.2 Door Construction 11
4.3 Installation of Ironmongery 12
4.4 Installation of Doors 13
4.5 Completion 14

5.1 Submissions 15
5.3 Inspection 16
5.4 Tests 16
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for internal doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery. Household shelter doors are not included. External Doors
are covered in section A6-20 and Roller Shutter Doors are covered in section A6-30.

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 1 Use of timber in buildings
SS 1 Plywood
SS 71 Nomenclature of commercial timbers
SS 72 Treatment of timber and plywood with copper/chrome/arsenic wood
preservative
SS 173 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork
SS 332 Fire doors
considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
Code of Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings 2002
Other Standards
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL) sheets based on
thermosetting resins. Determination of properties.
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – sheet, strip and plate.
Tolerances on shape and dimensions for hot-rolled products
BS EN 486 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extrusion ingots
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Chemical composition
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
BS EN 755 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Extruded precision profiles in

alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for
inspection and delivery
BS EN 1125 Panic exit devices
BS EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices
BS EN 1303 Cylinders for locks
BS EN 1634 Fire resistance tests for doors and shutter assemblies
BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges, requirements and test methods
BS EN 12020 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in
alloys EN AW 6060 and EN AW 6063
BS 1125 Panic exit devices
BS 1186 Timber for and workmanship in joinery
BS 1449-2 Steel Plate
BS 4255-1 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion from
buildings. Specification for non-cellular gaskets
BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered boards and panels
BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings.
Code of practice for shops, offices, industrial, storage and other
similar buildings (AMD 9838) (AMD 10213)
BS 8300 Code of practice for the design of buildings and their approaches to
meet the needs of disabled people
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodic oxidation coatings.
AS 3715 Metal finishing. Thermoset powder coating for aluminium and
aluminium alloys
ASTM 2605-2 Organic coatings on aluminium extrusions
ASTM 3715 Pressure sensitive tapes
ASTM C 509 Elastomeric cellular preformed gasket and sealing material
ASTM C 1172 Standard specification for laminated architectural flat glass
AAMA 2605 Voluntary specification, performance requirements and test
procedures for Superior performing organic coatings on aluminium
extrusions and panels. Wet applied organic coatings
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended type of internal doors and their associated ironmongery are set out in
clause 3.1 and locations are indicated in the drawings and / or door schedules.
items to the SO:
1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the doors based on the design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Submit names of manufacturer’s for door leaves, door sets (if specified)
and ironmongery.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

doors.

Co-ordinate the internal door works, particularly the interfaces with the following work
a. Internal walls including masonry, dry walls and glass partitions
b. Raised floor if applicable.
c. Suspended ceiling
Liaise and coordinate with services engineer for location of all doors linked to security
or fire systems.

PSD for list.

No item.

No item.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Dead Loads

The self-weight and other associated dead loads of the complete door and frames are
to be supported and transferred to the main building structure.

Comply with the requirements of SS 332 and the FSSD and any additional
requirements of other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works.
Refer to clause 3.1 for the required fire rating of the door systems for the project and
the drawings for the location of each of the door types.
2.1.3 Fire Doors

Unless otherwise specified, all internal doors are not fire rated.
2.1.3.1 Fire doors, as shown in drawings / schedules, to have construction
identical to door system submitted for fire tests, and comply with
requirements of SS 332.
2.1.3.2 Construction for fire doors to be consistent with doors design shown on
drawing / schedule.
2.1.3.3 Glazing components for vision panel in Fire Doors to comply with
standards of SS 332.
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588, surface spread of flame to
class 1 BS 476.
Ensure that the fire door achieves the intended fire rating for the fire
compartment.

Attain value as set out in clause 3.1.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Internal Doors

Refer to the PSD for specific types and component requirements of internal door
3.2 Fire Doors

Materials used for fire doors shall be identical with the door system described in the
test certificates.
All fire doors are to be approved and of construction identical to door system
submitted for fire resistance tests under PLS1 complying with SS 332.
Changes to the core material or approved thickness are not allowed.
Any variation / substitution in the door and frame size, construction material,
ironmongery, and method of fixing/installation are to be subject to further approval by
the Regulatory Authorities.
Ironmongery and door accessories, such as door closer(s), to be compatible with the
fire rating of the door and shall comply with requirements of SS332.
Doors and frames are to bear a PSB label and a certificate of conformance is
required from the manufacturer for each type of Fire door.
3.3 Timber
Unless otherwise specified, all timber to be Kapur, Nyatoh or Meranti.
Pressure impregnate all timber, impregnation system to approval of SO.
Season and kiln dry timber after treatment.
Select timber and construct timber doors in accordance with SS 347
3.4 Plywood
All plywood is to be bonded using WBP adhesive Type D or better in accordance with
SS 347.
Grade 1 for use in natural state or for transparent finish. Free from knots, boreholes,
splits and glue stains.
Grade 2 for painting or similar treatment.
Grade 3 for elements not normally visible.
Exposed veneered finish plywood to be Grade 1 plain sliced veneer random matched.
On double doors veneer pattern to be mirrored or as set out in clause 3.1.
3.5 Paint and Finishes

Refer to section A4-20 ‘Internal Painting and Coating’ clause 3.1.
Refer to clause 3.1 for finishes on each door type.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6 Facing
3.6.1 Stainless Steel Facing

Type 1.4301, 1.5 mm thick conforming to BS 1449-2 and BS 4360. Finish of stainless
steel as in clause 3.1.
3.6.2 Plastic Laminate Facing

I.4mm thick durability classified D4, performance rated heavy duty (HD) to BS 4965
and BS EN 438-2.
3.6.3 Veneer Facing

Veneer species and layout as set out in the drawings and clause 3.1.
3.7 Aluminium Frames
3.7.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS EN 12020 unless otherwise agreed with SO.
Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755.
Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 2.5mm.
3.7.2 Sheet, strip and plate

Alloy complying with BS EN 485-3.
3.7.3 Finishes to Aluminium

3.7.3.1 Anodic Oxidation
To comply with AS 1231 thickness grade AA 25.
3.7.3.2 PVF2
Wet applied, heat and to comply with ASTM 2605-2.
Resin content minimum 70% 30 microns thick.
Polyester powder coating to comply with AS 3715.
Minimum thickness 50 Microns 60% gloss.
3.8 Glass
3.8.1 General
Glass to comply with ASTM C1172 and bear marks indicating its nature and
manufacturer.
3.8.1.1 Fire Rating
Where specified provide fire rating to comply with SS 332 and FSSD requirements.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
Achieve class 1 of BS 476 for surface spread of flame unless otherwise specified.
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588.
3.8.2 Laminated
Thickness as stated in clause 3.1. Use identical or approximately equal glass
thicknesses and type (non identical glass types strictly to SO approval only) on both
sides of the laminate. Submit glass combination to SO.
Protect inter layer from effects of moisture absorption in service including clouding,
shrinking back and de-lamination.
3.8.3 Heat strengthened

Conform to SS 341.
Bear identification marks indicating its nature and processor to be located on each
pane.
3.8.4 Laminated Fire Protection Glass

Provide glass with certificate of performance from manufacturer setting out
compliance with the fire integrity rating indicated in clause 3.1.
3.9 Gaskets
3.9.1 Gaskets
Extruded EPDM complying with provisions of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45.
3.9.2 Cellular rubber

To ASTM C509.
3.9.3 Push-in gaskets

Silicone free dry PVC push-in gaskets mitred at corners.
3.10 Seals
3.10.1 Junction Sealant

Sealant for junctions between internal walls and fire doors shall conform and be
consistent with conditions of fire test. Submit documents testifying conformity.
3.10.2 Fire Stops and Smoke Barrier Seals

Ensure Intumescent fire stops and smoke barrier seals are certified and approved for
use by the PSB.
3.10.3 Acoustic seals

If required, submit samples of seals and method statement of seal installation to SO.
3.11 Ironmongery
3.11.1 General
All ironmongery to be at least half-hour fire rated.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
In the case of fire door, provide ironmongery with the same fire rating integrity as the
doorset and comply with SS 332.
Where a brand name is specified, this is a guide to the respective quality, design and
profile required. Submit suitable ironmongery products to the SO.
All ironmongery for public communal areas and other specific locations is to comply
with the Code on Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings.
Ironmongery including door closer(s) to conform to requirements of endurance test as
recommended by selected manufacturer.
3.11.2 Hinges
Unless otherwise specified, hinges to be fully mortised grade 1.4301 stainless steel
with non-removable stainless steel pins and comply with BS EN 1935, classification
as set out in clause 3.1. All doors to have minimum 1.5 pairs of hinges.
3.11.3 Door closers

To comply with BS EN 1154, rating as set out in clause 3.1.
For fire rated doors, door closer should conform to endurance requirements of FSSD.
3.12 Door Accessories
3.12.1 Rubber Silencers

Provide 10 mm diameter 2 mm thick rubber silencers.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Frame Construction
4.1.1 General
Unless otherwise specified or shown in drawings, construct timber door frames with
tight fitting mortice, mitre or tenon joints, wedged and fixed with 10mm diameter
hardwood pins.
4.1.2 Site Measurement

Calculate and prepare schedule of all structural openings to receive doors. Prepare
door frame schedule including allowance for the door/door frame tolerances. Take
into account expansion and contraction of doors.
4.2 Door Construction

Comply with SS 332, SS 347 and the following requirements:
4.2.1 General
Connect framing of flush doors with corrugated metal fasteners or other jointing
method approved by the SO.
Unless other specified or shown in drawings, provide 6-15mm hardwood lipping,
mechanically or adhesive fixed to all faces of door.
Install hardwood blocking within doors to receive installation of ironmongery.
4.2.2 Solid Core

Glue hardwood battens together vertically to form solid core doors. Lay with grain in
alternate and opposite direction to balance stress and thus reduce distortion.
Minimum thickness of battens - 44mm.
Minimum density of battens -420kg/m³.
4.2.3 Mineral Core

Mineral core of aerated magnesium oxychloride with a density of 700kg/m³ and
38mm thickness. Install hardwood blockings within door core for installation of all
ironmongery. Hardwood blockings shall have same density as mineral core.

Bond laminate facing to face of door with adhesive recommended by the laminate
manufacturer. Provide balancing laminate in all instances. Laminate to be terminated
12mm from face of door at hardwood lipping.
4.2.5 Aluminium louvred doors

Extruded frames to be formed of Grade 6063 T5 aluminium, minimum thickness
2mm, corners reinforced with cast aluminium inserts. Determine size of framing base
on the size, location and use of the door.
Blades to be formed of Grade 6063 T5 aluminium minimum 1.5mm thick set at an
angle of 45° to the frame and fixed to the frame wi th self tapping screws.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Finish of frame as set out in clause 3.1.

Bird screen to be formed of grade 316 stainless steel mesh 12.5x12.5.1.4 mm mesh
fixed to frame with cover strip.
4.2.6 Timber louvred doors

Provide minimum sizes hardwood for door frame as follows:
a. top rail and stiles:100x 35mm,
b. intermediate rails: 75x35mm
c. bottom rail 150x35mm.
Hardwood louvres to be a minimum of 33x10 round edged hardwood fixed at 45° and
recessed into the frame by a minimum of 12mm.
Bird screen to be formed of grade 316 stainless steel mesh 12.5x12.5.1.4 mm mesh
fixed to frame with cover strip.
4.2.7 Door Accessories

4.2.7.1 Fixings
Provide a minimum of three fixings for each jamb and one L shaped floor anchor to
each jamb.
Fixings for face fixed frames are to be recessed into the frame and concealed with a
metal face cap fabricated from metal finished to match the frame.
4.2.7.2 Weather stripping
Fix with stainless steel self-tapping screws at 300mm centres.
4.2.8 Storage
Store doors and frames in a dry protected area. Provide appropriate wrapping for
protection and racks to prevent twisting and warping during storage.
Protect veneered doors from direct sunlight during storage.
4.3 Installation of Ironmongery
4.3.1 General
Assemble and carefully fix using fasteners supplied by the manufacturer with
equivalent corrosion protection and matching finish.
4.3.2 Fixing
Holes for components to be no larger than the minimum required for satisfactory fit /
operation.
Ensure that when fixed the ironmongery does not compromise the integrity of the
assembly as established by testing /assessment.
Do not use through bolt fixing for face fixed items.
Ensure that acoustic stripping is not interrupted by ironmongery.
Where intumescent strips are interrupted by ironmongery provide additional
intumescent paste around ironmongery to maintain fire rating.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
Adjust all ironmongery and doors to achieve the following:

a. Door frame gap 5 mm max
b. Door floor finish gap 6 mm max
c. Door closing in accordance with SS 332
4.3.3 Hinges
Unless otherwise specified, install one and a half pair or 3 hinges per door.
Install panic bolts and latches in accordance with BS EN 1125
4.3.3.1 Location
Mounting height to be as the manufactures recommendations and comply with the
requirements of the FSSD. Where not specified, position hinges 250mm from top and
bottom of the door leaf.
4.4 Installation of Doors
4.4.1 General
Maintain moisture content to suit specified moisture content during delivery, storage
and fixing to completion of works. When instructed by the SO test components with
an approved moisture meter.
Prime or seal surfaces of timber frames that will be inaccessible after fixing.
Allow sufficient tolerance for steel doors to expand due to temperature increase and
timber doors to moisture changes.
Include 25mm rebate in frame for all fire doors.
4.4.2 Fixing
Fit door frames neatly and vertically into openings, allowable tolerance ±1.5mm
Fix timber frames 150mm from each end, adjacent to each hanging point and at a
maximum of 600mm in between.
Method of fixing to be demonstrated on the sample doors, do not fix doors until
approval of method has been received.
Install fire rated door complete with ironmongery in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and in compliance with requirements of FSSD and SS 332.
Adjust doors and ironmongery to provide a smooth operation during the door swing.
4.4.3 Sealants
4.4.3.1 Non-fire doors
For non fire doors, seal all junctions between walls and doors with silicone sealant.
Allow for insertion of bond breaker tape or backing rod and apply primer to face of
surfaces when recommended by manufacturer of sealant.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.4.3.2 Fire doors

For fire doors, fill all voids between fire door frame and wall with 1:3 cement sand mix
or proprietary grout or pack and seal with mineral fibre, submit proposal for void filling
to SO.
4.5 Completion
At completion, hand over three sets of all keys (or other quantity as specified), each
to be marked/labelled.
Present confirmation from manufacturer of the number of keys supplied.
Maintain agreed security protocol for items such as master keys or common keys.
These to be officially hand over without opportunity for deliberate or accidental breach
of security.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the door manufacturer and include of copies of technical data relating to
each of the door types, where specified include Fire rating certificates for both
doors and door sets.
b. Names of the ironmongery, intumescent strip, smoke baffles and acoustic seals
manufacturer/s, include copies of technical details of all the items. Wherever
possible all ironmongery and inserts are to be obtained from the same
manufacturer.
details of Quality Control Procedures adopted. Convenient

Submit the following prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings.
a. Copies of technical certificates setting out the fire rating of each door type
b. Means of accommodating acoustic standard
c. Form of door and ironmongery schedule to be agreed with SO.

Prepare shop drawings, including:
a. Elevations of all panel doors and veneer layout for facing veneered doors.
b. Section showing door jamb, head, over panel, skirting, scale 1:2 for both fire and
non fire rated doors. Include door junctions for double doors
c. Ironmongery and door schedule in the format agreed. Include lock set schedule
demonstrating security policies such as master key or common key requirements
as shown in the drawings / door schedules.
d. Key schedule and format agreed with the SO.
e. Layout location of all ironmongery
Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturer of the following
materials/components, certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade,
specified:
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Doors
b. Frame finish
c. Ironmongery finish
5.1.3.3 Verification of properties

Submit verification endorsed by the manufacturer that the fire resistance and acoustic
properties of the door sets (this includes the door in its frame with associated
ironmongery) comply with requirement as set out in clause 2.1. Include the hinges,
locks latches etc in place.

No item.

No item.
5.1.6 Certificates
Submit test certificates and documents for installed fire doors required by SO and or
Building Authority.
Doors and frames are to bear a PSB label and a certificate of conformance is to be
submitted by the manufacturer for each type of Fire door. Submit certificates of
conformity issued by PSB.
Submit documentation of endurance test for ironmongery.
5.2.1 Samples
Refer to the PSD for sample submission requirements.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for any mock-ups required for the project.
5.3 Inspection
No item.
5.4 Tests
No item.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-20 External Doors
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Types of External Doors 7
3.2 Fire Doors 7
3.3 Timber 7
3.4 Plywood 7
3.6 Facing 8
3.7 Aluminium 8
3.8 Glass 9
3.9 Gaskets 9
3.10 Seals 9
3.11 Ironmongery 10
3.12 Door Accessories 10
4. WORKMANSHIP 11
4.1 Site Measurement 11
4.2 Door Construction 11
4.5 Completion 14

5.1 Submissions 15
5.3 Inspection 16
5.4 Tests 16
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for external doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery. Internal Doors are covered in section A6-10 and Roller
Shutter Doors are covered in section A6-30.

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 1 Plywood
wood preservative
SS 332 Fire doors
considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
Code of Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings
Other Standards
BS EN 485-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – sheet, strip and plate.
Tolerances on shape and dimensions for hot-rolled products
BS EN 486 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extrusion ingots
BS EN 573-3 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - chemical composition and form
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
of wrought products. Chemical composition

BS EN 755 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Extruded precision profiles in
alloys EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for
inspection and delivery
BS EN 1154 Building hardware: Controlled closing devices.
BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices
BS EN 10088 Stainless steel-lists of stainless steels
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip –
BS 1449-2 Steel Plate
BS 3698 Specifications for solvent-based paint remover
BS 4255-1 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion from
buildings. Specification for non-cellular gaskets
BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered boards and panels
BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of buildings.
Code of practice for shops, offices, industrial, storage and other
similar buildings (AMD 9838) (AMD 10213)
BS 8300 Code of practice for the design of buildings and their approaches
to meet the needs of disabled people
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodised coatings for
architectural applications
AS 3715 Metal finishing. Thermoset powder coating for aluminium and
aluminium alloys
ASTM 2605-2 Wet applied organic coatings
ASTM 3715 Pressure sensitive tapes
ASTM C 1172 Laminated architectural flat glass
ASTM D1056-00 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials–Sponge or
Expanded Rubber
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended type of external doors and their associated ironmongery are set out in
clause 3.1 and locations are indicated in the drawings and / or door schedules.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
items to the SO.
1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the doors based on the design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Submit names of manufacturer’s for door leaves, door sets (if specified)
and ironmongery.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

doors.

Co-ordinate the external door works, particularly the interfaces with the following work
a. External walls including masonry, in-situ concrete and glazing.
b. External finishes
Liaise and coordinate with M & E engineer for location of all doors linked to security
or fire systems.

PSD for list.

No item.

No item.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Dead Loads


Comply with the requirements of SS 332, FSSD and any additional requirements of
other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works.
2.1.3 Fire Doors

2.1.3.1 Submit fire doors, as shown in drawings / schedules, with construction
identical to door system submitted for fire tests and to comply with
requirements of SS 332.
2.1.3.2 Construction for fire doors to be consistent with door design shown on
drawing / schedule.
2.1.3.3 Glazing components for vision panel in Fire Doors to comply with
standards of SS 332.
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588, surface spread of flame to
class 1 BS 476.
Where fire rated doors are set below suspended ceilings or above raised floors
include for infilling void above or below door with fire rated infill of the same rating as
the door. The construction of the infill is to be to the approval of the SO.

6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of External Doors

Refer to the PSD for specific types and component requirements of external door
3.2 Fire Doors

Materials used for fire doors shall be identical with the door system described in the
test certificates.
All fire doors are to be approved and of construction identical to door system
submitted for fire resistance tests under PLS1 complying with SS 332.
Changes to the core material or approved thickness are not allowed.
Any variation /substitution in the door and frame size, construction material,
ironmongery, and method of fixing/installation are to be subject to further approval by
the Regulatory Authorities.
Ironmongery and door accessories, such as door closer(s), to be compatible with the
fire rating of the door and shall comply with requirements of SS 332 at 800°C.
Doors and frames are to bear a PSB label and a certificate of conformance is
required from the manufacturer for each type of Fire door.
3.3 Timber
Unless otherwise specified all timber to be Kapur, Chengal or Balau
Fire retardant treatment system, to be submitted to the SO. Season and kiln dry
timber after treatment.
3.4 Plywood
All plywood is to be bonded using WBP adhesive Type D or better in accordance with
SS 347
Grade 1 for use in natural state or for transparent finish. Free from knots, boreholes,
splits and glue stains.
Grade 2 for painting or similar treatment.
Grade 3 for elements not normally visible.
Exposed veneered finish plywood to be Grade 1 plain sliced veneer random matched.
On double doors veneer pattern to be mirrored or to be as set out in clause 3.1.
Timber doors exposed to sheltered external environment, such as open corridors or
car porches, to be marine grade plywood.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS

Refer to clause 3.1 in A1-80-1 ‘External Render’, A1-80-2 ‘External Wall Tiling’,
and/or A1-80-3 ‘External Painting and Coating’.
3.6 Facing

BS EN 10088 Grade1.4401, 1.5mm thick conforming to BS 1449-2. Finish of
stainless steel noted in clause 3.1.

I.4mm thick durability classified D4, performance rated heavy duty (HD) to BS 4965
and BS EN 438-2.
Plastic laminate to be warranted against UV deterioration by the manufacturer.
3.7 Aluminium
3.7.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS EN 12020 unless otherwise agreed with SO.
Comply with BS EN 486, BS 8118, BS EN 573-3, BS 1161 and BS EN 755.
Minimum wall thickness in structural parts to be 2.5mm.
3.7.2 Sheet, strip and plate

Alloy complying with BS EN 485-3.
3.7.3 Aluminium Finishes

Comply with AS 1231 thickness grade AA 25.
3.7.3.2 PVF2
Comply with AS 3715.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.8 Glass
3.8.1 General
Glass to comply with ASTM C1172 and bear marks indicating its nature and
manufacturer.
3.8.1.1 Fire Rating
Where specified provide fire rating to comply with SS 332 and FSSD requirements.
Achieve class 1 of BS 476 for surface spread of flame unless otherwise specified.
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588.
3.8.2 Laminated
Thickness as stated in clause 3.1. Use identical or approximately equal glass
thicknesses and type (non identical glass types strictly to SO approval only) on both
sides of the laminate. Submit glass combination to SO.

Conform to SS 341.
Bear identification marks indicating its nature and processor to be located on each
pane.

compliance with the fire integrity rating indicated in clause 3.1.
3.9 Gaskets
3.9.1 Gaskets
Extruded EPDM complying with provisions of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45.
3.9.2 Cellular rubber

To ASTM C509.
3.9.3 Push-in gaskets

Silicone free dry PVC push-in gaskets mitred at corners.
3.10 Seals
3.10.1 Junction Sealant

Sealant for junctions between external walls and fire doors shall conform and be
consistent with conditions of fire test. Submit documents testifying conformity.
3.10.2 Fire Stops and Smoke Barrier Seals

Ensure Intumescent fire stops and smoke barrier seals are certified and approved for
use by the PSB.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.10.3 Acoustic seals

If required, submit samples of seals and method statement of seal installation to SO.
3.11 Ironmongery
Unless otherwise specified, all ironmongery to be at least half-hour fire rated and
suitable for external use. Where fire doors of a higher rating are to be provided all
ironmongery to comply with SS 332 at 800°C or compa tible requirement as agreed
with SO.
Any brand name specified is a guide to the respective quality, design and profile
required. Submit suitable ironmongery products to the SO.
All ironmongery for public communal areas and other specific locations is to comply
with the Code on Barrier Free Accessibility in Buildings.
Ironmongery including door closer(s) to conform to requirements of endurance test as
specified by selected manufacturer.
3.11.1 Hinges
To be fully mortised grade 1.4401 stainless steel with non-removable stainless steel
pins and comply with BS EN 1935, classification as set out in clause 3.1. All doors to
have minimum 1.5 pairs of hinges.
3.11.2 Door closers

To comply with BS EN 1154, rating as set out in clause 3.1.
For fire rated doors, door closer should conform to endurance requirements of FSSD.
3.12.1 Fixings
Fixings to manufacturers recommendations and be galvanised or grade 316 stainless
steel.
3.12.2 Weather stripping

Jamb and stile weather stripping consisting of closed cell neoprene conforming to
ASTM D1056-00 Type II Grade A, oil resistant and self extinguishing.
Use stainless steel self-tapping screws at minimum 300 mm centers.
Submit proprietary weather stripping to SO for incorporation to all external doors.
Ensure compatibility with internal and external floor finishes.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Site Measurement

Calculate and prepare schedule of all structural openings to receive doors. Prepare
door frame schedule including allowance for the door/door frame tolerances. Take
into account expansion and contraction of doors.
4.2.1 General
Fire doors to comply with SS 332.
Door faces to be flush with seamless edges.
4.2.2 Steel Door

Door leaf skins to be 1.5mm thick electro galvanised steel sheet with galvanised “V”
stiffeners at maximum 200mm centres.
Provide 1.5mm thick galvanised reinforcement at ironmongery positions.
Shop prime doors with minimum of 20 micron zinc phosphate paint.
Pack core of door with mineral wool at a density of 150kg/m³.
Fit double doors with 1.5mm astragal at overlap on pull side, door to be seamless at
push side.
Integrate ironmongery and seals into body of door.
Do not cut door skin to allow for the installation of ironmongery.
4.2.2.1 Door Frames
Frames to be formed from hot dip galvanised steel, minimum thickness1.6mm (16
gauge) complying with BS EN 10143 Class 2A or 1.6mm thick Grade 1.4401
stainless steel. Finish as in clause 3.1.
Treat frames with one coat of calcium plumbate primer paint complying with SS 91 or
BS 3698 Type B.
Mitre and weld corners and install L shaped corner reinforcement at head jamb
junction.
Provide 70mm (minimum) long 2.5mm thick reinforcement plates at hinge, door
closer, lock and panic hardware positions.
Door rebate to be a minimum of 19mm for fire rated doors.
4.2.3 Timber Door

Connect framing of flush doors with stainless steel corrugated metal fasteners or
other jointing method approved by the SO.
Provide 12mm hardwood lipping mechanically or adhesive fixed to all faces of door.
Install hardwood blocking within doors to receive installation of ironmongery.
Construct door frames with tight fitting mortice and tenon joints, wedged and fixed
with 10mm diameter hardwood pins.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Form laminated cores with timber battens adhesive fixed together. Lay battens with
grain in alternate and opposite direction to balance stress and reduce distortion.
4.2.4 Aluminium louvred doors

Extruded frames to be formed of Grade 6063 T5 aluminium, minimum thickness
2mm, corners reinforced with cast aluminium inserts. Determine size of framing base
on the size, location and use of the door.
Blades to be formed of Grade 6063 T5 aluminium minimum 1.5mm thick set at an
angle of 45° to the frame and fixed to the frame wi th self tapping screws.
Finish of frame as set out in clause 3.1.
Bird screen to be formed of grade 1.4401 stainless steel mesh 12.5x12.5.1.4 mm
mesh fixed to frame with cover strip.
4.2.5 Timber louvred doors

Provide minimum sizes hardwood for door frame as follows:
a. top rail and stiles:100x 35mm,
b. intermediate rails: 75x35mm
c. bottom rail 150x35mm.
Hardwood louvres to be a minimum of 33x10 round edged hardwood fixed at 45° and
recessed into the frame by a minimum of 12mm.
Bird screen to be formed of grade 1.4401 stainless steel mesh 12.5x12.5.1.4 mm
mesh fixed to frame with cover strip.
4.2.6 Door Accessories

4.2.6.1 Fixings
Provide a minimum of three fixings for each jamb and one L shaped floor anchor to
each jamb.
4.2.6.2 Rubber silencers
Fixed to frame rebate.
On single doors lace three silencers adjacent to lock plate and the two others
approximately 450mm from the first.
4.2.6.3 Weather stripping
Fix with stainless steel self-tapping screws at 300mm centres.
4.2.7 Storage
Store, doors and frames in a dry protected area. Provide appropriate wrapping for
protection and racks to prevent twisting and warping during storage.
Protect veneered doors from direct sunlight during storage.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
4.3.1 General
4.3.2 Fixing
Holes for components to be no larger than the minimum required for satisfactory fit /
operation.
Ensure that when fixed the ironmongery does not compromise the integrity of the
assembly as established by testing /assessment.
Do not use through bolt fixing for face fixed items.
Ensure that acoustic stripping is not interrupted by ironmongery.
Where intumescent strips are interrupted by ironmongery provide additional
intumescent paste around ironmongery to maintain fire rating.
Adjust all ironmongery and doors to achieve the following:
a. Door frame gap 5 mm max
b. Door floor finish gap 6 mm max
c. Door closing in accordance with SS 332
4.3.3 Hinges
Unless otherwise specified, install one and a half pair or 3 hinges per door.
Install panic bolts and latches in accordance with BS EN 1125
4.3.3.1 Location
Mounting height to be as the manufactures recommendations and comply with the
requirements of the FSSD. Where not specified, position hinges 250mm from top and
bottom of the door leaf.
4.4.1 General
Maintain moisture content to suit specified moisture content during delivery, storage
and fixing to completion of the works. When instructed by the SO test components
with an approved moisture meter.
Prime or seal surfaces of timber frames that will be inaccessible after fixing.
Allow sufficient tolerance for steel doors to expand due to temperature increase and
timber doors to moisture changes.
4.4.2 Fixing
Fit door frames neatly and vertically into openings, allowable tolerance ±1.5mm
Fix timber frames 150mm from each end, adjacent to each hanging point and at a
maximum of 600mm in between.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
Install fire rated door complete with ironmongery in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and in compliance with requirements of FSSD and SS 332.
Adjust doors and ironmongery to provide a smooth operation during the door swing.
4.4.3 Sealants
4.4.3.1 Non-fire doors
For non fire doors, seal all junctions between walls and doors with silicone sealant.
Allow for insertion of bond breaker tape or backing rod and apply primer to face of
surfaces when recommended by manufacturer of sealant.
4.4.3.2 Fire doors
For fire doors, fill all voids between fire door frame and wall with 1:3 cement sand mix
or proprietary grout or pack and seal with mineral fibre, submit proposal for void filling
to SO.
4.5 Completion
At completion hand over three sets of all keys (or other quantity as specified), each to
be marked/labelled and provide a metal lockable key box to hold all keys.
Maintain agreed security protocol for items such as master keys or common keys.
These to be officially hand over without opportunity for deliberate or accidental breach
of security.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the door and acoustic seals manufacturer and include copies of
technical data relating to each of the types. Include certificates of compliance for
all fire doors.
b. Name of the ironmongery manufacturer/s and include copies of technical details
of all the ironmongery items. Wherever possible all ironmongery is to be obtained
from the same manufacturer.

Submit the following, prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings.
a. Copies of technical certificates setting out the fire rating of each door type and
conformance certificates for fire rated door sets.
b. Means of accommodating acoustic standard
c. Form of door and ironmongery schedule to be agreed with SO.

a. Elevation of all doors.
b. Section showing door jamb, head, over panel, skirting, scale 1:2 for both fire and
non fire rated doors. Include door junctions for double doors
c. Ironmongery and door schedule in the format agreed. Include lock set schedule
demonstrating security policies such as master key or common key requirements
as shown in the drawings / door schedules.
Provide the SO with certification from the manufacturer of the following
materials/components, certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade,
specified:
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
a. Doors
b. Frame finish
5.1.3.3 Verification of properties

Submit verification endorsed by the manufacturer that the fire resistance and acoustic
properties of the door sets (this includes the door in its frame with associated
ironmongery) comply with requirement as set out in clause 2.1. Include the hinges,
locks latches etc in place.

No item.
5.1.5 Warranty
No item.

No item.
5.1.7 Certificates
Submit test certificates and documents for installed fire doors required by SO and or
Building Authority.
Doors and frames are to bear a PSB label and a certificate of conformance is to be
submitted by the manufacturer for each type of Fire door. Submit certificates of
conformity issued by PSB.
Submit documentation of endurance test for ironmongery.
5.2.1 Samples
Refer to the PSD for sample submission requirements.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Refer to the PSD for any mock-ups required for the project.
5.3 Inspection
No item.
5.4 Tests
No item.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
A6-30 Roller Shutter Doors
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Types of Roller Shutter Doors 7
3.2 Aluminium laths 7
3.3 Steel laths 7
3.4 Roller Shutter Door Channel Frames 7
3.5 Roller Shutter Operation 8
3.6 Accessories 8
3.7 Ironmongery 8
3.9 Sealants 9
3.10 Gaskets and Seals 9
4. WORKMANSHIP 10
4.3 Fire Shutter Markings 10

5.1 Submissions 11
5.3 Inspection 12
5.4 Tests 12
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for roller shutters and their associated
ironmongery. Requirements for internal and external doors are covered in sections
A6-10 and A6-20.

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS 1 Plywood
wood preservative
SS 332 Fire doors
considerations)
SS 347 Timber doors
SS 489 Fire shutters
Other Standards
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot dip metal coated steel sheet and strip
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel: Lists of stainless steel
BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures.
BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and carbon-manganese plate,
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
sheet and strip

BS 1461 Hot dipped galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
BS 3698 Calcium plumbate primer
BS 5234: Partitions (including matching linings)
Part 1 Code of practice for design and installation
Part 2
Specification for performance requirements for strength and
robustness including methods of test
BS 5588 Fire precautions in the design construction and use of buildings
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodic oxidation coatings
AS 3715 Metal finishing- Thermoset powder coating for architectural
applications of aluminium and aluminium alloys
ASTM D 1056- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials–Sponge or
00 Expanded Rubber
AAMA 2065-2 Voluntary specification for superior performing organic coatings on
aluminium extrusions and panels
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended type of roller shutter doors and their associated ironmongery are set out
in clause 3.1 and locations are indicated in the drawings.
items to the SO:
1.4.1.1 Develop all necessary details for the roller shutter doors based on the
design drawings.
1.4.1.2 Submit names of manufacturer’s for doors.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

doors.

Co-ordinate the roller shutter door works, particularly the interfaces with the following
a. External walls including masonry, in-situ concrete and glazing.
b. Internal walls, including masonry walls, dry walls, glass partitions, raised floors
and suspended ceiling, if applicable.
Liaise and coordinate with services engineer for location of all doors linked to security
or fire systems.
4
Version 1.0
NPQS

PSD for list.
1.4.5 Verification of Fire Resistance

Verify the fire resistance properties of the doors as set out in clause 2.1 below. The
manufacturer must endorse the verification submission.
1.4.6 Warranty

No item.

No item.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Dead Loads


Comply with the requirements of the FSSD, Singapore Standards SS 332 and any
additional requirements of other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the
works.
2.1.3 Fire Integrity

2.1.3.1 Determination
Conform to FSSD requirements and Singapore Standards SS 332
Glazing components to conform to BS 5588 surface spread of flame – class 1
BS 476.
2.1.3.2 Voids
Fill all voids between fire door frame and wall with approved cement Sand mortar, or
other approved proprietary filling compound to achieve the intended fire integrity of
the design. Filler material to be submitted for approval by SO.

2.1.5 Protection from Rust

All steel components shall be adequately protected by approved rust protection
measures intended for the duration of the operational life cycle of the roller shutters
6
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Roller Shutter Doors

Refer to the PSD for specific types and component requirements of roller shutter door
3.2 Aluminium laths
3.2.1 Extrusions
Designation 6063, temper T6 of BS EN 12020.
Junctions, hangers, bracing and fixings to satisfy all structural requirements and
eliminate distortion of the units.
3.2.2 Aluminium Finishes

Comply with AS 1231 thickness grade AA 25.
3.2.2.2 PVF2
Comply with AS 3715.
3.3 Steel laths

Laths to be formed of steel sheet to BS 1449: Part 1. Determine the thickness and
submit to the SO.
Finish to be one of the following as indicated in clause 3.1.
a. Pre-Galvanised steel sheets, complying with BS EN 10143
b. Painted coatings complying with section A1-80-3 for High performance ferrous
metal
c. Polyester Powder Coat Heavy duty external grade polyester powder coat
conforming to AS 3715.
3.4 Roller Shutter Door Channel Frames
3.4.1 Non Fire-Rated Roller Shutter Door Guides

Roller shutter guides to be formed from extruded aluminium, minimum thickness of 3
mm, complying with BS EN 10143. Finish as indicated in clause 3.1.
3.4.2 Fire-Rated Roller Shutter Door Guides

Roller shutter guides to comply with SS 489.
Finish as indicated in clause 3.1.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.5 Roller Shutter Operation

Weight of roller exceeding 200kg or openings larger than 3m x 3m are to be fitted
with electrically operated roller shutter doors. Below that weight or size, chain
operated systems are acceptable. See clause 3.1 for system specified.
All fire rated roller shutters to be fitted with fusible link integrated into the fire system
and comply with SS 489.
Submit the following items to the SO.
a. Location of control buttons.
b. Form of button operation.
c. Battery back up requirements.
3.6 Accessories
3.6.1 Fixings
Fixing for fire rated shutters, to comply with FSSD requirements.
3.6.2 Barrel enclosure

Install barrel enclosure with steel endplates to support barrel and easily removable
access panel.
3.6.3 Weather stripping

Weather-proof strips, to be EPDM or PVC, conforming to ASTM D1056-00 Type II
Grade A, oil resistant and self extinguishing.
3.6.4 Laths
Design, material and finish of Interlocking laths as set out in the drawings.
Provide steel endplates to alternate laths.
Provide T section bottom rail of the same material as the laths.
3.7 Ironmongery
All ironmongery to be at least half hour fire rated. Where fire dors of a higher rating
are to be provided the ironmongery must comply with this requirement.
Any brand name specified is a guide to the respective quality, design and profile
required.

For material requirements refer to section A4-20 ‘Internal Painting and Coating’,
clause 3.1.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.9 Sealants
Insert Intumescent sealant at the wall/roller shutter channel and head junction of all
fire rated shutters. Submit intumescent sealant to the SO.
Inset silicone sealant at junction of all external walls and roller shutter channel and
head.
3.10 Gaskets and Seals

PSB certify and fire test gaskets and seals, where incorporated into fire rated roller
shutters, in conjunction with the roller shutter as an integral assembly.
Provide waterproof seals at the base of all external roller shutters.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Site measurement

Measure openings for roller shutter doors prior to ordering doors.
Prepare roller shutter door frame schedule, include structural opening sizes.
4.1.2 Fixing
Fit door frames neatly and vertically into openings, allowable tolerance ±2mm. Fix
with stainless steel self tapping screws at 300mm centres.
Fill all voids between frame and adjacent wall, beams or soffits with 1:3 sand cement
mortar.
Seal external face of junction with polysulphide sealant set on bond breaker tape or
polyethylene rod. Apply primer to face of joint.
Install fire rated doors in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the
FSSD requirements to achieve the required fire rating.
Adjust doors and ironmongery to provide a smooth operation.

At completion, hand over three sets of all keys (or other quantity as specified), each
to be marked/labelled.
4.3 Fire Shutter Markings

Etch, emboss, stamp or print onto identification tags, the required information to
comply with clause 8.2 and clause 8.3 of SS 489, and fix firmly to the bottom rail of
the fire shutter. Means of fixing to be approved by SO.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the roller shutter door manufacturer and include of copies of technical
data relating to each of the door types.
b. Name of the ironmongery manufacturer/s and include copies of technical details
all the ironmongery items. Wherever possible all ironmongery is to be obtained
from the same manufacturer.

Prepare and submit copies of technical certificates setting out the fire rating of each
door type, prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings/schedules.
a. Elevation and section of all Roller shutter doors together with head shutter box.
Clearance for opening the doors to be set out.
b. Section showing door jamb, head and floor junction with all fixing positions.
c. Ironmongery and door schedule in the format agreed.
size, finish, etc, and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified:
a. Doors
b. Frame finish
5.1.3 Certification of Installation

At handover, provide a Schedule of Evidence of compliance from the manufacturer to
comply with Clause 9.1 of SS 489 and a printed and numbered certificate to comply
with Clause 9.2 of SS 489.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
Provide a Schedule of Evidence of compliance that the installation complies with this
standard and contains records and required information listed in Clause 9.4 of SS
489.

No item.
5.1.5 Warranty
1.4.6.
5.2.1 Samples
Submit the following samples to the SO prior to ordering material:
a. Lath construction -300mmx 300mm of all door types
b. Side channel frame- 600mm length
c. Install one door of each type for SO approval before proceeding Door panel
300mmx 300mm of all door types.
5.2.2 Mock-ups
5.3 Inspection
Inform the SO on completion of the installation and organise a demonstration for the
SO. This to include the opening and closing of the doors, the activation of the fusible
link if specified and a water test for external roller shutters to confirm that water will
not flow under the doors and seep into the building.
5.4 Tests
No item.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS
A7-10 Fixtures and Fittings
1
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Scope 3
1.3 Standards 3

3.1 Types of Fittings and Fixtures 8
3.2 Timber 8
3.3 Stainless Steel 9
3.4 Carbon Steel 9
3.5 Aluminium Alloy Components 10
3.6 Prefinished Metals 11
3.7 Fixing and Fasteners 11
3.9 Facings 12
3.10 Glass 12
3.11 Ironmongery 13
3.12 Accessories 13
4. WORKMANSHIP 14
4.1 General Requirements 14
4.2 Construction of Fixtures 14
4.3 Sanitary-ware Installation 15
4.4 Fixing Proprietary Fitting Items 15

5.1 Submissions 16
5.3 Inspection 17
5.4 Tests 17
2
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for fixtures and fittings in building projects. It
broadly covers three categories of works as follows:
a. Fixed furnitures such as cabinets and wardrobes etc.
b. Sanitary fittings and closets etc.
c. Other fixtures/ wall hangings etc.
This section does not cover kitchen hobs and sculptures etc., which are specialist
works to supplier’s specification and detail.

1.3 Standards
Singapore Standards
SS CP 1 The use of timber in building construction
SS 1 Plywood
SS 16 WC Seats (plastic)
SS 68 WC flushing cisterns, including dual flush cisterns and flush
pipes
Wood preservative
SS 222 Stainless steel slab urinals
considerations)
SS 347 Timber Doors
SS 378 Low capacity WC flushing cistern up to 4.5L maximum
3
Version 1.0
NPQS
Other Standards
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles
- specifications and test methods
BS EN ISO 3506-1 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant stainless steel
fasteners. Bolts, screws and studs
BS EN ISO 3506-2 Mechanical properties of corrosion-resistant stainless-steel
fasteners. Nuts
BS EN 179 Emergency exit devices
BS EN 1011: Welding – Recommendation for welding of metallic materials.
Part 1 General guidance for arc welding (AMD 13981)
Part 2 Arc welding of ferritic steels
Part 3 Arc welding of stainless steel
Part 4 Arc welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
Part 5 Welding of clad steel
BS EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices for swing doors
BS EN 1303 Cylinders for locks-requirements and test methods
BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges
BS EN 3506 –1 Stainless steel fasteners
BS EN 3506-2 Mechanical properties of stainless steel fasteners
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel .Lists of stainless steel
BS EN 10088-3 Technical delivery conditions for semi finished products,
sheet/plate, strip for general purposes
BS EN 10113 Hot rolled products in Weldable fine grain structural steel
BS EN 10143 Continuously hot dipped metal coated steel sheet and strip –
BS EN 10152 Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products
BS EN 10259 Cold rolled stainless steelstrip and cut lengths
BS EN 12051 Door and window bolts
BS EN 12540 Corrosion protection-nickel, copper, chromium coatings
BS 438 Decorative high pressure (HPL) laminate sheet based on
thermosetting resins
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
BS 1186-2 Timber for and workmanship in joinery. Specification for
4
Version 1.0
NPQS
workmanship
BS 1186-3 Timber for and workmanship in joinery. Specification for wood
trim and fixing
BS 1449 Steel plate sheet and strip
BS 1453 Specification for filler materials for gas welding
BS 1461 Galvanising
BS 2901 Filler rods and wires for gas shielded arc welding
BS 2989 Continuous hot dipped metal coated steel sheet and strip
BS 3830 Vitreous enamelled steel building components
BS 3987 Anodic oxide coating-external aluminium anodising
BS 4190 Black hexagonal bolts
BS 4255 Non cellular gaskets
BS 4604 High strength friction grip bolts
BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered panels
BS 5889 One part silicone sealant
BS 6363 Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow
sections
AS 1231 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Anodized coatings for
architectural applications
AS 3715 Metal finishing:Thermoset powder coating
ASTM C 1172 Laminated architectural flat glass
1.4 Trade Preambles

The intended types of fixtures and fittings for the project are set out in clause 3.1 and
indicated in the drawings. Base on the information carry out and submit the following
items to the SO:
fixtures and fittings, including interfaces with other works and connections.
1.4.1.2 Submit manufacturers and products for the fixtures and fitting items when
called for.
1.4.1.3 Submit method of fabrication, erection/installation.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Prepare and submit shop and erection drawings to enable the fabrication and
installation of the items.
5
Version 1.0
NPQS

Co-ordinate the works particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
b. Internal applied finishes.
c. Mechanical and electrical services
Liase and co-ordinate with M&E engineer for location of all supply and drainage pipe
work, electrical conduit / wiring and pipe gas network within internal walls, ducts and
under floor.

PSD for list.
1.4.5 Warranty

No item.

No item.
1.4.8 Site Measurement and Adjustment

Calculate and coordinate the sizes of all items to fit with the as-build dimension of the
surrounding structure and finishes.
6
Version 1.0
NPQS

2.1.1 Loading
The self-weight and other associated loads of the fixtures and fittings are to be
supported and transferred to the main building structure.
Make allowance for the normal loading exerted on the items e.g. Cabinet loads or
occasional loads from users or maintenance workman using fitting for temporary
foothold.
2.1.2 Building Movements and Structural Tolerance

Works are not affected by any movements, settlement, deflection, expansion or
contraction which can be expected to occur in the building or the construction
process.
Junction between the fixtures or fittings and adjacent work by others shall be formed
to take into account, possible structural deflections or movement in that adjacent
element without distortion to the Works, or disintegration of joints between works.

Where indicated ensure the fixtures or fittings comply with the requirements of the
FSSD and that of other statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works. Refer
to clause 3.1 for required fire resistance for the items if any.
2.1.4 Environmental
Take into account the environment for which the Works are to be applied, Paying
particular attention to the Daily and seasonal variations in humidity and temperature
in the Tropics.
Established with the SO, the operational environment of each fitting, particularly if the
fitting is used in a wet, damp or humid environment. Make proposals to take into
account, that the fitting is suitable for the established usage and environment.
2.1.5 Appearance
Include any measures necessary to ensure that the surface finishes are uniform in
colour and texture and appearance throughout.
7
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.1 Types of Fittings and Fixtures

Refer to the PSD for the specific requirements for the fixtures and fittings for this
project.
3.2 Timber
3.2.1 Solid Timber

3.2.1.1 Species
Unless otherwise specified, all timber shall be Kapur, Chengal or Balau complying
with SS CP1.
3.2.1.2 Moisture Content
Moisture content when fitted to be between 10-15%, moisture content variation
between adjacent timbers to be no more than 3%.
3.2.1.3 Treatment
Refer to PSD for other timber treatment requirements.
Other treatment to timber, to be compatible with timber finishes such as laminate and
varnishes etc.
3.2.2 Plywood
All plywood shall be bonded using WBP adhesive Type D or better in accordance
with SS:347.
Use Grade 1 in natural state or for transparent finish. Free from knots, boreholes,
splits and glue stains
Use Grade 2 for elements with painting or similar treatment.
Use Grade 3 for elements not normally visible.
Exposed veneered finish plywood shall be Grade 1 plain sliced veneer random
matched.
On double doors to wardrobes, veneer pattern shall be mirrored unless otherwise
indicated in the drawings or directed.
3.2.3 Paint and finishes

For material requirement refer to section A4-20 “Internal Painting and Coating”,
clause 3.1.
For finishes required of the fixtures and fittings refer to clause 3.1 or the drawings.
Take into account performance requirement of in section 2.1 concerning the
operational environment of paints and finishes.
8
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.3 Stainless Steel
3.3.1 Sections
Stainless steel shall be to BS EN 10088. Stainless steel sections shall comply with
BS EN 10088-3.
Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel grade shall be 1.4401 (previously 316
external grade).
3.3.1.1 Finishes
a. 1G/2G (3A) Ground: Coarse, unidirectional texture; low reflectivity.
b. 1J/2J (3B or 4) Brushed or dull polished: Unidirectional texture; smoother than
c. 1K/2K (5) Satin polished: Smoother than 1J/2J. Suitable for marine and external
architectural applications.
d. 1P/2P (7 or 8) Bright buffed/polished: Non-directional finish with high degree of
reflectivity. Achieved by mechanical polishing.
Take note of the references in brackets are the nearest equivalent finishes to the
superseded BS 1449-2.
The finish is achieved on the exposed surface only unless specified otherwise.
3.3.1.2 Plate, Sheet and Strip, and BS EN 10088 -3

3.3.1.3 Unless noted otherwise, grade 1.4401 (formerly 316) shall be used for
visible components, in all other circumstances grade 1.4301 (formerly
304) shall be used.
3.3.1.4 Welding of Stainless Steel
Comply with BS 1453: and BS 2901.
Use electrical fusion metal-arc method. Carbon-arc or gas welding will not permitted.
Undertake in a thorough manner, with edging rod of same composition as sheets or
part welded.
Weld completed welds, strong and ductile, with excess metal ground off and joints
finish smooth to match adjoining surface. Welds shall be free of Mechanical
imperfections such as gas holes, pits, runs, crack etc. and shall have same colour as
adjoining surfaces. All sheets shall be continuously butted welded together with
welds ground smooth and polished. Butt welds made by spot welding strips under
beams and filling in the voids with solder and finishing by grinding will not be
acceptable
Wherever welds occur on surfaces not finished by grinding and polishing, such welds
and the accompanying discolouration shall be suitably coated in the factory by means
of metallic base paint to prevent the possibility of progressive corrosion to such joints.
3.4 Carbon Steel
3.4.1 Generally
Steel components to be hot dip galvanised after fabrication unless alternative
corrosion protection is approved.
9
Version 1.0
NPQS
Do not cut, drill or work galvanised members.
3.4.2 Metal Material

3.4.2.1 Steel Plates and Shapes
To BS EN 10113:
3.4.2.2 Cold Rolled Steel
BS 1449: Section 1.3, matte finish.
3.4.2.3 Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel Sheets
To BS EN 10143.
3.4.2.4 Cold Formed Steel Hollow Section
To BS 6363.
3.4.2.5 Welding Materials
To BS 6363.
3.4.2.6 Concrete Inserts
Cast steel or malleable bolts, washers, and shims, hot-dipped galvanized.
3.4.2.7 Fasteners
To BS EN 3506-2
3.4.3 Welding of Steel

To BS 499: Part 1: & Part 2:
3.5 Aluminium Alloy Components
3.5.1 Aluminium Alloy Plate, Sheets and Strip

BS EN 485: acceptable 3003 – H14 and 5005 – H14 alloy and temper combinations
for sheet and plate subject to fabrications, finish and structural requirements. Provide
3.0 mm minimum nominal thickness.
3.5.2 Aluminium Alloy Bars

Extruded tube sections and hollow sections : BS EN 485, acceptable alloy and
temper combinations for 6063-T5 and 6063-T6 for extrusion subject to fabrication ,
finish and structural requirement. Nominal wall thickness of 3.0 mm or greater is
required for structural extrusions. Minimum nominal wall thickness for non-structural
trim shall be 1.5 mm.
3.5.3 Aluminium Alloy Drawn Tubes

BS EN 485, acceptable alloy and temper combinations 6063-T5 and 6063-T6.
3.5.4 Welding of Aluminium

Welding of aluminium shall be done in the factory and in conformance to BS EN
1011-4: Part 1,Weld shall use insert gas process using an electric arc with a
protective envelope of argon gas. Oxyacetylene welding is not permitted as a
substitute. Do not solder aluminium.
Weld aluminium where specifically approved by the Superintendent.
10
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.6 Prefinished Metals

Prefinished metals may be used if methods of fabrication do not damage or alter
appearance of finish.
3.7.1 Generally
Submit suitable fasteners to the SO.
3.7.1.1 Fasteners to be to the appropriate, as agreed with the SO and unless
otherwise stated, to be of the same metal as the component with matching
coating and finish.
3.7.1.2 Where a particular fixing or fastening is not shown or fully detailed, design
the fixing in order to fulfil the performance criteria.
3.7.1.3 Stainless Steel Fasteners: Fixings and fasteners shall comply with BS EN
ISO 3506-1 and BS EN ISO 3506-2. Unless noted otherwise, grade A4
shall be used for visible fasteners, in all other circumstances grade A2
shall be used.
3.7.1.4 Screws: Provide Brass countersunk head screws for all internal items,
provide brass cups for screws that are likely to be removed for access.
3.7.1.5 Nails: No nail heads shall be visible on exposed surfaces. Nails in wet
areas to be corrosion protected or non-corrosive.
3.7.2 Methods
Concealed fixings are to be adopted unless otherwise shown on drawings.
Locate face fixings in unobtrusive positions.
3.7.3 Strength
Allow minimum safety factor of 2.5 in addition to the anchorage design safety factor.
Where requested on drawings supply a torque setting for bolted or screwed
fastenings.
Structural anchorage to be by two or more fixing devices.
3.8.1 Generally
Apply coats after completion of fabrication and drilling of all fixing holes.
Remove all burrs and sharp amuses prior to coating.
3.8.2 Galvanizing
Galvanizing shall be to BS EN ISO 1461.
Provide all necessary vent and drain holes in approved locations and seal to approval
after galvanizing.
3.8.3 Electrolytically Zinc Coating

Electrolytically zinc coated cold rolled steel flat products to BS EN 10152.
11
Version 1.0
NPQS
3.8.4 Chromium Plating

Chromium plating shall be to BSEN 12540.
3.8.5 Vitreous Enamelling

Vitreous enamelling to steel surfaces shall be to BS 3830.
3.8.6 Externally Painted Steel

Refer to section A1-80-3 “External Painting and Coating”, clause 3.1.
3.8.7 Anodizing
Comply with AS1231 thickness grade 25.
3.8.8 PVF2
Wet applied fluoropolymer to comply with ASTM 2605-2 1998.
Resin content minimum of 70%, minimum coating 25 microns.
3.8.9 Polyester Powder Coating

Comply with AS3715.
Minimum thickness 50 microns. Submit suitable thickness to the SO.
3.9 Facings
3.9.1 Stainless steel facing

Type 316, 1.5mm thick conforming to BS 4360. Finish as indicated in clause 3.1 or
3.9.2 Plastic laminate facing

Unless otherwise specified, provide 0.8 to 1 mm thick Durability classified D4,
performance rated HD-heavy duty-to BS 4965 and BS EN 438-2.
3.10 Glass
3.10.1 General
Provide glass to conform with type and properties as set out in clause 3.1 or as
indicated in the drawings.
3.10.2 Laminated
Comply with ASTM C 1172.
Bear marks indicating its nature and processor.
Refer to clause 3.1 for type and thickness to be used on both sides of the laminate.

To conform with SS 341.
Provide identification marks indicating its nature and processor on each pane.
12
Version 1.0
NPQS

compliance with the fire integrity rating required.
3.11 Ironmongery
Comply with:
a. BS EN 179 Emergency exit devices
b. BS EN 1125 Panic exit devices
c. BS EN 1154 Controlled door closing devices
d. BS EN 1155 Electrically powered hold open devices for swing doors
e. BS EN 1303 Cylinders for locks-requirements and test methods
f. BS EN 1935 Single axis hinges
g. BS EN 12051 Door and window bolts
h. BS EN 3506 –1 Stainless steel fasteners
Location and type as set out on drawings/schedule. Provide proprietary products or
performance specified items as indicated in clause 3.1 or submit suitable product to
the SO.
Ironmongery in kitchens, bathrooms and wet areas shall be corrosion resistant.
Hinges on kitchen unit doors to open to 90 °.
3.12 Accessories
3.12.1 Gaskets
Use extruded EPDM complying with provisions of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45,
Cellular rubber to ASTM C 509.
Provide Silicone free dry PVC push-in gaskets mitred at corners.
3.12.2 Sealants
Use Silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. Where specified provide
proprietary products as indicated in clause 3.1 or submit suitable product to the SO.
3.12.3 Adhesives
Use Proprietary products as indicated in clause 3.1 or submit suitable product to the
SO.
13
Version 1.0
NPQS
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Fabrication
Verify dimension and clearances on site prior to shop fabrication. Raise to SO’s
attention, discrepancies and deviations and submit adjustments to be made to
accommodate these discrepancies and tolerance.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. Locate joints
only as indicated on the architectural drawings.
4.2 Construction of Fixtures
4.2.1 Working with Timber Components

4.2.1.1 Moisture Content
During delivery, storage, and fixing and thereafter too practical completion maintain
conditions of temperature and humidity to suit specified moisture content(s) of timber
components.
4.2.2 Trims
Wherever possible fabricate in un-jointed lengths between angles or ends of runs.
Where running joints are unavoidable obtain approval of location and method of
jointing. Use Mitre angle joints unless otherwise specified.
4.2.3 Completion
Ensure that doors and drawers are accurately aligned within tolerances of the hinges
and runners as established by cabinetry ironmongery manufacturers. Adjust as
necessary to ensure smooth operation.
Check, adjust and lubricate hardware as necessary to ensure correct functioning.
4.2.4 Working with Metalworks

4.2.4.1 Grinding, Polishing and Finishing
Welded exposed joints are to be suitably ground flush with adjoining material. All
ground surfaces shall be smooth and consistent with good workmanship.
Exercise care in all grinding operations to avoid excessive heating of metal and metal
discoloration.
Remove grain of rough grinding by successive polishing operations. Texture of final
polishing operation shall be uniform and smooth.
4.2.4.2 Joints
Butt joints and contact joints, wherever they occur, shall be close fitting and shall not
require solder as filler.
Wherever sheared edges occur, they shall be free of burrs, fins or irregular
projections and shall be finished over such shear edges.
14
Version 1.0
NPQS
Neatly finish mitres or bull nose with under edges of material ground to uniform
condition. Do not overlap materials.
4.2.4.3 Shims
Separate all pairs of moving surfaces with friction reducing pads. Pads shall have/be:
a. minimum 3 mm thickness,
b. sufficiently reduce friction to permit movement,
c. resistant to wear,
d. positively retained in position ( open ended slots are not acceptable ).
e. not be subjected to heat damage from welding , cutting or to excessive pressure
from over tightening of bolts.
Plastic shims are acceptable at static connections for which the shims transfer only
compressive forces.
Wood shims shall not be used.
4.2.5 Doors
Where timber lipping is specified, provide12mm hardwood lipping, mechanically or
adhesive fixed to all faces of door.
4.2.5.1 Facing
a. Veneer facing: provide balancing veneer in all instances.
b. Laminate facing: Bond laminate facing to face of door with adhesive
recommended by the laminate manufacturer. Provide balancing laminate in all
instances. Laminate to be terminated 12mm from face of door at hardwood lipping
unless shown otherwise on drawings.
4.3 Sanitary-ware Installation
4.3.1 Taps
Fix securely, making a watertight seal with the appliance. Place hot tap to left of cold
tap as viewed by user of appliance.
4.3.2 Waste/Overflows
Bed in waterproof jointing compound and fix with resilient washer between appliance
and backnut.
4.4 Fixing Proprietary Fitting Items

Fix in position horizontally and vertically. Provide sufficient means to support each
fixture in an adequate and rigid manner, which permits no perceptible movement .by
manually applied forces.
Provide additional supports where fixtures or fittings are mounted onto Dry walls.
Use corrosion resistant fixings in all kitchen or bathroom locations.
Use concealed fixings whenever possible.
Seal all joints walls and floor joints on sanitary and kitchen fixtures.
15
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
a. Name of the manufacturer of the fittings and include of copies of technical data
relating to each of the items listed.
b. Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and

5.1.2.1 Method Statement
Prepare an installation strategy, prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings.
a. Elevations of all fixtures and fittings including the supply and drainage pipe work
connections. Location of electrical connections and sockets associated with
items.
b. Sections at scale 1:5
c. Plan location of all items.
d. Supply one example of each of the ironmongery items
5.1.2.3 Loading Criteria
Submit to SO, the loading permitted of the fittings and fixtures shown on plan. The
loadings to agree with normal expectation of use in categories such as residential or
commercial etc., including the provision for maintenance loads. Format of
submission to be agreed with the SO.

a. Laminate
b. Sanitary ware
c. Taps and shower valves

No item.
16
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1.5 Warranty
1.4.5.

No item.
5.2.1 Samples Required

Submit the following samples:
a. Veneered panel 300mmx 300mm of all specified types
b. All taps and shower valves used on the job.
c. All items of ironmongery used on the job.
d. Sample of additional items as set out in the PSD
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Provide mock-ups for items as indicated in the PSD.
5.3 Inspection
If directed by the SO, allow access for inspection at the factory or off-site fabrication
areas of fittings for the fabrication or treatment procedures, e.g. timber treatment,
glass treatment, painting process.
5.4 Tests
No item.
17
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages

A12-20 Signages
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.4 Trade Preamble
2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3 MAT E RI AL S
3.1 Types
3.2 Materials
3.3 Finishes
3.5 Facings
3.6 Accessories
4 WO RKMANS HIP
5.1 Submissions
5.3 Inspections
5.4 On-Site Tests
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
1 GENERAL
Read this Section with G01-010 "General Requirements" and all other contract documents
1.1 Scope
This Section covers the requirements for signage in building projects and includes the
following:
(a) Main building signage
(b) Room signage
(c) Directional signage
(d) Statutory signage
(e) Graphics
(f) External road signs
(g) Any other Signage and Graphics Works described in the contract
documents and drawings.
Read this Section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the following sections:
A02-030 Plasters and Renders

A02-020 Paintings and Coatings
A02-040 Wall Tiling
A02-050 Glass Partitions

1.3.1 Standards and Codes
requirements of the standards and codes listed below or referenced in the body of the
Specification. Alternative standards and codes may be proposed for approval by the SO,
provided it can be demonstrated that the alternative standards and codes comply with the
requirements of the standards specified. All standards and codes quoted are the current
version, unless specific year references are noted.
In the event that the standards or codes are partially superseded or have become
obsolete, refer to the current edition or the approved substitution for the relevant
clauses.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Singapore Standards
SS 5 Methods of test for paints, varnishes and

related materials
SS 7 Paint – Finishing, gloss enamel
SS 472 15A plugs and switched socket-outlets for
domestic and similar purposes
SS 599 Guide for Wayfinding Signage
SS 605 Guide for age-friendly homes
Other Standards
BS EN 438-2 Decorative high-pressure laminates (HPL)

sheets based on thermosetting resins – Part 2:
Determination of properties.
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steel – Part 1: Lists of stainless steels
BS EN 10088-3 Stainless steels: Part 3: Technical Delivery
Conditions for Semi-Finished Products, Bars,
Rods, Wire, Sections and Bright Products of
Corrosion Resisting Steels for General Purposes
BS EN 10259 Cold rolled stainless steelstrip and cut lengths
BS EN 12206-1 Paints and Varnishes – Coating of Aluminium and
Aluminium Alloys for Architectural Purposes
BS EN 12540 Corrosion protection-nickel, copper, chromium
coatings
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron
and steel articles – specifications and test
methods
BS EN ISO 3506 Mechanical properties of corrosion resistant
stainless steel fasteners
BS 438 Decorative high pressure (HPL) laminate sheet
based on thermosetting resins
BS 1449 Steel plate sheet and strip
BS 1461 Galvanising
BS 2901 Filler rods and wires for gas shielded arc welding
BS 4965 Decorative laminated plastic sheet veneered
panels
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
1.3.2 Regulations
Refer to the following regulations for compliance in carrying out the Works:
Building and Construction Authority – Approved Document("Approved Document")
Code on Accessibility in the Built Environment
Code of Practice for Fire Precautions in Buildings ("Fire Code”)
The above regulations refer to the latest edition (including any amendments) that are
currently in use.
Refer to the following technical references for guidance in carrying out the Works:
Building and Construction Authority – Construction Quality Assessment System

(CONQUAS) Manual
1.4 Trade Preamble

Engage experienced and qualified personnel for detail development based on the design
intent indicated in the drawings and schedules. Allow a minimum of 14 days for the review
of each submission, mock-up and associated resubmissions/amendments.
Submit the following to the SO for review:
(a) All necessary details for the fabrication and installation of the fixtures and
fittings, including interfaces with other works and connections.
(b) Manufacturers and products for fixtures and fitting items when called for.
(c) Method of fabrication and erection/installation.
(d) Site and actual size of components shall be measured and recorded in the shop
drawings. Adjustments shall be proposed as required and explained to the SO for
review and acceptance.

Co-ordinate the Works, particularly the interfacing with the following trades:
(a) Internal walls including masonry and dry walls
(b) Internal applied finishes
(c) Mechanical and electrical services
Liaise and co-ordinate all mechanical and electrical services, exposed, or concealed,
without compromise on the performance integrity of each individual service/system.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
1.4.3 Provision of Spare Materials
Deliver to Site in strong protective packages marked for identification, and store where
directed, components and materials for future replacement and repair.
Supply the following spare material and store in an area agreed with the SO:
Quantity
Item
The confirmation of the requirement for the spare material shall be made at the time of the
completion of the Works. If the SO chooses to omit the requirement, then the full cost
omission shall be made to the Employer.
Prepare and submit a quality control plan for the SO’s review and acceptance,
including the following:
(a) Preparation and installation procedures
(b) Co-ordination with related works
(c) Construction programme related to this Works
Compliance to required inspections, testing, certificate, calculations and material
usage. Competent technicians shall be provided to check and co-ordinate the
installation.
The SO is the sole judge on the acceptance in quality of works.
1.4.5 Warranty
No item.
No item.
1.1.2 Definitions
No item.
1.1.3 Abbreviations
1.1.3.1 CNC
Computer Numerical Control
1.1.3.2 RI
Registered Inspector
1.1.3.3 TOP
Temporary Occupation Permit
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Take into account the requirements listed below.
2.1.1 Design Intent
Drawings provided by the Consultant are to illustrate design intent only and shall not be
used for fabrication and construction.
Prepare shop drawings, samples, mock-ups, etc., and submit to the SO for review
and acceptance. Works can proceed only when such items have been approved
by the SO.
2.1.2 Technical Compliance

Submit and obtain approval for all signs that require authority’s approval or engineering
design. All proposals shall be in compliance with current requirements of the statutory
authority.
Braille and tactile signage shall be provided based on BCA’s requirements. All FSSD
statutory signs shall comply with FSSD’s requirements.
2.1.3 Co-ordination
Co-ordinate and review all drawings by Consultant along with related specifications.
Such coordination includes necessary connections to work of other trades and potential
conflicts.
Provide all work required for complete fabrication and installation of all approved
signage and graphics.
2.1.4 Temporary Signage
Include temporary signs that need clearance from authority. These signs shall be for BCA
TOP or FSSD RI inspections. Temporary signs shall be printed on laminated paper to
actual size, or other material as required by the SO.
3 MATERIALS
3.1 Types
For schedule of signage works for this project, refer to the details shown in the
architectural drawings and relevant cut sheets.
3.2 Materials
3.2.1 General
Materials shall be new and free of defects and imperfections.
Provide materials as shown and detailed in the drawings and as specified in this Section.
Exterior signs shall be provided with protective coating to ensure colour integrity and
abrasion resistance. All hinged openings shall be weatherproofed to prevent moisture,
excessive dust, insects, and debris from accumulating within cabinet areas.
Structural requirements shall be designed for by signage manufacturer to resist a minimum of

30
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
psf wind loads, or otherwise stated in the local building codes and authority. Thermal
movements shall be considered in the design to minimise distortions and excessive
deflections.
3.2.2 Aluminium
Aluminium sheet and plate: ASTM B209 alloy and temper recommended by producer
and finisher suitable for type of use and finish indicated. Properties for strength and
durability shall be at least alloy 5005-H32.
Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B221, allow and temper recommended by producer and
finisher suitable for type of use and finish indicated. Strength and durability properties
shall be at least that of alloy 6063-T5.
3.2.3 Glass
Use heat-soaked tempered glass.
3.2.4 Stainless Steel
Use galvanised steel sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either
commercial or forming steel.
Use stainless steel sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, type 304, stretcher-
leveled standard of flatness.
Steel members fabricated from plate or bar stock: ASTM A 529/A 529M or ASTM A 572/A
572M, 42,000-psi (290-MPa) minimum yield strength.
For steel exposed to view on completion, provide materials with flat, smooth surfaces
without blemishes. Do not use materials whose surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
3.2.4.1 Finishes
(a) 1G/2G (3A) Ground: Coarse, unidirectional texture; low reflectivity.
(b) 1J/2J (3B or 4) Brushed or dull polished: Unidirectional texture; smoother than
(c) 1K/2K (5) Satin polished: Smoother than 1J/2J. Suitable for marine and
external architectural applications.
Bright buffed/polished: Non-directional finish with high degree of reflectivity achieved by
mechanical polishing.
3.2.5 High Pressure Laminates
Graphics must be manufactured as Custom High Pressure Laminate (CHPL). CHPL

graphic sign material is composed of several layers of phenolic resin impregnated kraft
filler paper, a digitally imaged graphic, a layer of melamine resin, surfaced by a layer of
translucent exterior UV / graffiti overlay protection. The entire panel, including exterior
overlay, must be bonded under heat and extreme pressure to form a composite panel.
The finish must be smoothly textured with reflectivity of 30 ± 5 gloss units. The CHPL
graphics must be warranted for a minimum of 10 years against fading, delamination, and
weather deterioration.
All cutting and finishing shall be done using a CNC router. Graphics must be made
using 12- colour high definition printing technology.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Vendor shall provide a sample from a supplied file to confirm quality. Panels must be
entirely made locally.
3.2.6 Acrylic
Acrylic shall be made with methyl methacrylate polymers, premium quality. All acrylic
materials shall be medium impact grade.
Provide solid sheet, laminated sheet or cast acrylic in size, thickness, clarity, opacity,
texture and colour required for work as indicated in drawings.
Sheet thickness shall not vary by more than 5%. All plastic used in outdoor or semi-
outdoor environment shall be able to withstand the local outdoor condition well, in
properties such as UV-resistance, fading-resistance and discoloration-resistance.
Applied inks, paints, and coatings shall be compatible with the acrylic material so as
not to cause chipping, cracking, fading, peeling, delaminating or other such
deformation.
3.2.7 Polycarbonate Sheet
Polycarbonate sheet shall have crystal transparency and be of the best quality and free
from specks, air bubbles, wanes, scratches, air-hole and other defects. Polycarbonate
sheet damaged or discoloured shall be removed and replaced with new polycarbonate
sheet or similar colour and texture at the expense of the Sub-Contractor.
3.2.8 Adhesive Vinyl Film
Typography and other graphic elements shall be 0.003 – 0.004 inch thick, permanent,
self-adhesive vinyl, in the colours as specified for each specific sign by the SO.
Coloured vinyl shall be translucent for use in internally lit signs. Coloured translucent
vinyl shall be applied to flat polycarbonate sheets and shall be durable, dimensionally
stable and suitable for use on internally illuminated sign faces. The vinyl shall have
uniform colour in both reflected and transmitted light, with a low gloss to eliminate glare.
3.3 Finishes
3.3.1 General
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
Finishing: The SO shall be the final judge of acceptability of any variations in

appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces, typically if such variations are within one-
half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable.
3.3.2 Aluminium
Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer’s standard class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or
thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.
Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying

with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium
gloss.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
3.3.3 Steel
Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel.
Expose steel to allow to rust.
3.3.4 Acrylic Polyurethane Paint
Use an ultraviolet inhibited aliphatic, acrylic polyurethane system engineered for extreme
colour and gloss retention. Paint shall be free from lead and heavy metals.
All paints used shall be UV resistant.
Adhere strictly to the application specifications of the manufacturers of paint and ink
components, including, but not limited to, solvent wipes, metal pre-treatment, metal
activators, paint reducers and catalysts.
3.3.5 Silk Screen / Screen Printing
Provide photo processed screening, arranged to furnish sharp and solid images without
edge build-up or bleeding of the coating.
Pattern-cut screens may be used for non-repeat copy, provided that final image copy is
equal to photo screen in quality.
Provide only weather and UV-resistant coating materials, compatible with intended
substrates.
3.3.6 Powder Coating
Aluminium surfaces shall receive the specified polyester powder organic coating
meeting the minimum requirements of BS EN 12206-1.
Coating shall be spray-applied under factory conditions to pre-treated base metals in

strict accordance with the coating system manufacturer's recommendations.
Surface quality of the coating shall be smooth and free of imperfections such as excessive
roughness, flow lines, bubbles, orange peel effect, inclusions, craters, blisters, scratches,
or any other unacceptable flaws. Coating shall be opaque and uniform, within the range of
approved upper and lower limit samples when viewed under a uniform light source such as
indirect daylight.
3.4.1 General
(a) Fasteners shall be as appropriate, and as agreed with the SO and unless
otherwise stated, shall be of the same metal as the component with matching
coating and finish.
(b) Where a particular fixing or fastening is not shown or fully detailed, design the
fixing in order to fulfil the performance criteria.
(c) Joining methods shall be in accordance with best practices and recommendations
made by the manufacturer of the materials to be joined, using fasteners and
adhesives that will not fade, discolour or delaminate as a result of continued
exposure to sunlight, heat, cold or moisture.
(d) Stainless steel fasteners: Fixings and fasteners shall comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1
and BS EN ISO 3506-2. Unless noted otherwise, grade A4 shall be used for visible
fasteners, in all other circumstances grade A2 shall be used.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
(e) Screws: Provide brass countersunk head screws for all internal items, and brass
cups for screws that are likely to be removed for access.
(f) Nails: No nail heads shall be visible on exposed surfaces. Nails in wet areas
shall be corrosion-protected or non-corrosive.
(g) Additional frame support shall be provided by the Contractor if necessary, at no
extra cost to ensure stability and durability of the signs.
(h) Avoid using aluminium mounting elements for stainless steel signage to prevent
galvanic corrosion.
(i) Avoid using stainless steel signage at area exposed to frequent chemical wash.
3.5 Facings
Type 316, 1.5 mm thick, conforming to BS 4360. Finish as indicated in Section

A12- 020:Clause:3.1 or shown in the drawings.
Unless otherwise specified, provide 0.8 mm to 1 mm thick Durability classified D4,

performance rated heavy duty (HD), to BS 4965 and BS EN 438-2.
All laminates shall be installed in the similar "grain" direction between different
interfacing sections or parts of the similar fitting.
3.6 Accessories
3.6.1 Gaskets
Use extruded ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) complying with provisions
of BS 4255-1 shore hardness 35-45, cellular rubber to ASTM C 509.
Provide silicone-free, dry PVC push-in gaskets mitred at corners.
3.6.2 Sealants
Use silicone based to BS 5889, Type B with fungicide. Where specified, provide
proprietary products as indicated in Section A12-020:Clause:3.1 or submit suitable
product to the SO.
3.6.3 Adhesives
Use proprietary products as indicated in Section A12-020:Clause:3.1 or submit suitable

product to the SO.
4 WORKMANSHIP
4.1.1 Fabrication
Verify dimension and clearances on site, prior to shop fabrication. Bring to the SO’s
attention, discrepancies and deviations, and propose adjustments to be made to
accommodate these discrepancies and tolerances to the SO for review.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. All signs shall be flat, true and free
of waviness.
All mechanical fasteners shall be countersunk, filled, ground smooth and painted so as to
render the fasteners visually imperceptible, unless otherwise specified as exposed. The
heads of exposed mounting fasteners shall match the colour and finish of the sign area
where the fasteners are.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural adequacy of signs mounted, and
shall submit structural calculations for framing, fastening and fixing details with the PE’s
certifications for SO’s approval, at his own expense.
4.1.2 Delivery
Materials shall be delivered in sealed packages based on the installation schedule to

minimise storage and unnecessary handling.
Delivered materials shall be inspected by an appointed technical officer to ensure

condition and accuracy as per approved samples.
Unloading should be carried out in good weather conditions.
Store on site all signage materials only when the Works is completely enclosed and
generally dry. Materials shall not be exposed to sunlight or subjected to wetting.
4.1.3 Protection
Materials shall be stored in an enclosed space that is well

ventilated. Area shall be kept clean and dry, and free from
potential hazards. Storage shall be planned to avoid unnecessary
handling or shifting.
All materials shall be protected with plastic sheets during storage or completion of
part installation whilst awaiting installation of adjacent/intersecting components.
4.1.4 Installation
Areas of installation shall be weathertight before commencement of

installation. All surfaces shall be levelled, cleaned and finished prior to the
installation.
All signs shall be installed per mounting standards in the designated locations as indicated
in the shop drawings or as determined on site and shall be set plumb, level, and square
and at the proper elevations and planes, and placed in accurate alignment with adjacent
work.
Conduct levelness checks in the presence of the appointed technical officer.
Verify the dimensions shown in the shop drawings at the Site and shall allow for
necessary tolerances.
The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination with other trades for proper
installation of signage works.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
4.1.5 Checks
Ensure meticulous, close control and monitoring of workmanship and quality. Any
defective, unsightly or improperly fabricated or installed components which cannot be
satisfactorily corrected shall be replaced with new components at the Contractor's own
expense. Any physical damage including scratches, dents, abrasions, pitting, etc., shall
be made good to the SO’s satisfaction.
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Technical Submissions

Include in construction programme, event for submission of the following information:
(a) Name of the manufacturer of the fittings, with copies of technical data relating to
each of the items listed.
(b) Information of current or completed similar jobs during the previous 5 years and
5.1.2.1 Method Statement
Prepare an installation strategy, prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings.
Prepare and submit co-ordinated shop drawings incorporating works from all relevant trades
and adjoining parts of the building. A minimum of 14 days shall be allocated for review
following each submission/ resubmission until the acceptance of the SO.
Include the following:
(a) Plan, elevation, sections
(b) Details, including at scale 1:1 and 1:5
(c) Plan location of all items
(d) One sample of each proposed type
Shop drawings shall incorporate elevations, letter spacing and dimensions of letter
heights, details of fabrication and erection, including all materials, shapes, dimensions,
finishes, wind loads and method of connections. Include full size details of all exposed
edges, joints between materials and details which affect the appearance.
permission to proceed has been obtained.
5.1.2.3 Loading Criteria
Submit the loading permitted of all fittings and fixtures, which shall comply with
normal expectations of use in relevant categories including provision of
maintenance loads.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
components, certifying that the respective material is of the correct grade, strength, size,
finish, etc. and is in accordance with the relevant codes and standards specified.
5.1.4 Quality Control Plan Submissions

Prepare and submit a quality control plan based on ISO 9001 for the SO’s review
and acceptance, including the following:
(a) Preparation and installation procedures
(b) Co-ordination with related works
(c) Construction programme related to this works.
All signage shall be obtainable from a single source manufacturer.
Competent technicians shall be engaged to check and co-ordinate the installation. The
SO is the sole judge on the acceptance in quality of Works.
5.1.5 Warranty
Compile product warranty and system warranty for submission to the SO
No selection or Works shall commence prior to the acceptance of warranty by the SO.
Prepare and submit a maintenance/replacement manual covering all components and

accessories. Refer to G01-010: Clause:1.4.5 for details.
5.2.1 Samples
Provide the following samples:

(a) All types of materials in adequate size
(b) All types of adhesives, fasteners and fixings
(c) Other samples as listed below:
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Provide a full-size mock-up for each sign type as directed by the SO. Utilise the same
materials and installation methods for the prototype as intended for the final Work.
Final location of signs: Location of signs as shown on the drawings is for general
information only and is not representative of the exact final location. The exact final
locations of signs shall be directed by the SO at the Site or by previous arrangement. The
Contractor shall arrange for meetings at the Site to accommodate the SO’s direction for
final locations.
Version 1.0
NPQS
A12-20 Signages
5.3 Inspections
Allow for inspection at the factory or off-site fabrication areas as directed by the SO.
Allow for inspection on site by technical officer following each preparation and fix.
If directed by the SO, allow access for inspection at the factory or off-site fabrication
areas of fittings for the fabrication or treatment procedures, e.g., timber treatment,
glass treatment, painting process.
5.4 On-Site Tests
No item.
Version 1.0
Architectural Particular Specification
NPQS
General Requirements
Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS Page
1. GENERAL 3
1.1 Project Particulars 3
1.2 General Description of the Works 3
2.1 General Requirement 8
2.2 Environment 8
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
This section sets out the general requirements for carrying out any works for the
project and shall be read in conjunction with all relevant work sections and other
contract documents.
1.1 Project Particulars

The project involved the development of Egg Layer Farm at Kranji Way/Neo Tiew Road.
The plot is estimated to be about 10 hectares adjacent to Kranji Reservoir. It is a
brownfield site occupied by the former Kranji Transmission Station.
The topography of the site varies from an elevation of +10.6 SHD ~ +5.2 SHD along the
Northern face, +10.8 SHD ~ +6.4 SHD along the Southern face, +7.7 SHD ~ +5.9 SHD
along the Eastern face and +11.2 SHD ~ +10.9 SHD along the Western face. Refer to
Topography Plan in Tender Document.
The development comprises of the following buildings and facilities:
1.1.1 Egg Layer Houses (11 Layer houses and 1 Aviary house)
1.1.2 Pullet Houses (7 houses)
1.1.3 GP Plant
1.1.4 Liquid Egg Building
1.1.5 Combustion Plant
1.1.6 Wastewater Treatment Plant
1.1.7 Spent Hen Shelter
1.1.8 Vehicle Disinfectant Shelter (3 nos.)
1.1.9 Human Disinfectant Building (2 nos.)
1.1.10 Production Rest Shelter (2 nos.)
1.1.11 Egg Conveyor Support
1.1.12 Satellite Office (2nos.)
1.1.13 Workshop & Store
1.1.14 Corporate Office
1.1.15 Layer House Dormitory
1.1.16 Pullet House Dormitory
1.1.17 Ancillary Dormitory
1.1.18 Substation Building
1.1.19 Bin Centre
1.1.20 Guard House (3 nos.)
1.1.21 Silo
1.1.22 Detention cum Retention Tank (2 nos.) with pump system for retention tank
1.1.23 Vehicle Parking Apron
1.1.24 New Slip Road from Existing Kranji Way Road to Farm Entrance
1.1.25 New Entrance from KTS Road
1.1.26 Road and Drain Network including Culvert
1.1.27 Sewer and Sanitary Network
1.1.28 Chicken Manure Conveyor Trench
1.1.29 Wastewater Piping Network to WWTP and from Treated Water to Holding
Tank with Pump System
1.1.30 Potable Water Tank and Pump with Pipe Network
1.1.31 Hydrant, Hydrant Tank and Pump with Pipe network
1.1.32 Sprinkler Tank and piping
1.1.33 Fence and Gates (motorized and manual)
1.1.34 Hedges and Turfing
1.1.35 Street Lighting
1.1.36 Building M&E Services
Version 1.0
1.2 General Description of the Works
The works embraced in this Contract comprise the followings, which by no means is
exhaustive and shall include any other works not specifically mentioned but are
necessary for the completion of the Works:
1.2.1 Temporary Hoarding and Project Signboard
1.2.2 Demolish and decommissioned existing abandoned sump pump and sewer pipe
to existing manhole
1.2.3 Site clearance and minor earthworks involving cut and fill to proposed platform
level indicated in Drawings
1.2.4 Construction of the following Buildings:
1.2.4.1 GP Plant
1.2.4.2 Liquid Egg Building
1.2.4.3 Combustion Plant
1.2.4.4 Wastewater Plant building and RC tanks and ancillary structures,
excluding plant equipment, including treated piping to respective
buildings indicated in Drawings
1.2.4.5 Wastewater Sump
1.2.4.6 Spent Hen Shelter
1.2.4.7 Vehicle Disinfectant Shelter
1.2.4.8 Human Disinfectant Building
1.2.4.9 Production Rest Shelter
1.2.4.10 Satellite Office
1.2.4.11 Workshop and Store Building
1.2.4.12 Corporate Office
1.2.4.13 Layer House Dormitory
1.2.4.14 Pullet House Dormitory
1.2.4.15 Ancillary Dormitory
1.2.4.16 Substation Building
1.2.4.17 Bin Centre
1.2.4.18 Guard House
1.2.4.19 Detention/Retention Tank and Discharge Concrete Pipe Outlets
1.2.4.20 Vehicle Parking Apron
1.2.4.21 New Slip Road from Existing Kranji Way Road to Farm Entrance
1.2.4.22 New Entrance from KTS Road
1.2.4.23 Road and Drain Network including Culvert
1.2.4.24 Heavy Vehicle and Car Parking Lots
1.2.4.25 Sewer and Sanitary Network
1.2.4.26 Common Manure Conveyor RC Trench and Culvert
1.2.4.27 Potable Water Tank and Pump with Pipe Network
1.2.4.28 Hydrant, Hydrant Tank and Pump with Pipe Network
1.2.4.29 Sprinkler Tank and Fire Pump House
1.2.4.30 Egg Conveyor Bridge
1.2.4.31 Linkway Shelter
1.2.4.32 Fence and Gates (motorized and manual)
1.2.4.33 Signage Wall
1.2.4.34 Hedges and Turfing
1.2.4.35 Street Lighting
1.2.4.36 All Building M&E Services
NPQS
1.2.5 Construction of RC Foundation only and provision of manpower for installation

and erection of the following Structures:
1.2.5.1 Egg Layer Houses and Aviary
1.2.5.2 Pullet Houses
1.2.5.3 Silo
1.2.5.4 Egg Conveyor Support
1.2.5.5 Combustion Plant
1.2.6 Supply and installation of electrical cabling works from control room of respective
area of the Layer Houses and Pullet Houses.
1.2.7 Supply and installation of propriety human disinfectant booth for Clean Area
Preparation Entrance, Front Entrance and Drive Reception Area of GP Plant.
1.2.8 Supply and install Air compressors with ancillary piping to the respective
equipment for GP Plant and Combustion Plant.
Version 1.0
NA to
MC1
NPQS
7Version 1.1
NPQS
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standards
1.4 Trade Preambles

3.2 Material Specification

5.4 Tests
7Version 1.1
NPQS
1.0 GENERAL
This document is supplementary to Section A1-80-3 External Painting and Coating of the NPQS
and sets out Project Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All
modifications and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the
NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on exterior surfaces of buildings
and other external elements as described. This section also includes all requirements relating to
painting and coating for external structural and nonstructural steelwork. Notwithstanding this
section, all structural steelwork shall be undercoated with an anti-rust inhibitor in strict accordance
with the structural specifications.
All exterior surfaces including, but not limited to:
a. Steel door frames
b. Metal flashing, and coping
c. Decorative reveals and trims.
d. Exterior Signage.
e. Pipe bollards and handrails.
f. Steel tubes and miscellaneous exterior metals.
g. Access ladders
h. External exposed structural and secondary steelwork at roof level.
i. Other items and surfaces noted on the Drawings
1.3 Standards
a. SS 5: All Parts Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
b. SS 7: Paint-finishing, gloss enamel.
c. SS 34: Undercoat paint for gloss enamel.
d. SS 37: Aluminum paint.
e. SS 38: Aluminum wood primer.
f. SS 150: Emulsion paints for decorative purpose

NPQS
g. SS 345: Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes.
h. SS 494: Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
i. SS 500: Elastomeric wall coatings
j. SS 542: Code of Practice for painting of buildings
k. SS 579: Water-based sealer for interior and exterior uses
l. SS 624: Water-based acrylic road marking paint.
m. SS 678: Solar reflective water-based coating
n. SS 685: Water-based primer for metal and wood
o. SS 686: Water-based enamel paint
p. Any other Standards as may be required by the Architect
1.4 Trade Preambles
1.4.1 Contractor Submission
Paints shall be from Nippon Paint (Singapore) or equivalent.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum five years documented experience
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section approved by
manufacturer
Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of paint, and other material(s) from single
source
To submit the following:

a. Product Technical Data Sheet: Provide TDS on all finishing products
b. Instructions (Method Statement): Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate

conditions requiring special attention, and recommended area coverage for specified product
c. Samples for Selection: Submit two paper chip samples illustrating range of colours
and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. Submit two paper
samples 300 x 300 mm in size for colours requested by Architect
d. Samples for Review: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colours and textures for
each colour and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on actual receiving
substrate, 600 x 600 mm in size
e. Product List: Provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color-coding
for all colours used for Owner’s later use in maintenance
f. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces
NPQS

Supply the following spare materials and store in an area agreed with the SO:
Spare Material Description Quantity Due Date

(Size,Type, etc)
Dilution comprises of liquid potassium Liquid Application 3 drums of 20 Upon completion of
silicate, pure acrylate, stabilisers and litres (per site) project
additives; and it chemically reacts with the
substrate, is highly water vapor permeable,
highly resistant against weathering and non-
combustible, to SO approval.
A longlife exterior heat-reflective mineral Liquid Application 3 drums of 20 Upon completion of
silicate paint system with a modified litres (per site) project
potassium silicate binder. The paint system
offers water repellency, high vapor
permeability and forms a chemcial bond with
the mineral substrate, to SO approval
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide the following warranty in accordance with the conditions of contract:

Paint System 5 years
NPQS

With the exception of all internal off-form and fire-rated finishes that shall comply with the
Specification A1-80-1 External Painting and Coating, all internal paint and coating systems
for this project shall be GreenLabel-certified, reduced VOC and shall consist of the
following types: Internal paint and coating systems for this project shall consist of the
following types:
Area Features Paint System
EP1 External 3-coat system Sealer: 1 coat Vinilex 2000 Water-

Plastered  SGBP certified based Wall Sealer (SS:579)
Wall &  Solar reflective
Semi-  100% Acrylic Texture: 1 coat TexKote or Sand Dune
Exposed
Areas Finishing: 2 coats SolarCool (SS:678)
Low sheen
EP2 External 4-coat system (SS:7) Primer: 1 coat Crystalux Aluminium

Timber  Oil-based Wood Primer (SS:38)
substrates  Alkyd Enamel
 Weather-resistant Undercoat: 1 coat Crystalux Alkyd
 Anti-fungus property Resin Undercoat (SS:34)
 Tough and durable
 Good adhesion Finishing: 2 coats Crystalux Alkyd
 Excellent flow Resin Enamel (SS:7)
Gloss
EP3 External 3-coat system Primer: 1 coat Hi-Pon 20-03 Epoxy

Ferrous &  High Performance Red Oxide Primer
Non-ferrous  UV resistant
metal  Abrasion resistant Finishing: 2 coats Hi-Pon 50-01
 Chemical resistant Polyurethane Top Coat
 Low flame spread
 Anti-Corrosive Gloss
NPQS

3.2.1 Crystalux Aluminium Wood Primer (SS:38)
The primer shall be oil-modified Phenolic vehicle with aluminium pigment as its primary
pigment. It is aluminium colour in semi-gloss finish.
The performance of the primer shall match or surpass the following:
PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD

Solid Content, % > 55 SS 38
Drying Time at 30 , Touch Dry 30 -
mins Hard Dry 240
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 16 -
Dry Film Thickness, microns 30 -
Aluminium Content, % 11 SS 38
Bend test, diameter mandrel, mm 6 SS 38
3.2.2 Crystalux Alkyd Resin Undercoat (SS:34)
The undercoat shall be high opacity and high solid undercoat that will effectively hide the
substrate and impart a good film build to the overall coating system. It is available in
standard range as per Nippon Paint colour card in matt finish
The performance of the undercoat shall match or surpass the following:

Opacity, % > 83 SS 34
mins Hard Dry 360
Pigment Content % (m/m) 60 SS 34
3.2.3 Crystalux Alkyd Resin Enamel (SS:7)
The finishing coat shall be an oil-modified alkyd paint with good durability and a good anti-
fungus property. It comes in various colours in full gloss finish.
The finishing coat shall have the following features:

 Weather resistant
 Anti-fungus property
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following:

NPQS
Solid Content, % 65 ± 2 SS 7
Drying Time at 30 , Touch Dry 120 SS 7
mins Hard Dry 270
Gloss (60° specular reflection), units 91 SS 7
Xenon-arc accelerated weathering 500 passed SS 7
hrs
3.2.4 Hi-Pon 20-03 Epoxy Red Oxide Primer
The primer is a two-pack amine-adduct cured epoxy primer designed for use as a high-
performance primer for ferrous and non-ferrous surfaces. It is red oxide colour in matt
finish.

Solid Content % (m/m) 50 ± 2 -
mins Hard Dry 180
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 6.3 – 8.3
Dry Film Thickness, microns 60 - 80
Pencil Hardness 6H ASTM D3363
Impact Test, 0.5kg x n height, cm 40 ASTM D2794
Salt Spray Test (5% NaCl), hours 480 ISO 7253
Bending Test, mm 8 ASTM D522
PAT on Galvanised Steel (6mm panel), 5.0 ISO 4624
MPa
3.2.5 Hi-Pon 50-01 Polyurethane Top Coat
The finishing coat shall be a two-pack, aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish coat. It provides
high durability, excellent gloss and colour retention with good abrasion, chemical and
impact resistance. It comes in various colours in high sheen finish.

 Abrasion resistant
 Chemical & impact resistance
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the following (based on white
colour):

Solid Content, % 60 ± 2 -
mins Hard Dry 420
NPQS
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 7.5 – 12.0 -

Dry Film Thickness, microns 50 – 80 -
Pull-off Adhesion Test, MPa ≥5 ISO 4624
Abrasion Resistance, weight loss ≤ 50 ASTM D522
(mg/1000cycles) Method A
Fire Propagation Index of < 12 BS 476 Part 6
performance, I
Sub-index <6
performance, i1
Surface spread of Flame Class 1 BS 576 Part 7
Carbon Dioxide Permeability, g/m².day < 4.0 BS EN 1062-6
Accelerated Weathering QUV A, min Passed 80% gloss ISO 16474-2
1500 hrs retention
Water Vapour Transmission, g/m².day < 2.70 ISO 7783-2
Chemical Resistance 10% H2SO4 168 ISO 2812-1
(Spot Test), hrs 10% NaOH
3.2.6 SolarCool (SS:678)
The topcoat is a premium 100% acrylic solar reflective cool coating that offers superior
weathering & algae resistant. The coating reflects a large amount of solar energy from the
sun and is able to reduce the surface temperature by up to 5°C*. It comes in various
colours in low sheen finish.

 Excellent resistance to alkaline and efflorescence
 Excellent weather resistance
 Excellent resistance to fungal and algal growth
 Excellent dirt pick-up resistance
 Long lasting colours
colour):

Solid Content, % 54 ± 2 SS:678
Opacity, % 93.3 SS:678
Drying Time at 30 , Touch Dry 30
SS:678
mins Hard Dry 60
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 10
Dry Film Thickness, microns 30-40 SS:678
Sheen (85° specular reflection), units 22.2 SS:678
VOC, g/L 6 SS:678
Algae Resistant No algal growth SS 678
Alkali Resistant passed SS 678
Accelerated weathering 1000 hrs passed SS 678
Wet Scrub Resistance, microns 2.61 SS 678
CIE L lightness value passed SS 678
NPQS
Before 3 months natural weathering

CIE LA* Lightness Value 0.97
Solar Reflectance Index, SRI 107.2 SS 678
Solar Reflectance, SR 0.86
Thermal Emittance, TE 0.86
After 3 months natural weathering
Solar Reflectance Index, SRI 103.5
SS 678
Dirt Pick Up Resistance, DPUR 96.37
3.2.7 Texture Coat: Sand Dune
The texture coat shall be a premium grade decorative sand texture coating. It consists of
fine aggregate bound by water-based weather resistant modified acrylic binder suitable for
external and internal surfaces. It is available in white colour card in matt finish
The performance of the texture coat shall match or surpass the following:

Solid Content % (m/m) ≥ 78 -
Viscosity, PS at 25°C 3,500 – 4,000 -
SGBP 4 Ticks  -
3.2.8 Texture Coat: TexKote
The texture coat shall be a special acrylic emulsion giving three-dimensional polymeric
surface coating by spraying. It is available in white colour card in matt finish

Solid Content % (m/m) ≥ 76 SS 5
Viscosity (poise) 250 - 500 SS 5
Alkali Resistant Test (1% NaOH, 72 Passed SS 5
hrs)
Adhesion Test (ASTM D3359-93) Passed ASTM D3359-93
Water Resistance Test (72 hours) Passed SS 5
Spotting Method
3.2.9 Vinilex 2000 Water-based Wall Sealer (SS:579)
The sealer shall be water based formulated with a special acrylic polymer for excellent
alkali and efflorescence resistance properties. It is light grey colour in matt finish.
The performance of the sealer shall match or surpass the following:

NPQS

mins Hard Dry 120
VOC, g/L <2 SS 579
Adhesion (X-cut) 4A SS 579

5.2.2 Mock-ups
Mock-up: Provide mock-up(s) to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
Size and location of mock-up shall be as indicated on Drawings; if no indication on Drawings

construct mock-up as follows:
a. Paint one 1200mm by 2400 mm mock-up area in location approved by Architect for each paint
type, colour, and sheen specified
b. Approved mock-up(s) may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Completion Certificate
5.4 Tests
Carry out the following tests at locations selected by the SO through the progress of
the works:
Item NPQS Clause number Location Total Number of

tests
Pull-off Test 5.4.2 - -
Adhesion test 5.4.3 - -
NPQS
1Version 1.0
NPQS
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.3 Standards
1.4 Trade Preambles


5.4 Tests
2Version 1.0
NPQS
1.0 GENE RAL
This document is supplementary to Section A4-20 Internal Painting and Coating of the NPQS
and sets out Project Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All
modifications and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the
NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for painting and coating on surfaces of building
elements/components not subject to the weather. It includes, but not limited to, the furnishing
and installing of the following:
a. Surface preparation and field application of paints and finishes to interior and exterior
surfaces and designated items
b. Substrate and material compatibility testing
c. Protection of adjacent and adjoining surfaces
d. Primer, paint, wood varnish, stains and other finishes
e. Painted finishes: Shall be provided for, but not limited to, the following items. Refer to
the Finish and Painting Schedule at the end of this section for designated paint
finishes
f. Any other Painting Work described in the Contract Drawings and Documents
1.3 Standards
a. SS 5: All Parts Methods of test for paints, varnishes and related materials
b. SS 7: Paint-finishing, gloss enamel.
c. SS 34: Undercoat paint for gloss enamel.
d. SS 37: Aluminum paint.
e. SS 38: Aluminum wood primer.
f. SS 150: Emulsion paints for decorative purpose
g. SS 345: Algae resistant emulsion paint for decorative purposes.
h. SS 494: Lead and chromate-free primer for iron and steel substrate
i. SS 500: Elastomeric wall coatings
j. SS 542: Code of Practice for painting of buildings
k. SS 579: Water-based sealer for interior and exterior uses

NPQS
l. SS 624: Water-based acrylic road marking paint.
m. SS 678: Solar reflective water-based coating
n. SS 685: Water-based primer for metal and wood
o. SS 686: Water-based enamel paint
p. Any other Standards as may be required by the Architect
1.4 Trade Preambles

1.4.1 Contractor Submission
Paints shall be from Nippon Paint (Singapore) or equivalent.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section
approved by manufacturer
Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of paint, and other material(s)
from single source
To submit the following:

a. Product Technical Data Sheet: Provide TDS on all finishing products
b. Instructions (Method Statement): Indicate special surface preparation procedures,

substrate conditions requiring special attention, and recommended area coverage for
specified product
c. Samples for Selection: Submit two paper chip samples illustrating range of colours
and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. Submit two paper
samples 300 x 300 mm in size for colours requested by Architect
d. Samples for Review: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colours and
textures for each colour and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit
on actual receiving substrate, 600 x 600 mm in size
e. Product List: Provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and
color-coding for all colours used for Owner’s later use in maintenance
f. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and
coated surfaces
NPQS

Supply the following spare materials, and stored in an area agreed with the SO:
Spare Material Description Quantity Due Date

(Size,Type, etc)
Water-based sealer, to SO approval Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
project
Low odour, durable emulsion, to Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
SO approval project
Two-pack amine- adduct cured Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
epoxy primer, to SO approval project
Acrylic Polyurethane coating, to SO Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of

approval project
Water-based quick dry Primer with Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
low Volatile Organic Compound and project
low odour, to SO approval
Water-based acrylic emulsion with Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
low Volatile Organic Compound, project
low odour and quick drying, to SO
approval.
Two-component, moisture Liquid Application 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
tolerant, penetrating epoxy project
primer
Heavy duty, high thermal shock 3 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
resistant, seamless anti-microbial project
polyurethane coating system
A power troweled, self-sealing, high 2 drums of 20 litres Upon completion of
impact resistance non-pigmented or project
pigmented polyurethane system
1.4.4 Warranty
Provide the following warranty in accordance with contract conditions:

All Paint System 5 Years
Heavy-duty Polyurethane Coating 5 Years
NPQS

With the exception of all internal off-form and fire-rated finishes that shall comply with the
Specification A1-80-1 External Painting and Coating, all internal paint and coating
systems for this project shall be GreenLabel-certified, reduced VOC and shall consist of
the following types: Internal paint and coating systems for this project shall consist of the
Area Features Paint System
IP1 Internal 3-coat system Sealer: 1 coat Vinilex 2000 Water-based

Plastered  SGBP certified Wall Sealer (SS:579)
Ceilings  Anti-mould and mildew Finishing: 2 coats Max
 Washable
Matt

Plastered Wall  SGBP certified Wall Sealer (SS:579)
 Anti-bacteria Finishing: 2 coats EvoMedico Interior
 Anti-mould and mildew Sheen
 Stain resistant
Low Sheen
 Covers hairline cracks
 Excellent washability
 HPV resistant

Plastered Wall  SGBP certified Wall Sealer (SS:579)
i.e.: High  Anti-bacteria
Finishing: 2 coats Aqua PU
Traffic Areas  Anti-fungal
 Excellent washability Gloss
 HPV resistant
IP4 Internal Timber 3 to 4-coat system Primer: 1 to 2 coats Aqua Primer Sealer
substrate  SGBP certified Undercoat
 Anti-bacteria
 Anti-mould and mildew
 Stain resistant Gloss
 Non-yellowing
 HPV resistant
following types:
NPQS
IP5 Internal 3 to 4-coat system Primer: 1 to 2 coats Aqua Primer Sealer
Ferrous metal  SGBP certified Undercoat
 Anti-bacteria Finishing: 2 coats Aqua PU
 Anti-mould and mildew
 Stain resistant Gloss
 Non-yellowing
 HPV resistant
IP6 Internal 4-coat system Primer: 1 coat Hi-Vinyl 1102 CF Etching

Non-ferrous  SGBP certified Primer
metal  Anti-bacteria Undercoat: 1 coat Aqua Primer Sealer
 Anti-mould and mildew Undercoat
 Stain resistant
 Non-yellowing
 HPV resistant Gloss

3.2.1 Aqua Primer Sealer Undercoat
The primer undercoat shall be a water-based one step pre-coat formulated with special
acrylic polymer for good adhesion on multi-purpose substrates. It is available white colour
in matt finish.
The performance of the product shall match or surpass the following:

Solid Content, % ≥ 52 SS 5
mins Hard Dry 120
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 10 - 11 -
Adhesion Test Mild Steel passed ASTM D3359-93
Nyatoh Wood
3.2.2 Aqua PU
The finishing coat shall be a water-based modified polyurethane with anti-bacterial and
anti-fungal properties excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide Vapour (HPV) This
environmental-friendly paint is specially formulated for interior use on suitably primed
masonry wall, timber and metal. It comes in various colours in gloss finish.

 Excellent stain resistance
 Anti-bacterial and Anti-Fungal Properties. li and SA (Staphylococcus aureus)
 Environmentally friendly
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the followings (Based on
White Colour)
NPQS
Opacity (contrast ratio), % Min. 95 SS 5
Drying Time at Touch Dry 30 ASTM D1640
30 , Hard Dry 120
mins
Theoretical Co`verage, m²/L 9-10 -
Gloss (60° specular reflection), Min. 70 SS 5
units %
VOC, g/L < 75 ISO 11890-2
Acid Resistant passed SS 5
Wet Scrub Resistance, 5000 cycles passed SS 5
Anti-bacterial Staphylococcus
aureus
passed
Escherichia coli JIS Z 2801
Methicillin-
resistant
Mildew Aspergillus
Resista niger- SS 150: 2021
passed
nce Aureobasidium (Annex
pullulan A)
s
Adhesion test (X-cut) Min. 4A ASTM D3359
Abrasion Resistance (500g
Max.100mg/1000 cycles ASTM D4060-14
load/1000/#17), mg
Accelerated weathering, 1000 hrs passed SS 5
Pencil Hardness Min F SS 5
3.2.6 EvoMedico Interior Sheen
The finishing coat shall be a modified acrylic elastomeric emulsion for interior use which
is washable with anti-bacterial property and excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide
Vapour (HPV). It is available in a wide range of colours in sheen finish

 Anti-bacteria property
 Good washability

mins Hard Dry 60
Dry Film Thickness, microns 40 - 50 -
Gloss (85° specular reflection), units 30 - 50 SS 5
NPQS
VOC, g/L < 30 ISO 11890-2
Wet Scrub Resistance, > 2000 cycles pass SS 5
Antimicrobial MRSA > 3.60
E.Coli > 4.80
JIS Z 2801
Staphylococcus
> 3.35
aureus
Mildew Resistance Aspergillus niger
Aureobasidium No Fungal Growth SS 150
pullulans
Water Immersion (3 hours) No blister ISO 2812-2
Diffusion of Carbon Dioxide SD, 300 > 345m Professor Dr Ing
H. Klopfer
Diffusion of Water Vapour SD, 300 = 0.16m Professor Dr Ing
H. Klopfer
HPV resistant passed Upon request
10% NaOH
3.2.9 Hi-Vinyl 1102 CF Etching Primer
The primer shall be a one-pack, lead and chromate-free phenolic-modified polyvinyl

butyral etch primer containing phosphoric acid. It is fast drying and has excellent
adhesion on ferrous and non-ferrous substrates It is available in white and dark green
colour in matt finish.

Drying Time at 25 , Surface Dry 8 -
mins Through Dry 50
Cross-Cut Adhesion Mild Steel Class 0 ISO 2409
Stainless Steel Class 0
Electro- Class 1
galvanised
Steel
Aluminium Class 1
Plate
Salt Spray Test on Blasted Carbon passed 24 hrs ISO 9227
Steel
Humidity Test on Blasted Carbon Steel passed 168 hrs ISO 6270-1
Natural Exposure on Blasted Carbon passed 6 months ISO 2810
Steel
NPQS

mins Hard Dry 120
VOC, g/L <2 SS 579
NPQS
Coating Type: IFC 1 – Medium Duty Anti-Microbial Seamless Polyurethane Floor

Screed for GP Plant
Item Material or product Specific requirement

(Thickness etc.)
Substrate Sound, clean, dry and free from all defective or
poorly adhering material, dirt, grease, wax etc. All
surfaces should be thoroughly rubbed down in the
direction of the grain, using a suitable abrasive paper
and then dusted off
Primer coat Water-based epoxy primer Sikafloor WN155 Oxide 1 layer

red, or equivalent to SO approval
Second Coat Medium duty self-smoothing polyurethane floor 1 layer

screed Sikafloor 21 Purchem, or equivalent to SO
approval
Finish coat/ Medium duty self-smoothing polyurethane floor 1 layer

layer screed Sikafloor 21 Purchem, or equivalent to SO
approval.
Fire resistance: Bfl – S1

Slip Resistance: Dry 70 Wet 60
Shore-Hardness: D80-85 after 28 days
Impact Strength: >Class III >/= 20 Nm)
Flexural Strength: 14.7 N/mm2
Abrasion Resistance (Taber): ≤ 3000mg
Adhesive Strength: > 1.75 N/mm2 (concrete
failure)
Tensile Strength: 6.5 N/mm2
Compressive Strength: 50 N/mm2
VOC free
NPQS
Coating Type: IFC 2 – Anti Skid UV Stable Coloured Polyurethane Floor Coating for
Human Disinfectant Building, Satellite Office and Rest Area
Item Material or product Specific requirement

(Thickness etc.)
Substrate Sound, clean, dry and free from all defective or -

poorly adhering material, dirt, grease, wax etc. All
surfaces should be thoroughly rubbed down in the
direction of the grain, using a suitable abrasive paper
and then dusted off
Primer coat Solvent free epoxy primer Sikafloor 161 CN or 1 layer
equivalent to SO approval
Second Coat UV Stable Coloured Polyurethane Sikafloor 359 1 layer

MYM, or equivalent to SO approval
Shore-Hardness: 76 after 7 days
Flexural Strength: 30 N/mm2
Adhesive Strength: > 1.5 N/mm2
Compressive Strength: 60 N/mm2
Finish coat/ UV Stable Coloured Polyurethane Sikafloor 359 1 layer

layer MYM, or equivalent to SO approval. Matt Finish
Water Permeability: Nil (Impermeable)

Abrasion Resistance: 37mg
Adhesive Strength: > 1.5 N/mm2
NPQS

3.2.1 Aqua Primer Sealer Undercoat
The primer undercoat shall be a water-based one step pre-coat formulated with special
acrylic polymer for good adhesion on multi-purpose substrates. It is available white colour
in matt finish.
The performance of the product shall match or surpass the following:

Solid Content, % ≥ 52 SS 5
mins Hard Dry 120
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 10 - 11 -
Adhesion Test Mild Steel passed ASTM D3359-93
Nyatoh Wood
3.2.2 Aqua PU
The finishing coat shall be a water-based modified polyurethane with anti-bacterial and
anti-fungal properties excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide Vapour (HPV) This
environmental-friendly paint is specially formulated for interior use on suitably primed
masonry wall, timber and metal. It comes in various colours in gloss finish.

 Anti-bacterial and Anti-Fungal Properties. li and SA (Staphylococcus aureus)
 Environmentally friendly
The performance of the finishing coat shall match or surpass the followings (Based on
White Colour)

Opacity (contrast ratio), % Min. 95 SS 5
Drying Time at Touch Dry 30 ASTM D1640
30 , Hard Dry 120
mins
Theoretical Co`verage, m²/L 9-10 -
Gloss (60° specular reflection), Min. 70 SS 5
units %
VOC, g/L < 75 ISO 11890-2
Acid Resistant passed SS 5
Wet Scrub Resistance, 5000 cycles passed SS 5
13Version 1.0
Anti-bacterial Staphylococcus
aureus
passed
Escherichia coli JIS Z 2801
Methicillin-
resistant
Mildew Aspergillus
Resista niger- SS 150: 2021
passed
nce Aureobasidium (Annex
pullulan A)
s
Adhesion test (X-cut) Min. 4A ASTM D3359
Abrasion Resistance (500g
Max.100mg/1000 cycles ASTM D4060-14
load/1000/#17), mg
Accelerated weathering, 1000 hrs passed SS 5
Pencil Hardness Min F SS 5
3.2.3 Crystalux Aluminium Wood Primer (SS:38)
The primer shall be oil-modified Phenolic vehicle with aluminium pigment as its primary
pigment. It is aluminium colour in semi-gloss finish.

mins Hard Dry 240
Aluminium Content, % 11 SS 38
3.2.4 Crystalux Alkyd Resin Undercoat (SS:34)
The undercoat shall be high opacity and high solid undercoat that will effectively hide the
substrate and impart a good film build to the overall coating system. It is available in
standard range as per Nippon Paint colour card in matt finish
The performance of the undercoat shall match or surpass the following:

mins Hard Dry 360
Pigment Content % (m/m) 60 SS 34
3.2.5 Crystalux Alkyd Resin Enamel (SS:7)
The finishing coat shall be an oil-modified alkyd paint with good durability and a good anti-
fungus property. It comes in various colours in full gloss finish.

 Weather resistant
 Anti-fungus property

Solid Content, % 65 ± 2 SS 7
mins Hard Dry 270
Gloss (60° specular reflection), units 91 SS 7
Xenon-arc accelerated weathering 500 passed SS 7
hrs
3.2.6 EvoMedico Interior Sheen
The finishing coat shall be a modified acrylic elastomeric emulsion for interior use which is
washable with anti-bacterial property and excellent resistant to Hydrogen Peroxide Vapour
(HPV). It is available in a wide range of colours in sheen finish

 Anti-bacteria property
 Good washability

mins Hard Dry 60
Gloss (85° specular reflection), units 30 - 50 SS 5
VOC, g/L < 30 ISO 11890-2
Wet Scrub Resistance, > 2000 cycles pass SS 5
Antimicrobial MRSA > 3.60 JIS Z 2801
E.Coli > 4.80
Staphylococcus
> 3.35
aureus
Mildew Resistance Aspergillus niger
Aureobasidium No Fungal Growth SS 150
pullulans
Water Immersion (3 hours) No blister ISO 2812-2
Diffusion of Carbon Dioxide SD, 300 > 345m Professor Dr Ing
H. Klopfer
Diffusion of Water Vapour SD, 300 = 0.16m Professor Dr Ing
H. Klopfer
HPV resistant passed Upon request
3.2.7 Hi-Pon 20-03 Epoxy Red Oxide Primer
The primer is a two-pack amine-adduct cured epoxy primer designed for use as a high-
performance primer for ferrous and non-ferrous surfaces. It is red oxide colour in matt
finish.

Solid Content % (m/m) 50 ± 2 -
mins Hard Dry 180
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 6.3 – 8.3
Dry Film Thickness, microns 60 - 80
Pencil Hardness 6H ASTM D3363
Impact Test, 0.5kg x n height, cm 40 ASTM D2794
Salt Spray Test (5% NaCl), hours 480 ISO 7253
Bending Test, mm 8 ASTM D522
PAT on Galvanised Steel (6mm panel), 5.0 ISO 4624
MPa
3.2.8 Hi-Pon 50-01 Polyurethane Top Coat
The finishing coat shall be a two-pack, aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish coat. It provides
high durability, excellent gloss and colour retention with good abrasion, chemical and
impact resistance. It comes in various colours in high sheen finish.

 Abrasion resistant
 Chemical & impact resistance
colour):
mins Hard Dry 420
Dry Film Thickness, microns 50 – 80 -
Pull-off Adhesion Test, MPa ≥5 ISO 4624
Abrasion Resistance, weight loss ≤ 50 ASTM D522
(mg/1000cycles) Method A
Fire Propagation Index of < 12 BS 476 Part 6
performance, I
Sub-index <6
performance, i1
Surface spread of Flame Class 1 BS 576 Part 7
Carbon Dioxide Permeability, g/m².day < 4.0 BS EN 1062-6
Accelerated Weathering QUV A, min Passed 80% gloss ISO 16474-2
1500 hrs retention
Water Vapour Transmission, g/m².day < 2.70 ISO 7783-2
Chemical Resistance 10% H2SO4 168 ISO 2812-1
(Spot Test), hrs 10% NaOH
3.2.9 Hi-Vinyl 1102 CF Etching Primer
The primer shall be a one-pack, lead and chromate-free phenolic-modified polyvinyl

butyral etch primer containing phosphoric acid. It is fast drying and has excellent adhesion
on ferrous and non-ferrous substrates It is available in white and dark green colour in matt
finish.

Drying Time at 25 , Surface Dry 8 -
mins Through Dry 50
Cross-Cut Adhesion Mild Steel Class 0 ISO 2409
Stainless Steel Class 0
Electro- Class 1
galvanised
Steel
Aluminium Class 1
Plate
Salt Spray Test on Blasted Carbon passed 24 hrs ISO 9227
Steel
Humidity Test on Blasted Carbon Steel passed 168 hrs ISO 6270-1
Natural Exposure on Blasted Carbon passed 6 months ISO 2810
Steel
3.2.10 Max
The finishing coat shall be a modified acrylic emulsion paint with good resistance to fungal
growth. It comes in various colours in matt finish.

 Resistance to fungal growth
 Good coverage and hiding
 Washable with water and/or mild detergents
colour):

Opacity, % 85 SS 150
mins Hard Dry 30
Sheen (85° specular reflection), units 3 SS 150
VOC, g/L < 25 SS 150
Mildew Resistant passed SS 150
Fastness to Xenon light, 168 hrs passed SS 150
Wet Scrub Resistance 200 cycles, ≤5 SS 150
micron
3.2.11 SolarCool (SS:678)
The topcoat is a premium 100% acrylic solar reflective cool coating that offers superior
weathering & algae resistant. The coating reflects a large amount of solar energy from the
sun and is able to reduce the surface temperature by up to 5°C*. It comes in various
colours in low sheen finish.

 Excellent resistance to alkaline and efflorescence
 Excellent weather resistance
 Excellent resistance to fungal and algal growth
 Excellent dirt pick-up resistance
 Long lasting colours
colour):

Solid Content, % 54 ± 2 SS:678
Opacity, % 93.3 SS:678
Drying Time at 30 , Touch Dry 30
SS:678
mins Hard Dry 60
Theoretical Coverage, m²/L 10
Dry Film Thickness, microns 30-40 SS:678
Sheen (85° specular reflection), units 22.2 SS:678
VOC, g/L 6 SS:678
Algae Resistant No algal growth SS 678
Accelerated weathering 1000 hrs passed SS 678
Wet Scrub Resistance, microns 2.61 SS 678
CIE L lightness value passed SS 678
Before 3 months natural weathering
Solar Reflectance Index, SRI 107.2 SS 678
After 3 months natural weathering
Solar Reflectance Index, SRI 103.5
SS 678
Dirt Pick Up Resistance, DPUR 96.37
3.2.12 Texture Coat: Sand Dune
The texture coat shall be a premium grade decorative sand texture coating. It consists of
fine aggregate bound by water-based weather resistant modified acrylic binder suitable for
external and internal surfaces. It is available in white colour card in matt finish

Solid Content % (m/m) ≥ 78 -
Viscosity, PS at 25°C 3,500 – 4,000 -
3.2.13 Texture Coat: TexKote
The texture coat shall be a special acrylic emulsion giving three-dimensional polymeric
surface coating by spraying. It is available in white colour card in matt finish. The
performance of the texture coat shall match or surpass the following:

Solid Content % (m/m) ≥ 76 SS 5
Viscosity (poise) 250 - 500 SS 5
Alkali Resistant Test (1% NaOH, 72 Passed SS 5
hrs)
Adhesion Test (ASTM D3359-93) Passed ASTM D3359-93
Water Resistance Test (72 hours) Passed SS 5
Spotting Method

mins Hard Dry 120
VOC, g/L <2 SS 579
5.2.2 Mock-ups
Mock-up: Provide mock-up(s) to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards
for materials and execution.
Size and location of mock-up shall be as indicated on Drawings; if no indication on

Drawings construct mock-up as follows:
a. Paint one 1200mm by 2400 mm mock-up area in location approved by Architect for
each paint type, colour, and sheen specified
b. Approved mock-up(s) may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Completion Certificate
5.4 Tests
Carry out the following tests at locations selected by the SO through the progress of
the works:
Item NPQS Clause number Location Total Number of

tests
Pull-off Test 5.4.2 - -
Adhesion test 5.4.3 - -
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
A5-10 Metal Roof
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.4 Trade Preambles
3. MATERIALS
3.3 Metal Sheeting
5.1 Submissions
5.4 On-Site Tests
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
1. GENERAL
Read this Section with G1-10 "General Requirements" and all other contract
documents.
This document is supplementary to Section A5-10 Metal Roof of the NPQS and sets out Project
Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All modifications and additions
noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This Section covers the requirements for the construction of metal roofing systems including
metal sheets, finishes and insulation. The following types of metal sheets are covered:
(a) Profiled Metal Sheets
(b) Standing Seams

Read this work section in conjunction with the relevant requirements of the other work sections
including the following:
A5-01 Structural Steelwork
1.4 Trade Preambles

The design intent of the metal roof system(s) is indicated in the drawings and type(s) specified
in Section A5- 10: Clause:3.1.
Engage qualified personnel to carry out and submit the following items to the Architect.

(a) Building structure
(b) External masonry
(c) Window & lourve
(d) Lightning protection
(e) Services penetrations
(f) Internal masonry and partitions
(g) Ceilings
(h) External painting and coating
(i) Any equipment located on the roof, e.g. photovoltaic cells panels
1.4.5 Warranty
Provide the following warranties in accordance with the specimen warranty, or otherwise as
approved agreed with the SO:

Roofing sheet, capping, flashing & fascia 10 years
Version 1.0
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof

Prepare and submit a maintenance manual covering all metal cladding systems (including all
components and accessories). Refer to Section G1-10: Clause:1.4.8 for details.
Include the following information in the maintenance manual:
(a) An outline description of the completed roof system.
(b) A detailed description of specific materials and components with product names, types,
serial numbers, etc.
(c) Cleaning methods for roof surface, roof and gutters to be cleaned every 6 months.
(d) Roof flashings and sealant to be inspected every 2 years.
(e) Fall arrest systems to be inspected at intervals not exceeding 2 months.
(f) Safety advice for maintenance personnel
2.1.4 Environmental
Comply with the following: ETTV shall not exceed 50W/m2
The U-value of the roof shall not exceed the limit prescribed in the table below.
Weight Group Weight Range (kg/m2) Maximum thermal transmittance (Wim2K)

Light Under 50 0.5
Medium 50 to 230 0.8
Heavy Over 230 1.2
3 MATERIALS
The metal roofing system may be assembled on site with the individual components, or
supplied and installed as a composite system incorporating one or more components.
The metal roofing (MR) system(s) shall consist of the following types:
Type: Metal Deck Roofing

Clause
Item Requirements
Reference
Metal Sheeting LCP Ultradeck 700 .
Version 1.0
- Manufacturer LCP Building Product Pte Ltd or equivalent .
Hi-Tensile steel bold ribbed profile with min 700 mm cover width
- Form of Sheeting and 45 mm min rib height, capable of allowing min falls of 3 .
degree, in clean pre-coated steel (colour to Architect’s selection).
- Metallic Coating ZINCALUME (AZ200) Coating and COLOURBOND .
- BMT Min. 0.48mm .
- Min End Lap Width To manufacturer's details .
Protective Coating . .
- Exposed Side Super Polyester 25µ m (max. 20% reflectance) .
- Exposed Side Colour Colour to Architect's selection .
- Reversed Side Polyester 10µ m .
- Reversed Side Colour Colour to Architect's selection

- Daylight Reflectance Specular reflectance shall not exceed 10%
AS 3566 Class 4 fasteners with non-conductive EPDM washer.

- Fixings and Fasteners
Concealed fastening system to manufacturer’s detail.
- Profile fillers/ Rib End System to be used for all end and expansion joints, to
Stops manufacturer's details
- Sealants Neutral-cure silicone sealant to Manufacturers details
Sound dampening coating to be applied to underside of metal
- Acoustic Treatment:
sheet
- Underlayment and
Insulation System
- Waterproof Underlay
High tensile strength radiant and vapour barrier manufactured
with a high density core with cross linked polymer
reinforcements. The self-supporting foil is able to span up to 1.4
meter length across purlins. All metallic surfaces shall be
- Radiant/Vapour Barrier
uniformly coated so that the low emissivity properties of the
surface are not harmed by atmospheric contaminates.
Tensile Strength: G550
- Thermal Insulation 50mm thick non-combustible, light weight rockwool insulation
- Wire Mesh Support
- Acoustic Treatment: Sound dampening coating to be applied to underside of metal

sheet
Rainwater Goods
- General Flashing Flashing, ridge caps, valleys, fascia etc. shall be of similar material
and colour to match the selected roof material
- Fall Arrest System See table below (Horizontal Lifeline System) .

NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
Type: Horizontal Lifeline System

Clause
Item Requirements
Reference
Lifeline The anchor and cable systems shall be a horizontal lifeline system
that allows continuous uninterrupted access to all areas of a roof.
.
It can span up to 12m between anchors and provides continuous
hands-free access for all users of the fall protection system.
Anchor Modular multi-directional system design which activates and absorbs
energy no matter which orientation the load is applied, providing total
freedom and flexibility in system design.
Unique energy absorbing system reduces the overturning
.
movement on the bolts by 50%, enabling the use of fewer fasteners,
therefore, reducing the number of roof penetrations. Conforms to
EN 795, OSHA, ANSI, AS/NZS standards and has been tested to
both EN795 Class A and C standards
- Base Plate The base plate design incorporates several fixing holes to allow
the same plate to be fitted on different roof types Approx. .
405x405mm in size.
- Components A. Anchor
B. Hex swage tensioner
C. 8mm 7x7 SS cable
D. Traveler
E. Anchor intermediate guide .
F. Anchor 90deg corner

G. Hex swage toggle
H. Baseplate
I. Anchor module end
- Accessories 2 sets of stainless steel travelers .
2 sets of Double Lanyard (energy absorber, scaffold hook –

comply with EN 355-354) .
2 sets of min. 20m Adjustable Lanyard (comply with EN 355)

.
2 sets of Full Body Harness (front & back attachment, leg
.
adjustment – comply with EN 361)
- PE Calculation & The lifeline design shall be in accordance with the lifeline specialist’s
Endorsement requirement. A calculation of the lifeline design and system shall be
.
prepared by a PE. The lifeline design and system shall be endorsed
by the PE.
NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
3.4.4 Colour and Daylight Reflectance

To be as specified in Section A5-10: Clause:3.1, and comply with BCA Approved Document.
3.11.2 Fall Arrest System
Comply with SS 528.
Fall arrest system(s) shall be as shown in drawings, or specified in Section A5-010:
Clause:3.1, to satisfy the purpose of carrying out periodical maintenance and cleaning, and to
be capable of taking the load specified in Section A5-010: Clause:2.1.1.6.

Submit relevant test reports and certificates from a recognised Certification Body to
demonstrate compliance with all required material and system characteristics specified.
(a) Tests
Carry out tests as follows:
Steel Roof sheeting ASTM E108 Surface Flame Spread (Class 0 or Class A)
Structural support
. .
members
Fasteners . .
BS 476- Part 6 and 7 Fire Propagation and Surface Flame Spread

Radiant/Vapour
ASTM C1371 Reflectivity & Emissivity Water Vapour
Barrier
ASTM E 96 Transmission
EN 13501-1/ BS EN 1182
Insulation Non-Combustibility Thermal Conductivity
ASTM C518
Rain water goods . .
(b) Certificates
Provide certificates as follows:
Roof Sheeting SGBP/Green Label Sustainable Building Product Certification
Radiant Barrier SGBP/Green Label Sustainable Building Product Certification

NPQS
A5-10 Metal Roof
5.4 On-Site Tests

5.4.1 Water Tests
Carry out on-site water tests upon completion of a part of the Works, in accordance with the
following procedure:
(a) Spray with a continuous water jet from a water hose with normal tap pressure. Hold the
hose at 1.2 m
away from the roof surface. Place the hose at the level of horizontal joints so that the jet
cone scatter will cover the joints.
(b) The test is deemed as passed if there is no water seepage or dampness observed from
the underside of the roof.
(c) Any areas showing water seepage or other defects to be made good after a
method statement for
reinstatement has been approved by the Architect.
Use tested areas as a site quality standard for the remainder of the project.
Carry out on-site water test at the following area and frequency:
Area of Test Frequency of Test
High volume water hose to Architect's direction for a

Main roof and all joints
duration of 15 minutes
- -
5.4.2 Roof Drainage Tests

Upon completion of the roofing works and installation of rain water goods, carry out on-site
drainage test to verify proper functioning and performance of the roof drainage system, in
5.4.3 Acoustic Tests
Conduct field tests and measurements at locations to be agreed with the Architect, to verify
that acoustic rating specified in Section A5-10: Clause:3.1 is achieved.
Version 1.0
NPQS

NPQS
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.3 Standards
1.4 Trade Preambles

3.2 Fire Doors
3.3 Timber
3.4 Plywood
3.6 Facing
3.7 Aluminium Frames
3.8 Glass
3.9 Gaskets
3.10 Seals
3.11 Ironmongery
4. WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Frame Construction
4.5 Completion

5.1 Submissions
5.3 Inspection
5.4 Tests
Version 1.0
NPQS
1. GENERAL
This document is supplementary to Section A6-10 Internal Doors of the NPQS and sets
out Project Specific Data in the same clause headings as in the NPQS. All modifications
and additions noted in this document take precedence over clauses noted in the NPQS.
1.1 Scope
This section covers the requirements for internal doors including fire doors and their
associated ironmongery. Household shelter doors are not included. External Doors
are covered in section A6-20 and Roller Shutter Doors are covered in section A6-
30.
1.4 Trade Preambles

PSD for list.
1.4.2 Warranty
Provide the following warranty in accordance with contract conditions:
All Automatic Door System 1 Year
Version 1.0
NPQS

The doors for the GP Plant shall be automatic sliding and/or rolling doors with
senor or hand free touch mechanism. The doors to be provided are as follows:
Type: Sliding Aluminium Door with Fixed Clear Float Glass Panel
Item Material or product Specific

requirement
SD 1 Aluminium Door with Fixed Temper Glass Panel (Thickness
Door opening etc.)
to be
activated by foot
sensor on the
external side and
overhead sensor
within the room.
Door automatically
open upon activation
of fire alarm.
Sensor operated with hand free opening

mechanism.
Type: High Speed Roller Shutter Door
DS 2 Dexion Sectional Door
Version 1.0
DS 3 Dexion Sectional Door to Material Store
VSS 1 Dexion Sectional Door

VSS 2 Door will
automatically open
activation of fire
alarm.
Hand free and Rope

assisted door
opening system
VSS 3 Dexion High Speed Door

VSS 4 Dexion Zipper Quick Door
Dock Shelter and Assessories

Designed to suit door
Adjustable Inflatable Dock Shelter openings, the Blue Giant
Adjustable Inflatable Dock
Seal has vertical air bags that
increase the contact area
against the trailer and tighten
the seal to keep product
secure. An internal retraction
spring permits the header air
bag to be fully retracted when
not in use, preventing collision
damage from incoming
trailers.
Dock Leveler
Dexion Dock Hydraulic System

Impact Rubber Bumper HDPE material
HDPE Bollard
FLEX IMPACT® barriers, TB 550

Plus Fence is designed to absorb
Safety Guard Rail the shock caused by a collision or
impact. The flexible properties
allow the barrier to return to its
original shape and appearance
after a crash without losing any
strength. The specially designed
fencing adds an extra means of
protection.
Other Equipment
Human Disinfectant Booth at Entrance and

Driver Receiption
Stainless material
Tempered glass panel
Automatic door and door sensor
Fan
Infrared sensor
High efficiency filter
Control Panel
Nozzle spray top and sides
W800D1000H1950/
W800D2000H1950
Human Disinfectant Tunnel at Clean Area
Preparation Entrance
Stainless material
Hand free sensor automatic door
Fan
High efficiency filter
Control Panel
4 sets of Nozzle spray top and
sides
W800D3000H1950
Motorised Smoke Vent

Airtight and
waterproof lourve
system with seal and
slat. Double glazed
structural glass with
K-U-Value > 0.9
KW/m2k. Heavy duty
aluminium frame
flurocarbon finish
with mounting
adapter.
Lourve will be link to

smoke detector
system, which upon
activation will
automatically open
the lourve.
NPQS
Compressor
Oil Free Compressor for GP PLant

5 + 1 Compressors 7.5kWm 890L/min
Fixed speed
5 Dessicent Dryer Piping from compressor to
Nabel’s equipment
2000L Receiver Tank
Oil Injected Screw Compressor

1 Compressor 3 m3/min with 8 bar
pressure for CP
1 Dessicent Dryer Fixed speed
Piping from compressor to
1000L Receiver Tank Combustion Plant
equipment
Version 1.0
NPQS
5.1 Submissions
5.1.1 Submissions
Submission of the following information:
a. Name of the door manufacturer and include of copies of technical data relating
to each of the door types.
b. Names of the ironmongery, intumescent strip, smoke baffles and acoustic
seals manufacturer/s, include copies of technical details of all the items.

To submit Operation and Maintenance manual of door.
Version 1.0
IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Tender Specifications
16th November 2022
GREEN MARK
GREENA CONSULTANTS PTE LTD

IFH Egg Farm
Green Mark Specification
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
GM Green Mark
SLE Super Low Energy
BCA Building and Construction Authority
SGBC Singapore Green Building Council
PUB Public Utilities Board
ESD Environmental Sustainability Design
GFA Gross Floor Area
ACMV Air Conditioning & Mechanical Ventilation
VRF Variable Refrigerant Flow
IEER Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio
LPB Lighting Power Budget
MEPS Minimum Energy Performance Standards
WELS Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme
VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
SGBP Singapore Green Building Product
MEP Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing
C&S Civil & Structural
AHU Air Handling Unit
FCU Fan Coil Unit
SRI Solar Reflectance Index
CADR Clean Air Delivery Rate
VAV Variable Air Volume
HVLS High Volume, Low Speed
CUI Concrete Usage Index
RCA Recycled Concrete Aggregates
WCS Washed Copper Slag
GF Granite Fines
Page 2 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Introduction 6
2. General Requirement 7
3. Green Mark Design Requirements 9
4. Energy Efficiency – Performance And Specifications 10
A. Permanent Instrumentation for M&V of Air-side Equipment 10
VRF System 10
B. Electrical Sub Metering 11
C. Envelope Thermal Transfer Value (ETTV) 11
D. Air Conditioning Total System Efficiency 12
E. Lighting Power Budget 13
F. Mechanical Ventilation 14
5. Resilience 15
A. RE1.1b Resources 15
i. Water Efficient Fittings 15
B. RE1.2b Urban heat island mitigation 15
A. Urban Heat Island Mitigation (UHI) 15
C. RE2.2 Circularity 16
i. Provision of Dedicated Recycling Facilities 16
6. Whole life Carbon (WLC) 17
A. CN 1.1b Embodied carbon computation 17
B. CN 2.1 Sustainable Construction 18
i. Design for Low CUI 18
ii. Replacement of Aggregates 19
C. CN 2.2 Sustainable Products & Finishes 19
D. CN2.3 Conservation, Resource Recovery and Waste Management 21
7. Health & Wellbeing 22
A. HW1.1a Mobility 22
B. HW1.2 Low VOC Materials 23
C. HW1.3c Clean Air 24
D. HW2.2 Circadian Rhythm 24
i. Quality of Artificial Lighting 24
E. HW3.2A Restorative and Community Spaces 25
F. HW3.2B Outsourced Workers 25
G. HW3.3b Healthy Eating & Drinking 26
8. Intelligence 26
A. IN1.1 Digital Life Cycle 26
Page 3 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
i. Use of spatial model co-ordination platfrom based on Project Information Model (PIM) for spatial
analysis 26
B. IN1.2 Common Data Environment 27
i. Performance Dashboard to monitor building assets’ performance and operations 27
ii. Data Management and Integration (Interoperability) with a platform based on an open protocol
27
C. IN2.1 Asset Information Model 28
9. Maintainability 29
A. General Requirements 29
B. Architectural Exterior 30
General Facade 30
i. Drip Control for External Face Of Façade 30
ii. Façade Access 31
Masonry and Lightweight Concrete Panels 31
Façade Features / Other Façade Considerations 32
i. Steel Structures 32
Entrance Lobby 33
i. Raised Internal Level 33
ii. Canopy / Overhang Design 33
Concrete Roof 34
i. Design Slope 34
ii. Waterproofing 35
iii. Corrosion on metal roofs 36
C. Architectural Interior 36
Flooring 36
Walls & Partitions 37
False Ceiling 37
Wet Rooms and Storage 38
i. Permanent Storage Space for Toilet Supplies 38
ii. Walls in wet rooms 38
iii. Partition Walls in Washrooms 38
iv. Full vanity wash basin in washrooms 39
v. Soap Dispenser in washrooms 39
vi. Water Basin in Washrooms 40
vii. False Ceiling in wet rooms 41
Loading Bay / Back of house service areas 41
D. Mechanical 42
Unitary Air Conditioning System - VRF 42
i. Access to VRF outdoor units 42
Page 4 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
ii. Refrigerant pipe and insulation 43

Air Distribution Systems 44
i. Fan coil units (FCU) access 44
ii. Reduce Risk of Water Ponding and Algae Growth in the AHU Room 44
iii. Reduce Risk of Choke of Condensate Drain Stack 44
iv. AHU System 45
Domestic Water Supply 46
i. Access Space for Maintenance of Water Tank 46
Sanitary Systems 46
i. Access Provision and Design Detailing for Sanitary Pipes for Ease of Maintenance 47
ii. Reduce risk of chokes in sanitary pipes 48
Fire Protection Systems 49
i. Access to Fire Detectors at Height 49
E. Electrical 50
Lighting System 50
i. Access to Light Fixtures Located at Heights for Maintenance and Use of reliable Light Fixtures
50
ii. Reduce Risk of Light Flickering 51
iii. Reduce Risk of LED Light Colour Shift 51
Power Distribution 51
i. Reduce Risk of Water Ingress into Electrical System 51
ii. Reduce Risk of Unnoticed Failure of Surge Arrestor Located in the LT Main Switchboard 52
Extra Low Voltage System 52
i. Provide Flexibility for Future Expansion for CCTV and Access Control System 52
ii. Reduce Risk of Damage to Outdoor Camera and Other Equipment due to Lightning Surge 53
Lightning Protection System 53
F. Landscape 54
Standalone Structures 54
i. Outdoor standalone structures 54
10. Others 54
A. Window To Wall Ratio 54
B. Roof Without Skylight 55
C. Air-Tightness and Leakage 55
Windows and Curtain Walls 55
Openings between Conditioned and Non-Conditioned Spaces 56
D. Smart Building Solutions 56
Page 5 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. INTRODUCTION
IFH Egg Farm (hereinafter “the proposed building”) is located at Kranji Way with
a GFA of 32,124.33 sqm. There are high goals for sustainability set for the
proposed building, which targets to achieve Building and Construction
Authority, Singapore (hereinafter “BCA”) Green Mark Gold Plus award under
the GM2021 criteria.
The responsibilities of the Main Contractor and the associated sub-contractors

is to meet the targeted environmental and energy targets as explained in this
document. The Main Contractor and the associated sub-contractors are
required to comply with these requirements during and after the construction
phase of this project to ensure the achievement of the related Green Mark
credits.
Requirements in the following Singapore Standards and Guidelines must be

strictly complied with. The standards referred to in this document are as follows:
● BCA Green Mark 2021 (GM: 2021)
● Singapore Standard CP48: 2005 – Code of Practice for Water Services
● Singapore Standard 531: Part 1: 2006 (2013) – Code of Practice for
Lighting of Workplaces - Indoor
● Singapore Standard 530: 2014 – Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency
Standard for Building Services and Equipment
● Singapore Standard 553: 2016 – Code of Practice for Air-Conditioning and
Mechanical Ventilation in Buildings
● Singapore Standard 554: 2016 – Code of Practice for Indoor Air Quality for
Air-Conditioned Buildings
● Singapore Standard 591: 2013 – Code of Practice for Long Term
Measurement of Central Chilled Water System Energy Efficiency
Page 6 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
2. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
2.1. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Building Control
(Environmental Sustainability) Regulations, Code for Environmental
Sustainability of Buildings (“the Code”) and BCA’s Green Mark Assessment
Criteria including any amendment and revision which may be introduced in
relation thereto, in so far as these apply to the works.
2.2. The Contractor shall provide a copy of its BCA Green and Gracious Builder
(GGBS) certificate (Merit or above) and ISO 14001 accreditation as part of the
Green Mark documentation, if applicable.
2.3. The Contractor shall designate an experienced personnel of at least 5 years in

GM projects, preferably a certified GMAP, who will be responsible for the
implementation of the relevant Green Mark requirement and the preparation
of the relevant Green Mark documentation for the construction work of the
Project.
2.4. The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of any liability, costs,
loss, and expense incurred (including any claims by third parties or any fine or
penalty levied by any statutory authority) arising from the Contractor’s failure
or non-compliance with the targeted Green Mark rating as provided herein.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for extension of time,
payment, or compensation as a result of any non-compliance by the Contractor
of the stipulated Green Mark standards and performance and the
requirements of the relevant authority.
2.5. The Contractor is encouraged to include economically viable suggestions in the

Contractor’s proposals or proposed amendments to the Employer’s
Requirements which may result in either the reduction of environment impact
or improvement in the environmental performance of the key areas identified
in the Green Mark Assessment Criteria. These shall deem to include but not
limited to selecting products and materials and/or the adoption of construction
techniques and processes.
Page 7 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
2.6. The Contractor must complete and submit documentation to demonstrate

Green Mark’s compliance, as mentioned in Green Mark criteria, and specified
in the specifications. All relevant documentation shall be sent to ESD
Consultants, GreenA Consultants Pte Ltd. for approval.
2.7. Green Mark certification includes site measurement and verification. Prior to
site verification, the Contractor shall perform a preliminary measurement and
verification to make sure all systems meet targeted Green Mark requirement.
The Contractor shall facilitate and attend site visits and audits by authorities
and ensure necessary site preparations to achieve authorities’ compliance
prior to the site visits and audits Contractor and relevant sub-contractors shall
ensure their attendance for the TOP Green Mark Inspections.
2.8. The Contractor is to thoroughly understand the mentioned Green Mark

criteria, pre-requisites, process, identify, and price all materials accordingly as
required to achieve and undertake the desired Green Mark rating Award for
the project.
2.9. Should there be any loss of point/score due to Contractor’s inability to

understand design intent and complying with the targeted score, he shall
propose to make up the lost credit point as its' own cost and time. All changes,
if any, shall be submitted to ESD Consultant, SO, for approval. Prior approval is
required if any of the credits are to be replaced / trade-off.
2.10. Supporting documents may include, but not be limited to, equipment
specifications, purchase order/delivery orders, testing reports, photographs, as
built drawings, and any other related documents as required and adequate to
obtain corresponding credit in accordance with the Green Mark requirement.
2.11. The Contractor is to consult the ESD consultant for the project regarding any
clarifications and document submission requirements.
Page 8 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
3. GREEN MARK DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

3.1. These specifications are to be read along with the following: -
● Architecture design documents and details
● Architecture material and finishes specifications
● Mechanical & Electrical design and specifications
● Civil & Structural design and specifications
3.2. In the event of discrepancies, the higher / more stringent specifications shall
prevail.
3.3. GM 2021 are the reference criteria. A total score of 32 points has been
targeted. Refer to Appendix A for the GM 2021 scorecard and Appendix B for
the Maintainability scorecard.
3.4. These specifications are to be read alongside the GM 2021 Technical Guide and
requirements. All documents stated in the Technical Guide for the design stage
shall be submitted within 6 months of the tender award and within 6 months
of TOP for Verification Stage 1 and 12 months of TOP for Verification Stage 2.
Contractor is to facilitate the Verification 1 and 2 stages and provide
compliance data to ESD consultant for submission to BCA.
3.5. The contractor’s scope of work consists of all ensuring all the relevant
mechanical equipment such as chillers and cooling towers meet the relevant
energy efficiency requirements.
3.6. The contractor’s scope of work also includes ensuring all Green Mark
documentation, calculations, simulation, energy modelling, and all works as
requested, accepted and approved by BCA during the assessment and
verification stages are duly completed and submitted. This covers the following
criteria below: -
Green Mark Criteria

1. Energy Efficiency 4. Health and Wellbeing
2. Resilience 5. Whole Life Carbon
3. Maintainability 6. Intelligence
Page 9 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
3.7. Green Mark Certification stages and timeline would include the following: -
Description Stage / Timeline
1 Pre-Assessment Pending
2 Actual-Assessment 3-6 months upon contractor onboard
3 Verification 3 -12 months upon operation
4. ENERGY EFFICIENCY – PERFORMANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. PERMANENT INSTRUMENTATION FOR M&V OF AIR-SIDE EQUIPMENT
VRF System
The Contractor is to ensure the provision of permanent measuring instruments
for monitoring of the energy performance of the Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF)
condensing units and air distribution systems.
The installed instrumentation must have the capability to calculate the resultant
system efficiency within 10% uncertainty. Each measurement system shall
include sensors, any signal conditioning, data acquisition system and the wiring
connecting these components.
The measurement systems provided shall also comply with the following
requirement:
• Data logging with the capability to trend at 5-minute sampling time interval,
recorded to at least one decimal place.
• Building management system (BMS), standalone energy monitoring system
(EMS) shall have the capability to compute and display the overall system energy
efficiency to facilitate data extraction for verification purpose.
• Dedicated power meters (of IEC Class 1 or better) and metering current
transformers (of Class 1 or better) where applicable, are to be provided for all
condensing units of the VRF system and air distribution sub-systems (i.e. AHUs,
PAHUs, FCUs).
• VRF Suppliers’ in-house monitoring system is acceptable if it’s capable of
monitoring the system efficiency within 10% uncertainty.
Document requirements
Page 10 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Detailed schematic drawings of the instruments and sensor locations

2. Technical specifications and/or sample data sheets/product information
for instruments and meters
3. Detailed drawings and schematics of the measurement strategies for the
VRF system
4. Purchase orders and delivery orders of the instrumentation installed
B. ELECTRICAL SUB METERING
The Contractor is to ensure the provision of sub-metering as per the
requirements below:
C. ENVELOPE THERMAL TRANSFER VALUE (ETTV)

The Contractor is to ensure that the maximum ETTV shall be less than 40 W/m2.
1. Architectural elevation drawings showing the composition of the different
façade or wall systems that are relevant to the computation of ETTV.
2. Architectural plan layouts and elevations showing all the air-conditioned
areas.
3. Sectional or elevation drawings showing the relevant shading devices.
4. Tender specifications or material schedules showing the salient data of
the material properties that are to be used for the façade or external wall
system.
Page 11 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
5. ETTV calculation in excel format as per the BCA Code on Envelope Thermal
Performance for Buildings.
D. AIR CONDITIONING TOTAL SYSTEM EFFICIENCY

The Contractor is to ensure that ACMV performance meets the following
requirements as applicable:
● ACMV Total System Efficiency (TSE) < 0.80 kW/RT
1. Proposed building cooling system (for new cooling systems) ➢ mode of
ventilation of spaces ➢ location of the plant room and cooling towers
2. Technical specifications and product information of the various
components of the cooling system (for new cooling systems) and air
distribution system designed and installed
3. Part-load performance curves, pump head (for pumps of new cooling
systems) and fan static pressure calculations
4. Detailed calculations of fan input power for each PAU, AHU and FCU in
the building based on operational design load
5. Detailed calculations of the TSE that include the cooling load profile in the
prescribed format as shown in the worked examples
6. Area and operating hours of the spaces served by the air-conditioning
system
7. Compliance with verification requirements under P.14 Permanent
Instrumentation for the Measurement and Verification of Water-Cooled
Chilled Water Plant where applicable
8. Chilled-water plants: Completed Energy Audit Report endorsed by
PE(Mechanical) or Energy Auditor including the power for the air
distribution system detailing the total operational performance measured
over a 1-week period. (The Report template may be found at
https://www1.bca.gov.sg/docs/defaultsource/docs-corp-
buildsg/sustainability/annexb_energy_audit_report.doc )
9. Unitary/split systems: energy consumption of the unitary systems
Page 12 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
E. LIGHTING POWER BUDGET

The Contractor is to ensure that the lighting power budget for the following
spaces (as applicable) meets the following requirements. Emergency lighting
shall be excluded from the lighting power budget requirements.
Area Description LPB (W/sqm)

Office, Work and Study
Office 5
Meeting Room 5
Copy/Print Room 5
Atria, Halls and Retail

Entrance Hall 4
Atrium 4
Concourse 3.5
Lobby 3.5
Transport and Goods

Corridors 3
Staircases 3.5
Lift Lobbies 3
Warehouses/Storage Area 4
Carpark 2
Restrooms, Exercise and Play Areas

Toilets 4
Changing Rooms 4
Washing Areas 4
Maintenance Areas
Mechanical and Electrical Rooms 4
Manufacturing (General) 5.5
Manufacturing (electronic, fine detail
6
or assembly)
The maximum lighting power budget for landscape lighting shall at minimum
comply with SS 530:2014.
Page 13 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Lighting layout plans and schedules showing the numbers, locations and
types of lighting luminaries used.
2. Technical product information of the luminaries used/data sheets
3. Lighting control circuitry plans showing compliance to the stated
requirements
4. LPB calculation as per the following template
F. MECHANICAL VENTILATION
The Contractor is to ensure that the selected fan system meets the following
requirements as applicable
● Motor Power >= 4kW has an efficiency of 0.25 W/CMH
● Motor Power < 4kW has an efficiency of 0.17 W/CMH
● Mechanical ventilation systems for normally occupied spaces shall be
designed to be at least 10% more energy efficient than the prescribed
standard stated in SS 553
1. As built drawings of the mechanical ventilation system.
2. Mechanical ventilation schematics, data sheets and calculations
3. Mechanical ventilation control strategies
Page 14 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
5. RESILIENCE
A. RE1.1B RESOURCES
i. Water Efficient Fittings

The Contractor is to ensure that all water fittings (listed below) have 3 tick rating
under PUB’s Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS) for at least 90% of the
following:
● Basin taps and mixers
● Showers taps and mixers
● Sink/ Bib taps and mixers
● Urinals and urinal flush valves
● Dual flushing cistern for WC
The validity of the WELS certifications of all water fittings is based on the PUB
WELS website.
(Reference: https://app.pub.gov.sg/WELSSP/ListOfProducts.aspx)
1. Purchase/ Delivery orders and water fittings schedule showing the
quantity, WELS rating and brands/ models of the installed water fittings.
B. RE1.2B URBAN HEAT ISLAND MITIGATION
A. URBAN HEAT ISLAND MITIGATION (UHI)
The Contractor is to ensure adoption of UHI mitigation measures for >50% of
site coverage:
● Green and blue spaces for landscaping and roof
● Roofing materials or coating or cool paints with high Solar Reflectance
Index (SRI) > 40
● Unshaded hardscape areas with SRI > 39, inclusive of unshaded carparks,
internal roads, plazas, and pedestrian walkways
● Use of permeable paving strategies such as gravel or open paving systems
● Other performance-based strategies that demonstrate UHI effect
mitigation
1. Photographic evidence of the vegetated areas
2. Delivery orders of the hardscape materials and roof finishes supported by
technical specifications providing the SRI or solar reflectance thermal
emittance values
Page 15 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
3. Site plan highlighting vegetation and waterbody areas, hardscape areas

and roof areas
4. Calculation of hardscape areas shaded by vegetation based on a midday
sun i.e. the shadow shall correspond to the areas directly under the tree
canopies. The tree canopy size shall be based on the mature crown size as
per NParks guidelines
5. Material schedules or specifications of the roof and hardscape finishes
with corresponding SRI values. Where such values are not provided,
calculations in accordance to ASTM E1980 – 11 may be used supported by
solar reflectance and thermal emittance specifications
C. RE2.2 CIRCULARITY
i. Provision of Dedicated Recycling Facilities
The Contractor is to ensure that the provision of the following:

• Dedicated recycling facilities and receptacles at convenient and accessible
locations for packaging waste including used beverage containers
according to the project building type and occupancy level
1. Relevant layout plans showing provision of recycling facilities for
collection and storage of relevant recyclables.
Page 16 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
6. WHOLE LIFE CARBON (WLC)

A. CN 1.1B EMBODIED CARBON COMPUTATION
The Contractor shall do the calculations of the embodied carbon of the
development using the BCA Carbon Calculator or embodied carbon software
tools which are linked to robust carbon data sets. (Refer to Table 4)
The Contractor must aim to reduce embodied carbon for concrete, glass, and
steel by a minimum of 30% from the following reference value (i.e. 1750
kgCO2e/m2)
Non-residential 2500 kgCO2e/m2 for superstructure only

industrial buildings
1. To submit results of embodied carbon footprint in excel format using
the BCA Embodied Carbon calculation template or embodied carbon
software tools with the relevant supporting documentation and
calculations. Preliminary/proposed concrete mix designs are
acceptable at the design stage but as-built concrete mix designs must
be submitted during verification.
Page 17 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
2. For inputs of self-declaration of emission factors via the BCA Embodied

Carbon calculator, project team must provide documentation on the
source of emission factors with the relevant detailed calculations.
3. On the use of other carbon software tools for embodied carbon
computation, detailed report of the carbon footprint of the
development including (but not limited to) the quantum and types of
materials used within the development, the emission factors with
supporting documentation are to be submitted.
4. To submit results of as-built embodied carbon footprint in excel format
using the BCA Embodied Carbon calculation template or embodied
carbon software tools with the relevant supporting documentation
and calculations. As-built concrete mix designs highlighting the
amendments/ changes in the mix (with supporting documents) to be
submitted, if applicable.
5. For inputs of self-declaration of emission factors via the BCA Embodied
Carbon calculator, project team must provide documentation on the
source of emission factors with the relevant detailed calculations.
6. On the use of other carbon software tools for embodied carbon
computation, detailed report of the as-built carbon footprint of the
development including (but not limited to) the quantum and types of
materials used within the development, the emission factors with
supporting documentation are to be submitted.
B. CN 2.1 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION
i. Design for Low CUI

The Contractor is to compute the Concrete Usage Index (CUI) for the whole
project. The Contractor must aim to achieve a low CUI as per the following
reference:
Industrial buildings ≤ 0.45 CUI
CUI serves as an indicator of the amount of concrete used to construct the

superstructure that includes both the structural and non-structural elements.
CUI does not include the concrete used for external works and substructure
works such as basements and foundations.
Concrete Usage Index = Concrete Volume in m3 / CFA in m2
Page 18 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Soft copy extracts of calculations (e.g. PDF format) from BIM software
or calculation showing the quantity of concrete for each floor level
which should include all the concrete building elements, such as non-
load bearing and architectural concrete components;
2. BIM model, architectural and structural plan layout, elevation, and
sectional plans showing the type of building elements/systems used,
the dimensions and sizes of all the building and structural elements.
3. Soft copy extracts of calculations (e.g. PDF format) from BIM software
or calculations supported by detailed design drawings showing the use
of alternative construction methods.
ii. Replacement of Aggregates

The Contractor is to ensure replacement of coarse AND fine aggregates for
structural concrete applications [by mass of Recycled Concrete Aggregates
(RCA), Washed Copper Slag (WCS), Granite Fines (GF)]
Minimum Requirement RCA WCS GF

Extent of Usage ≥ 1.5% x GFA ≥ 0.75% x GFA ≥ 1.5% x GFA
Replacement amount (%) ≥ 20% ≤ 10% ≥ 50%
1. Calculation showing the quantity of recycled/ engineered/ alternative
aggregates (e.g. RCA/WCS/GF) to be used for the project
2. SGBC certification of the concrete products/mixes used for the project.
C. CN 2.2 SUSTAINABLE PRODUCTS & FINISHES

i. The Contractor is to use at least SGBC 2 ticks products for architectural and
applicable landscaping works for at least 3 building product/finishes. The
application of the materials is to be coordinated with the scope of works in
architectural/landscape design details to meet ≥ 60% (by cost) or ≥ 80% (by
areas)
Page 19 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
ii. The Contractor is to use SGBC certified products for Mechanical, Electrical
and Plumbing (MEP) for at least 3 MEP systems. The application of the
materials is to be coordinated with the scope of works in
architectural/landscape design details to meet ≥ 60% (by cost)
Cost
• Estimated cost of all the architectural and landscaping works/MEP
systems* within the project’s cost plan/ bill of quantities (BoQ), preferably
prepared by an accredited cost consultant.
• Estimated cost of the certified architectural and landscaping products
(at least 2 ticks)/MEP systems* within the project’s cost plan/bill of
quantities (BoQ), preferably prepared by an accredited cost consultant.
• Extracts of the tender design specification showing the building
architectural and landscaping works/MEP systems and descriptions of
each systems
• Product certificates and catalogue • Design drawings marking the use of
the certified architectural and landscaping products (at least 2 ticks)/MEP
systems*.
• Delivery order (DO) or Purchase order (PO) of the products with their
corresponding green product certificates
• Photographs and as built drawings showing the use of certified
architectural and landscaping products (at least 2 ticks)/MEP systems
Area
• Extracts of the tender design specification showing:
➢ The building systems which the project targets to score points for, and
descriptions of each
➢ The requirements to use certified environmentally friendly products
for building system(s), where they are used
• Tabulation of the building systems which the project targets to score
points for in a table format
• Design drawings marking the extent of use for each system and the
calculation of the extent of use
• Design details of the systems used, i.e. construction method/ method
statement details
• Product catalogues and certificates (if the product selection is
confirmed)
Page 20 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
• Calculation of as-built areas of all the architectural and landscaping

works for the project
• Delivery order (DO) or Purchase order (PO) of the products with their
corresponding green product certificates
• Photographs and as-built drawings showing the use of certified
architectural and landscaping products
D. CN2.3 CONSERVATION, RESOURCE RECOVERY AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

Appointment of environmental specialists during construction stage – The main
builder is a BCA Green and Gracious Builder with Merit or above rating and has
ISO14001 certification.
1. Details of best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures at
construction and demolition sites
2. Documentary evidence on the appointment of environmental specialists
during construction stage
3. Copy of the main builder’s Green and Gracious Builder award with Merit
and above rating and ISO 14000 certificate
Page 21 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
7. HEALTH & WELLBEING

A. HW1.1A MOBILITY
The Contractor is to ensure safe access in and around the project site.
● Pedestrians, cyclists, and vehicle users should be safely and clearly

separated, and users should not have to compete for entry and exit to the
site.
● Pedestrians should not need to cross over vehicular traffic to enter the
site or access the building. There shall be direct connections to existing or
planned cycle lanes and footpaths.
1. Site plans and dimensioned drawings showing pedestrian and bicycle
pathways and points of connection with public pathways.
2. An Access Statement with details of on people’s movement and access to
the site, outlining the segregation of vehicular traffic from pedestrians
and cyclists. The statement should provide details on how everyone can
get to and move through the place on equal terms.
3. As-built site plans with photographs of showing pedestrian and bicycle
pathways and points of connection, bicycle lots and end of trip facilities.
Page 22 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
B. HW1.2 LOW VOC MATERIALS

The Contractor is to use low VOC materials and products for over 60% of all
areas in the building interiors where applicable and available in the market. Area
is calculated as surface area of application. This requirement can be met through
either of the following methods
● SGBP 4 tick products OR
● VOC emissions as stated below
Applicable interior products and finishes as are:

Flooring, wall, and ● Adhesives and sealants used for the
ceiling finishes flooring, wall or ceilings (including tile
grouts and sealants, carpet adhesives, wall
covering adhesives.)
● Floor coverings such as carpets, laminates
and vinyl’s
● Wall coverings such as laminates, fabrics
and wall papers
● Ceiling coverings such as ceiling boards
● Varnish, stains, lacquers, paints or other
finishes
VOC emissions thresholds:

For products, ● TVOC emission rate shall be ≤ 0.25 mg m-3
finishes and h after 24 hours
-1
furnishings
● Formaldehyde emission rate shall be ≤ 0.02
mg m-3 h-1 after 48 hours
Paints, Varnishes, ● VOC content for trim, stains and varnishes

lacquers shall be ≤ 75gL-1
● VOC content for paints (water-based) shall
be ≤ 25 gL-1 for matt, ≤ 30 gL-1 for low
sheen, ≤ 75 gL-1 for semi-gloss
● Limits for products are based upon ASTM D5116-90, “Standard Guide for Small-
Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor
Materials/Products”
● Test methods for paints and coatings shall comply with ISO 17895 or ISO 11890
Page 23 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
● Testing must be by an accredited laboratory
1. As-built drawings and calculation of extent of application for each product
/ material
2. SGBP 4 tick certificates or product/ material testing reports that meet the
low VOC emission levels stated above
3. Purchase Orders (POs) and Delivery Orders (DOs) of the low VOC emission
products and materials used
C. HW1.3C CLEAN AIR
The Contractor is to ensure the provision of designated smoking points for
smokers to use, which are located as to allow non-smokers to utilise and gain
full enjoyment of the outdoor spaces in a healthy manner.
1. Design drawings and specifications that show the location, design and
dimensions of the designated smoking area in accordance with Guidelines
on Designated Smoking Area set-up by the National Environment Agency.
2. As-built drawings and photos that show the location, design and
dimensions of the designated smoking area
D. HW2.2 CIRCADIAN RHYTHM
i. Quality of Artificial Lighting
The Contractor is to ensure the following:
Colour Rendering
● All electric lights (except decorative fixtures, emergency lights and other
special-purpose lighting) meet the minimum colour rendering index in
accordance with Clause 5 of SS 531 – 1 : 2016 (2013) – Code of Practice
for Lighting in Workplaces
Responsive Light Control

● All lighting (except decorative fixtures) are programmed using occupancy
sensors to automatically dim to 20% or less (or switch off) when the zone
is unoccupied, and all lighting in areas where there is access to daylight
Page 24 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
have the capacity to and are programmed to dim continuously in response

to daylight
1. Specifications and data sheets of light selections including relevant
simulations and calculations
2. Sensor details, control strategy and electrical drawings indicating the
zoning of lights and control groups
3. As-built drawings, delivery orders, data sheets and photographs.
E. HW3.2A RESTORATIVE AND COMMUNITY SPACES

The Contractor is to ensure there are community spaces and facilities, within
the development, including physical exercise facilities.
1. Spaces shall be identified on the plan, with the design intent clearly
articulated.
2. For indoor restorative spaces details should include the separation from
the working environment, the interior design considerations and the soft
furnishings
3. The range of outdoor spaces should be articulated, identifying the primary
user as well ensuring space for care givers where applicable (playgrounds,
water play areas and fitness areas). Planting strategy, soundscape design
considerations should be considered as a part of the sensory experience
where sensory spaces are included.
F. HW3.2B OUTSOURCED WORKERS

The Contractor is to ensure there are locations that afford privacy and
provides a pleasant environment and provision of amenities such as tables,
chairs, water coolers and lockers.
1. Rest area location marked on plan, the size of the space must be sufficient
to cater for the expected numbers of outsourced workers and come with
the relevant furniture and amenities provided.
Page 25 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
G. HW3.3B HEALTHY EATING & DRINKING

The Contractor is to ensure there are accessible drinking water points at
convenient locations such as internally within common areas near WC’s,
changing rooms and circulation nodes
1. Plans identifying the accessible water point locations on the plan and the
areas in which these serve.
2. Submission of as built drawings and photographs of the water points.
8. INTELLIGENCE
A. IN1.1 DIGITAL LIFE CYCLE
i. Use of spatial model co-ordination platfrom based on Project
Information Model (PIM) for spatial analysis
(a) Identifying system clashes through an automatic model checking tool. The
use of BIM clash detection process to model building and facility elements,
equipment access and working spaces as “3D volumes” or “reserved box” can
help to avoid clashes between different disciplines and to accurately allocate
maintenance space for mechanical equipment. 6 Points shall be awarded for
clash-checking between different disciplines, modelling equipment access and
working space of key mechanical equipment (e.g. Chillers, AHU).
(b) Spatial analysis for effective planning, design, construction, maintenance,

and future replacement. New development projects should involve the facilities
management (FM) team throughout the key design and construction stages to
provide insights on space requirements for maintenance and future
replacement works. Points shall be awarded for the use of PIM to solve issues in
space requirements for maintenance or other space-related issues in the
building operation process.
1. BIM Execution Plan (BEP) showing the key spatial provisions made to meet
the clash detection requirement.
2. Meeting notes, correspondences with facility management team
reflecting their involvement and inputs during the meeting sessions
Page 26 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
3. Clash report and/or animation to show the spatial issues from the clashes
detected are checked and resolved
4. As-built drawing/model showing the space requirements are fulfilled.
B. IN1.2 COMMON DATA ENVIRONMENT

i. Performance Dashboard to monitor building assets’ performance and
operations
The Contractor is to ensure there is a performance dashboard to monitor the
different aspect of building assets’ performance and operations from a single
dashboard built on top of the CDE
• Operational dashboard: sets of measures used to guide facility operations,
usually in real time such as equipment status and work order status.
• Managerial dashboard: sets of metrics which may use data from multiple
operational systems such as maintenance cost per sqm and energy use per
occupant.
1. Tender specifications stating the adoption of a CDE with the performance
dashboard during the operational stage of the assets (if there is no such
platform available).
2. Illustrations of the building assets’ operational and managerial dashboard
of the existing implementation (if the CDE is already available).
3. Screenshots and photos showing the performance dashboard of the
implementation
ii. Data Management and Integration (Interoperability) with a platform

based on an open protocol
The Contractor is to ensure there is Data Management and Integration with a
platform that connects and manages asset and facility data, operational data,
and real-time equipment data extracted from different sub-systems based on
an open protocol (e.g. OPC, BACNET, MODBUS, DLMS, published REST/SOAP
APIs and etc.)
1. Tender specifications stating the connectivity of various facilities
management (FM) systems/subsystems and data to the CDE platform
with open protocol.
2. System write-up on the various FM digital solutions which are integrated
through the CDE with open protocol
Page 27 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
3. Screenshots and photos showing the implementation

C. IN2.1 ASSET INFORMATION MODEL
The contractor is to ensure the development and handover of an accurate
spatial model of the building or asset which is complete and fully up to date
inclusive of renovations that would impact building services or layout
alterations.
1. Tender specifications for the AIM including digital handover requirements
Page 28 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
9. MAINTAINABILITY
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
i) Design for maintainability report, as part of the O&M manual, outlining the
key maintainability considerations and provisions. (1 Point)
As early as practical and preferable starting from concept design, conduct at

least 3 design charrettes to optimise the integration of design for
maintainability strategies across all aspects of building design, construction
and operations, drawing the input from all the participants. Each design
charette must be minimum 3 hours.
The design charrette should accomplish the following:

- To draw design team members’ attention on design for maintainability
- To share the background of design for maintainability framework
- To identify the perceived downstream maintenance issues due to the
proposed design/ nature of project
- To identify the desired certification level and points targeted
- To generate potential solutions and maintenance strategies that improve
the maintenance regime
1. Design for maintainability team structure.
2. Design for maintainability report summarising the maintainability strategies
targeted for the project.
3. Updated design for maintainability report including the evidence for
implementing design for maintainability solutions.
4. Submit as-built drawings, photographs, and/or O&M manuals highlighting
the maintainability features installed on site.
ii) Maintenance contract
Use of outcome-based maintenance contracts for the following services:

- Cleaning (toilets, waste management, etc)
- Landscape
- Security
Page 29 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Use of integrated facilities management (IFM) contracts for the following

maintenance services:
- Mechanical and Electrical maintenance services
- Security services
1. Meeting notes from the design charrette highlighting the systems shortlisted
for outcome-based contracting and the design provisions
2. Tender Specification showing the requirement on outcome-based
maintenance contract and integrated FM contract. OR
3. Contract clauses highlighting the outcome-based maintenance and
integrated FM contract.
B. ARCHITECTURAL EXTERIOR
General Facade
i. Drip Control for External Face Of Façade

The Contractor is to ensure that top surface of all walls or coping is to overhang
on the rear side with drip control measures as per architecture design details.
1. As-built drawings/shop drawings showing slope incorporated on top of
wall surfaces.
2. Photographs of incorporated slope after implementation.
3. Detail section drawings showing slope.
Page 30 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
ii. Façade Access
The Contractor is to analyse access requirements of the entire building façade

and façade features for cleaning, maintenance, and inspection purposes. Access
to building façade to be through either of the following methods as applicable:
● Building Maintenance Unit
● Monorail
● Temporary Suspended Working Platform
● Ground based Access Equipment
● Ladders and Gantries
Sole use of rope is not an acceptable method to conduct maintenance and

should be avoided.
1. Plan/elevation/schematic drawings indicating entire façade is 100 %
accessible through one or a combination of façade access systems.
2. Maintenance strategy report for façade access.
Masonry and Lightweight Concrete Panels

The Contractor is to ensure the following specifications are met for all masonry
and lightweight concrete panels as per architecture and C&S design and
specifications.
Sl.No: Requirement Documentation

1 Use of mortar ● Test report showing salt-free sand -
materials that are salt- for onsite mortar and grout.
free ● Product specification indicating salt-
free or chloride-free - for premix
mortar or grout
● Delivery orders of the specified
mortar materials
2 For large continuous ● As-built drawings/shop drawings to

areas of masonry and show masonry and light weight
light weight concrete concrete panel façades.
panels, design
Page 31 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
movement joints to ● Elevation drawings showing

minimise damage to movement joints indicating width of
façade, weather seal movement joints and
and waterproofing intervals.
joints.
3 For pre-cast joints, ● Plan/elevation drawings indicating all

use silicone or precast façades using sealants.
modified silicon ● Product specification and delivery
sealant on exterior orders of the sealant used and primer
exposed joints with ● Test reports showing Adhesion- in
adequate adhesion Peel results
properties to the
substrate.
4 For efflorescence, use ● Plan drawings indicating all external

paint with good surfaces with paint finish
resistance to water ● Test reports showing water
absorption, compying absorption results complying to SS
with SS5500 or 500 or equivalent
equivalent ● Product specification and delivery
orders of applicable products
5 Paint Finish (Top ● Plan drawings indicating all external
coat): surfaces with paint finish.
Paint with good ● Tender specification indicating use of
resistance to water selected paint finish.
absorption complying ● Tender specification indicating
with SS500 or proposed paint finish to be tested for
equivalent OR mineral water absorption complying to SS500
paint requirements or equivalent (if non-
mineral paint).
Façade Features / Other Façade Considerations
i. Steel Structures
The Contractor is to ensure that exposed steel bases do not have direct contact
with the ground to mitigate corrosion and entrapment of moisture and dirt, as
per C&S design and specification detail.
Page 32 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. As-built drawings/shop drawings locating all steel structures with steel
base protection
2. Detail drawings for steel base protection (minimum 100 mm above
ground).
3. Photographs of the concrete upstand or concrete curb after
implementation.
Entrance Lobby
i. Raised Internal Level
The Contractor is to ensure that there is a raised internal level by at least 100mm
from the external datum to prevent water ingress.
1. Plan drawings showing level changes at all building entrances from
external datum.
2. Detail section drawings indicating the level change (minimum 100 mm) at
all building entrances.
3. As-built drawings to show implementation
ii. Canopy / Overhang Design
The Contractor is to ensure that there is a canopy/overhang (with minimally 1:50

slope) to shelter against wind-driven rain with canopy angled at least 45 degrees
Page 33 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
to the entrance line and with drop panel if canopy/overhang does not shelter to
entrance line.
1. Plan drawings locating the canopy/overhang at proposed building
entrances.
2. Plan/section/elevation showing canopy/overhang design and slope to fall
at proposed entrance locations
3. As-built drawings to show implementation
Concrete Roof
i. Design Slope
The Contractor is to ensure that all concrete flat roofs have slopes not lesser
than 1:150 and have supper drains and/ or gutters
1. As-built drawings/shop drawings showing minimum 1:150 slope with
scupper drains/gutter for concrete roofs
Page 34 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
ii. Waterproofing
The Contractor is to ensure that waterproofing for concrete roofs is carried out
through either of the following:
● Bitumen/polymer elastomer preformed waterproofing membrane
(designed with overlap and proper termination of membrane)
● Water based/ solvent-based liquid applied waterproofing membrane
1. Plan drawing locating concrete roofs with waterproofing membrane.
2. Detail drawings illustrating overlap and termination of waterproofing
details (if using waterproofing membrane).
3. Photographs showing implementation.
Page 35 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
iii. Corrosion on metal roofs
The Contractor is to ensure the use of metal of similar properties or separators

between different materials to mitigate risk of bi-metallic corrosion between
roof and other metal components or accessories.
1. Tender specification indicating use of metal components with similar
properties on the roof system based on manufacturer’s recommendation
or based on compatibility of direct contact of metal and alloys
2. Delivery orders
C. ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR
Flooring
The Contractor is to ensure the following specifications are met for all tile
flooring as per architecture design and specifications.
No. Requirement Documentation

1 For areas of high ● As-built (interior) drawings to show
traffic (main the extent of implementation
entrance, lobbies, ● Relevant technical material
corridors)- specification or product performance
Page 36 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
minimum Mohs test results indicating the

hardness values of 7 specified Mohs hardness value.
● Delivery order for the specified
product.
2 For areas of high ● As-built (interior) drawings to show

traffic (main the extent of implementation
entrance, lobbies, ● Relevant technical material
corridors)- specification or product performance
maximum water test results indicating the
absorption rate of water absorption value of not more
0.5% than 0.5%.
● Delivery order for the specified
product.
Walls & Partitions
The Contractor is to ensure the finishing to be stain-resistant paint or

hydrophobic paint
1. Plan and typical sectional drawings showing location of coating
application
2. Relevant technical material specifications or product performance test
results for the stain resistant / hydrophobic property of the selected paint
finish
3. Delivery order for the specified paint finish
False Ceiling
The Contractor is to ensure that all newly installed false ceiling systems are
modular and easily demountable OR specify open ceiling design.
The Contractor is to ensure all parts of the ceiling are accessible for general
maintenance.
Page 37 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. As-built (interior) drawings to show modular ceiling layout

2. Typical sections of false ceiling
3. Product specifications cut sheets of modular ceiling
4. Photographs of completed works showing the modular ceiling panel.
5. Schematic drawings demonstrating entire false ceiling system is 100%
accessible through one or combination of access system
6. Extract from maintenance strategy report indicating the provision of
access
Wet Rooms and Storage
i. Permanent Storage Space for Toilet Supplies
The Contractor is to ensure there are design rooms for cleaning tools, carts, and
supplies such as tissue rolls and soap refill for every male and female toilet
cluster as per architectural design specifications.
1. Tender drawings showing the location of storage space within every male
and female toilet clusters for store supplies
2. As-built (interior) drawings to show implementation
3. Photographs of completed works showing the dedicated storage space
ii. Walls in wet rooms
The Contractor is to ensure wall finishes with glazed ceramic tiles or

homogenous tiles
1. Tender specification indicating type of tile material used
2. Plan and section drawings showing the extent of wall finish
3. As-built (interior) drawings to show implementation
4. Photographs of completed works showing the dedicated storage space
iii. Partition Walls in Washrooms
Page 38 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
The Contractor is to use water-resistant, partition panels with water absorption

rate not exceeding 5%, e.g. phenolic panels.
The Contractor is to ensure that all partition walls are installed with a minimum
gap of 150mm from finished floor level as per architecture design details.
1. Relevant technical material specification or product performance test
results for the rate of water absorption for the selected product
2. As-built (interior) drawings to show gap between partition panel and
finished floor level
3. Photographs highlighting the implemented raised partition panels.
iv. Full vanity wash basin in washrooms
The Contractor is to ensure that the full vanity wash basin with counter top to
slope away from the user.
1. Tender specification indicating vanity wash basin.
2. Plan, elevation, and sectional drawings showing full vanity washbasin set
that meets the requirements. Verification stage
3. As-built (interior) drawings to show the implementation.
4. Photographs of completed works.
v. Soap Dispenser in washrooms
The Contractor is to ensure the soap and tissue dispenser is within arm’s reach
of each faucet AND the soap dispenser location to be vertically mounted directly
above the basin or integrated bin.
Page 39 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Tender specification indicating showing position / location of the soap
dispenser
2. Plan, elevation, and sectional drawings showing full vanity washbasin set
that meets the requirements. Verification stage
3. As-built (interior) drawings to show the implementation.
4. Photographs of completed works.
vi. Water Basin in Washrooms
The Contractor is to ensure that the selection of washroom basin meets the
following requirement
Page 40 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
● Minimum depth of 175mm

● Basin is not a flat bottom basin
1. Purchase order for selected washroom basins
2. Relevant technical specification showing the depth of the basin.
vii. False Ceiling in wet rooms
The Contractor is to ensure the use of moisture-resistant suspended modular

ceiling panels with water absorption rate not exceeding 5%.
1. Tender specification indicating the moisture resistant material and
maximum water absorption rate for suspended ceiling panel.
2. Reflected ceiling plans showing the extent of the moisture-resistant false
ceiling
3. As-built drawings to show extent of implementation
4. Photographs of completed works
Loading Bay / Back of house service areas

● Wall bumpers, column guards, wheel stoppers, and bollards.
● Epoxy flooring
● Kick boards on doors
1. Plan drawing showing the location of protective measures for columns in
high traffic areas.
2. Tender drawings (plan and typical sections) showing the location of
protective measures for walls, floors and doors.
3. As-built (construction) drawings to show implementation.
4. Photographs of completed works highlighting the protective measures.
Page 41 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
D. MECHANICAL
Unitary Air Conditioning System - VRF
i. Access to VRF outdoor units
The Contractor is to ensure the necessary access space provided for the
collective VRF outdoor units.
Top Discharge:
- Provide minimum 500 mm to the front for refrigerant piping and
maintenance access.
- Provide minimum 300 mm to the suction side for air intake.
- If there is a wall at both front and back of the unit, provide minimum 1 m
access space for each unit.
Top Discharge:
- The outdoor units must not be stacked.
- Provide minimum 500 mm to the front for maintenance access.
- Provide minimum 300 mm to the suction side for air intake.
- Provide minimum 350mm on the side with refrigerant piping for
maintenance If there is a wall on both sides, provide minimum 1 m clear
access space for at least one side of the unit.
Page 42 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Tender specifications indicating the exact access requirement.
ii. Refrigerant pipe and insulation
The contractor is to ensure the outdoor refrigerant pipe to be mounted on inside

raised trunking to avoid water ingress and damage to stepping/lateral impact.
1. Tender specification showing the requirement for raised platform with
trunking
Page 43 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Air Distribution Systems
i. Fan coil units (FCU) access
Cooling coil pipe connection access - Provide minimum 450 mm clear space after
pipe connection from any obstacle
FCU side clearance - Provide minimum 200 mm access space from any obstacle
1. Tender specifications indicating the access requirement.
ii. Reduce Risk of Water Ponding and Algae Growth in the AHU Room
The Contractor is to ensure the AHU drain pipe must be terminated directly
above the floor trap to avoid any water spillage and the drain pipe must have
minimum 1:100 slope to avoid any water choke.
1. ACMV plan /section / typical detail drawings at appropriate scale showing
the typical drain termination and slope requirement.
2. Tender specifications indicating the AHU condensate drain pipe must be
at least 1:100 gradient and terminated directly above the floor trap.
3. As-built drawings/shop drawings (including plan drawing/section)
showing the typical drain termination and slope requirement.
iii. Reduce Risk of Choke of Condensate Drain Stack
Page 44 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
• The horizontal drain pipes must have minimum slope of 1:100 for easy
flow of condensate drain
• Provide T-joint before terminating the individual drain pipe from AHU to
the main drain stack for periodic cleaning
1. Tender specifications indicating the condensate drain pipe slope
requirement.
2. ACMV typical detail drawing showing the drain termination and T-joint
arrangement.
3. As-built drawings/shop drawings (including plan drawing/schematic
drawing/typical detailing) showing the condensate drain pipe slope
requirement and T-joint arrangement.
4. Photographs showing the T-joint implementation.
iv. AHU System

• Fibre glass filter media with average initial resistance not greater than 90
Pa for primary filter (MERV 8 and ISO ePM10 50%) and 145 Pa for
secondary filter (MERV 14 and ISO ePM1 80%)
• AHU fan system with less moving parts (i.e. fans with direct drive system)
for enhanced reliability and reduced downtime
Page 45 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Tender specifications/ drawings indicating the filter type, initial resistance
for primary and secondary filter
2. Tender specifications indicating the direct drive fans.
Domestic Water Supply
i. Access Space for Maintenance of Water Tank

• Provide minimum clear width of 1.2 m access walkway to water tank from
the nearest staircase or lift.
• Provide minimum access space to the water tank for regular maintenance.
i) For panel tank (FRP/Stainless steel), provide minimum 600 mm clear
space around the tank.
• Provide minimum 1 m clear headroom above the water tank (applicable
to water tank with top access).
1. Plumbing drawing/C&S drawing/specifications capturing the access space
and headroom requirements.
2. Shop/as-built drawing indicting the actual access space provisions.
3. Photographs showing the space provision
Sanitary Systems
Page 46 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
i.Access Provision and Design Detailing for Sanitary Pipes for Ease of
Maintenance
a. Provide cleaning eyes with viewing panel for better maintenance
b. Specify hubless elbows for sanitary stacks with horizontal transfers
1. Tender specifications/drawings capturing the cleaning eye with view
panel requirement.
Page 47 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
2. As-built sanitary detail drawings showing the details of viewing panels

3. Photographs showing the details of viewing panels
4. Sanitary drawings showing the details of ductile iron or cast-iron elbows
that are used for UPVC sanitary stacks with transfers
5. As-built sanitary drawings showing the details of ductile iron or cast-iron
elbows
ii. Reduce risk of chokes in sanitary pipes

The Contractor is to provide at least 75% of the typical floor risers with
continuous vertical run without any offsets to reduce additional bends/joints.
1. Sanitary tender drawings/specifications capturing the vertical runs
requirements
Page 48 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
Fire Protection Systems
i. Access to Fire Detectors at Height

The Contractor is to ensure there is clear access route for Mobile Elevated Work
Platforms (MEWP) to reach the lobby or atrium space from the nearest entrance
door.
Note:
• Provide clear access with entrance door/opening of 1.8 m width x 2.4 m height
and working base of 1.8 m width x 2 m length if the mounting height is less than
or equal to 10.5 m.
• Provide clear access with entrance door/opening of 2 m width x 2.8 m height
and working base of 2 m width x 2 m length if the mounting height is greater
than 10.5 m.
Clear and unobstructed access must be provided from the entrance to the
location directly below the fire detectors. This must include the height and width
of entrance door, the clearance along the MEWP access path as well as the
working base for MEWP to carry out the maintenance work. The floor (loading
and finishes) must be able to withstand the MEWP to be deployed for
maintenance work. The deployment and operation of MEWP must comply with
authority requirements. The actual clear access must depend on the proposed
type of MEWP to be used and the manufacturer’s recommended clearances
through the access way
1. Fire alarm system tender drawings showing the sensors installed at high
volume space
2. Tender drawings to capture the access route requirement for MEWP
access or alternative access
3. Indicate the access requirement in the tender specifications
4. Mark-up the actual access route/space in the shop/as-built drawings
Page 49 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
E. ELECTRICAL
Lighting System
i. Access to Light Fixtures Located at Heights for Maintenance and Use of

reliable Light Fixtures
The Contractor is to ensure there is clear access route for Mobile Elevated Work
Platforms (MEWP) to reach the lobby, atrium space from the nearest door
entrance.
• Provide clear access with entrance door/opening of minimum 1.8 m width x
2.4 m height and working base of minimum 1.8m width x 2m length if the
mounting height is less than or equal to 10.5 m.
• Provide clear access with entrance door/opening of minimum 2 m width x 2.8
m height and working base of minimum 2 m width x 2 m length if the mounting
height is greater than 10.5m.
Clear and unobstructed access must be provided from the entrance to the
location directly below the luminaires. This must include the height and width
of entrance door, the clearance along the MEWP access path as well as the
working base for MEWP to carry out the maintenance work. The floor (loading
and finishes) must be able to withstand the MEWP to be deployed for
maintenance work. The deployment and operation of MEWP must comply with
authority requirements. Refer to Figure 47 below for recommended clear
access. The actual clear access must depend on the proposed type of MEWP to
be used and the manufacturer’s recommended clearances through the access
way.
The Contractor is to ensure the use of reliable light fixtures such as LED light
(LM80 B30 L70 @ L50,000) which requires less maintenance.
1. Tender drawings to capture the access route requirement for MEWP
access or indicate the requirement in the tender specifications.
2. Mark-up the actual access route and space in the shop/as-built drawings.
3. Drawings/lighting specifications showing the light fixture specifications
4. Technical data sheet and cut-sheet showing the light fixture specifications
Page 50 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
ii. Reduce Risk of Light Flickering
The Contractor is to ensure the use of constant DC output type LED driver
complying with the following IEC standards to minimise flickering:
a. IEC 62384
b. IEC 61347 Part 1 and Part 2-13
For non-LED light fixtures, use electronic ballast to cut off power supply to
prevent flickering due to lamp failure
1. Tender drawings/specifications highlighting the compliance to IEC
standards for LED light fittings and provisions of electronic ballast for non-
LED light fittings.
2. Technical data sheet of LED light fittings stating the compliance to IEC
standards and third-party test certificates. Technical data sheet of
electronic ballast for non-LED light fittings.
iii. Reduce Risk of LED Light Colour Shift
The Contractor is to ensure that LEDs are tested to ANSI/IES LM-79-19 and LM-
80-15 to ensure LED performance
1. Tender drawings/specifications highlighting the requirements including
the test standards IESNA LM-79-19 and LM-80-15.
2. Technical data sheet, cut-sheet and third-party test certificates indicated
with the compliance with the specified standards/requirements.
Power Distribution
i. Reduce Risk of Water Ingress into Electrical System
The Contractor is to ensure the electrical room must be raised by minimum

100mm against the outside passageway
Page 51 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Tender specifications indicating the requirement.
2. Drawings indicating the electrical room location and level with respect to
passageway.
3. Shop drawings/as-built section drawings indicating the electrical room
location and level with respect to passageway.
ii. Reduce Risk of Unnoticed Failure of Surge Arrestor Located in the LT Main
Switchboard
The Contractor is to ensure the use of surge arrestor with discharge indicator.
1. Tender specifications/drawings showing the discharge indicator
requirement
Extra Low Voltage System
i. Provide Flexibility for Future Expansion for CCTV and Access Control
System
The Contractor is to ensure there is a minimum of 20% spare capacity in network

switch to cater for future expansion.
The Contractor is to ensure there is design that allows for future addition of data
storage (either local or cloud base data storage).
1. Tender specifications/drawings indicating the spare capacity requirement
2. Shop drawing/as-built drawing indicating 20% spare capacity in the
network switch for future expansion
3. Tender specifications/drawings showing the requirement of future
addition of data storage
4. As-built drawings/shop drawings, technical data sheet, T&C forms etc.
showing the implementation.
Page 52 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
ii. Reduce Risk of Damage to Outdoor Camera and Other Equipment due to
Lightning Surge
The Contractor is to ensure there is surge arrestor provided to all outdoor

cameras.
Note: The surge protection shall be provided at power source and/or at network
switch.
1. Tender specifications showing the surge arrestor requirement.
2. As-built schematic drawing showing the surge arrestor requirement.
Lightning Protection System

The Contractor is to ensure the proper design and installation of façade
maintenance system to avoid damage to lightning protection system.
The design of gondola system which must prevent its parts (be it fix structure or
suspension steel rope) from damaging the lightning tape which is mounted on
the parapet wall. It is recommended to provide sufficient if any of the gondola
structure or supporting system is to be installed over the lightning tape.
1. Tender specifications/façade access system drawings showing the
requirement
2. As-built lightning protection system and façade access system drawings
indicating the lightning protection strip interfacing with façade access
systems.
3. Photographs showing the implementation
Page 53 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
F. LANDSCAPE
Standalone Structures
i. Outdoor standalone structures

- Outdoor standalone structure’s roof slope to be not gentler than 15
degrees for efficient water run-off.
- Open ceiling design for the outdoor standalone structures.
1. Tender drawing (plan) showing the location of the standalone structure.
2. Detail drawings/specifications showing the roof slope of the outdoor
standalone structure.
3. Tender specification indicating the open ceiling system for the selected
areas.
4. Reflected ceiling plans showing the extent of open ceiling.
10. OTHERS
A. WINDOW TO WALL RATIO
The Contractor is to ensure that the building envelope design and glazing
specifications meets the criteria stipulated in the following Table C1.
Page 54 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
1. Material schedules showing salient data of material properties used for

the facade and external wall systems
2. As built drawings, photos and schematics of facade
B. ROOF WITHOUT SKYLIGHT

The Contractor is to ensure that the average thermal transmittance (U-value)
for the gross area of the roof shall not exceed the limit prescribed in Table C2
for the corresponding weight group.
1. RTTV computation for roofs with skylight in prescribed forms and formats
2. Architectural plan layout and sectional details of different roof types as
well as the roof composition and respective U-values
3. Technical material or product information and relevant calculation of U-
value of the roof
C. AIR-TIGHTNESS AND LEAKAGE

The Contractor is to ensure that the buildings reduce air leakage through doors,
windows and other openings on the building envelope.
Windows and Curtain Walls

All windows and curtain walls shall be designed to ensure that air leakage rates
do not exceed the limits specified in the following standards:
SS 212 - Specification for Aluminium Alloy Windows

SS 654 - Code for Practice for Curtain Walls
1. Extracts of the tender specification showing the requirement for air
permeability tests for windows and curtain walls
Page 55 of 56
IFH Egg Farm
2. Air permeability test results and report for windows and curtain wall
system (mock-up) from an accredited laboratory
Openings between Conditioned and Non-Conditioned Spaces

Building entrances and door openings to building exterior or non-air-
conditioned spaces and the like shall
i. Be provided with doors that are equipped with automated technology or
self-closing devices. Where door opening of any commercial units are
located along the perimeter of the building envelope, that unit shall be
equipped with the addition of pressure independent control valve and
energy meter to measure the consumption of fan coiled units (FCUs)
within the unit
ii. Be equipped with vestibules or other appropriate measures (air-curtain
system) for the doorway with high pedestrian flow. In the case of
vestibules, the interior and exterior door must have a minimum distance
of not less than 2.5m apart and should be interlocked to avoid being
opened at the same time.
Note: The use of highly efficient air-curtain system with its performance tested
in accordance with ANSI/AMCA Standard 220 to ensure a minimum of 2.0m/s
airstream velocity at the floor.
1. Plan layout showing the vestibules and details of the automated
technology or self-closing devices provided for the doors and other
appropriate measures, where relevant.
2. Photographs showing the provision of vestibules or other appropriate
measures implemented
D. SMART BUILDING SOLUTIONS

The Contractor is to ensure that the building has timer sensors/controls for
lighting and/or ventilation systems in common areas and facilities.
1. Purchase order for relevant sensors/controls
Page 56 of 56
GM: 2021 - New Non-Residential Buildings
Project Details
GM Reference No
Building name
Type of Building
GFA (m2)
Carpark Area (m2)
Air-conditioned Area (m2)
Building Key Performance Data:

Type of Aircon system
Building cooling load (RT)
Chiller configuration (e.g. 3 nos. x 500RT)
Cooling load / aircon area (W/m2)
Air Distribution system efficiency (kW/RT)
Total System Efficiency, TSE (kW/RT)
Total Building Energy consumption (kWh/yr)
EUI (kWh/m2/yr)
Reason for Certification

GM 2021 ScoreCard
GM Ref No.
Project Name:
Revision:
SUMMARY
MAX POINTS SCORING POINTS REMARKS
Resilience 15 3
Whole Life Carbon 15 8
Health&Wellbeing 15 6
Intelligence 15 5
Maintainability 15 10.08
TOTAL 75 32
CRITERIA MAX POINTS SCORING POINTS

Re1 Protect 5 2
Re2 Manage 5 1.75
Re3 Restore 5 0
Cn1 Carbon 5 2.5
Cn2 Construction 5 5
Cn3 Fit Out 5 0
Hw1 Physiological 5 2.5
Hw2 Psychological 5 0.5
Hw3 Sociological 5 3
In1 Integrated 5 4
In2 Data Driven 5 1
In3 Responsive 5 0
Max Maintainability MAINTAINABILITY CORRESPONDING GM

Maintainability Points POINTS SCORED SCORE
91 50.40 10.08
Input
CRITERIA FOR ENERGY EFFICIENCY SECTION Data Input
Required
ENERGY EFFICIENCY
Building supplied by District Cooling System? Y/N
PATHWAY 1 - EUI
Energy Usage Intensity Input (#)
PATHWAY 2 - FIXED METRICS
(i) Reduced Heat Gain (ETTV) 40 Input (#)
(ii) Non AC Areas 0 Input (%)
a) ACMV TSE 0.8 Input (#)
b) ACMV (Unitary)
(iii)
Three Phase (no. of ticks) Input (#)
Single Phase (no. of ticks) Input (#)
(iv) Lighting Power Budget Input (#)
(v) Mechanical Ventilation Input (%)
Integrated Energy Management & control Systems
a) Lighting controls provided in accordance with SS 530: 2014 Code of
Practice for Energy Efficiency Standard for Building Services and N Y/N
Equipment.
b) Energy consumption monitoring and benchmarking system N Y/N
(vi)
c) Automatic controls for the air-conditioning system to respond to
N Y/N
periods of non-use, or reduced heat load.
d) A control device shall be installed in every guestroom for the purpose of
automatically switching off the lighting and reducing the air conditioning N Y/N
loads when a guestroom is not occupied.
On-Site Renewables - replacement to make up any deficiencies from the
(vii) Input (#)
above list, with safety factor
Air side efficiency (kW/RT)
(viii) Input (#)
(for buildings with DCS)
PATHWAY 3 - ENERGY SAVINGS
(i) Saving from BAU (2005 Code) Input (#)
(ii) Saving from Current Reference (2005 Code) Input (#)
Input Available points for Points
CRITERIA FOR RESILIENCE SECTION Data Input Remarks
Required New Buildings Scored
Resilience 15 3.3 -
RE1 PROTECT 5 1.5
RE1.1 Conservation
RE1.1a Habitat and Ecology
Comprehensive EIA to identify design measures to mitigate negative
(i) N Y/N 1 point 0.0
impacts (climate change & ecological systems) to site environment.
Implementation plan that outlines key actions to maintain the ecological
(ii) integrity of biodiversity on the site or the implementation of these N Y/N 1 point 0.0
mitigation measures.
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 1.1 a 0.0
RE1.1b Resources
Establishing and adopting Sustainable Policies and Action Plans for
continuous improvements:-
(i) a) Energy Management Policy and Energy Improvement Plan N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
b) Water Management Policy and Water Improvement Plan N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
c) Waste Management Policy & 3R Plan N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
a) Achieved PUB Water Efficient Building certification? N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
(ii)
b) PUB WELS 3-ticks rating for 90% of all relevant water fittings. 90 Input (%) 1 point 1.0
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 1.1 b 1.0
RE1.2 Urban Heat Island (UHI)
RE1.2a Outdoor Thermal Comfort
Use of Environmental modelling of the site to mitigate the Urban Heat
Island (UHI) effects by identifying and implementing interventions to
improve outdoor thermal comfort and reduce UHI effects.
Model shall show one of the following results: N Y/N 2 points 0.0
•Physiological Equivalent Temperature (PET) of ≤34oC
•Universal Thermal Climate Index (UTCI) of ≤32oC
•TSV <+2
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 1.2 a 0.0
RE1.2b Urban Heat Island Mitigation
To demonstrate the UHI mitigation measures via the site coverage at plan
0.5 points for (a)
view:-
50 Input (%) OR 0.5 Can score if going for PV
a) ≥ 50% demonstrating mitigation measures (0.5 pt)
1 point for (b)
b) ≥ 80% demonstrating mitigation measures (1 pt)
RE1.3 Contextual Response
RE1.3 Response to Site Context
Site analysis, simulation and studies to demonstrate how site topography,
microclimate, access & connectivity has informed the development of N Y/N 2 points 0.0
building design.
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 1.3 (Max 2 pts) 0.0
RE2 MANAGE 5 1.8
RE2.1 Leadership
RE2.1a Project Team
Appointment of accredited environmentalist specialists to drive and
coordinate the environmental design approach.
(i) No. of Certified GM AP Input (#) 0.25 pts/GM AP &
0.5 pts /GM AAP 0.5
No. of Certified GM AAP 1 Input (#) (Capped at 0.5 pts) GreenA
No. of firms certified under SGBC's SGBS certification or SIFMA's CFMC 0.25 pts/firm
(ii) 1 Input (#) 0.3
accreditation scheme. (Capped at 0.5 pts)
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 2.1 a (Capped at 1 point) 0.8
RE2.1b Procurement
Adoption of Sustainable or Green Procurement Policy for:-
- New Non-Residential Buildings
Adoption of Energy Performance Contract (EPC) by accredited EPC firm for
(ii) N Y/N 1 point 0.0
- New Non-Residential Buildings.
RE2.2 Circularity
Tackling the 3 priority waste streams and adopting circular economic
approach to close resource loops.
Provision of dedicated recycling facilities and receptacles for:-
(i) (a) E-waste, in collaboration with PRS Operator N Y/N 0.5 point 0.0
(b) Packaging waste including beverage containers Y Y/N 0.5 point 0.5
Food waste system - Provision of proper segregation, pre-treatment and
(ii) N Y/N 0.5 point 0.0
on-site treatment or direct conveyance for off-site treatment.
Waste audit & engagement:-
a) Conduct annual waste audit to identify areas of wastage
(iii) Y Y/N 0.5 point 0.5 Letter of Undertaking
b) Conduct waste management/3R training for staff/tenants/cleaners at
least twice a year
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 2.2 (Capped at 1 point) 1.0
RE2.3 Resilence Strategy
Provision of a comprehensive project specific climate change risk and
adaptation assessment.
Use scenario analysis for assessment of climate-related risks and
(i) N Y/N 2 points 0.0
opportunities
Conceptualise environmental sustainability targets and design approaches
in project brief to mitigate climate-related risks (for new buildings)
Develop action plan to be climate-resilient through current or future
(iii) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
design and operational interventions (for existing buildings)
SUB-TOTAL FOR RE 2.3 0.0
RE3 RESTORE 5 0.0
RE3.1 Buildings In Nature
Improving the ecology and quality of the natural environment on site
through well-considered planting strategy.
(i) Greenery provision (GnPR shall be >5 for New Buildings) Input (#) 1 point 0.0 To consider to replace some points in whole life carbo
Provision of diverse plant species with > 50% to be native to Southeast
Asia
Provision of 'wild landscape areas' (10% of site area) for long grasses,
(iii) shrubs flowering plants and nesting trees to provide habitat for local N Y/N 1 point 0.0
species
RE3.2 Natural Climate Solutions
Adoption of Natural Climate Solutions (NCS) or Nature-based solutions to
harness natural processes to reduce or remove greenhouse gases for
climate mitigation.
Restoration of ecology equivalent to the development's GFA, through
either or a combination of:-
(i) Y/N 2 points 0.0
(a) Reforestation programme or
(b) Marine /Aquatic ecosystem restoration programme
Investment, production or purchase of nature based credits including blue
carbon, REDD+ and RIL-C equivalent to the estimated carbon impact of the
(ii) Y/N 2 points 0.0
construction / retrofit and normal operation of the development over a 10
years period.
RESILIENCE INNOVATION 2 0.0
Projects can innovate to go above and beyond to attain exceptional
Resilience outcomes as intended in one or more criterion or demonstrate In the Remarks column, please
unique solutions to enhance other aspects of resilience not specified in provide the evidence of benefits
Capped at 2 points
the criteria. Innovations will be considered on a case by case basis. Points & potential impact of your
shall be awarded based on the strength of evidence of benefits and Innovation:-
potential impact.
At Design/Pre-retrofit Stage, to submit a concise summary that Innovation no. 1:
articulates: - Points shall be
a) the nature of the environmental benefit of their interventiaon awarded based on
b) justify the impact of intervention through detailed calculations and the strength of
comparisons with industry norms Input (#) evidence of benefits 0.0
c) substantiate the calculations & comparisons with evidence and data and potential
impact.
At Verification Stage (As-built / In operation), to submit the following:-
a) details of the implemented intervention/innnovation Please do a self
Innovation no. 2:
b) measurements and recordings of key metrics/indicators to show scoring for each
improvements in the environmental performance arising from the Innovation & input
implemented intervention or innovation. either 0.5, 1, 1.5 & 2
c) lessons learnt if the intervention does not perform as expected. Input (#) points. 0.0
Examples : Criteria RE 2.2 - Pushing the boundary of the circularity agenda

by adopting innovative solutions/technologies to closing the resource (Capped at 2 points)
loops and achieving zero waste.
Available points for Points
CRITERIA FOR WHOLE LIFE CARBON SECTION Data Input Input Required Remarks
New Buildings Scored
Whole Life Carbon 15 7.5 -

CN1 WHOLE LIFE CARBON 5.0 2.5
CN1.1 Whole Life Carbon (WLC) Assessment
Whole Life carbon assessment consistent with EN 15978 and EN 15804
CN1.1a Minimum Scope Requirement of WLC Assessment
Minimum scope of WLC Assessment
Building elements to be 1. Substructure
included 2. Superstructure
1. Product Stage [A1-A3]
2. Construction Stage [A4-A5]
Lifecycle stages to be
3. Maintenance Stage [B2] Façade
included
4. Replacement Stage [B4] ACMV
5. Operational Energy [B6]
The assessment should cover the development's carbon emissions over its lifetime,
accounting for:
• its operational carbon emissions
Y/N 3 points 0.0
• its embodied carbon emissions
• any future potential carbon emissions 'benefits', post 'end of life', including benefits
from reuse and recycling of building structure and materials
• New building projects that conduct the full scope of WLC assessment will score up to
additonal 2 points under the Innovation section.
• New building projects scoring under CN1.1(A) will be excluded from scoring under CN 1.1(B)(i)
SUB-TOTAL FOR CN 1.1a 0.0

CN1.1b Embodied Carbon Computation
(i) Calculation of embodied carbon of the development (kg CO2e/m2)
Using the Embodied Carbon Calculator (ECC) hosted at the SGBC website or embodied
Input (#) kg
carbon software tools which are linked to robust carbon data sets such as the Inventory 10 0.5 point 0.5
CO2e/m2
of Carbon and Energy (ICE) database, the RICS Building Carbon Database, etc.
(ii) (a) >10% Reduction from the reference embodied carbon (for Concrete, Glass and Steel)
(b) >30% Reduction from the reference embodied carbon (for Concrete, Glass and Steel) 1 point for (a)
30 Input (%) 2.0
2 points for (b)
Reference Values
(kgCO2e/m2)
Non-Residential 1000
Residential 1500
Industrial 2500
(Reference values based on A1-A4 emissions for superstructure)
SUB-TOTAL FOR CN 1.1b 2.5
CN1.2 2030 Transition Plan
Carbon and Energy transition plan - delineates steps to deliver a net zero carbon building
from 2030 for the asset under assessment, based on scope 1 and 2 emissions N Y/N 1 point 0.0
SUB-TOTAL FOR CN 1.2 0.0

CN2 CONSTRUCTION 5.0 5.0
CN2.1 Sustainable Construction
Use of sustainable construction materials and methods to reduce environmental impacts
of the construction phase
Design with low CUI
CUI
(i) Non-Residential ≤ 0.35
0.35 Input (#) 1 point 1.0
Residential ≤ 0.45
Industrial ≤ 0.45
Adoption of Sustainable building systems and Design for Manufacturing and Assembly
(DfMA) that minimise resource use and waste, with a view to a greater integration of
components and systems. The following can be considered jointly and severally based on
% coverage over constructed floor area (CFA).
Adoption of sustainable building
system
Non-Residential ≥ 50% of CFA
(ii) Residential ≥ 55% of CFA
a) Advanced precast concrete system (APCS) Input (%)
b) Structural Steel Input (%)
c) Mass Engineered Timber (MET) Input (%)
d) Prefabricated Prefinished Volumetric Construction (PPVC) Input (%) 1 point 0.0
e) Hybrid structural system of:
i) Structural Steel and Precast Concrete; or Input (%)
ii) MET and Structural Steel/ Precast Concrete
Use of Low Carbon Concrete certified by SGBC or equivalent local certification bodies
(using CEM II – V cements under SS EN 197-1) for ≥80% of applicable superstructure
(iii) works by volume
SGBP 2 ticks/ SGBP 3 ticks/SGBP 4 ticks green building products or equivalent
Input (#) 0.25 points / tick 0.00
administered by local certification bodies
Replacement of aggregates
Replacement of coarse and fine aggregates for structural concrete applications [by mass
Capped at 1 point
of RCA, WCS, granite fines (GF)] must meet both minimum requirements in terms of
extent of usage and replacement levels
Total concrete use for superstructure (m3) 100 Input (#) N.A.
(iv) Replacement level of coarse aggregate with RCA ≥ 20% 20 Input (%)
0.5 points 0.5
Minimum extent of usage of RCA ≥ 1.5% of GFA Y Y/N
Replacement level of fine aggregate with WCS used for superstructure ≥ 10% 10 Input (%)
Minimum extent of usage of WCS ≤ 0.75% of GFA Y Y/N
0.5 points 0.5
Replacement level of fine aggregate with GF used for superstructure ≥ 50% 50 Input (%)
Minimum extent of usage of GF ≥ 1.5% of GFA Y Y/N
CN2.2 Sustainable Products and Finishes
(i) ≥ 60% (by cost) or ≥ 80% (by areas) of the Architectural and applicable landscaping works
Cost Cost/Area
are at least SGBP 2 ticks or equivalent administered by local certification bodies
1 point 1.0
At least 3 building products/finishes
1 point 1.0
At least 3 building products/finishes
60 Input (%)
(ii) ≥ 60% (by cost) of Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing (MEP) systems are SGBP certified
(or equivalent) administered by local certification bodies 60 Input (%) 1 point 1.0
At least 3 MEP systems
CN2.3 Conservation, Resource Recovery and Waste Management
To encourage conservation of existing building structure, recovery of demolished
building materials for reuse and/or recycling and waste management
(i) Existing structures are conserved and not demolished N Y/N 1 point 0.0
(ii) Existing structures are demolished with an enhanced demolition protocol, where a
recovery rate of ≥ 40% of crushed concrete waste from demolished building sent to Input (%) 1 point 0.0
approved recyclers with proper recycling facilities
(iii) Appointment of environmental specialists during construction stage – The main builder
is a BCA Green and Gracious Builder with Merit or above rating and has ISO14001 Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
certification.
CN3 FIT OUT 5 0.0
CN3.1 Green Lease
A comprehensive Green Lease* (or equivalent) to be incorporated into the tenancy
agreement, that establishes agreed levels of environmental performance between the
1 point for (a)
landlord and the tenant for:-
Input (%) 2 points for (b) 0.0
(a) ≥ 50% of the net lettable area
3 points for (c)
(b) ≥ 70% of the net lettable area
(c) Every tenant
CN3.2 Fit Out Products
(i) ≥ 80% (by cost or area) of the fit-out materials used (construction and finishes) for
common areas (i.e. non-tenanted spaces) shall be at least SGBP 2 ticks or equivalent Input (%) 1 point 0.0
(ii) ≥ 80% (by cost or area) of the fit-out materials used (construction and finishes) for
tenanted spaces/dwelling units shall be conserved or at least SGBP 2 ticks or equivalent Input (%) 1 point 0.0
CN3.3 Tenancy Offset
The building owner requires and actively assists the tenants to offset their operational
energy through the procurement of renewables, or through the ongoing purchase of
certified carbon offsets.
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
(a) ≥ 30% of tenants (by NLA)
(b) ≥ 60% of tenants (by NLA)
(c) ≥ 90% of tenants (by NLA)
INNOVATION 2 0.0
Projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific Carbon indicator or In the Remarks column, please
outcome innovation points can be awarded on a case by case basis. Points shall be provide the evidence of benefits
Capped at 2 points
awarded based on the strength of evidence of benefits and potential impact. & potential impact of your
Innovation:-
Process: Innovation no. 1:
At Design / Pre-retrofit stage
The project team is to submit a concise summary that articulates:
• The nature of the environmental benefit of their intervention Points shall be
• Justify the impact of the intervention through detailed calculations and comparisons awarded based on
with industry norms Input (#) the strength of 0.0
• Substantiate the calculations and comparisons with evidence and data evidence of
At Verification (As Built/ In Operation): benefits and
Details of the implemented intervention including measurements and monitoring of the potential impact.
environmental performance including lessons learnt if the intervention does not perform
as expected. Please do a self
Examples: scoring for each Innovation no. 2:
• Full scope of Whole Life Carbon (WLC) Assessment Innovation & input
• Use of NEWSand in non-structural applications either 0.5, 1, 1.5 &
• Use of carbon mineralisation technologies 2 points.
• Use of 100% granite fines as aggregate replacement
• Recognising products with EPDs
Input (#) 0.0
• Recognising the use of low carbon technologies and solutions as part of sustainable (Capped at 2
construction practices (e.g. use of low carbon construction site generators) points)
• Recognising design for Disassembly/Future adaptability - to facilitate future changes
and dismantlement (in part or whole) for recovery of systems, components and
materials.
Available points for Points
CRITERIA FOR HEALTH & WELLBEING SECTION Data Input Input Required Remarks
New Buildings Scored
Health & Wellbeing 15 6.0 -

HW1 PHYSIOLOGICAL 5 2.5
HW1.1 Active Movement Design
HW1.1a Active Mobility
Safe Access for Active Mobility
Provision of safe access to protect the visitors, users and occupants through design for safe
(i) access and movement to and around the site. Provision of safe and segregated access for Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5
pedestrians and cyclists with vehicular traffic with direct connections to cycle lanes and
footpaths.
Bicycle Lots Farms have no bicycle lot
(ii) Provision of secure and sheltered bicycle lots that are 50% more than the LTA/URA N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0 requirement
requirement with associated shower, changing and locker facilities
Sub-Total for HW1.1a 0.5
HW1.1b Active Interior
Internal Staircases
Active interiors, with internal staircases that are highly visible, appealing, well ventilated
and prominent allowing connections between multi-storey spaces or tenancies.
The building must either provide the stairs or have the provision of a space for stairs to be 0.5 points for (a)
(i) Input (%) 0.0
installed in the future without significant demolition. 1 point for (b)
(a) at least 50% of floors
(b) all floors with internal staircases
Active Furnishing
Provision of active furnishing to discourage sedentary behaviour (e.g. standing tables and
0.5 points for (a)
(ii) height-adjustable desk) Input (%) 0.0
1 point for (b)
(a) at least 50% of all workstations with active furnishing
(b) at least 90% of all workstations with active furnishing
Sub-Total for HW1.1b 0.0
HW1.2 Material Emissions
Material Finishes to be SGBC 4 tick OR meet following emission levels stated in Table
HW1.2.1:
Materials include paints, floor coverings, wall coverings, ceiling coverings such as carpets,
paints, adhesives, engineered timber (including laminates), for carpentry works and
furniture where provided.
Table HW 1.2.1
Material Emissions Requirements for non SGBC 4 tick labelled products
• TVOC emissions rate shall be ≤ 0.25 mg m-3 h-3 after 24
For products, finishes and hours
furnishings • Formaldehyde emission rate shall be ≤ 0.02 mg m-3 h-1 after
48 hours
• VOC content for trim, stains and varnishes shall be ≤ 75gL-1
Paints, Varnishes, lacquers • VOC content for paints (water-based) shall be ≤ 25gL-1 for
matt, ≤ 30gL-1 for low sheen, ≤ 75gL-1 for semi-gloss
Limits for products are based upon ASTM D51 16-90, "Standard Guide for Small-Scale
Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor
Materials/Products"
Test methods for paints and coatings shall comply with ISO 17895 or ISO 11890
(a) at least 60% of all areas* with acceptable material finishes
A A/B 1 point for (a)
(b) at least 80% of common areas with acceptable material finishes 1.0
*includes lettable areas for non-residential developments and dwelling units for residential developments 0.5 points for (b)
60 Input (%)
Sub-Total for HW1.2 1.0
HW1.3 Air Quality and Comfort
HW1.3a Thermal Comfort
Air-Conditioned Non-residential Buildings:
Zonal temperature and air speed controls. The building can adjust temperature and air
speed so that parts of the building can have a thermal variation within it.
Strategies include
• The use of hybrid cooling systems with elevated temperatures with provision of ceiling fans
and/or individual desk fans. Where comfort can be controlled by the temperature of conditioned
air and the windspeed variation.
• Spatial and zonal temperature monitoring with occupant feedback, controls to allow for
(i)
adjustable air speeds and temperatures in discrete zones in open areas or by room.
Control zones should not exceed 100m2 Y/N
Controls should provide the logic to modify the operation of the VAV box, FCU, Passive
Displacement System coil temperature, Ceiling fan speed or other system employed, which Y/N
0.5 points for (a)
will adjust thermal comfort in that zone. 0.0
1 point for (b)
The strategies cover
(a) at least 50% of regularly occupied functional spaces Input (%)
(b) at least 90% of regularly occupied functional spaces
Residential Buildings and Non Residential non Air-Conditioned functional spaces.
A. Thermal comfort simulation: -0.5<PMV<0.5 Input (#) 1 point 0.0
B. Effective cross ventilation: 70% of habitable areas to meet area weighted average wind
Input (%) 1 point 0.0
velocity of 0.6m/s
C. Prescriptive performance
0.1 point for every
• Openings towards prevailing wind directions Input (%) 10% 0.0
Max 0.5 point
• Depth of Room vs Openings
A. Single sided ventilation:
the limiting depth(W) for effective ventilation is twice the floor-to-ceiling height (H)
(ii)
[W≤2H]
B. Cross Ventilation:
the limiting depth(W) for effective ventilation is five times the floor-to-ceiling height (H)
[W≤5H] 0.5 points for (a)
Input (%) 0.0
C. Atria/ event space: 1 point for (b)
Atria to have an effective opening >10% floor area:
Atria can be 1.5x the depth of room (A and B), or up to 2x depth where the use of fixed air
movement technologies are employed (e.g. HVLS fans).
(a) at least 50% of applicable spaces

(b) at least 70% of applicable spaces
HW1.3b Outdoor Air Provision (Not applicable to Residential Buildings)
Enhanced Outdoor Air Provision Potential Buffer
Outdoor air provision greater than ventilation rates in SS553, with demand control and
1 point for (a)
(i) monitoring systems. Input (#) 0.0
2 points for (b)
(A) 1.5 times greater than SS553 system
(B) 2 times greater than SS553 system
Periodic (Post) Occupancy Evaluation Letter of Undertaking
(ii) Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5
At least once every 3 years
IAQ Surveillance Audit
By an accredited laboratory once 0.5 points for (a)
(iii) A/B 0.0
(A) Every 3 years 1 point for (b)
(B) Annually
HW1.3c Clean Air
(i) UVGI system for air disinfection Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
Air Filtration
Permanent provision of ePM1 ≥75% (ISO 16890) [or alternatively at least MERV 14A
(ii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
(ASHRAE 52.2 Appendix J)] media filters OR permanent provision of adequate portable air
cleaners with HEPA filters for non air-conditioned functional spaces
Designated Smoking Points
(iii) Provide Designated Smoking Points for smokers to use, to allow non-smokers to utilise Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5
outdoor spaces in a healthy manner.
Sub-Total for HW1.3c 0.5
HW2 PSYCHOLOGICAL 5 0.5
HW2.1 Access to Nature 5
Direct connection to plants, water, light or nature views; Indirect connection via natural
materials, patterns, art; Placement of natural elements along common circulation routes,
shared seating areas, workstations
(i) Provision of accessible planted sky terraces, courtyards, and roof top gardens. N Y/N 1 point 0.0
Fixed indoor planting distributed at key common areas. >10% of common area (by floor
(ii) N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
Area) to have fixed indoor planting, and/or ponds.
Placement of natural elements, and use of mixed textures in key common areas such as
(iii) N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
atria, entrance lobbies, shared seating areas, and key circulation routes.
In the absence of indoor or accessible planting, to orientate and design common areas for
(iv) N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
direct visual access to greenery.
HW2.2 Circadian Rhythm
Ensuring lighting is aligned with circadian rhythm with day-night cycle with access to views
to the outside
Views to the outside – functional spaces are within 8m distance from a window, without
obstruction.
Quality of Artificial Lighting
Provision of
(ii) Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5
•Colour Rendering Index
•Responsive Light Control
Circadian Lighting System
Provision of dynamic lighting system 1 point for (a)
(iii) A/B 0.0
(a) for Task Lighting 2 points for (b)
(b) for All Lighting
HW2.3 Sound
HW2.3a Sound Zoning Design Approach
Implement passive and/or active acoustic control measures to minimise exterior sourced
noises by creating positive soundscapes through
•Orien ng and loca ng noise-sensi ve buildings and spaces away from exterior sourced
Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
noises. using less noise-sensitive spaces (e.g. MSCP, pedestrian/cycling pathways) as
buffers from exterior sourced noises,
•Natural or engineered barrier (balconies, toilets/kitchen, dense landscaping)
HW2.3b Interior Acoustic Comfort Input (%)
Implement acoustic control measures to minimise acoustic discomfort internally.
Impact Sound Insulation (only applicable to residential)
(i) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
Compliance with Table HW2.3.2 otherwise per BB93 or HTM08-01
Noise from external Noise Sources (i.e. Land Traffic)
Applies to internal noise levels for closed façade condition only
(ii) (i.e. all normally operable windows and doors to outside are closed) N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
Internal noise levels to comply with SS553 Amendment 1 noise criteria, otherwise per
AS2107:2016, BB93 or HTM08-01
Airborne Sound Transmission Reduction
(iii) N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
Compliance with Table HW2.3.1 otherwise per BB93 or HTM08-01
Reverberation Time
(iv) Compliance with Reverberation Time criteria provided in Table HW 2.3.3 otherwise per N Y/N 1 point 0.0
AS2107:2016, BB93 or HTM08-01
HW3 SOCIOLOGICAL 5 3.0
HW3.1 Inclusive Input (#) N.A.
Certification through BCA Universal Design Mark
1 point for (a)
(A) UDi C Rating A/B 0.0
2 points for (b)
(B) UDi A or B Rating
HW3.2 Communal Spaces
HW3.2a Restorative and community Spaces
Healthy environments should be designed with a range of spaces catering for a broad
spectrum of human activities that are suitably adaptable for collaborating, resting and
relaxing, or community bonding. The provision of such spaces especially in a working
environment help reduce stress, provide places of focus and refuge for occupants
Designated indoor and/or outdoor space for restorative practices (minimum 16m2 per
(i) space, and large enough for meditation/yoga or just quiet respite) which are accessible for N Y/N 1 point 0.0
all building occupants
Provision of community spaces and facilities, within the development, including physical
(ii) exercise facilities, playgrounds, communal gardens/allotments/sensory spaces Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
HW3.2b Outsourced Workers
Provision of proper and reasonable rest areas for Outsourced workers (e.g. security
officers, cleaners) to rest, recuperate, and eat. Refer to the ‘Tripartite Advisory on
Provision of Rest Areas for Outsourced Workers’ (Dec 2019): Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
(i) Locations that afford privacy and provides a pleasant environment and
(ii) Provision of amenities such as tables, chairs, water coolers, lockers.
HW3.3 Health and Wellness programmes
HW3.3a Physical Activity and Mental Wellness Programmes
(i) Structured, regular fitness and mental wellness programmes for all staff, or occupants (at
least 6 sessions a year) through engagement of external facilities and resources e.g.
N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A.
subsidised gym memberships health assessments, personal training, fitness classes, mass
workouts, talks and workshops, counselling.
HW3.3b Healthy Eating & Drinking
Create a healthy food environment through provision of facilities, programmes and policies
Accessible drinking water points at convenient locations

Convenient locations include (but not limited to):
* Residential – near playgrounds, recreational areas, sports courts and fitness areas.
(i) Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5
* Non residential – internally within common areas near WC’s, changing rooms, and circulation
nodes. Externally in accessible landscape areas, playgrounds and recreational spaces
(ii) On site eateries with HPB’s healthier dining programme N Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
(iii) Corporate policies on healthy eating including catering procurement policies. Y Y/N 0.5 points 0.5 To be discussed
INNOVATION 2 0.0
Projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific Resilience indicator or In the Remarks column, please
outcome innovation points can be awarded on a case by case basis. Points shall be provide the evidence of benefits
Capped at 2 points
awarded based on the strength of evidence of benefits and potential impact. & potential impact of your
Innovation:-
Where projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific Resilience indicator Points shall be Innovation no. 1:
or outcome innovation points can be awarded on a case by case basis. Points shall be awarded based on
awarded based on the strength of evidence of benefits and potential impact. the strength of
Process: Input (#) evidence of 0.0
At Design / Pre-retrofit stage benefits and
The project team is to submit a concise summary that articulates: potential impact.
• The nature of the environmental benefit of their intervention
• Justify the impact of the intervention through detailed calculations and comparisons with Please do a self
Innovation no. 2:
industry norms scoring for each
• Substantiate the calculations and comparisons with evidence and data. Innovation & input
At Verification (As Built/ In Operation): either 0.5, 1, 1.5 &
Details of the implemented intervention including measurements and monitoring of the Input (#) 2 points. 0.0
environmental performance including lessons learnt if the intervention does not perform
as expected. (Capped at 2
points)
Input Available points for Points
CRITERIA FOR INTELLIGENCE SECTION Data Input Remarks
Required New Buildings Scored
Intelligence 15 5.0 -
IN 1 Integrated 5 4.0
IN 1.1 Digital Life Cycle
PIM (example: BIM) developed in accordance with Singapore CDE Data
Standard that align with the Principles of ISO 19650-2018
Use of spatial model co-ordination platform basing on PIM for spatial
analysis including identifying:
(ii) a. System clashes through an automatic model checking tool Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
b. Spatial analysis for effective construction, maintenance and future
Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
alteration or replacement.
Digital building commissioning, performance and defect co-ordination
platform basing on PIM to track, co-ordinate and manage the
(iii) Y/N 1 point 0.0
commissioning of systems and the tracking of defects and their
rectification
SUB-TOTAL FOR IN 1.1 2.0
IN 1.2 Common Data Environment
Performance Dashboard to monitor the different aspect of building assets’
(i) performance and operations from a single dashboard built on top of the Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
CDE.
Data Management and Integration with a platform that connects and
manages asset and facility data, operational data, and real-time
(ii) Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
equipment data extracted from different sub-systems based on an open
protocol
Data Accessibility and Security - information stored in the CDE platform
(iii) can be accessed by facilities teams in a secured manner to facilitate Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
operation and maintenance activities from anywhere and anytime.
IN1.3 Voluntary Disclosure of Building Energy Performance Data
Share basic information – follow Common Energy Dashboard data
(i) Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
requirements to share basic information and data.
Share additional information – follow Common Energy Dashboard data
requirements to share additional information and data.
IN 2 Data Driven 5 1.0
IN 2.1 Asset Information Model
Development and handover of an accurate spatial model of the building or
(i) asset which complete and fully up to date inclusive of renovations that Y Y/N 1 point 1.0
would impact building services or layout alterations.
Physical and virtual asset information tagging system aligned with
common data environment that allows for tracking of maintenance work,
(ii) repairs, refurbishments or upgrades, replacement, decommissioning, risk Y/N 1 point 0.0
assessments, and performance evaluations of the physical asset to be
captured.
Adoption of a common international standard for asset ontology. For
example, Brick Schema or Project Haystack.
IN 2.2 Digital Twins
Asset Digital Twin – the digital twin of the building asset as a whole to
analyse the building performance under various scenarios (design and
retrofit as well as adaptation plans) as well as ensure predictive asset
management and continuous optimisation of building systems as a whole.
System Digital Twin – detailed model based on operational data of
(ii) individual systems to deep dive into its performance, conduct virtual stress Y/N 3 points 0.0
tests and detailed analytics.
Process Digital Twin – To model processes and scenarios to find the
optimum solution based on actual and simulated data.
IN 3 Responsive 5 0.0
IN 3.1 Real Time Performance
Energy - Breakdown of energy consumption by system, such as air
(i) conditioning, lighting, ventilation, transportation, receptacle loads. Y/N 1 point 0.0
Efficiency metrics tracking and analytics for real time optimisation.
Health & Comfort – Provision of permanent calibrated air quality
monitoring system with zonal controls
Adoption of a common international standard for asset ontology. For
example, Brick Schema or Project Haystack.
IN 3.2 User Experience
Proactive collection and use of data to understand, track and manage the
user experience within the building to improve performance including:
• Use patterns.
• Comfort (thermal, visual, aural and olfactory, including locational
information)
• Service requests and time for resolutions
For the following groups:
(i) Building Occupants Y/N 1 point 0.0
(ii) Visitors Y/N 0.5 points 0.0
IN 3.3 Data Ethics
A data ethics plan shall be detailed for the building that identifies the
various opportunities for the collection, analysis and use of data as well as
a risk register that looks at the following risks and how they will be
managed and mitigated.
• Personal Privacy
• Risks including data governance, monetarisation of data and data Y/N 1 point 0.0
permissions
• Workforce transitioning
• Transparency Y/N 1 point 0.0
• Data bias and data quality
INTELLIGENCE INNOVATION AND SMART PRODUCT 3 0.0
In the Remarks column, please
provide the evidence of benefits
Innovation
& potential impact of your
Innovation:-
Where projects can demonstrate substantial performance to a specific
Intelligence indicator or outcome innovation points can be awarded on a
case by case basis. Points shall be awarded based on the strength of
evidence of benefits and potential impact.
Process: Input (#) 2 points 0.0 Innova on no. 1:
At Design / Pre-retrofit stage
The project team is to submit a concise summary that articulates:
• The nature of the environmental benefit of their intervention
• Justify the impact of the intervention through detailed calculations and
comparisons with industry norms
• Substantiate the calculations and comparisons with evidence and data.
At Verification (As Built/ In Operation):
Details of the implemented intervention including measurements and
monitoring of the environmental performance including lessons learnt if
the intervention does not perform as expected. Input (#) 2 points 0.0 Innovation no. 2:
Example:
Encourage the Use of Singapore Green Building Council certified smart
building products or product with equivalent certification that allows
integration with the Common Data Environment (CDE).
Important Note - Please use embedded Maintainability Section Scoresheet below to generate scoring
Please double click here to access Maintainability Section Scoreheet!
1) Please ensure that this excel file is named as Green Mark 2021_Scoresheet (NRB).xlsx
2) The Maintainability Section scores should be automatically populated here once the embedded scoresheet is
saved and closed.
3) If the scores are not automatically populated, it is likely due to MS Office version issues. Please input the scores
manually in the beige coloured cells and all these cells must be filled up.
4) If the scores have been automatically populated from the embedded scoresheet, please do not input the scores
manually in the beige coloured cells.
Note to assessors: Please save and close the embedded scoresheet to automatically populate the score.
Available points for Points Scored from Manual input of
CRITERIA FOR MAINTAINABILITY SECTION
New Buildings Embedded Scoresheet Points
Maintainability 91.00
SECTION 0 - GENERAL 7 0 4.00
0.1 General Project Requirement 7 0 4.00
SECTION 1 - ARCHITECTURAL EXTERIOR 10.5 0 6.10
Part A - General Façade 0.5 0 0.50
1.1 General Façade 0.5 0 0.50
Part B - Façade System 4 0 3.00
1.2 Cladding system: Tile/ Stone/ Metal/ Others
1.3 Curtain Wall: Glazing/ Others 4 0 3.00
1.4 Masonry and Lightweight Concrete Panels
Part C - Others 6 0 2.60
1.5 Façade Features/ considerations 3 0 1.00
1.6 Entrance lobby 3 0 1.60
1.7 Roof Pre-req 0
SECTION 2 - ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR 21 0 12.08
2.1 Floors 2.5 0 2.50
2.2 Walls and Partitions 1 0 0.75
2.3 Ceiling 4 0 0.50
2.4 Wet Rooms and Storage 8 0 7.50
2.5 Basements 4 0 0.00
2.6 Loading Bay/ Back of House Service Areas 1.5 0 0.83
SECTION 3 - MECHANICAL 18.5 0 3.00
Part A - Cooling Systems 9.5 0 1.00
3.1 Chiller Plant 9.5 0 0.00
3.2 VRF 1 0 1.00
Part B - Other systems 9 0 2.00
3.3 Air Distribution System 4 0 0.50
3.4 Domestic Water Supply Pre-req 0
3.5 Sanitary System 2 0 1.50
3.6 Fire Protection System 2 0 0.00
3.7 Building Management System 1 0 0.00
SECTION 4 - ELECTRICAL 10.5 0 6.00
4.1 Lighting System 2 0 2.00
4.2 Power Distribution System 2 0 1.00
4.3 Extra Low Voltage System 3 0 2.00
4.4 Lightning Protection System 1 0 1.00
4.5 Vertical Transportation System 2 0 0.00
4.6 Solar PV System 0.5 0 0.00
SECTION 5 - LANDSCAPE 10.5 0 1.50
5.1 Softscape 1.5 0 0.00
5.2 Hardscape 3.5 0 0.00
5.3 Vertical Greenery Pre-req 0
5.4 Roof and Sky Terraces 1.5 0 0.00
5.5 Water Retaining Structures 2 0 0.00
5.6 Standalone Structures 2 0 1.50
SECTION 6 - SMART FM 13 0 0.00
6.1 Good Practices 2 0 0.00
6.2 Cybersecurity 1 0 0.00
6.3 Innovation 3 0 0.00
6.4 Advanced Smart FM 4 0 0.00
6.5 Robotics & Automation 3 0 0.00
Bonus Points 4.5 0 0.00
Section 1 BONUS POINTS 2 0 0.00
Section 5 BONUS POINTS 2.5 0 0.00
TOTAL Maintainability Section Points Scored 32.68
Maintainability Prorated Points 0.00 32.00
Bonus scored 0.00 0.00
w/o Bonus 0.00 50.40
TOTAL Maintainability Section Points Scored After Pro-rating
w Bonus 0.00 50.40
Total No. of Pre-Requisites Not Complied 0 7.00
Total Number of Green Mark 2021 Points 10.08
Attained Maintainability Badge? Yes
SECTION 0 - GENERAL
Points Scored Pre-req compliance Max Available

Remarks
Points
General Requirements 4.00 7
Promote inclusion of Design for Maintainability (DfM) at
0
planning and design stage
Promote integrated design approach and stakeholder
a.
engagement at planning and key design stages.
Conduct at least 3 design charrettes during the concept/
detail design stage involving minimally 3 stakeholders
from the following group:
o Building owner/ representative

o Facilities manager (FM)/operator
i) o Design consultants (minimally one representative Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
each from the various disciplines – architecture, civil &
structural, mechanical and electrical, landscape, quantity
surveyor, etc.)
o Other specialist consultant / supplier (i.e.
environmentally sustainable design, lighting specialist,
material specialists, façade access consultant, etc.)
Use of 5-step SMART process to evaluate building’s
potential to implement Smart FM, and to identify
ii) N Y/N/NA NOK Pre-req
suitable solutions that will streamline FM maintenance
process, improve productivity and service delivery.
Design for maintainability report, as part of the O&M
iii) manual, outlining the key maintainability considerations Y Y/N 1 1
and provisions.
Use of life cycle cost (LCC) approach to identify solutions
b. with better economic and maintainability benefit throughout
the building life span.
Undertake project-specific LCC analysis on adopted LCC-
related solutions listed in this appraisal system for
i) # of solutions 0 2
o At least 5 solutions (1 point)
o More than 10 solutions (2 points)
Maintenance contract
c. Use of outcome-based contracts and integrated facilities
management (IFM) contracts to improve labour efficiency.
Projects demonstrating outcome-based maintenance
contract for the following services:
(1 point for each item, up to 2 points)
i) • Chiller plant 3 # of items 2 2 Cleaning, Landscape, Security

• Air distribution
• Cleaning (toilets, waste management, etc.)
• Landscape
• Security
Projects demonstrating integrated facilities management
(IFM) contracts for the following maintenance services:
(1 point for 2 maintenance services, up to 2 points)
• Building maintenance services

ii) 2 # of services 1 2 M&E, security, landscape,
• Mechanical and Electrical maintenance services
• Security services
• Cleaning services
• Landscape services
• Pest control services
Sub-total 4 Bonus Points
0
TOTAL 4.00 Pro-rated Points Max Points
Bonus Points 0.00 0 7
SECTION 1 - ARCHITECTURAL EXTERIORS

Sub-total Remarks
Points
1.1 General Façade 0.50 0.5
1.1.1 Reduce risk of water ingress and streaking on façade 0.5
Design for drip edges/grooves to mitigate streaking on
exterior soffits and vertical façade surfaces e.g. leading edge
a. NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
of flashing, sills, overhangs or other horizontal projecting
façade elements.
Design all top surface of walls to slope away from the
b. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
external face of façade
Sub-total (1.1.1) 0.5
1.1.2 Access for maintenance of façade 0

a. Ensure entire façade is accessible for maintenance. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
Sub-total (1.1.2) 0
1.1.3 Access for maintenance of façade and roof of sky bridges -

Ensure the roof and façade of skybridges are accessible for
maintenance.
Sub-total (1.1.2) -
FAÇADE SYSTEM (1.2 to 1.4) TOTAL % 100% 4
Cladding – Tile / Stone / Metal / Others Indicate % Sub-Section Not

1.2 0% 0 4
(Up to 4 points) area Applicable
1.2.1 Reduce risk of water ingress and streaking on façade 4
For streaking:
Specify metals of similar properties or separators between
a. Y/N/NA - NOK Pre-req
different metal components on the exposed face of the
facade to mitigate risk of bi-metallic corrosion.
For water ingress – design for a pressure-equalised (rain-

screen) system, comprising:
i) Ventilation openings of adequate dimensions to ensure
pressure-equalisation of the cladding cavity
b. Y/N
ii) Drainage system to positively drain out water
iii) Air cavity with a fully sealed internal backing wall behind
the cladding.
(2.5 Points)
For water ingress – In face-sealed cladding: specify silicone
or modified silicone sealant that is compatible and with
c. Y/N 0 4
adequate adhesion properties to the substrate.
(1 Point)
For streaking – specify sealant type that has non-stain, non-
d. bleed properties. Y/N
(0.5 Point)
For water ingress – specify gasket type EPDM or TPE.
e. Y/N
(1 Point)
For water ingress – design for double layer protection at
f. façade interfaces, coping, etc. Y/N
(0.5 Point)
Advanced effort: For water ingress – Specify anti-
carbonation coating or waterproofing layer onto the Y/N 0 1
backing wall behind the cladding. (+1 bonus point)
Sub-total (1.2.1) 0 (without bonus)
Indicate % Sub-Section Not

1.3 Façade System: Curtain Wall 0% 0 4
area Applicable
1.3.1 Reduce risk of water ingress and streaking on façade 4
For streaking:
Specify metals of similar properties or separators between
a. Y/N/NA - NOK Pre-req
different metal components on the external façade of facade
to mitigate risk of bi-metallic corrosion.
For water ingress – design for a pressure-equalised system
comprising:
i) Ventilation openings of adequate dimensions to ensure
pressure-equalisation of the cavities
b. Y/N
ii) Drainage system to positively drain out water
iii) Internal air-seal layer to pressurise internal cavities and
minimise risk of water penetration
(2 Points)
For water ingress - specify silicone sealant that is compatible
c. and with adequate adhesion properties to the substrate. Y/N 0 4
(1 Point)
For streaking - specify sealant type that has non-stain, non-
d. bleed properties. Y/N
(0.5 Point)
For water ingress – specify gasket type EPDM or TPE.
e. Y/N
(1 Point)
For water ingress – design for double layer protection at
f. façade interfaces, coping, and bottom flashing. Y/N
(0.5 Point)
Sub-total (1.3.1) 0
Masonry, Lightweight Concrete Panels, and precast Indicate %

1.4 100% 3 4
components area
1.4.1 Reduce risk of water ingress and efflorescence formation 2
a. For efflorescence: specify mortar materials to be salt free. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req

For water ingress: design movement joints in large
continuous areas, or between adjacent/different building
b. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
components, to minimise the risk of damage to façade,
weather seal, and waterproofing joints.
For water ingress in pre-cast component joints: specify
silicone or modified silicone sealant on weather-exposed
c. joints, that is compatible and with adequate adhesion Y Y/N 1 1
properties to the substrate.
(1 Point)
For efflorescence:
Specify clear coat, with good resistance to water absorption,
on façade surface. e.g. fair-faced or pigmented concrete.
d. (OR) Y Y/N 1 1
Specify paint with good resistance to water absorption,
complying with SS500 or equivalent.
(1 Point)
Sub-total (1.4.1) 2
Reduce risk of façade flaking/ peeling/ cracking/ blistering

1.4.2 % Coverage 2
(Up to 2 points)
Specify for integral colours (i.e. directly mixed into the

a. cement) or post-applied stains (impregnator) with inorganic 0% N Y/N
pigments for surfaces which do not require painting.
(2 points)
Specify paint finish:
1 2
Top coat:
Paint with good resistance to water absorption complying
b. with SS500 or equivalent. 100% Y Y/N
(OR)
Mineral paint
(1 point)
Sub-total (1.4.2) 1
1.5 Façade Features / other façade considerations 1 3

Direct access to all protruding façade features, e.g. canopies,
1.5.1 -
sunshades, niches, fins, ledges, BIPV, façade screens etc.
Ensure every part of all façade features is accessible for
a. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
maintenance.
Ensure all glass features and their structures (e.g. glazed
b. canopies) can withstand the maintenance-related imposed NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
loads.
Sub-total (1.5.1) -
Reduce risk of corrosion of exposed steel structures, e.g.

1.5.2 %coverage 1
linkways
Design to avoid direct contact of a steel base with the
a. ground (raised by at least 100mm) to mitigate corrosion and 100% Y Y/N/NA 1 1
entrapment of moisture and dirt.
Sub-total (1.5.2) 1
Reduce risk of water ingress in open joint cladding (i.e.

1.5.3 cladding serving as a decorative feature and not as a water 1
barrier)
For features such as open-joint cladding: provide flashings at
regular intervals (not exceeding 3 floors) to positively drain
a. NA Y/N/NA 0 1
out the cladding cavities and prevent the accumulation of
water.
Sub-total (1.5.3) 0
1.5.4 Reduce risk of tile/stone from detaching off façade 1

Design for mechanically fixed individual tile/stone panels
a. NA Y/N/NA 0 1
with stainless steel fixings.
Sub-total (1.5.4) 0
1.6 Entrance Lobby (3 points) 1.6 3

1.6.1 Reduce risk of water ingress at entrances %coverage 3
Design for raised internal level of at least 100mm from the
external datum.
Design canopy/overhang ( minimally 1:50 slope) to shelter
against wind-driven rain, with canopy angled at least 45o to
b. the entrance line or with drop panel if canopy/overhang 80% Y Y/N GP Plant no, all other offices have
does not shelter to entrance line.
(2 Points)
Design entrances with transition/buffer zone, e.g. vestibule
design (Solution c & d work as an integrated system and are 1.6 3
c. 20% Y Y/N
not mutually exclusive, i.e. both must be scored for.)
(2 Points)
Design for aluminium drain pan with walk-off mats.
(Solution d must be integrated with solution b or c to be
d. N Y/N
eligible for scoring.)
(1 Point)
Advanced efforts: Numerical simulation (wind-driven
rain penetration) studies specific to location and context Y/N 0 1
of surroundings of entrances (+1 bonus point)
Sub-total (1.6.1) 1.6 without bonus
1.7 Roof 0 0
1.7.1 Reduce risk of water ponding on roofs -
For concrete flat roofs - design slope not gentler than 1:150
and with scupper drains/gutter.
For metal sheet profiles –
Design slope to manufacturer’s specifications
(OR)
Design slope for different sheet profiles based on the roof
pitch table (refer to table in technical guide)
(OR)
Design slope for different sheet profiles determined by
rainwater drainage capacity calculation.
Sub-total (1.7.1) -
1.7.2 Reduce risk of waterproofing decay/failure on concrete roofs -

Specify bitumen/polymer elastomer preformed
waterproofing membrane (design for overlap and proper
termination of waterproofing membrane).
(OR)
Specify water-based/solvent-based liquid applied
waterproofing membrane.
Sub-total (1.7.2) -
1.7.3 Reduce risk of corrosion on metal roofs -

Specify metal of similar properties or separators between
a. different materials to mitigate risk of bi-metallic corrosion Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
between roof and other metal components or accessories.
Sub-total (1.7.3) - Bonus Points
2
Bonus Points 0.00 2 10.5
SECTION 2 - ARCHITECTURAL INTERIORS

Sub-total Remarks
Points
2.1 Floors 2.50 2.5
Reduce risk of damage to floors in common areas within the
2.1.1 % coverage 1.5
building
Specify flooring materials with minimum Mohs hardness
a. value of 7, in areas of high pedestrian traffic such as 100% Y Y/N 1.5 1.5
entrances, lobbies, corridors and connecting walkways.
Sub-total (2.1.1) 1.5
Reduce maintenance works in common areas within the

2.1.2 % coverage 1
building
Specify flooring material – e.g. homogenous tiles – with
water absorption rate not exceeding 0.5 % to reduce settling
a. 100% Y Y/N 1 1
of stains in areas of high pedestrian traffic such as entrances,
lobbies, corridors and connecting walkways.
Sub-total (2.1.2) 1
2.2 Walls and Partitions 0.75 1

Reduce risk of stains on wall surfaces in common areas
2.2.1 % coverage 1
within the building
Specify for finishing to be:
a. water-resistant wall materials, e.g. laminate and tile (1 point) 50% Y Y/N
0.75 1
b. Stain-resistant paint or hydrophobic paint (0.5 point) 50% Y Y/N
Sub-total (2.2.1) 0.75
2.3 Ceilings 0.5 4

Access to services within double slab areas for Please input %
2.3.1 % coverage 2
Maintenance purposes coverage
a. Provide double slabs with minimum clear headroom of 1.8m NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
b. Provide double slabs with minimum clear headroom of 2 m. NA Y/N/NA 0 2

Sub-total (2.3.1) 0
Access to services within the ceiling in non-tenanted indoor

2.3.2 % coverage 1
spaces
Specify open ceiling design.
a. N Y/N
(1 Point)
Specify suspended modular ceiling system that is easily 0.5 1
b. demountable. 100% Y Y/N
(0.5 Point)
Sub-total (2.3.2) 0.5
2.3.3 Access to ceiling for maintenance -

Provide access to all parts of the ceiling (including weather-
a. Y Y/N - OK Pre-req
exposed ceiling) for general maintenance.
Sub-total (2.3.3) -
Reduce risk of warping/deterioration of ceiling panel

2.3.4 system that are weather-exposed, e.g. sky terraces, % coverage 1
entrance porches, corridors and canopies.
Specify suspended metal panel modular ceiling system, e.g.
a. baffle metal panels and metal mesh panels. 0% N Y/N
(1 Point)
Specify moisture-resistant suspended non-metallic modular 0 1

b. ceiling panels with water absorption rate not exceeding 5 %. 0% N Y/N
(1 Point)
Specify open ceiling design.
c. 0% N Y/N
(1 Point)
Sub-total (2.3.4) 0
2.4 Wet Rooms and Storage 7.5 8

Provide permanent space to store cleaning tools and toilet
2.4.1 1
supplies
Design for storage rooms for cleaning tools, carts, and
supplies such as tissue rolls and soap refill for every male
a. Y Y/N
and female toilet cluster.
(1 point)
Design for at least one storage space within the male and 1 1
female toilet clusters to store supplies such as tissue rolls
b. and soap refill. N Y/N
(Point cannot be scored if already scored for solution a)
(0.5 point)
Sub-total (2.4.1) 1
Reduce risk of mould and fungus forma on on walls in wet

2.4.2 % coverage 1
rooms
Specify wall finishes with
tiles e.g. glazed ceramic tiles or homogenous tiles.
a. 100% Y Y/N
(1 point) 1 1
anti-mould top-coat
b. Y/N
(0.5 point)
Sub-total (2.4.2) 1
Reduce risk of damage to toilet cubicle partitions and

2.4.3 1
enable ease of cleaning
Specify water-resistant, partition panels with water
a. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
absorption rate not exceeding 5 %, e.g. phenolic panels.
Design for raised partition walls with minimum of 150mm
b. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
gap from the finished floor level.
Sub-total (2.4.3) 1
Reduce risk of water spill, splashing, and soap dripping on

2.4.4 3.5
the counter and floor
a. Water spill on floor – Design for full vanity washbasin with Y Y/N 1.5 1.5
counter-top to slope away from the user.
Water spill on floor – Design for soap and tissue dispenser
b. within arm’s reach of each faucet. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
(points can be scored only after scoring for solution (a))
Soap dripping on counter/floor – Design of soap dispenser
c. location to be vertically mounted directly above basin or Y Y/N 1 1
integrated bin.
Water splash on counter/floor – Specify depth of basins to
d. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
be minimally 175 mm to avoid excessive splashing.
Sub-total (2.4.4) 3.5
Reduce the need to replace en re mirror glass pane when

2.4.5 0.5
damaged
Design for individual, modular mirror panes with standard
a. N Y/N 0 0.5
sizes that are easy to replace.
Sub-total (2.4.5) 0
2.4.6 Reduce degradation of false ceiling system in wet rooms % coverage 1

Specify moisture-resistant suspended modular ceiling panels
a. with water absorption rate not exceeding 5 %. 100% Y Y/N
(1 Point)
1 1
Specify suspended metal panel modular ceiling system, e.g.
b. baffle metal panels, aluminium trellis, and metal mesh. N Y/N
(1 Point)
Sub-total (2.4.6) 1
2.5 Basement 0 4
2.5.1 Reduce risk of water ingress/seepage in basement 4
Specify positive side waterproofing on the retaining wall, e.g.
sheet-membrane systems, vapour barriers or equivalent.
Design for cavity wall with raised kerb of minimally 200mm

b. and with water-resistant wall layer on the inside, e.g. NA Y/N/NA 2
calcium silicate board/ concrete block masonry, etc.
Specify positive side waterproofing for the base slab, e.g. 0

c. NA Y/N/NA 1
sheet-membrane systems, vapour barriers or equivalent.
d. Specify negative side waterproofing for walls NA Y/N/NA 1
Specify integral liquid waterproofing admixture in the
e. NA Y/N/NA 1
concrete.
Sub-total (2.5.1) 0
2.6 Loading Bay/Back of House Service Areas 0.833333333 1.5

Reduce damage caused by impact on walls and columns in
2.6.1 -
vehicular ramps, and loading bay areas
Specify wall bumpers, column guards, wheel stoppers, and
bollards.
Sub-total (2.6.1) -
Reduce damage to walls, columns and floors at back of

2.6.2 1.5
house high traffic delivery areas
a. Specify column guards in service delivery areas Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
b. Specify protective materials:
i) for walls, e.g. chequered plate on walls
N Y/N 0
(0.33 point) 1
ii) for floors, e.g. epoxy flooring (0.33 point) Y Y/N 0.333333333
iii) for doors, e.g. kickboards on doors (0.33 point) N Y/N 0
Sub-total (2.6.2) 0.833333333 Bonus Points
0
Bonus Points 0 4 21
SECTION 3 - MECHANICAL
Served by District Cooling Plant? No
Type of cooling system installed Capacity

Water-cooled (Chiller Plant) 0 % or Rton
Unitary system (VRF) 100 % or Rton

PART A COOLING SYSTEMS (3.1 & 3.2) Sub-total Remarks
VRF Points
Please input number of cooling
3.1 Chiller Plant 0.00 9.5
towers
No. of cross-flow cooling tower provided Input #
No. of counter-flow cooling tower provided Input #
3.1.1 Access to chiller plant room for equipment replacement
a. Where chiller plant is located in the basement :
i)Provide direct access from driveway through operable
Y/N/NA
openings (i.e. roller shutter).
OR - Pre-req
NA
ii) Provide operable openings and service corridor with
minimum width of 2.5 m which is directly accessible from Y/N/NA
the driveway.
b. Where chiller plant is located on the rooftop/service floor :
i) Provide operable opening and adequate hoisting space. Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req

Sub-total (3.1.1) -
3.1.2 Access to equipment requiring frequent maintenance 3

Provide davit arm at the top of cooling tower for repair and
a. Y/N 0 1
replacement of heavy components i.e. motor, fans etc.
Provide cat ladder with metal enclosure (cage) to access top
b. Y/N 0 0.5
of the equipment i.e. cooling tower
Provide metal step-over platform at the main access leading
to the plant rooms to avoid stepping on rooftop services (i.e.
c. Y/N 0 0.5
major ductwork, pipes above 100 mm diameter, trunking
exceeding 200 mm in width etc.).
Provide minimum 1.2 m wide clear access route from the
main entrance to the M&E plant rooms for regular
d. Y/N 0 1
maintenance (i.e. pump room, chiller plant room including
cooling tower etc.).
Sub-total (3.1.2) 0
3.1.3 Reduce risk of corrosion and dust invasion in cooling tower 1.5
All components in contact with condensing water or air
a. stream shall be corrosion-protected. The construction
material shall be either:
i) FRP (fiberglass reinforced polyester with UV inhibitors). Y/N
ii) 304 stainless steel. Y/N

iii) For galvanized steel cooling tower, the zinc coating
shall comply with the following: 0 1
- Hot-dip galvanized steel shall comply with ASTM A123
Y/N
(OR) G235 (OR) JIS H 8641 coating standards.
- Continuous steel sheet shall comply with ASTM A653
zinc coating thickness.
For cross flow cooling tower, provide basin cover to
b. mitigate dust invasion and algal growth in the upper Y/N
water basin. 0.00 0.5
For counter flow cooling tower, provide air intake louvres
c. to avoid sun light from entering the cooling tower basin Y/N
and thus reducing algae formation.
Sub-total (3.1.3) 0.00
3.1.4 Reduce risk of oil/grease deposit on the cooling tower fins 1
The kitchen exhaust outlet shall be at least 5 m away from

cooling tower air intake.
a. (AND) Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
The kitchen exhaust shall be directed either perpendicular or
opposite to the cooling tower air intake.
Provide kitchen air cleaning system (i.e. air scrubber,
b. electrostatic precipitator filters etc.) to avoid grease deposits Y/N 0 1
on the cooling towers.
Sub-total (3.1.4) 0
Reduce risk of fouling issue and improve condenser water

3.1.5 2.5
quality
Provide microprocessor based, automatic water quality
a. monitoring and control system linked to Building Y/N 0 1.5
Management System (BMS).
b. Provide auto-tube cleaning for water cooled chillers. Y/N 0 1
Sub-total (3.1.5) 0
Reduce risk of dust and debris settlement inside the cooling

3.1.6 1.5
tower basin
Provide basin sweeper system (including side stream
separator) to remove coarse to fine particles and silt deposit
a. in the cooling tower basin. Y/N
Note: The basin sweeper system shall be provided for each
cooling tower. 0 1.5
OR
Provide side stream centrifugal separator or equivalent in
b. condenser water loop to mitigate debris and dust Y/N
accumulation.
Sub-total (3.1.6) 0
3.2 Unitary Air Conditioning System - VRF 1 1

3.2.1 Access to VRF outdoor units Pre-req
For single VRF outdoor unit installation:
a. Note: Provide access space as specified in the Technical NA Y/N/NA - NOK Pre-req
Reference.
For collective VRF outdoor unit installation:
b. Note: Provide access space as specified in the Technical Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
Reference.
For floor-by-floor VRF outdoor unit installation:
c. Note: Provide access space as specified in the Technical NA Y/N/NA - NOK Pre-req
Reference.
Sub-total (3.2.1) -
3.2.2 Avoid damage to the refrigerant pipe and insulation 1

Refrigerant pipe mounted outdoor (e.g. at roof level) shall be
a. mounted on inside raised trunking to avoid water ingress Y Y/N 1 1
and damage to stepping/lateral impact.
Sub-total (3.2.2) 1
Points Scored Max Points

PART B OTHER SYSTEMS Sub-total
2 9
3.3 Air Distribution Systems 0.5 4
Project has FCUs Y Y/N
Project is predominantly (>75%) served by FCUs Y Y/N
Project has AHUs Y Y/N
3.3.1 Access space for maintenance of air distribution system
a. Fan coil units (FCU)
i) Provide ceiling access panel with minimum 600 mm x
600 mm to access filter, cooling coil, and fan section for NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
regular maintenance and replacement
ii) Cooling coil pipe connection access – Provide
minimum 450 mm clear space after pipe connection from Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
any obstacle.
iii) FCU side clearance - Provide minimum 200 mm access
Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
space from any obstacle.
iv) FCU and key components such as actuator control
valve, local control panel (LCP) must be directly
accessible and within maximum 600mm from the access
panel.
b. Access to FCU mounted at heights (i.e. atrium, lobby space)
i) Access provisions stated in 3.3.1a.
(AND)
ii) Provide clear access route for Mobile Elevated Work

Platforms (MEWP) to reach the lobby, atrium space from
the nearest door entrance.
NA Y/N/NA
o Provide clear access with entrance door/ opening of
1.8 m width x 2.4 m height and working base of 1.8 m
width x 2 m length if the mounting height is less than or
equal to 10.5 m. - OK Pre-req
o Provide clear access with entrance door/ opening of 2
m width x 2.8 m height and working base of 2 m width x
2 m length if the mounting height is greater than 10.5 m.
OR
ii) Provide alternative access (e.g. maintenance platform,
access from top floors etc.) without having to access NA Y/N/NA
from the atrium floor.
OR
iii) Locate FCU less than 3 m from FFL for easy access and
Y Y/N/NA
maintenance.
Sub-total (3.3.1) 0
Reduce risk of water ponding and algae growth in the AHU

3.3.2 0.5
room
AHU drain pipe shall be terminated directly above the floor
trap to avoid any water spillage.
AHU room floor to be provided with epoxy coating to avoid
b. N Y/N 0 0.5
algae and mould growth.
Sub-total (3.3.2) 0
3.3.3 Reduce risk of choke of condensate drain stack 0

The horizontal drain pipes shall have minimum slope of
1:100 for easy flow of condensate drain.
Provide T-joint before terminating the individual drain pipe

from AHU to the main drain stack for periodic cleaning.
Sub-total (3.3.3) 0
3.3.4 Reduce risk of frequent replacement of AHU filters 1.5

Provide differential pressure switch linked to BMS for real-
time monitoring of the filter choke status.
a. N Y/N/NA - NOK Pre-req
Note: Differential pressure switch must be provided for both
primary and secondary filter for PAHUs and AHUs.
Specify fibre glass filter media with average initial resistance
not greater than 90 Pa for primary filter (MERV 8 and ISO
ePM10 50%) and 145 Pa for secondary filter (MERV 14 and
b. ISO ePM1 80%). Y Y/N/NA 0.5 0.5
Note: Synthetic media with initial static charge is not

acceptable.
Specify filters with better Life Cycle cost for increased service
life and lower cost of ownership. LCC should capture the key
c. parameters such as “Total cost of ownership, service life, NA Y/N/NA 0 1
Energy consumption details and Indoor Air Quality
performance”.
Sub-total (3.3.4) 0.5
Avoid frequent re-alignment of fan parts i.e. pulley, bearings

3.3.5 2
and belts
Specify AHU fan system with less moving parts (i.e. fans with
direct drive system) for enhanced reliability and reduced
a. downtime. 100% Y Y/N 0 2
Note: Points will be prorated for buildings which are served
predominantly (≥75%) by FCUs.
Sub-total (3.3.5) 0
3.4 Domestic Water Supply - -

3.4.1 Access space for maintenance of water tank Pre-req
Provide minimum clear width of 1.2 m access walkway to
a. Y Y/N - OK Pre-req
water tank from the nearest entrance.
Provide minimum access space to the water tank for regular
b.
maintenance.
i.For panel tank (FRP/Stainless steel), provide
Y Y/N/NA Pre-req
minimum600 mm clear space around the tank. - OK
ii. For RC tank, provide minimum 600 mm clear access to
NA Y/N/NA Pre-req
the front for direct access.
Provide minimum 1m clear headroom above the water tank
c. Y Y/N/NA - OK Pre-req
(applicable to water tank with top access)
Sub-total (3.4.1) -
3.5 Sanitary Systems 1.5 2

Access provision and design detailing for sanitary pipes for
3.5.1 1
ease of maintenance
Provide cleaning eyes with viewing panel for better
a. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
maintenance.
Specify hubless elbows for sanitary stacks with horizontal
b. N Y/N 0 0.5
transfers.
Sub-total (3.5.1) 0.5
3.5.2 Reduce risk of chokes in the sanitary pipe 1

For buildings with food and beverage (F&B) units, the AHU
a. condensate drain shall not be linked to kitchen waste NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
discharge pipes.
Provide at least 75% of the risers with continuous vertical
run without any offsets to reduce the additional
b. Y Y/N 1 1
bends/joints. Note: Above requirement is applicable only to
all typical floors in building
Sub-total (3.5.2) 1
3.6 Fire Protection Systems 0 2

3.6.1 Access to fire detectors at height 1
Provide alternative access for fire detector maintenance (e.g.
a. maintenance platform) without having to access from the N Y/N -
atrium floor.
OR
Provide clear access route for Mobile Elevated Work
Platforms (MEWP) to reach the lobby or atrium space from
the nearest entrance door.
- Provide clear access with entrance door/ opening of 1.8 OK Pre-req
m width x 2.4 m height and working base of 1.8 m width
Y Y/N -
x 2 m length if the mounting height is less than or equal
to 10.5 m.
- Provide clear access with entrance door/ opening of 2
m width x 2.8 m height and working base of 2m width x N Y/N -
2m length if the mounting height is more than 10.5m
Sub-total (3.6.1) -
Prevent the lack of flexibility for maintenance and testing of

3.6.2 1
sprinkler system
Locate the flow switch drain valve in rooms with floor trap
(i.e. toilet, AHU room etc.).
Provide smart features such as the automatic flow switch
testing system to automate the functional test for the fire
b. NA Y/N/NA 0 1
sprinkler system. [If NA, select accordingly for pro-rating of
score]
Sub-total (3.6.2) 0
Reduce risk of damage and periodic replacement of fire-

3.6.3 1
rated boards due to exposure to high humidity and water
Specify the use of weatherproof fire-rated materials for
a. services such as kitchen exhaust ducts, wet/dry riser pipes NA Y/N/NA 0 1
etc.
Sub-total (3.6.3) 0
3.7 Building Management System 0 1

Access space above false ceiling for maintenance of sensors
3.7.1 and actuators [If NA, select accordingly for pro-rating of 1
score]
Provide ceiling access panel with minimum opening of 600
a. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
mm x 600 mm.
Sensors and actuator should be located within reachable
b. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
distance of 600 mm from the access panel.
Sub-total (3.7.1) 0
3.7.2 Access to control panels for regular maintenance - Pre-req

The top of the control panels shall be maximum 1.8 m from
a. NA Y/N/NA -
the finished floor level (FFL) to facilitate direct access.
OR NA Pre-req
The control panels located at heights shall have direct access
b. from scaffolding, ladders etc. Provide minimum 800 mm NA Y/N/NA -
clear access space in front of the control panels.
Sub-total (3.7.2) - Bonus Points
0
TOTAL (A+B) 3.00 Pro-rated Points Max Points
Bonus Points 0 13.5 18.5
4. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Sub-total Remarks
Points
4.1 Lighting System 2 2
Access to light fixtures located at heights for maintenance
4.1.1 1
and use of reliable light fixtures
a.Provide access to the light fixtures mounted at heights
a.
(i.e. atrium, lobby space).
i) Provide alternative means of access (e.g. access from
mezzanine floor, maintenance platform) without having NA Y/N/NA
to access from the atrium floor.
AND/ OR
ii) Provide clear access route for Mobile Elevated Work
Platforms (MEWP) to reach the lobby, atrium space from Y Y/N/NA
the nearest door entrance.
- Provide clear access with entrance door/
opening of 1.8 m width x 2.4 m height and
working base of 1.8 m width x 2 m length if the - OK Pre-req
mounting height is less than or equal to 10.5 m.
- Provide clear access with entrance door/
opening of 2 m width x 2.8 m height and working
base of 2m width x 2m length if the mounting
height is more than 10.5m
OR
iii) Provide pulley system or equivalent system for light
fixtures installed at high lobby or atrium space to allow NA Y/N/NA
lowering for maintenance/ replacement.
% coverage
Use reliable light fixtures such as LED light (LM80 B30
b. 100% Y Y/N 1 1
L70@ L50,000) which requires less maintenance.
Sub-total (4.1.1) 1
4.1.2 Reduce risk of light flickering % coverage 0.5

Specify constant DC output type LED driver complying with
a.
the following IEC standards to minimise flickering:
i) IEC 62384.
ii) IEC 61347 Part 1 and Part 2-13.
100% Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
For non-LED light fixtures, use electronic ballast to cut off
b.
power supply to mitigate flickering due to lamp failure.
Sub-total (4.1.2) 0.5
4.1.3 Reduce risk of LED light colour shift % coverage 0.5

Specify LEDs tested to ANSI/IES LM-79-19 and LM-80-15 to
a. 100% Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
ensure the LED performance.
Sub-total (4.1.3) 0.5
4.2 Power Distribution 1 2

4.2.1 Reduce risk of water Ingress into electrical room -
Electrical room shall be raised by minimum 100 mm against
a. Y Y/N
the outside passageway.
OR - OK Pre-req
Provide minimum 100 mm plinth for floor mounted
b. N Y/N
electrical switchboard.
Sub-total (4.2.1) -
Reduce risk of unnoticed failure of surge arrestor located in

4.2.2 1
the LT main switchboard
a. Use of surge arrestor with discharge indicator. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
b. Provide BMS monitoring for surge arrestor status. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
Sub-total (4.2.2) 0.5
Reduce risk of failure of main LT switchboard due to

4.2.3 1
overheating
Install heat sensor in the main LT switchboard to alert any
a. Y Y/N 0.5 0.5
abnormal rise in temperature with audible/visual alarm.
Integrate sensor to building BMS system for online
b. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
monitoring of temperature data.
Sub-total (4.2.3) 0.5
4.3 Extra Low Voltage System 2 3

4.3.1 Provide access for CCTV camera located at heights 1
Provide access to cameras located at heights (≥ 3m) i.e.
a. NA Y/N/NA
foldable poles/arms;
OR 0 1
Provide clear access route for mobile elevated work
b. NA Y/N/NA
platforms (MEWP) to reach the camera for maintenance.
Sub-total (4.3.1) 0
Provide flexibility for future expansion for CCTV and access

4.3.2 1
control system
Provide minimum 20% spare capacity in network switch to
cater for future expansion.
Design that allows for future addition of data storage (either
b. Y Y/N 1 1
local or cloud base data storage).
Sub-total (4.3.2) 1
Reduce risk of damage to outdoor camera and other

4.3.3 1
equipment due to lightning surge
Provide surge arrestor to all outdoor cameras
a. Note: The surge protection shall be provided at power Y Y/N/NA 1 1
source (AND/OR) at network switch.
Sub-total (4.3.3) 1
4.4 Lightning Protection System 1 1

Reduce risk of damage of air termination tape at roof
4.4.1 parapet wall due to opera on of façade maintenance 1
systems such as gondola
Avoid damage to the lightning protection system by proper
a. Y Y/N 1 1
design and installation of facade maintenance system.
Sub-total (4.4.1) 1
4.5 Vertical Transportation 0 2

4.5.1 Access to lift motor room for maintenance -
Provide permanent access (staircase with handrail) to the lift
motor room.
Sub-total (4.5.1) 0
Access to roof level for equipment replacement and

4.5.2 1
maintenance
Provide lift access to roof for maintenance of equipment
a. NA Y/N/NA 0 1
such as chiller plant and pumps.
Sub-total (4.5.2) 0
4.5.3 Reduce lift downtime and enhance reliability 1
Provide lift predictive maintenance.
a. Note: Monitor key parameters such as vibration, N Y/N 0 1
acceleration, levelling, door jams, gaps, noise, and jerk etc.
Sub-total (4.5.2) 0
4.6 Solar PV System 0 0.5

4.6.1 Reduce risk of integration issues with BMS 0.5
Link PV system to BMS via open communication protocol
a. such as Modbus, BACnet/ IP for remote monitoring and data NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
logging.
Sub-total (4.6.1) 0 Bonus Points
0
TOTAL 6 Pro-rated Points Max Points
5. LANDSCAPE

Sub-total
Points
5.1 Softscape 0 1.5
Please input %
5.1.1 Reduce labour-intensive irrigation for landscape % coverage 1.5
coverage
Design for water points with maximum 15 m radius from
each point.
Specify rain sensor and auto-irrigation with timers.
b. NA Y/N/NA
(1.5 Point)
Specify for auto-irrigation with timers.
0 1.5
c. NA Y/N/NA
(points cannot be scored if already scored in b)
(1 Point)
Advanced Efforts: Implement remote monitoring
system for landscape irrigation along with water NA Y/N/NA 0 1
metering for irrigation. (+1 bonus point)
5.2 Hardscape 0 3.5

5.2.1 Access for maintenance of underwater lighting systems % coverage 2
For shallow water bodies, design for easily replaceable
a. lighting system within the underwater structure but above NA Y/N/NA 0 1
the waterline.
For swimming pools/ shallow water bodies, design lighting
fixture within a depth of 500mm and along the perimeter
Type
b. (calculated from base of light to finished floor level for in- 0 1
ground pool/ to point of access for above-ground pool)
(1/0.5 point) NA Y/N/NA
Sub-total (5.2.1) 0
Reduce risk of damage/degrada on to outdoor landscape Please input %

5.2.2 % coverage 0.5
furniture coverage
Specify for engineered wood with water absorption rate not
a. NA Y/N/NA
exceeding 0.5%. 0 0.5
Specify for anti-corrosion coating or stainless steel or
b. NA Y/N/NA
aluminium for metal selections.
Sub-total (5.2.2) 0
5.2.3 Access for maintenance beneath decking % coverage 1

Design decks with demountable fixture system for
a. NA Y/N/NA 0 1
maintenance of services beneath and for general cleaning.
Sub-total (5.2.3) 0
5.3 Vertical Greenery 0 0

Access to all parts of green wall installations for
5.3.1 0
maintenance and replacement of perished plants
Provide direct maintenance access to all vertical greenery,
a. both indoor and outdoor, e.g. catwalk, ladder, access NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
corridor, MEWP, etc.
Sub-total (5.3.1) 0
Roof, Sky Terraces, and Planter boxes on building

5.4 0 1.5
edge/façade
Please input %
5.4.1 Ensure access for landscape on roof and sky terraces % coverage 1
coverage
Provide direct maintenance access to landscape on all roof
and sky terraces.
For planters more than 1.8 m wide, provide minimally 300
b. mm obstruction-free maintenance pathway inside the NA Y/N/NA NA Pre-req
planter box.
For trees: Provide 5 m clear pathway from building edge to
c. NA Y/N/NA 0 1
tree trunk.
Sub-total (5.4.1) 0
5.4.2 Access to planter boxes on building edge % coverage 0.5

Provide minimally 600mm access walkway to planter boxes
a. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
for maintenance
Sub-total (5.4.2) 0
5.5 Water retaining structure 0 2

Reduce risk of water leakage from swimming pools/water
5.5.1 2
bodies (up to 2 points)
Specify prefabricated water retaining structures, e.g.
a. fibreglass reinforced or stainless-steel pool. NA Y/N/NA
(2 Points)
For concrete pools - specify Integral liquid waterproofing 0 2
admixture in concrete mixes and additional layer of
b. NA Y/N/NA
waterproofing layer on the inside of the pool
(2 Points)
Advanced effort: Provision of maintenance slab below
the swimming pool with headroom access of minimum N Y/N 0 1.5
2.0 m
5.6 Standalone structures 1 2

Reduce water ponding and degradation of outdoor
5.6.1 1
standalone structures, e.g. pavilions
Design for outdoor standalone structure’s roof slope to be
not gentler than 15 degrees for efficient water run-off
Design to avoid direct contract of steel base with the ground

(raised by at least 100mm) to prevent corrosion and
b. entrapment of moisture and dirt. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
(Point cannot be scored if already scored in solution 1.5.2)
(0.5 Point)
Specify for engineered wood with water absorption rate not
c. exceeding 0.5% for built-in timber furniture. NA Y/N/NA 0 0.5
(0.5 Point)
Sub-total (5.6.1) 0
Reduce risk of warping/deterioration of ceiling panel

5.6.2 % coverage 1
system on standalone structure (up to 1 point)
Specify suspended modular metal panel, e.g. baffle metal
a. NA Y/N/NA
panels and metal mesh panels
Specify moisture-resistant suspended non-metallic modular 1 1
b. NA Y/N/NA
ceiling panels with water absorption rate not exceeding 5%
c. Specify open ceiling design 100% Y Y/N/NA
2.5
Remarks
6. SMART FM

Sub-total
Points
6.1 Good Practices 0 2
Good practices that could be considered during design
6.1.1 2
stage
Building Management System ready for integration with
a.
Smart FM
Provide open communication protocol such as BACnet,
i) MODBUS, etc for ease of integration with other Smart FM NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
systems.
Adoption of a common and consistent naming convention
ii) for BMS data points which is handed over to the building NA Y/N/NA 0 1
owner.
Provision of automated and schedule exports of data points
to commonly used file formats which enables exchange of
iii) NA Y/N/NA 0 1
data between systems. For example, data export to analytics
or optimization software.
Provision of documentation during handover stage to
iv) NA Y/N/NA - NA Pre-req
ensure operational continuity
Sub-total (6.1.1) 0
6.2 Cybersecurity 0 1
Lack of cyber security leading to data theft and economic
6.2.1 1
impact
Implement a risk-based cyber security assessment
a. conducted by building owner’s IT department/cyber security NA Y/N/NA
consultant
The organisation is assessed by an independent party and
certified to comply with 1 of the following certifications.
0 1
i) ISO 27001, the International Information Security
b. Standard NA Y/N/NA
ii) SOC 2 certification, American Institute of Certified Public
Accountants.
iii) IEC 62443, Industrial communication networks - IT
security for networks and systems.
Sub-total (6.2.1) 0
6.3 Innovation 0 3
Adopt innova ve technologies that improve FM labour
6.3.1 3
efficiency and service delivery. (Up to 3 points)
Adopt at least one Smart FM solution (Type 1 or 2) within
a. N Y/N NOK Pre-req
project. Score at least 1 point from 6.3.1b or c.
Type 1 – Use of digitised workflow automation to optimize
b. the workflow, productivity and service delivery: (1 point # of applications
each) 0 3
Type 2 – Use of data analytics and artificial intelligence for
c. system optimization and predictive maintenance: (1 point # of applications
each)
Sub-total (6.3.1) 0
6.4 Advanced Smart FM 0 4

Advanced Smart FM – Integrated and aggregated Smart FM
6.4.1 solu ons that improve FM labour efficiency and service 4
delivery (up to 4 points)
a. Type 3 – Integration across systems (1 point each): # of applications 0 3
b. Aggregated Smart FM Solution N Y/N 0 1
Sub-total (6.4.1) 0
6.5 Robotics and Automation 0 3

Design for Robotics and Automation (R&A)
6.5.1 3
(up to 3 points)
Building infrastructures should be designed to optimise
robot capabilities such as their range of mobility, ease of
completing tasks, and ability to navigate its work
environment.
(up to 3 points, 0.5 point for each R&A solution)
Identifying the robots of interest to be deployed and

recognising their corresponding level of autonomy is
important in planning for suitable infrastructure that would
cater to the robots.
# of R&A
a. 0 NA 3
solutions
Example use of FM robots could include the following:
• Cleaning robot e.g. façade, floor, window

• Concierge robot
• Facade inspection robot/drone
• Landscape management robot e.g. lawn mowers
• Pest management robot e.g. detection, monitoring,
extermination
• Security robot
• Waste management robot
0
Bonus Points 0 0 13
Remarks
PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT OF LAYER EGG FARM WITH ANCILLARY FACILITIES
ON LOT 02008X MK 12 AT KRANJI WAY (LIM CHU KANG PLANNING AREA)
This BIM Execution Plan (BEP) developed for this project is made up of consultants and
contractor. Each discipline will work and coordinate to facilitate the accuracy and effectiveness of
information in the model. The BEP document is updated by the BIM Manager. Should there be
any alterations to the BIM process, uses or deliverables, the BIM Manager is required to amend
the document when necessary to carry out effective exchange of information.
The BEP specifies the roles and responsibilities of each project member when using Building
Information Modelling (BIM) at different stages of a project. It contains details with regards to the
BIM deliverables and the process through which the deliverables are created, maintained and
shared, in order to meet a set of project goals. The Main Contractor will update the BIM model
progressively during the construction and shall provide a final as-built BIM model suitable for
Farm Operation Management.
SECTION A: PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Name Egg Layer Farm

Project Reference Number E3363-00008-2022
Project Address Neo Tiew Road / Kranji Way
Project Development Agriculture
Site Area 10,000 m2
Maximum GFA
Maximum Building Height
Project Description PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT OF LAYER EGG FARM
WITH ANCILLARY FACILITIES ON LOT 02008X MK 12
AT KRANJI WAY (LIM CHU KANG PLANNING AREA)
VDC/BIM Class Class 1
SECTION B: PROJECT MEMBERS
Discipline Contact Name Title Email Address

IFH Pte Ltd Yayoi Yoshikawa Chief Operating Officer y.yoshikawa841@gmail.com
IFH Pte Ltd Alvin Sung Project Manager Alvin.s@isefoods-holdings.com
OGP Konsult Pte Ltd Aung Lwin Arch & C&S BIM aunglwin@ogpkonsult.com
Coordinator/Modeler
Elead Associates Pte Ltd Sean Ying Kee M&E Consultant sean@eleadmec.com
Yeow
Awarded Contractor Specified by Main BIM Manager
Contractor BIM Coordinator (Arch)
BIM Coordinator (C&S)
BIM Coordinator (M&E)
BIM Modeler (Arch)
BIM Modeler (C&S)
BIM Modeler (M&E)
SECTION C: PROJECT GOALS & OBJECTIVES
Project Goal Objective BIM Use Action

Design Study and Study Massing Model Visualization of Site Consultants
Conceptual (Sketch-Up) base on the Utilization Planning.
Design brief and site
analysis.
Coordination (1st Class) To conduct quality Quality Assurance, Design Consultants Awarded
validation using model Reviews and Contractor
checker or assisted Coordination.
checking using native BIM
software and to produce
an interdisciplinary
coordinated Model.
Issuance of Model (1st Consultants to issue read- Contractor may rely on Consultants
Class – Modified) only file. the accuracy of the model
for their construction.
The read-only file is used
as an artist impression
which is subjected to
changes or approval from
the consultants.
Authority Submission To submit native BIM files Fulfil relevant authority Consultants Awarded
and obtain approval from requirements. Contactor
respective authority.
Virtual Mock-Up (2nd To create virtual mock up Visualization of the Awarded Contractor
Upper Class) for 3 critical areas to critical areas before
Consultants’ selection. actual Mock-up on site.
Innovation (1st Class) Parametric BIM for Subjected to awarded Awarded Contractor
construction contractor (e.g. Visual
Programming Dynamo for
exporting quantities
schedules)
Innovation (1st Class) BIM for DfMA Shop drawings for PVC to Awarded Contractor
be produce in BIM.
Innovation (1st Class) Cost evaluation from Quantity Take-off from Awarded Contractor
tender to as-built BIM model.
Innovation (1st Class) Apps to BIM Integration Subjected to awarded Awarded Contractor
contractor (e.g. Model to
handover to FM using FM
software – Ecodomus)
SECTION D: BIM OBJECTIVE & RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX
Note: All BIM models shall be used whenever practical or requested, for meetings,
coordination, official reviews and communication of options and design intents
throughout each project stage as it is being developed, maintained and updated
BIM Project Objective BIM Manager Project members involved in fulfilling
the objective A -model author; U –
model user
AR ST MEP Q MC FM -
C R S
Conceptual Design [Optional] Building massing studies or other
forms of data representation with indicative dimensions, area,
volume, location and orientation Note: Massing models in BIM are
not necessary and traditional practice, i.e. massing by non-BIM tools
at this stage is acceptable
1. [Optional] Create site BIM Site Model A U U - - - -
models for master plan site study
and feasibility analysis
2. [Optional] Create and compare BIM Massing Model A U U - - - -
BIM massing models
 Space area and volumes
 No. of massing models depend
on no. of conceptual design
alternatives
3. [Optional] Generate, freeze and Conceptual Design stage A U U - - - -
store final documentation of the models comprising: Site
authorized BIM model in the model and BIM Massing
Conceptual Design phase before models
progression into the Schematic /
Preliminary Design stage
Preliminary Design Generalized building component or system with
approximate dimensions, shape, location, orientation, and quantity.
Non-geometric properties may be provided
4. All project members appointed to BIM Execution Plan agreed A U U - - - -
agree on needs, objectives, and signed by related parties
process and outcomes of the submitted to the Employer for
project. Agreed cut-off dates for review and acceptance within
exchange of models or other 30 days from receipt of Letter
deliverables shall be documented of Engagement, or a mutually
in the BIM Execution plan agreed date
5. Develop, maintain and update Architectural Model A U U U - - -
BIM model based on the
approved scheme in the
Conceptual Design.
 In preparation for regulatory
submission and to the
requirements as described in
Paragraph 2 of the
Consultant’s scope of services
model user
AR ST MEP Q MC FM -
C R S
6. Develop, maintain and update Structural Model U A U U - - -
Structural BIM model based on
the Architectural Model.
 Preliminary structural analysis
(Use of BIM Model is optional).
Paragraph 2 of the
Consultant’s scope of services.
7. Develop, maintain and update MEP Model U U A U - - -
Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing
and Sewerage (MEP) BIM model
based on the Architectural Model
 Preliminary M&E analysis (Use
of BIM Model is optional).
Paragraph 2 of the
Consultant’s scope of services.
8. Implement design coordination Preliminary design - - - - - - -
between the Architectural and Coordination Report
Structural BIM Models. (Architectural and Structural
Preliminary Design Coordination Models only)
Report (Architectural and
Structural Models only)
9. Prepare cost estimates based on Preliminary Cost Estimate - - - - - - -
the Architectural Model and to
the requirements as describe in
Paragraph 2 of the Consultant’s
scope of services. Preliminary
Cost Estimate
10. Generate, freeze, and store a) Individual models of A A A - - - -
final documentation of the Architectural, Structural and
authorized BIM model in the MEP disciplines b) Merged
Preliminary Design phase before models of Architectural and
progression into the Detailed Structural disciplines, and
Design phase. Coordination Report.
Detailed Design More detailed version of a generalized building A U U - - - -
component or system with accurate dimensions, shape, location,
orientation and quantity. Non-geometric properties should be
provided. BIM deliverables for tender submission should achieve
respective level of details as stated in the BIM Execution
11. Maintain and update the Architectural Model A U U - - - -
Architectural Model
requirements as describe in
Paragraph 3 of the
Consultant’s scope of
services.
 In preparation for tender.
model user
AR ST MEP Q MC FM -
C R S
12. Maintain and update the Structural Model and U A U U - - -
Structural Model, based on the Calculation
latest Architectural Model.
 Design, analysis (Use of BIM
Model is optional) and detailing.
Paragraph 3 of the Consultant’s
scope of services.
13. Maintain and update the MEP MEP Model and Analysis U U A U - - -
Model, based on the latest
Architectural Model.
 Design, analysis (Use of BIM
Model is optional) and
detailing.
Paragraph 3 of the
Consultant’s scope of
services.
14. Implement design coordination  Coordination models - - - - - - -
between the Architectural, (Architectural, Structural
Structural and MEP Models and MEP) for facilitating
(before issuing of tender). interactive discussions at
 Identify element conflicts and coordination meetings and
interferences. conducting clash detection
 Verify valid headroom and analysis
working spaces for building  Clash Detection and
operations and maintenance Resolution Report when
activities. requested by the Employer
 Penetration conflicts will be (Architectural, Structural
addressed. and MEP Models)
 Spatial Validation Report
when requested by the
Employer
15. Produce detailed cost estimation Detailed Quantity Cost - - - - - - -
and Bill of Quantities (in Estimate & Bills of Quantity
accordance with the standard
method of measurement) based
on BIM models.
 In preparation for tender and
to the requirements as
describe in Paragraph 3 of the
Consultant’s scope of service
16. Finalize, freeze and submit  Tender Models for A A A - - - -
Tender Models (updated and Architecture, Structure and
coordinated) within one month MEP
after closing of Tender.  Final compiled report of all
clash detections
 Final Clash Detection and
Resolution Report
(Architectural, MEP and
Structural Models)
 Final Spatial Validation
Report
SECTION E: BIM MODELING GUIDELINES
(I) OVERVIEW
Stages/ Architectural Structural Design MEP Design Intended Use

Disciplines Design
Conceptual Topo, Massing, (Optional) (Optional) Site planning Location of the
Site Elements, building(s) on the site,
Site Boundary, Investigation, Visualization,
Levels, Location, Design Options
Orientation
Schematic Building elements Load-bearing MEP Schematic Definition of building
Design with nominal structures, elements, Comparison of
dimensions and Proposed structural building element and
details system & basic structural Management of
structure (Done in quantity information,
Analysis software) Schematic dimensioning of
structures, Visualisation
Detailed Building elements Frame structures, Service areas of Dimensioning of structures
Design with actual Joints, MEP systems, Pipe to the precision required for
dimensions and Foundations, work, Switchboards, tenders, Definition of MEP
details Joining to Cable routes, systems, Penetration &
foundations, Lighting fixtures Reservation design,
Penetrations & Visualization. Combined
Reservations Services Design
Connections
As-Built Updated detail model Updated detail model Updated detail model as Information to be handed over for
as per actual site as per actual site per actual site conditions FM (maintenance & repairs; space
conditions conditions & occupancy management)
Note: Main Contractor to liaise with FM and to ensure as built models are compatible with Farm Operation
Management’s BIM platform & data format
(II) QUALITY ASSURANCE
Architectural Structural MEP Merged model at Schematic

Detailed Design BIM Detailed Design BIM Detailed Design BIM Design, Detailed Design,
Construction and As-Built
stages
 BIM in agreed version  BIM in agreed version  BIM in agreed version  All agreed models available
(revit 2022) (revit 2022) (revit 2022)  Models represent the same
 BIM includes defined  BIM includes defined  BIM includes defined design version
storeys storeys storeys  Models are located in the
 Building elements & spaces  Building elements defined  Components defined correct coordinate system
modelled separately in separately in each storey separately in each  No conflicts between
each storey  BIM includes required storey vertical shafts and MEP
 BIM includes required building elements  BIM includes required systems
building elements  Building elements components  No conflicts between
 Building elements modelled using correct  Components modelled horizontal reservations and
modelled using correct objects using correct objects MEP
objects  Building element types  Components belong to  No conflicts between
 Building element types are are as agreed a correct system suspended ceilings and MEP
as agreed  No excess building  System colours are  Penetrations of columns OK
 No excess building elements defined systematically  Penetrations of beams OK
elements -No overlapping  No overlapping or  No excess components  Penetrations of slabs OK
or doubled building doubled building  No overlapping or
elements elements doubled components
 No significant clashes  No significant clashes  No significant clashes
between objects between objects between components
 No conflicts between  No conflicts between  No clashes between
structures in architectural structures in architectural MEP disciplines
and structural BIM and structural BIM  No clashes between
 BIM includes GFA objects  No conflicts between M&E and electrical
 Room s areas match room penetrations in BIM
room program architectural and  Components fit into
 BIM includes spatial structural BIM their spatial
reservation for MEP  Columns and beams reservations
 Room heights defined converge  No clashes between
(including suspended  MEP penetrations & M&E, architectural
ceiling) reservations included in and structural BIM
 Shape and size of spaces
structures
matched with wall
 Spaces do not overlapped
 All rooms have unique ID
Stages Elements Modelling Guidelines Remarks
Piling (Pile If the BIM authoring tool has relevant objects to represent the When the design is
Cap and Pile) foundation elements then place them in the correct level and with not confirmed the
Diaphragm / the relevant parameter. elements can be
Retaining Wall modelled as
Raft Alternative is to use Slab, Column and Wall to represent reference to use in
Foundation foundation elements. Group them and define the “Type” correctly. the Schematic
Pad / Isolated Design co-
Foundation ordination with the
Strip Architects and
Foundation MEP Engineers.
Slab / Roof Top of Slab = Structural Floor Level
Slab Multiple Slabs need to be placed if the levels, thickness, span
direction and material are different.
The soffit of the structural slab should be shown.
When there is a slope in the Slab or the Slab with a special shape
and the BIM authoring tool does not have the functionality to
create such Slabs, then create the slab geometry using other tools
and define the ‘Type’ as a “slab”.
Beam Top of Beam = As per design (Up stand Beam or Down Hang
Beam)
Create objects for Beams with special shapes and cross sections,
e.g. Tapering and haunch.
Truss Model with multiple elements and group them as a truss. Note:
Some BIM authoring tools have a function to automate this
process.
Column Model from the Structural Floor Level to Structural Floor Level of
Slab below.
Create objects for Columns with special shapes and cross

sections.
Wall All Load bearing Walls and concrete Walls (non-load bearing)
need to be modelled, e.g. Core Walls, Shear Walls, Retaining
Walls, Diaphragm Walls.
If the Walls are between floors then model from Structural Floor
Level to Structural Floor Level of Slab below else the Walls need
to model to the correct levels.
When the Wall spans across different heights, if the BIM authoring
tool permits model as a single Wall with varying height then model
as one Wall. Alternative is to model multiple Walls.
Staircase, Model only the structure part of the Staircase, Steps and Ramps.
Step and
Ramps Create objects for Staircases, Steps and Ramps with special
shapes when it is not available in the BIM authoring tool.
If required then the landings and Stair platforms can be modelled

as Slabs. In that case define their “Type” accordingly.
Opening Model the structural Opening for the Doors, Windows and
Ventilations based on location and size information from the
Architects.
Model the structural Opening for the MEP elements like Ducts
based on the location and size information from the MEP
Engineers.
Model the Floor openings based on location and Size from the
Architects and MEP Engineers.
Special Model using Wall, Slab, Column, Beam and Opening or placed as When the design
Structure an Object and assign the “Type” accordingly. Check the specific is not confirmed
elements for their modelling guideline. the elements can
Civil defence be modelled as
shelter, reference to use in
Tunnel, Link the Schematic
Way, External Design co-
structures, ordination with the
Balcony, Architects and
Canopy, MEP Engineers.
Swimming
pool,
Temporary
structures,
Others
(IV) STRUCTURAL BIM MODELLING GUIDELINES
General Structural Guidelines:

1) The structural consultant produces both an analysis model and a physical model (Structural BIM) with actual member size and
position. The model will be used for documentation. These documents cover the Structural BIM only.
2) Structural modelling is carried out in the following stages: Conceptual, Schematic, Detail, Construction and As-Built. The types
of models produced at each stage depend on the BIM deliverables required.
3) If the design has precast or prefab design. The part can be designed and modelled by a specialist and incorporated/linked into
the model for reference.
4) Structural BIM covers all load-bearing concrete, wood and steel structures, as well as non-load-bearing concrete structures. The
basic building elements used are Wall, Slab, Beam, Column and Lattice. The building elements must be created using the correct
tools (Wall tool, Slab tool, etc.). If the features of BIM authoring tool are not sufficient for modelling the element, the required
building elements must be created using other appropriate objects. In that case, define the “Type “of the element correctly.
5) The model can be phased and divided for various ST submissions as per the project planning/individual firm’s practice.
6) Rebar and Joint details can be done in Detailed Design Stage based on the capability of the BIM authoring tool.
7) 2D or 2D standard details can be used to complement the BIM model when the elements are smaller than the agreed size, e.g.
Elements Smaller than 100mm do not need to be modelled. 8) 2D can be used for loading plans. 9) 2D can be used for the
column schedule when the BIM authoring tool has limitations. The shape and cutting of each column should be included in the
schedule.
10) Building Elements must be modelled separately for each storey.
11) Required Parameters: Type, Material, ID, Size and. Type is required for the Quantity Take-off.
12) If more than one tool is used to model certain elements then the elements should be grouped and identified correctly by “Type”.
E.g. Individual beams can be used to model the roof truss the elements must be grouped as one and define the “Type” as a
“Truss”.
Stages Elements Modelling Guidelines Remarks

Conceptual Existing The Structural Consultants Output: Structural Model of Existing
Buildings expertise may be required when Building or portions thereof
(As-Built assessing and modelling
Condition) existing structures, in particular
for Addition the load-bearing structural
& system. The scope of Structural
Alternations BIM model will be agreed upon
on a project-specific basis.
If the existing Buildings were

not in BIM then 2D drawings of
existing building can be used to
complement the BIM model
New The Structural Consultants Output: Structural concept alternatives
Buildings expertise may be required in
special cases in the
assessment of the alternatives
massing model from Architect
and propose framing systems.
Structural BIM model is optional
at this stage
Schematic Design General Model the elements using the Input: Geotechnical information/model,
Note: Schematic Requirement nominal dimension or expected Architectural Conceptual Design Model
Design model will be dimension based on precision for intended use (for load assumptions)
based on available at Schematic Design and geometry of the building (to
Architectural stage. Model the elements that determine the framing system)
Conceptual Design are critical and required for Note: the location of load bearing
model. It will be Schematic Design co-ordination elements and the elevation of the floor
developed further (based on projects requirement) will be based on the info from the
based on the co- Connections/Joints and Architects.
ordination during Members can be detailed in the
Schematic Design Detailed Design stage or Output: ST submission. Refer to BCA’s
stage. Construction stage, depending BIM e-Submission requirement and
on the project delivery Guidelines. Use BIM e-Submission
(traditional or D&B). Template
Output: Model for co-ordination with
Architects and MEP Engineers
OGP Konsult
Pte Ltd Revit 2019 .rvt .rvt/xlsx/docx
Revit 2019 .rvt/xlsx/docx
Elead & Revit 2019 .rvt/xlsx/docx

Associates Pte Ltd
Revit 2019 (recommended)

List of Drawings
Reference Documents
( The Tenderer will be deemed to have studied the Reports before preparing his tender.
The Employer does not warrant the accuracy of the Report)
201208_K6037_WI03
8_ HDB_(Part 1).docx
Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road

for
Singapore Food Agency
(Final Report)
Project No. : K5728

Date: 25 September 2021
The results reported herein have been performed in accordance with the terms of
accreditation under the Singapore Accreditation Council. The reports shall not be
reproduced except in full, unless the management representative of the accredited
organization has given approval in writing.
Certification by PE for SI Report
Certification by Professional Engineer for Site Investigation Report
1. I, Toh Chin Keong the Professional Engineer, PE Registration No. 5293 certify that
the Soil Investigation Report.
Soil Investigation Work at Neo Tiew Road
comprising all field and laboratory data, tests and results there has been carried out by me or under my supervision or
direction, and I have verified the accuracy of the information given in the site investigation report, and to the best of my
knowledge and belief, all have been prepared in compliance in all respects with the provisions of the Building Control Act
and Regulations, relevant Codes of Practice and Standards.
2. I further certify that I have the appropriate qualifications and experience, and I am familiar with the purpose of the
investigation for which this Site Investigation Report is prepared in reference to Project Ref No: RG/K5728/WA13/NEO
TIEW ROAD
3. Total number of pages in the Site Investigation Report is 498.
25 September 2021
Professional Engineer for Site Investigation Signature and Stamp Date
K5728/ Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
Table of Contents
Chapter No. & Title Page No.
1. INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 General 1
1.2 Project Description 1
1.3 Scope of Work 1
2. SITE INVESTIGATION WORKS 3

2.1 Field Exploration 3
3. METHOD OF SITE INVESTIGATION WORKS 5

3.1 Borehole Exploration Works 5
3.1.1 Rotary Wash Boring 5
3.1.2 Soil Sampling 6
3.1.2.1.1 Thin-walled Tube Sample (TW) 6
3.1.2.1.2 Mazier Sample (MZ) 7
3.2 In-Situ Tests 7
3.2.1 Standard Penetration Test 7
3.2.2 Pressuremeter Tests 8
4. LABORATORY TESTING 11
4.1 General 11
4.2 Physical Properties 11
4.3 Shear Strength Characteristics 13
4.4 Chemical Contents 14
5. GROUND CONDITIONS 15
5.1 General Geology 15
5.2 Subsoil Condition 18
6. CONCLUSIONS 22
7. LIMITATIONS 24
Ryobi Geotechnique International Pte Ltd 25 September 2021
i
REFERENCES 25
APPENDICES
Appendix A Layout of Boreholes and Cross Sections for Geological Profiles 27

Appendix B Soil Boring Logs 30
Appendix C Geological Profiles 52
Appendix D Results of Laboratory Tests 61
Appendix E Pressuremeter Tests 406
Appendix F Hammer Calibration Reports 442
ii
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
This report presents the results of soil investigation works consisting of ten (10) land
boreholes carried out for Soil Investigation Work at Neo Tiew Road (WA13). (See
Figure 1.1).
1.2 Project Description
(a) Title of Project

Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
(b) Client
Singapore Food Agency
(c) Soil Investigation Contractor

Ryobi Geotechnique International Pte Ltd
1.3 Scope of Work
The scope of work covering the soil investigation services of this project are
summarised as follows:
• Soil drilling at designated borehole locations

• Obtaining undisturbed samples and SPT split spoon samples and delivery of soil
samples to laboratory for testing
• Performing Standard Penetration Tests (SPT) including collection of split spoon
samples and Pressuremeter Tests (Appendix E)
• Conducting laboratory tests for selected soil samples obtained from field sampling
works
Page 1 of 498
THE SITE
Source : OneMap
Figure 1.1 Site Layout Plan
Page 2 of 498
2. SITE INVESTIGATION WORKS
2.1 Field Exploration
Field exploration works consisting of ten (10) boreholes were carried out using rotary
wash boring method for obtaining representative field data and good quality samples.
The field works consisting of boreholes and relevant field tests as summarized in Table
2.1 were carried out under the supervision of a Geologist from M/s Ryobi Geotechnique
International Pte Ltd.
The field exploration program started on 6 August 2021 and completed on 23 August
2021. A total number of ten (10) boreholes were drilled to depths ranging from
31.450m to 35.450m below the existing ground level.
Page 3 of 498
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511 Tel: 65- 6369 7100 Fax: 65- 6362 5848
Co.Reg.No. 200500891W
PROJECT : K5728 / Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
CLIENT : Singapore Food Agency
Table 2.1 Types and Quantities of Field Works
Coordinates Borehole Exploration (m) Soil Samples & Field Tests (Nos)
Reduced Level (RL)
Standard Penetration
Pressuremeter Test
Termination Depth
Borehole No.
Thin-walled Tube
Mazier Sample
Northing (m)
Rock Coring
Easting (m)
Soil Drilling
Sample
Test
BH1 46573.000 16600.000 110.392 35.450 35.450 - 17 3 - 1
BH2 46492.000 16600.000 110.657 31.450 31.450 - 15 2 1 -
BH3 46618.000 16684.000 108.432 31.450 31.450 - 15 2 - 1
BH4 46539.000 16684.000 108.912 31.450 31.450 - 15 3 - -
BH5 46477.000 16684.000 109.304 31.450 31.450 - 15 2 1 1
BH6 46628.000 16812.000 106.352 31.450 31.450 - 15 3 - 1
BH7 46550.000 16812.000 106.827 31.450 31.450 - 15 3 - -
BH8 46476.000 16812.000 107.130 31.450 31.450 - 15 3 - 1
BH9 46550.000 16928.000 105.715 31.450 31.450 - 15 3 - 1
BH10 46452.000 16928.000 106.013 31.450 31.450 - 15 3 - -
Total 318.500 318.500 0 152 27 2 6

Page 4 of 498
3. METHOD OF SITE INVESTIGATION WORKS
The site investigation works consisting of borehole exploration and field tests were carried
out in accordance with BS5930:2015+A1:2020, Ground Investigation and relevant Eurocodes
and also the requirements specified by Client as described in following sections.
3.1 Borehole Exploration Works
The borehole exploration works consisting of borehole drilling, soil sampling and
common field tests (e.g. SPT) conform to British Code of Practice
(BS5930:2015+A1:2020, Ground Investigation), BS EN ISO 22475-1:2006
(Geotechnical Investigation and Testing-Part 1), BS EN ISO 22476-3:2005
(Geotechnical Investigation and Testing-Part 3), local standards (e.g. SAC Inspection
Body) and the requirements specified by Client.
3.1.1 Rotary Wash Boring
Prior to drilling, cable detection works were carried out at all designated
borehole locations. Trial pits up to at least 1.5m depth followed by hand-auger
hole down to 3.0m depth were done at each borehole location to ascertain the
absence of buried cables and services or any other man-made obstruction that
could hinder drilling works. The technique employed was by rotary wash boring
whereby boring was advanced by rotating drilling bit with cuttings removed by
circulating water as the drilling fluid. Casings were used to support unstable
grounds when soft cohesive soil or loose non-cohesive soil is encountered in the
drilling process. The diameter of the drilled borehole is 100mm. The borehole
was terminated based on the termination criteria specified in the contract. Figure
3.1 shows the schematic diagram of Rotary Wash Boring.
Page 5 of 498
Figure 3.1 Schematic Diagram of Rotary Wash Boring
3.1.2 Soil Sampling
3.1.2.1 Undisturbed Sample
3.1.2.1.1 Thin-walled Tube Sample (TW)
Undisturbed samples were taken from various soil layers by using

75mm x 1000mm length thin-walled tube sampler which was
advanced by hydraulic jacking force for achieving the penetration
Page 6 of 498
into the original soil below the base of borehole at levels before
carrying out Standard Penetration Test (SPT). The sampler possesses
with a sharp cutting edge at its lower end is capable for recovering
samples from soil layers with SPT-N values not exceeding 30 blows
per 30cm penetration using hydraulic means for minimizing soil
disturbance.
3.1.2.1.2 Mazier Sample (MZ)
For sampling work in hard soil with SPT-N > 30, undisturbed soil
samples were recovered by using Mazier sampler consisting of a
rotary triple tube (PVC tube of 73mm I.D x 1000mm length x
1.5mm thickness) with an outer and an inner barrels, a sampler head,
a cutting shoe and a drill bit which will cut soil and reduce resistance
for advancing the sampler into very stiff to hard soils for the
required sampling works.
Undisturbed samples were taken at intervals specified, stored vertically in

suitable racks, waxed at both ends, and labelled properly before transporting to
the laboratory for testing. Samples were properly stored in sample delivery box
with sufficient protection for minimizing sample disturbance during transport to
the laboratory.
3.2 In-Situ Tests
3.2.1 Standard Penetration Test
Standard Penetration Test (SPT) was conducted in accordance with British Code
of Practice (BS5930:2015+A1:2020, Ground Investigation) and Eurocode of
Practice (BS EN ISO 22476, 3:2005+A1:2011, Standard Penetration Test) and
the requirements specified by Client. The purpose of this empirical dynamic
penetration test is to determine the resistance of soils to the penetration (i.e.
450mm or lesser) of a split barrel sampler of 50 mm external diameter which
was driven by a 63.5 kg automatic drop hammer with a free fall of 760 mm.
(Figure 3.2). The value of penetration resistance, N is the number of blows
required to achieve a 300 mm penetration of the barrel after an initial penetration
Page 7 of 498
of 150mm was achieved or an initial blow count number of 25 was recorded.

This was achieved by recording the blows for every 75mm penetration.
Standard Penetration Tests were conducted at specified depth according to
Consultant’s requirements. The values of N obtained in this investigation were
recorded in the borehole logs presented in Appendix B: Soil Boring Log.
Test Procedure:
1. Lower sampler to
bottom.
2. Drive sampler
through 0.45 m.
3. Record number of
blows required to
advance every 75
mm.
4. N = Sum of last
four readings.
Figure 3.2 General Setup and Procedure of SPT

(Note: Manual hammer instead of automatic hammer was shown)
3.2.2 Pressuremeter Test
Pressuremeter Test (PMT) was performed to determine the deformability and

strength properties of soil at depth specified by the Client using OYO
Pressuremeter in the present study. The method of test conforms to BS 5930 :
2015, Section 25.7 and EURO Code of Practice BS EN ISO 22476-4: 2012,
manufacturer’s recommendations and the requirements specified by Client.
Page 8 of 498
The OYO Pressuremeter used in present study consists Elastmeter 2 & Elast
Logger 2 (Figure 3.4). The “OYO Elastmeter-2” is a horizontal loading tester
with a maximum capacity of 20MPa for the testing of soil and rock in borehole.
The device can perform a series of operation from pressure and displacement
data collection to plotting of the results. Moreover, with the Elast Elastmeter-2,
mechanical information such as the Young’s modulus (i.e. Pressuremeter
Modulus) can be obtained.
The equipment comprises four (4) major components, namely i) Elast Logger-2,
ii) Elastometer HQ Sonde, iii) tubing/cable and iv) high pressure hand pump.
Two (2) types of rubber tubes (i.e. soft and hard) are available for test according
to the stiffness of soil.
The probe was calibrated against pressure at ground surface before its first use
and was then inserted into the borehole and lowered down to the predetermined
test depth for testing. The test was conducted by inflating the probe with water
via pressure generated by the hand pump at suitable pumping rate, e.g. not
exceeding 1.0MPa/min recommended by manufacturer. The pressure and radius
of probe can be automatically captured by the logger at specified intervals (e.g.
0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 & 30 seconds and 1, 2 5 & 10 mins) according to soil type
which can be stored in internal memory or on an external USB palm drive
(excluding 0.5 & 1 sec for USB drive). When a constant creep was noted, the
pressure was unloaded and again reloaded to failure or until the maximum
capacity of the pressuremeter (i.e. 20MPa) or the maximum radius of the
inflated rubber tube (i.e. 90mm) has reached. The test was terminated by
releasing the pressure at minimum 6 pressure decrements to zero pressure.
The co-relationship between pressure and deformation captured by the logger
will allow the determination soil parameters, e.g. At-Rest Earth Pressure, Yield
Pressure and Pressuremeter Modulus (Em) and also the Pressuremeter Cyclic
Modulus (Er).
Page 9 of 498
Figure 3.3 OYO Elastmeter 2 & Elast Logger 2
Page 10 of 498
4. LABORATORY TESTING
4.1 General
The laboratory test program scheduled by Client was executed to evaluate the soil
properties in the present investigation. All the tests were carried out by Ryobi
Geotechnique International Pte Ltd, accredited laboratory of SAC-SINGLAS except for
the chemical content tests which were conducted by M/s ALS Technichem (S) Pte Ltd.
Table 4.1 summarizes the types and quantities of laboratory tests performed according
to Client's instruction in this investigation.
4.2 Physical Properties
4.2.1 Determination of Moisture Content
At least 50 gm of representative sample is weighed and placed in the oven to dry

at 105°C to 110°C for over 16 hrs. The weight of the oven, dried sample is
measured after it is cool in the desiccators. The determination of moisture
content of the soils is conducted in accordance with BS 1377 PART 2:1990
Method 3.
4.2.2 Determination of Bulk Density
The dimensions (circumference and height) and the weight of the soil sample are
measured in accordance with BS 1377 PART 2:1990 Method 7 for the
determination of bulk density.
4.2.3 Determination of Particle Density
The particle density (i.e. specific gravity) of the soil grains is determined by
comparing the bulk density of the soil grains with the density of the distilled and
de-aired water. The particle density test is conducted in accordance with BS1377
PART 2:1990 Method 8.
Page 11 of 498
70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511 Tel: 65- 6369 7100 Fax: 65- 6362 5848
Co.Reg.No. 200500891W
PROJECT : K5728 / Soil Investigation Works at Neo Tiew Road
CLIENT : Singapore Food Agency
Table 4.1 Types and Quantities of Laboratory Test
Index Tests Strength Tests Chemical Tests
Unconsolidated-undrained Triaxial
Grading by Mechanical Analysis
Consolidated-undrained Triaxial
Grading by Hydrometer Method
Organic Matter of Soil Sample

Liquid and Plastic Limits
Compression (CU) Test

Compression (UU) Test
Sulphate Content
Chloride Content
Borehole No.
Moisture Content
Particle Density
pH Value
Bulk Density
Soil Water Soil Water Soil Water
BH1 3 9 10 10 10 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH2 3 2 8 8 8 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH3 2 5 7 7 7 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH4 2 6 6 6 6 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH5 3 6 9 9 9 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
BH6 3 6 8 8 8 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH7 3 1 8 8 7 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH8 3 1 7 7 7 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BH9 3 7 10 10 10 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
BH10 3 10 10 10 10 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total 28 53 83 83 82 28 28 25 22 10 22 10 22 10 22

Page 12 of 498
4.2.4 Determination of Atterberg Limits
Atterberg Limits, i.e. Plastic Limit (PL) and Liquid Limit (LL) are water content
where the behaviour of a soil sample changes and is very important in soil
classification. At the water content below the Plastic Limit, the soil behaves like
in a “solid” state. At the water content beyond the Liquid Limit, the soil
behaves as if in the “liquid” state. The difference of water content between the
Plastic Limit and the Liquid Limit is termed as Plasticity Index (PI). The
determination of the Atterberg Limits is conducted in accordance with BS 1377:
PART 2:1990 Methods 4 and 5.
4.2.5 Particle Size Distribution Analysis (Sieve & Hydrometer Methods)
For coarse-soils, the grain size distribution of the soil is determined from
mechanical sieving of the dry soil grains through various aperture sizes
(0.063mm to 50mm) sieve pans. If substantial amount of soil grains (mainly silt
and clay-size particle) passes through the sieve pan with aperture of 0.063mm,
hydrometer test is conducted to determine the percentage of silt and clay
particles. The grain size analysis is conducted in accordance with BS 1377:
PART 2:1990 Method 9.3.
4.3 Shear Strength Characteristics
4.3.1 Unconsolidated-undrained Triaxial Compression (UU) Test
Unconsolidated-undrained triaxial compression test was conducted to determine

the undrained shear strength (cu) of cohesive soil. The soil samples were sheared
in undrained condition (i.e. no change in moisture content is allowed) under an
applied confining pressure without allowing soil consolidation. The axial load is
increased by applying a constant rate of strain until the specimen fails. The UU
test is conducted in accordance with BS1377 Part 7:1990 Method 8.
4.3.2 Consolidated-undrained Triaxial Compression (CU) Test
For CU test, specimens were first is tropically consolidated after saturation and
then sheared under undrained condition. The pore water pressures developed in
Page 13 of 498
the specimen during shearing were monitored by using a pressure transducer.

Three stages of consolidation and shearing were carried out for each series of
CU test, so that a failure envelope can be defined and effective shear strength
parameters can be determined. The CU test is conducted in accordance with
BS1377: PART 8:1990 Method 7.
4.4 Chemical Contents
Selected soil and water samples collected from different boreholes were assigned for
chemical contents tests which include pH value, Sulphate Content, Chloride Content,
Organic Content, and Sea Shell Content in the present investigation. The chemical
content tests are conducted in accordance with BS1377 Part 3:1990.
4.4.1 pH Value
The pH value is measured electrometrically from a previously calibrated pH

meter after sample preparation.
4.4.2 Sulphate Content
Sulphate is precipitated in a hydrochloric acid solution as Barium sulphate by

the addition of barium chloride. The precipitate is carried out near the boiling
temperature and after a period of digestion, the precipitates is filtered, washed
with water until free from chloride, ignited and weighed as Barium sulphate.
Chloride are extracted with dilute nitric acid and then analyzed by titration using
Volhard’s method.
4.4.4 Organic Content
The organic matter was analysed by oxidation using dichromate technique.
Page 14 of 498
5. GROUND CONDITIONS
5.1 General Geology
The subsurface within the vicinity of the project site is classified as the KALLANG
FORMATION and OLD ALLUVIUM (Figure 5.1). The geological formation is
described as follows:
KALLANG FORMATION
It consists of both marine and terrestrial deposits that are found in onshore incised river
valleys, offshore and coastal areas. The deposition period was late Pleistocene to
Present. The distribution of KALLANG FORMATION extensively found in river
valleys, river mouths, river plains, coastal areas and near off shore Singapore.
KALLANG FORMATION is a group, consists of Marine member, Alluvial member,
Transitional member, Reef member and Littoral.
Marine member (Km) : Very soft to soft, pale blue to bluish grey, CLAY. It
comprises upper and lower part.
Alluvial member (Ka) : Fluvial SAND (F1) & Fluvial CLAY (F2)
Transitional member (Kt) : Unconsolidated black to blue, grey Estuarine Mud,
Muddy Sand or Sand often with high organic content
and PEAT Layers.
Reef member (Kr) : Loose, calcareous SAND and corals formed off shore.
Littoral member (Kl) : Loose Clayey SAND and SAND shell fragments
deposited on costal beach.
OLD ALLUVIUM
The OLD ALLUVIUM was probably dominant by fluvial condition with subordinate
marine sediments during Pliocene to Mid-Pleistocene. The deposits of the OLD
ALLUVIUM mainly cover the eastern part of Singapore. The OLD ALLUVIUM was
then deposited as a thick pile of alluvial to deltaic deposits of coarse sand with
occasional incursions of marine sediments. Tectonic activity appeared to have
recommended in late Tertiary time giving rise to a trough which now plunges to the
Page 15 of 498
south beneath the OLD ALLUVIUM on the eastern side of Singapore. The thickness of
OLD ALLUVIUM in Singapore varies from 10 meters to more than 100 meters.
Page 16 of 498
Figure 5.1 Geological Map Around The Site
Page 17 of 498
5.2 Subsoil Condition
According to the results of present ten (10) boreholes, the subsoils found at the present
site can be classified into nine (9) layers as follows. The soil description was made
based on BS5930 and SPT-N correlation (Terzaghi & Peck) adopted in local practice.
Re-classification of soil and rock from BS to EC (if required) can be referred to Annex
A of “Guide on Ground Investigation and Geotechnical Characteristics Values to
Eurocode 7”GeoSS 2015).
LAYER 1 FILL Made Ground

Slightly gravelly sandy SILT with roots, brick fragments and
traces of peats , Localized Sandy to Slightly sandy CLAY ,
Localized Gravelly very clayey /Slightly gravelly very clayey
fine to coarse SAND with traces of organic materials ,
Localized Slightly gravelly slightly silty fine to coarse SAND
with traces of organic materials (2≤N≤10)
This layer consisting mainly of Slightly gravelly sandy SILT with
roots , brick fragments and traces of peats was found in all
boreholes with thickness ranging from 3.000 m to 9.000 m.
Localized existence of Sandy to Slightly sandy CLAY and
Gravelly very clayey to Slightly gravelly very clayey / Slightly
gravelly slightly silty fine to coarse SAND with traces of organic
materials was found in Borehole Nos. BH5/BH8 and
BH6/BH7/BH8, respectively.
LAYER 2 (E) Transitional Member (KALLANG FORMATION)

Sandy CLAY with organics materials, Very clayey fine to
medium SAND with organic materials and traces of peats
(2≤N≤4)
This layer consisting of Sandy CLAY with organics materials and
Very clayey fine to medium SAND with organic materials and
traces of peats was only found in Borehole Nos. BH2 and BH5
with a recorded thickness of 2.000m.
Page 18 of 498
LAYER 3 (F1) Alluvial Member (KALLANG FORMATION)

Silty fine to medium SAND with traces of organic materials
(N=3)
This layer consisting of Silty fine to medium SAND with traces of
organic materials was found only found in Borehole No. BH7 with
a recorded thickness of 2.000m.
LAYER 4 (F2) Alluvial Member (KALLANG FORMATION)

Sandy CLAY with traces of peat, Slightly sandy CLAY
(2≤N≤6)
This layer consisting of Sandy CLAY with traces of peat and
Slightly sandy CLAY was only found in Borehole Nos. BH5, BH8
and BH9 with thickness ranging from 2.000m to 8.000m.
LAYER 5 O(E) Residual Soil (OLD ALLUVIUM)

Slightly sandy CLAY, Slightly gravelly silty fine to medium
SAND, Slightly sandy SILT, Gravelly very clayey to Slightly
gravelly very clayey fine to coarse SAND, Silty to Very clayey
fine to medium SAND, Localized Clayey fine to coarse SAND
(2≤N≤10)
This layer consisting of Slightly sandy CLAY, Slightly gravelly
silty fine to medium SAND, Slightly sandy SILT, Gravelly very
clayey to Slightly gravelly very clayey fine to coarse SAND and
Silty to Very clayey fine to medium SAND was found in all
boreholes except Borehole No. BH8 with thickness ranging from
1.000m to 8.000m. Localized existence of Clayey fine to coarse
SAND was found in Borehole No. BH1.
Page 19 of 498
LAYER 6 O(D) Destructured (OLD ALLUVIUM)

Slightly gravelly sandy CLAY, Sandy to Slightly sandy CLAY,
Sandy to Slightly sandy SILT, Gravelly very clayey / Slightly
gravelly very clayey/ Very gravelly very clayey/ Slightly
gravelly clayey/ Very clayey fine to coarse SAND, Silty to very
clayey fine to medium SAND, Localized Slightly gravelly silty
fine to medium SAND (10≤N≤30)
This layer consisting of Slightly gravelly sandy CLAY, Sandy to
Slightly sandy CLAY, Sandy to Slightly sandy SILT, Gravelly
very clayey / Slightly gravelly very clayey/ Very gravelly very
clayey/ Slightly gravelly clayey/ Very clayey fine to coarse SAND
and Silty to very clayey fine to medium SAND was found in all
boreholes with thickness ranging from 0.450m to 22.450m within
the exploration depth of present boreholes. Localized existence of
Slightly gravelly silty fine to medium SAND was found in
Borehole No. BH7.
LAYER 7 O(C) Distinctly Weathered (OLD ALLUVIUM)

Slightly sandy SILT, Sandy to Slightly CLAY, Silty to Slightly
gravelly silty fine to medium SAND, Localized gravelly very
clayey fine to coarse SAND (31≤N≤50)
This layer consisting of Slightly sandy SILT, Sandy to Slightly
CLAY and Silty to Slightly gravelly silty fine to medium SAND
was found in all boreholes except Borehole No. BH3 with
thickness ranging from 0.450m to 6.000m within the exploration
depth of present boreholes. Localized existence of gravelly very
clayey fine to coarse SAND was found in Borehole No. BH7.
LAYER 8 O(B) Partially Weathered (OLD ALLUVIUM)

Sandy to Slightly sandy CLAY, Localized Very clayey fine to
medium SAND, Localized Slightly sandy SILT (52≤N≤78)
This layer consisting mainly of Sandy to Slightly sandy CLAY was
only found in Borehole Nos. BH2, BH4, BH5, BH8 and BH10 with
Page 20 of 498
thickness ranging from 0.450m to 4.450m within the exploration

depth of present boreholes. Localized existence of Very clayey fine
to medium SAND and Slightly sandy SILT was found in Borehole
Nos. BH2 and BH8, respectively.
LAYER 9 O(A) Unweathered (OLD ALLUVIUM)

Very silty fine to coarse SAND (N>100)
This layer consisting of Very silty fine to coarse SAND was
captured by one SPT carried out at the surface of Layer 7 in
Borehole No. BH1. The thickness of this localized layer verified
within the exploration depth of present boreholes is 0.350m.
Page 21 of 498
6. CONCLUSIONS
On the basis of the results of field and laboratory tests conducted in the present study, the
findings are summarized as follows for design reference:
1. The subsoils found in the present ten (10) boreholes consist of the following 9 layers.
Layer SPT-N Layer
Geological Formation Soil Description
No. Thickness
Slightly gravelly sandy SILT with

roots , brick fragments and traces of
peats , Localized Sandy to Slightly
sandy CLAY , Localized Gravelly
Made Ground very clayey /Slightly gravelly very 2≤N≤10 3.000m
1 (FILL) clayey fine to coarse SAND with to
traces of organic materials, Localized 9.000m
Slightly gravelly slightly silty fine to
coarse SAND with traces of organic
materials
Sandy CLAY with organics

Transitional Member
materials, Very clayey fine to 2≤N≤4
2 (KALLANG FORMATION), E 2.000m
medium SAND with organic
(Only found in BH2 and BH5)
materials and traces of peats
Alluvial Member
Silty fine to medium SAND with
3 (KALLANG FORMATION), F1 2.000m
traces of organic materials N=3
(Only found in BH7)
Alluvial Member 2.000m

Sandy CLAY with traces of peat, 2≤N≤6
4 (KALLANG FORMATION), F2 to
Slightly sandy CLAY
(Only found in BH5, BH8 and BH9) 8.000m
Slightly sandy CLAY, Slightly

gravelly silty fine to medium SAND,
Slightly sandy SILT, Gravelly very
Residual Soil 1.000m
clayey to Slightly gravelly very 2≤N≤10
5 (OLD ALLUVIUM), O(E) to
clayey fine to coarse SAND, Silty to
(Not found in BH8) 8.000m
Very clayey fine to medium SAND,
Localized Clayey fine to coarse
SAND
Slightly gravelly sandy CLAY, Sandy

to Slightly sandy CLAY, Sandy to
Slightly sandy SILT, Gravelly very
clayey / Slightly gravelly very clayey/
Destructured 0.450m
Very gravelly very clayey/ Slightly 10≤N≤30
6 (OLD ALLUVIUM), O(D) to
gravelly clayey/ Very clayey fine to
22.450m
coarse SAND, Silty to very clayey
fine to medium SAND, Localized
Slightly gravelly silty fine to medium
SAND
Slightly sandy SILT, Sandy to

Distinctly Weathered Slightly CLAY, Silty to Slightly 0.450m
7 (OLD ALLUVIUM), O(C) gravelly silty fine to medium SAND, to
31≤N≤50
(Not found in BH3) Localized gravelly very clayey fine to 6.000m
coarse SAND
Page 22 of 498
Partially Weathered Sandy to Slightly sandy CLAY,

0.450m
(OLD ALLUVIUM), O(B) Localized Very clayey fine to
8 to
(Only found in BH2, BH4, BH5, medium SAND, Localized Slightly 52≤N≤78
4.450m
BH8 and BH10) sandy SILT
Unweathered
(OLD ALLUVIUM), O(A) Very silty fine to coarse SAND N>100
9 *0.350m
(Only found in BH1)
*within the exploration depth of present boreholes
Page 23 of 498
7. LIMITATIONS
This factual report on soil Investigation works has been prepared for Singapore Food
Agency to be used solely in the planning and design of the proposed development at Neo
Tiew Road. In performing our professional services, we have used that degree of care and
skill ordinarily exercised, under similar circumstances by our geologists and engineers. No
other warranty expressed or implied is made as to the findings and conclusions included in
this report.
The report has been developed based on the results of field investigation and laboratory
testing of the present study. It should be recognised that subsurface conditions can vary
laterally and with depth at a given site. If before and during construction, conditions are
exposed that differ from those described in this report, those should be brought to the
attention of M/s Ryobi Geotechnique International Pte Ltd (RGIPL) to evaluate whether
reassessment of the findings and conclusions contained in this report is necessary. Note that
additional cost will apply if further investigation works are required in the opinion of
RGIPL.
Page 24 of 498
REFERENCES
1. BS EN ISO 22475-1:2006, “Geotechnical Investigation and Testing-Sampling Methods

and Groundwater Measurement-Part 1: Technical Principles for Execution”.
2. BS EN ISO 22476-3:2005+A1:2011, “Geotechnical Investigation and Testing - Part 3 :

Standard Penetration Test”.
3. BRITISH STANDARD INSTITUTION (1990), “Methods of Test for Soil for Civil
Engineering Purposes, BS 1377:1990”.
4. BRITISH STANDARD INSTITUTION (2020), “Code of Practice for Ground

Investigation, BS5930:2015+A1:2020".
5. DEFENCE SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY AGENCY (2009), “Geology of Singapore

2nd Edition”, DSTA.
6. GEOTECHNICAL SOCIETY OF SINGAPORE (2015), “Guide on Ground

Investigation and Geotechnical Characteristics Values to Eurocode 7”.
7. SINGAPORE STANDARD (2010), “Eurocode 7: Geotechnical Design , Part 2 :

Ground Investigation and Testing, SS EN 1997-2 : 2010”.
Page 25 of 498
APPENDIX A
LAYOUT OF BOREHOLES
AND CROSS SECTIONS FOR GEOLOGICAL PROFILES
Page 26 of 498
Page 27 of 498
Neo Tiew Road
BH Easting Northing
BH1 16600 46573
A A
E
F BH2 16600 46492
B D BH3 16684 46618
BH3 BH6
BH4 16684 46539
B
BH1 G
BH5 16684 46477
BH6 16812 46628
C
BH4 BH7
BH9 BH7 16812 46550
C BH8 16812 46476
BH2
D BH5 BH8 BH9 16928 46550
BH10 BH10 16928 46452
E F
G
Page 28 of 498
APPENDIX B
SOIL BORING LOGS
Page 29 of 498
11
Page 30 of 498
BH1
NEO TIEW ROAD 46573..000 m
16600.000 m
110.392 m
3 3.00
3/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
3/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
5/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
5/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
10/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
11/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
14/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
4/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64
Sokkalingam Karthikeyan / 06/08/21-10/08/21

M Thain Zin Chan
William Si/Yen YL 1/2
25 September 2021
Page 31 of 498
BH1
NEO TIEW ROAD 46573..000 m
16600.000 m
110.392 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
5/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
3/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
13/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
14/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
16/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
27/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33 33.00
100/220 SPT16
33.35
34
35 35.00
38/300 SPT17
35.45
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 32 of 498
BH2
NEO TIEW ROAD 46492.000 m
16600.00 m
110.657 m
3 3.00
2/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
4/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
4/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
8/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
5/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
8/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
10/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
52/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
19/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
3
69
Kaliyamoorthy / M Thain Zin Chan 12/08/21-16/08/21
25 September 2021
Page 33 of 498
BH2
16600.00 m
110.657 m
20.00
MZ1
21 21.00
21.00
26/300 SPT10
21.45
22
23 23.00
26/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
42/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
46/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
57/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
34/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 34 of 498
BH3
16684.000 m
108.432 m
3 3.00
5/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
6/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
7/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
14/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
10/300 SPT5
11.45
12
13 12.90
10/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
11/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
15/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
21/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 35 of 498
BH3
16684.000 m
108.432 m
20.00
TW2
20.90
21 20.90
25/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
20/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
16/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
20/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
21/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
23/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 36 of 498
BH4
16684.000 m
108.912 m
3 3.00
9/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
11/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
13/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
12/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
11/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
16/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
17/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
34/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
49
75
Sukhdeep Singh / M Thain Zin Chan 20/08/21-23/08/21
25 September 2021
Page 37 of 498
BH4
16684.000 m
108.912 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
29/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
38/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
46/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
47/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
55/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
43/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 38 of 498
BH5
16684.000 m
109.304 m
3 3.00
6/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
10/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
2/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
4/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
7/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
2/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
8/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
42/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
26/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 39 of 498
BH5
16684.000 m
109.304 m
20.00
MZ1
21 21.00
21.00
33/300 SPT10
21.45
22
23 23.00
64/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
52/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
60/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
31/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
42/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
3
69
25 September 2021
Page 40 of 498
BH6
16812.000 m
106.352 m
3 3.00
4/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
6/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
4/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
5/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
10/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
5/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
23/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
6/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
22/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 41 of 498
BH6
16812.000 m
106.352 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
24/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
15/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
18/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
30/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
32/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
29/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 42 of 498
BH7
16812.000 m
106.827 m
3 3.00
2/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
3/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
3/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
12/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
5/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
29/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
15/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
20/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 43 of 498
BH7
16812.000 m
106.827 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
27/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
35/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
31/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
24/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
31/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
33/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 44 of 498
BH8
16812.000 m
107.130 m
3 3.00
7/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
9/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
6/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
6/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
5/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
12/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
11/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
12/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
12/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
49
75
Sukhdeep Singh /M Thain Zin Chan 12/08/21-17/08/21
25 September 2021
Page 45 of 498
BH8
16812.000 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
13/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
38/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
36/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
57/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
50/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
78/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 46 of 498
BH9
16812.000 m
105.715 m
3 3.00
3/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
3/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
4/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
2/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
4/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
3/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
4/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
6/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
20/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 47 of 498
BH9
16812.000 m
105.715 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
25/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
25/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
25/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
16/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
21/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
43/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
38
64

M Thain Zin Chan
25 September 2021
Page 48 of 498
BH10
16928.000 m
106.013 m
3 3.00
9/300 SPT1
3.45
4 4.00
TW1
4.90
5 4.90
11/300 SPT2
5.35
7 7.00
16/300 SPT3
7.45
9 9.00
11/300 SPT4
9.45
10
11 11.00
12/300 SPT5
11.45
12 12.00
TW2
12.90
13 12.90
13/300 SPT6
13.35
14
15 15.00
13/300 SPT7
15.45
16
17 17.00
17/300 SPT8
17.45
18
19 19.00
18/300 SPT9
19.45
20
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 49 of 498
BH10
16928.000 m
106.013 m
20.00
TW3
20.90
21 20.90
37/300 SPT10
21.35
22
23 23.00
58/300 SPT11
23.45
24
25 25.00
67/300 SPT12
25.45
26
27 27.00
38/300 SPT13
27.45
28
29 29.00
71/300 SPT14
29.45
30
31 31.00
69/300 SPT15
31.45
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
RCG
100
49
75
25 September 2021
Page 50 of 498
APPENDIX C
GEOLOGICAL PROFILES
Page 51 of 498
List of Cross-Sections for Geological Profiles
SECTION BOREHOLES
A-A BH3, BH6
B-B BH1, BH4, BH7, BH9
C-C BH2, BH5, BH8, BH10
D-D BH1, BH2
E-E BH3, BH4, BH5
F-F BH6, BH7, BH8
G-G BH9, BH10
Page 52 of 498
Page 53 of 498
Page 54 of 498
Page 55 of 498
Page 56 of 498
Page 57 of 498
Page 58 of 498
Page 59 of 498
APPENDIX D
RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTS
Client : Singapore Food Agency

Address : 52 Jurong Gateway Road, #14-01, Singapore 608550
Rev. Date Description Reviewed by Approved by

(Min WH) (Kong SK)
00 25/09/2021 Final Report
This laboratory is accredited under the Singapore Accreditation Council-Singapore Laboratory Scheme (SAC-SINGLAS) and has met the requirements of
ISO /IEC 17025 : 2017. The results reported herein have been performed in accordance with the laboratory’s terms of accreditation under the SAC-SINGLAS
This document shall not be reproduced except in full, unless the management representative of the accredited Laboratory has given approval in writing.
Page 60 of 498
-
2.66
Page 61 of 498
Page 62 of 498
Page 63 of 498
Page 64 of 498
Page 65 of 498
Page 66 of 498
Page 67 of 498
Page 68 of 498
Page 69 of 498
Page 70 of 498
Page 71 of 498
Page 72 of 498
Page 73 of 498
Page 74 of 498
Page 75 of 498
Page 76 of 498
Page 77 of 498
Page 78 of 498
Page 79 of 498
Page 80 of 498
Page 81 of 498
Page 82 of 498
Page 83 of 498
Page 84 of 498
Page 85 of 498
Page 86 of 498
Page 87 of 498
Page 88 of 498
Page 89 of 498
Page 90 of 498
Page 91 of 498
Page 92 of 498
Page 93 of 498
Page 94 of 498
Page 95 of 498
Page 96 of 498
Page 97 of 498
Page 98 of 498
Page 99 of 498
Page 100 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 101 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 102 of 498

Page 103 of 498
Page 104 of 498
Page 105 of 498
Page 106 of 498
Page 107 of 498
Page 108 of 498
Page 109 of 498
Page 110 of 498
Page 111 of 498
Page 112 of 498
Page 113 of 498
Page 114 of 498
Page 115 of 498
Page 116 of 498
Page 117 of 498
Page 118 of 498
Page 119 of 498
Page 120 of 498
Page 121 of 498
Page 122 of 498
Page 123 of 498
Page 124 of 498
Page 125 of 498
Page 126 of 498
Page 127 of 498
Page 128 of 498
Page 129 of 498
Page 130 of 498
Page 131 of 498
Page 132 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 133 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 134 of 498

Page 135 of 498
Page 136 of 498
Page 137 of 498
Page 138 of 498
Page 139 of 498
Page 140 of 498
Page 141 of 498
Page 142 of 498
Page 143 of 498
Page 144 of 498
Page 145 of 498
Page 146 of 498
Page 147 of 498
Page 148 of 498
Page 149 of 498
Page 150 of 498
Page 151 of 498
Page 152 of 498
Page 153 of 498
Page 154 of 498
Page 155 of 498
Page 156 of 498
Page 157 of 498
Page 158 of 498
Page 159 of 498
Page 160 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 161 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 162 of 498

Page 163 of 498
Page 164 of 498
Page 165 of 498
Page 166 of 498
Page 167 of 498
Page 168 of 498
Page 169 of 498
Page 170 of 498
Page 171 of 498
Page 172 of 498
Page 173 of 498
Page 174 of 498
Page 175 of 498
Page 176 of 498
Page 177 of 498
Page 178 of 498
Page 179 of 498
Page 180 of 498
Page 181 of 498
Page 182 of 498
Page 183 of 498
Page 184 of 498
Page 185 of 498
Page 186 of 498
Page 187 of 498
is
22/09/2021
Page 188 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 189 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 190 of 498

Page 191 of 498
Page 192 of 498
Page 193 of 498
Page 194 of 498
Page 195 of 498
Page 196 of 498
Page 197 of 498
Page 198 of 498
Page 199 of 498
Page 200 of 498
Page 201 of 498
Page 202 of 498
Page 203 of 498
Page 204 of 498
Page 205 of 498
Page 206 of 498
Page 207 of 498
Page 208 of 498
Page 209 of 498
Page 210 of 498
Page 211 of 498
Page 212 of 498
Page 213 of 498
Page 214 of 498
Page 215 of 498
Page 216 of 498
Page 217 of 498
Page 218 of 498
Page 219 of 498
Page 220 of 498
Page 221 of 498
Page 222 of 498
Page 223 of 498
Page 224 of 498
Page 225 of 498
Page 226 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 227 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 228 of 498

Page 229 of 498
Page 230 of 498
Page 231 of 498
Page 232 of 498
Page 233 of 498
Page 234 of 498
Page 235 of 498
Page 236 of 498
Page 237 of 498
Page 238 of 498
Page 239 of 498
Page 240 of 498
Page 241 of 498
Page 242 of 498
Page 243 of 498
Page 244 of 498
Page 245 of 498
Page 246 of 498
Page 247 of 498
Page 248 of 498
Page 249 of 498
Page 250 of 498
Page 251 of 498
Page 252 of 498
Page 253 of 498
Page 254 of 498
Page 255 of 498
Page 256 of 498
Page 257 of 498
Page 258 of 498
Page 259 of 498
Page 260 of 498
Page 261 of 498
Page 262 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 263 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 264 of 498

Page 265 of 498
Page 266 of 498
Page 267 of 498
Page 268 of 498
Page 269 of 498
Page 270 of 498
Page 271 of 498
Page 272 of 498
Page 273 of 498
Page 274 of 498
Page 275 of 498
Page 276 of 498
Page 277 of 498
Page 278 of 498
Page 279 of 498
Page 280 of 498
Page 281 of 498
Page 282 of 498
Page 283 of 498
Page 284 of 498
Page 285 of 498
Page 286 of 498
Page 287 of 498
Page 288 of 498
Page 289 of 498
Page 290 of 498
Page 291 of 498
Page 292 of 498
Page 293 of 498
Page 294 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 295 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 296 of 498

Page 297 of 498
Page 298 of 498
Page 299 of 498
Page 300 of 498
Page 301 of 498
Page 302 of 498
Page 303 of 498
Page 304 of 498
Page 305 of 498
Page 306 of 498
Page 307 of 498
Page 308 of 498
Page 309 of 498
Page 310 of 498
Page 311 of 498
Page 312 of 498
Page 313 of 498
Page 314 of 498
Page 315 of 498
Page 316 of 498
Page 317 of 498
Page 318 of 498
Page 319 of 498
Page 320 of 498
Page 321 of 498
Page 322 of 498
Page 323 of 498
Page 324 of 498
Page 325 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 326 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 327 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 328 of 498

Page 329 of 498
Page 330 of 498
Page 331 of 498
Page 332 of 498
Page 333 of 498
Page 334 of 498
Page 335 of 498
Page 336 of 498
Page 337 of 498
Page 338 of 498
Page 339 of 498
Page 340 of 498
Page 341 of 498
Page 342 of 498
Page 343 of 498
Page 344 of 498
Page 345 of 498
Page 346 of 498
Page 347 of 498
Page 348 of 498
Page 349 of 498
Page 350 of 498
Page 351 of 498
Page 352 of 498
Page 353 of 498
Page 354 of 498
Page 355 of 498
Page 356 of 498
Page 357 of 498
Page 358 of 498
Page 359 of 498
Page 360 of 498
Page 361 of 498
Page 362 of 498
Page 363 of 498
Page 364 of 498
Page 365 of 498
22/09/2021
Page 366 of 498

22/09/2021
Page 367 of 498

Page 368 of 498
Page 369 of 498
Page 370 of 498
Page 371 of 498
Page 372 of 498
Page 373 of 498
Page 374 of 498
Page 375 of 498
Page 376 of 498
Page 377 of 498
Page 378 of 498
Page 379 of 498
Page 380 of 498
Page 381 of 498
Page 382 of 498
Page 383 of 498
Page 384 of 498
Page 385 of 498
Page 386 of 498
Page 387 of 498
Page 388 of 498
Page 389 of 498
Page 390 of 498
Page 391 of 498
Page 392 of 498
Page 393 of 498
Page 394 of 498
Page 395 of 498
Page 396 of 498
Page 397 of 498
Page 398 of 498
Page 399 of 498
Page 400 of 498
Page 401 of 498
Page 402 of 498
Page 403 of 498
Page 404 of 498
APPENDIX E
PRESSUREMETER TESTS
Page 405 of 498

70 Sungei Kadut Loop, Singapore 729511, Co.Reg. No.2005089 Tel: 6369 7100, Fax: 6362 5848
PRESSUREMETER TEST - OYO ELASTMETER-2 / ELAST LOGGER-2
Client : SFA BH No : BH-1

Project : SI Works at Neo Tiew Rd (WA13) Test No : PMT1
Location : Neo Tiew Rd Depth : 14.00 -14.50 m
Tested By : Ah Chang Soil/Rock Type : Slightly Gravelly Silty SAND, O(D)
Date : 07-08-21 SPT (N) : 11 at 15.00m
Rubber Type : Elastmeter-2 Ø72mm (Soft) Nature of Fluid : Water
Control Cable : 100m Water Level : 1.20 m (after inserting probe)
Test Coefficient of Soil Mean

Earth Pressure at Rest Yield Pressure Modulus of Elasticity
Cycle Reaction Radius
Po (MPa) Py (MPa) Km (MPa/cm) Em (MPa) Rm (cm)
0.150 0.240 0.325 1.567 3.629
1st
Km = ∆P'/∆R = ( 0.240 - 0.150 ) / ( 3.768 - 3.490 ) = 0.325 MPa/cm
Em = (1+µ) x Km x Rm = (1 + 0.33) x 0.325 x 3.629 = 1.567 MPa
Po' (MPa) Py' (MPa) Kr (MPa/cm) Er (MPa) Rr (cm)
- - 0.420 2.100 3.759
2nd
Kr = ∆P'/∆R = ( 0.250 - 0.150 ) / ( 3.878 - 3.640 ) = 0.420 MPa/cm
Er = (1+µ) x Kr x Rr = (1 + 0.33) x 0.420 x 3.759 = 2.100 MPa
Creep Index, Ic [mm] Test Curve Creep Curve
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
0.40
0.30
Pressure, P' [MPa]
Py
0.20
∆P'
Po
∆R
0.10
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
Page 406 of 498

Formula for RG Calibration (Loading) Calibration Result
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d No P[Mpa] Ri[mm]

" a " Factor Value: 0.000244 1 0.00 -0.995
" b " Factor Value: -0.004793 2 0.05 -0.086
" c " Factor Value: 0.045227 3 0.10 1.175
" d " Factor Value: 0.051696 4 0.15 3.114
5 0.20 5.646
6 0.25 9.102
Formula for RG Calibration (Unloading) 7 0.20 6.577
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d 8 0.15 3.821
" a " Factor Value: 0.000245 9 0.10 1.805
" b " Factor Value: -0.004454 10 0.05 0.419
" c " Factor Value: 0.044122 11 0.00 -0.700
" d " Factor Value: 0.032909
Equipment Info. Serial No.

Elast Logger 2 300152
HQ probe 540439
Pressure gauge HYL202122176
Pressuremeter Calibration of Soft Rubber

0.30
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Radius [mm]
Page 407 of 498

OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 07-08-21
TIME : 11:03:12 AM
HOLE NO. : BH-1
DEPTH[m] : 14.00 - 14.50 m
TUBE : NXS
Pressure Inner Radius Radius Creep Index P'=P-RG RG

DATA NO. TIME
P[MPa] Ri[mm] R[mm] Ic[mm] [MPa] [MPa]
1 0:00:00 0.10 -0.979 34.12 0.092 0.00
2 0:00:30 0.13 -0.724 34.28 0.114 0.02
3 0:01:00 0.13 -0.724 34.28 0.114 0.02
4 0:01:30 0.13 -0.723 34.29 0.114 0.02
5 0:02:00 0.13 -0.723 34.29 0.001 0.114 0.02
6 0:02:30 0.17 -0.343 34.53 0.134 0.04
7 0:03:00 0.17 -0.331 34.54 0.134 0.04
8 0:03:30 0.17 -0.323 34.54 0.133 0.04
9 0:04:00 0.17 -0.316 34.55 0.027 0.133 0.04
10 0:04:30 0.21 0.162 34.86 0.151 0.06
11 0:05:00 0.21 0.195 34.88 0.150 0.06
12 0:05:30 0.21 0.208 34.89 0.149 0.06
13 0:06:00 0.21 0.226 34.90 0.064 0.148 0.06
14 0:06:30 0.25 0.810 35.29 0.165 0.09
15 0:07:00 0.25 0.845 35.32 0.163 0.09
16 0:07:30 0.25 0.870 35.33 0.162 0.09
17 0:08:00 0.25 0.893 35.35 0.083 0.162 0.09
18 0:08:30 0.29 1.509 35.77 0.180 0.11
19 0:09:00 0.29 1.563 35.81 0.178 0.11
20 0:09:30 0.29 1.593 35.83 0.177 0.11
21 0:10:00 0.29 1.615 35.84 0.106 0.177 0.11
22 0:10:30 0.33 2.246 36.28 0.198 0.13
23 0:11:00 0.33 2.281 36.29 0.197 0.13
24 0:11:30 0.33 2.317 36.33 0.196 0.13
25 0:12:00 0.33 2.376 36.37 0.130 0.195 0.14
26 0:12:30 0.37 3.049 36.86 0.218 0.15
27 0:13:00 0.37 3.112 36.90 0.217 0.15
28 0:13:30 0.37 3.182 36.95 0.215 0.15
29 0:14:00 0.37 3.199 36.96 0.150 0.215 0.16
30 0:14:30 0.41 3.985 37.54 0.239 0.17
31 0:15:00 0.41 4.040 37.58 0.238 0.17
32 0:15:30 0.41 4.126 37.65 0.236 0.17
33 0:16:00 0.41 4.168 37.68 0.183 0.235 0.17
34 0:16:30 0.45 5.112 38.38 0.260 0.19
35 0:17:00 0.45 5.250 38.48 0.258 0.19
36 0:17:30 0.45 5.357 38.56 0.256 0.19
37 0:18:00 0.45 5.373 38.57 0.261 0.256 0.19
38 0:18:30 0.41 5.088 38.34 0.220 0.19
39 0:19:00 0.41 5.089 38.34 0.220 0.19
40 0:19:30 0.41 5.089 38.34 0.220 0.19
Page 408 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
41 0:20:00 0.41 5.089 38.34 0.220 0.19
42 0:20:30 0.37 4.512 37.89 0.189 0.18
43 0:21:00 0.37 4.510 37.89 0.189 0.18
44 0:21:30 0.37 4.505 37.88 0.190 0.18
45 0:22:00 0.37 4.502 37.88 0.190 0.18
46 0:22:30 0.33 3.596 37.21 0.166 0.16
47 0:23:00 0.33 3.596 37.21 0.166 0.16
48 0:23:30 0.33 3.595 37.21 0.166 0.16
49 0:24:00 0.33 3.593 37.21 0.166 0.16
50 0:24:30 0.29 2.453 36.41 0.153 0.14
51 0:25:00 0.29 2.447 36.40 0.153 0.14
52 0:25:30 0.29 2.440 36.40 0.153 0.14
53 0:26:00 0.29 2.436 36.40 0.153 0.14
54 0:26:30 0.33 2.969 36.77 0.180 0.15
55 0:27:00 0.33 2.966 36.77 0.180 0.15
56 0:27:30 0.33 3.043 36.82 0.178 0.15
57 0:28:00 0.33 3.044 36.82 0.075 0.178 0.15
58 0:28:30 0.37 3.699 37.30 0.204 0.17
59 0:29:00 0.37 3.759 37.34 0.203 0.17
60 0:29:30 0.37 3.765 37.35 0.203 0.17
61 0:30:00 0.37 3.780 37.36 0.081 0.203 0.17
62 0:30:30 0.41 4.550 37.94 0.229 0.18
63 0:31:00 0.41 4.613 37.98 0.228 0.18
64 0:31:30 0.41 4.640 38.00 0.227 0.18
65 0:32:00 0.41 4.673 38.03 0.123 0.227 0.18
66 0:32:30 0.45 5.485 38.65 0.254 0.20
67 0:33:00 0.45 5.562 38.70 0.253 0.20
68 0:33:30 0.45 5.625 38.75 0.252 0.20
69 0:34:00 0.45 5.666 38.78 0.181 0.252 0.20
70 0:34:30 0.49 6.714 39.57 0.277 0.21
71 0:35:00 0.49 6.823 39.66 0.275 0.21
72 0:35:30 0.49 6.970 39.77 0.273 0.22
73 0:36:00 0.49 6.982 39.78 0.268 0.273 0.22
74 0:36:30 0.53 8.351 40.83 0.293 0.24
75 0:37:00 0.53 8.527 40.96 0.290 0.24
76 0:37:30 0.53 8.632 41.04 0.288 0.24
77 0:38:00 0.53 8.717 41.10 0.366 0.287 0.24
78 0:38:30 0.57 9.947 42.08 0.302 0.27
79 0:39:00 0.57 10.242 42.28 0.296 0.27
80 0:39:30 0.57 10.346 42.35 0.293 0.28
81 0:40:00 0.57 10.441 42.42 0.494 0.291 0.28
82 0:40:30 0.50 9.647 41.85 0.239 0.26
83 0:41:00 0.43 8.458 40.92 0.191 0.24
84 0:41:30 0.39 7.371 40.08 0.165 0.22
85 0:42:00 0.34 5.975 39.02 0.137 0.20
86 0:42:30 0.30 4.701 38.03 0.118 0.18
87 0:43:00 0.28 3.863 37.41 0.109 0.17
88 0:43:30 0.24 2.359 36.35 0.104 0.13
89 0:44:00 0.22 1.556 35.79 0.105 0.11
90 0:44:30 0.19 0.628 35.16 0.108 0.08
91 0:45:00 0.16 -0.154 34.65 0.111 0.04
92 0:45:30 0.14 -0.435 34.46 0.104 0.03
Page 409 of 498


Tested By : Ah Chang Soil/Rock Type : Silty SAND, O(D)
Date : 21-08-21 SPT (N) : 25 at 20.90m

0.440 2.480 22.742 107.664 3.559
1st
Km = ∆P'/∆R = ( 2.480 - 0.440 ) / ( 3.604 - 3.515 ) = 22.742 MPa/cm
Em = (1+µ) x Km x Rm = (1 + 0.33) x 22.742 x 3.559 = 107.664 MPa
- - 106.000 509.981 3.617
2nd
Kr = ∆P'/∆R = ( 2.570 - 0.980 ) / ( 3.625 - 3.610 ) = 106.000 MPa/cm
Er = (1+µ) x Kr x Rr = (1 + 0.33) x 106.000 x 3.617 = 509.981 MPa
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
5.00
4.00
Pressure, P' [MPa]
3.00
Py
2.00
∆P'
1.00
∆R
Po
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
33 35 37 39 41 43
Radius, R [mm]
Page 410 of 498


" a " Factor Value: 0.000420 1 0.00 -1.023
" b " Factor Value: -0.006807 2 0.05 -0.298
" c " Factor Value: 0.050805 3 0.10 0.772
" d " Factor Value: 0.062368 4 0.15 2.564
5 0.20 4.910
6 0.25 8.092
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d 8 0.15 3.574
" a " Factor Value: 0.000348 9 0.10 1.545
" b " Factor Value: -0.005119 10 0.05 0.162
" c " Factor Value: 0.044338 11 0.00 -0.851

HQ probe 540439

0.30
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
Page 411 of 498

OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 21-08-21
TIME : 2:10:08 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-3
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS

DATA NO. TIME
1 0:00:00 0.21 -0.936 34.52 0.198 0.01
2 0:00:30 0.30 -0.824 34.59 0.284 0.02
3 0:01:00 0.30 -0.780 34.62 0.282 0.02
4 0:01:30 0.30 -0.754 34.63 0.280 0.02
5 0:02:00 0.30 -0.738 34.65 0.086 0.279 0.02
6 0:02:30 0.40 -0.392 34.87 0.359 0.04
7 0:03:00 0.40 -0.360 34.89 0.357 0.04
8 0:03:30 0.40 -0.343 34.90 0.356 0.04
9 0:04:00 0.40 -0.338 34.91 0.054 0.356 0.04
10 0:04:30 0.50 0.011 35.14 0.437 0.06
11 0:05:00 0.50 0.020 35.14 0.437 0.06
12 0:05:30 0.50 0.021 35.14 0.437 0.06
13 0:06:00 0.50 0.029 35.15 0.018 0.436 0.06
14 0:06:30 0.60 0.089 35.18 0.533 0.07
15 0:07:00 0.60 0.093 35.19 0.533 0.07
16 0:07:30 0.60 0.100 35.19 0.533 0.07
17 0:08:00 0.60 0.103 35.19 0.014 0.532 0.07
18 0:08:30 0.70 0.154 35.22 0.630 0.07
19 0:09:00 0.70 0.165 35.23 0.629 0.07
20 0:09:30 0.70 0.173 35.23 0.629 0.07
21 0:10:00 0.70 0.173 35.24 0.019 0.629 0.07
22 0:10:30 0.80 0.221 35.26 0.727 0.07
23 0:11:00 0.80 0.221 35.26 0.727 0.07
24 0:11:30 0.80 0.232 35.27 0.726 0.07
25 0:12:00 0.80 0.236 35.27 0.015 0.726 0.07
26 0:12:30 0.90 0.278 35.30 0.824 0.08
27 0:13:00 0.90 0.279 35.30 0.824 0.08
28 0:13:30 0.90 0.280 35.30 0.824 0.08
29 0:14:00 0.90 0.299 35.31 0.021 0.823 0.08
30 0:14:30 1.00 0.343 35.34 0.921 0.08
31 0:15:00 1.00 0.352 35.34 0.921 0.08
32 0:15:30 1.00 0.359 35.35 0.920 0.08
33 0:16:00 1.00 0.360 35.35 0.017 0.920 0.08
34 0:16:30 1.10 0.409 35.38 1.018 0.08
35 0:17:00 1.10 0.417 35.38 1.018 0.08
36 0:17:30 1.10 0.423 35.39 1.017 0.08
37 0:18:00 1.10 0.423 35.39 0.014 1.017 0.08
38 0:18:30 1.20 0.458 35.41 1.116 0.08
39 0:19:00 1.20 0.470 35.41 1.115 0.08
40 0:19:30 1.20 0.471 35.42 1.115 0.08
Page 412 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
41 0:20:00 1.20 0.471 35.42 0.013 1.115 0.08
42 0:20:30 1.30 0.507 35.44 1.217 0.09
43 0:21:00 1.30 0.507 35.44 1.217 0.09
44 0:21:30 1.30 0.524 35.45 1.216 0.09
45 0:22:00 1.30 0.525 35.45 0.018 1.216 0.09
46 0:22:30 1.40 0.561 35.47 1.311 0.09
47 0:23:00 1.40 0.571 35.48 1.311 0.09
48 0:23:30 1.40 0.585 35.48 1.310 0.09
49 0:24:00 1.40 0.585 35.48 0.024 1.310 0.09
50 0:24:30 1.50 0.632 35.51 1.408 0.09
51 0:25:00 1.50 0.641 35.52 1.408 0.09
52 0:25:30 1.50 0.646 35.52 1.408 0.09
53 0:26:00 1.50 0.646 35.52 0.014 1.408 0.09
54 0:26:30 1.60 0.692 35.55 1.506 0.09
55 0:27:00 1.60 0.703 35.56 1.505 0.09
56 0:27:30 1.60 0.703 35.56 1.505 0.09
57 0:28:00 1.60 0.704 35.56 0.012 1.505 0.09
58 0:28:30 1.70 0.747 35.58 1.603 0.10
59 0:29:00 1.70 0.759 35.59 1.603 0.10
60 0:29:30 1.70 0.759 35.59 1.603 0.10
61 0:30:00 1.70 0.759 35.59 0.012 1.603 0.10
62 0:30:30 1.80 0.796 35.61 1.701 0.10
63 0:31:00 1.80 0.808 35.62 1.701 0.10
64 0:31:30 1.80 0.810 35.62 1.701 0.10
65 0:32:00 1.80 0.810 35.62 0.014 1.701 0.10
66 0:32:30 1.90 0.863 35.65 1.798 0.10
67 0:33:00 1.90 0.864 35.66 1.798 0.10
68 0:33:30 1.90 0.875 35.66 1.797 0.10
69 0:34:00 1.90 0.876 35.66 0.013 1.797 0.10
70 0:34:30 2.00 0.941 35.70 1.896 0.10
71 0:35:00 2.00 0.947 35.71 1.895 0.10
72 0:35:30 2.00 0.951 35.71 1.895 0.10
73 0:36:00 2.00 0.956 35.71 0.015 1.895 0.11
74 0:36:30 2.10 1.002 35.74 1.993 0.11
75 0:37:00 2.10 1.010 35.75 1.993 0.11
76 0:37:30 2.10 1.010 35.75 1.993 0.11
77 0:38:00 2.10 1.026 35.76 0.024 1.992 0.11
78 0:38:30 2.20 1.089 35.79 2.090 0.11
79 0:39:00 2.20 1.098 35.80 2.089 0.11
80 0:39:30 2.20 1.100 35.80 2.089 0.11
81 0:40:00 2.20 1.112 35.81 0.023 2.089 0.11
82 0:40:30 2.30 1.164 35.84 2.189 0.11
83 0:41:00 2.30 1.176 35.85 2.189 0.11
84 0:41:30 2.30 1.187 35.86 2.188 0.11
85 0:42:00 2.30 1.187 35.86 0.023 2.188 0.11
86 0:42:30 2.40 1.248 35.90 2.284 0.12
87 0:43:00 2.40 1.266 35.91 2.283 0.12
88 0:43:30 2.40 1.267 35.91 2.283 0.12
89 0:44:00 2.40 1.271 35.91 0.023 2.283 0.12
90 0:44:30 2.50 1.342 35.95 2.381 0.12
91 0:45:00 2.50 1.351 35.96 2.380 0.12
92 0:45:30 2.50 1.365 35.97 2.380 0.12
93 0:46:00 2.50 1.368 35.97 0.026 2.380 0.12
Page 413 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
94 0:46:30 2.60 1.453 36.03 2.481 0.12
95 0:47:00 2.60 1.466 36.03 2.480 0.12
96 0:47:30 2.60 1.477 36.04 2.480 0.12
97 0:48:00 2.60 1.478 36.04 0.025 2.480 0.12
98 0:48:30 2.70 1.570 36.10 2.573 0.13
99 0:49:00 2.70 1.586 36.11 2.573 0.13
100 0:49:30 2.70 1.598 36.12 2.572 0.13
101 0:50:00 2.70 1.618 36.13 0.048 2.571 0.13
102 0:50:30 2.50 1.618 36.14 2.371 0.13
103 0:51:00 2.50 1.618 36.14 2.371 0.13
104 0:51:30 2.50 1.618 36.14 2.371 0.13
105 0:52:00 2.50 1.618 36.14 2.371 0.13
106 0:52:30 2.30 1.617 36.14 2.172 0.13
107 0:53:00 2.30 1.617 36.14 2.172 0.13
108 0:53:30 2.30 1.617 36.14 2.172 0.13
109 0:54:00 2.30 1.617 36.14 2.172 0.13
110 0:54:30 2.10 1.611 36.14 1.972 0.13
111 0:55:00 2.10 1.611 36.14 1.972 0.13
112 0:55:30 2.10 1.612 36.14 1.972 0.13
113 0:56:00 2.10 1.611 36.14 1.972 0.13
114 0:56:30 1.90 1.605 36.14 1.772 0.13
115 0:57:00 1.90 1.605 36.14 1.772 0.13
116 0:57:30 1.90 1.605 36.14 1.772 0.13
117 0:58:00 1.90 1.605 36.14 1.772 0.13
118 0:58:30 1.70 1.577 36.13 1.573 0.13
119 0:59:00 1.70 1.577 36.13 1.573 0.13
120 0:59:30 1.70 1.577 36.13 1.573 0.13
121 1:00:00 1.70 1.576 36.13 1.573 0.13
122 1:00:30 1.50 1.561 36.12 1.373 0.13
123 1:01:00 1.50 1.561 36.12 1.373 0.13
124 1:01:30 1.50 1.561 36.12 1.373 0.13
125 1:02:00 1.50 1.561 36.12 1.373 0.13
126 1:02:30 1.30 1.539 36.11 1.174 0.13
127 1:03:00 1.30 1.539 36.11 1.174 0.13
128 1:03:30 1.30 1.539 36.11 1.174 0.13
129 1:04:00 1.30 1.538 36.11 1.174 0.13
130 1:04:30 1.10 1.509 36.10 0.975 0.12
131 1:05:00 1.10 1.509 36.10 0.975 0.12
132 1:05:30 1.10 1.509 36.10 0.975 0.12
133 1:06:00 1.10 1.509 36.10 0.975 0.12
134 1:06:30 1.30 1.510 36.09 1.175 0.13
135 1:07:00 1.30 1.509 36.09 1.175 0.12
136 1:07:30 1.30 1.509 36.09 1.175 0.12
137 1:08:00 1.30 1.509 36.09 1.175 0.12
138 1:08:30 1.50 1.509 36.09 1.375 0.12
139 1:09:00 1.50 1.509 36.09 1.375 0.12
140 1:09:30 1.50 1.509 36.09 1.375 0.12
141 1:10:00 1.50 1.509 36.09 1.375 0.12
142 1:10:30 1.70 1.515 36.10 1.573 0.13
143 1:11:00 1.70 1.515 36.10 1.573 0.13
144 1:11:30 1.70 1.515 36.10 1.573 0.13
145 1:12:00 1.70 1.515 36.10 1.573 0.13
146 1:12:30 1.90 1.532 36.10 1.774 0.13
Page 414 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
147 1:13:00 1.90 1.532 36.10 1.774 0.13
148 1:13:30 1.90 1.532 36.10 1.774 0.13
149 1:14:00 1.90 1.532 36.10 1.774 0.13
150 1:14:30 2.10 1.563 36.12 1.977 0.13
151 1:15:00 2.10 1.563 36.12 1.977 0.13
152 1:15:30 2.10 1.563 36.12 1.977 0.13
153 1:16:00 2.10 1.563 36.12 1.976 0.13
154 1:16:30 2.30 1.611 36.14 2.173 0.13
155 1:17:00 2.30 1.612 36.14 2.173 0.13
156 1:17:30 2.30 1.612 36.14 2.173 0.13
157 1:18:00 2.30 1.611 36.14 2.173 0.13
158 1:18:30 2.50 1.669 36.18 2.369 0.13
159 1:19:00 2.50 1.669 36.18 2.369 0.13
160 1:19:30 2.50 1.682 36.18 2.368 0.13
161 1:20:00 2.50 1.682 36.18 0.013 2.368 0.13
162 1:20:30 2.70 1.770 36.24 2.567 0.13
163 1:21:00 2.70 1.780 36.24 2.566 0.13
164 1:21:30 2.70 1.787 36.25 2.566 0.13
165 1:22:00 2.70 1.788 36.25 0.018 2.566 0.13
166 1:22:30 2.90 1.910 36.33 2.762 0.14
167 1:23:00 2.90 1.940 36.35 2.762 0.14
168 1:23:30 2.90 1.958 36.36 2.761 0.14
169 1:24:00 2.90 1.965 36.36 0.055 2.761 0.14
170 1:24:30 3.10 2.146 36.48 2.956 0.14
171 1:25:00 3.10 2.198 36.52 2.954 0.15
172 1:25:30 3.10 2.226 36.53 2.954 0.15
173 1:26:00 3.10 2.246 36.55 0.100 2.953 0.15
174 1:26:30 3.30 2.484 36.70 3.147 0.15
175 1:27:00 3.30 2.547 36.75 3.145 0.15
176 1:27:30 3.30 2.584 36.77 3.145 0.16
177 1:28:00 3.30 2.626 36.80 0.142 3.144 0.16
178 1:28:30 3.50 2.885 36.97 3.338 0.16
179 1:29:00 3.50 2.974 37.04 3.336 0.16
180 1:29:30 3.50 3.032 37.08 3.334 0.17
181 1:30:00 3.50 3.065 37.10 0.180 3.334 0.17
182 1:30:30 3.70 3.308 37.26 3.529 0.17
183 1:31:00 3.70 3.414 37.34 3.527 0.17
184 1:31:30 3.70 3.478 37.38 3.526 0.17
185 1:32:00 3.70 3.518 37.41 0.210 3.525 0.18
186 1:32:30 3.90 3.782 37.59 3.723 0.18
187 1:33:00 3.90 3.844 37.63 3.722 0.18
188 1:33:30 3.90 3.959 37.71 3.720 0.18
189 1:34:00 3.90 4.052 37.78 0.270 3.719 0.18
190 1:34:30 4.10 4.440 38.05 3.911 0.19
191 1:35:00 4.10 4.566 38.14 3.910 0.19
192 1:35:30 4.10 4.706 38.24 3.907 0.19
193 1:36:00 4.10 4.751 38.27 0.311 3.907 0.20
194 1:36:30 4.30 5.187 38.58 4.099 0.20
195 1:37:00 4.30 5.318 38.67 4.097 0.20
196 1:37:30 4.30 5.428 38.75 4.095 0.20
197 1:38:00 4.30 5.518 38.81 0.331 4.094 0.21
198 1:38:30 3.89 5.518 38.82 3.688 0.21
199 1:39:00 3.47 5.516 38.83 3.260 0.21
Page 415 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
200 1:39:30 3.13 5.486 38.82 2.921 0.21
201 1:40:00 2.71 5.442 38.80 2.506 0.20
202 1:40:30 2.34 5.375 38.76 2.132 0.20
203 1:41:00 1.92 5.245 38.67 1.716 0.20
204 1:41:30 1.50 5.103 38.58 1.295 0.20
205 1:42:00 1.13 4.895 38.44 0.931 0.20
206 1:42:30 0.74 4.530 38.19 0.545 0.19
207 1:43:00 0.53 4.135 37.92 0.340 0.19
208 1:43:30 0.35 3.231 37.30 0.181 0.17
209 1:44:00 0.30 2.643 36.90 0.147 0.16
210 1:44:30 0.29 2.139 36.55 0.148 0.14
211 1:45:00 0.29 1.774 36.31 0.155 0.13
Page 416 of 498


Tested By : Ah Chang Soil/Rock Type : Slightly Sandy SILT, O(D)
Date : 10-08-21 SPT (N) : 26 at 19.00m

0.500 1.430 4.735 23.437 3.721
1st
Km = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.430 - 0.500 ) / ( 3.820 - 3.623 ) = 4.735 MPa/cm
Em = (1+µ) x Km x Rm = (1 + 0.33) x 4.735 x 3.721 = 23.437 MPa
- - 11.872 60.727 3.846
2nd
Kr = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.520 - 0.740 ) / ( 3.879 - 3.813 ) = 11.872 MPa/cm
Er = (1+µ) x Kr x Rr = (1 + 0.33) x 11.872 x 3.846 = 60.727 MPa
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.50
2.00
Pressure, P' [MPa]
1.50
Py
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
Page 417 of 498


" a " Factor Value: 0.000267 1 0.00 -1.010
" b " Factor Value: -0.005025 2 0.05 -0.149
" c " Factor Value: 0.046112 3 0.10 1.124
" d " Factor Value: 0.053917 4 0.15 2.929
5 0.20 5.404
6 0.25 8.685
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d 8 0.15 3.587
" a " Factor Value: 0.000185 9 0.10 1.833
" b " Factor Value: -0.003556 10 0.05 0.406
" c " Factor Value: 0.041589 11 0.00 -0.815

HQ probe 540439

0.30
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Radius [mm]
Page 418 of 498

OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 10-08-21
TIME : 9:34:52 AM
HOLE NO. : BH-5
DEPTH[m] : 18.00 - 18.50 m
TUBE : NXS

DATA NO. TIME
1 0:00:00 0.16 -0.993 34.55 0.153 0.00
2 0:00:30 0.25 -0.861 34.66 0.240 0.01
3 0:01:00 0.30 -0.727 34.76 0.286 0.02
4 0:01:30 0.35 -0.503 34.94 0.323 0.03
5 0:02:00 0.35 -0.481 34.96 0.320 0.03
6 0:02:30 0.35 -0.380 35.03 0.316 0.04
7 0:03:00 0.35 -0.362 35.05 0.141 0.317 0.04
8 0:03:30 0.40 -0.043 35.31 0.348 0.05
9 0:04:00 0.40 0.024 35.36 0.345 0.06
10 0:04:30 0.40 0.081 35.41 0.342 0.06
11 0:05:00 0.40 0.163 35.47 0.206 0.339 0.06
12 0:05:30 0.50 0.615 35.82 0.420 0.08
13 0:06:00 0.50 0.646 35.84 0.418 0.08
14 0:06:30 0.50 0.689 35.87 0.417 0.08
15 0:07:00 0.50 0.748 35.92 0.133 0.414 0.09
16 0:07:30 0.60 1.119 36.20 0.500 0.10
17 0:08:00 0.60 1.123 36.20 0.500 0.10
18 0:08:30 0.60 1.134 36.21 0.500 0.10
19 0:09:00 0.60 1.163 36.23 0.044 0.499 0.10
20 0:09:30 0.70 1.357 36.38 0.592 0.11
21 0:10:00 0.70 1.376 36.40 0.593 0.11
22 0:10:30 0.70 1.393 36.41 0.594 0.11
23 0:11:00 0.70 1.410 36.43 0.053 0.593 0.11
24 0:11:30 0.80 1.590 36.57 0.685 0.12
25 0:12:00 0.80 1.611 36.59 0.688 0.12
26 0:12:30 0.80 1.629 36.60 0.686 0.12
27 0:13:00 0.80 1.640 36.61 0.050 0.686 0.12
28 0:13:30 0.90 1.812 36.75 0.779 0.12
29 0:14:00 0.90 1.831 36.77 0.779 0.12
30 0:14:30 0.90 1.852 36.79 0.780 0.12
31 0:15:00 0.90 1.859 36.79 0.047 0.778 0.12
32 0:15:30 1.00 2.028 36.92 0.874 0.13
33 0:16:00 1.00 2.051 36.94 0.873 0.13
34 0:16:30 1.00 2.053 36.94 0.871 0.13
35 0:17:00 1.00 2.070 36.96 0.042 0.871 0.13
36 0:17:30 1.10 2.235 37.08 0.967 0.13
37 0:18:00 1.10 2.248 37.10 0.966 0.14
38 0:18:30 1.10 2.266 37.11 0.966 0.14
39 0:19:00 1.10 2.276 37.12 0.041 0.968 0.14
40 0:19:30 1.20 2.467 37.27 1.061 0.14
Page 419 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
41 0:20:00 1.20 2.484 37.28 1.060 0.14
42 0:20:30 1.20 2.499 37.30 1.060 0.14
43 0:21:00 1.20 2.512 37.31 0.045 1.060 0.14
44 0:21:30 1.30 2.711 37.47 1.154 0.15
45 0:22:00 1.30 2.734 37.49 1.153 0.15
46 0:22:30 1.30 2.752 37.50 1.153 0.15
47 0:23:00 1.30 2.756 37.50 0.045 1.153 0.15
48 0:23:30 1.40 2.973 37.68 1.246 0.15
49 0:24:00 1.40 2.997 37.70 1.246 0.15
50 0:24:30 1.40 3.012 37.71 1.245 0.15
51 0:25:00 1.40 3.022 37.72 0.049 1.245 0.15
52 0:25:30 1.50 3.234 37.90 1.340 0.16
53 0:26:00 1.50 3.248 37.91 1.340 0.16
54 0:26:30 1.50 3.271 37.93 1.340 0.16
55 0:27:00 1.50 3.289 37.94 0.055 1.339 0.16
56 0:27:30 1.60 3.546 38.15 1.434 0.17
57 0:28:00 1.60 3.559 38.16 1.434 0.17
58 0:28:30 1.60 3.574 38.17 1.433 0.17
59 0:29:00 1.60 3.605 38.20 0.059 1.433 0.17
60 0:29:30 1.70 3.904 38.44 1.527 0.17
61 0:30:00 1.70 3.937 38.47 1.526 0.17
62 0:30:30 1.70 3.953 38.48 1.526 0.17
63 0:31:00 1.70 3.981 38.50 0.077 1.525 0.17
64 0:31:30 1.60 3.980 38.50 1.427 0.17
65 0:32:00 1.60 3.980 38.50 1.426 0.17
66 0:32:30 1.60 3.980 38.50 1.426 0.17
67 0:33:00 1.60 3.979 38.50 1.427 0.17
68 0:33:30 1.50 3.964 38.49 1.329 0.17
69 0:34:00 1.50 3.964 38.49 1.328 0.17
70 0:34:30 1.50 3.964 38.49 1.329 0.17
71 0:35:00 1.50 3.963 38.49 1.329 0.17
72 0:35:30 1.40 3.941 38.47 1.227 0.17
73 0:36:00 1.40 3.941 38.47 1.227 0.17
74 0:36:30 1.40 3.941 38.47 1.229 0.17
75 0:37:00 1.40 3.940 38.47 1.229 0.17
76 0:37:30 1.30 3.900 38.44 1.128 0.17
77 0:38:00 1.30 3.898 38.44 1.130 0.17
78 0:38:30 1.30 3.898 38.44 1.130 0.17
79 0:39:00 1.30 3.898 38.44 1.129 0.17
80 0:39:30 1.20 3.835 38.38 1.032 0.17
81 0:40:00 1.20 3.835 38.38 1.032 0.17
82 0:40:30 1.20 3.835 38.38 1.031 0.17
83 0:41:00 1.20 3.833 38.38 1.031 0.17
84 0:41:30 1.10 3.758 38.32 0.932 0.17
85 0:42:00 1.10 3.758 38.32 0.932 0.17
86 0:42:30 1.10 3.757 38.32 0.931 0.17
87 0:43:00 1.10 3.756 38.32 0.932 0.17
88 0:43:30 1.00 3.663 38.24 0.835 0.17
89 0:44:00 1.00 3.663 38.24 0.833 0.17
90 0:44:30 1.00 3.662 38.24 0.833 0.17
91 0:45:00 1.00 3.659 38.24 0.835 0.17
92 0:45:30 0.90 3.528 38.13 0.735 0.17
93 0:46:00 0.90 3.528 38.13 0.734 0.17
Page 420 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
94 0:46:30 0.90 3.527 38.13 0.736 0.17
95 0:47:00 0.90 3.527 38.13 0.738 0.17
96 0:47:30 1.00 3.569 38.17 0.835 0.17
97 0:48:00 1.00 3.569 38.17 0.835 0.17
98 0:48:30 1.00 3.569 38.17 0.837 0.17
99 0:49:00 1.00 3.569 38.17 0.836 0.17
100 0:49:30 1.10 3.626 38.22 0.934 0.17
101 0:50:00 1.10 3.626 38.22 0.936 0.17
102 0:50:30 1.10 3.627 38.22 0.935 0.17
103 0:51:00 1.10 3.627 38.22 0.001 0.933 0.17
104 0:51:30 1.20 3.697 38.28 1.035 0.17
105 0:52:00 1.20 3.698 38.28 1.035 0.17
106 0:52:30 1.20 3.698 38.28 1.034 0.17
107 0:53:00 1.20 3.699 38.28 0.002 1.034 0.17
108 0:53:30 1.30 3.777 38.34 1.129 0.17
109 0:54:00 1.30 3.780 38.35 1.130 0.17
110 0:54:30 1.30 3.781 38.35 1.130 0.17
111 0:55:00 1.30 3.783 38.35 0.006 1.131 0.17
112 0:55:30 1.40 3.869 38.42 1.229 0.17
113 0:56:00 1.40 3.871 38.42 1.227 0.17
114 0:56:30 1.40 3.873 38.42 1.230 0.17
115 0:57:00 1.40 3.880 38.43 0.011 1.228 0.17
116 0:57:30 1.50 3.980 38.51 1.329 0.17
117 0:58:00 1.50 3.984 38.51 1.328 0.17
118 0:58:30 1.50 3.988 38.52 1.328 0.17
119 0:59:00 1.50 4.002 38.53 0.022 1.329 0.18
120 0:59:30 1.60 4.098 38.61 1.424 0.18
121 1:00:00 1.60 4.110 38.62 1.424 0.18
122 1:00:30 1.60 4.124 38.63 1.425 0.18
123 1:01:00 1.60 4.133 38.64 0.035 1.425 0.18
124 1:01:30 1.70 4.260 38.74 1.521 0.18
125 1:02:00 1.70 4.269 38.75 1.520 0.18
126 1:02:30 1.70 4.288 38.76 1.522 0.18
127 1:03:00 1.70 4.316 38.79 0.056 1.519 0.18
128 1:03:30 1.80 4.529 38.96 1.618 0.18
129 1:04:00 1.80 4.551 38.98 1.618 0.18
130 1:04:30 1.80 4.572 39.00 1.619 0.19
131 1:05:00 1.80 4.617 39.04 0.088 1.617 0.19
132 1:05:30 1.90 4.876 39.25 1.710 0.19
133 1:06:00 1.90 4.930 39.30 1.711 0.19
134 1:06:30 1.90 4.958 39.32 1.709 0.19
135 1:07:00 1.90 4.986 39.34 0.110 1.708 0.19
136 1:07:30 2.00 5.269 39.58 1.804 0.20
137 1:08:00 2.00 5.337 39.64 1.804 0.20
138 1:08:30 2.00 5.368 39.66 1.805 0.20
139 1:09:00 2.00 5.398 39.69 0.129 1.804 0.20
140 1:09:30 2.10 5.721 39.96 1.899 0.20
141 1:10:00 2.10 5.786 40.01 1.897 0.20
142 1:10:30 2.10 5.821 40.04 1.896 0.20
143 1:11:00 2.10 5.873 40.09 0.152 1.895 0.21
144 1:11:30 2.20 6.252 40.41 1.990 0.21
145 1:12:00 2.20 6.311 40.46 1.990 0.21
146 1:12:30 2.20 6.363 40.50 1.988 0.21
Page 421 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
147 1:13:00 2.20 6.413 40.54 0.161 1.990 0.21
148 1:13:30 2.30 6.876 40.93 2.080 0.22
149 1:14:00 2.30 6.931 40.98 2.080 0.22
150 1:14:30 2.30 7.013 41.05 2.081 0.22
151 1:15:00 2.30 7.067 41.09 0.191 2.080 0.22
152 1:15:30 2.40 7.580 41.53 2.171 0.23
153 1:16:00 2.40 7.727 41.66 2.167 0.23
154 1:16:30 2.40 7.766 41.69 2.170 0.23
155 1:17:00 2.40 7.808 41.72 0.228 2.169 0.23
156 1:17:30 2.50 8.390 42.22 2.258 0.24
157 1:18:00 2.50 8.441 42.27 2.256 0.25
158 1:18:30 2.50 8.491 42.31 2.256 0.25
159 1:19:00 2.50 8.655 42.45 0.265 2.253 0.25
160 1:19:30 2.00 8.433 42.27 1.757 0.25
161 1:20:00 1.61 8.062 41.93 1.373 0.24
162 1:20:30 1.22 7.513 41.45 0.993 0.23
163 1:21:00 0.90 6.945 40.96 0.680 0.22
164 1:21:30 0.60 6.123 40.28 0.387 0.21
165 1:22:00 0.45 4.325 38.99 0.269 0.18
166 1:22:30 0.29 1.166 36.27 0.189 0.10
167 1:23:00 0.23 0.092 35.41 0.172 0.06
168 1:23:30 0.20 -0.257 35.14 0.159 0.04
Page 422 of 498


Tested By : Ah Chang Soil/Rock Type : Silty SAND & Sandy SILT, O(D)
Date : 18-08-21 SPT (N) : 24 at 20.90m & 15 at 23.00m

0.450 1.100 3.512 17.844 3.821
1st
Km = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.100 - 0.450 ) / ( 3.913 - 3.728 ) = 3.512 MPa/cm
Em = (1+µ) x Km x Rm = (1 + 0.33) x 3.512 x 3.821 = 17.844 MPa
- - 13.911 73.261 3.960
2nd
Kr = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.190 - 0.500 ) / ( 3.984 - 3.935 ) = 13.911 MPa/cm
Er = (1+µ) x Kr x Rr = (1 + 0.33) x 13.911 x 3.960 = 73.261 MPa
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.00
1.50
Pressure, P' [MPa]
Py
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
Page 423 of 498


" a " Factor Value: 0.000302 1 0.00 -1.211
" b " Factor Value: -0.005484 2 0.05 -0.299
" c " Factor Value: 0.046796 3 0.10 0.781
" d " Factor Value: 0.065197 4 0.15 2.441
5 0.20 4.982
6 0.25 8.375
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d 8 0.15 3.586
" a " Factor Value: 0.000339 9 0.10 1.386
" b " Factor Value: -0.005052 10 0.05 0.085
" c " Factor Value: 0.042756 11 0.00 -0.994

HQ probe 540439

0.30
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
Page 424 of 498

OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 18-08-21
TIME : 3:54:41 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-6
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS

DATA NO. TIME
1 0:00:00 0.19 -1.158 34.57 0.191 0.00
2 0:00:30 0.20 -1.155 34.57 0.197 0.00
3 0:01:00 0.30 -0.701 34.88 0.273 0.03
4 0:01:30 0.30 -0.483 35.03 0.262 0.04
5 0:02:00 0.30 -0.414 35.08 0.258 0.04
6 0:02:30 0.30 -0.331 35.14 0.370 0.254 0.05
7 0:03:00 0.40 0.247 35.63 0.324 0.08
8 0:03:30 0.40 0.404 35.75 0.317 0.08
9 0:04:00 0.40 0.508 35.82 0.312 0.09
10 0:04:30 0.40 0.658 35.92 0.411 0.306 0.09
11 0:05:00 0.50 1.411 36.51 0.379 0.12
12 0:05:30 0.50 1.734 36.76 0.369 0.13
13 0:06:00 0.50 1.761 36.78 0.368 0.13
14 0:06:30 0.50 1.792 36.80 0.381 0.367 0.13
15 0:07:00 0.60 2.269 37.15 0.453 0.15
16 0:07:30 0.60 2.352 37.21 0.451 0.15
17 0:08:00 0.60 2.399 37.25 0.450 0.15
18 0:08:30 0.60 2.438 37.28 0.169 0.449 0.15
19 0:09:00 0.70 2.662 37.46 0.543 0.16
20 0:09:30 0.70 2.754 37.53 0.541 0.16
21 0:10:00 0.70 2.797 37.57 0.540 0.16
22 0:10:30 0.70 2.844 37.61 0.182 0.539 0.16
23 0:11:00 0.80 3.002 37.72 0.636 0.16
24 0:11:30 0.80 3.051 37.76 0.634 0.17
25 0:12:00 0.80 3.133 37.82 0.633 0.17
26 0:12:30 0.80 3.168 37.85 0.166 0.632 0.17
27 0:13:00 0.90 3.335 37.97 0.729 0.17
28 0:13:30 0.90 3.377 38.01 0.728 0.17
29 0:14:00 0.90 3.434 38.04 0.727 0.17
30 0:14:30 0.90 3.467 38.08 0.132 0.726 0.17
31 0:15:00 1.00 3.645 38.21 0.822 0.18
32 0:15:30 1.00 3.699 38.25 0.821 0.18
33 0:16:00 1.00 3.756 38.30 0.820 0.18
34 0:16:30 1.00 3.779 38.32 0.134 0.820 0.18
35 0:17:00 1.10 3.969 38.46 0.917 0.18
36 0:17:30 1.10 4.032 38.51 0.915 0.18
37 0:18:00 1.10 4.075 38.55 0.915 0.19
38 0:18:30 1.10 4.094 38.56 0.125 0.914 0.19
39 0:19:00 1.20 4.307 38.72 1.011 0.19
40 0:19:30 1.20 4.364 38.77 1.010 0.19
Page 425 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
41 0:20:00 1.20 4.403 38.80 1.009 0.19
42 0:20:30 1.20 4.448 38.84 0.141 1.009 0.19
43 0:21:00 1.30 4.667 39.00 1.105 0.19
44 0:21:30 1.30 4.755 39.07 1.104 0.20
45 0:22:00 1.30 4.807 39.12 1.103 0.20
46 0:22:30 1.30 4.821 39.13 0.154 1.103 0.20
47 0:23:00 1.40 5.091 39.33 1.199 0.20
48 0:23:30 1.40 5.256 39.46 1.196 0.20
49 0:24:00 1.40 5.308 39.50 1.196 0.20
50 0:24:30 1.40 5.308 39.50 0.217 1.196 0.20
51 0:25:00 1.30 5.328 39.51 1.095 0.20
52 0:25:30 1.30 5.328 39.51 1.095 0.20
53 0:26:00 1.30 5.328 39.51 1.095 0.20
54 0:26:30 1.30 5.328 39.51 1.095 0.20
55 0:27:00 1.20 5.327 39.51 0.995 0.20
56 0:27:30 1.20 5.328 39.51 0.995 0.20
57 0:28:00 1.20 5.328 39.51 0.995 0.20
58 0:28:30 1.20 5.328 39.51 0.995 0.20
59 0:29:00 1.10 5.316 39.51 0.896 0.20
60 0:29:30 1.10 5.311 39.51 0.896 0.20
61 0:30:00 1.10 5.311 39.51 0.896 0.20
62 0:30:30 1.10 5.311 39.51 0.896 0.20
63 0:31:00 1.00 5.283 39.49 0.796 0.20
64 0:31:30 1.00 5.281 39.49 0.796 0.20
65 0:32:00 1.00 5.277 39.48 0.796 0.20
66 0:32:30 1.00 5.277 39.48 0.796 0.20
67 0:33:00 0.90 5.229 39.46 0.697 0.20
68 0:33:30 0.90 5.224 39.45 0.697 0.20
69 0:34:00 0.90 5.224 39.45 0.697 0.20
70 0:34:30 0.90 5.222 39.45 0.697 0.20
71 0:35:00 0.80 5.164 39.41 0.598 0.20
72 0:35:30 0.80 5.161 39.41 0.598 0.20
73 0:36:00 0.80 5.156 39.41 0.598 0.20
74 0:36:30 0.80 5.155 39.41 0.598 0.20
75 0:37:00 0.70 5.085 39.36 0.499 0.20
76 0:37:30 0.70 5.080 39.35 0.499 0.20
77 0:38:00 0.70 5.077 39.35 0.499 0.20
78 0:38:30 0.70 5.071 39.35 0.499 0.20
79 0:39:00 0.80 5.077 39.35 0.602 0.20
80 0:39:30 0.80 5.076 39.35 0.602 0.20
81 0:40:00 0.80 5.077 39.35 0.602 0.20
82 0:40:30 0.80 5.078 39.35 0.001 0.602 0.20
83 0:41:00 0.90 5.127 39.39 0.698 0.20
84 0:41:30 0.90 5.128 39.39 0.698 0.20
85 0:42:00 0.90 5.130 39.39 0.698 0.20
86 0:42:30 0.90 5.141 39.40 0.014 0.698 0.20
87 0:43:00 1.00 5.176 39.42 0.798 0.20
88 0:43:30 1.00 5.184 39.43 0.797 0.20
89 0:44:00 1.00 5.187 39.43 0.797 0.20
90 0:44:30 1.00 5.188 39.43 0.012 0.797 0.20
91 0:45:00 1.10 5.242 39.47 0.897 0.20
92 0:45:30 1.10 5.250 39.48 0.897 0.20
93 0:46:00 1.10 5.251 39.48 0.897 0.20
Page 426 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
94 0:46:30 1.10 5.260 39.49 0.018 0.896 0.20
95 0:47:00 1.20 5.327 39.54 0.995 0.20
96 0:47:30 1.20 5.338 39.55 0.995 0.20
97 0:48:00 1.20 5.363 39.56 0.995 0.21
98 0:48:30 1.20 5.364 39.57 0.037 0.995 0.21
99 0:49:00 1.30 5.440 39.62 1.094 0.21
100 0:49:30 1.30 5.470 39.65 1.093 0.21
101 0:50:00 1.30 5.486 39.66 1.093 0.21
102 0:50:30 1.30 5.504 39.67 0.064 1.093 0.21
103 0:51:00 1.40 5.614 39.76 1.191 0.21
104 0:51:30 1.40 5.665 39.80 1.191 0.21
105 0:52:00 1.40 5.705 39.82 1.190 0.21
106 0:52:30 1.40 5.732 39.84 0.118 1.190 0.21
107 0:53:00 1.50 5.890 39.97 1.288 0.21
108 0:53:30 1.50 5.967 40.03 1.287 0.21
109 0:54:00 1.50 6.029 40.08 1.286 0.21
110 0:54:30 1.50 6.078 40.12 0.188 1.285 0.21
111 0:55:00 1.60 6.305 40.28 1.382 0.22
112 0:55:30 1.60 6.397 40.35 1.381 0.22
113 0:56:00 1.60 6.474 40.41 1.380 0.22
114 0:56:30 1.60 6.538 40.46 0.233 1.379 0.22
115 0:57:00 1.70 6.820 40.66 1.475 0.23
116 0:57:30 1.70 6.939 40.75 1.473 0.23
117 0:58:00 1.70 7.037 40.82 1.472 0.23
118 0:58:30 1.70 7.137 40.89 0.317 1.470 0.23
119 0:59:00 1.80 7.516 41.16 1.565 0.24
120 0:59:30 1.80 7.662 41.27 1.562 0.24
121 1:00:00 1.80 7.776 41.35 1.560 0.24
122 1:00:30 1.80 7.910 41.45 0.394 1.558 0.24
123 1:01:00 1.90 8.315 41.73 1.651 0.25
124 1:01:30 1.90 8.496 41.88 1.648 0.25
125 1:02:00 1.90 8.620 41.97 1.645 0.25
126 1:02:30 1.90 8.779 42.08 0.464 1.642 0.26
127 1:03:00 1.71 8.861 42.10 1.450 0.26
128 1:03:30 1.32 8.610 41.86 1.063 0.25
129 1:04:00 0.91 8.038 41.38 0.662 0.24
130 1:04:30 0.61 6.916 40.53 0.386 0.23
131 1:05:00 0.41 3.113 38.20 0.241 0.17
132 1:05:30 0.31 0.995 36.75 0.202 0.11
133 1:06:00 0.27 0.360 36.21 0.188 0.08
134 1:06:30 0.24 -0.028 35.80 0.177 0.06
135 1:07:00 0.22 -0.426 35.40 0.173 0.04
Page 427 of 498


Tested By : Ah Chang Soil/Rock Type : Slightly Silty SAND, O(D)
Date : 14-08-21 SPT (N) : 13 at 20.90m & 38 at 23.00m

0.430 1.100 4.919 24.845 3.798
1st
Km = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.100 - 0.430 ) / ( 3.866 - 3.729 ) = 4.919 MPa/cm
Em = (1+µ) x Km x Rm = (1 + 0.33) x 4.919 x 3.798 = 24.845 MPa
- - 19.504 100.410 3.871
2nd
Kr = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.100 - 0.550 ) / ( 3.885 - 3.857 ) = 19.504 MPa/cm
Er = (1+µ) x Kr x Rr = (1 + 0.33) x 19.504 x 3.871 = 100.410 MPa
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.00
1.50
Pressure, P' [MPa]
Py
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
Page 428 of 498


" a " Factor Value: 0.000418 1 0.00 -1.132
" b " Factor Value: -0.006551 2 0.05 -0.415
" c " Factor Value: 0.048216 3 0.10 0.727
" d " Factor Value: 0.066830 4 0.15 2.565
5 0.20 5.082
6 0.25 8.123
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d 8 0.15 3.665
" a " Factor Value: 0.000330 9 0.10 1.606
" b " Factor Value: -0.004749 10 0.05 0.084
" c " Factor Value: 0.042230 11 0.00 -0.910

HQ probe 540439

0.30
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
Page 429 of 498

OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 14-08-21
TIME : 4:02:19 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-8
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS

DATA NO. TIME
1 0:00:00 0.16 -1.142 34.42 0.153 0.00
2 0:00:30 0.19 -1.102 34.44 0.185 0.01
3 0:01:00 0.25 -0.677 34.71 0.219 0.03
4 0:01:30 0.25 -0.672 34.72 0.219 0.03
5 0:02:00 0.25 -0.671 34.72 0.219 0.03
6 0:02:30 0.25 -0.671 34.72 0.006 0.219 0.03
7 0:03:00 0.30 -0.166 35.05 0.241 0.06
8 0:03:30 0.30 -0.152 35.05 0.241 0.06
9 0:04:00 0.30 -0.138 35.06 0.240 0.06
10 0:04:30 0.30 -0.129 35.07 0.037 0.239 0.06
11 0:05:00 0.35 0.454 35.45 0.263 0.09
12 0:05:30 0.35 0.492 35.48 0.261 0.09
13 0:06:00 0.35 0.517 35.50 0.260 0.09
14 0:06:30 0.35 0.525 35.50 0.071 0.260 0.09
15 0:07:00 0.40 0.998 35.82 0.291 0.11
16 0:07:30 0.40 1.111 35.89 0.287 0.11
17 0:08:00 0.40 1.159 35.93 0.285 0.11
18 0:08:30 0.40 1.190 35.95 0.192 0.284 0.12
19 0:09:00 0.45 1.539 36.18 0.323 0.13
20 0:09:30 0.45 1.648 36.26 0.320 0.13
21 0:10:00 0.45 1.708 36.30 0.318 0.13
22 0:10:30 0.45 1.766 36.34 0.227 0.316 0.13
23 0:11:00 0.50 2.069 36.54 0.358 0.14
24 0:11:30 0.50 2.163 36.61 0.355 0.14
25 0:12:00 0.50 2.232 36.65 0.354 0.15
26 0:12:30 0.50 2.292 36.70 0.223 0.352 0.15
27 0:13:00 0.55 2.580 36.89 0.395 0.15
28 0:13:30 0.55 2.671 36.96 0.393 0.16
29 0:14:00 0.55 2.735 37.00 0.392 0.16
30 0:14:30 0.55 2.781 37.03 0.201 0.391 0.16
31 0:15:00 0.60 3.012 37.19 0.436 0.16
32 0:15:30 0.60 3.076 37.24 0.435 0.17
33 0:16:00 0.60 3.120 37.27 0.434 0.17
34 0:16:30 0.60 3.160 37.29 0.148 0.433 0.17
35 0:17:00 0.65 3.259 37.36 0.481 0.17
36 0:17:30 0.65 3.324 37.41 0.480 0.17
37 0:18:00 0.65 3.355 37.43 0.479 0.17
38 0:18:30 0.65 3.381 37.45 0.122 0.479 0.17
39 0:19:00 0.70 3.470 37.51 0.527 0.17
40 0:19:30 0.70 3.504 37.54 0.527 0.17
Page 430 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
41 0:20:00 0.70 3.544 37.56 0.526 0.17
42 0:20:30 0.70 3.577 37.59 0.107 0.525 0.17
43 0:21:00 0.75 3.641 37.63 0.574 0.18
44 0:21:30 0.75 3.685 37.66 0.574 0.18
45 0:22:00 0.75 3.715 37.68 0.573 0.18
46 0:22:30 0.75 3.746 37.71 0.105 0.572 0.18
47 0:23:00 0.80 3.803 37.75 0.622 0.18
48 0:23:30 0.80 3.839 37.77 0.621 0.18
49 0:24:00 0.80 3.870 37.79 0.620 0.18
50 0:24:30 0.80 3.891 37.81 0.088 0.620 0.18
51 0:25:00 0.85 3.952 37.85 0.669 0.18
52 0:25:30 0.85 3.985 37.87 0.669 0.18
53 0:26:00 0.85 4.004 37.89 0.668 0.18
54 0:26:30 0.85 4.031 37.91 0.079 0.668 0.18
55 0:27:00 0.90 4.089 37.95 0.717 0.18
56 0:27:30 0.90 4.118 37.97 0.716 0.18
57 0:28:00 0.90 4.149 37.99 0.716 0.18
58 0:28:30 0.90 4.168 38.00 0.079 0.716 0.18
59 0:29:00 0.95 4.215 38.04 0.765 0.19
60 0:29:30 0.95 4.240 38.06 0.765 0.19
61 0:30:00 0.95 4.261 38.07 0.764 0.19
62 0:30:30 0.95 4.282 38.09 0.067 0.764 0.19
63 0:31:00 1.00 4.327 38.12 0.813 0.19
64 0:31:30 1.00 4.348 38.13 0.813 0.19
65 0:32:00 1.00 4.375 38.15 0.813 0.19
66 0:32:30 1.00 4.397 38.17 0.070 0.812 0.19
67 0:33:00 1.05 4.453 38.21 0.861 0.19
68 0:33:30 1.05 4.474 38.22 0.861 0.19
69 0:34:00 1.05 4.494 38.24 0.861 0.19
70 0:34:30 1.05 4.514 38.25 0.061 0.861 0.19
71 0:35:00 1.10 4.556 38.28 0.910 0.19
72 0:35:30 1.10 4.583 38.30 0.910 0.19
73 0:36:00 1.10 4.605 38.31 0.909 0.19
74 0:36:30 1.10 4.620 38.33 0.064 0.909 0.19
75 0:37:00 1.15 4.664 38.36 0.958 0.19
76 0:37:30 1.15 4.689 38.37 0.958 0.19
77 0:38:00 1.15 4.710 38.39 0.958 0.19
78 0:38:30 1.15 4.726 38.40 0.062 0.957 0.19
79 0:39:00 1.20 4.773 38.43 1.007 0.19
80 0:39:30 1.20 4.805 38.46 1.006 0.19
81 0:40:00 1.20 4.823 38.47 1.006 0.19
82 0:40:30 1.20 4.838 38.48 0.065 1.006 0.19
83 0:41:00 1.25 4.895 38.52 1.055 0.19
84 0:41:30 1.25 4.920 38.54 1.055 0.20
85 0:42:00 1.25 4.945 38.56 1.054 0.20
86 0:42:30 1.25 4.960 38.57 0.065 1.054 0.20
87 0:43:00 1.30 5.023 38.61 1.103 0.20
88 0:43:30 1.30 5.043 38.62 1.103 0.20
89 0:44:00 1.30 5.070 38.64 1.103 0.20
90 0:44:30 1.30 5.090 38.66 0.067 1.102 0.20
91 0:45:00 1.25 5.107 38.67 1.052 0.20
92 0:45:30 1.25 5.110 38.67 1.052 0.20
93 0:46:00 1.25 5.110 38.67 1.052 0.20
Page 431 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
94 0:46:30 1.25 5.110 38.67 1.052 0.20
95 0:47:00 1.20 5.119 38.68 1.002 0.20
96 0:47:30 1.20 5.119 38.68 1.002 0.20
97 0:48:00 1.20 5.125 38.68 1.002 0.20
98 0:48:30 1.20 5.125 38.68 1.002 0.20
99 0:49:00 1.15 5.128 38.69 0.952 0.20
100 0:49:30 1.15 5.128 38.69 0.952 0.20
101 0:50:00 1.15 5.128 38.69 0.952 0.20
102 0:50:30 1.15 5.128 38.69 0.952 0.20
103 0:51:00 1.10 5.126 38.69 0.902 0.20
104 0:51:30 1.10 5.126 38.69 0.902 0.20
105 0:52:00 1.10 5.126 38.69 0.902 0.20
106 0:52:30 1.10 5.126 38.69 0.902 0.20
107 0:53:00 1.05 5.120 38.68 0.852 0.20
108 0:53:30 1.05 5.120 38.68 0.852 0.20
109 0:54:00 1.05 5.120 38.68 0.852 0.20
110 0:54:30 1.05 5.120 38.68 0.852 0.20
111 0:55:00 1.00 5.113 38.68 0.802 0.20
112 0:55:30 1.00 5.112 38.68 0.802 0.20
113 0:56:00 1.00 5.112 38.68 0.802 0.20
114 0:56:30 1.00 5.112 38.68 0.802 0.20
115 0:57:00 0.95 5.100 38.67 0.752 0.20
116 0:57:30 0.95 5.098 38.67 0.752 0.20
117 0:58:00 0.95 5.098 38.67 0.752 0.20
118 0:58:30 0.95 5.098 38.67 0.752 0.20
119 0:59:00 0.90 5.078 38.65 0.702 0.20
120 0:59:30 0.90 5.077 38.65 0.702 0.20
121 1:00:00 0.90 5.077 38.65 0.702 0.20
122 1:00:30 0.90 5.077 38.65 0.702 0.20
123 1:01:00 0.85 5.050 38.63 0.653 0.20
124 1:01:30 0.85 5.049 38.63 0.653 0.20
125 1:02:00 0.85 5.049 38.63 0.653 0.20
126 1:02:30 0.85 5.049 38.63 0.653 0.20
127 1:03:00 0.80 5.016 38.61 0.603 0.20
128 1:03:30 0.80 5.016 38.61 0.603 0.20
129 1:04:00 0.80 5.012 38.61 0.603 0.20
130 1:04:30 0.80 5.013 38.61 0.603 0.20
131 1:05:00 0.75 4.964 38.57 0.554 0.20
132 1:05:30 0.75 4.962 38.57 0.554 0.20
133 1:06:00 0.75 4.962 38.57 0.554 0.20
134 1:06:30 0.75 4.960 38.57 0.554 0.20
135 1:07:00 0.80 4.960 38.57 0.604 0.20
136 1:07:30 0.80 4.960 38.57 0.604 0.20
137 1:08:00 0.80 4.960 38.57 0.604 0.20
138 1:08:30 0.80 4.960 38.57 0.604 0.20
139 1:09:00 0.85 4.967 38.57 0.654 0.20
140 1:09:30 0.85 4.968 38.57 0.654 0.20
141 1:10:00 0.85 4.968 38.57 0.654 0.20
142 1:10:30 0.85 4.975 38.58 0.008 0.654 0.20
143 1:11:00 0.90 4.985 38.59 0.704 0.20
144 1:11:30 0.90 4.993 38.59 0.704 0.20
145 1:12:00 0.90 4.994 38.59 0.704 0.20
146 1:12:30 0.90 4.995 38.59 0.010 0.704 0.20
Page 432 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
147 1:13:00 0.95 5.012 38.61 0.753 0.20
148 1:13:30 0.95 5.015 38.61 0.753 0.20
149 1:14:00 0.95 5.016 38.61 0.753 0.20
150 1:14:30 0.95 5.021 38.61 0.009 0.753 0.20
151 1:15:00 1.00 5.032 38.62 0.803 0.20
152 1:15:30 1.00 5.036 38.62 0.803 0.20
153 1:16:00 1.00 5.045 38.63 0.803 0.20
154 1:16:30 1.00 5.050 38.63 0.018 0.803 0.20
155 1:17:00 1.05 5.062 38.64 0.853 0.20
156 1:17:30 1.05 5.074 38.65 0.853 0.20
157 1:18:00 1.05 5.076 38.65 0.853 0.20
158 1:18:30 1.05 5.080 38.65 0.018 0.852 0.20
159 1:19:00 1.10 5.092 38.66 0.902 0.20
160 1:19:30 1.10 5.104 38.67 0.902 0.20
161 1:20:00 1.10 5.107 38.67 0.902 0.20
162 1:20:30 1.10 5.122 38.68 0.030 0.902 0.20
163 1:21:00 1.15 5.136 38.69 0.952 0.20
164 1:21:30 1.15 5.142 38.70 0.952 0.20
165 1:22:00 1.15 5.158 38.71 0.951 0.20
166 1:22:30 1.15 5.171 38.72 0.035 0.951 0.20
167 1:23:00 1.20 5.186 38.73 1.001 0.20
168 1:23:30 1.20 5.200 38.74 1.001 0.20
169 1:24:00 1.20 5.207 38.74 1.001 0.20
170 1:24:30 1.20 5.216 38.75 0.030 1.001 0.20
171 1:25:00 1.25 5.241 38.77 1.050 0.20
172 1:25:30 1.25 5.253 38.78 1.050 0.20
173 1:26:00 1.25 5.265 38.79 1.050 0.20
174 1:26:30 1.25 5.275 38.79 0.034 1.050 0.20
175 1:27:00 1.30 5.314 38.82 1.099 0.20
176 1:27:30 1.30 5.331 38.83 1.099 0.20
177 1:28:00 1.30 5.341 38.84 1.099 0.20
178 1:28:30 1.30 5.355 38.85 0.041 1.099 0.20
179 1:29:00 1.35 5.414 38.89 1.148 0.20
180 1:29:30 1.35 5.440 38.91 1.147 0.20
181 1:30:00 1.35 5.447 38.92 1.147 0.20
182 1:30:30 1.35 5.470 38.93 0.056 1.147 0.20
183 1:31:00 1.40 5.534 38.98 1.196 0.20
184 1:31:30 1.40 5.563 39.00 1.196 0.20
185 1:32:00 1.40 5.582 39.01 1.195 0.20
186 1:32:30 1.40 5.596 39.02 0.062 1.195 0.20
187 1:33:00 1.45 5.663 39.07 1.244 0.21
188 1:33:30 1.45 5.693 39.09 1.244 0.21
189 1:34:00 1.45 5.712 39.10 1.244 0.21
190 1:34:30 1.45 5.726 39.11 0.063 1.243 0.21
191 1:35:00 1.50 5.800 39.17 1.292 0.21
192 1:35:30 1.50 5.831 39.19 1.292 0.21
193 1:36:00 1.50 5.852 39.20 1.292 0.21
194 1:36:30 1.50 5.870 39.22 0.070 1.291 0.21
195 1:37:00 1.55 5.960 39.28 1.340 0.21
196 1:37:30 1.55 5.993 39.30 1.339 0.21
197 1:38:00 1.55 6.027 39.33 1.339 0.21
198 1:38:30 1.55 6.042 39.34 0.082 1.339 0.21
199 1:39:00 1.60 6.140 39.40 1.387 0.21
Page 433 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
200 1:39:30 1.60 6.195 39.44 1.386 0.21
201 1:40:00 1.60 6.225 39.46 1.386 0.21
202 1:40:30 1.60 6.239 39.47 0.099 1.386 0.21
203 1:41:00 1.65 6.354 39.55 1.434 0.22
204 1:41:30 1.65 6.406 39.59 1.433 0.22
205 1:42:00 1.65 6.436 39.61 1.433 0.22
206 1:42:30 1.65 6.465 39.63 0.111 1.432 0.22
207 1:43:00 1.70 6.580 39.71 1.480 0.22
208 1:43:30 1.70 6.632 39.74 1.480 0.22
209 1:44:00 1.70 6.678 39.77 1.479 0.22
210 1:44:30 1.70 6.719 39.80 0.139 1.478 0.22
211 1:45:00 1.75 6.830 39.88 1.526 0.22
212 1:45:30 1.75 6.882 39.92 1.525 0.22
213 1:46:00 1.75 6.926 39.95 1.524 0.23
214 1:46:30 1.75 6.983 39.98 0.153 1.523 0.23
215 1:47:00 1.53 7.019 40.03 1.303 0.23
216 1:47:30 1.33 7.019 40.03 1.105 0.23
217 1:48:00 1.13 6.950 39.99 0.903 0.23
218 1:48:30 0.87 6.775 39.86 0.645 0.22
219 1:49:00 0.65 6.396 39.61 0.430 0.22
220 1:49:30 0.49 5.195 38.78 0.286 0.20
221 1:50:00 0.40 3.374 37.46 0.233 0.17
222 1:50:30 0.35 1.891 36.42 0.215 0.14
223 1:51:00 0.32 1.057 35.86 0.212 0.11
224 1:51:30 0.30 0.465 35.46 0.208 0.09
225 1:52:00 0.28 0.077 35.20 0.205 0.07
Page 434 of 498


Tested By : Ah Chang Soil/Rock Type : Slightly Sandy SILT, O(D)
Date : 12-08-21 SPT (N) : 25 at 20.90m

0.460 1.320 8.309 41.003 3.710
1st
Km = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.320 - 0.460 ) / ( 3.762 - 3.659 ) = 8.309 MPa/cm
Em = (1+µ) x Km x Rm = (1 + 0.33) x 8.309 x 3.710 = 41.003 MPa
- - 10.114 51.048 3.795
2nd
Kr = ∆P'/∆R = ( 1.510 - 0.620 ) / ( 3.839 - 3.751 ) = 10.114 MPa/cm
Er = (1+µ) x Kr x Rr = (1 + 0.33) x 10.114 x 3.795 = 51.048 MPa
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
2.00
1.50
Py
Pressure, P' [MPa]
1.00
∆P'
0.50
Po
∆R
Rm
0.00
Ro Ry
34 36 38 40 42 44
Radius, R [mm]
Page 435 of 498


" a " Factor Value: 0.000350 1 0.00 -1.116
" b " Factor Value: -0.005855 2 0.05 -0.286
" c " Factor Value: 0.046984 3 0.10 0.876
" d " Factor Value: 0.061839 4 0.15 2.703
5 0.20 5.298
6 0.25 8.379
RG= ax^3+bx^2+cx+d 8 0.15 3.681
" a " Factor Value: 0.000255 9 0.10 1.622
" b " Factor Value: -0.004140 10 0.05 0.300
" c " Factor Value: 0.041822 11 0.00 -0.891

HQ probe 540439

0.30
0.25 6.4
6.8
0.20
Pressure [MPa]
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
-2.0 -1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
Radius [mm]
Page 436 of 498

OYO
ELAST LOGGER2 DATA
FILE ID. : PMT1
DATE : 12-08-21
TIME : 2:22:51 PM
HOLE NO. : BH-9
DEPTH[m] : 22.00 - 22.50 m
TUBE : NXS

DATA NO. TIME
1 0:00:00 0.21 -1.024 34.36 0.200 0.01
2 0:00:30 0.22 -1.023 34.37 0.209 0.01
3 0:01:00 0.30 -0.791 34.51 0.279 0.02
4 0:01:30 0.30 -0.781 34.52 0.279 0.02
5 0:02:00 0.30 -0.779 34.52 0.278 0.02
6 0:02:30 0.30 -0.774 34.52 0.017 0.278 0.02
7 0:03:00 0.40 0.096 35.08 0.334 0.07
8 0:03:30 0.40 0.331 35.24 0.323 0.08
9 0:04:00 0.40 0.367 35.26 0.322 0.08
10 0:04:30 0.40 0.368 35.26 0.272 0.322 0.08
11 0:05:00 0.50 1.567 36.06 0.378 0.12
12 0:05:30 0.50 1.819 36.24 0.370 0.13
13 0:06:00 0.50 1.836 36.25 0.369 0.13
14 0:06:30 0.50 1.865 36.27 0.298 0.369 0.13
15 0:07:00 0.60 2.312 36.57 0.459 0.14
16 0:07:30 0.60 2.323 36.58 0.458 0.14
17 0:08:00 0.60 2.326 36.58 0.458 0.14
18 0:08:30 0.60 2.334 36.59 0.022 0.458 0.14
19 0:09:00 0.70 2.416 36.64 0.554 0.15
20 0:09:30 0.70 2.424 36.64 0.554 0.15
21 0:10:00 0.70 2.441 36.66 0.553 0.15
22 0:10:30 0.70 2.453 36.66 0.037 0.553 0.15
23 0:11:00 0.80 2.545 36.72 0.651 0.15
24 0:11:30 0.80 2.557 36.73 0.650 0.15
25 0:12:00 0.80 2.567 36.74 0.650 0.15
26 0:12:30 0.80 2.583 36.75 0.038 0.650 0.15
27 0:13:00 0.90 2.669 36.81 0.748 0.15
28 0:13:30 0.90 2.681 36.82 0.748 0.15
29 0:14:00 0.90 2.695 36.83 0.747 0.15
30 0:14:30 0.90 2.707 36.84 0.038 0.747 0.15
31 0:15:00 1.00 2.810 36.90 0.845 0.16
32 0:15:30 1.00 2.824 36.91 0.844 0.16
33 0:16:00 1.00 2.842 36.93 0.844 0.16
34 0:16:30 1.00 2.861 36.94 0.051 0.843 0.16
35 0:17:00 1.10 2.967 37.01 0.941 0.16
36 0:17:30 1.10 2.983 37.02 0.941 0.16
37 0:18:00 1.10 3.011 37.04 0.940 0.16
38 0:18:30 1.10 3.033 37.06 0.066 0.940 0.16
39 0:19:00 1.20 3.136 37.13 1.038 0.16
40 0:19:30 1.20 3.155 37.14 1.037 0.16
Page 437 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
41 0:20:00 1.20 3.181 37.16 1.037 0.16
42 0:20:30 1.20 3.191 37.17 0.055 1.036 0.16
43 0:21:00 1.30 3.315 37.25 1.134 0.17
44 0:21:30 1.30 3.324 37.26 1.134 0.17
45 0:22:00 1.30 3.364 37.29 1.133 0.17
46 0:22:30 1.30 3.386 37.30 0.071 1.133 0.17
47 0:23:00 1.40 3.512 37.39 1.230 0.17
48 0:23:30 1.40 3.551 37.41 1.229 0.17
49 0:24:00 1.40 3.586 37.44 1.229 0.17
50 0:24:30 1.40 3.605 37.45 0.093 1.228 0.17
51 0:25:00 1.50 3.742 37.55 1.326 0.17
52 0:25:30 1.50 3.813 37.60 1.325 0.18
53 0:26:00 1.50 3.846 37.62 1.324 0.18
54 0:26:30 1.50 3.846 37.62 0.104 1.324 0.18
55 0:27:00 1.60 4.008 37.73 1.421 0.18
56 0:27:30 1.60 4.115 37.81 1.420 0.18
57 0:28:00 1.60 4.157 37.84 1.419 0.18
58 0:28:30 1.60 4.199 37.87 0.191 1.418 0.18
59 0:29:00 1.50 4.215 37.88 1.318 0.18
60 0:29:30 1.50 4.215 37.88 1.318 0.18
61 0:30:00 1.50 4.215 37.88 1.318 0.18
62 0:30:30 1.50 4.215 37.88 1.318 0.18
63 0:31:00 1.40 4.213 37.88 1.218 0.18
64 0:31:30 1.40 4.213 37.88 1.218 0.18
65 0:32:00 1.40 4.213 37.88 1.218 0.18
66 0:32:30 1.40 4.213 37.88 1.218 0.18
67 0:33:00 1.30 4.194 37.87 1.118 0.18
68 0:33:30 1.30 4.195 37.88 1.118 0.18
69 0:34:00 1.30 4.195 37.88 1.118 0.18
70 0:34:30 1.30 4.195 37.88 1.118 0.18
71 0:35:00 1.20 4.159 37.85 1.019 0.18
72 0:35:30 1.20 4.160 37.85 1.019 0.18
73 0:36:00 1.20 4.160 37.85 1.019 0.18
74 0:36:30 1.20 4.160 37.85 1.019 0.18
75 0:37:00 1.10 4.088 37.80 0.920 0.18
76 0:37:30 1.10 4.088 37.80 0.920 0.18
77 0:38:00 1.10 4.088 37.80 0.920 0.18
78 0:38:30 1.10 4.088 37.80 0.920 0.18
79 0:39:00 1.00 4.014 37.75 0.821 0.18
80 0:39:30 1.00 4.014 37.75 0.821 0.18
81 0:40:00 1.00 4.014 37.75 0.821 0.18
82 0:40:30 1.00 4.014 37.75 0.821 0.18
83 0:41:00 0.90 3.914 37.69 0.723 0.18
84 0:41:30 0.90 3.915 37.69 0.723 0.18
85 0:42:00 0.90 3.915 37.69 0.723 0.18
86 0:42:30 0.90 3.915 37.69 0.723 0.18
87 0:43:00 0.80 3.807 37.61 0.625 0.18
88 0:43:30 0.80 3.807 37.61 0.625 0.18
89 0:44:00 0.80 3.807 37.61 0.625 0.18
90 0:44:30 0.80 3.807 37.61 0.625 0.18
91 0:45:00 0.90 3.807 37.61 0.725 0.18
92 0:45:30 0.90 3.807 37.61 0.725 0.18
93 0:46:00 0.90 3.807 37.61 0.725 0.18
Page 438 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
94 0:46:30 0.90 3.807 37.61 0.725 0.18
95 0:47:00 1.00 3.844 37.63 0.824 0.18
96 0:47:30 1.00 3.845 37.63 0.824 0.18
97 0:48:00 1.00 3.845 37.63 0.824 0.18
98 0:48:30 1.00 3.845 37.63 0.001 0.824 0.18
99 0:49:00 1.10 3.917 37.68 0.923 0.18
100 0:49:30 1.10 3.924 37.69 0.923 0.18
101 0:50:00 1.10 3.925 37.69 0.923 0.18
102 0:50:30 1.10 3.932 37.69 0.015 0.923 0.18
103 0:51:00 1.20 4.014 37.75 1.021 0.18
104 0:51:30 1.20 4.014 37.75 1.021 0.18
105 0:52:00 1.20 4.023 37.76 1.021 0.18
106 0:52:30 1.20 4.031 37.76 0.017 1.021 0.18
107 0:53:00 1.30 4.114 37.82 1.120 0.18
108 0:53:30 1.30 4.126 37.83 1.119 0.18
109 0:54:00 1.30 4.131 37.83 1.119 0.18
110 0:54:30 1.30 4.149 37.84 0.035 1.119 0.18
111 0:55:00 1.40 4.237 37.90 1.218 0.18
112 0:55:30 1.40 4.251 37.91 1.217 0.18
113 0:56:00 1.40 4.262 37.92 1.217 0.18
114 0:56:30 1.40 4.277 37.93 0.040 1.217 0.18
115 0:57:00 1.50 4.392 38.01 1.315 0.18
116 0:57:30 1.50 4.410 38.03 1.315 0.19
117 0:58:00 1.50 4.432 38.04 1.314 0.19
118 0:58:30 1.50 4.439 38.05 0.047 1.314 0.19
119 0:59:00 1.60 4.566 38.13 1.412 0.19
120 0:59:30 1.60 4.592 38.15 1.412 0.19
121 1:00:00 1.60 4.613 38.17 1.412 0.19
122 1:00:30 1.60 4.632 38.18 0.066 1.411 0.19
123 1:01:00 1.70 4.793 38.30 1.509 0.19
124 1:01:30 1.70 4.856 38.34 1.508 0.19
125 1:02:00 1.70 4.896 38.37 1.507 0.19
126 1:02:30 1.70 4.924 38.39 0.131 1.507 0.19
127 1:03:00 1.80 5.169 38.57 1.603 0.20
128 1:03:30 1.80 5.269 38.64 1.602 0.20
129 1:04:00 1.80 5.353 38.70 1.601 0.20
130 1:04:30 1.80 5.395 38.73 0.226 1.600 0.20
131 1:05:00 1.90 5.740 38.98 1.695 0.20
132 1:05:30 1.90 5.917 39.11 1.693 0.21
133 1:06:00 1.90 6.011 39.18 1.691 0.21
134 1:06:30 1.90 6.103 39.25 0.363 1.690 0.21
135 1:07:00 2.00 6.566 39.59 1.783 0.22
136 1:07:30 2.00 6.815 39.78 1.779 0.22
137 1:08:00 2.00 6.996 39.92 1.776 0.22
138 1:08:30 2.00 7.079 39.99 0.513 1.775 0.23
139 1:09:00 2.10 7.605 40.37 1.866 0.23
140 1:09:30 2.10 7.913 40.61 1.860 0.24
141 1:10:00 2.10 8.139 40.79 1.855 0.25
142 1:10:30 2.10 8.338 40.94 0.733 1.851 0.25
143 1:11:00 1.71 8.253 40.89 1.467 0.25
144 1:11:30 1.30 7.929 40.64 1.060 0.24
145 1:12:00 0.95 7.351 40.19 0.719 0.23
146 1:12:30 0.52 6.207 39.36 0.311 0.21
Page 439 of 498

DATA NO. TIME
147 1:13:00 0.42 3.797 37.61 0.242 0.17
148 1:13:30 0.38 2.173 36.48 0.235 0.14
149 1:14:00 0.31 0.549 35.38 0.224 0.09
150 1:14:30 0.24 -0.743 34.54 0.212 0.02
Page 440 of 498

APPENDIX F
HAMMER CALIBRATION REPORTS
Page 441 of 498

Page 442 of 498
Page 443 of 498
Page 444 of 498
Page 445 of 498
Page 446 of 498
Page 447 of 498
Page 448 of 498
Page 449 of 498
Page 450 of 498
Page 451 of 498
Page 452 of 498
Page 453 of 498
Page 454 of 498
Page 455 of 498
Page 456 of 498
Page 457 of 498
Page 458 of 498
Page 459 of 498
Page 460 of 498
Page 461 of 498
Page 462 of 498
Page 463 of 498
Page 464 of 498
Page 465 of 498
Page 466 of 498
Page 467 of 498
Page 468 of 498
Page 469 of 498
Page 470 of 498
Page 471 of 498
Page 472 of 498
Page 473 of 498
Page 474 of 498
Page 475 of 498
Page 476 of 498
Page 477 of 498
Page 478 of 498
Page 479 of 498
The results herein have been performed in accordance with the laboratory’s term of accreditation under the
Singapore Accreditation Council – Singapore Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
CALIBRATION SITE: 28 SUNGEI KADUT STREET 2
TEST REPORT
___________________________________________________________________________
STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (SPT)

HAMMER ENERGY MEASUREMENT
(SPT HAMMER – H-49)
TEST REPORT
14th September 2021
___________________________________________________________________________
CLIENT
M/s RYOBI GEOTECH PTE LTD
Submitted by
APS ASIA PDA ENTERPRISE PTE LTD
15th SEPTEMBER 2021
REPORT REF. NO : APS/SPT/2021/115
No. 65 Ubi Crescent #02-1 Hola Centre Singapore 408559 Tel (65) 68968926 Fax: (65) 62212003
The results reported herein have been performed in accordance with the terms of accreditation under the Singapore
Accreditation Council. The reports shall not be reproduced except in full, unless the management representative of APS ASIA
PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd has given approval in writing.
Page 480 of 498
________________________________________________________________________________
CONTENTS
__________________________________________________________________
1. INTRODUCTION
2. TEST EQUIPMENT
3. SUMMARY
4. RESULTS
APPENDIX I SPT HAMMER ENERGY MEASUREMENT RESULTS
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
SPT – Hammer Energy Measurement Page 2/6
Test report Ref.: APS/SPT/2021/115
Page 481 of 498

________________________________________________________________________________
1. INTRODUCTION
This report the results of the standard penetration test, SPT, hammer
energy measurement using the Pile Driving Analyzer, PDA, carried out for
APS ASIA PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd on 14 September 2021. The aim of testing
was to provide an estimate of the hammer energy transferred by the SPT
hammer in accordance to American Standard Test Method ASTM D4633-
16.
The SPT testing was performed at 28 Sungei Kadut Street 2.
The SPT hammer tested was identified as H-49 and was operated by
Aframe YBM drilling machine (Rig-31).
2. TEST EQUIPMENT
Pile Driving Analyser (Model PAX) : Serial No. 4192L

Instrumented Rod : Serial No. 587W (Length 600mm)
Strain Transducers : Serial Nos. 587BW - Bridge 1 & 2
Accelerometers : Serial Nos. K2436 & K1582
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 482 of 498

________________________________________________________________________________
3. SUMMARY
SPT Hammer Serial No. - H-49
Calibration Site - 28 Sungei Kadut Street 2
Borehole - BH-3019
- Diameter : - 100 mm
- Depth : 16.00 m
Drilling Rig - Rig-31
Drilling Operator - Raju
Drill Rod Type - BW
Shoe Type / Length - Split Spoon Sampler /600mm
Drill Rod Segments - 3m x 5 + 0.6 + 0.6 + 1.0
Total Length - 17.20 m (Instrumented Rod Top To Shoe Base)
SPT Ram Mass - 63.90 kg
SPT Anvil Mass - 21.30 kg
SPT Total Mass - 85.20 kg
SPT Ram Drop Height - 764 mm
Theoretical Energy - 0.4789 kN-m
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 483 of 498

Page 484 of 498
________________________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX I
SPT HAMMER ENERGY MEASURMENT RESULTS
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 485 of 498

SPT HAMMER ENERGY MEASUREMENT
Conducted By : APS Asia PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd (Joseph Ling Ka Jun)
Conducted For : Ryobi Geotech Pte Ltd (Machine : RIG - 31 / SPT : H-49)
BLOW NO. EMX EF2 DMX FMX TSX CSX VMX AMX
3 0.3551 0.1667 8 155 16.8 128.1 4.13 3055

4 0.3816 0.2713 9 162 19.0 133.40 4.27 3503
5 0.3779 0.2412 10 131 20.9 108.20 4.23 3276
6 0.3739 0.2485 10 141 21.9 116.50 4.43 2828
7 0.3840 0.2413 10 136 20.5 112.00 4.34 3104
8 0.3555 0.2328 9 118 15.6 97.00 4.31 2857
9 0.3602 0.2321 9 102 18.1 84.10 4.05 2408
10 0.3836 0.2495 10 135 24.5 111.40 4.63 3172
11 0.3339 0.2400 8 101 14.6 83.10 3.85 2506
12 0.3858 0.2440 9 129 19.0 106.20 4.31 3026
MINIMUM 0.3339 0.1667 8.0 101 14.60 83.10 3.85 2408

MAXIMUM 0.3858 0.2713 10 162 24.5 133.4 4.63 3503
AVERAGE 0.3692 0.2367 9.2 131 19.1 108.0 4.26 2974
STANDARD DEV. 0.0172 0.0270 0.79 20 3.0 16.5 0.21 335
OUTPUT QUANTITIES
EMX maximum energy transmitted past the transducers.

EF2 maximum energy transmitted past the transducers from integral of force squared.
DMX maximum downward displacement at the transducers' location.
FMX maximum compressive force at the transducers' location.
CSX maximum compressive stress at transducers' location.
TSX maximum tensile stress along the length of rod.
VMX maximum velocity at the transducers' location.
AMX maximum acceleration at the transducers' location.
Page 486 of 498

APS Asia PDA Enterprise Pte Ltd Pile Driving Analyzer ®
28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) H49
F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
6 @ 0.3 m
4 @ 1.6 m
Project Information Quantity Results
PROJECT: 28 SUNGEI KADUT ST 2(140921) EMX 0.3551 kN-m
PILE NAME: H49 EF2 0.1667 kN-m
DESCR: APS DMX 8 mm
OPERATOR: APS FMX 155 kN
FILE: H49 TSX 16.8 MPa
14/9/2021 4:02:37 pm CSX 128.1 MPa
Blow Number 3 VMX 4.13 m/s
AMX 3055 g's
Pile Properties RX5 kN
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []
Page 487 of 498 Version 2012.112

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
7 @ 1.6 m
0 @ 0.3 m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
14/9/2021 4:02:52 pm CSX 133.4 MPa
AMX 3503 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
23 @ 1.7 m
9 @ 0.3 m
DESCR: APS DMX 10 mm
14/9/2021 4:02:58 pm CSX 108.2 MPa
AMX 3276 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
48 @ 0.4 m
21 @ 1.6 m
14/9/2021 4:03:06 pm CSX 116.5 MPa
AMX 2828 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
28 @ 1.7 m
17 @ 0.3 m
14/9/2021 4:03:10 pm CSX 112.0 MPa
AMX 3104 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
33 @ 0.3 m
31 @ 1.6 m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
14/9/2021 4:03:20 pm CSX 97.0 MPa
AMX 2857 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
43 @ 0.4 m
21 @ 1.7 m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
14/9/2021 4:03:28 pm CSX 84.1 MPa
AMX 2408 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
20 @ 1.7 m
14 @ 0.3 m
14/9/2021 4:03:37 pm CSX 111.4 MPa
AMX 3172 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
36 @ 1.7 m
23 @ 0.3 m
DESCR: APS DMX 8 mm
14/9/2021 4:03:43 pm CSX 83.1 MPa
AMX 2506 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

F (301)
V (6.15)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
E (1.5000)
EF2 (1.5000)
D (20)
TS: 81.9
TB: -5.0
27 @ 1.7 m
22 @ 0.3 m
DESCR: APS DMX 9 mm
14/9/2021 4:03:53 pm CSX 106.2 MPa
AMX 3026 g's
LE 16.9 m
AR 12.13 cm^2
EM 206843 MPa
SP 77.3 kN/m3
WS 5123.0 m/s
EA/C 49 kN-s/m
2L/C 6.60 ms
JC []

No. 65 Ubi Crescent, #02-01 Hola Centre
Singapore 408559
Tel: 68968926 Email: info@aps-instrument.com
Co. Registration No. : 200601680E
CERTIFICATE OF CALIBRATION
Certificate Number : APS/SPT/0115/2021
Instrument : Standard Penetration Test (SPT)

Manufacturer : Aframe YBM Drilling Machine
Serial No : H-49
SPT Ram Energy Transfer Ratio : 77%
Calibration Date : 14 September 2021
Recalibration Date : 13 September 2022
Calibration Remarks:
Please refer to Calibration Test Report : APS/SPT/2021/115 for detailed summary and analysis.
This Certificate shall not be reproduced except in full, without the written approval of the laboratory.
Page 497 of 498

Page 498 of 498
Preambles for All Trades
Preambles For All Trades
1 GENERALLY
1.1 These Preambles for all Trades shall apply to the whole of the works
regardless of the Trade headings under which they have been described and
shall be read in conjunction with the Specification.
1.2 The rates and prices in the Schedule of Unit Rates/ Schedule of Prices are to
include for complying with the requirements and/or cost effects of these
Preambles.
1.3 The following abbreviations have been used in the Schedule of Unit Rates/
Schedule of Prices:-
m³ - Cubic metre
m² - Square metre
m - Linear metre
mm - Millimetres
no - Number
kg - Kilogramme
tonne - Metric ton
S.S. - The latest "Singapore Standard" for a particular item

of material or component, issued by the Singapore
Institute of Standards and Industrial Research.
B.S. - The latest "British Standard" for a particular item of

material or component, issued by the British
Standards Institution.
C.P. - The latest "British Standard Code of Practice" issued

by the Council for Code of Practice of the British
Standards Institution.
S.M.M. - The Standard Method of Measurement of Building

Works, Second Edition 1986 published by the
Singapore Institute of Surveyors and Valuers, Quantity
Surveying Division.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/1
1 GENERALLY (Cont'd)
1.4 P.C. UNIT RATES FOR SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF GOODS AND
MATERIALS
Prime Cost (P.C.) Unit Rates for works to be supplied and installed by a firm
to be selected by the Architect are indicated in the Schedule of Unit Rates/
Schedule of Prices. The Architect on behalf of the Employer shall select a
firm to carry out the works for which P.C. Unit Rates have been allowed and
unless the Contractor has reasonable objection to the appointment of the
firm to execute the works, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the
firms so selected by the Architect in the same way as for his own Sub-
Contractor and the Employer shall in no circumstances be liable to the
Contractor for the default of any firm.
The P.C. Unit Rates shall mean the cost of the works executed by the firm
for the nett area and/or quantity required. The Contractor's overall rate for
the item shall cover for all costs including:-
- entering into a contract with the firm selected and co-ordinating all
their activities so that it complies with the Contractor's order of
work and programme.
- ascertaining from the time at an early stage all particulars relating

to their work in regard to sizes and positions in which chases,
holes, mortices and similar items are required to be formed or left
and allow for providing same.
- affording free and full use of plant and hoisting facilities, standing
scaffolding and erecting any special scaffolding required, use of
messrooms, sanitary accommodation and welfare facilities
- providing space ONLY for the office and storage accommodation
- providing all temporary lighting and water
- supplying all setting out information
- giving all necessary dimensions and taking responsibility for their

accuracy
- providing temporary power supplies required for the execution of

the Works
- clearing away rubbish from site
- taking full responsibility for and covering and protecting against all
loss or damage to all executed and part executed work and all
materials and goods properly brought on site for inclusion in the
Works
- Contractor's administration charges
- overheads and profit
- and any other charges or expenses (other than those mentioned

above)
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/2
1.4 P.C. UNIT RATES FOR SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION OF GOODS AND
MATERIALS (Cont'd)
In principle, P.C. Unit Rates for supply and installation shall be subjected to
adjustment in the final account by substituting the actual costs as confirmed
by the Architect when selecting the firm to execute the works for the items
against the P.C. Unit Rates stated in the Schedule of Unit Rates/ Schedule of
Prices and the cost for overhead and profit shall be adjusted based on the
percentage as allowed for by the Contractor (see examples of price
breakdown at the end of this Preambles). No other adjustment will be made
and the Contractor shall allow for any other costs necessary.
The Contractor shall note that firms selected to execute the works under
P.C. Unit Rates are NOT Nominated Sub-Contractors as defined in Clause 28
of the Conditions of Contract but shall be regarded as the Contractor's
domestic sub-contractors.
In the event of repudiation or abandonment of the sub-contract by any Sub-

Contractor, or its termination by the contractor, or its disclaimer by the
liquidator or trustee in bankruptcy or receiver of any Sub-Contractor, the
Contractor shall with the consent of the Architect, such consent not to be
unreasonably withheld select another competent Sub-Contractor to supply
the goods or materials, or the Contractor himself/themselves undertake to
do so; in either event being paid therefore, the same sum as would have
been payable had the original Sub-Contractor completed the sub-contract
without any default on his part.
In respect of each item for which a P.C. Unit Rate for the supply and
installation of works by a firm to be selected by the Architect is included in
the Bills of Quantities the Contractor shall provide a breakdown of his unit
rate in accordance with the following example:-
Breakdown of Unit Rate (Per Square Meter)
a) P.C. Unit Rate for Supply & Installation $
b) Profit ( %) $
c) Attendance $
Contractor's Unit Rate for Supply & Installation $
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/3
1.5 ITEM DESCRIPTIONS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in the Schedule of Unit Rates/ Schedule

of Prices, the following shall be deemed to be included with all items:-
1) Labour and all costs in connection therewith.
2) Materials and goods including materials required for lapping, jointing

and the like and all costs in connection therewith such as conveyance
and delivery.
3) Unloading, storing, returning packings, handling, hoisting and lowering

materials.
4) Assembling, setting, fitting and fixing materials and goods in position.
5) Waste of materials.
6) All cutting.
7) Use of plant and all costs in connection therewith.
8) Establishment charges, overhead charges and profit.
9) Full compliance of Specification
1.7 DESIGN, SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION ITEMS
Rates and Prices shall includes:
1) Submission of details, specification and shop drawings for

Architect/Engineer's approval.
2) Submission of Professional Engineer's Certification for the design and

the works executed.
3) All items as stated in Clause 1.6 above and the relevant Preambles for
the particular trades.
1.8 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
All rates and prices wherever applicable, shall include for the submission of
Professional Engineer's Certification for any product or work executed in
order to comply with the current requirements of the relevant Authorities
and/or codes of Practice, and/or Building Regulations, etc. as appropriate.
1.9 PROTECTION OF WORKS
All rates and prices shall include for all necessary protection of all Trades and
Sections of the Works at all times until the issuance of the Completion
Certificate or Certificates as applicable.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/4
2 CONCRETE WORK
2.1 INSITU CONCRETE
The rates are to include for:-
1) All tests on concrete, cement and aggregate etc., as may be required

by the Engineer.
2) All hoisting or pumping and placing in required position.
3) Tamping and/or vibrating to give thorough compaction.
4) Working between and around reinforcement.
5) Forming or cutting rebates, grooves, chases, mortices holes and

openings not exceeding 0.10m², and other sundry like items, including
all making good.
6) Laying on any type of sub-base and for preparing and leaving surface to
receive screeds or paving.
7) All construction joints including temporary formwork to form joggled

joints and cleaning and preparing for subsequent pour, and all
necessary waterstops of approved type.
8) Continuous daily pours of very large quantities.
9) Pours of small quantities.
10) Preparing and leaving surfaces to receive plastering.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT
All mild steel and high tensile steel bar reinforcement shall be in lengths not
exceeding 12 m (or 40'0") unless otherwise stated.
The rates for bar reinforcement are to include for:-
1) All tests as may be required by the Engineer.
2) Any allowance for rolling margin.
3) Cutting to lengths.
4) Bending to required shape.
5) Brushing, cleaning, placing and fixing in position prior to casting.
6) Providing and fixing approved annealed iron tying wire at all

intersections.
7) Spacer bars, steel chairs and distance blocks and supporting while
concreting.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/5
2 CONCRETE WORK (Cont'd)
2.3 The rates for fabric reinforcement are to include for:-
1) Allowance for laps.
2) All necessary bending and cutting, welding and notching around

obstructions.
3) Brushing, cleaning and fixing in position prior to casting.
4) Providing and fixing approved annealed iron tying wire at all

intersections.
5) Distance blocks, steel chairs and supporting while concreting.
2.4 FORMWORK
Strutting to forms shall not exceed 3,500mm high unless otherwise stated.
1) All necessary boarding, supports, erecting, framing, cutting,

perforations for pipes, angles, and the like.
2) Raking or circular cutting.
3) Splayed edges.
4) Notchings.
5) Allowance for overlaps, waste and passings at angles.
6) Battens.
7) Filleting to form chamfered edges and formwork to splayed internal

angles not exceeding 50mm wide.
8) Strutting, bolting, wedging, casing, striking and removal.
9) Cleaning, wetting and treatment with mould oil, mould liquid or

limewhite and the like
10) In addition to the above, the rates for wrot formwork are to include for
stopping all holes, cracks, etc., in cement mortar and rubbing off all
fins, board marks and other irregularities after removal of formwork.
11) Rates for permanent metal formwork and waffle form and similar
systems are to include for:-
(i) All necessary temporary supports and braces, erecting, fixing,

welding, cutting perforations for pipes, side laps, jointing between
panels, applied treatments, cleaning down before placing concrete,
easing, striking and removal.
(ii) Special starter and closing panels at edges of formwork, closing

ends of panels and perforations for ductwork, access hatches and
the like.
(iii) All necessary additional supports and sealing against units, in the
case of formwork to insitu concrete margins to unit moulds not
requiring support decking.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/6
2.5 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
In addition to Clauses 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4, the rates are to include for: -
1) Submitting method statements with calculations, preliminary drawings

and specifications, details of proposed additional reinforcement or
modifications to reinforcement shown on the drawings, shop drawings
accompanied by outlines of construction procedures, stressing
sequences, expected friction and other losses, stressing and anchoring
forces, etc., manufacturer's mill certificates, test certificates and
stress/strain curves, results of laboratory tests and certified calibration
curves for each jack including providing the requisite number of copies
of the foregoing to all concerned.
2) Taking all necessary field measurements. Providing facilities for

measuring the extension of tendons and movement in gripping devices.
3) Tensioning in a sequence recommended by the prestressing specialist

and approved by the Engineer.
4) All strand, grout and other tests.
5) Providing adequate protection against corrosion for all tendons,

anchorages and ducts.
6) Rates for tendons shall include for:
(i) Wrapping in suitable paper covering before despatch from the

supplier.
(ii) Tagging wire, strand and anchorage assemblies for identification

purposes.
(iii) Cleaning, degreasing, straightening, cutting to lengths,

assembling, hoisting and fixing.
(iv) Grouting of all tendons.
(v) The supply of all expendable items such as cones, wedges, anchor
plates, spacers and the like.
(vi) All tensioning of members including the provision of jacks and

cutting the ends of tendons at both ends and extra material and
waste.
(vii) Filling-in to jacking or anchor recesses.
(viii) Cores and ducts including cleaning and drying out, temporary
supports required in the formation, forming and grouting air holes
at ends or sides of ducts, straight and curved sleeves or
sheathing.
7) Rates for formwork shall include for:
(i) All temporary boxings, forming recesses for anchorages and

temporary construction joints.
(ii) Any temporary restraints for tensioning and the like.
8) Edge scaffolding and access to stressing and grouting points.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/7
2 CONCRETE WORK (Cont'd)
2.5 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE (CONT’D)
9) Taking all necessary precautions and providing protective barriers for

use behind anchorages for safety reasons.
10) Temporary fencing around stressing areas including altering, adapting,

moving, etc. from time to time in sequence with stressing operations.
2.6 WATERSTOPS
1) Forming all joints and junctions in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.
2) All labour and materials for the temporary joints in the concrete walls
and slabs.
2.7 EXPANSION JOINTS
The rates for expansion joints are to include for all necessary formwork.
2.8 PRECAST CONCRETE
1) All reinforcement, moulds and casting.
2) Finishing exposed faces fair.
3) All holes, rebates, notchings, sinkings, mortices and the like.
4) Hoisting, placing in position, setting, bedding, jointing and pointing in

cement mortar (1:3) unless otherwise particularly described, fixing
including all necessary temporary erection gear, bracing and working
platforms.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/8
3 BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
3.1 BRICKWORK, BLOCK AND FACINGS
Contrary to SMM, walls curved on plan are measured and grouped together
regardless of radius.
1) All rough and fair cutting.
2) Oversailing and receding courses.
3) Rough relieving and discharging arches.
4) Wedging and pinning.
5) Raking out joints for and pointing of flashings.
6) Raking out joints for plaster.
7) Bedding plates, holdfasts and bonding ties.
8) Bedding and pointing frames.
9) Bonding ties at abutments to concrete structure.
10) Labour eaves filling.
11) Plumbing angles.
12) Forming square and rebated reveals, cut squints or birdsmouths and
notches.
13) Cutting or forming chases, holes and mortices.
14) Cutting and pinning and/or building in.
15) Raking out joints of external fairfaces walls 19mm deep for specified
mortar pointing.
16) Work around pipework, cables and other items of the like nature.
17) Forming openings and turning arches in walls for drain pipes in
manholes.
18) Making good.
19) Sundry like items.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/9
4 ROOFING
4.1 TILE ROOFING
Rates for the tile roofing shall include for:-
1) All laps, straight, skew and circular cutting.
2) All cutting at eaves, top edges, abutments, valleys, hips, etc.
3) Holes for pipes and the like.
4) Nails, screws, clips, pellets, straps and the like.
5) Timber battens.
6) Chasing the structure for tucking in edges of flashings and the like.
4.2 PANEL ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING SYSTEMS
Rates for screeds and waterproofing systems in panel roofing shall include
for:-
1) Narrow widths and small quantities.
2) Temporary rules.
3) All rounded edges, arises, etc.
4) Short lengths, stops, angles, junctions, ends, etc.
5) Working or fitting up to and around pipes, gratings and other fittings.
6) Chasing the structure for burning in or tucking in edges of coverings,

flashings and the like.
7) Holes for pipes and other like items.
8) All making good and any sundry items of a like nature.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/10
4 ROOFING (Cont’d)
4.3 METAL ROOFING OR CLADDING
Rates for pre-finished metal roofing or cladding shall include for:-
1) All straight and curved cutting including cutting at square and raking
abutments, top edges, cutting and fitting and making good around
outlets, pipes and any other sundry items of a like nature.
2) All fixing straps, clips, self tapping screws, etc.
3) Touching up all exposed fixings, cut edges, etc. with approved matching
colour paint.
4) Bedding and pointing eaves fillers verges
4.4 SHEET METAL ROOFING
Rates for sheet metal roofing shall additionally include for:-
1) Welted edges, beaded edges, wedging into grooves, burned or brazed

angles, welted seams, burned or brazed seams and the like.
2) Dressing into hollows, condensation channels and over mouldings and

the like.
3) Dressing over glass and glazing bars, corrugated roofing, Roman tiling,
pantiling and similar materials, drips, bolts and the like.
4) Bossed, burned, brazed or capped ends, angles and intersections to

rolls, hollows, condensation channels, mouldings and the like.
5) Dressing into outlet pipes, dishing to gullies and the like.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/11
5 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
5.1 CARPENTRY TIMBER
1) All timber shall be Tanalised and Kiln-Dried to suit the particular use.
2) All carpenter's work shall be deemed to be left with a sawn surface

except where described to be wrot.
5.2 PLUGGING AND FIXING WOODWORK, ETC.
Where work is described as "Plugged" it shall include for shot-fired fixings

where approved or casting in or morticing for and inserting fibrous inserts or
other approved fixing materials and fixing with suitable nails or screws, to
any wall or concrete surfaces and subsequently making good all affected
areas. Where the walls are hollow partitions, prices are to include for
concrete fixing blocks, etc. built in where required.
5.3 CARPENTRY WORK
1) Short lengths, all cutting, notching, boring, sinking, pelleting, fitting,

trimming, mitreing, halving, morticing, tenoning, dovetailing, scarfing
and wedging shaped ends, splayed edges, temporary supports, fixing
with nails and any other sundry items of a like nature.
2) Rebates, grooves, chamfers and mouldings of any girth.
3) Rebated, grooved, tongued and cross-tongued joints.
4) Stopped work and work across grain.
5) Grouting or sealant to gaps between framings and concrete or masonry

works.
6) Temporary supports.
The rates for ceiling and wall boarding are to include for narrow widths,
small quantities and all cutting.
The rates for plugging are to include for drilling all holes in walls, existing
plastered or tiled walls etc., irrespective of the material encountered and
subsequently making good.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/12
5 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY (Cont'd)
5.4 SUSPENDED CEILING
Rates are to include for:-
1) Wastage and wastage to edge tiles.
2) Extra labour for setting out ceiling pattern.
3) Marking out and cutting and fitting tiles around profile of doors and
frames, partitions and all projections and holes for mechanical and
electrical services.
4) All circular, square or rectangular cutting for light fittings including all
necessary supports, edging and trimming pieces.
5) Continuous aluminium angles or proprietary edge filling strips to all

ceiling tiles abutting walls, doors and frames and all projections fixed as
specified including ends, angles and intersections.
6) All necessary continuous 25 x 50mm Tanalised Kampar battens plugged

and screwed to wall to support ceiling edge tiles abutting against walls
or around corners.
7) Suspended systems are to include for all metal rails, channels, runners,
cross tee, hanging rods, etc.
9) Framed opening to air-conditioning inlet and outlets and for recessed

ceiling light openings and ceiling access panels including all necessary
edge trimmings.
10) All extra labour and waste for setting out panels to form equal margins
on all sides.
11) All cutting and boring holes for pipes, etc.
5.5 JOINERY TIMBER
1) All joinery timber shall be Tanalised and Kiln-Dried to suit the particular
use selected and kept clean for staining, varnishing and polishing or
painting.
2) All joinery timber shall be wrot unless otherwise stated. Sizes stated are
finished sizes.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/13
5 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY (Cont'd)
5.6 PLUGGING AND FIXING WOODWORK, ETC.
Where work is described as "Plugged" it shall include for shot-fired fixing

where approved or casting in or morticing for and inserting fibrous inserts or
other approved fixing materials and fixing with suitable nails or screws, to
any wall or concrete surface and subsequent making good.
5.7 JOINERY WORK
1) Short lengths.
2) Tongued angles, splayed or rounded edges, chamfers rebates, grooves,

etc.
3) Stopped work and work across grain.
4) Cutting, notching, holing, housing, mitreing, etc.
5) Fair, fitted, returned and shaped ends.
6) Regular and irregular joints.
7) Junctions, angles and heading joints.
8) Planting on with nails or brads, etc., punched in.
9) Fixing with glue or other adhesive.
10) Priming backs of frames, etc., with one coat of aluminium wood primer
before fixing.
11) Fixing of door frames etc. with galvanised mild steel holdfasts.
12) Grouting or sealant to gaps between framings and concrete or masonry

works.
13) Sundry items of a like nature.
Where work is described as "worked to the required shape" shall include for
tongued angles, splayed or rounded edges, chamfers, rebates, grooves,
stopped work and work across grain and any other sundry lineal items of a
like nature.
5.8 OTHERS
1) Rates for plywood shall include for all straight, raking and circular
cutting and waste.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/14
6 IRONMONGERY
6.1 FIXING IRONMONGERY
1) Sorting and assembling.
2) Fixing with screws of the same finish as the ironmongery.
3) Cutting, sinking, boring and morticing as required.
4) Oiling, easing and adjusting all moving parts.
5) Taking off and refixing after painting where necessary.
6) Leaving in perfect working order.
7) Handing the keys properly labelled to the Architect on completion.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/15
7 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
7.1 GENERALLY
1) Fabricating and delivery to the site.
2) Allowances for rolling margins and the weight of welding materials.
3) Shop and site fabrication including drilling, cutting (including holes and
openings for other trades), notching, splicing, welding, machining ends
and bearings.
4) Delivery, unloading, landing, hoisting, erecting, fitting and fixing in

position including levelling and plumbing etc.
5) Provision of all necessary plant, temporary bracing supports and the like
required for erection, providing samples and tests required by the
specification, the inspection of welds including the use of any special
radiographic techniques.
6) Nuts and any type of washer which may be required.
7) Preparation of shop drawings.
8) Pre-priming including preparing surface, as specified before delivery

and touch up after installation on site.
9) Welding works including all labour and materials and preparing surfaces
for welding and grinding to a smooth finish.
Rates for bolts shall include for all necessary drilling works, nuts and flat
washers and tapered washers where used on the flange of steel sections.
Rates for steel encased in concrete are to include for cleaning and de-
greasing surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/16
8 METALWORK
8.1 WELDING
All welds which will be visible in completed work are to be ground to a

smooth finish flush with adjacent surfaces.
8.2 METALWORK GENERALLY
1) Allowance for rolling margins and the weight of welding materials.
2) Cutting, notching, mitring, welding, fabricating, drilling, delivery,

unloading, handling, assembling, hoisting, fitting and fixing in position,
bedding, filling in solid and pointing including necessary lugs or other
attachments.
3) Nuts and washers to bolts
4) Grouting bolts, anchors, fastenings, connectors and the like.
5) Protection such as wrapping finished work with paper, coating with

grease or carrying out such other protective measures as may be
required and removing and cleaning on completion.
6) Providing samples and testing as required.
7) Preparation of shop drawings.
Additionally, the rates for system ceilings are to include for:-
9) Raking and circular cutting.
10) Forming access panels as required and openings for fittings, diffusers,
light fittings, speakers and the like including additional supports.
11) Edge trims
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/17
8 METALWORK (Cont'd)
8.3 ALUMINIUM WORKS AND STAINLESS STEEL WORKS
The rates inserted for each item of aluminium works and stainless steel
works shall be held to include for:-
1) All mullions, transomes, heads, cills, packing pieces, glazing beads,

flashing pieces for external panels and all such framed components.
2) All cutting, fitting, mitreing, framing, jointing angles, junctions, heading

joints, short lengths, waste, closed ends, shaped ends and any sundry
items of a like nature.
3) All screws, nuts, bolts, lugs, holes, threading, fasteners, fixing, devices
and any sundry items of a like nature.
4) All fittings, ironmongery and any sundry items of a like nature.
5) All other sundry and associated work described in the Specification and
shown on the drawings necessary to complete the works.
6) Grouting or sealant to the gaps around door/window frames and

brick/concrete walls.
7) All necessary welding of stainless steel works, filing smooth and polish
to match the required finishes.
8) Treating surfaces in contact with steel at intersections with approved

epoxy paint.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/18
9 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES
9.1 IN-SITU FINISHES
1) Additional thickness required due to structural tolerances, keying, etc.
3) Temporary rules, temporary grounds, temporary screeds and the like.
4) Cramps, dowels, ties, special metal supporting brackets and the like.
5) Cutting holes, notching and the like.
6) Masking, labour to internal angles other than coved angles.
7) Making good around pipes, sanitary fixtures and the like.
8) Making good around frames, light fittings, grilles, switches, sockets,

brackets and the like.
9) Joints between different types of finishes including 150mm wide strip of

expanded metal lathing. Joints between new and old work.
10) Internal angles, fair edges, arrises and quirks, grooves, V-Joints,
throats, groin points and other intersections of curved surfaces.
11) Rounded coves and external angles not exceeding 25mm radius.
12) Mitres, stops, etc., on all the foregoing and on cornices, mouldings,
architraves, enrichments, coves, skirtings, gutters, and strings.
13) Raking out joints or hacking any surfaces to form key.
15) Protecting surface from the weather or building operations.
16) Movement joints, including joint filling as required.
Rates for metal lathing are to include for all cutting holes, notching and any
other sundry items of a like nature.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/19
9 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES (Cont'd)
9.2 LINEAL ITEMS FOR IN-SITU FINISHES
1) Short lengths.
2) Stops, angles, ends, junctions, arrises, throatings, fair edges, etc.
9.3 CERAMIC TILES, MARBLE/GRANITE, SLATE, SLAB, BLOCK, ETC.
1) Cleaning, hacking or slurrying of sub-base to form key.
2) Wetting surfaces or soaking tiles in water before laying.
3) Joints between different types of finishes.
4) Joints between new and old finishes.
5) Groin points and other intersections of curved surfaces.
6) All normal bedding and pointing materials and additional thickness

required for bedding due to structural tolerances, keying etc.
7) Cramps, dowels, ties, special metal supporting brackets and the like.
9) Temporary rules, temporary grounds, templates, straight, raking or

circular cutting.
10) Cutting and fitting up to or around frames, grilles, air bricks, sanitary
and other fittings, pipes, brackets, cutting holes, notching, and the like.
11) External and internal angles, corners, rebated joints, moulding pieces,
rounded edges, arrises, chamfers, mitres, polished, honed or fair edges,
etc.
13) Selection of tiles and/or slabs including multiple handling and dry laying
of different colours and tones and for setting out and laying to patterns
as directed by the Architect.
14) Filling all defects, blemishes and holes with approved filler containing
matching granite chippings and polishes as directed by the Architect.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/20
9 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES (Cont'd)
9.4 LINEAL ITEMS FOR CERAMIC TILES, MARBLE/GRANITE, SLATE, SLAB,

BLOCK, ETC.
1) Short lengths.
2) Formed, cut or purpose made angles, chamfers, mitres, polished,

honed, or fair edges.
3) Junctions.
4) Ends.
6) Selection of tiles of different colours and tones and for setting out and
laying to patterns as directed by the Architect.
9.5 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE AND SCREED
Rates for waterproofing membrane and screed shall include for:-
2) Temporary rules.
3) All rounded edges, arrises, angle fillets etc.
4) Short lengths, stops, angles, junctions, ends, etc.
5) Working, dressing, dishing or fitting up to and around pipes,

outlets, gratings and other fittings of a like nature.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/21
10 ROOF PLUMBING
10.1 CAST IRON PIPES
1) All short running lengths.
2) Cutting and waste.
3) Running joints.
4) Brackets.
The rates for cast Iron Fittings are to include for:-
6) Extra joints.
10.2 STEEL PIPES
3) Sockets.
4) Connectors.
5) Backnuts.
6) Elbows and bends.
7) Fire-bends.
8) Tees.
9) Diminishing pieces.
10) Plugs.
11) Other items of a like nature.
10.3 P.V.C./uPVC PIPES
3) Running joints.
4) Brackets and hangers.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/22
11 GLAZING
11.1 GLAZING GENERALLY:-
1) All straight, raking or circular cutting.
2) Aligning patterned and wired glass
3) Springs, blocks, setting blocks, locating blocks distance pieces and the
like.
4) Waste, etc.
5) Bevelled edges ground smooth.
6) Glazing with "Arbolite" or other equal and approved special tropical

glazing putty.
7) Fixing, sprigging to wood, bedding to front, back and edges of panes.
8) Cleaning and polishing all glass inside and out.
9) Replacing all cracked or broken panes and leaving in good condition on

completion.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/23
12 PAINTING
12.1 PAINTING GENERALLY
1) All preparatory work such as rubbing down, scraping, cleaning,

stopping, etc.
2) Cutting in all edges to lines.
3) Narrow widths and girths which are included in superficial items.
4) Use of different colours to walls, doors, frames, etc., in accordance with

the colour schemes directed by the Architect.
5) Use of different tints/shades to indicate the number of each succeeding

coat applied.
6) Any additional scaffolding required.
7) Carrying out all work in accordance with the manufacturer's printed

instructions.
8) Painting to all electrical cables shall include for painting on battens,

roses etc. to match the colour of the surface to which they are fixed.
12.2 PAINTING PIPES AND GUTTERS
In addition to the above rates for painting pipes and gutters are to include
for painting on all tacks, wall hooks, holderbats, brackets, ears, etc.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/24
13 ALUMINIUM CLADDING
13.1 ALUMINIUM CLADDING GENERALLY
1) Design costs and cost effects of the amplification and pricing factors
contained in the Specialist Specification.
2) Stainless steel or aluminium works shall include everything for the

complete installation including all supports, fixing accessories, flashings,
cappings, matching hardware, thermal separator, weather stripping,
opening lights, packing around and into frames with cement mortar,
infilled with backer rod and pointing with silicone sealant properly
chaulked.
3) Glazing shall include everything necessary for the complete installation

including glazing beads, gaskets, glass adaptors, setting blocks and
silicone glazing sealants and pre-shim tapes.
4) Glass cladding shall include all necessary fixing brackets, sub-frames,

interface flashing, closures and seals between stone cladding and other
elements of cladding and structure.
5) Stone/ glass/ aluminium cladding shall include for approved paint-on

waterproof membrane to all the surfaces of the backing
concrete/masonry walls behind the cladding.
6) All other requirements/provisions contained in the Specialist

Specifications but not mentioned above.
7) Claims for cost escalation will not be entertained.
DRAINAGE WORK
14.1 DRAINAGE WORK GENERALLY:-

1) concrete haunching shall be deemed to include moulds, formwork, reinforcement,
forming holes, rebates, notchings, mortices and recesses.
2) The rate of each item of pipes shall be deemed to include the following:
a) Laying of pipes in trenches or open ground to required falls.
b) Labour and material for cutting and jointing pipework.
c) Accessories such as joints, sockets, connectors, elbows, etc.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/25
15 ROADS AND PAVINGS
15.1 ROADS AND PAVINGS GENERALLY:-

1) Unless otherwise stated, excavation, backfilling and the subsequent removal of surplus
excavated material shall be measured separately.
2) base course shall be deemed to include the supplying, depositing, spreading, levelling,
compacting, ramming and consolidating to the finished thickness.
3) premix bituminous surfacing shall be deemed to include the following:-
a) Sweeping and brushing surface prior to applying tack coats or asphalt surfacing.
b) Supplying and applying suitable tack coats wherever required.
c) Supplying and unloading of asphalt mixes as directed.
d) Supplying and laying by means of mechanical spreader/finisher, rolling and finishing of

asphalt mixes.
e) Providing the necessary construction equipment, equipment, tools, etc. and the
subsequent removal upon completion.
4) precast concrete kerbs, channels and drains shall be deemed to include all necessary
moulds, formwork, reinforcement and joints and cutting, all angles, intersections, ends,
outlets, etc.
5) precast concrete kerbs shall include for laying in alignment and finishing fair on all
exposed surfaces.
16. SITE CLEARANCE, TURFING AND TREE-PLANTING
Site Clearance, Turfing And Tree-Planting Generally :-

a) The rate for culling down trees shall be deemed to include for grubbing up roots and
filling of voids after removal of tree roots.
b) The rate of each item of turfing and planting shall be deemed to include for watering,
weeding, fertilizing, cutting, settlement, re-seeding and maintenance during the
"Maintenance Period" as specified.
17 DAYWORKS
Rates
Rates shall be applicable in respect of all work executed on a daywork basis.

During the continuance of such work, the Contractor shall keep proper records of the
names, occupations and working hours of all workmen employed for such work and the
quantities and descriptions of all materials and construction equipment employed. Such
records, receipts or vouchers must be verified by the Superintending Officer or the
Superintending Officer's Representative before payment can be effected.
(G:\Projects\22\2216\B\) P/26
Schedule of Prices
Section 1 - Preliminaries
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Item Description $ ¢
A SCOPE OF WORKS ( )
The extent of work included in this Contract shall be as described in the Contract
Documents or reasonably be inferred therefrom.
The Works to be carried out under this Contract comprise the following: which included
but not limited to:-
(1) New erection of GP Plant, Dormitories, Offices, Workshop, Guard Houses, Sub-
station and etc. and all as described in the tender drawings
(2) External Works such as premix driveway, concrete drains, boundary fence,
water detention tank, boundary fences and gates and all as described in the
tender drawings
(3) Mechanical and Electrical Services Installation
(4) Specialist Works such Layer Houses (12 Nos) & Pullet Houses (7 Nos) including
the specialised equipment, Combustion Plant building including one poultry
litter processing plant & Biofilter room air treatment, Egg Grading and Packing
System, Egg Farm washing wastewater treatment plant; all as described are
included in the Prime Cost Sums.
(5) All other works included in the contract and items as Provisional Sums
(6) External roadworks extension outside the Site boundary including boxed
drains, box culverts and tree plantings works and etc.
(7) Allow for clearing the whole site and disposal of all debris off site.
(8) The Contractor is responsible for the design of all the temporary works and
such permanent works to the extent as identified in the Contract.
(9) The Contractor is responsible to submit to all the respective Authorities to

obtain Authorities’ approval upon work completion prior to handing over to the
Employer.
The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with the descriptions in the
Contract Documents including all ancillary and other works which may be necessary to
carry out and bring to completion of the Works.
The Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and satisfy himself as to
the full extent, character and nature of the Works to be performed under this Contract.
The Employer shall not entertain any claim arising from the Contractor’s failure to
study these Documents.
LOCATION OF THE SITE AND ACCESS ( )
B The sites are located Lot 02008x Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/1
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A VISIT TO THE SITE AND SITE CONDITIONS ( )
The Contractor shall inspect and examine the Site and its surroundings, and shall
satisfy himself before submitting his Tender as to the nature of the ground or site, the
hydrological and climatic conditions, the form and nature of the Site, the quantities
and nature of the works, and materials necessary for the completion of the Works, the
means of access to the Site, the accommodation he may require and in general shall
himself obtain all necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other
circumstances which may influence or affect his Tender, regardless of whether the
information is specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings.
A set of the Soil Investigation Report with details of borehole logs and soil samples
may be examined by the Tenderer at the Structural Engineer's office by prior
arrangement for the Tenderer's information only. The Tenderer will be deemed to have
studied the Report and the soil conditions before preparing his tender. The Employer
does not warrant the accuracy of the Report.
If the Tenderer wishes to carry out additional soil investigation which involves
excavation, sounding or boring before submitting his tender at his own expense,
arrangement can be made with the Architect for access to the site.
Immediately after taking possession of the site and before commencing the work, the
Contractor shall check the actual levels and contours against those shown on the
drawings and in the event of any discrepancy, shall immediately notify the Architect.
Unless the above has been complied with, no claim for any discrepancy in the levels
and/or contours will be entertained.
Any claim by the Contractor on the ground of lack of knowledge of site conditions or
Authorities’ requirements and restrictions, etc. will not be entertained.
B SINGULAR AND PLURAL ( )
Words importing the Singular only shall also include the Plural and vice versa where
the context requires.
C SPECIFICATION ( )
The description of Works and materials in the Schedule of Prices are to be read in
conjunction with the “Pricing Preambles” contained in the Schedule of Prices and the
term “as described” shall mean as described in the Specification.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/2
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION ( )
In this Contract and throughout the Contract Documents following words shall have
the meanings hereby assigned to them:-
(1) Employer shall mean ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd
(2A) Architect shall mean Superintending Officer
(2B) Superintending shall mean OGP Konsult Pte Ltd

Officer
(3) Design Architect shall mean OGP Konsult Pte Ltd
(4) Structural Engineer shall mean OGP Konsult Pte Ltd
(5) Mechanical & shall mean ELEAD Associates Pte Ltd

Electrical Engineer
(6) Quantity Surveyor shall mean Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte Ltd
(7) Other Consultants Any such Consultants to be appointed by the

Employer and notified in writing to the
Contractor for the purposes of the Contract.
(8) His May also mean "her" or "their" and the word "he"
may also mean "she" or "they".
(9) Contractor The person, persons or firm partnership or company

contracting for these works whose tender has been
accepted by the Employer including his or their
heirs, executors or administrators.
(10) Contract and / or The Articles and Conditions of Building Contract and
Contract Documents Amendments thereto, Drawings, Specification,
Schedule of Prices, Form of Tender and Appendices,
the Architect's Letter of Acceptance and such other
letters and documents as may be agreed between
the parties. All these documents shall be read and
construed as a whole and as being complementary
to one another.
(11) Site The land or other places under, in or through which

the Works are to be executed and any other land or
places provided by the Employer for the purpose of
the Contract.
(12) Works The whole of the materials, labour, plant and other
things necessary and requisite for the proper
execution of the Contract as shown on the drawings
and in the Contract Documents and as are required
of the Main Contractor to complete the Contract.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm
(2216\B\TD) S1/3
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION (CONT'D) ( )
(13) Approved Approved in writing by the Architect.
(14) Instructed As instructed by the Architect.
(15) As Required As required in any of the Contract Documents.
(16) Construction Plant All appliances or things of whatsoever nature

required in or about the execution, construction,
completion or maintenance of the Works or
Temporary Works but does not include materials or
other things intended to form or forming part of the
permanent work.
(17) Temporary All temporary works of every kind required in or

about the execution completion or maintenance of
the Works.
(18) Local Authorities The relevant statutory bodies, federal, central and
state government departments, in so far as their
approval and/or consent are material to the
implementation of the Works or anything in
connection therewith.
(19) Drawings The drawings and any modification of such

drawings approved in writing by the Architect and
such other drawings as may from time to time be
furnished or approved in writing by the Architect.
(20) Allow Wherever the word "allow" occurs in this Contract

Document the cost of the items is at the risk of the
Contractor and no adjustments will be made at the
settlement of account except where such
adjustment is expressly provided for in the Articles
and Conditions of Building Contract.
In the absence of any price against such items, the
cost shall be deemed to be included in the rates
contained in the Schedule of Prices.
(21) Dollar or "$" "Singapore Dollar".
(22) Day Calendar day of twenty-four hours.
(23) Month A Gregorian calendar month. All time periods shall

be calculated according to the Gregorian calendar.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm
(2216\B\TD) S1/4
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A INSPECTION OF DRAWINGS ( )
The Drawings for this Contract are those listed in the Tender Documents and any
further drawings which may be issued in amplification thereof. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have examined the Drawings prior to submission of his tender. No claim for
extras consequent upon non-examination of Drawings will be considered.
B PREPARATION OF TENDERS ( )
(a) Tendering Expenses
The tenderer shall bear all expenses incurred by him in the preparation and
submission of his tender. The lowest or any tender will not necessarily be
accepted and in no case will any claim for expenses incurred by the tenderer be
entertained.
(b) Lump Sum Tender
The tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied him before tendering as to the
sufficiency and correctness of his Tender for the Works.
(c) Alteration to Text
The Contractor shall make no alteration to the text of the Documents. If he

makes any alteration, addition or note, such alteration, addition or note will not
be recognised and the Documents as originally prepared by the Architect/other
Consultants will strictly adhered to, unless and until the Architect has approved
any such alteration in writing.
(d) Pursuant to Clause 5(2) of the Conditions of Contract, the Contract shall indicate
by an appropriate key letter those items in these Preliminaries requiring
adjustment based on the quantities of work carried out (Letter Q), those items
requiring adjustment based on the time required to carry out the work (Letter
T), and those items of expenditure which are of once-for-all or fixed character
and independent of quantities or time (Letter F).
(e) Pricing of Tenders
(i) In the pricing of this tender, the Schedule of Prices shall be read in
conjunction with the Specification and other parts of the Contract
Documents.
(ii) Every item in this Schedule of Prices which has a monetary value shall be
priced. Any item which is not priced and is without any remarks indicating
its inclusion elsewhere in the Schedule of Prices shall be deemed to be of
no monetary value.
(iii) The sum of the amounts of all items priced by the Contractor shall truly
represent the Tender Amount for those items.
The price set down by the Contractor against each item, unless expressly
provided to the contrary, shall be held to include for all the design works,
the supply of materials including cutting and waste, unloading, storage,
packing, carriage and cartage, hoisting; all labour for fabricating, setting,
fitting and fixing in position; use of plant, supervision, establishment
charges, duty, profit and any other expense and everything else necessary
for the due and proper completion of each item.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/5
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
PREPARATION OF TENDERS (Cont’d)
(e) Pricing of Tenders (cont’d)
(iv) All rates and prices in the Schedule of Prices shall be exclusive of Goods
and Services Tax (GST).
(v) The amount appearing, as the total of the Schedule of Prices shall be
transferred to the Form of Tender without any alteration or rounding off.
(f) Correction of Errors in Pricing, Extension, etc.
Should the Contractor make any errors in his extensions and/or casts or in
carrying forward to or in casts of the summary, such errors shall, before the
signing of the Contract, be so rectified and adjusted that, when correctly
calculated, the total of the Final Summary shall represent the same amount as
that tendered by the Contractor in the Form of Tender. The nett aggregate
amount of such errors, whether a nett deduction or a nett addition, will be
calculated as a percentage of the total of the Final Summary of the Schedule of
Prices (excluding Prime Costs and Provisional Sums) and all unit rates
throughout the Schedule of Prices shall be subject to such percentage discount
or premium as the case may be. Provided always that Provisional or Prime Cost
Sums shall be excluded from the calculation and shall not be subject to such
percentage discount or premium.
(g) Sufficiency of Tender and Firm Prices
The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to

the correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the Works and of the prices
stated in these Schedule of Prices, which prices shall cover all his obligations
under the Contract and all matters and things necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Works including any duties, customs and excise
and transport expenses. No claims will be entertained in respect of increase in
cost of materials, labour, duties, transportation expenses, etc., above the
corresponding prices prevailing at the time of tender.
(h) Allowance for Overtime Work
(i) The Contractor is to note that the Competent Authority will not permit any
work or operations to be carried out on Sundays, Public Holidays and any
other day between the hours of 7.00pm and 7.00am. The Contractor shall
adhere to all prevailing guidelines.
(ii) The Contractor, if he considers that it may be necessary to cause the

workmen to work overtime in order to complete the Works or any section
thereof by the corresponding dates for completion, shall allow here against
this item for such overtime including the provision of additional plant,
equipment facilities and any other additional expenses in connection
therewith.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/6
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
PREPARATION OF TENDERS (Cont’d)
(h) Allowance for Overtime Work (Cont’d)
(iii) The Contractor shall note that the normal working hours of the Employer’s
resident Site Staff are as follows :-
Monday to Friday : 8.00am to 5.00pm

Saturday : 8.00am to 12.00 noon
Any work which requires “Standing” supervision e.g., concreting, mixing of

cement and sand for plastering or screeding and mixing of paints etc. shall
be organised and programmed in such a way so as to carry out these
works within the stipulated working hours for Consultant’s and/or
Employer’s Site Supervisory Staff. The prior written permission of the
Architect shall be obtained if, in the urgency of the case, such work is
required to be carried out beyond the stipulated hours.
Overtime payments (including CPF contributions) to the Employer’s Site

Supervisory Staff for overtime supervision requested by the Contractor
and/or required by the Architect will be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall keep records of overtime works and obtain the
necessary endorsement from the Architect.
(iv) Should the Contractor refrain from pricing the above items it shall be
deemed that the Contractor has made allowances for all necessary
overtime and expenses elsewhere in the Schedule of Prices? Any
subsequent claim for overtime expenses will not be considered.
A WORKING HOURS ( )
Any work which requires "Standing" supervision e.g., concreting, shall be organised
and programmed in such a way so as to carry out these works within the stipulated
working hours for Consultant's and/or Employer's Site Supervisory Staff. The prior
written permission of the Architect shall be obtained if, in the urgency of the case,
such work is required to be carried out beyond the stipulated hours.
When overtime is carried out, the Contractor shall submit weekly returns to the
Architect showing work done on Sundays/Public Holidays or beyond the normal
working day.
B CUSTOMS RESTRICTIONS, QUOTAS AND DUTIES, ETC ( )
The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of all customs,
restrictions, quotas and duties and shall allow in his rates for all such financial
contingencies, as he has to incur at the time of this tender and may have to incur
thereafter.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/7
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SCHEDULE OF RATES ( )
In making adjustments for extra works or works omitted from the Contract, the rates
for such work shown in the Schedule of Rates shall be used, and nothing shall be
added to or deducted from those rates to cover profit, overhead and/or other charges.
In the case of differing rates occurring between rates for identical or similar items in
the various sub-sections of the Schedule of Rates, the rates, or pro-rata rates, in the
respective Sub-sections will be used for the valuation of variations.
The Contractor shall permit the requisite number of copies of his prices, extensions
and casts to be made for the purpose of the Contract.
B LOSS OF PROFIT ( )
No claims for any loss of profit will be considered due to any omission of Works by the
Employer.
C COPIES OF PRICES ( )
The Contractor shall permit the requisite number of copies of his prices, extensions
and casts to be made for the purpose of the Contract.
D ARTICLES AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ( )
The form of Contract to be used shall be as those contained in the SIA Building
Contract 2016 (Without Quantities) – 1st Edition July 2017 published by Singapore
Institute of Architects with its Amendments.
If the Contractor considers that any of the Conditions involves expense, he shall
allow hereunder the monetary value for complying with each of the terms, and any
amendments thereto, of the Conditions of Contract which are as follows:
ARTICLES OF CONTRACT
Article 1. Contractor's Obligations
Article 2. Type of Contract (Delete second Sub-Clause 2(3)(b))
Note: Interim payment shall be by periodical valuation of the Works

in accordance with Clause 31(1), 31(2) and the Appendix.
Article 3. Architect
Article 4. Quantity Surveyor
Article 5. Consultants
Article 6. Employer’s Representative
Article 7. Contractor’s Representative
Article 8. Prices to be inclusive (Amended)
Article 9. Contract Documents (Amended)
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/8
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
ARTICLES AND CONDITIONS OF BUILDING CONTRACT (CONT'D)( )
ARTICLES OF CONTRACT (Cont'd)
Clause 10. Interpretation and Construction of Contract Documents
Clause 11. Assigns
Clause 12. Applicable Law
Clause 13. Appropriate Forum
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Clause 1. Architect's Directions and Instructions
Clause 2. Methods of Working and Temporary Works
Clause 3. Design and Completion Responsibilities
Clause 4. Programme
Clause 5. Make-up of Contractor's Prices
Clause 6. Administration
Clause 7. Statutory Obligations
Note: The Contractor is to allow for paying all fees, charges, rates and
taxes legally demandable except for fees for permanent connections
to all services and supervision fees due to public authorities.
Clause 8. Setting Out and Levelling Proposal
Setting out is to be carried out by a Licensed Surveyor. Reference

pegs and marks are to be provided as requested by the Architect.
Maintain, protect and reinstate such pegs and marks as required by
the Architect for the duration of this Contract.
All relevant information of setting out and final pre-comp plan of the
proposed building are to be deposited with the Architect within two
weeks from the date of commencement of work. Within seven (7)
days after the completion of the Works, a confirmatory survey is to be
provided and five copies of certified plans are to be submitted to the
Architect.
Allow for all costs in connection with the above works.
Clause 9. Access for Architect, Quantity Surveyor and Consultants
Clause 10. Possession of Site and Commencement of Work
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/9
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (Cont'd)
Clause 11. Materials, Goods and Workmanship
Note: The Contractor shall allow for carrying out all tests required by
the Architect and/or Engineer.
The Contractor must provide samples of all materials to be used for

the Works for Architect's approval. Failure to supply correct types of
materials within sufficient time for Architect's approval will not
constitute valid reasons for the Contractor to claim extra variations
and/or extension of time.
Clause 12. Variations and Valuation of Additional Payments (Amended)
Note: The Contractor is to allow here or include in his prices for all
costs incurred in the preparation and submission of claims for
Variation and Final Account.
The Contractor MUST submit to the Quantity Surveyor before the

issue of each claim for progress payment a detailed statement of all
variation to-date.
The detailed statement shall contain the following information:-
a) Reference and dates of Architect's Instructions
b) Details and drawings showing the variation works
c) Descriptions of the items constituting the variation works
d) Quantities, rates and totals of the variation works
e) Signature by the Resident Site Staff or Resident Engineer, wherever

necessary or as may be directed by the Architect
Unless and until the above have been complied with by the
Contractor, claims based on estimated costs of any variation may not
be recommended by the Quantity Surveyor.
Notwithstanding whether there be any increase or decrease or

deduction wholly or in part of any time or money expended or
deducted wholly or in part under the Contract, the Contractor shall
have no claim whatsoever for loss of profit or head office expenditure
caused by such expenditure or deduction.
Any increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost brought about by

any authorities or legislation shall NOT affect the Contract Sum or this
Contract.
Clause 13. Contract Sum and Schedule of Rates and Prices
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/10
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Clause 14. Discrepancy or Divergence
Note: The Contractor is fully responsible for checking all dimensions in

all contract and construction drawings for correctness and accuracy.
The Contractor must report immediately any discrepancy to the
Architect and to apply for his direction or instruction thereto.
The Contractor is fully responsible for verifying any discrepancy

between the drawings and Schedule of Prices / the Schedule of Unit
Rates, and/or Specification and to apply to the Architect and/or
Engineers for specific directions or instructions thereto.
Clause 15. Assignment and Sub-Contracting
Clause 16. Plant and Materials
Note: Certain sections of the Site may be allocated for storing

materials and the Contractor is to note that these areas will be strictly
adhered to. Materials or goods in unauthorised areas must be
immediately removed and the areas made good.
Clause 17. Artists, Tradesmen and Other Contractors
Clause 18. Indemnities to Employer
In this connection, the Contractor is deemed to have agreed to furnish

the Employer with whatever written guarantee and/or indemnity which
may be required by any relevant Authorities in connection with the
Contractor's design (if applicable) and execution of the Works.
Clause 19. Insurance Against Injury to Persons and Property and Work Injury
Compensation (Amended)
Clause 20. Insurance of Works (Amended)
Pricing Notes for Insurances
Without limiting the obligations and responsibility of the Contractor

under Clauses 18, 19 and 20 of the Conditions of Building Contract,
the Contractor shall affect a Work Injury Compensation Policy and a
Contractors' All Risks Policy with an insurance company approved by
the Employer.
All insurance policies shall be in the joint names of Employer and

Contractor. The insured shall include the Consultants, the agent and
servants of the employer, Contractor and all sub-contractors and
Employer’s direct contractors (of any tier, including designated and
nominated sub-contractors).
The period of insurance shall be from the Date of Site Possession until
Contract Completion and/or Extended Contract Completion until the
expiry of the Maintenance Period or until the issuance of Maintenance
Certificate whichever is later.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/11
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Clause 20. Insurance of Works (Amended) (Cont’d)
Pricing Notes for Insurances (Cont’d)
The Work Injury Compensation Policy shall cover all employees of the
Contractor and all Sub-Contractors engaged in connection with the
Contract at the Site and elsewhere whilst engaged in business
connected with the Contract. The following Exceptions of the Policy
shall be deleted:
a) The Insured liability to employees of Independent contractors or
sub-contractors engaged by the Insured.
b) any employee of the Insured who is not a "workmen" within the

meaning of the Legislation.
The Contractor's All Risks Policy shall provide "all risks" cover in
respect of loss of or damage to the Contract Works and third party
liability, including but not limiting to the following covers :
a) Professional Fee Clause (1.5%)
b) Removal of Debris (1%)
c) Cover for Loss or Damage Due to strike, riot and civil

commotion
d) Cross-liability Clause
e) Underground Cables and Services Warranty
f) Loss-Payee Clause
g) Goods and Services Tax (GST) at the prevailing rate
h) Employer’s Direct Suppliers and Direct Contractors
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses in connection
with the provision of insurance coverage to visitors on site in respect
of personal injuries or death arising out of or in the course of or by
reason of the carrying out of the Works whether due to any
negligence, omission, breach of contract, default of Contractor or
otherwise.
Cover for the Contract Works shall include all unfixed goods and
materials delivered on or adjacent to the Site. The sum insured shall
be the full reinstatement value thereof plus the percentage to cover
professional fees as stated in the Appendix to the Conditions of
Contract plus Goods and Services Tax (GST) at the prevailing rate.
The limit on amount insured for third party liability shall not be less
than $3 million as stated in the Appendix [19(1)(b)] for any one
accident, the number of accidents being unlimited during the period of
insurance.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/12
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Clause 20. Insurance of Works (Amended) (Cont’d)
Pricing Notes for Insurances (Cont’d)
The Contractor shall extend the third party liability provision to cover
any damage, expense, liability, loss, claim or proceedings which the
Employer may incur or sustain due to injury or damage of any kind to
any property real or personal (other than the Works) arising out of or
in the course of or by reason of the carrying out of the Works and
caused by collapse, subsidence, vibration, weakening or removal of
support or lowering of ground water other than damage caused by the
negligence, omission or default of the Contractor, his servants or
agents or of any sub-contractor, his servants or agents. (amended
Clause 19(2)(a) of the Conditions)
The Contractor shall take out and pay all premiums in respect of the
abovementioned insurance policies and any other insurance policy
which he considers to be necessary to meet his obligations pursuant
to this Contract.
All insurance policies shall be deposited with the Architect and

evidence of the payment of the insurance premiums must be
presented to the Architect who, on receipt of such evidence will
include the amount shown or the amount included for insurance
premiums in the Contract Sum whichever is the lesser, for such
purchase of insurance policies in an interim certificate. The balance if
any, up to the amount included in the Contract Sum will be paid in
monthly instalments throughout the whole contract period.
Any deductibles/excesses that the Contractor elects to carry is a

matter between the Contractor and the insurance company issuing the
insurance policy/policies and should be solely borne by the Contractor.
Clause 21. Due Diligence by Contractor
Clause 22. Time for Completion
Clause 23. Extension of Time (Amended)
The Contractor will be responsible for the premium in connection with

extending the period(s) of insurance cover in the event that the
Contractor fails to complete the Works by completion date/extended
completion date fixed in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor is to note that no extension of time will be given in

respect of adverse weather conditions, shortage of labour and material
and he should take this into account in this tender.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/13
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Clause 24. Delay in Completion and Liquidated Damages
Clause 25. Phased or Stage Completion: Severability
Clause 26. Partial Occupation and Partial Re-Entry (Amended)
Clause 27. Maintenance (Amended)
Clause 28. Designated and Nominated Sub Contractors and Suppliers
Clause 29. Nomination and Rights of Objection
Clause 30. Payment of Nominated Sub Contractors and Suppliers
Clause 31. Payment of Contractor and Interim Certificates (Amended)
Note: The Contractor must allow here for all costs involved in
preparation and submission of statements of construction costs,
material valuations and statements of completion of work.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed statement of the value of work

done and materials on Site and shall apply to the Architect with a copy
to the Quantity Surveyor, at the Period of Interim Certificates for the
issue of an interim certificate.
Invoices, delivery orders of materials for the Works and which are
properly placed on site shall be submitted together with the
application for progress payment.
No interim certificate will be issued without adequate vouchers and

information provided by the Contractor.
All applications for payment shall be submitted in the same format
and adaptable to an approved spreadsheet programme as the
Breakdown of Tender giving descriptions, quantities and rates of such
item.
Before application to the Architect for any certificate after the first
certificate the Contractor shall satisfy the Quantity Surveyor that all
payments for the work done by Designated/Nominated Sub-
Contractors and materials or goods supplied by Designated/Nominated
Suppliers have been made up to date of the previous certificate.
Final certificate to the Contractor will only be issued when all the sub-
contractors have submitted the necessary as-built drawings and the
maintenance manuals to the Employer, Architect and M & E Engineer.
Clause 32. Termination by Employer
Clause 33. Termination and Suspension by Contractor
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/14
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
ARTICLES AND CONDITIONS OF BUILDING CONTRACT (CONT'D ( )
Clause 34. Outbreak of War or Hostilities
Clause 35. War Damage
Clause 36. Antiquities
Clause 37. Arbitration
Clause 38. Mediation
Clause 39. Expert Determination
Clause 40. Statutory Adjudication Under SOP Act (Amended)
Clause 41. Optional Clause for Fluctuation (Deleted)
Clause 42. Optional Clause for Permitting Insurance Excess (Deleted)
Clause 43. Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 2001 (Inserted)
Clause 44. Publicity (Inserted)
Clause 45. Relationship (Added)
Clause 46. No Entitlement to Indirect or Consequential Loss (Added)
Clause 47. Employer’s Right of Set-off (Added)
Appendix [Note: The description below the heading of the relevant clauses of the
Conditions of Contract are inserted in amplification for the guidance of
the Contractor who will nevertheless be fully responsible for taking
into account all the implications of the SIA Building Contract 2016 and
any Addendum and Amendments thereto]
A CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS ( )
Prior to the time of every Interim Valuation of the Works the Contractor shall submit to
the Quantity Surveyor the following:-
(a) A detailed statement relating to the items in the Schedule of Prices showing the
Value of the Work executed in an agreed format and adaptable to Microsoft
Excel of other approved spreadsheet programme. All variations must be
submitted in detailed breakdown within one month after completion of the
variations.
(b) The Interim payment application shall be lodged with the Quantity Surveyor not
exceeding seven (7) days before date of the Interim Valuation.
B PAYMENTS TO SUB-CONTRACTORS & SUPPLIERS ( )
At the time of every valuation for interim certificate the Contractor is to submit to the
Quantity Surveyor a statement from each of the Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
showing:-
(a) The details of their claims including delivery orders if requested
(b) The amount received from the Contractor to date.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/15
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SETTLEMENT OF ACCOUNTS ( )
At the time of the settlement of accounts, the Contractor is to obtain a statement from
each of the Sub-Contractors and Suppliers that the sums to be included in the
settlement of accounts in respect of each Sub-Contractor and Supplier are accepted in
full and final settlement of their Sub-Contracts.
B INVOICES, RECEIPTS, ETC ( )
The Contractor shall at all times give every reasonable assistance to the Architect.
When requested the Contractor shall produce for inspection/ retention all time sheets,
delivery notes, invoices, accounts, receipts, test certificates and such other vouchers
and records as the Architect may require in connection with the Contract in the
preparation of the Final Account.
All the above-mentioned documents to be submitted shall be either the original or

certified true copies.
C REFERENCE DOCUMENTS ( )
Provide at the site one (1) copy of each of the following documents for general
reference:-
a) Contract Documents
b) Reviewed shop drawings
c) Approved samples. (Contractor is to provide proper labels, classification and

schedules. Such samples shall be stored in an orderly manner for easy
reference.)
d) Architect's Instructions and Directions
e) Inspection Reports
f) Copy of all permits issued to the Contractor
g) Daily report/diary
h) Contractor's Works Programme including all updates
i) Sub-Contractors' Programmes
D DISCREPANCIES ( )
Before commencement of each part of the works, the Contractor shall ensure that
there are no discrepancies between the drawings. Any discrepancy must be referred to
the Architect immediately. Any remedial work necessitated by the failure of the
Contractor to ensure that there is no discrepancy between the aforesaid drawings shall
be borne by the Contractor.
Should any discrepancy be discovered in any of the documents contained in this

Contract, the Contractor shall immediately refer the matter to the Architect before the
work is put in hand. The Architect will decide as to which document will take
precedence and his decision will be final.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/16
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A DIMENSIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION ( )
Figured dimensions on the drawings shall be followed in all cases. Where dimensions
are omitted or where discrepancies are found the Contractor shall notify the Architect
and seek his written direction.
The Contractor shall check the whole of the dimensions on site and if any discrepancy
is found between the drawings and conditions on site, he shall notify the Architect
immediately and request instructions.
B CONTRACTOR'S SUBMISSIONS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

( )
Before commencement of any work on the site, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect the following documents for approval:
(1) The Performance Bond
(2) The requisite Insurance Policies, other than policies procured by Employer
together with receipts of premium paid
(3) The Works Programme as specified herein
(4) Method Statements together with diagrams, charts or other illustrations in

respect of any complicated works such as post-tension and precast concrete
structures, transfer beams, structural works for typical floor, temporary
protection works, etc. The Contractor shall obtain his P.E.’s endorsement for
all temporary works design, calculations and proposals
(5) Forecast of the number of workers (both skilled and unskilled) for various
trades to be employed during various stages of the Works
(6) A Site Organisation Chart of the Contractor's Site Management personnel
together with their respective resume of qualification and experience (see
detailed requirements of Site Management provided hereinafter)
(7) Layout plan of any temporary building or structures to be erected within the
site boundary.
8) Schedule of Construction Plant and Equipment such as cranes, passenger
hoist, etc. together with a deployment plan thereof
(9) Schematic or shop diagrams of any system formwork, scaffolding and other
temporary works
(10) Method Statements of hoisting and lifting operations
(11) A safety procedure manual outlining all the 13 elements of the safety
management system as specified by the Factories Act. The manual should
include safety standards (in comparison with MOL’s industry’s target) on
fatality, Loss Time Injury Frequency (LTIF) and Total Recordable Injury
Frequency (TRIF).
(12) Fire Escape Plan
(13) Noise Control Management Plan;
(14) Risk Assessment Report
The submission of the above documents shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility or obligations under the Contract.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/17
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS CHARTS OF THE WORKS ( )
(i) The Contractor shall submit with his tender a Preliminary Programme
indicating the dates he proposes to commence and complete the various
operations and sections of the Works.
(ii) Upon the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit within fourteen
days an overall Works Programme. The Contractor's Works Programme must
include the Works of all Sub-Contractors and supply of all Suppliers and all the
Specialist Works and Employer’s Direct Contract wrorks.
(ii) The Architect reserves the right to examine and check the feasibility of the
programme, and, if necessary, make suggestions for alterations to the
programme so as to ensure timely completion. The Contractor shall allow for
submission of revised programme as and when required.
(iv) Should the rate of progress of the Works or any part thereof at any time in the
opinion of the Architect be such that the approved programmed and any
agreed revision thereof is not being maintained, the Architect shall give notice
thereof to the Contractor and the Contractor shall thereupon take such steps
as the Contractor may consider necessary (including the employment of
additional labour and acquisition of additional materials, plant, machinery and
equipment), at his own cost, to ensure that progress is maintained in
accordance with the programme and that completion is achieved by the due
date.
B CONTRACTOR'S SITE LAYOUT ( )
The location of all material, major plant, temporary mobile toilets, temporary access,
temporary rubbish disposal areas, and the like shall be submitted for the approval of
the Architect in the form of layout plans clearly indicating the level, load and any
attachment to the permanent structure.
The layout plans (including fire escape route and hoarding layout) must be submitted
for the Architect's approval at least two (2) weeks prior to the commencement of
erection on site.
C TEMPORARY OCCUPATION LICENCE (TOL) FEE FOR LAND OUTSIDE

CONTRACT BOUNDAR ( )
The Contractor shall take over the ownership of the TOL land at the site from the
Employer. The Contractor shall at his own costs and expenses, pay all TOL fees,
comply with the all the terms and conditions for the use and maintenance of and
access to the said land imposed by the relevant Authority. The Contractor shall
reinstate the land to its original condition before handing over the land back to the
relevant Authority and/or Employer.
The Contractor shall bear all the cost implication related to maintain the TOL and to
pay for the fees charged for the duration of the Contract Period and any subsequent
extension to the period of completion.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/18
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SITE MANAGEMENT STAFF ( )
Provide for all on and off-site management and supervisory costs, including but not
limited to :
(a) A full-time Project Manager with minimum ten (10) years proven management
experience who shall supervise & administrate all works on site. (i.e., must be
fully service for the entire contract period including 12 months maintenance
period).
(b) A full-time Structural Engineer with minimum five (5) years proven experience
(including relevant experience for structural steel works) who shall supervise &
administrate all works on site.
(c) A full-time M&E Engineer with minimum five (5) years proven experience who
shall supervise & administrate all works on site.
(d) A full-time Architectural Co-ordinator with minimum five (5) years proven
experience who shall supervise & administrate all works on site.
(e) A full-time BIM Manager with minimum five (5) years proven experience &
administrate all works on site
(f) A full-time BIM Co-ordinator with minimum three (3) years proven experience
& administrate all works on site
(g) A full-time Safety Officer with minimum five (5) years proven experience who
are familiar with BOWEC specification and other safety specification/
requirements.
(h) A full-time Foreman-in-charge with proven experience who shall co-ordinate all
aspects of Interior Decoration Finishing and Furnishing Works on site.
(i) Other technical staff as listed in the relevant Appendix to the Form of Tender.
ji) The Contractor shall note that should additional staff to those offered be
considered necessary by the Architect to supervise and administer the Works,
the Contractor is to provide such additional staff at no extra cost to the
Employer.
B DISMISSAL OF CONTRACTOR’S STAFF/EMPLOYEES ( )
The Contractor shall, by the written request of the Architect or his representative on
the Site, immediately dismiss from the Works any person employed by him thereon
who may in the opinion of the Architect, be incompetent or has misconduct himself,
and such person shall not again be employed on the work without the written
permission of the Architect.
C LABOUR ON-COSTS ( )
Provide for all costs in respect of workmen for Central Provident Fund contribution
and/or Government levy on foreign workers, payroll tax and contribution to Skills
Development Fund, as applicable, Annual and Public Holidays, Travelling Time,
expenses, fares and transport, Non-productive time and other expenses in connection
with overtime, Incentive and bonus payments, accommodation, etc. Any other
disbursements arising from employment of labour.
Allow for any items of expenditure which are not allowed elsewhere such as travelling
time and fares and any other costs due to importing labour and management from
other countries.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/19
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
LABOUR ON-COSTS (CONT’D
Maintain on the Works as large a labour force in the various trades as can be used
with efficiency and consistent with the agreed construction schedule
A THE EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS ACT CAP 91A, 1997 EDN AND THE
IMMIGRATION ACT CAP 133, 1985 EDN ( )
The Contractor undertakes that it will :
(1) not employ and ensure that its sub-contractors will not employ any Foreign
Worker as defined under the Employment of Foreign Workers Act Cap 91A, its
subsidiary legislation and/or all enactment or re-enactment thereof
(hereinafter collectively referred to as ‘the Employment of Foreign Workers
Act’) unless the Contractor or its sub-contractors has obtained in respect of
the Foreign Worker valid work permit required by the Employment of Foreign
Workers Act which allows the Foreign Worker to work for the Contractor or its
sub-contractors. The Contractor shall ensure that the said employment of the
Foreign Worker is in accordance with the conditions of the work permit;
(2) not harbour or employ and ensure that its sub-contractors do not harbour or
employ any person who has acted in contravention of the provisions of the
Immigration Act Cap 133, its subsidiary legislation and/or all enactment or re-
enactment thereof (hereinafter collectively referred to as ‘the Immigration
Act’);
(3) not contravene any of the provisions of the Employment of Foreign Workers
Act and/or the Immigration Act;
(4) comply with the provisions of the Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or
Immigration Act in respect of foreign workers/foreigners; and
(5) not permit any person who has contravened the provisions of the Immigration
Act entry or remaining at the work site.
The Contractor shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Employer against any
damage, expense, liability, loss, claims, proceedings and/or penal sanction
whatsoever arising out of or by reason of the commission of any offence under the
Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or the Immigration Act or the non-
compliance with any provisions thereof and of any breach or default of the
undertaking to be submitted in accordance with the specimen appended to the Form
of Tender.
Any breach or default by the Contractor of any of the above-mentioned undertaking
shall be construed as a fundamental breach of this Contract which would entitle the
Employer to terminate the employment of the Contractor pursuant to the Conditions
of Contract.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Employer will not consent nor in any way condone
the contravention of any of the provisions of the Employment of Foreign Workers Act
and/or the Immigration Act. The Employer shall therefore be entitled, but not under
any obligation to, at any time & from time to time, with or without prior notice, carry
out checks and inspections of the Contractor’s workers as well as the workers of the
sub-contractors to ascertain whether there is any contravention of the provisions of
the Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or the Immigration Act.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/20
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
THE EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS ACT CAP 91A, 1997 EDN AND THE
IMMIGRATION ACT CAP 133, 1985 EDN (CONT’D)
Where in the Employer’s opinion or suspicion, there is or may be a contravention of

any provision of the Employment of Foreign Workers Act and/or the Immigration
Act, the Employer shall be entitled, in respect of such a contravention, to deny entry
and/or evict any person employed by the Contractor and/or its sub-contractors from
the Site. In such an event, the Contractor and/or its sub-contractors shall not have
any claim or recourse whatsoever against the Employer.
THE EMPLOYMENT OF FOREIGN WORKERS ACT CAP 91A, 1997 EDN AND THE
IMMIGRATION ACT CAP 133, 1985 EDN (CONT’D) ( )
The Contractor shall exercise due diligence to check the passport, document of
identity or travel document of the worker and to prevent illegal foreign workers from
entering and/or remaining at the work site.
Random periodic spot checks of workers’ quarters (especially after office hours)
should also be conducted by the Contractor. The Contractor is required to submit
written confirmation on a quarterly basis that no illegal workers are in their
employment and/or remaining at the work site.
To facilitate checks and inspections, the Contractor shall :
(1) ensure that all its workers as well as its sub-contractors’ Foreign Workers
and/or workers who are non-Singapore citizens shall have in their possession
the respective valid work permits as required under the Employment of
Foreign Workers Act and/or permits and/or passes as required under the
Immigration Act;
(2) give written confirmation that they have verified with the Immigration
Authorities/Controller of Work Permits on the validity and currency of the
passports, work permits and other related documents of the foreign workers
in their employment.
(3) maintain and update the foreign workers’ Register at all times, such
Register to contain the particulars as required by the Employment of Foreign
Workers Act;
(4) take appropriate physical measures such as posting of clear and bold
prohibition notices at all entrances and appropriate locations on the work site.
(5) installation and maintenance of proper fencing and hoarding around the site.
(6) provide 24-hour deployment of security guards at the entry/exit points to

permit only workmen with security passes entry into the site and screen all
workmen entering and remaining at the work site.
(7) issue serially numbered security passes to all workers on Site, provided that
for foreign workers and/or non-Singapore citizens, the security passes shall
only be issued to those who have valid work permits, and/or permits and/or
passes;
(8) cancel the issue of the security passes upon the cessation of the employment
of the foreign worker or withdrawal/cancellation of the work permit;
(9) ensure that such security passes must be worn at all times by all the
workers on Site. Photographs and appropriate identification details of the
workers should be prominently displayed on these passes.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/21
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SECURITY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENT ( )
The Contractor shall be responsible for the strict compliance and observance of all
requirements of the Workplace Safety and Health Act 2007 (WSHA) and any
subsequent amendments. The Contractor shall attend the DFS Workshop and
involvement in DFS Guide 3 prior to the Commencement of the works.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all costs & expenses incurred
resulting from any infringement of the Act by the Contractor. (e.g., fines imposed by
the Authorities, etc.)
The Contractor shall provide safety helmets, safety boots, safety harness, etc. for his
workmen (including those employed by his Sub-Contractors) employed on the site,
including consultants and visitors, and to fully comply with all the requirements laid
down in the Workplace Safety and Health Act (WSHA) and any subsequent
regulations or bye-laws with regard to safety requirements applicable in the Republic
of Singapore.
The Contractor shall provide and install temporary warning lights and lightning
conductors where required and to strictly comply with the requirements of the
relevant Authorities.
The Contractor shall employ safety officer(s) who shall be responsible to ensure that
all requisite safety requirements and measures have been satisfactorily implemented
and observed by everyone on Site.
The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for any delays due to stoppage
works on site by the Authorities for any non-compliance with the Workplace Safety
and Health Act 2007 (WSHA) and any subsequent amendments.
The Contractor shall hold fortnightly site safety meetings and shall submit a
fortnightly Safety Report to the Architect in a format to be approved by the
Architect.
B SAFETY AUDIT ( )
The Contractor shall employ an approved independent safety consultancy company to

conduct inspections and audits on the safety measures implemented and maintained
at the project site. Such inspections and audits shall be carried out according to the
prevailing guidelines or other agreed interval for the duration of the contract period.
The Contractor shall deliver the safety inspection and audit reports to the
Superintendent Officer or Architect within seven (7) days from the date of receipt of
each of the reports from the safety consultancy company. Such reports shall include
the observations (and corrective actions required) and the recommendations
necessary for construction safety. Such recommendations for the improvement of the
site safety shall be implemented immediately by the Contractor.
The safety inspection and audit shall not, in any way whatsoever, relieve the
Contractor of his duty to comply with all requirements of any statutory act or
regulation and any amendment or re-enactment thereto or any additional measures
that may be required to ensure the adequacy and sufficiency of the safety provisions
at the site.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/22
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A PROTECTION HELMETS, BOOTS, ETC ( )
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary protection and safety helmets,
safety boots, safety belts and equipment for all the workmen, Contractor’s Site Staff,
Resident Supervisory Staff, Consultants and their representatives and all authorised
visitors to site.
The Contractor shall provide the Resident Supervisory Staff and Consultants a
minimum number of the following:-
(a) Safety helmets - 15 nos.
(b) Safety boots - 15 pairs
(c) LED Torch lights with batteries - 5 nos.
Provide adequate storage and maintenance facilities for the above and replacement
batteries for torch lights as and when required.
B FIRST AID FACILITIES ( )
The Contractor shall provide adequate first aid facilities suitable to the size and
composition of his staff and labour force. The Contractor shall afford the Site
Supervising team full use of the services and facilities when required.
C PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS ( )
Within three (3) days of the award of the Contract or such date as directed by the
Architect, a meeting shall be held to discuss and resolve administrative procedures
and responsibilities and scheduling.
Senior representatives of the Employer, Consultants and Contractor will be in

attendance.
Agenda to include the following:-
a)Appointment of official representative of participants in the Works.
b)Schedule of work, progress scheduling.
c)Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, etc.
d)Requirements for temporary facilities, offices storage sheds utilities and their
locations on site.
e)Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
f)Site security, hoarding, signboard.
g)Record drawings
h)Takeover procedures, acceptance, warranties.
i)Monthly progress payment claims and administrative procedures.
j)Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms.
k)Insurance, transcript of policies.
l)Supply of concrete
m)Sub-Contracts and List of Approved Sub-Contractors
n)Site Inspection procedures
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/23
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS (CONT’D)
Agenda to include the following:-(Cont’d)
o)Delivery schedule of the Contractor’s safety procedure manual outlining the safety
management system as specified in the Factories Act, a loss control programme and
safety standards to be achieved using MOL industry targets.
p)Others as directed by the Architect.
A SITE MEETINGS ( )
Site meetings for the purposes of programming and co-ordinating the works will be
held at intervals as directed by the Architect. Attend all site meetings and ensure
attendance by sub-contractors as directed by the Architect.
The Contractor shall allow for attendance at Site Meetings including the provision of
drinks as directed by the Architect.
B PROGRESS REPORTS ( )
1) Monthly Reports
The Contractor shall submit within the first week of every month to the Architect five
(5) copies of a monthly progress report indicating individual component progress
made in the preceding month signed by the Project Manager. Such reports shall show
cumulative progress towards scheduled completion, expressed as a percentage, of all
items shown in the approved Works Programme and shall also include a summary of
the progress achieved through every phase of the Contract.
Monthly reports shall relate to key date achievement and indicate the degree of
criticality on each activity. Any delays or potential delays shall be clearly identified,
and a statement given as to the measures to be taken to maintain the key dates.
2) Weekly Reports
In addition to the monthly reports the Contractor shall also prepare and submit to the
Architect the weekly reports on the progress of the Works.
These reports should elaborate on the daily activities of the site and must
include the following
(a) Weather conditions
(b) Work done
(c) Number and categories of workmen and site staff employed
(d) Materials delivered
(e) Materials removed from the site
(f) Instructions and Directions received
(g) Instructions and Directions given to Sub-Contractors
(h) Requests by Contractors
(i) Equipment used on site
(j) Equipment removed from site
(k) Visitors
(l) Other relevant information
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/24
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
PROGRESS REPORTS (CONT’D)
2) Weekly Reports (Cont’d)
These records must be entered daily by the Contractor and countersigned weekly by
the Architect/Resident Engineer or his authorised representative.
The progress reports shall be in a format approved by the Architect.
A PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS ( )
Provide progress colour photographs in 4R size, high resolutions with indication of date
and locations of the photographs taken, to be submitted before commencement of the
Works and thereafter monthly together with report on construction status verse
planned schedule. Each set to consist of minimum twenty-four (24) different views
taken as directed by the Architect including the photographs of the overview of the
site progress. The Contractor shall email the progress photographs to all parties on
monthly basis and to submit to Employer in thumb drive at the end of every month.
The ownership and copyright of all photographs and thumb drive shall be vested in the
Employer.
B SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE ( )
Prepare a schedule for submission of shop drawings and samples.
Indicate dates of submission, review time, resubmission time, float time, last date for
meeting fabrication schedule.
Include dates when delivery will be required for Employer furnished products.
Include dates when review submittals will be required from the Architect.
C CONSTRUCTION PLANT ( )
Allow for the installation, maintenance, operation and subsequent removal of all
necessary Construction Plant and Equipment required for the carrying out and
completion of the Works.
All construction plant provided by the Contractor shall, when brought on to the site, be
deemed to be exclusively intended for the construction of the Works. The Contractor
shall not remove the construction plant from the site without the consent in writing of
the Architect which shall not be unreasonably withheld.
If the Contractor proposes to use cranes, lifts or any other types of construction plant
which places any load on the reinforced concrete structure, he must furnish full details
of such construction plant to the Architect for approval before the construction plant is
installed. Loads for such construction plant shall only be imposed on completed
structures where the concrete has attained the minimum 28 days strength. If
necessary and structurally acceptable the structure shall be strengthened, in order to
carry such loads and the Contractor shall be responsible for the extra costs. The
Contractor shall be responsible and make good to the satisfaction of the Architect any
damage to the permanent structure which may be caused by his plant.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the suitability, safety and security of all
plant and temporary works and shall take all precautions to ensure that the same are
fully secured and made safe for as long as may be necessary against all risk of
damage thereto by falling debris, water and wind action or theft or otherwise.
No approval by the Architect of the installation of the Contractor’s construction plant

shall relieve the Contractor from any of his responsibilities for the sufficiency and
efficiency of the same and from any other of his responsibilities and obligations under
the Contract.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/25
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
CONSTRUCTION PLANT (CONT’D)
(Note: The Tenderer shall submit with this Tender the list of Construction Plant which
he proposes for this project as per specimen appended to the Form of Tender.)
A ORDERING MATERIALS ( )
The Contractor shall place orders for his materials as soon as possible after the
Contract is awarded and he shall be responsible for any delay in completion of the
Works resulting from late ordering or delivery.
The Contractor is to examine, the drawings, taking measurements and verifying on
site the actual quantities of materials required for the Works including the materials
supplied by Suppliers.
The Architect has the right to order materials from other sources and deduct the
amount from the Contract Sum, if the Contractor fails to bring the materials in time in
accordance with the requirements of the Works Programme.
B SAMPLES OF MATERIALS ( )
The Architect shall be at liberty to call for the submission of samples and/or test
certificates of materials of the execution of samples or workmanship for approval and
for further samples as required until the samples submitted or executed are, in his
opinion, in accordance with the Specification.
All approved samples of work shall indicate the standard of workmanship to be

maintained in the execution of the Works.
All samples materials shall be signed by the Architect and marked “Approved” and
kept in a safe place in locations as directed by the Architect.
C PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS ( )
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout the
specifications) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and
of the best quality (compatible with specifications) and fit for the purpose intended. If
requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
Defective products will be rejected regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does
not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility but is a precaution against oversight or
error. The Contractor shall remove and replace defective products at his own expense
and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of products, the decision rests
strictly with the Architect based upon the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture

for any particular or like item throughout the Works.
D AVAILABILITY OF PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS ( )
Immediately upon signing the Contract, review product delivery requirements and
anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are
foreseeable, notify the Architect of such, in order that substitution or other remedial
action may be authorised in ample time to prevent delay in performance of the Works.
In the event of failure to notify the Architect at commencement of Works and should it
subsequently appear that Works may be delayed for such reason the Architect
reserves the right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at
no additional cost to the Contract.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/26
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS SPECIFIED BY NAME ( )
Whenever a material, item, article or product is specified by trade name,

manufacturer’s name or catalogue reference, the Contractor shall use only such
material, items, article or product as specified unless written approval for substitution
is secured from the Architect.
Should the Contractor desire to substitute another material, item, article or product for
one specified by name, he should apply in writing to the Architect for such permission
stating the savings involved and providing supporting data and samples. Unless
written approval is obtained, no substitution is permitted.
The Architect shall decide whether the substitution is similar and equal in quality to
that specified, and this decision shall be final and binding.
Where the phrase “or other approved”, or “other equal and approved” or “approved
equivalent” appears after a material, item, article or product specified by trade name,
manufacturer’s name or catalogue reference, the same procedure as stated in the
three preceding paragraphs shall also apply should the Contractor desire to use a
material, item, article or product other than that specified by name.
B TESTS ( )
The Architect may, whenever he considers it desirable test any materials before they
leave the maker’s/manufacturer’s premises as well as after delivery to the Site, and
the Architect shall be at liberty to reject any materials after delivery should he
consider them unsatisfactory, notwithstanding the preliminary test and approval of the
materials at the maker’s/manufacturer’s premises. All costs in connection with these
tests are to be borne by the Contractor.
When directed by the Architect, samples of materials (the samples being taken by
approved sampling methods) are to be supplied by the Contractor for laboratory tests
and shall be delivered by the Contractor at his own cost to the approved Laboratory
for testing.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs relating to any testing
and re-testing of a product, material or work executed that may be necessary in order
to comply with the current requirements of the relevant Authorities and/or Codes of
Practice and/or Building Regulations etc as appropriate.
C CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS ( )
The Contractor shall pre-plan the execution and completion of the Works and inter
alia, co-ordinate and checks for discrepancy in or divergence between all the drawings
issued to the Contractor prior to the execution of the Works. Only competent technical
personnel shall be designated to execute the co-ordination of drawings, and the
Contractor shall designate at least one competent technical personnel for each of the
category of works or services. If the Contractor shall find any discrepancy or
divergence or any lack of information or details for him to proceed with any work, he
shall immediately give to the Architect a written notice specifying his "Request for
Information" as stipulated herein under the heading of "Construction Drawings".
Provided always that such request shall have been given to the Architect at least four
(4) weeks before such information is due for him to proceed with the works.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs in connection with the aforementioned
co-ordination and bear all costs due to failure to co-ordinate the various requirements
or to request for instruction in time.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/27
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SERVICES

AND SERVICES DIVERSION ( )
Before any work commences in connection with the services installation, the
Contractor shall prepare fully co-ordinated drawings showing the proposed location of
all services including services that require to be diverted for the purposes of
co-ordination of the services as well as their relation to and implication on the
structural and architectural work. The co-ordination drawings shall also include for all
areas where services have to be installed within confined and congested space and
also any other areas and/or works which the Architect/ Engineer deem accurate
co-ordination is necessary. Such drawings shall show all works including the building
structure, penetrations, and ceiling and associated supporting systems mechanical and
electrical services, light fittings, etc. Such drawings shall also include plans and
sectional details.
The drawings shall either be enlarged or properly coloured to differentiate the various
services and subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit all co-ordination drawings as soon as possible to the
Architect/Engineer for his review and in any case submitted either before or
simultaneously with the shop drawings of the various services sub-contractors to
permit modifications to be made thereto if such are deemed necessary by the
Architect/Engineer, so that any delay to the progress of the works could be avoided.
The drawings submitted shall be modified as and when necessary and re-submitted for
further review. For each submission or re-submission the Contractor shall submit
drawings by email and in thumb drive with Autocad format. Consultants will reply to
Contractor by email after each review. The Contractor shall be required to print paper
prints upon the Architect/ Engineer’s request for the distribution by the Contractor to
Resident Engineer and email the approved drawings to all parties.
For each submission of drawings, a minimum time of four (4) weeks shall be allowed
for the review thereof by the Architect/ Engineer. The Architect/Engineer’s review of
such drawings does not exonerate the Contractor from any of his responsibilities and
obligations under the Contract.
B PENETRATION DRAWINGS ( )
The Contractor shall read this item together with "Co-ordination Drawings for Services
Diversion as described in the previous item.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs in providing co-ordinated penetration drawings
in the reinforced concrete and all other structural work, i.e., beam, wall, slab, etc. for
the Engineer's approval.
For each submission or re-submission the Contractor shall submit drawings by email
and in thumb drive with Autocad format. Consultants will reply to Contractor by email
after each review and thereafter, the Contractor shall be required to print paper prints
upon the Architect/ Engineer’s request for the distribution by the Contractor to
Resident Engineer and email the approved penetration drawings to all parties. The
endorsed one (1) copy paper print and thumb drive (Autocad format) of the drawing
shall be retained by the Contractor.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/28
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SHOP DRAWINGS ( )
Before commencing fabrication or manufacture of any prefabricated or off-site

manufactured item the Contractor shall submit for the Architect and Engineer’s review
by email and thumb drive in Autocad format of all shop drawings of the item indicating
all details and dimensions.
The Contractor shall also submit for the Architect’s approval shop drawings by email.
The Contractor is required to print in paper print (1 copy) for the Resident Engineer
and one thumb drive copy in Autocad format to Employer of the approved proposed
setting out and laying patterns of all finishing works.
After the Architect’s review the drawings, Architect will email the commented drawings
to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not commence work, unless and until the shop drawings have
been approved and signed by the Architect.
The signing of such drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for the correctness of all dimensions and compliance with the
requirements of the Contract.
The programming of the production of shop drawings to be submitted by
Sub-Contractors shall be co-ordinated by the Contractor and included in the Works
Programme allowing adequate time for the Architect, the Engineers and the Contractor
to check the drawings, have amendments incorporated and checked again before final
approval by the Architect/Engineer.
For each submission of drawings, a minimum time of four (4) weeks shall be allowed
for checking and approval of all drawings by the Architect/ Engineer. Delays caused by
late submission of drawings or non-approval of drawings due to repeat errors will
under no circumstances are construed as reasons for extension of time.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the
drawings and other particulars supplied by him, whether such drawings and particulars
have been approved by the Architect/ Engineer or not. Approval is given for general
suitability on layout only and does not relieve the Contractor of his contractual
responsibility.
B PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES AND EQUIPMENT ( )
Provide protection for finishes and partially finished building finishes and equipment
during performance of work.
Provide screens, covers, hoardings, etc. as required.
Be responsible for any damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.
C SAFEGUARDING THE WORKS ( )
Safeguard the Works, materials and plant against damage or theft including all
necessary watching and lighting for the security of the Works and the protection of the
public. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of all materials
delivered for the Works. This shall apply equally to materials and plant intended for
the Works, but which are stored elsewhere.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/29
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A USE OF SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR EXCAVATION WORKS ( )
The Contractor shall provide all necessary measures, including but not limited to
temporary structures, shoring and/or sheet piling, to facilitate the carrying out of
excavation Works and/ or for heavy vehicular movement within the Site. The cost of
such temporary structures, shoring and/ or sheet piling, etc. shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract Sum. Notwithstanding such provisions, the Contractor shall, in
the course of excavation Works, take great care to prevent earth movements and/ or
upheavals in the excavation. The Contractor shall also take precaution to prevent
displacement and/ or damage to the piles due to any traffic movement from heavy
machinery employed on the Site. If any pile in the excavated pit is displaced or if the
pile is damaged by earth movement and/ or upheavals, the Contractor shall be held
accountable for the displacement and/ or damage to the piles and shall bear all cost
and expenses incurred in remedial works.
The Contractor may, if he wishes to, make reference to the Soil Investigation Report
available from the Architect to facilitate the Contractor in ascertaining the temporary
structures, shoring and/ or sheet piling required. However, the Soil Investigation
Report shall not form part of the Contract or to be taken into consideration in the
interpretation or construction thereof or of the Contract. The Contractor shall take note
that all information in the Soil Investigation Report is only indicative of the likely soil
conditions to be encountered at the Site. The Employer shall not be accountable to the
Contractor for the accuracy, adequacy or completeness of the information in the Soil
Investigation Report. The Contractor shall ascertain the actual soil conditions and shall
conduct his own site investigations and allow in the Contract Sum for all cost and
expenses whatsoever arising from and/ or out of any inaccuracy, inadequacy or
incompleteness of the information in the Soil Investigation Report.
B SHORING AND STRUTTING ( )
Provide and maintain during the execution of the Works all shoring, strutting, needling
and other supports, and take all necessary steps to preserve the stability of adjoining
buildings, the Works and of all other property including that of adjoining Owners that
may in any way be endangered or affected by the Works required to be executed
under this Contract. The Contractor shall also protect all the same against damage
and/or settlement, and no part of these protective measures shall be taken down or
removed until the Contractor is satisfied that such measure is no longer needed. All
works involving risk of damage and or settlement to the building is to be executed by
the Contractor in such portions as will minimise risk as far as possible. The Contractor
shall obtain his P.E.’s endorsement for all temporary works design, calculations and
proposals.
Indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims arising out of inadequate precautions
and shall make good all damages arising therefrom.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/30
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION ( )
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary firefighting facilities to comply with the
full current requirements of the Local Authorities. Ensure that all such firefighting
facilities installed temporarily are maintained in an operational state at all times to the
requirements of the relevant Authority.
Open fires and burning of rubbish will not be permitted on the site.
Take all necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and instruct a Superintendent
to make periodic inspections to ensure proper preventive measures are being complied
with by all personnel working on the site.
Paint and/or oil covered rags shall be stored in covered metal containers. Rubbish shall
be removed daily, from building and site.
When torch cutting and electric welding are required by the Work, the trade concerned
shall observe the hot work permit systems as provided by the safety section and take
all necessary measures to protect facilities from fire. A sample copy of the hot work
permit is attached at the Appendix for reference.
Take all necessary precautions to eliminate fire hazards and to ensure proper
preventive measures are being compiled with by all personnel working on site.
"No Smoking" painted signs shall be erected where volatile fumes or liquids are
present.
B TEMPORARY BARRICADES, GUARD RAILS, GANTRIES ETC ( )
Provide, erect and maintain adequate temporary barricades, fans, gantries, safety
netting, planked footways, warning signs and lights for the protection of the public at
all closures, detours and points of danger where the Work occurs outside the hoarding
area. Such protection shall be to the requirements of the Local Authorities having
jurisdiction.
Remove and replace such guard rails and barricades as necessary to accommodate the
Works.
Provide, maintain and adjust any other guard rails, barricades or safety platforms
required by law and authorities having jurisdiction for protection of Work and the
workmen and for protection of the public.
Take necessary precautions to minimise the spread of dust, dirt and noise from the
project site onto adjacent properties, including streets. Be responsible for cleaning
operations necessary through failure to exercise such precautions, to regulations of
Authorities having jurisdiction.
Pay all costs and charges in connection with all of the above, alter, shift and adapt
from time to time as necessary and remove up on completion of the Works.
C TEMPORARY ACCESSES ( )
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary accesses to (complete with approved
directional signs) including public access to all areas at all times, clear away these
temporary accesses and make good all works disturbed on completion of the Works.
Apply and give all necessary notices to the relevant Authorities and pay all costs in
connection therewith including whatever charges imposed by any relevant Authorities.
The provision of temporary access for traffic diversion during work is in progress to
ensure undisrupted movement of traffic at all times
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/31
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A TEMPORARY HOARDING ( )
Provide and erect temporary hoarding to perimeter of the construction area for the
protection of the public and for the proper execution of the Works in accordance with
Authority requirements. Such protection shall meet the requirements of the relevant
Local Authorities. Paint and repaint the whole of the hoarding to the Architect’s and/or
Employer’s satisfaction. Pay all costs and expenses in connection therewith.
Pay all costs and charges in connection with all of the above, alter, shift and adapt
from time to time as necessary and remove all temporary works on completion of the
Works.
(a) The Contractor shall define, mark and maintain safe passages throughout the
Works for all workmen, visitors and Consultants to gain access to any and every
part of the Works safely. The safe passages shall have adequate headroom and
lighting, free of all obstructions and shall be properly enclosed against falling
objects.
(b) The Contractor is solely responsible for the complete adequacy of the protective
provisions that are necessary for the safety of all workmen and the public at all
times of construction. In this connection the Contractor is to provide timber
barricades and platform covers to openings at lift cores, ducts, edges of
unenclosed floors etc. at positions were deemed necessary by the Architects.
(c) No claims, monetary or otherwise, made by the Contractor on grounds of want

of knowledge or foresight or for under-provision in connection with the
protective systems will be entertained.
The Architect's approval of any temporary protective system or safety measures shall
not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to ensure the safety of his own and
Sub-Contractor's workmen, all the Consultants, all the Resident Supervisory Staff and
the public from all risks of injury.
B VISITORS ( )
The Contractor shall take all precaution not to allow any unauthorised visitors onto the
site of the works.
All necessary signs shall be displayed on site directing all visitors to the site office prior
to entering the construction area.
C TRESPASSING ( )
Provide for taking reasonable precautions to prevent workmen including those

employed by Sub-Contractors from trespassing on adjoining Owners' property.
D TEMPORARY LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ( )
Provide an efficient temporary lightning protection system for the structure during
construction and for all the hoists and cranes. The lightning protection system shall be
of the type which facilitates lightning discharge safely to the ground without danger to
the building, machinery or occupants, and to the requirements of the relevant
Authorities.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/32
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A TEMPORARY WORKING PLATFORMS, GANTRIES, ETC. ( )
Provide all necessary temporary working earth bunds, earth fill, boarded platforms,
staging, gantries, bridging, etc. for the Works. Adapt and shift as necessary during the
progress of the works and remove on completion.
Contractor shall construct the temporary metal platform over the manholes and /or
openings at the driveway access while Work is in progress to ensure undisrupted
movement of the traffic at all times. The Contractor shall obtain his P.E.’s
endorsement for all temporary works design, calculations and proposals. Pay all costs
and expenses in connection therewith.
Indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims arising out of inadequate precautions
and shall make good all damages arising therefrom.
B SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING ( )
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary scaffolding and staging required for the
proper execution and completion of the Works, including those of all sub-contractors,
and pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
The design and construction of scaffolding and staging must comply with all safety
requirements of the relevant Authorities and approved by the Architect.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact some Nominated Sub-Contractors will
require the use of the temporary scaffolding for carrying out their works. He shall liaise
with these Sub-Contractors to ensure the proper execution and completion of the
Works. Before dismantling the Contractor is to ensure that all works requiring the use
of temporary scaffolding are completed.
If the Contractor should strike any of his scaffolding before ascertaining whether it is
required by any Sub-Contractor or Local Authorities, he must re-erect it, if so required,
at his own expense.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and remove on completion of the
Works.
C SITE SECURITY ( )
Provide all necessary and adequate watching by day and night for the whole period of
the Works. Guards shall be stationed at all ingresses and exits and areas where the
occurrence of theft or damage to materials, executed works, etc. will hinder the
progress of the Works and/or delay the completion of the Works.
Guards patrolling of the site and inside the building shall be carried out at approved
intervals during hours of darkness.
A system of control shall be set up to control the entry and exit of all vehicles and
pedestrian traffic. No unauthorised vehicles or persons shall be allowed to enter the
site. A complete record of all authorised visitors to the site shall be maintained by the
duty guards.
Notwithstanding the above which shall be held to be the minimum watching and
security services to be provided by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be held solely
responsible for the security of the Works and the safety of all his own materials, fixed
or unfixed, and all the materials of other suppliers or Contractors whether under Sub-
Contract to him or not, plant, machinery and tools, scaffolding, etc.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any losses that may be suffered
as a result of theft or damage to materials, executed works, etc.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm
(2216\B\TD) S1/33
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SIGNBOARD ( )
Provide and maintain an elevated signboard executed by experienced signwriters and

is visible from outside the Site and provided with night illumination. This requirement
is in addition to any signboards required to comply with Local Authority or Government
regulations.
Details of the signboard for which the Contractor has allowed shall be submitted with
the Tender.
Allow for repairing, repainting, adapting and maintaining all the existing signboards.
Obtain all permits and pay all local authority fees in connection with the provision of
signboards.
Allow from time to time, for adding the names of Nominated/Designated
Sub-Contractors and Suppliers to the signboards. All colour, shape of letters, etc shall
match the existing. The list of Nominated/Designated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers
to be added on to the signboard, the colour and lettering etc. shall be subject to the
prior approval of the Architect. Maintain this signboard and for the duration of this
Contract.
Remove all signboards and associated footings and planter boxes from site on
completion of the Works and make good all works disturbed.
The Contractor shall allow the Employer to erect the big panel signboard with graphics
and light fittings (by Employer) and provide the necessary attendance.
B TEMPORARY OFFICE AND STORES FOR THE CONTRACTOR ( )
Provide and maintain, at locations to be agreed with the Employer, temporary office
for the Contractor's staff and provide all necessary additional watertight sheds for the
storage of materials, tools and equipment for the use of workmen on site. Pay all costs
and charges in connection therewith
The Contractor is to allow in their Tender sum for all additional expense incurred in
setting up their site office out of the Site including storing and protecting undelivered
Goods off site and insuring them against loss and damage however caused from the
time the Goods are stored until delivery to site.
C TEMPORARY WORKMEN'S ACCOMMODATION ( )
Provide and maintain all necessary temporary workmen's accommodation and facilities
at the Site for the use of all persons employed on the Works including Sub-Contractors
in accordance with the requirements of the Health Authorities.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as directed and remove prior to completion of
the Works. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
D TEMPORARY SANITARY ACCOMMODATION ( )
Provide and maintain all necessary modern sanitary accommodation and facilities for
the use of all persons employed on the Works including Sub-Contractors in accordance
with the requirements of the Health Authorities.
To maintain the sanitary accommodation clean and no odour smell at all times.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as directed and remove prior to completion of
the Works. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/34
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A
TEMPORARY OFFICE FOR THE EMPLOYER, THE CONSULTANTS AND
EMPLOYER'S RESIDENT SITE STAFF ( )
Allow for the construction of a Site Office of adequate size at a location to be agreed
with the Employer for the sole use of the Employer's site supervisory staff and
Consultants. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
The Site Office to cater for minimum 6 persons’ working tables, one big meeting room
with meeting tables and chairs for 30 persons, one sample room and 2 attach toilet
cubicles and shall be constructed to the Architect's approved design prepared by the
Contractor and equipped with adequate furniture, lighting, power and air-conditioning
units. To allow daily cleaning to the site office and toilets.
The Site Office shall be constructed under the supervision of a registered Professional
Engineer and one (1) set of design and construction drawings shall be kept on site at
all times.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and maintain the Site Office until
completion of this Contract and remove same on Completion.
The Contractor is to allow in their Tender sum for all additional expense incurred in
setting up site office out of the Site.
B
EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE FOR SITE OFFICE ( )
The Contractor is to read this item in conjunction with "Protection, helmets, boots,
etc." included elsewhere in the Preliminaries.
Provide and maintain the following office equipment and furniture for the sole use of
the Employer's Supervisory Staffs ( i.e., One (1) RE and three (3) RTOs)-
a) 6 nos of Working tables
b) sufficient nos of Work chairs for site staffs and visitors
c) sufficient nos of Filing cabinet (i.e., 2 doors at 1.80m high)
d) 1 No. Meeting table with sufficient chairs (meeting table must be large enough
to cater for at least 30 persons).
e) Sufficient nos of white board and pin-up boards
i) 1 no. Photocopier with A4 and A3 cassettes and sort function for minimum 10
no. copies with unlimited supply of laser cartridge and with scanner function
n) 1 No. hot and cold-water dispensers
p) Adequate nos of raincoats, umbrellas, PPE (Personal Protective Equipment),

torch lights with unlimited supply of batteries
q) Sufficient stationery
r) Sample room
s) Wireless networks/ broadband
In addition to the above items, the Contractor shall provide and replenish the requisite
items of stationery and office consumables (including drinking water) for use by the
Employer, Consultants and Employer's Supervising Staff.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/35
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
TEMPORARY TELEPHONES ( )
A
Provide and maintain temporary telephone, facsimile facilities including making all
necessary arrangements with the relevant Authorities, and pay all charges and
expenses in connection therewith, for the full period of the contract.
Two service lines for local dialling, with minimum 2 No. extensions per line, and one
service line for facsimile transmission (including facsimile machine) shall be provided
for the sole use of the Employer's Supervisory Staff.
B
TEMPORARY CAR PARKING LOTS ( )
Provide and maintain minimum 6 nos of temporary car parking lots including making
all necessary arrangements with the relevant Authorities, and pay all charges and
expenses in connection therewith, for the full period of the contract. To provide
sufficient car parking lots during the VIP site visits and attending the site meetings.
Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
C
TRANSPORTATION FOR SITE WALK ROUND ( )
Provide vehicle transport for the Employer, Consultants and their representatives
during the site walk round and site inspection and pay all charges and expenses in
connection therewith, for the full period of the contract.
WATER ( )
D
Provide all necessary clean fresh water for use on the Works including all temporary
connections, pipes, fittings, storage tanks, etc. and water supply for firefighting
systems such as hosereels, as well as water supply points and clear away and make
good on completion and pay all costs and charges in connection therewith including
deposits and other charges for water drawn from the permanent supply for the testing
and commissioning of all works including Sub-Contract Works.
LIGHTING AND POWER ( )
E Provide all necessary artificial lighting and power for use on the Works and to the
project signboard including all temporary connections, mains, leads, fittings, etc. and
pay all costs and charges in connection therewith, including deposits and demand
charges for electricity drawn from the permanent supply for the testing and
commissioning of all works including Sub-Contract Works.
The Contractor shall provide temporary supply points terminating at 30 amperes TPN
isolators and 13 amperes SPN sockets outlets, the numbers and locations shall be
sufficient and suitable for the execution of all works including works of domestic and
Sub-Contractors.
All temporary electrical installation shall be carried out under the responsibility of
licensed electrical workers and shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
Authority.
Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and clear away and make good
on completion of the Works.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/36
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
USE OF PERMANENT SERVICES, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ( )
A No services, plant, equipment or motorized device installed as a permanent part of the

Works shall be used for construction purpose save by specific agreement with the
Architect and the Employer concerning conditions of use and compensation for wear
and tear.
PERMITS AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ( )

Conform to the codes, ordinances, regulations and orders of all authorities having
B
jurisdiction on the performance of the Work. Should conflicts arise between one
document or authority and another, obtain clarification from the Architect before
proceeding with the Works.
C COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS BY VARIOUS

RELEVANT GOVERNMENT AUTHORITIES ( )
The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all regulations and
requirements as imposed by the various relevant Government Authorities.
D TRANSPORTING OF MATERIALS ( )
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent spillage along public
roads. All washing of lorries, trucks and other construction equipment shall be done on
properly constructed washing bay within the site. The Contractor shall indemnify the
Employer against any claims, summons and other orders of the Authorities affecting
the Works.
E POLLUTION, FLOODING, ETC ( )
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking immediate steps to make good and shall
bear the cost of remedying the effects of any pollution, flooding or other nuisance
caused by the commissioning of his works under this Contract, to neighbouring
properties, roads, drains, etc. all to the satisfaction of Local Authorities and the
Architect.
The Contractor shall also allow here for keeping the basements completely dry and
free from water by providing sufficient pumps, and allow for all necessary temporary
M&E Services (lighting, mechanical ventilation and electrical services, etc.)
F KEEPING SITE FREE FROM WATER ( )
Allow sufficient temporary drainage, dewatering systems and associated works

including all pumping, well points, cut off drains, etc to keep the site and excavation
works free from water for the duration of the Works. All temporary drains shall be so
constructed and directed that their discharge shall not dirty, contaminate or pollute
adjoining properties and roadways all to the satisfaction of the Architect or Local
Authority. In this regard, the Contractor shall not have any claim for extension of time
for completion due to stoppage of work by the Local Authority for contravention of
regulations and by-laws.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the Architect's requirements of the health

Authorities. Pay all costs and charges in connection therewith.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/37
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A ANTI-MALARIAL MEASURES ( )
Take all necessary measures to prevent the breeding of mosquitoes on the site.
The Contractor shall not dump unwanted building debris, chemicals, or

noxious or polluting matter on any vacant plot of land, roadside or drains
thereby causing contamination of the site or the drainage system.
The Contractor is to implement comprehensive pest control and surveillance for the
Site including all necessary measures to prevent the site from becoming favourable to
the breeding or harbouring of mosquitoes or other vectors.
Vector control work must include all construction areas:-
(1) Checking for mosquitoes breeding at least once a week
(2) Larviciding all stagnant water using insecticides or anti-mosquito oil at least
once a week;
(3) Thermal fogging at least once a week
Comply with and pay all charges levied by any Government or Public Authority with
jurisdiction on matters of mosquito control.
No claim resulting from failure to implement these anti-malaria measures will be

entertained.
B SURVEY OF EXISTING ADJOINING BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES AND LEVELS

( )
Before commencing any work at site, the Contractor shall carry out a survey of the
conditions of the site, roads, drains and other structures in the vicinity of the site. A
list of the apparent defects or damage in the adjacent structures shall be compiled and
sufficient photographs shall be taken. Each photograph shall have the date imprinted
and be of 5R size.
The Contractor shall also carry out a survey of the existing levels of the adjoining
roads, pavements, drains, adjoining buildings, etc. Such a survey shall be carried out
by a Registered Land Surveyor before commencement of any works on site.
Two (2) sets of the reports together with the colour photographs with imprint date and
time; must be submitted to the Employer’s Representative within two weeks from the
date of award of the Contract and emailed the colour photographs to all Consultants
and Employer.
C RECORDS AND PHOTOGRAPHS OF EXISTING ADJACENT BUILDINGS ( )
The Contractor shall prior to commencement of work on site, at monthly intervals and
on completion of the Works engage an independent licensed surveyor and professional
photographer to prepare records and attach colour photographs of the adjacent
buildings; imptint with date and time; showing levels of floors, existing wall or floor
cracks if any, etc and hand them over to the Architect.
The Contractor shall also carry out periodical checks as and when required to see that
there is no damage to existing buildings. He shall be responsible for any damage and
for all making good at his own expense.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/38
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A DAMAGE TO ADJACENT BUILDING OR FACILITIES ( )
The Contractor is solely responsible for injury or damage caused to adjacent property
or facilities.
Any assistance or advice which the Employer or the Architect may provide shall not
absolve the Contractor of any of his responsibility.
He shall indemnify the Employer in respect of any claims due to subsidence, collapse
or other damage to adjacent buildings and facilities caused by or arising out of the
Works in addition to providing and maintaining such temporary shoring and/or other
safety measures which he thinks fit. The Contractor will bear all mitigating cost
necessary to alleviate the damage to adjacent buildings and facilities. The costs of
installing monitoring devices such as plate glass gauges etc. For the monitoring of the
movement of cracks of adjacent building and facilities shall be borne by the
Contractor.
B COVERING UP ( )
No work shall be covered up until it has been examined by the Architect.
In the case of work executed against provisional quantities or sums in the Schedule of
Prices (and therefore subject to measurement) the Contractor shall notify the Quantity
Surveyor before proceeding to cover up the Works.
If the Contractor considers that work has been executed in accordance with the
Architect’s Instruction and which would not normally require remeasurement, he shall
provide the Quantity Surveyor with at least 48 hours’ notice in writing before covering
up such work.
Failure by the Contractor to inform the Quantity Surveyor on time before covering up
the work may render this null and void.
C
INTERFERENCE WITH TRAFFIC AND ADJOINING PROPERTY ( )
All operations necessary for the execution of the Works and for the construction of any
temporary works shall, so far as compliance with the requirements of the contract
permits, be carried out so as not to interfere unnecessarily or improperly with traffic
and adjoining properties.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer in respect of all claims, demands,
proceedings, damages, court charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or in
relating to any such matter.
D OPENING UP WORK FOR INSPECTION ( )
The Contractor shall at the request of the Architect within such time as the Architect
shall name, open up for inspection any work covered up, and should the Contractor
refuse or neglect to comply with such request the Architect may employ other
workmen to open up the same. If the said work has been covered up with
contravention of the Architect’s instruction or if being opened up, it is to be found not
in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications or the instructions of the Architect,
the expenses of such opening and covering it up again, whether done by the
Contractor or such other workmen, shall be borne by and recovered from the
Contractor.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/39
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
OPENING UP WORK FOR INSPECTION (CONT’D)
If the work has not been covered up in contravention of such instructions and is found
to be in accordance with the said Drawings and Specifications or instructions, the
expenses aforesaid shall be borne by the Employer and be added to the Contract Sum
provided always that in the case of urgent work so opened and requiring immediate
work the Architect shall within a reasonable time after receipt of notice from the
Contractor that the Work has been so opened up, make or cause the inspection
thereof to be made and at the expiration of such time, if such inspection shall not have
been made, to open it up again for inspection except at the expense of the Employer.
A OPENING UP PUBLIC ROAD FOR THE LAYING OF PIPES,ETC ( )
In the event that the Contractor needs to open up public road to carry out the Works
then it is the Contractor’s responsibility to apply and submit to the various government
departments all the forms, fees and supervision needed to carry out the Works. All
fees in connection with the opening up of the public road shall be borne by the
Employer. The Contractor is to ensure that his insurance company is informed of such
work and see to it that his liabilities are fully insured prior to undertaking such works.
The Contractor is to note that the Authorities will not normally allow the disturbance of
newly surfaced roads within a year of surfacing.
The Contractor shall, however, not be relieved of his responsibilities of verifying with
the Public Works Department (and/or Land Transport Authority) and any other
Authorities having jurisdiction on this matter and shall allow for all additional costs and
expenses arising therefrom.
B GROUND MONITORING AND INSTRUMENTATION ( )
Supply, install, maintain, monitor and remove all inclinometers, surface settlement
markers, piezometers and tilt plates as described in the Specification and/or shown in
the drawings as directed by the Architect.
Prior to commencement of the Works submit initial readings of all instrumentation to

the Architect
Monitor all instrumentation weekly from commencement of the Works until completion
of the sub-structures.
The amount included in the Tender Sum against this item shall be fixed and non-
adjustable with the exception only of variation instructions issued and/or extensions of
time granted by the Architect under the Contract
C NUISANCE ( )
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out the various operations of the
Works in such a manner as to avoid any excessive noise, annoyance or nuisance which
may be caused to adjoining Owners and Occupants of existing and adjoining
properties. Generators, compressors and other plant which are likely to emit excessive
noise are to be muffled by means of silencers, screens and the like.
The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with laws, rules and regulations of
the Ministry of Environment or any other relevant authority.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against any claims, summons, etc.
arising therefrom.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/40
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A EARTH CONTROL MEASURES (ECM) ( )
Provide adequate temporary drainage all-round the site dry during the works,
particularly linking anti-flood arrangement including the provision of pumps, sumps to
keep the site free of water at all times.
Where the water is discharged into drains, a setting tank or other means of removing
sediment is to be provided. Alter, shift and adapt from time to time as necessary and
remove on completion of works.
Engage Qualified Erosion Control Professional (QECP) for Earth Control Measures
(ECM) submission. QECP should plan, design and supervise the implementation of the
ECM to meet the legal requirements.
The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing silt from being washed into public
drains by implementing effective Earth Control Measures (‘ECM’) for the construction
site to meet the requirements under the latest Sewerage and Drainage Act Cap 294.
(Information on ECM requirements can be found in the Code of Practice on Surface
Water Drainage and the website www.pub.gov.sg/ECM). The Contractor shall note that
the ECM is for the containment and treatment of silty discharges due to the impact of
rainwater. ECM is not meant for the treatment of wastewater due to construction
activities (such as slurry from tunnelling, pipe-jacking and bore-piling works) which
shall be treated to comply with the requirements under Environmental Protection and
Management Act (Chapter 94A).
In his tender submission, the Contractor shall submit his schematic ECM plans of the
construction site for the whole duration of the contract period taking into account the
different phases of construction activities. He shall also provide the name of the
Qualified Erosion Control Professional (‘QECP’) who will be endorsing the ECM plan
after the tender is awarded. These schematic ECM plans shall make the Contractor
aware of the ECM requirements and the cost to implement an effective ECM.
Notwithstanding the submission of these schematic ECM plans, the Contractor shall be
fully responsible for the effectiveness of the ECM plan and the Contractor shall deem
to include all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the compliance of the
ECM requirements.
Before construction works commence on site, the Contractor shall engage a QECP to
plan and design the ECM, and he shall install the ECM according to the QECP’s design.
The ECM plan and design shall be submitted 1 week after the award of the contract.
During the course of the construction works, the Contractor together with his QECP
shall review the ECM proposal regularly to meet the changing needs of the
construction activities. The Contractor shall improve the ECM as advised by his QECP.
The planning and design of the ECM shall meet the minimum requirements stipulated
and in accordance with the Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
The Contractor shall maintain the ECM for the whole duration of the contract to ensure
that it is effective at all times. Proper records detailing the maintenance works,
supported by dated photographs, shall be kept by the Contractor for verification. The
Contractor shall not remove the ECM until all works are completed and upon the
advice of his QECP.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/41
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING ROADS, SURFACE DRAINS, ETC ( )
The Contractor shall maintain public and private roads, footpaths, culverts, drains,
kerbs, etc., and keep the approaches to the site clear of materials and debris. The
Contractor is to make good any damage caused by his own or any sub-contractor's or
suppliers' transport at his own expense or pay all costs and charges in connection
therewith.
The Contractor must comply with the latest Government requirements for keeping the
haulage route clean. The wheels and under-carriage of all haulage vehicles shall be
washed and cleaned before the vehicle leaves the site. It is also the Contractor's
responsibility to obtain approval from the Traffic Police or other relevant Authority the
location of a suitable dumping ground for the spoil from the work site.
The Contractor shall submit all proposed temporary diversion drains and silt control
measures, if any, to the Local Authorities. Drainage Department, for approval before
commencement of the diversion work. The proposals shall comply with the current
Code of Practice on Surface Water Drainage.
The Contractor shall provide adequate drainage facilities including lined temporary
perimeter drains with 1 metre wide close turfing adjoining both sides of the cut-off
drains, silt trapping devices, turfing, wash bay incorporating silt trap with proper
discharge outlet etc to control silt and mud from site.
Provision of drainage facilities such as the temporary perimeter drains, close turfing
etc and fees to the Authorities if required shall be borne by the Contractor.
Discharge from de-watering of trench excavation shall be channelled into silt trapping
devices before reaching public surface drains.
The Contractor shall not disrupt, fill, block or disturb the existing overland flow,
existing drains, temporary diversion drains or perimeter cut-off drains and shall
regularly maintain the temporary drains to ensure their effectiveness and to desilt all
affected watercourses until completion of the Works. The Contractor shall take
adequate measures, including the provision of proper barricades between the site and
existing public drains and shall ensure that building materials are not discharged or
washed into the drains.
B PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SERVICES ( )

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining and ascertaining from the As-
Built drawings included in the Tender Drawings and from and any relevant Authorities
the existence and location of all underground and overhead services. The Contractor
shall engage a licensed cable detector to clear the site before each underground
operation.
Protect and maintain any existing pipes, ducts, sewers, electrical and telephone cables
and the like during the execution of the works. The Contractor is to make good any
damage caused by his workmen at his own expense or pay all costs and charges in
Any unknown existing underground services, if encountered during the course of

construction, are to be protected and maintained or sealed off or diverted at the
direction/instruction and to the approval of the relevant Government Authorities. All
costs incurred in this connection will be borne by the Employer. But in the event that
the Contractor causes or damages/losses to unknown existing underground services
during the course of construction, the Contractor shall be held responsible for costs of
all rectifications as required by the relevant Government Department/s to their
satisfaction.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/42
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE SERVICES (CONT’D)
As time is the essence for completion of the Works, the Contractor is responsible for
determining by means of trial holes whether underground services (be it known
existing or unknown existing) are obstructing the Works and report to the Architect
conclusively within six (6) weeks from the date of issuance of The Letter of
Acceptance. This is to ensure that sufficient time is available for the timely diversion of
the underground services (if so required and directed by the Architect/relevant
Authorities).
It is deemed that the Contractor has allowed in his Tender Price the cost of such trial
holes to ascertain the exact position/invert level of the underground services (be it
known or unknown) that may obstruct or affect the construction of the Works.
A MAINTAIN SITE AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH ( )
At all stage of the Works the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the site in
a clean and orderly fashion at all times. Materials, scaffolding, etc., shall be kept
neatly stacked on the site with all access-way kept clear. All dust, debris and rubbish,
etc. arising out of his own work and that of the Sub-Contractors and Suppliers shall be
continually cleared and removed from the site.
The Contractor will collect all refuse and discharge them down the chutes mentioned
below.
The Contractor is required to provide proper bulk bins of adequate size at site for the
storage of construction waste and debris and to make necessary arrangements for the
disposals of waste and debris to approved disposal grounds in conformity with the
rules and requirements of the Ministry of Environment.
The Contractor is to note that burning of rubbish on site is strictly prohibited.
B COMPLETED BUILDING FLOOR SPACE AS STORAGE AND WORKING SPACE

( )
The completed building floor space may be used, subject to Architect's approval, as
storage and working space by the Contractor. The Contractor is to check with the
Engineer as to the permissible working loads on the structure. This space may also be
used by the Employer for storage when necessary.
Should the permission for the above not be granted, the Contractor is deemed to have
allowed for any storage and working space off the site.
The Contractor is responsible for any damage caused to the structures arising out of or
in the course of carrying out works/storage in the Buildings, keeping it free from
mortar dropping etc. and making good any damage at his own cost to the satisfaction
of the Architect.
C OCCUPATION OF COMPLETED WORKS ( )
"No building or part of a building where any building works have been carried out or
completed shall be occupied in any way by any party unless the Building Authority has
issued the relevant occupation permit".
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/43
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A LOADING IN EXCESS OF DESIGN LOAD ( )
No loading in excess of the design loading shall be placed on any portion of the
structure without the prior written permission of the Architect or Structural Engineer.
If such permission is granted all structural members subject to loading other than the
design loading shall be strengthened and supported to the satisfaction of the Architect
or Structural Engineer and the Contractor shall bear all additional expenses in
The permission of the Architect or Structural Engineer does not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility of bearing all costs arising out of the making good of any damage
to the permanent structure caused by excess loading.
B DIMENSIONS OF COMPLETED WORKS AND AS-BUILT DRAWING ( )
The Contractor shall construct the Works in accordance with areas/dimensions shown
on the approved Building Plans/Contract Drawings or any other approved drawings
issued to vary the Works.
In respect of the accuracy of sizes of the units, the permissible deviation in the
"as-built" areas/dimensions including external finishes as established under the rules
of measurement to be carried out by a Registered Surveyor for application of vertical
strata Title areas shall not exceed -3% of the intended areas determined from the said
drawings used in construction of the Works.
As soon as the walls and partitions of every floor are completed, the Contractor shall
forthwith provide the Consultants with three copies of certified "as-built" survey plans
bearing all relevant dimensions of the walls and partitions. This is necessary in order
to monitor the Works progressively.
During construction, the Contractor shall keep accurate records of the exact size and
location of all pipes, ducts, etc. including all branches, changes in direction, fittings,
points of access, cocks, sumps and junctions, etc. This information shall be supplied to
the Architect and shall form the basis of an “as-built” drawing and shall include but not
limited to the following services:-
(i) Electrical Services Installation
(ii) Electrical Low Voltage Services Installation
(iii) Cold Water Supply Installation
(iv) Plumbing and Drainage
(v) Air-Conditioning And Mechanical Services
(vi) Fire Protection Services and
(vii) Filtration And Pump System
(viii) Solar panel system
Keep one (1) set of white prints of all contract drawings and all addenda, revisions,
clarifications, and reviewed shop drawings at the site office; identify them as “Project
Record Copy” and have them available at all times for inspection by the Architect.
As the work proceeds, record clearly and indelibly in red pencil, as-built conditions
whenever they deviate from the original intention of the Contract Documents.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/44
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
DIMENSIONS OF COMPLETED WORKS AND AS-BUILT DRAWING (CONT’D)
Present the as-built prints for scrutiny at each project meeting and as may be required
by the Architect.
All record drawings shall be fully dimensioned.
Prior to substantial completion of the Works, transfer all deviations, including those
called up by addenda, revisions, clarifications, shop drawings and Architect’s
Instructions, to a set of reverse print sepia tracings. The sepias may be purchased
from the Architect and/or the Engineer. Each as-built sepia shall bear the Contractor’s
identification, the date of record and the notation, “We hereby certify that these
drawings represent the work “as-built”’. The Contractor’s signature shall be placed
below that notation.
The deviations that are to be recorded shall include, in general but not necessarily be
limited to, things that are hidden from view and things of major importance to future
operations and maintenance and to future alterations and/or additions.
Three (3) nos thumb drive of AutoCAD as-built drawings and two (2) paper copies of
co-ordinated (including services indicated in different colours) progress records and
drawings and as-built survey drawings shall be submitted to the Architect within one
(1) months of the Completion of the Works.
At completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer the
approved and complete set of "as-built" survey plans of the whole Works and also a
set of intermediate prints of the above described certified "as-built" survey plans,
suitably bound in black hard covers with gold text (total 2 sets) for easy storage and
retrieval and one thumb drive for the soft copies’ submission. The format of the
submission of as-built documents shall subject to Employer’s approval.
A FULL COMPLIANCE WITH THE CIVIL, STRUCTURAL ARCHITECTURAL AND M&E

SERVICES SPECIFICATIONS ( )
The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken note of all conditions and requirements
for construction of works as detailed in the Civil, Structural and M&E Services
Specifications and have included all the costs and expenses in connection therewith.
B OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ( )
Two months before system commissioning, detail testing and commissioning

schedules and commission form are to be submitted for comments and approval by
the Architect.
Two months before commencement of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall
submit in triplicate comprehensive draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the
Architect for approval.
Contractor shall refer to the M&E Specification and submittals requirements.
At completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer the
approved and complete set of Operation and maintenance manuals, suitably bound in
ring files (total 2 sets) for easy storage and retrieval and one thumb drive for the soft
copies’ submission. The format of the submission of as-built documents shall subject
to Employer’s approval.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/45
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A NOTICE ON COMPLETION ( )
When a section is completed, the Employer reserves the right to take over a section
should he require it for his own use and the Contractor shall forthwith hand over as
complete that section of the Work. The Contractor is also required to give three (3)
weeks’ notice in writing to the Architect before a section of work is completed.
B PHOTOGRAPHS OF COMPLETED WORKS ( )
The Contractor shall engage a photographer to take photographs of the completed

works immediately after its completion. The Contractor shall submit completed works
photographs with high resolutions and with date; in the aerial video and in 2 nos of
thumb drives. The photographs shall have taken few numbers of overall site in bird’s
eye view and minimum 30 photographs of 5R size from various elevations and interior
of each buildings; as directed by the Architect.
C PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORKS ( )
Provide for carefully covering up and protecting the Works and materials from
inclement weather.
The Contractor shall provide full and adequate protection for all finished surfaces and
for all materials subject to injury or staining and shall be responsible for making good
all damage done to such finished surfaces and materials until the Works are handed
over complete.
The protection shall be applied or provided as soon as a surface is finished and/or

materials arrive on the Site or as may be otherwise desirable. Such protection shall be
maintained in effective condition throughout the course of the Works.
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with all the requirements and
satisfaction/approval of the relevant authorities on protective measures for this
project. Any additional cost incurred for compliance of additional requirements by the
authorities having jurisdiction shall be borne by the Contractor.
D COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
Testing of M&E Installation ( )
The Contractor shall provide electricity and water from his own sources for carrying
out the testing of M&E installation and making good of defects and the watering of
roadside turf and trees during the Maintenance Period. Should these be taken from the
Employer’s or the occupants’ source, the Contractor shall reimburse all cost and
expenses in connection to the Employer’s or the respective occupants.
E COMPLETION ( )
The Contractor shall when the Works appear to be complete, request the Architect to
carry out a joint inspection of the Works, or any part of the Works, as the case may
be. Such request must be in writing at least 7 days prior to the commencement of the
inspection.
As a condition precedent to the issue of the Completion Certificate in accordance with

the Clause 24 (4) of the Conditions of Contract, the Works shall be tested and
approved by the relevant authorities.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/46
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A TEMPORARY OCCUPATION PERMIT (TOP) ( )
The Contractor shall programme and complete the Works (including all designated/
Nominated Sub-Contractors’ work) in such a manner that the Architect can apply for a
Temporary Occupation Permit (TOP) for the Building.
All works to enable the various submissions to be made for the application of a TOP by
the Architect must be completed to his satisfaction at a date not later than eight (8)
weeks prior to the Completion Date of the Contract.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses arising therefrom.
B CERTIFICATE OF STATUTORY COMPLETION (CSC) ( )
The Contractor shall allow here for providing all necessary attendance, assistance and
co-operation for all relevant Authorities to make CSC inspections as and when
required. He shall arrange for all concerned parties of Sub-Contractors, Suppliers, etc.
to attend the inspections.
The Architect shall give the Contractor a reasonable notice before every inspection.
The Contractor shall allow for all costs and expenses arising therefrom.
C FINAL CLEANING ( )
When the Works have been substantially performed, remove surplus materials, tools,
construction machinery and equipment not required for the performance of the
remaining works.
Remove waste materials and debris and leave the Works clean and suitable for
occupancy by the Employer.
Make arrangements with and obtain permits from Authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
Leave the Works broom-clean before the inspection process commences.
Clean and polish glass, hardware, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked
enamel, plastic laminated, mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken,
scratched or disregarded glass.
Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from finishing work, electrical and mechanical
fixtures, walls and floors, etc.
For avoidance of doubt, ‘clean’ is defined as the condition where any material that
remains could be easily removed by use of water to the Architect’s satisfaction.
Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation. Sweep and wash clean site paved areas.
D MAKING GOOD DEFECTS ( )
Make arrangements with the Employer and give reasonable notice of the precise dates
for access to the various parts of the Works for the purposes of making good defects.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/47
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A ADVERTISING ( )
The sole right of advertising upon or adjacent to the Works is reserved to the
Employer and the Contractor shall not allow any advertisement to be displayed without
the consent in writing of the Employer.
All publicity relating to this project is subject to the approval of the Employer and no
mention of the project in advertising or articles in any publication will be permitted
unless cleared through the Employer. Publicity or advertising implying endorsement of
a product by the Employer will not be permitted.
B MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ( )
Unless otherwise indicated in the specification, install or erect products in accordance

with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Obtain written instructions directly from
manufacturers.
Notify the Architect in writing of conflicts between the Specifications and

manufacturer’s instructions, so that the Architect may establish the course of action.
The Architect may require the removal and re-installation, or erection of products
improperly installed or erected due to failure in complying with these requirements.
Any such remedial action shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
For any materials or goods supplied under this Contract for which a warranty or
guarantee is given by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall secure such warranty or
guarantee in favour of the Employer.
C PERFORMANCE BOND ( )
Provide a Performance Bond from a Bank (to be approved by the Employer) in favour
of the Employer in a sum equal to ten (10) percent of the Accepted Tender Sum for
the due performance of the Contract. The terms of the Bond shall be exactly similar to
the specimen appended to the Form of Tender.
The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for the duration of the
Works inclusive of the Maintenance Period as stipulated in the Contract or until the
issuing of the Maintenance Certificate by the Architect, whichever is the later.
D EMPLOYER'S FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT ( )
The Contractor shall permit and provide all facilities to the Employer and other
Contractors to be employed directly by the Employer to enter upon and install fixtures
and equipment on site during the construction of the Works. No claims will be
entertained in respect of any inconvenience caused to the Contractor in this regard.
E DEED OF NOVATION ( )
If requested to do so, the Contractor shall undertake to execute a Deed of Novation

with the Employer and Designated Sub-Contractor in terms exactly similar to the
specimen appended to the Form of Tender and subsequently execute a Sub-Contract
Agreement with the Designated Sub-Contractor.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/48
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A DIRECT CONTRACTS ( )
Together with the Contractor, there will be other contractors and/or specialists
employed directly by the Employer (“Direct Contractors”) who will be working on the
Site during the course of the Contract for the purpose of carrying out works under
Direct Contracts.
The Contractor shall be responsible for inquiring into the nature, scope, scheduling and
all requirements of the Works of the Direct Contracts and allow for any impact which
these may have on the carrying out of the Works of this Contract.
The Direct Contractors are independent contractors and the Employer shall not be held
in any way responsible for their acts or omissions. For the avoidance of doubt, the acts
or omissions of the Direct Contractors shall not be construed as acts of prevention by
the Employer for the purpose of this Contract and the Contractor shall not be entitled
to proceed against the Employer for any damage, loss or expense arising from any
effect which the works of the Direct Contracts may have on the Works of this Contract.
The Contractor agrees to save the Employer harmless from any dispute, suit or action
between the Contractor and the Direct Contractors.
The Contractor shall:
(a) allow for the attendance for the works of the Direct Contractors under this
Section and shall ensure that the same are coordinated with the Works under this
Contract
(b) interface, plan, coordinate and organize the Works with the Direct Contractors,
prepare the co-ordination drawings and shop drawings for the works related to
the Direct Contract works and to obtain Architect’s approval prior to the
installation works commence at site;
(c) and provide all assistance and access as may be necessary to ensure the proper
and timely sequencing and completion of the works of the Direct Contract and
(d) deal directly with the Direct Contractors on all matters relating to any issue
which may affect in any way the Contractor’s carrying out of the Works.
The Direct Contractors shall not be limited to the following:-
(a) Layer & Pullet House equipment
(b) Combustion plant equipment
(c) Egg Grading and Packing equipment
(d) Any such Contractors/ Suppliers to be appointed by the Employer an

notified in writing to the Contractor for the purposes of the Contract
The attendance provided by the Contractor to the Employer’s Direct Contract

Works is not to price under this Section 1 but to be priced under ” Section 2-
P.C. & Provisional Sum”.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/49
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A BUILDABILITY SCORE ( )
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Code of Practice on Buildability
(“Code”) and the Constructability Appraisal System (“CAS”) including any
amendment and revision thereto. The Contractor shall submit the scoring sheets to
Architect for approval.
The Contractor shall be ensure that the Buildability Score meets the minimum
requirements set out in the Code and ensure timely submission of Buildability Score
to Commissioner of Building Control and obtaining Certificate of Compliance of
Buildability Score
The Contractor shall as and when required, provide attendance, assistance,

unhindered and safe access to the Architect and Authorities for the purpose of
assessment of Buildability Score.
Should the Contractor propose any alternative Architectural and structural members
and components that deviate from the consultant’s design, he shall ensure that the
Buildability Score of his alternative design to be equivalent or higher than the
original design. In such case, the Contractor shall submit calculation details
complying with the Buildable Design Appraisal System (BDAS) guidelines developed
by BCA.
B CONSTRUCTABILITY SCORE ( )
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Code of Practice on the
Constructability Appraisal System (“CAS”) including any amendment and revision
thereto.
The Contractor shall be ensure that the y Score meets the minimum requirements
set out in the Code and ensure timely submission of Constructability Score to
Commissioner of Building Control and obtaining Certificate of Compliance of
Constructability Score.
The Contractor shall keep and maintain proper records on progress, construction
techniques and processes adopted, productivity data including all documented
evidence and any other documents as may be determined by the Commissioner of
Building Control that the Works have been constructed in accordance with the
submitted Constructability Score.
The Contractor shall provide attendance, assistance, unhindered and safe access to
the Architect and Authorities for any site checks.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses for compliance with
this requirement including payment of any fines which may be imposed by the
authorities in the event of any non-compliance.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for any damage or loss suffered in
respect of non-compliance with these requirements.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/50
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A BCA REGISTERED SUB-CONTRACTORS AND SLOTS ( )
The Contractor shall ensure that all domestic sub-contractors employed in respect of
the Works comply with the requirements of the applicable statutory provisions and
regulatory requirements and, where appropriate, are registered under the applicable
categories with the Building and Construction Authority (BCA) or under the Singapore
List of Trade Sub-Contractors (SLOTS) as maintained by the Singapore Contractors
Association Ltd (SCAL). Within 7 days of the Architect’s requirements to do so, the
Contractor shall furnish copies of certificates and other documents evidencing that
each sub-contractor has been duly registered or accredited as provided under this
provision.
B BCA GREEN MARK ( )
This project is designed to achieve Green Mark Gold Plus Certified rating and the
Contractor shall do his part in obtaining the required Green Mark Points from
following site management items and other Green Mark items
a) Monitoring and set target to reduce energy usage on site
b) Monitoring and set target to reduce water use on site
Implement effective construction & demolition waste management
programme including monitoring and setting targets to minimize
construction waste
d) Usage of recycle materials
e) Other Main Contractor’s Green Mark items
The Contractor shall refer to the documentation on Green Mark for Buildings published
by the BCA for detailed information of the scheme.
In order for the assessment to be conducted, the Contractor shall, inter alia:-
a) At his own cost, make available to the BCA assessors all such documents,
drawings, reports, true and accurate information and any other details as may be
required by the assessors;
b) Permit full access to the Site for the assessment and maintain safety on Site;
c) Bear all costs incurred in connection with the same which may include the
provision of utility supplies;
d) Arrange for the site supervisor to be present, co-ordinate and assist relevant BCA
personnel in arranging for assessment on Site;
e) Facilitate the inspection of audits of the in-process work relating to the
assessment criteria;
f) Organize and interface the Programme and his work to liaise with the assessors
and provide any assistance as may be necessary to ensure satisfactory and
timely sequencing and completion of the assessment; and
g) Apply for re-assessment(s), where necessary prior to the Completion Date and
allow for the fees charged payable to the BCA for the service
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses for compliance with
these requirements.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/51
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A SCOPE OF WORKS BY CONTRACTOR FOR DESIGN FOR SAFETY ( )
The Contractor and the appointed sub-contractors shall:
Attend and review with the DFS Professional Consultants on the design review
GUIDE 3: Pre-Construction Review process in relation to the proposed construction
processes and methodologies, including the temporary works design and the sub-
contractors’ design elements, to ensure all potential harms to anyone during the
construction will be avoided or mitigated prior to the commencement of construction
works to the ER and Dfs Professional for assessment and review. The review shall
also include but not limited to the master programme to ensure sufficient and
practical time is allocated in the timeline for works to be carried out in a safe
manner.
Be competent to carry out the work that he is engaged to do in a safe manner.
Discuss with his Sub-Contractors carrying out the works and take reasonable steps
to ensure that risks identified are properly managed.
All sub-contractors are provided with the required information (GUIDE 1, GUIDE 2
and advisory notes) to enable them to carry out the works safely.
Submit and review any outstanding issues discussed during GUIDE 1 and GUIDE 2
with ER and DFS Professional Consultants. Only residual hazards are to be identified
within the SHRAF at the end of construction.
Submit all Safety And Health Register Assessment Form to DFS Professional
Consultants and submit details of how the high
risk operations will be carried out prior to commencement of the relevant works to
ensure any foreseeable safety and health risks are addressed.
Submit drawings to DFS Professional Consultants and the rest of the Consultants.
Attend regular site meetings, mandatory monthly project safety meetings and
employer’s meetings as and when required.
Submit report on site progress in relation to the DFS matters.
CORONAVIRUS DISEASES MEASURES ( )

B
The Contractor shall deliver all goods and/or materials for the Work in accordance with
the approved Work Programme. Any claims for cost and time for the delay of Works
due to the late arrival of goods or materials from overseas countries resultant from
the “COVID (Coronavirus Disease) outbreaks" will not be entertained by the
Employer. The Contractor shall be aware of the impact due to the current COVID
outbreak and shall obtain goods and materials from reliable sources that could meet
the timeline for completion. The quality of the goods and/or materials shall not be
compromised for any alternative proposed good and/or materials and shall be
subjected to the approval of the Employer and/or consultants., and at your own cost
and expenses.
No claim for extension of time ('EOT') shall be entertained as a result of or as
consequences to the Covid situation; unless it was made pursuant to further
Government intervention (s) implemented under the Covid-19 (Temporary
Measures) Act 2020 prohibiting you from performing the Works, such as Circuit
breaker, mandatory closure of site and/ or provision of universal EOT.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary tests and measures against COVID
including establishing and implementing a system of Safe Management Measures so
as to ensure and maintain a safe working environment and minimise the risk of
further outbreaks.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/52
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A DEEDS OF JOINT WARRANTY & INDEMNITY ( )

(the period to be all five (5) years unless otherwise stated)
Deliver to the Employer the following Deeds of Joint Warranty and Indemnity as
specified in the Specification (all for a period of 5-year unless otherwise stated) from
the Date of Completion of Works in a form exactly similar to the Specimen appended
to the Form of Tender.
You are required to submit following lists of warranty & indemnity but not limited to
the following:-
1. For Metal Roof (ten (10) years)
To indemnify against any defects, weakness, water seepage, staining, defective
materials & workmanship and defective design of Metal roof system.
2. For Waterproofing Works to Wet Areas etc. (ten (10) years)
To indemnify against any defects, faults, failures, watertightness, deterioration

in the workmanship and/ or quality of materials, in the Waterproofing Works to
Wet Areas (e.g., internal wet areas, reinforced concrete slab, etc.)
3. For Painting and Coating to Metalwork (five (5) years)

To indemnify against any defects, faulty workmanship, defective materials and
other faults in painting and coating to metalwork.
4. For Epoxy Coating/ Tiles Adhesives (five (5) years)
To indemnify against any defects, faults, failures, staining, breakdown,

deterioration, disintegration, defective materials or workmanship in the work,
quality of materials, premature breakdown, water leakage and all damages to
surface finishes including but not limited to plaster, panelling, tiling services and
the like.
5. Aluminium Works and Glazing Works (five (5) years)
To indemnify against any defects in the faulty workmanship, defective

materials, watertightness, failure, staining, and/or leakage, deterioration and
other faults in Aluminium Works and Glazing Works
6. Anti-termite Treatment to Soil (Five (5) years)
To indemnify against any defects, faulty workmanship, defective materials,

and/or failures of the treatment, infestation by subterranean termites and
other faults in the Anti-Termite Treatment to Soil
7. External Painting and Textured Coating System (five (5) years)
To indemnify against any defects, faulty workmanship, defective materials,

watertightness failure, premature breakdown, deterioration, chalking, uneven
discoloration, flaking, popping and presence of fungus appearance.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/53
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A BIM DELIVERABLES ( )
The Contractor shall adopt Building Information Modeling (BIM) for the delivery of
the Project, and produce the BIM Deliverables for the Project, in accordance to
Building and Construction Authority Singapore BIM Guide (therein known as SG BIM
Guide). Documents and Drawings to be submitted by the Contractor in the
Preliminaries of this Contract shall be read in conjunction with this Preliminaries
Item for BIM.
In conjunction with the delivery of BIM Services for the Project, the Contractor
and/or its Sub-Contractors shall make reference to the prevailing version of the
following documents, as of the effective date of Project Commencement set out in
this Contract:-
(a) Building and Construction Authority Singapore BIM Guide (therein known as SG
BIM Guide) – published in
http://www.corenet.gov.sg/integrated_submission/bim/BIM_Guide.htm
In the event of any inconsistency between the Contract and the SG BIM Guide
and/or the Contractor BIM Requirements, the provisions of the Contract shall
prevail.
The Contractor shall produce its BIM Deliverables in the manner of delivery, content
and standards, set out in the Contractor BIM Requirements and the BIM Execution
Plan. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the
submitted BIM Deliverables
The Contractor shall re-submit any BIM Deliverables as required by the Architect
and/or the Employer, should any of the requirements are not met. The Contractor
shall rectify the Model(s) to the Architect’s satisfaction without any claim on
extension of time and additional cost. The Contractor shall consult the relevant
consultants on the standards should queries arise.
Building Information Models are to facilitate the progress and coordination of the
Works, which shall serve as a production medium for drawings prior to
commencement of works on site and shall be one of the final deliverables after
physical as-built conditions are surveyed, captured and updated into the Model(s).
The Contractor shall carry out the BIM coordination meeting to resolve all technical
matters and submit the coordinated services drawings generated from their
construction BIM model integrating all the key trade works for Employer and
Consultants' review and approval before carrying out the Works on Site.
The Contractor shall facilitate the BIM Deliverables to the Employer and the
Consultants, free of charge and in the appropriate/accepted software application file
format stated in the Contractor BIM Requirements and the BIM Execution Plan, for
the purpose of collaboration, coordination and/or submission. The use of the BIM
Deliverables shall be limited to project-specific purposes and shall not be considered
a license to place the BIM Deliverables to any use not necessary for and specific to
the project.
The Employer shall have the ownership and exclusive rights to all BIM Deliverables
of the Project
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/54
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A BIM COORDINATORS ( )
The Contractor shall appoint the following BIM personnel to manage and coordinate
the Contractor’s execution of BIM for the Project :-
(a) One (1) competent BIM Manager, with at least five (5) years’ relevant
experience to serve as the main lead for BIM execution by the
Contractor.
(b) at least one (1) competent BIM Coordinator, with at least three (3) year’s
relevant experience, to assist the Contractor’s Senior BIM Coordinator.
The Contractor’s BIM Coordinator(s) shall undertake the role and responsibility as
provided in the SG BIM Guide and Contractor BIM Requirements and ensure the
delivery of the Contractor’s BIM Deliverables are in accordance with the standards
and requirements in the Contractor BIM Requirements unless expressly agreed
otherwise.
For the avoidance of doubt, all compensation and related costs associated with the
appointment of the Contractor’s BIM Coordinator(s) in connection with works to be
done in the Project shall be borne by the Contractor, and no reimbursement,
compensation and/or related costs shall be paid to the Contractor
The Contractor and its BIM Coordinator(s) shall convene a BIM Kick-off meeting, at
least one (1) month before the production of the BIM Deliverables, involving the
Project BIM Manager and the Consultants’ BIM Coordinators involved in the
execution of BIM to coordinate efforts to develop, update and implement the BIM
Execution Plan for the Construction Stage of the Project.
The BIM Execution Plan shall be reviewed and accepted by the Architect at least 14
days before the production of the BIM Deliverables.
Prior to the production of drawings for coordinated services for the Architect’s
approval, the Contractor shall submit the Individual / Combined Services Model(s)
for the Architect’s and relevant Consultant’s review and comments, until satisfaction
with approval in principle. The Contractor shall always ensure that the Architect and
the Project BIM Manager and Coordinators will have adequate time for such review.
Individual / Combined Services Model(s) are to facilitate the progress of the Works
and will be reviewed by the Architect for general design requirements only. As such,
review by the SO of the Individual / Combined Services Model(s) will not constitute
checking of detailed measurements or acceptance of auxiliary units or materials.
The review of the Individual / Combined Services Model(s) by the Architect shall not
be construed as allowing :-
(a) Any departure from Contract requirements except as specifically
approved in writing by the Employer.
(b) The relief of the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, omissions
or discrepancies in details or dimensions in the shop and
coordination drawings.
(c) Any Departure from additional details provided or instructions issued
by the Architect.
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/55
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
A BIM COORDINATION ( )
The Individual / Combined Services Model(s) are to be updated and re-submitted for
review by the Architect whenever modifications are required to the coordinated
drawings for services, prior to approval of the drawings. Delay caused by the re-
submission or modifications thereto from repeated errors, non-conformance to
standards, unacceptable details, unclear or insufficient information shall not be
reasons for a request for any extension of time
The Contractor and its BIM Coordinator(s) shall actively engage in weekly Model
Coordination Review sessions, as part of the quality assurance protocol, to achieve a
coordinated design prior to the commencement of construction works.
The Contractor’s BIM Coordinator(s) shall document the findings in a report format,
three (3) working days after each Model Coordination Review session. This report
shall be submitted to the BIM Manager, Architect and the Employer.
Upon completion of all Works and within two (2) months after Substantial
Completion, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, submit the As-Built
Model(s) – (Architecture, C&S, M&E, etc.), containing the as-built drawings together
with the other As-Built deliverables specified in the Preliminaries of the Main
Contract, in four (4) sets to the SO on a separate CD-ROM / DVD-ROM for the SO’s
approval
GOODS AND SERVICES TAX (GST) ( )

B
Whenever GST becomes payable by the Employer on taxable goods and services
supplied under the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer all
calculations and relevant tax invoices necessary for computing the GST payable.
CONTRACTOR’S SITE STAFF DURING THE MAINTENANCE PERIOD ( )

C
The Contractor shall provide sufficient technicians/staff on site for the maintenance
period and for longer period if deemed necessary by the Employer.
MINOR WORKS DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD ( )

D
The Contractor shall, when instructed by the Architect, carry out alteration works
during the Maintenance period. Such works shall be valued in accordance with the
rates priced in the Schedule of Rates.
SPARE MATERIALS FOR THE EMPLOYER ( )

E
The Contractor shall allow for and provide an additional of all the following as spare
materials for the Employer and shall hand such spare materials to the Employer prior
to Completion of the Works:-
a) Each type of tiles (i.e., 3% of the contract quantity)
To Collection $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/56
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
COLLECTION
Page 1/1 ... ...
Page 1/2 ... ...
Page 1/3 ... ...
Page 1/4 ... ...
Page 1/5 ... ...
Page 1/6 ... ...
Page 1/7 ... ...
Page 1/8 ... ...
Page 1/9 ... ...
Page 1/10 ... ...
Page 1/11 ... ...
Page 1/12 … …
Page 1/13 … …
Page 1/14 … …
Page 1/15 … …
Page 1/16 … …
Page 1/17 … …
Page 1/18 … …
Page 1/19 … …
Page 1/20 … …
Page 1/21 … …
Page 1/22 … …
Page 1/23 … …
Page 1/24 … …
Page 1/25 … …
Page 1/26 … …
Page 1/27 … …
Page 1/28 … …
Page 1/29 … …
Page 1/30 … …
Carried Forward $
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/57
SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
COLLECTION
Brought Forward
Page 1/31 … …
Page 1/32 … …
Page 1/33 … …
Page 1/34 … …
Page 1/35 … …
Page 1/36 … …
Page 1/37 … …
Page 1/38 … …
Page 1/39 … …
Page 1/40 … …
Page 1/41 … …
Page 1/42 … …
Page 1/43 … …
Page 1/44 … …
Page 1/45 … …
Page 1/46 … …
Page 1/47 … …
Page 1/48 … …
Page 1/49 … …
Page 1/50 ……
Page 1/51 … …
Page 1/52 … …
Page 1/53 … …
Page 1/54 … …
Page 1/55 ……
Page 1/56 … …
TOTAL OF SECTION 1 - PRELIMINARIES

CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY
Layer Egg Farm

(2216\B\TD) S1/58
Schedule of Prices
Section 2 – P.C. & Provisional Sums

SECTION 2
P.C. & PROVISIONAL SUMS
Item Description Rate S$ ¢
NOTES:-
All P.C. and Provisional Sums are to be expended at the discretion and
under the instruction of the Architect and may be omitted wholly or in
part. The Contractor shall have no claim whatsoever on any omission.
The words "Nominated/ Designated Supplier" and or "Nominated/

Designated Sub-Contractor" (i.e., NSC) where used in this Bill shall
mean Specialist Firms to be selected by the Architect and/or Employer.
The words “Sub-Contractor” where used in this Bill shall mean NSC and
the Employer’s Direct Supplier and Employer’s Direct Contractor
A ATTENDANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR
The Contractor is responsible for and shall make available to the Sub-
Contractor on the following facilities for the carrying out of the Sub-
Contract Works:-
1) The provision, erection and removal of all scaffolding including

special scaffolding, staging and screens (Except scaffolding and/or
other temporary working platform within the lift shaft).
2) Allow access to and/or use of canteen, toilets and other welfare

facilities.
3) Provision of reasonable space for the Sub-Contractor to build site

office and stores, in such locations where the possibility of damage
being caused to store materials and equipment by the building
works is kept to a minimum.
4) Free use of existing hoisting facilities which the Contractor has

installed for his own use up to maximum lifting capacity of
2,000kg.
5) Provision of temporary water supplies including water drawn from

the permanent systems for testing and commissioning of all
equipment and associated installations and systems covered under
the Main Contract and all equipment and associated installations
and systems covered under the Main Contract and all Sub-
Contracts, including:
a) making applications for the provision of temporary and

permanent water supplies
b) opening of accounts for the provision of temporary and

permanent water supplies
c) payment of all charges and fees associated with the

provision of temporary and permanent water supplies
(excluding only the service connection charges for
permanent supplies payable to the relevant Authority).
To Collection S$
Egg Farm- Main Contract S2/1

SECTION 2
ATTENDANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONT'D)
6) Provision of temporary lighting and power supplies including power

drawn from the new permanent systems for testing and
commissioning of all equipment and associated installations and
systems covered under the Main Contract, all Sub-Contracts and
Employer’s Direct Contracts, including:
a) making applications for the provision of temporary and

permanent electricity supplies.
b) opening of accounts for the provision of temporary and

permanent electricity supplies.
c) payment of all charges and fees associated with the

provision of temporary and permanent electricity supplies
(excluding only the service connection charges for
permanent supplies payable to the relevant Authority).
Note: All payments made by the Employer to the PUB/Power

Grid before the Contract Completion Date for water and
electricity charges including surcharges plus all fees such
as refuse fees, sanitary appliance fees, water-borne fees,
etc. and taxes shall be recovered by the Employer from
certified interim payment due to the Contractor.
7) Provision of all setting out and survey information including giving

all necessary dimensions.
8) Programming and co-ordinating all the Sub-Contractors' works to

ensure the correct timing, sequencing and completion of all
operations.
9) Provision of reasonable working space.
10) Ascertaining all particulars relating to the Sub-Contract works and

Employer’s Direct Contract works with regard to sizes and
positions of opening, holes, mortices and the like which are to be
formed or left in the structure by the Contractor including their
subsequent making good to the approval and satisfaction of the
Architect.
11) Where required the Contractor is to build in or cast in inserts,

bolts, sleeves or other forms of suspension for pipes, ducts,
trunking, guide rails, equipment, etc. provided by and to locations
ascertained by the Sub-Contractor, including grouting around the
inserts, bolts, sleeves, pipes, etc and making good to the approval
and satisfaction of the Architect.
12) Removal of rubbish from all locations reasonably designated by

the Contractor including final removal from the site.
To Collection S$

SECTION 2
ATTENDANCE BY THE CONTRACTOR (CONT'D)
13) The Contractor is to take over the completed Sub-Contract Works

and Employer’s Direct Contract works as and when directed by the
Architect, after which the Contractor shall be fully responsible for
all losses, thefts, and/or damages to the Sub-Contract Works. The
Contractor shall allow for proper protection of the Sub-Contract
Works including safeguarding against corrosion, mechanical
damage, water damage, inclement weather, dust, etc.
14) Provision of all necessary filling, grouting and making good works
under around doorways, windows and all openings, chasing, holes
cut out by the Sub-Contractors.
A RESPONSIBILITIES OF SUB-CONTRACTOR
The Sub-Contractor shall include in the Sub-Contract Sum for all costs in
connection with the following:
1) Unloading, getting in, storing and all handling and lifting to a

convenient location, materials, plant and equipment etc for
hoisting by the Contractor. When the materials, plant, equipment
etc have been hoisted to the nearest level possible with the
hoisting facilities by the Contractor, it shall be the responsibility of
the Sub-Contractor to lift or move them to the required position
using his own facilities.
2) The provision, erection, maintenance and removal of all his

temporary office and storage accommodation.
3) Connection to temporary power supplies made available by the

Contractor. Supplying and running distribution cables, leads and
electrical equipment required.
4) Provision of hoses and connection to water supply points.
5) Remove all waste and debris arising from the Sub-Contract Works
to locations designated by the Contractor.
6) Full responsibility, for all losses, thefts and/or damages to any

materials and goods on site for the sub-contract works until such
material and goods have been fully, finally and properly
incorporated in the works and such works have been properly
completed and handed over to the Contractor as and when
directed by the Architect.
7) Full responsibility for loss or damage to the Sub-Contractor's plant,

tools and equipment and other property on the site.
8) Checking all dimensions of relevant completed builder's works on

site before installation of the Sub-Contract works and ascertaining
their compatibility with the Sub-Contract works.
To Collection S$

SECTION 2
RESPONSIBILITIES OF SUB-CONTRACTOR (CONT'D)
9) Protection and casing up of the Sub-Contract works, including

safeguarding against corrosion, mechanical damage, water
damage, inclement weather, dust, etc, until such works have been
properly competed and handed over to the Contractor.
10) Concrete inertia blocks and associated steel framework shall be

provided by the respective Sub-Contractors.
11) The respective Sub-Contractors shall be responsible for cutting

chases and forming holes in brickwork, blockwork etc for pipes,
conduits, fittings and the like (subject to the approval of the
Architect), together with the subsequent making good with
approved material.
12) Sealing between sleeves built-in by the Main Contractor and the
pipe, duct, trunking, etc. using materials and methods of suitable
fire rating and to the approval of the Building Authorities, Architect
and Engineer.
A PROFIT AND ATTENDANCE ON P.C. SUMS
The amounts inserted by the Contractor against the item "Allow for Profit
and Attendance" shall include for all the Contractor's responsibilities
including full co-operation and co-ordination with all Nominated Sub-
Contractors and Suppliers to ensure maximum efficiency in the progress
and completion of the works in order to avoid delays.
The amount priced for the attendance of the PC Sum items must include
for co-ordinating with several Nominated Sub-Contractors or Suppliers and
Employer’s Direct Contractors and Suppliers.
The Contractor will be held responsible for whatever other expenses to

which he deems he is entitled. The Profit and Attendance shall be adjusted
against the final P.C. expenditure.
Should the Contractor be awarded work under any PC Sum for which he
has tendered, the amount for profit and attendance allowed by him
against the PC Sum shall be deducted.
Should work stated as a PC Sum be omitted from the Contract and the
Employer chooses to carry out such work as a direct contract then the
allowance for "profit and attendance" shall be omitted, save that any
attendance, required to be provided by the Contractor shall be valued by
the Quantity Surveyor as a variation in accordance with the Terms of the
Contract.
ATTENDANCE ON EMPLOYER’S DIRECT CONTRACTS
The amounts inserted by the Contractor against the item "Allow for
Attendance" shall include for all the Contractor's responsibilities including
full co-operation and co-ordination with all Employer’s Direct Contractors
and Suppliers to ensure maximum efficiency in the progress and
completion of the works in order to avoid delays.
The Contractor will be held responsible for whatever other expenses to
which he deems he is entitled. The Attendance shall be adjusted against
the awarded contract sum for the Employer’s Direct contracts.
To Collection S$

SECTION 2
P.C. SUMS - SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION

Layer & Pullets Houses- Building & Equipment (Installation Only)
A Provide the P.C Sum of S$5,760,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Five Million

Seven Hundred and Sixty Thousand Only) for Layer & Pullets Houses- 5,760,000.00 00
-
Building & Equipment (Installation Only) to be executed complete by a
Designated Sub-Contractor.
B Add for Profit (State _______%) %
Allow for attendance on Sub-Contractor executing the foregoing

C %
(State _______%)
Combustion Plant – Architectural Works & Installation of

Equipment
2,400,000 00
D Provide the P.C Sum of S$2,400,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Two Million
and Four Hundred Thousand Only) for Architectural Works and Installation -
of Equipment For Combustion Plant to be executed complete by a
E Add for Profit (State _______%) %

F %
(State _______%)
Water Treatment Plants- RC Structure and Equipment
G Provide the P.C Sum of S$1,350,000.00 (Singapore Dollars One Million

Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Only) for Water Treatment Plants- RC - 1,350,000 00
Structure and Equipment to be executed complete by a Designated Sub-
Contractor.
H Add for Profit (State _______%) %

I %
(State _______%)
Solar Panels
J Provide the P.C Sum of S$3,500,000.00 (Singapore Three Million and Five
Hundred Thousand Dollars Only) for Solar Panels Works to be executed - 3,500,000 00
complete by a Designated Sub-Contractor.
K Add for Profit (State _______%) %

L %
(State _______%)
To Collection S$

SECTION 2
Kitchen Equipment At Dormitory
G Provide the P.C Sum of S$100,0000.00 (Singapore One Hundred Thousand 100,000 00
Dollars only) for Kitchen Equipment to be executed complete by a
-
H Add for Profit (State _______%) %

I %
(State _______%)
PROVISIONAL SUMS
Loose Furniture & FFE Items
J Provide the Provisional Sum of S$330,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Three

Hundred Thirty Thousand Only) for Loose Furniture and FFE items - 330,000 00
Built-In Cabinets
K Provide the P.C Sum of S$50,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Fifty Thousand 50,000 00
Only) for Built-In Cabinets -
Laundry Equipment & Cloth Hanging Rack
A Provide the P.C Sum of S$100,000.00 (Singapore Dollars One Hundred

Thousand Only) for Laundry Equipment & Cloth Hanging Rack 100,000 00
-
External Building Signages
B Provide the P.C Sum of S$50,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Fifty Thousand

50,000 00
Only) for External Building Signages -
Signages
C Provide the P.C Sum of S$20,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Twenty Thousand

20,000 00
Only) for Signages -
To Collection S$

SECTION 2
EMPLOYER’S DIRECT CONTRACT WORK
Notes:-
The Contractor is responsible for and shall make available to the

Employer’s Direct Supplier and Contractor on the same facilities as stated
on the above “Attendance By Contractor” for the carrying out of the
Employer’s Direct Contract Works.
The Contractor is allowed to price for attendance and to state the

percentage of the Attendance in this Section. The Attendance shall be
adjusted accordingly based on the awarded contract sum of the respective
Employer’s Direct Contracts; and the awarded contract sum will be notified
with an Architect’s Instruction.
Layer & Pullets Houses- Supply of Building Material and Equipment
The Sum of S$33,000,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Thirty-Three Million Only) - N.A.

for Layer & Pullets Houses- Supply of Building Material and Equipment to
be executed complete by a Employer’s Direct Supplier.
A Allow for attendance on Sub-Contractor executing the foregoing %
(State______%)
Combustion Plant -Supply of Equipment
The Sum of S$13,700,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Thirteen Million Seven - N.A.

Hundred Thousand Only) for Combustion Plant Equipment to be supplied
to site by a Employer’s Direct Supplier.
B Allow for attendance on Sub-Contractor executing the foregoing %
(State______%)
Egg Grading and Packing System at GNP
The Sum of S$5,060,000.00 (Singapore Dollars Five Million Sixty N.A.

Thousand Only) for Egg Grading and Packing System at GNP to be
executed complete by Employer’s Direct Contractor.
A Allow for attendance on Sub-Contractor executing the foregoing
(State______%)
To Collection S$

SECTION 2
COLLECTION
Page 2/1 .... ....
Page 2/2 .... ....
Page 2/3 .... ....
Page 2/4 .... ....
Page 2/5 .... ....
Page 2/6 .... ....
Page 2/7 .... ....
TOTAL OF SECTION 2 - P.C. & PROVISIONAL SUMS

CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY S$

Section 3 – Earthworks
SECTION 3 - EARTHWORKS
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount

S$
GENERAL NOTES
A This This Section is to be read in conjunction with other Item
documents/drawings/Specifications in the tender documents.
Allow in the Tender Price all necessary machinery, plant, tools,
scaffolding, materials, labour and all temporary works for the
proper protection and the execution of the Works.
B The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site to Item

examine and ascertain the true nature and extent of the work
under this section before tendering. Prices inserted herein will be
held to include clearing or removal of all types of materials so as
to facilitate proper execution of all works.
C The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in Item
this tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and
the method statement illustrating how the works shall be carried
out.
D All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, Item
pipe sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and
Electrical Services are deemed to be included.
E The Contractor has to ensure that all existing electric cables, Item
telephone cables, water pipes, sewer lines and gas pipes on site
have been properly disconnected by the Local Authorities prior to
commencement of any works. Failure to comply with this
condition and thereby resulting in damage inclusive of any
consequential claims shall be borne fully by the Contractor.
F Allow herein for making all applications, obtaining permits, Item

liaising with the relevant Authorities and all necessary
attendance and pay all licence fees, levies/charges in connection
with the Works and all works carried out by the relevant
Authorities.
G Allow for complying with the provisions of Instructions to Item

Tenderers, the Conditions of Contract and its Amendments,
Specification and Drawings.
H No claims will be entertained by the Employer for any extra cost, Item
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any
interruptions by any late approvals and any delay in the works of
the relevant Authorities.
I The graphics artwork to the hoarding shall be by Employers.
TO COLLECTION
Layer Egg Farm- Main Contract

(2216\B\TD) SS3/1

S$
Site Clearance
A Allow for cutting, clearing and removal of trees, plants and Item
shrubs and the like, grubbing up roots, backfilling and
compacting holes with approved earth including removal all
debris off site.
Earthworks
B Excavation to form cutting commencing from ground level; Item
including forming of levels; filling and compaction to the required
platform levels and removal of surplus excavated material
within the site.
C Filling to make up levels and compaction to the required platform Item

levels with selected excavated material or imported earth
D Temporary Boundary Site Hoarding
Design, Supply and Install and maintain temporary metal Item

hoarding and associated footings to perimeter of site boundary
completed with temporary lighting, protection of the public and
for the proper execution of the works complete with "off white"
colourbond corrugate metal sheet; 2.40m high.
State thickness of metal hoarding : _________________
State the the material of metal hoarding:
_________________________________________
E Temporary Entrance gate

Double leaf temporary entrance gates Item
(each set - individual leaf 5m wide)
- 10m wide x 2.40m high double leaves swing gate x 2 Nos
Termination Of Abondon Existing Sewerage Treatmet

Plant
F Coordinate with QP on authority submission/approval of Item

termination of abondon existing sewerage treatment plant, and
their pipes and disposal of all related debris from the termination
work.
G Sealing of existing pipe service connection, demolish the Item

existing STP facility, and pipings. The Contractor shall allow all
cost in connection with the proper sealing method as specified
and accepted by the relevant Authorities.
TO COLLECTION

(2216\B\TD) SS3/2

S$
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but shown
in the drawings and specifications and necessary for the
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to
be included elsewhere in the tender price
A Item
B Item
C Item
D Item
E Item
TO COLLECTION

(2216\B\TD) SS3/3

S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page S3/1 ... ...
Page S3/2 ... ...
Page S3/3 ... ...
Page S3/4 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 3 - EARTH WORKS CARRIED TO FINAL

SUMMARY

(2216\B\TD) SS3/4
Schedule of Prices
Section 4 – Main Building Works

SECTION 4.1 -GENERAL NOTES

S$

A This This Section is to be read in conjunction with other Item
documents/drawings/Specifications in the tender documents.
Allow in the Tender Price all necessary machinery, plant, tools,
scaffolding, materials, labour and all temporary works for the
proper protection and the execution of the Works.
B The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site to Item

examine and ascertain the true nature and extent of the work
under this section before tendering. Prices inserted herein will be
held to include clearing or removal of all types of materials so as
to facilitate proper execution of all works.
C The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in Item
this tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and
the method statement illustrating how the works shall be carried
out.
D All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, Item
pipe sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and
Electrical Services are deemed to be included.
E All the floor/wall tiling/finishes are deemed to include cement Item

and screed backing, approved adhesive, colour grouting and
pointing. All linear items such as skirting, top and side of kerbs,
sides of stringer beams, returns, drops, top of ledges are
deemed to be included in the tender.
F Unless otherwise stated, all pipes/conduits and the like are Item
deemed to be concealed. All fittings are deemed to be flushed
with plastering. Tender prices are deemed to include all
necessary boxings, ceiling lining to cover the exposed
pipes/conduits.
G Allow herein for making all applications, obtaining permits, Item

liaising with the relevant Authorities and all necessary
attendance and pay all licence fees, levies/charges in connection
with the Works and all works carried out by the relevant
Authorities.
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any
interruptions by any late approvals and any delay in the works
of the relevant Authorities.
I Allow for complying with the provisions of Instructions to Item

Tenderers, the Conditions of Contract and its Amendments,
Specification and Drawings.
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.1- GENERAL NOTES CARRIED TO

SECTION 4 - BUILDING WORKS SUMMARY

(2216\B\TD) SS4.1/1
SECTION 4.2 LAYER & PULLET HOUSES
LAYER HOUSE PULLET HOUSE
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount
S$ S$
SECTION 4.2- LAYER & PULLET HOUSES
Notes:-(Not To Price for these Notes)
i The Supply of building element e.g. structural steel frame, roof

truss, metal roof system, doors and windows, wall panels, metal
ceiling, steel platforms, steel staircases, control rooms, etc; are
by Employer's Direct Supplier
ii Supply of the equipment in Pullet Houses are by Employer's
Direct Supplier
iii The installation of the above 2 items are under Prime Cost Sum
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
To raft foundation/ ground slabs/ ground beams
A Excavation trench from existing/ reduced levels including Item

backfilling and removal of surplus excavated material off site
B Anti-termite sub-terrain treatment to soil on area in contacted Item

with the building with a five years warranty
C Raft foundation completed with vapour barrier, hardcore, lean Item

concrete, reinforced concrete, concrete thickening, BRC mesh
and formwork
D Reinforced concrete underground manure trench including Item
excavation, removal debris off site and completed with vapour
barrier, hardcore, lean concrete, reinforced concrete, BRC mesh
and formwork
E Reinforced concrete underground manure trench and manure Item

pits (outside the houses) including excavation, and removal
debris off site; and completed with vapour barrier, hardcore,
lean concrete, reinforced concrete, BRC mesh and formwork
Others
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

(2216\B\TD) SS4.2/1
S$ S$
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS Item
F Low reinforced concrete wall; 700mm high completed with BRC Item
mesh and formworks
G Reinforced concrete encasement to structural steel columns; Item
completed with BRC mesh and formworks; 700mm high
Floor Finishes (Internal)
H Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
EXTERNAL WORKS WITHIN PLOTS

A Reinforced concrete apron slab and beams; complete with Item
excavation, well compacted hardcore, lean concrete, BRC welded
mesh, formwork including backfilling and removal of surplus
excavated material off site

External Floor Finishes
C Cement and sand screed, power floated with floor hardener Item
Sundries
D Hot dipped galvanised chequered plate and hot dipped Item
galvanised cover plate to manure trench as specified; completed
with metal framing and all necessary fitting accessories
E Concrete foundation for Silo including excavation, and removal Item

debris off site; lean concrete, hardcore, BRC wire mesh,
formwork
Others
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

(2216\B\TD) SS4.2/2
S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.2/1 ... ...
Page 4.2/2 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.2 - LAYER & PULLET HOUSES

CARRIED TO SECTION 4 - BUILDING WORKS SUMMARY

(2216\B\TD) SS4.2/3
SECTION 4.3 -COMBUSTION PLANT
S$
Notes:-(Not To Price for these Notes)
i The Supply of Combustion plant equipemt is by Employer's

Direct Supplier
ii The installation of the above item is under Prime Cost Sum
iii All the Arhitectural Works in the Combustion Plant; unless

otherwise stated in this Section; shall be included in the Prime
Cost Sum
______________
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
Others
successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall deem to be
included elsewhere in the tender price
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL

G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\30 SOP (ISE).xlsx SS4.3 /1
S$
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS
A Reinforced concrete suspended slabs and beams; complete with Item

BRC welded mesha and formwork
B Reinforced concrete walls; complete with BRC welded mesh and Item
formwork
C Reinforced concrete encasement to structural steel columns; up Item

to the roof truss level completed with BRC mesh and formworks
Floor Finishes (Internal)
D Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS

Hot dipped galvanised steel structure to Engineer's drawing and
specification; completed with all the necessary bolts, nuts, plates,
welding and fixing accessories; subject to Engineer's approval.
E Steel roof truss Item
F Steel columns Item
Painting
G 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved acrylic paint in Item

approved colour to strucutral steel members in accordance to
specification and drawings - internally
METAL ROOFING
H Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side aluminium
foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary Colourbond metal
flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be fixed in
strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions as
specified
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL

S$
EXTERNAL WALLS & FINISHES
Precast Concrete Hollow Core Wall Panel

A Precast concrete hollow wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or Item
other equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding
adhesive and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories; including
steel lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
external wall and columns
C External paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

one sealer coat, one texture coat and two finishing coats of
weather shield emulsion paint to walls and columns
Others
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL

S$

To external ground slab/apron slabs/ ground beams
excavation, removal of debris off site, lean oncrete, hardcore,
concrete, BRC wire mesh, formwork, cement and sand screed
paving; and all necessary works for completion of works

Sundries
C Concrete footing for silos including excavation, and removal Item
debris off site; completed with BRC mesh and formworks
Others
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL

S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.3/1 ... ...
Page 4.3/2 ... ...
Page 4.3/3 ... ...
Page 4.3/4 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.3-COMBUSTION PLANT

1728 ONE TREE HILL

SECTION 4.4 -GP PLANT

S$
Notes:-(Not To Price for Notes)
i The Supply and install of Egg Grading and Packing System at

GNP is by Employer's Direct Contractor
______________
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
SUPERSTRUCTURE WORKS Item
D Reinforced concrete suspended slabs and beams; complete with Item

BRC welded mesh and formwork
E Reinforced concrete walls; complete with BRC welded mesh and Item
formwork
F Reinforced concrete encasement to structural steel columns; up Item

to roof truss level; completed with BRC mesh and formworks at
Egg Storage Compartment & Combustion Plant
Others
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\30 SOP (ISE).xlsx SS4.4/1


S$
specification; completed with all the necessary bolts, nuts,
plates, welding and fixing accessories; subject to Engineer's
approval.
A Steel roof truss to main building and entrance canopy Item
B Steel columns Item
C Steel suspended platforms and cat ladders with safety cages Item
Painting
D 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved acrylic paint in Item

approved colour to structural steel members in accordance to
METAL ROOFING
E Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or
specified; to main building roof and entrance canopy
STAIRCASE
RC Staircase - External
F Reinforced concrete staircase including landing slabs and steps; Item

completed with reinforcement, formwork, cement and screed
paving, with nosing tiles to treads, plastering and painting to
exposed surface of staircase, hot dipped galvanised railing with
approved paint finishes and completed with all necessary fitting
accessories
Steel staircase (Internal)
G Stainless steel staircase complete with metal support to the to Item

treads and landing platform; stainless steel railing, steel plates,
bolt and nuts; including P.E. calculation and endorsement and all
necessary fitting accessories
Others
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
J _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$

manufacturer's printed instructions as specified; including
provision of the removable external walls as specified

External Metal Wall Cladding
D Metal wall cladding comprising Colourbond "Ultra LCP C-Clad Item

Plus" or other equivalent metal cladding, completed with 50mm
thick fibreglass rockwool insulation including all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, fixing accessories; to be fixed in strict
accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions as
specified
Sundries
E Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with metal support, painting to S.O.'s
approval; including all necessary fitting accessories
INTERNAL WALLS AND PARTITIONS
F Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding adhesive
and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories; including steel
lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
Sundries
G Low closet wall partition at the Toilets completed with brick wall Item
and homogeneous tiles to walls and removable panel with steel
support on top of wall including all necessary fitting accessories
TO COLLECTION


S$
Others
A _____________________________________ Item
B _____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
ALUMINUM AND GLAZING WORKS
All aluminium windows shall be finished with fluorocarbon

finishes; completed with aluminium frames, window trimming,
locksets and all necessary fixing accessories etc, all strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions; unless
otherwise stated in the drawings and specifications.
A Top hung aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear Item
float/ tinted glass as specified.
B Top hung aluminium windows completed with double-glazed as Item

specified.
C Sliding aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear float Item
glass as specified.
D Sliding aluminium windows completed with double-glazed as Item

specified.
E Fixed aluminium panels completed with 12mm thick tempered Item

glass as specified.
F Smoke vent comprising of motorised system, airtight, and Item

waterproof louver window with double glazed and with a K-U-
Value greater than 0.9 KW/m2k; automatically open when fire
alarm system is activated. (M&E services priced under M&E
section)
Others
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
DOORS AND IRONMONGERY
All metal doors shall be finished with fluorocarbon finishes;
completed with metal door frames, supply and installation of
locksets with keys and ironmongeries and all necessary fixing
accessories etc, all strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions; unless otherwise stated in the drawings and
specifications.
A Swing Metal flush door completed with ironmongeries as Item

specified.
B Swing Metal flush door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
ironmongeries as specified.
C Swing Metal flush door completed with vision panel, hydraulic Item
door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
D Sliding aluminium door completed with foot touch sensor and Item
ironmongeries as specified
E Sliding aluminium door completed with ironmongeries as Item

specified
F Swing metal door completed with square mesh screen and Item
G Swing aluminium door completed with ironmongeries as Item

specified; to swing outwards 180 degree.
H High speed sectional door and metal door completed with vision Item
panel, electrical and push button operation model, automatic
sensor and ironmongeries as specified.
I Metal sectional door completed with electrical and push button Item
operated, automatic sensor and ironmongeries as specified.
J Metal sectional door completed with vision panel, electrical and Item
push button operation model, automatic sensor and
K Metal sectional door completed with vision panel, electrical and Item
push button operation model and ironmongeries as specified.
L Zipper quick door completed with vision panel, electrical and Item
push button operation model and ironmongeries as specified.
M 12mm thick frameless tempered glass swing door completed Item

with hydraulic door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
Fire Rated Doors
N Fire rated metal swing door completed with vision panel, Item
hydraulic door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
TO COLLECTION


S$
DOORS AND IRONMONGERY (CONT'D)
Master Key System

A Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to the Item
S.O.'s satisfaction and approval.
Others
B _____________________________________ Item
C _____________________________________ Item
D _____________________________________ Item
FLOOR FINISHES
E Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
F Power floated floor hardener cement with PU paint finishes Item
G Power floated with hardener and "Climascreed" insulated screed Item

or other equivalent specification, to "Egg Rack Storage"
compartment
H Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border with
cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed with
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by S.O.
I Waterproofing membrane to floor including 300mm upturn to Item

walls
Others
J _____________________________________ Item
K _____________________________________ Item
L _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
WALL FINISHES (INTERNAL)
A Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
B Lightweight hygrothermal plaster "Climaskin" or other equivalent Item

specification
C Waterproofing membrane to walls; 1.50m high at Shower areas Item
D Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

one sealer coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of
emulsion paint to walls and columns
Tile Finishes
E Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
F Gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised steel furring system Item

including forming of drop/ pelmet and access panel, edge
trimming and all other necessary fixing accessories fixed strictly
in accordance to specification and drawings - internally
G Calcium silicate board ceiling on galvanised steel furring system Item

Sundries
H Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
I 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion paint Item
in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water resistant
gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to specification and
drawings - internally
TO COLLECTION


S$
Others
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
FITTINGS & FIXTURES
(Notes: loose furniture, built-in cabinets, electrical

appliances are under Provisional Sum items)
D Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all necessary

fittings and accessories all in accordance with drawings
(Installation priced under M&E Schedule of Works).
E Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
F Supply and install toilet cubicles including doors with 2 nos of Item
coat hooks and all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance
with drawings.
G Supply and install stainless steel shoe box and all necessary Item
fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
H Supply and install horizonal, vertical and foldable grab bars Item
including all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with
drawings.
I Supply and install solid surface vanity top complete with Item
structural metal support; to S.O.'s satisfaction.
J Supply and install urinal partition including plywood backing and Item
all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance with drawings.
K Supply and install drain trench including all necessary fixing Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings.
L Lockers to Changing rooms completed with locks and all Item

M Phenolic changing room bench with backrest and hanger Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
A Supply and install Human Disinfection Booth as specified Item
B Supply and install Human Disinfection Tunnel as specified Item
C Supply and install Trash Cans as specified Item
D Supply and install dock shelter including all necessary fixing Item
E Supply and install dock leveller including all necessary fixing Item
F Supply and install impact rubber bumper including all necessary Item
G Supply and install safety guard rail including all necessary fixing Item
H Supply and install rotating HDPE bollards including all necessary Item
I Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; completed with Item

all necessary fitting accessories and metal support
J Supply and install washer and dryer (7kg) Item
(State Brand - Washer_____________________________)
(State Brand - Dryer_____________________________)
Others
K
_____________________________________ Item
L
_____________________________________ Item
M
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$

excavation, removal of debris off site, lean concrete, hardcore,

Sundries
C Concrete foundation for egg conveyor including excavation, and Item
removal debris off site; lean concrete, hardcore, BRC wire mesh,
formwork
D BRC welded mesh fence enclosure completed with metal mesh Item
door with non-duplicate lock according to PUB approved type; for
domestic water tank and pump area, as specified on M&E
drawing; 2.50m high
Others
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.4/1 ... ...
Page 4.4/2 ... ...
Page 4.4/3 ... ...
Page 4.4/4 ... ...
Page 4.4/5 ... ...
Page 4.4/6 ... ...
Page 4.4/7... ...
Page 4.4/8... ...
Page 4.4/9... ...
Page 4.4/10... ...
Page 4.4/11... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.4 -GP PLANT


SECTION 4.5- DORMITORIES
LAYER PULLET ANCILLARY
Item DESCRIPTION UNIT Amount Amount Amount
S$ S$ S$
SECTION 4.5- DORMITORY
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
A Excavation trench from existing/ reduced levels Item

including backfilling and removal of surplus excavated
material off site
B Anti-termite sub-terrain treatment to soil on area in Item

contacted with the building with a five years warranty
C Raft foundation completed with vapour barrier, Item

hardcore, lean concrete, reinforced concrete, concrete
thickening, BRC mesh and formwork
Hot dipped galvanised steel structure to Engineer's

drawing and specification; completed with all the
necessary bolts, nuts, plates, welding and fixing
accessories; subject to Engineer's approval.
D Steel roof truss to main building and lower roof Item
E Steel columns Item
METAL ROOFING
F Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck
@700" or other equivalent metal roof, completed with
50mm thick fibreglass rockwool insulation
(80kg/m3), double side aluminium foil, wire mesh
3315, including all necessary Colourbond metal
flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to
be fixed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's
printed instructions as specified; to main building roof
and lower roof
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above

but shown in the drawings and specifications and
necessary for the successful completion of the Works.
Otherwise it shall deem to be included elsewhere in
the tender price
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$

A Precast concrete hollow wall panel, "Joe Green" Item
concrete panel or other equivalent specification, filled
with Joe joint bonding adhesive and Joe crack shield
and all fixing accessories; including steel lintels and
stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth Item

trowelled finish to external wall and columns
C External paint coating system on cement and sand Item

rendering; one sealer coat, one texture coat and two
finishing coats of weather shield emulsion paint to
walls and columns
D Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete Item

panel or other equivalent specification, filled with Joe
joint bonding adhesive and Joe crack shield and all
fixing accessories; including steel lintels and
stiffeners, to be fixed in strict accordance to the
Sundries
E Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh Item

and plastering completed with metal support,
painting to S.O.'s approval; including all necessary
fitting accessories
Others

the tender price
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$
All aluminium windows shall be finished with

fluorocarbon finishes; completed with aluminium
frames, window trimming, locksets and all necessary
fixing accessories etc, all strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions; unless otherwise
stated in the drawings and specifications.
A Top hung aluminium windows completed with 6mm Item

thick clear float/ tinted glass as specified.
B Top hung aluminium windows completed with double- Item

glazed as specified.
C Sliding aluminium windows completed with double- Item

glazed as specified.
All metal doors shall be finished with fluorocarbon

finishes; completed with metal door frames, supply
and installation of locksets with keys and
ironmongeries and all necessary fixing accessories
etc, all strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions; unless otherwise stated in the drawings
and specifications.
D Solid timber swing door completed with laminated Item

finishes and ironmongeries as specified.
E Swing Metal flush door completed with hydraulic door Item

closer and ironmongeries as specified.
F PVC swing door completed with ironmongeries as Item

specified.
Fire Rated Doors
G Fire rated metal swing door completed with vision Item

panel, hydraulic door closer and ironmongeries as
specified.
H Fire rated metal swing door completed with hydraulic Item
door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
Master Key System
I Contractor to submit their proposed master key Item

system to the S.O.'s satisfaction and approval.
Others
the tender price
J Item
_____________________________________
K _____________________________________ Item
L _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$
FLOOR FINISHES (INTERNAL)
A Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 Item

per m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern
and border with cement and sand backing screed,
mortar and pointed with approved colour grout; and
to be selected and approved by S.O.
B Waterproofing membrane to floor including 300mm Item

high upturn to walls
External Finishes
C Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth Item

trowelled finish to walls and columns
E Waterproofing membrane to walls; 1.50m high at Item

Shower areas
F Internal paint coating system on cement and sand Item

rendering; one sealer coat, one undercoat and two
finishing coats of emulsion paint to walls and columns
Tile Finishes
G Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 Item

per m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern
and border with cement and sand backing screed,
mortar and pointed with approved colour grout; and
Others

the tender price
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
A Gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised steel Item

furring system including forming of drop/ pelmet and
access panel, edge trimming and all other necessary
fixing accessories fixed strictly in accordance to
B Calcium silicate board ceiling on galvanised steel Item

furring system including forming of drop/ pelmet and
access panel, edge trimming and all other necessary
fixing accessories fixed strictly in accordance to
C Aluminium cladding ceiling as specified, completed Item

with metal ceiling support and all necessary fitting
accessories- externally
Sundries
D Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with Item
supports
E Access panels to Aluminium cladding ceiling Item

completed with supports
Painting
F 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC
emulsion paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster
board in ceiling accordance to specification and
Others

the tender price
G _____________________________________ Item
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$
FITTINGS & FIXTURES
(Notes: Lockers, beds, loose furniture for Indoor

& Outdoor, built-in cabinets, electrical
A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all Item

necessary fittings and accessories all in accordance
with drawings (Installation priced under M&E Schedule
of Works).
B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood Item

backing and all necessary fixing accessories all in
accordance with drawings.
C Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; Item

completed with all necessary fitting accessories and
metal support
D Supply and install washer and dryer (7kg) Item
(State Brand -
Washer_____________________________)
(State Brand -
Dryer_____________________________)
Others
the tender price
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$
To external ground slab/apron slabs/ ground
beams
A Reinforced concrete apron slab and beams; complete Item
with excavation, removal of debris off site, lean
concrete, hardcore, concrete, BRC wire mesh,
formwork, cement and sand screed paving and all
necessary works for completion of works

Bicycle Stand Shelter
C Ground slab completed with excavation, removal of Item

debris off site, lean concrete, hardcore, concrete, BRC
wire mesh, formwork, cement and sand screed power
floated with hardener; and all necessary works for
completion of works
D Bicycle stand shelter comprising of hot dipped Item
galvanised steel support, steel roof truss, all in paint
finishes and Colourbond metal roof system including
all necessary fittings accessories; to S.O.'s approval.
E Hot-dipped galvanised mild steel bicycle stands Item

completed with painting and all necessary fitting
accessories; to S.O.'s approval.
Others
the tender price
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.5/1 ... ...
Page 4.5/2 ... ...
Page 4.5/3 ... ...
Page 4.5/4 ... ...
Page 4.5/5 ... ...
Page 4.5/6 ... ...
Page 4.5/7 ... ...
Carried Forward S$
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.5 - DORMITORIES

CARRIED TO SECTION 4 - BUILDING WORKS
SUMMARY

SECTION 4.6 -REST AREA

S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
Others
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
D Steel roof truss for main building Item
F Steel truss for canopy at external covered walkway Item
METAL ROOFING
Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or
specified
G To Main Building Item
H To External Walkway Canopy Item
Others
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$


Sundries
D Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
Others
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$

B Sliding aluminium windows completed with double-glazed as Item

specified.

specifications.
A Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
B Metal swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified. Item
C PVC swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified.
Master Key System

D Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to the Item
Others
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION


S$
FLOOR FINISHES
Internal Finishes
A Cement and sand (1:3) screed trowelled to a smooth surface Item
B Power floated floor hardener cement with PU paint finishes Item
C Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
D Waterproofing membrane to floor including 300mm high upturn Item

to walls
External Finishes
E Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
F Power floated floor hardener cement with PU paint finishes Item
Others
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION


S$
A Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
B Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
sealer coat, one undercoat and two finishing coats of emulsion
paint to walls and columns
Tile Finishes
C Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
Others
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
A Gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised steel furring system Item

B Calcium silicate board ceiling on galvanised steel furring system Item

C Aluminium cladding ceiling as specified, completed with metal Item

ceiling support and all necessary fitting accessories- externally
Sundries
D Access panels to all false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
E Access panels to Aluminium cladding ceiling completed with Item

supports
Painting
F 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion paint Item
in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water resistant
gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to specification and
Others
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
FITTINGS & FIXTURES

A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all necessary

B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood backing Item
drawings.
C Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; completed with Item

all necessary fitting accessories and metal support
Sundries
D Chain link fence to External Walkway comprising fixed and Item

removable chain link fence and gates with lockset and keys,
completed with concrete footing, excavation, removal of debris
off site, and all necessary fitting accessories.
Others
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$

Others
B _____________________________________ Item
C _____________________________________ Item
D _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.6/1 ... ...
Page 4.6/2 ... ...
Page 4.6/3 ... ...
Page 4.6/4 ... ...
Page 4.6/5 ... ...
Page 4.6/6 ... ...
Page 4.6/7 ... ...
Page 4.6/8 ... ...
Page 4.6/9 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.6 -REST AREA


SECTION 4.7 - OFFICES
CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS

backfilling and removal of surplus excavated material off
site

C Raft foundation completed with vapour barrier, hardcore, Item

lean concrete, reinforced concrete, concrete thickening,
BRC mesh and formwork
Others
Allow for any items not specifically mentioned above but
shown in the drawings and specifications and necessary for
the successful completion of the Works. Otherwise it shall
deem to be included elsewhere in the tender price
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
G Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with Item
concrete, reinforcement and formwork including the
concrete copings to walls and columns
H Reinforced concrete circular column completed with Item

concrete, reinforcement and formwork
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$
Hot dipped galvanised steel structure to Engineer's

drawing and specification; completed with all the
necessary bolts, nuts, plates, welding and fixing
accessories; subject to Engineer's approval.
A Steel roof truss Item
C Steel truss for Canopy above door Item
D Steel truss for Canopy above main entrance Item
METAL ROOFING
Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700"
or other equivalent metal roof, completed with 50mm thick
fibreglass rockwool insulation (80kg/m3), double side
aluminium foil, wire mesh 3315, including all necessary
Colourbond metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing
accessories; to be fixed in strict accordance to the
E To main building roof Item
F To Canopy above door Item
G Aluminium composite panel canopy above main entrance Item

including forming aluminium composite panel to sides of
the canopy
Others

H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
J _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$

A Precast concrete hollow wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete Item
panel or other equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint
bonding adhesive and Joe crack shield and all fixing
accessories; including steel lintels and stiffeners, to be
fixed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed
instructions as specified
B Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled Item

finish to external wall and columns
C External paint coating system on cement and sand Item

rendering; one sealer coat, one texture coat and two
finishing coats of weather shield emulsion paint to walls
and columns
Sundries
plastering completed with metal support, painting to
S.O.'s approval; including all necessary fitting accessories
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or Item

adhesive and Joe crack shield and all fixing accessories;
including steel lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed in strict
specified
Others

F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$

finishes; completed with aluminium frames, window
trimming, locksets and all necessary fixing accessories etc,
all strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
A Top hung aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick Item
clear float/ tinted glass as specified.
B Sliding aluminium windows completed with double-glazed Item

as specified.
C Fixed aluminium panels completed with 12mm thick Item

tempered glass as specified.
Others

D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$

finishes; completed with metal door frames, supply and
installation of locksets with keys and ironmongeries and
all necessary fixing accessories etc, all strictly in
A Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
B Swing aluminium door completed with ironmongeries as Item

C Solid timber swing door completed with laminated finishes, Item

hydraulic door closer and ironmongeries as specified.
D Solid timber swing door completed with laminated finishes Item

and ironmongeries as specified.
E Solid timber swing door completed with paint finishes and Item
F Solid timber swing door with glass panel completed with Item
laminated finishes, hydraulic door closer and
G Solid timber swing door completed with laminated finishes, Item

hydraulic door closer, stainless steel strip plate and
H 12mm thick frameless tempered glass swing door Item

completed with hydraulic door closer and ironmongeries as
specified.
I PVC swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified.
Master Key System
J Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to Item

the S.O.'s satisfaction and approval.
Others
K Item
_____________________________________
L Item
_____________________________________
M Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$
FLOOR FINISHES
A Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
B Power floated with hardener and "Climascreed" insulated Item

screed or other equivalent specification
C Anti-static raised floor panel completed with laminated Item

finishes and all necessary fitting accessories and levelling
screed
D Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and
border with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and
pointed with approved colour grout; and to be selected and
approved by S.O.
E Waterproofing membrane to floor including upturn Item
F Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled Item

finish to walls and columns
G Lightweight hygrothermal plaster "Climaskin" or other Item

equivalent specification
H Internal paint coating system on cement and sand Item

rendering; one sealer coat, one undercoat and two
finishing coats of emulsion paint to walls and columns
Waterproofing System
I Approved membrane waterproofing system including Item

protective screed to bathroom wall and column in
accordance to specifications and drawings.
Tile Finishes
J Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and
border with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and
pointed with approved colour grout; and to be selected and
approved by S.O.
Others

K Item
_____________________________________
L Item
_____________________________________
M Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
A Modular mineral fibre acoustic board ceiling on galvanised Item

steel furring system including forming of drop/ pelmet and
access panel, edge trimming and all other necessary fixing
accessories fixed strictly in accordance to specification and
B 9mm thick calcium silicate board ceiling on galvanised Item

C Metal ceiling completed with 150mm glass wool and Item

vapour barrier including metal ceiling support and all
Sundries
D Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with Item
supports
E Access panels to metal ceiling boards completed with Item

supports
Painting
F 1 undercoat and 2 finishing coats of approved emulsion Item
paint in approved colour to plastered/ skim coated surface
G 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion Item

paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water
resistant gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to
Others

H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$
FITTINGS & FIXTURES

A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all

necessary fittings and accessories all in accordance with
drawings (Installation priced under M&E Schedule of
Works).
B Supply and install wall hung mirror including plywood Item
C Supply and install toilet cubicles including doors with 2 Item

nos of coat hooks and all necessary fixing accessories all in
D Supply and install horizonal, vertical and foldable grab bars Item
including all necessary fixing accessories all in accordance
with drawings.
E Supply and install solid surface vanity top complete with Item
structural metal support; to S.O.'s satisfaction.
F Supply and install urinal partition including plywood Item

G Supply and install drain trench including all necessary Item

H Supply and install trash can; to Architec's selection and Item

approval
I Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; Item

completed with all necessary fitting accessories and metal
support
J Supply and install water dispenser Item
(State Brand -_____________________________)
Others
K Item
_____________________________________
L Item
_____________________________________
M Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$

excavation, removal of debris off site, lean concrete,
hardcore, concrete, BRC wire mesh, formwork, cement and
sand screed paving; and all necessary works for
completion of works
B Reinforced concrete ramp slab and beams; complete with Item

sand screed paving forming groove lines; and all
necessary works for completion of works
Others
C Item
_____________________________________
D Item
_____________________________________
E Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

CORPORATE SATELLITE
S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.7/1 ... ...
Page 4.7/2 ... ...
Page 4.7/3 ... ...
Page 4.7/4 ... ...
Page 4.7/5 ... ...
Page 4.7/6 ... ...
Page 4.7/7 ... ...
Page 4.7/8 ... ...
Page 4.7/9 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.7- OFFICES

CARRIED TO SECTION 4 - BUILDING WORKS
SUMMARY

SECTION 4.8- HUMAN DISINFECTION
LAYER PULLET
S$ S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS


C Raft foundation completed with vapour barrier, hardcore, Item

lean concrete, reinforced concrete, concrete thickening, BRC
mesh and formwork
Others

D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$

Hot dipped galvanised steel structure to Engineer's drawing
and specification; completed with all the necessary bolts,
nuts, plates, welding and fixing accessories; subject to
Engineer's approval.
METAL ROOFING
C Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
Others

D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$

accessories; including steel lintels and stiffeners, to be fixed
in strict accordance to the manufacturer's printed instructions
as specified


Sundries

specified
Others

F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$

trimming, locksets and all necessary fixing accessories etc,
all strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions;
unless otherwise stated in the drawings and specifications.

B Sliding aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear Item

C Aluminium frame with glass louvre window completed with Item

6mm thick clear float glass as specified.

installation of locksets with keys and ironmongeries and all
necessary fixing accessories etc, all strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions; unless otherwise stated
in the drawings and specifications.
D Metal swing door completed with hydraulic door closer and Item
E Metal swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified. Item
F PVC swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified. Item
Master Key System

G Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to Item
Others
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$
FLOOR FINISHES
Paving
B Power floated floor hardener cement with PU paint finishes Item
C Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
m2); including laying of tiles to approved pattern and border
with cement and sand backing screed, mortar and pointed
with approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved
by S.O.
D Waterproofing membrane to floor including 300mm upturn to Item

walls
E Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled Item

F Waterproofing membrane to walls; 1.50m high at Shower Item

areas
G Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

Tile Finishes
H Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
by S.O.
Others

I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
A Moisture resistant gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised Item

Sundries
B Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
C 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion
paint in approved colour to moisture resistant gypsum plaster
board in ceiling accordance to specification and drawings -
internally
Others

D Item
_____________________________________
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$
FITTINGS & FIXTURES
(Notes: L oose furniture, built-in cabinets, Laundry

Chute intake, electrical appliances are under
Provisional Sum items)
A Supply all sanitary wares and fittings including all necessary Item
drawings.
C Supply and install drain trench including all necessary fixing Item
D Lockers with lock, benches and shoe racks to Changing Item

rooms completed with all necessary fitting accessories
E Supply and install powder coated aluminium frame with Item

shower curtain completed with all necessary fixing
F Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; completed Item

with all necessary fitting accessories and metal support
G Supply and install washer and dryer (7kg) Item
(State Brand - Washer_____________________________)
(State Brand - Dryer_____________________________)
Others
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$

sand screed paving; and all necessary works for completion
of works
B Reinforced concrete kerb for Foot bath; complete BRC mesh, Item
formwork, cement and sand screed with PU paint finishes;
and all necessary works for completion of works
Others
C _____________________________________ Item
D _____________________________________ Item
E _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

LAYER PULLET
S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.8/1 ... ...
Page 4.8/2 ... ...
Page 4.8/3 ... ...
Page 4.8/4 ... ...
Page 4.8/5 ... ...
Page 484/6 ... ...
Page 4.8/7 ... ...
Page 4.8/8 ... ...
Carried Forward S$
TOTAL OFSECTION 4.8- HUMAN DISINFECTION


SECTION 4.9- VEHICLE DISINFECTION

S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS


C Raft foundation laid to slope; completed with upstand beams, Item

vapour barrier, hardcore, lean concrete, reinforced concrete,
concrete thickening, BRC mesh and formwork
Others
D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
A Steel roof truss to Main building and Tank Item
Painting
C 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved acrylic paint in Item

approved colour to structural steel members in accordance to
METAL ROOFING
D Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, including all necessary Colourbond
metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be
instructions as specified; to Main building and to the Tank

Metal Wall Cladding
E Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or other equivalent metal wall Item
cladding, completed with including all necessary Colourbond
metal flashing, ridge and fascia board, fixing accessories; to be
Sundries
F Concrete plinth completed with BRC mesh and formwork for the Item
equipment
Others
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.9/1 ... ...
Page 4.9/2 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.9- VEHICLE DISINFECTION


SECTION 4.10- WORKSHOP & STORE & BIN CENTRE
WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
Others

D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$

and specification; completed with all the necessary bolts,
nuts, plates, welding and fixing accessories; subject to
Engineer's approval.
METAL ROOFING
C Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
Others

D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$

as specified


D Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or Item

specified
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel with Item
1 Hr fire rated or other equivalent specification, filled with
Joe joint bonding adhesive and Joe crack shield and all fixing
as specified
F Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with structural metal support, painting
to S.O.'s approval and all necessary fitting accessories
Others

G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$

trimming, locksets and all necessary fixing accessories etc, all
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions;
unless otherwise stated in the drawings and specifications.

B Sliding aluminium windows completed with 6mm thick clear Item

C Aluminium fixed louvred windows as specified. Item

installation of locksets with keys and ironmongeries and all
necessary fixing accessories etc, all strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions; unless otherwise stated
in the drawings and specifications.
E Metal swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified. Item
F Metal swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified.
G PVC swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified. Item
H Swing aluminium door completed with ironmongeries as Item

Fire Rated Doors
I Fire rated metal swing door completed with hydraulic door Item
closer and ironmongeries as specified.
Roller Shutter
J Aluminium roller shutter; electrically / chain operated type Item

with natural anodized finish interlocking slats complete with
side guide, roller cabinet, bottom rail, gear motor with safety
chain, limit switch and push button completed with
aluminium frame and all fitting accessories
Master Key System

K Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to Item
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$
FLOOR FINISHES
B Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
by S.O.
C Waterproofing membrane to floor including 300mm high Item

upturn to walls
D Forming scupper drains to gradient Item
E Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled Item

F Waterproofing membrane to walls; 1.50m high at Shower Item

areas
G Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

Tile Finishes
H Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per Item
by S.O.
Others

I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
A Gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised steel furring Item

system including forming of drop/ pelmet and access panel,
edge trimming and all other necessary fixing accessories
fixed strictly in accordance to specification and drawings -
internally
B Calcium silicate board ceiling on galvanised steel furring Item

edge trimming and all other necessary fixing accessories
fixed strictly in accordance to specification and drawings -
internally
Sundries
C Access panels to false ceiling boards completed with supports Item
Painting
D 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion
paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster board in ceiling
accordance to specification and drawings - internally
Others

E _____________________________________ Item
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$
FITTINGS & FIXTURES
(Notes: Loose furniture, built-in cabinets, electrical

drawings.
C Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; completed Item

D Supply only the water taps including all necessary fittings and Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings (Installation
priced under M&E Schedule of Works).
Others
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________

H Reinforced concrete apron slab and beams; complete with Item

of works
Others
I Item
_____________________________________
J Item
_____________________________________
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

WORKSHOP BIN CENTRE
S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.10/1 ... ...
Page 4.10/2 ... ...
Page 4.10/3 ... ...
Page 4.10/4 ... ...
Page 4.10/5 ... ...
Page 4.10/6 ... ...
Page 4.10/7 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.10- WORKSHOP & STORE & BIN

CENTRE

SECTION 4.11- SPENT HEN STATION

S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
D Reinforced concrete trench and concrete raised platform Item

completed with reinforced concrete kerbs, BRC mesh,
reinforcement bars and formwork
E Well compacted and clean sand to fill up the RC trench Item
Others
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS
Walls
A Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with concrete, Item
reinforcement and formwork
Suspended slabs/ suspended beams
B Reinforced concrete suspended slabs and beams; completed with Item

concrete, reinforcement and formwork
STAIRCASE
RC Staircase
C Reinforced concrete staircase including landing slabs and steps; Item
paving, with nosing tiles to treads, plastering and painting to
exposed surface of staircase hot dipped galvanised railing with
approved paint finishes and all necessary fitting accessories

D Steel roof truss to Main building and canopy Item
Painting
F 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved acrylic paint in Item

approved colour to strucutral steel members in accordance to
METAL ROOFING
G Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
other equivalent metal roof, completed with all necessary
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified; to Main building
and canopy
TO COLLECTION


S$


External Metal Wall Cladding
D Metal wall cladding comprising Colourbond "Ultra LCP C-Clad Item

Plus" or other equivalent metal cladding, completed with all
necessary Colourbond metal flashing, fixing accessories; to be

specifications.
E Aluminium grilled roller shutter; electrically / chain operated type

with natural anodized finish interlocking slats complete with side
guide, roller cabinet, bottom rail, gear motor with safety chain,
limit switch and push button completed with aluminium frame
and all fitting accessories
F Swing metal door completed with square mesh screen and Item
Master Key System
G Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to the Item

TO COLLECTION


S$
A Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item

B Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
FLOOR FINISHES (EXTERNAL)

C Cement finish power floated with floor hardener Item
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
walls and columns
E Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
Wall Tile Finishes
F Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
Sundries
G Supply only the wate taps including all necessary fittings and Item
accessories all in accordance with drawings (Installation priced
under M&E Schedule of Works).
H Supply and install motorised roller curtain completed with track Item
guided system, motor; structural steel support and all neccssary
fitting accessories
I Supply and install impact rubber bumper including all necessary Item
J Supply and install rotating HDPE bollards including all necessary Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
Others
A Item
_____________________________________
B Item
_____________________________________
C Item
_____________________________________

D Reinforced concrete apron slab and beams; complete with Item
excavation, removal of debris off site, lean oncrete, hardcore,
concrete thickening, cocnrete kerbs, reinfrocement bars,
formwork, cement and sand screed paving; and all necessary
works for completion of works
E Anti-termite sub-terrain treatment to soil on area in contacted Item
Others
F _____________________________________ Item
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.11/1 ... ...
Page 4.11/2 ... ...
Page 4.11/3 ... ...
Page 4.11/4 ... ...
Page 4.11/5 ... ...
TOTAL OFSECTION 4.11- SPENT HEN STATION


SECTION 4.12- GUARD HOUSES
GUARD HOUSE 1 GUARD HOUSE 2
S$ S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
Others

D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
Walls
G Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with Item
H Reinforced concrete suspended slabs and beams; completed Item

with reinforcement and formwork
I Reinforced concrete roof gutter with coping completed with Item

reinforcement and formworks
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$

and specification; completed with all the necessary bolts, nuts,
plates, welding and fixing accessories; subject to Engineer's
approval.
A Steel roof truss for main building and to canopy Item
METAL ROOFING
Roof sheet comprising Colourbond "LCP Ultra deck @700" or Item
manufacturer's printed instructions as specified; to Main
building and to canopy
Others

D
_____________________________________ Item
E
_____________________________________ Item
F
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$

A Precast concrete hollow wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel Item
or other equivalent specification, filled with Joe joint bonding
specified
External Wall Tiles

B Black quartzite thin strips wall cladding stone (with Prime Cost Item
Supply Rate of $40.00 per m2); including laying of tiles to
approved pattern and border with cement and sand backing
screed, mortar and pointed with approved colour grout; and
C Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish Item
to external wall and columns including gutter
D External paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

weather shield emulsion paint to walls and columns including
gutter

specified
F 100mm thick common brick walls completed with all Item

necessary fixing accessories
G Box up the steel columns with approved wire mesh and Item
plastering completed with structural metal support, painting
to S.O.'s approval and all necessary fitting accessories
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$

B Sliding aluminium windows completed with double-glazed as Item

specified.
C Fixed aluminium panels completed with 12mm thick Item

tempered glass; including sliding glass panel as specified.

accessories etc, all strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions; unless otherwise stated in the
drawings and specifications.
E PVC swing door completed with ironmongeries as specified.
Master Key System

F Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to the Item
Others
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$
FLOOR FINISHES
B Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by
S.O.
C Waterproofing membrane to floor including 300mm high Item

upturn to walls
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish Item
to walls and columns
E Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

Tile Finishes
F Porcelain tile (with Prime Cost Supply Rate of $30.00 per m2); Item
approved colour grout; and to be selected and approved by
S.O.
Others

G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
I Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$
CEILING FINISHES
Suspended Ceiling
A Gypsum plaster board ceiling on galvanised steel furring Item
edge trimming and all other necessary fixing accessories fixed
strictly in accordance to specification and drawings - internally
B Calcium silicate board ceiling on galvanised steel furring Item

edge trimming and all other necessary fixing accessories fixed
strictly in accordance to specification and drawings - internally
Sundries
C Access panels to all false ceiling boards completed with Item
supports
Painting
D 1 primer coat and 2 final coats of approved VOC emulsion Item
paint in approved colour to gypsum plaster board /water
resistant gypsum plaster board in ceiling accordance to
Others

E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$
FITTINGS & FIXTURES
(Notes: Loose Furniture is under Provisional Sum

items)
drawings.
C Supply and install granite counter top completed with all Item
necessary fixing accessories; all in accordance with drawings.
D Supply and install fire extinguishers as specified; completed Item

Others
E Item
_____________________________________
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________

H Reinforced concrete apron slab and beams; complete with Item
of works
Others
I _____________________________________ Item
J _____________________________________ Item
K Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION

S$ S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.12/1 ... ...
Page 4.12/2 ... ...
Page 4.12/3 ... ...
Page 4.12/4 ... ...
Page 4.12/5 ... ...
Page 4.12/6 ... ...
Page 4.12/7 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.12- GUARD HOUSES


SECTION 4.13- SUB-STATION

S$
SECTION 4.13 SUB-STATION
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS



and formwork
D Reinforced concrete underground trench including excavation, Item

and removal debris off site; completed with vapour barrier,
hardcore, lean concrete, reinforced concrete, concrete
thickening, BRC mesh and formwork
E Reinforced concrete underground drawpit 1 and 2 including Item

excavation, and removal debris off site; well compact sub grade
completed with vapour barrier, lean concrete, reinforcement
bars, BRC mesh and formwork and finished with
cement and sand screed and heavy duty reinforced concrete
cover
F Reinforced concrete underground drawpit 3 and 4 including Item

excavation, and removal debris off site; well compact sub grade
completed with vapour barrier, lean concrete, sand bed,
hardcore, reinforcement bars, BRC mesh and formwork, and
filled the trench with well compacted clean sand
Others
G _____________________________________ Item
H _____________________________________ Item
I _____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
SUBSTRUCTURE WORKS
Walls
A Reinforced concrete wall and columns completed with concrete, Item

B Reinforced concrete suspended slabs, beams and ramps with Item
groove lines; completed with concrete, reinforcement and
formwork
C Stiffeners/ Lintols completed with reinforcement and formworks Item
D Plinths, kerbs, thickenings and the like; completed with Item

reinforcement and formworks
STAIRCASE
RC Staircase
E Reinforced concrete staircase including landing slabs and steps; Item

paving, with groove lines to treads, plastering and painting to
exposed surface of staircase and all necessary fitting accessories
F Fixed and removable hot dipped galvanised railing with approved Item
paint finishes and all necessary fitting accessories
Others
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
ROOF
A Reinforced concrete suspended slabs and beams; completed Item
with concrete, reinforcement and formwork
Waterproofing system to flat roof
B Waterproofing system as specified to reinforced concrete flat Item

roof, gutter, etc including all necessary upturn
C 50mm thick approved extruded polystyrene foam insulation on Item

roof slab
D 50mm thick precast concrete slab in maximum panel size not Item
exceeding 1000 x 1000mm; complete with 1 layer of BRC wire
mesh, infilled joints with approved PU sealant
E Cement & sand levelling screed including all necessary insulation Item
works, etc
Others
F
_____________________________________ Item
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION


S$


Hollow Glass Blockwork
D Hollow glass block laid in cement mortar (1:4) with approved Item
plasticiser and mesh reinforcement at every fourth course;
100mm thick
E Precast concrete wall panel, "Joe Green" concrete panel or other Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
All aluminium windows shall be finished with anodised finishes;

completed with aluminium frames, window trimming, locksets
and all necessary fixing accessories etc, all strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions; unless otherwise stated in
the drawings and specifications.
A Aluminium fixed louvred windows as specified. Item
All aluminium doors shall be finished with anodised finishes;

specifications.
B Heavy duty aluminium louver door completed with Item

C Heavy duty aluminium door completed with ironmongeries as Item

specified.
D Aluminium trap door completed with ironmongeries as specified. Item
Master Key System

E Contractor to submit their proposed master key system to the Item
Others
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION


S$
A Cement and sand screed, power floated with floor hardener Item
walls and columns
C Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
CEILING FINISHES (INTERNAL)
D Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
slab soffit and beams
E Internal paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; one Item
paint to slab soffit and beams
CEILING FINISHES (EXTERNAL)
F Skim coat in cement and sand (1:3) in smooth trowelled finish to Item
slab soffit and beams
G External paint coating system on cement and sand rendering; Item

emulsion paint to slab soffit and beams
Sundries
H Removable hot dipped galvanised grating completed with angle Item

frame and approved paint finishes including all necessary fitting
accessories
I Aluminium cat ladder completed with metal support including all Item
TO COLLECTION


S$
Others
A _____________________________________ Item
B _____________________________________ Item
C _____________________________________ Item

D Reinforced concrete apron slab and beams; complete with Item
concrete thickening, concrete kerbs, reinforcement bars,
formwork, cement and sand screed paving; and all necessary
works for completion of works
E Anti-termite sub-terrain treatment to soil on area in contacted Item

Others
F Item
_____________________________________
G Item
_____________________________________
H Item
_____________________________________
TO COLLECTION


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 4.13/1 ... ...
Page 4.13/2 ... ...
Page 4.13/3 ... ...
Page 4.13/4 ... ...
Page 4.13/5 ... ...
Page 4.13/6 ... ...
Page 4.13/7 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 4.13- SUB-STATION


SECTION 4 - BUILDING WORKS

S$
SUMMARY
SECTION 4.2 (A)-LAYER HOUSES
SECTION 4.2 (B) -PULLET HOUSES
SECTION 4.5 (A)-LAYER DORMITORY
SECTION 4.5 (B)-PULLET DORMITORY
SECTION 4.5 (C)-ANCILLARY DORMITORY
SECTION 4.7 (A)-CORPORATE OFFICE
SECTION 4.7 (B) -SATELLITE OFFICE
SECTION 4.8 (A)-LAYER HUMAN DISINFECTION
SECTION 4.8 (B)-PULLET HUMAN DISINFECTION
SECTION 4.10 (A) -WORKSHOP AND STORE
SECTION 4.10 (B)- BIN CENTRE
SECTION 4.11- SPENT HEN BUILDING
SECTION 4.12 (A)- GUARD HOUSE 1
SECTION 4.12 (B)- GUARD HOUSE 2
SECTION 4.13- SUB STATION
TOTAL OF SECTION 4 BUILDING WORKS CARRIED TO

FINAL SUMMARY

(2216\B\TD) SS4 SUM/1
Section 5 – External Works
SECTION 5 - EXTERNAL WORKS

S$
GENERAL NOTES
A This Section is to be read in conjunction with other documents/drawings Item

in the tender documents. The price herein is deemed to include all the
requirements in the tender documents.
B This Summary of Prices is to be read in conjunction with the Item

Specification and Drawing. Allow in the Tender Price all necessary
machinery, plant, tools, scaffolding, materials, labour and all temporary
works for the proper protection and the execution of the Works.
C The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site to examine and Item
ascertain the true nature and extent of the work under this section
before tendering. Prices inserted herein will be held to include clearing or
removal of all types of materials so as to facilitate proper execution of all
works.
D The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in this Item
tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and the method
statement illustrating how the works shall be carried out.
E All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, pipe Item
sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and Electrical Services
are deemed to be included.
F The Contractor has to ensure that all existing electric cables, telephone Item
cables, water pipes, sewer lines and gas pipes on site have been
properly disconnected by the Local Authorities prior to commencement of
any works. Failure to comply with this condition and thereby resulting in
damage inclusive of any consequential claims shall be borne fully by the
Contractor.
G Allow herein for making all applications, obtaining permits, liaising with Item
the relevant Authorities and all necessary attendance and pay all licence
fees, levies/charges in connection with the Works and all works carried
out by the relevant Authorities.
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any interruptions
by any late approvals and any delay in the works of the relevant
Authorities.
I Allow for complying with the provisions of Instructions to Tenderers, the Item
Conditions of Contract and its Amendments, Specification and Drawings.
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL

G:\Projects\22\2216\MC\B\TD\34 SOP S5 & S6.xlsx S5/1

S$
DRIVEWAY AND CARPARKING LOTS

A Rigid pavement road completed with reinforced concrete slab, Item
reinforcement bars / BRC mesh, formwork, lean concrete, well
compacted hardcore, base course, sub base, road kerb, expansion joints
and all necessary fittings; all as specified
B Flexible pavement road completed with asphaltic wearing course and Item
asphalt base course, well compacted base course, sub base, sub grade,
road kerb, all as specified
C Precast aeration slab for open car parking lot and the handicapped Item
parking lot completed with well compacted base course, sub base, sub
grade, 50mm thick sand bedding, road kerb, all as specified
D Approach slabs at Entrance to site; completed with reinforced concrete Item

slab, reinforcement bars / BRC mesh, expansion joint, formwork, lean
concrete, well compacted hardcore including excavation and removal
debris off site
E Road marking in Thermoplastic paint including handicapped logo as Item

specified
F Directional sign at three Entrances completed with hot dipped galvanised Item
steel steel pipe with approved paint, reinforced concrete footings
including excavation and removal debis off site, and all necessary
fittings; to S.O. approval
UNDERGROUND DETENTION TANK 1

G Reinforced concrete detention tank comprising of reinforced concrete Item
slab, wall, reinforcement bars, water stops, formwork, lean concrete,
well compacted hardcore, cement and sand screed to internal floor
and walls including well compaction to the existing ground,
excavation and removal of debris off site
H Hot dipped galvanised mild steel railing and swing gate with with Item
approved painting completed with P.E. design and endorsement
I Aluminium catladder to Contractor's proposal subject to S.O.'s Item

approval.
UNDERGROUND DETENTION TANK 2
J Reinforced concrete detention tank comprising of reinforced concrete Item

slab, wall, reinforcement bars, water stops, formwork, lean concrete,
well compacted hardcore, cement and sand screed to internal floor
and walls including well compaction to the existing ground,
excavation and removal of debris off site
K Hot dipped galvanised mild steel railing and swing gate with with Item
approved painting completed with P.E. design and endorsement
L Aluminium catladder to Contractor's proposal subject to S.O.'s Item

approval.
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
PIPE CROSSING
A 650mm diameter concrete pipe complete with excavation, removal Item
debris off site, lean concrete, hardcore, concrete bed and concrete
haunching, reinforcement, formwork left -in and all necessary fitting
accessories
B 700mm diameter concrete pipe complete with excavation, removal Item
debris off site, lean concrete, hardcore, concrete bed and concrete
haunching, reinforcement, formwork left -in and all necessary fitting
accessories
C Allow the connection of the new drainage discharge to the existing Item
Monsoon drain to the acceptance of relevant authorities including
vertical grating, excavation and temporary works
D Making good all the affected works to match the existing finishes; Item
subject to S.O.'s approval
BOX CULVERT
Reinforced concrete Box Culvert complete with excavation, well
compacted hardcore, lean concrete, BRC welded mesh, geo-composite
subsoil drain, non-woven heat bonded geo-textile memebrane, cement
and sand screed to internal surfaces, precast concrete channel drain
(type C3), forming weepholes and all necessary fixing accessories
E 600mm wide box culvert Item
F 900mm wide box culvert Item
G Heavy duty vehicular grating completed with hot dipped galvanised Item
steel grating, angle frame and all necessary fitting accessories; to
Box culvert
H 25mm Diameter non-skid aluminium rung at 300mm interval and all Item
necessary fitting accessories to Box culvert
BOX DRAIN
Reinforced concrete Box Drain complete with excavation, well compacted

hardcore, lean concrete, BRC welded mesh, geo-composite subsoil drain,
non-woven heat bonded geo-textile memebrane, cement and sand
screed to internal surfaces, precast concrete channel drain (type C3),
forming weepholes and all necessary fixing accessories
G 300mm wide box drain Item
H 450mm wide box drain Item
I 600mm wide box drain Item
J 750mm wide box drain Item
K 900mm wide box drain Item
L 1200mm wide box drain Item
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
BOX DRAIN (Cont'd)
M Heavy duty vehicular grating and pedestrian grating completed with hot Item
dipped galvanised steel grating, angle frame and all necessary fitting
accessories; to Box drain
N 25mm Diameter non-skid aluminium rung at 300mm interval and all Item
necessary fitting accessories; to Box drain
OPEN DRAIN
M 300mm wide reinforced concrete open U-drain complete with excavation, Item
well compacted hardcore, lean concrete, reinforcement bar, geo-
composite subsoil drain, non-woven heat bonded geo-textile, concrete
channel drain (type C3), weepholes, aluminium rung, and all necessary
fixing accessories
N Aluminium alloy railing in powder coating finish consisting of tubular or Item

square hollow section set in well fixed on RC open U-drain
CONCRETE SUMP
Reinforced concrete Sump complete with excavation, well compacted

hardcore, lean concrete, BRC welded mesh, geo-composite subsoil drain,
non-woven heat bonded geo-textile memebrane, cement and sand
screed to internal surfaces, precast concrete channel drain (type C3),
forming weepholes and all necessary fixing accessories
A 450mm x 450mm Item
B 600mm x 600mm Item
B 900mm x 900mm Item
C 1000mm x 1000mm Item
D 1200mm x 1200mm Item
E 1400mm x 1400mm Item
C Heavy duty vehicular grating and/or pedestrian grating to Sumps Item

completed with hot dipped galvanised steel grating, angle frame and
all necessary fitting accessories
D 25mm Diameter non-skid aluminium rung at 300mm interval and all Item
necessary fitting accessories; to Sumps
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
BRC MESH FENCE
A BRC mesh fence with swing gates completed with hot dipped galvanised Item
mild steel frame in paint finish, structural support, motor system,
concrete footing, excavation and removal of debris off site including P.E.
calculation and endorsement and all necessary fittings accessories
ENTRANCE GATE
B Auto sliding entrance gates completed with hot dipped galvanised steel Item
with paint finishes, ironmongeries; electrical wiring and motor system,
metal support including P.E. calculation and endorsement and all
necessary fittings accessories
LANDSCAPE WORKS
C Supply and installation of the trees, shrubs, ground covers and the like Item
[Trees = 1000 x 1000 x 1000mm pit; Shrubs = 300 x 300 x 300mm] all
as specified including excavation and backfilling of pits with approved
soil mix as specified, staking, watering and mulching with 50mm
approved specified mulch and all other maintenance up to DLP or as
instructed by the Architect.
D Supply and plant good quality and approved Axonopus Compressus all Item
as specified to ground level in roll of 600mm wide x 50mm grass sods
[attached with roots] including ground preparation, top soiling * to
100mm depth, top dressing, weeding, rolling and replacement when
necessary until grass sward is established up to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
HYDRANT PUMP HOUSE

E Hydrant pump house comprising of reinforced concrete raft foundation, Item
excavation works, removal debris off site, BRC mesh, formwork, lean
concrete, well compacted hardcore, cement and sand screed to floor ;
structural steel framing and metal roof inclusing all necessary fitting
accessories
HYDRANT TANK SUPPORT

F Hydrant Tank Support comprising of reinforced concrete plinth, Item
reinforcement, formwork, lean concrete, well compacted hardcore,
including well compaction to the existing ground, excavation and
removal of debris off site
DOMESTIC TANK SUPPORT

G Domestic Tank Support comprising of reinforced concrete plinth, Item
reinforcement, formwork, lean concrete, well compacted hardcore,
including well compaction to the existing ground, excavation and
removal of debris off site
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
OTHERS
G
_____________________________________ Item
H
_____________________________________ Item
I
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 5/1 ... ...
Page 5/2 ... ...
Page 5/3 ... ...
Page 5/4 ... ...
Page 5/5 ... ...
Page 5/6 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 5 - EXTERNAL WORKS CARRIED TO

FINAL SUMMARY
1728 ONE TREE HILL

Section 6- External Road Extension
SECTION 6 - EXTERNAL ROAD EXTENSION WORKS

S$
GENERAL NOTES
A This Section is to be read in conjunction with other documents/drawings Item

in the tender documents. The price herein is deemed to include all the
requirements in the tender documents.
B This Summary of Prices is to be read in conjunction with the Item

Specification and Drawing. Allow in the Tender Price all necessary
machinery, plant, tools, scaffolding, materials, labour and all temporary
works for the proper protection and the execution of the Works.
C The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site to examine and Item
ascertain the true nature and extent of the work under this section
before tendering. Prices inserted herein will be held to include clearing
or removal of all types of materials so as to facilitate proper execution of
all works.
D The Contractor shall allow for in this tender all necessary cost in this Item
tender to provide his proposed construction sequence and the method
statement illustrating how the works shall be carried out.
E All the builders’ works including concrete plinth, forming holes, pipe Item
sleeves, etc. in connection with the Mechanical and Electrical Services
are deemed to be included.
F The Contractor has to ensure that all existing electric cables, telephone Item
cables, water pipes, sewer lines and gas pipes on site have been
properly disconnected by the Local Authorities prior to commencement
of any works. Failure to comply with this condition and thereby resulting
in damage inclusive of any consequential claims shall be borne fully by
the Contractor.
G Allow herein for making all applications, obtaining permits, liaising with Item
the relevant Authorities and all necessary attendance and pay all licence
fees, levies/charges in connection with the Works and all works carried
out by the relevant Authorities.
expenses, idling labour, plant/machinery, etc. due to any interruptions
by any late approvals and any delay in the works of the relevant
Authorities.
I Allow for complying with the provisions of Instructions to Tenderers, the Item
Conditions of Contract and its Amendments, Specification and Drawings.
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
ROAD EXTENSION
A Allow for cutting, clearing and removal of trees, plants and Item
shrubs and the like, grubbing up roots, backfilling and
compacting holes with approved earth including removal all
debris off site.
B Flexible pavement road completed with asphaltic wearing course and Item
base course, well compacted base course, sub base, sub grade, road
kerb, all as specified
C Road marking and the like in Thermoplastic paint Item
D Resurfacing of premix to the existing driveway including making good Item

the road surfaces; all to the S.O.'s satisfaction and to Local Authority's
approval
DRAINAGE
Reinforced concrete Box Culvert complete with excavation, well

E 800mm wide box culvert Item
F 1200mm wide box culvert Item
Reinforced concrete Box Drain complete with excavation, well

G 800mm wide box drain Item
H 1200mm wide box drain Item
I Allow for provision of drainage diversion with and including keeping Item
whole temporary and permanent drainage well drained and free from
debris including regular desilting as directed and make good any
damaged drainage system; all to the Architect's satisfaction and to Local
Authority's approval
SUNDRIES
J All parts of the existing finishes affected by the external road extension Item
works are to be make good and reinstate to match the existing finishes
condition.
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
OTHERS
A
_____________________________________ Item
B
_____________________________________ Item
C
_____________________________________ Item
TO COLLECTION
1728 ONE TREE HILL


S$
COLLECTION PAGE
Page 6/1 ... ...
Page 6/2 ... ...
Page 6/3 ... ...
TOTAL OF SECTION 6 - EXTERNAL ROAD EXTENSION

WORKS CARRIED TO FINAL SUMMARY
1728 ONE TREE HILL

Final Summary
Tender Documents
For
Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities on Lot 02008x
Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
Item Final Summary For $ ¢

Basic Tender 'A'
For completion within the Employer’s own set time

of Eighteen (18) months
Volume 1
1 Section 1 –Preliminaries
2 Section 2 –P.C. & Provisional Sums
3
Section 3 –Earthworks
4 Section 4 – Main Building Works
5 Section 5- External Works
6 Section 6 -External Road Extension
Volume 2 Mechanical & Electrical Works
Total For Basic Tender ‘A’

Carried To Form of Tender S$
Name in Block Letters Name in Block Letters
Address: Address:
Date: Date:

(2216\MC\B\TD) FS/1
Tender Documents
For
Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities on Lot 02008x
Mk 12 At Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)
Item Final Summary For $ ¢

Alternative Tender 'B'
For completion within the Contractor’s own time of ………………..

(…………) months for
A Total of Basic Tender 'A'
B Less Nett P.C. & Provisional Sums
... ...
C Sub-Total:
D *Add/Deduct .................... % For Completing

The Works Within the Contractor’s own time of
………………………… ( …… ) months ... ...
E Sub-Total:
F Add Nett P.C. & Provisional Sums ... ...
Total For Alternative Tender ‘B’

Carried To Form Of Tender S$
.......................................................... ..........................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................
Name in Block Letters Name in Block Letters
Date : ………………………………………………………… Date : …………………………………………………………

(2216\MC\B\TD) FS/2

Egg Farm Tender Document (Vol 1)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egg Farm Tender Document (Vol 1)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Documents

Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities

For ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd

Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers CT/1 – CT/6

Form of Tender FT/1 – FT/3

Appendix FT/A - List of major plant to be used for the FT/A/1

Articles and Conditions of Building Contract

Structural Specifications Refer to

Architectural General Specification Sectional Pages

Architectural Particular Specification

Green Mark Score Sheets 86 Pages

BIM Execution Plan 31 Pages

Layer Egg Farm -Main Contract

Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities

For ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd

List of Drawings 1 Page

Soil Investigation Report 502 Pages

Preambles for All Trades P/1 – P/26

Schedule of Rates To be advised

Schedule of Prices Pages

Section 1 – Preliminaries S1/1 – S1/58

Section 2 – P.C. & Provisional Sums S2/1 – S2/8

Section 3 - Earthworks S3/1-S3/4

Section 4 – Main Building Works

Section 5 – External Road Works S5/1-S5/7

Section 6 – External Road Extension S6/1-S1/4

Final Summary FS/1-FS/2

Mechanical & Electrical Installations Refer to Sectional

Layer Egg Farm -Main Contract

Kranji Way (Lim Chu Kang Planning Area)

ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd

Employer : ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd

Project Architect : OGP Konsult Pte Ltd

Structural Engineer : OGP Konsult Pte Ltd

M&E Engineer : ELEAD Associates Pte Ltd

Quantity Surveyor : Northcroft Lim Consultants Pte Ltd

For ISE Foods Holdings Pte Ltd

Conditions of Tendering and Instructions to Tenderers

1. Upon the payment of a tender deposit as stated in the email/letter of invitation to

(b) Form of Tender with Appendices

(c) Appendix and Amendments to Articles and Conditions of Building Contract

(d) Reference Documents

(f) Schedule of Rates

(g) Preambles for All Trades

(h) Schedule of Prices

(i) Final Summary

(j) One Set of Tender Drawings

Private and Confidential

Proposed Development of Layer Egg Farm with Ancillary Facilities

The Tender submission shall be submitted as per following requirements:

Layer Egg Farm-Main Contract Tender

ELLIPSIZ LTD on behalf of

Attn: Mr Joseph Kang

5. The Tender submission shall be submitted as per following requirements at 2nd

8. Any non-compliance with the requirements of the Tender Documents must be

Layer Egg Farm-Main Contract Tender

2) Quality Assurance (ISO9000, ISO14000)

3) Occupational Health and Safety Management System

4) WSHC bizSAFE certification

5) Safety Demerit Points (MOM) at the point of tender submission

6) Safety Management Plan

7) Site Utilization Plan

9) Earth Control Measures

10) Quality Assurance and Quality Control Management Plan